JP2020121198A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving the number of prize balls.SOLUTION: Since it is possible to adjust an excessive ball entrance to a detection sensor 1240 by a storage channel 1231, a profit to be given to a player due to the passing of balls through the detection sensor 1240 is fluctuated in a short time but can be leveled out in a long time. For a mode of the adjustment of the excessive ball entrance, for example, the adjustment may be performed so that every time an equivalent excessive ball entrance can be expected with a reference of specified number of balls that can pass through the detection sensor 1240 while an opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state. Or compared to a first excessive ball entrance generated if the open state is made at a prescribed timing, a second excessive ball entrance generated if the open state is made at another timing is set smaller, and thereby an adjustment may be performed so that the first excessive ball entrance and the second excessive ball entrance are balanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening (Patent Document 1).

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2005-181574

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the number of prize balls.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the number of prize balls.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention is provided with a game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Ball entry switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the entry slot and a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the entry slot cannot be guided to the entry slot; In a gaming machine provided with a detecting means for detecting an incoming ball, the incoming ball switching means is controlled to be switchable to the second state when a specified number of balls have passed through the incoming ball opening in a predetermined period. The switching drive means and the adjusting means configured to adjust the excess number of balls entering the ball entrance based on the specified number.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 1, the number of prize balls can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the number of prize balls in correspondence with the operation mode of the entrance switching means.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in claim 1 or 2, it is possible to improve the number of prize balls by applying a load to the game balls.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of a first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of a first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XII-XII line of FIG. 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along line XII-XII of FIG. 10. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 20B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning device. 21A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 21B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a line XXId-XXId of Drawing 21 (c). (A) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of ROM in a main control unit, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter and the big hit classification in a special symbol. And, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth in the 1st operation pattern, and (b) is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth in a 2nd operation pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XXVIII-XXVIII line of Drawing 27 (c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter and the big hit classification in a special symbol. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth in the 4th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the 1st specific prize hole in a 5th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning a prize mouth. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XXXII-XXXII line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a front cover plate. 31A to 31C are sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. 31. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st variable winning a prize device, (c) is a partial sectional view of a 1st variable winning a prize device in line XXXVc-XXXVc of Drawing 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the falling mode of the ball which reached the 1st variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter and the big hit classification in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the specific area|region in a 6th operation pattern, (b) is the timekeeping of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and a specific area in a 7th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. (A) is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the specific area|region in an 8th operation pattern, (b) is the timekeeping of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and a specific area|region in a 9th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the specific area in a 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in the fifth embodiment. It is a partial rear view of the game board. 45A and 45B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along the line XLVI-XLVI of FIG. 45. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter and the big hit classification in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth in the 11th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the 1st specific prize hole in a 12th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning a prize mouth. It is a partial front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along the line LII-LII of FIG. 51. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st variable winning a prize device. (A) is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area|region in a 13th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening and the timekeeping of a specific area in a 14th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of a first variable winning device. FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device, taken along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35A and 35B are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device, taken along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of a 1st variable winning a prize device, (b) is a sectional view of a 1st variable winning a prize device in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of Drawing 63 (a), (c) is a 1st. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in line LXIIId-LXIIId of Drawing 63 (c). 64A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 64B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in line LXIVd-LXIVd of Drawing 64 (c). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member, the opening/closing plate, the auxiliary opening/closing member, and the regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. 70A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 70B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a line LXXd-LXXd of Drawing 70 (c). 71A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 71B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a line LXXId-LXXId of Drawing 71 (c). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member, the opening/closing plate, the auxiliary opening/closing member, and the regulating member. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member, the opening/closing plate, the auxiliary opening/closing member, and the regulating member. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member, the opening/closing plate, the auxiliary opening/closing member, and the regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 10th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (d) is a diagram showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening and a state change of the movable member in the round game R. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 11th embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the LXXX-LXXX line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a front cover plate. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the protruding ribs, the opening/closing means, and the second additional winning opening, which schematically show the arrangement of the protruding ribs, the opening/closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during the notice production performed in the round before the timing production (operation production) is executed, and (b) is a timing production (operation production). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content inside. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during timing production (operation production). (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the 5th round, (b) is during timing effect (operation effect) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in timing effect (operation effect). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which notifies with the 3rd symbol display device that the round game of the 6th round is being performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of a main control apparatus, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 1st hit classification selection table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table. Is. (A) is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in a 15th operation pattern, and (b) is a 1st specific winning a prize mouth, interference in a 16th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the member and the specific area. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in a 17th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, interference in an 18th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the member and the specific area. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening, the interference member, and the specific area|region in a 19th operation pattern. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in a 20th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, interference in a 21st operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of a member and a specific field. It is a model diagram explaining the counter etc. which are provided in RAM of the main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a main controller. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of a change display data table among display data tables. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process. 7 is a flowchart showing a state command setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting process. It is a flow chart which shows main processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of big hit operation setting processing. 6 is a flowchart showing the contents of opening/closing processing. 6 is a flowchart showing the contents of ending processing. It is a flowchart showing the content of the notification process. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of winning a prize processing. 6 is a flowchart showing the content of abnormality processing. It is a flow chart which shows storage control processing. 6 is a flowchart showing the content of an upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of an upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter. It is a flow chart which showed the contents of storage valve operation processing. It is a flowchart showing a V winning process. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit related process. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing during the big hit. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of production round command setting processing for display. 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a storage state monitoring process. It is the flowchart which showed the lamp output process. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of button input supervisory/production process. It is a flow chart which shows sphere number confirmation processing. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in the 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the opening/closing board and auxiliary opening/closing member in a 22nd operation pattern, (b) showed the timekeeping change of the opening/closing board and auxiliary opening/closing member in a 23rd operation pattern. It is a figure and (c) is a figure showing a time change of an opening-and-closing plate and an auxiliary opening-and-closing member in a 24th operation pattern. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which notifies with the 3rd symbol display device that the round game of the 6th round is being performed. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a timekeeping change of an opening/closing plate, a solenoid and a distribution device in a small hit A and a timekeeping change of an opening/closing plate, a solenoid and a distribution device in a small hit B. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of a 3rd symbol display device. It is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the game state, the type of special symbol, the variation time, the hold type. (A) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the jackpot game in the fourth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the start round selection table that defines the discharge mode at the end of the start round It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the game of the production round, (d) is a schematic content of the post-production game round selection table that defines the discharge mode at the end of the post-production game round. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the electrical state of a solenoid, a detection sensor, and a specific area, and the change of the display of the 3rd symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device from the start of the production round to the start of the post-production gaming round in display example 1 in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device from the start of the production round to the start of the post-production gaming round in display example 1 in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of an attention production operation difficulty level switching table and a discrimination display switching table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device from the start of a production round to the start of a game round after production in a display example 2 in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of the basic production of a V winning round in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of a V winning round in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of a V winning round in time series. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control unit in this control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening-closing-plate operation scenario storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the opening-closing-plate operation scenario table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a main controller. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the present control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM in the present control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus after a starting process. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing. It is a flowchart showing a winning process. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of setting value selection setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a V winning process. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. It is a flow chart which shows hit related processing 2. It is the flowchart which shows the production start flag setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production change processing. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of production round indicatory feature setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of attention production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of operation judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of V display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the display switching process for halfway closing. It is a front view of the game board of 12th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a front cover plate. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the change of arrangement|positioning of the sphere which flows down the upper surface of an opening/closing plate. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of ROM in MPU of the main control apparatus in the 5th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the opening-closing-plate operation scenario storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of an opening-closing-plate operation scenario table typically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in the jackpot game which the 1st variable winning device operates with a 25th operation pattern in a time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in the jackpot game which the 1st variable winning device operates with an operation pattern similar to a 3rd operation pattern in time series. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of ROM of MPU of an audio lamp control device, (b) is a block diagram which shows the content of RAM. It is a flow chart which shows main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production change processing 3. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-round switching process. It is a flowchart showing a sub-round effect process. It is a front view of the game board of 13th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the CXCIV-CXCIV line of FIG.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 23, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape and an outer frame 11 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface that projects toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the player turns the operation handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the turning operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby a ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails and a windmill for ball guide, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first prize. It is configured by assembling a ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable winning device 1000, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. (See 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structural bodies arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is located inside the outer rail 62 similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1 ). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 made of resin connecting between the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and is bounced back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of special symbols (first symbol) is carried out by the fact that there is a winning in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, the lottery for the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol that is performed for the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as a probability variation state of the special symbol), For example, it is determined with a probability of 1/60 that the special symbol is a big hit. For convenience of explanation, a lottery for special symbols performed for entering the first inlet 64 will be referred to as "lottery for special symbol 1", and will be performed for entering the second inlet 640. The lottery of the special symbol which is referred to is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). The operation to be released is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot a”, “jackpot b”, and “jackpot c” are provided (FIG. 22). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and is configured to change the number of balls to the first variable winning device 1000.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances depends on the type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display according to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery for ordinary symbols (second symbol), it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbols are hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes easy. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily selected by lottery.

Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next regular symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

In the present embodiment, as a value added after the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state (high-probability state) is given from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, and the special symbol lottery After 100 times, the normal state is set.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probability variation state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of times the special symbol is drawn, The jackpot machine 10 is not limited to, but, for example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot a described later), after the jackpot ends and until the next jackpot. It may be possible to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol (during a change in the special symbol). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c described later), the special symbol lottery is configured to be in a time saving state until the lottery is completed 100 times.

In addition, the number of times of special symbol lottery to which the probability variation state (high probability state) of the above-mentioned special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

Further, the number of times the special symbols are drawn in the time saving state of the above-mentioned normal symbols is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol in the present embodiment (during the change of the special symbol) includes the state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) increases and the ball easily wins the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a time when the special symbol is not in the probability change, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than during the probability change of the special symbol.

Also, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during time saving) refers to a state of a game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily wins the second ball entrance 640. In addition, the normal state refers to a state of a game that is neither during a special symbol's probability change nor during normal symbol time saving (a state in which the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) are not up).

During the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, not only the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is the normal state. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the sphere easily enters the second entrance 640. That is, the lottery for special symbols is facilitated.

In addition, during the sudden change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in the case of hitting a normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened is not changed, and the normal symbol ( Only the winning probability of (second pattern) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the special symbol lottery performed along with the entry (starting winning) into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is being executed by a lighting state. By performing a variable display, as a stop symbol after the variation ends, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64 Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of balls is reserved up to four times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, The special design (first design) according to the big hit a, big hit b, big hit c) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display, and a second symbol is variably displayed by the passage of a ball through a normal entrance 67 (through gate) as a trigger. The second symbol display device 83 configured by the LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

For example, if the special symbol lottery results are "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", and "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" were added. A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is displayed. On the other hand, if it is a "big hit A" or "big hit a", then one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including all odd numbers The variable display in which the main symbols to which is added are aligned is displayed. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment, a variable display in which the main symbols having the same number are not arranged is displayed.

Next, the display (right-handed navigation) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and that prompts the player to hit the ball at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed to a certain state or the normal symbol is shortened, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting (right hitting), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the jackpot is achieved by the special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the fact that the ball has entered the second inlet port 640, the first inlet port 64 Compared to the case where the special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 1) is performed based on the fact that the ball is hit, the jackpot (maximum jackpot a) is likely to be the largest profit. Therefore, in the probability changing state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if the special symbol is changed to the probable state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player makes a right hit, so the special The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying a specific image (right-hand navigation), the player can make the probability variation state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the benefits of becoming

In the right-handed navigation, the character "Aim for the right!!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and the arrow, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to surely make the player obtain the benefit of the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be right-handed, even though it is not a period in which the player should hit the ball (right-handed) to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of. More specifically, in a normal state (a state in which the special symbol is neither the probability changing state nor the normal symbol time saving state), it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in a normal state (even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, when the player hits the ball right in the normal state, the chance of receiving the special symbol lottery decreases compared to when the player hits the ball with the left ball hitting the first entrance 64. That is, if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, it is less likely to hit the jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and urging the player to left-handedly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

When it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, the words "warning" and "left-handed game" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player notice that the player should not hit the right side (should be left). Also, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen, the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of right-handed in the normal state.

As a method for determining whether or not the ball is hitting to the right, for example, the ball enters a normal entrance 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can flow when hitting to the right. Judging by whether or not the ball is hit.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed warning image is displayed when it is detected that the ball enters the normal entrance 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state. It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (first entered) the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right The hit warning image may be displayed. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a, a signal indicating that the fraudulent operation is being performed is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraud, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraudulent activity is performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is exemplified by, for example, a case where a ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is detected even though the special game state (big hit state) is not detected.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the word "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the text "Please call the gate error clerk" is displayed at the bottom. With these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and thus can promptly request repairs or the like to the clerk in the hall or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (through gate). Is displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variable symbol of the second symbol is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is attached. It is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set so that the special symbol is changed during the probability change or the normal symbol is shortened in time as compared with the normal state in the gaming state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chances of winning the normal symbol are increased, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make a state in which the ball can easily win the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the winning probability is increased, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a and the number of times of opening are increased, or the like, to the second entrance 640. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, and the hit probability of the regular symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one normal symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board at the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of passages through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is reserved up to 4 times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and at the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Is also lit. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, and is set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). You may do it. Further, the number of normally-entered ball entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball is won in the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused mainly by turning on the first entrance switch. The control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view, a second entrance 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main is caused by the turning on of the second entrance switch. The control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 are different from each other, for example, in the case of the first prize. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second entrance 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed upon the passage of the ball to the normal entrance (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric winning combination The object 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for displaying the variation of the ordinary symbol is also short, so the variation of the ordinary symbol In the display, the symbol "○" is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, the time for which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in the case where the ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the case where the ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 in the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, the probability of being the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) that gives the maximum profit (balls) as the jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640. Is set higher than when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64.

During normal operation, the electric accessory that accompanies the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Toward the left side of the variable display device unit 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances for the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize in the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for

On the other hand, during the sudden change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second inlet port 640 is easily opened by passing the ball through the ordinary inlet port (through gate) 67. Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the second ball entrance 640, the ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”). ), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640 while passing the normal entrance 67 (through gate) to open the electric accessory 640a. Becomes

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a sudden change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and the first identification is opened in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion thereof. A winning opening (large opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot in the special symbol lottery performed due to the winning of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the jackpot is stopped. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is notified. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for the predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and a large amount of game value (game value) is added to the player as compared to the normal time (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). Based on the winning of one ball, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an open/close plate 1300 that forms an open state that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the open/close plate 1300. I have it. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the opening/closing plate 1300 upward to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the open state and the normally closed state are set. The operation is repeated.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 66 below the first inlet 64. Balls flowing down the game area, which have not won any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 1000a, 640, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device. To do.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 inputs and outputs. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detection sensor S and the rotational position detection sensor R, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. To do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 in which a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data are stored, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear surface image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. Due to the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 1000, the player makes a right hit to enter the second ball entrance 640 of the sphere flowing down to the right of the variable timer device unit 80. Instead of spheres, almost all the spheres that flow down to the downstream side are guided to the flow path forming portion.

FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a body member 1100 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a cover front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the body member 1100 from the front side, and the body members 1100 and the cover front plate. An opening/closing plate 1300 that is pivotally supported by being sandwiched between 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported by the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening/closing plate 1300, and the power transmission member thereof. A drive device 1500 that drives 1400, a regulation member 1600 that regulates the discharge of balls in cooperation with the opening/closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, and a regulation member 1600 that cover the main body member 1100 from the back side. And a rear cover 1700 that is fastened and fixed as described above.

The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 that is recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front side to the rear side. A housing portion 1120 which is housed and partially penetrated, a holding hole 1130 which is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted and inserted on the right side of the housing portion 1120 in front view, and a sphere flows down on the front surface side of the thin plate member 1110. A projecting portion 1140 projecting along the path, a discharge port 1150 for discharging a sphere from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting to the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and supporting the power transmission member 1400. It mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 that is provided in an upper portion of the discharge port 1150 so as to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 in a claw shape.

The accommodating portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated, a rectangular recess 1122 formed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and a rectangular shape thereof. A through-hole formed in a rectangular shape perpendicular to a straight line connecting the pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 that moves along the right end of the recess 1122 to the front and rear of the thin plate member 1110. 1123 and the like.

The support recess 1121 is formed to have a width slightly larger than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the front cover plate 1200. It That is, the opening/closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the front cover 1200.

The rectangular recess 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and the recessed depth thereof is slightly deeper than the plate portion 1310. This allows the plate portion 1310 to be completely housed in the rectangular recess 1122 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is tilted (closed state), and prevents the opening/closing plate 1300 from projecting to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

The protruding portion 1140 is protruded to a position where it abuts on a sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the front cover 1200. The falling ball is decelerated by contacting the protruding portion 1140. A similar protruding portion 1235 is also provided in the storage channel 1231 of the front cover plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap the protruding portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a uniform protruding height toward the back side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in a rib shape.

The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angular range in which it abuts on the rotating tip portion 1421.

The front cover plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 on the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in front view to the rear side. 1220, an accommodating portion 1230 extending in the shape of a box that is open to the rear surface side toward the rear surface side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220, and is disposed at the upper end portion of the accommodating portion 1230. And a detection sensor 1240.

The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 in front view, the left side wall portion of the housing portion 1230 in front view, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which a sphere flows vertically. The department is composed.

The housing portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and has a storage channel 1231 formed therein with a width that allows a sphere to flow down, and a storage channel 1231 that protrudes toward the back side in the middle part of the storage channel 1231. The projection 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in front view are mainly provided.

The storage channel 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross-section opening to the back side is extended while being bent in a U-shaped front shape, and the opening is blocked by the main body member 1100 to allow a sphere to pass therethrough. A flow path is formed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed of a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231.

The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12) that is an inclined surface that guides the sphere toward the back side at the lowermost end, and rolling that moves the sphere guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-back direction. The surface 1231b is mainly provided.

The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the front side (the right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 that reaches the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

The protruding portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the projecting portion 1235 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231, and decelerates the sphere by coming into contact with the sphere.

The inclined surface 1237 inclines downward toward the left as viewed from the front. As a result, the ball landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled to the left and guided to the flow path forming portion.

The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the sphere passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passing, and the winning number is counted.

The opening/closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between rolling the ball toward the detection sensor 1240 and dropping the ball downward without contacting the ball, depending on the posture, and is a horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310. And a pair of shaft portions 1320 projecting from the lateral end of the plate portion 1310 along the longitudinal direction, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. The load receiving part 1330 provided is mainly provided.

The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which a ball rolls in an ascending posture (open state), and the length in the lateral direction is covered in the ascending posture (open state) with the latitudinal direction along the front-rear direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end portion in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered in an arc shape in cross section at an upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised posture (open state).

The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length such that up to five spheres can be placed side by side.

The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion 1331 extending on the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmission portion 1332 extending on the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the intervening transmission portion. 1332 mainly includes an engaging portion 1333 projecting from the rear side to the right side in the rear view (on the side where the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

The engagement portion 1333 is extended to a position where it interferes with the operation trajectory of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a that is chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. When contacting the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a, not the corners, contacts the power transmission member 1400. Therefore, concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. ..

The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disc-shaped main body 1410 and an extending portion 1420 extending from the main body 1410 in the axial radial direction.

The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a projecting pin 1412 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole 1411.

The projecting pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and as the tip member 1520 moves linearly by switching the excitation of the drive device 1500, the projecting pin 1412 is displaced and power is transmitted. The member 1400 rotates.

The extending portion 1420 has a rotating tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, and a pushing portion 1422 protruding from the rotating tip portion 1421 to the front side. Equipped with.

The drive device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves a movable member by switching excitation, and a front end member 1520 having an H shape in a front view (a shape having concave portions on the upper and lower sides) disposed at the distal end of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Mainly.

The upper end of the tip member 1520 has a shape capable of accommodating the projecting pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, the concave portion is formed in a shape that allows the protruding pin 1412 to be housed inside while the power transmission member 1400 is rotating (see FIG. 20 ).

The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 that is axially supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extending portion 1620 that extends in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. The surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extended portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 which is formed at a surface position and is thicker than the extended portion 1620.

The extended portion 1620 is arranged on the movement locus of the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmission portion 1332 when the opening/closing plate is in the raised posture (open state).

The ball receiving portion 1630 overlaps with the discharge port 1150 in a tilted posture (a posture in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is arranged in a lower position, a storage state) (a ball discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150). It is formed so that it is narrowed to the extent that it is not formed.

The restriction member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain the rising posture (the posture in which the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is located at the upper position, the discharging state).

The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710 which is a through hole through which the balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 pass. The balls discharged from the discharge port 1710 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line IX-IX of FIG. 8 and 9, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is housed in the rectangular recess 1122, thereby covering the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the cover member 1110. The opening/closing plate 1300 can be along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without narrowing the gap between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 1200 are juxtaposed at an interval that allows balls to pass therethrough, in the state shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 are By guiding the sphere in between, the sphere can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry prevention portion 1331 of the load receiving portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 so that the front surface side of the main body member 1100 is covered. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and the irregular winning (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball hit by a nail or the like is blown laterally and is detected by the detection sensor 1240). 1240) can be prevented.

Although the details will be described later, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, so that the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

The open state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XI-XI of FIG. 10. 10 and 11, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. By doing so, the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover 1200 is prevented from falling.

The sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 is detected from the right end thereof. To enter the storage channel 1231.

In the opened state of the opening/closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the front cover plate 1200. Therefore, compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that it comes in contact with the front cover plate 1200, the required material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening/closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

Further, by reducing the diameter of the movement path of the tip end of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the lateral direction, it is easy to avoid interference between the opening/closing plate 1300 and a ball passing in front of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

Here, as will be described later in detail, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state, so that the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 Stored in. Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231.

As shown in FIG. 10, the storage channel 1231 of the present embodiment is formed with a length capable of storing spheres with a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) as the upper limit. When ten spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere stops at the position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Therefore, the tenth ball serves as a plug and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere tries to pass the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, so that the balls remaining on the opening/closing plate 1300 flow down to below the opening/closing plate 1300. Then, with the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state, so that the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the spheres are not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere is stopped at a position where the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. To do.

When the 10th sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but the 10th sphere is stored while receiving the load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331 in the middle of the switching. It is pushed into the inside of the passage 1231 (see FIG. 21(b)). That is, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stays in a state of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and in the middle of switching the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state, the tenth ball prevention unit 1331 is the tenth ball. Since the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed while abutting (rubbing) with the detection ball 1240, the timing at which the tenth ball passes the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entrance prevention unit 1331 operates are deviated from each other. It is possible to prevent the moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened from occurring and prevent the eleventh ball from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is not necessary to set the period from the detection of the specified number of balls by the detection sensor 1240 until the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and it can be arbitrarily set. For example, the opening/closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening/closing operation may be started 1 second after the detection. In the present embodiment, wait until the tenth sphere comes into contact with the ninth sphere (after the center of the sphere is placed on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the entry prevention unit 1331). In order to operate the opening/closing plate 1300, the opening/closing plate 1300 is controlled to open/close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Due to the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening/closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent (delay) the ball from entering the ball only for the 11th ball. That is, the first to tenth balls can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state as compared with the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole ball.

For example, in the case of a structure in which a ball that has passed through the detection sensor 1240 is decelerated once at the passing position to delay the winning of the succeeding ball, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, but the first ball Since each of the 10th to 10th balls slows down even when rolling partially on the rolling surface 1311, the time until the 10th ball passes the detection sensor 1240. There was a problem that the game became longer and the game was delayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration of decelerating the first to tenth balls is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is not entered into the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, the first to tenth balls are Even if spheres flow down in a row, the detection sensor 1240 can be passed through at the same running speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

Further, even if most of the period in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state has elapsed due to repairs such as ball clogging, and the game is started at the end of the period, no ball will enter the detection sensor 1240. Since it does not slow down the meaning, more balls can be entered.

In addition, regardless of how fast the 11th ball flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed at which the opening/closing plate 1300 can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the tilting operation starts), regardless of the speed. It is possible to physically prevent the 11th ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th ball.

The arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XII-XII of FIG. Note that, in FIG. 12, spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated.

Here, a mechanism in which the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 have the same arrangement every time will be described. First, the sphere P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided to the rearwardly inclined guide surface 1231a at the lowermost portion of the storage channel 1231 and arranged at a position where it abuts against the front surface of the regulating member 1600. It

The sphere P1 is weighted by the sphere P2 entering the sphere subsequently reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom in arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side (right side in FIG. 12) of the sphere P1 in front view. That is, depending on how the pachinko machine 10 is tilted in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is placed, the pachinko machine 10 may be closer to the front cover plate 1200 side or may be closer to the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, since the projecting portion 1140 is arranged at the position where the projecting tip of the projecting portion 1140 contacts the ball P2, the ball P2 is in contact with the ball P1. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

The sphere P2 is weighted when the sphere P3 that has subsequently entered reaches a position where the sphere P3 comes into contact with the sphere P2. Here, in the present embodiment, the protruding portion 1235 arranged on the front cover plate 1200 is located on the right side of the sphere P2 and the protruding portion 1235 regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction. The ball P3 is disposed between the positions P and P and is not in contact with the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover 1200 (a position for keeping a small gap with the ball P2).

Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is arranged on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side of FIG. 12). ) Will come into contact. Therefore, the load of the ball P3 brings the ball P2 closer to the front side (lower side in FIG. 12). This causes the ball P2 to settle in the arrangement shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the sphere P3 is loaded by the sphere P4, which is subsequently entered, under substantially the same conditions as the sphere P2 being loaded by the sphere P3 (except that the front-back direction is reversed), so that the sphere P3 Settles in the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

In other words, the arrangement of the nth ball entering the storage channel 1231 is fixed to a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n+1)th ball entering the storage channel 1231. Further, in the present embodiment, instead of fixing the arrangement of the spheres by narrowing the storage channel 1231, while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projection 1140, This is realized by disposing 1235. As a result, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the sphere is stored in a fixed arrangement every time the action of storing the sphere in the storage flow channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to unify the number of storages each time.

The discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. 10. In FIG. 13(a), the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13(b), the ball P2 is ejected and the ball P3 is the position of the ball P2 in FIG. The state of being arranged at is shown.

As will be described later, when the solenoid 1510 is de-excited and the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231. When ejecting the ball. The sphere arranged at the lowermost end (sphere P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following sphere (sphere P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are ejected in sequence.

Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231 (the channel extending in the left-right direction) with respect to the horizontal plane, the flow velocity of the ball P1 Since the flow velocity of the ball P2 is higher than that of the ball P2, a gap is formed between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load applied from the ball P2 to the ball P1 at the time of discharging the ball P1 can be minimized, the speed at the time of discharging the ball P1 can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P1. Can be converted.

After the sphere P1 is discharged, the following spheres P2, P3, P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the slope of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the sphere P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the spheres P3 and P4 come into contact with the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 during the flow-down process (see FIG. 13A). By this abutment, the spheres P3 and P4 are redirected to the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-rear direction component, pass through the positions of the spheres P2 and P3 that are respectively guided, and decelerate.

In other words, the spheres P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by contacting the protruding portions 1140 and 1235, and the spheres previously stored are retained. It is relocated to the position where it was, and it slows down.

As a result, a gap is created between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load given from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 when the sphere P2 is discharged can be minimized. , The speed at the time of discharging the ball P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P2.

That is, since the subsequent spheres flow down the storage channel 1231 for a longer distance, the more the number of stored spheres changes, the more the sphere accelerates due to gravity, and the discharge mode of the sphere P2 (speed at the time of discharge, The discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like may change, but the change in the discharge mode is caused by the action of the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 described above (the ball discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and the following). The effect of eliminating the load due to gravity is provided by forming a gap between the ball and the ball.

After that, the succeeding spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B, whereby the spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. As described above, the discharged balls are discharged without receiving the weight of the succeeding balls by creating a gap between the balls that are discharged by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the succeeding balls. As a result, it is possible to make the discharge mode of the balls (velocity at the time of discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the balls (speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform. In the present embodiment, it takes about 0.2 seconds for one ball to be discharged. Therefore, by maintaining the restriction member 1600 in the discharged state for 2 seconds or more, it is possible to discharge all the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231.

14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. FIG. 10 is a sectional view of 1000. 14 to 16, the open/close plate 1300 is shown in the closed state, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is located above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300. Spaced apart.

Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the upper side and is separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulation member 1600 does not receive a load from the intervening transmission portion 1332, and the regulation member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). The discharged state is maintained by the biasing force.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 overhangs in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or smaller than the projected area of the ball. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the sphere from passing the detection sensor 1240.

17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device taken along line XIX-XIX of FIG. FIG. 10 is a sectional view of 1000. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300 is shown, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

The intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates, and in this state, the extending portion 1620 of the regulating member 1600 receives a load from the intervening transmission portion 1332, and the posture of the regulating member 1600 is increased. Is switched to a tilted posture (the regulation member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, the regulation member 1600 is given a load accompanying the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and a biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown). In the present embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring is applied. The structure is such that the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the open/close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state can be suppressed while maintaining a large value. The large biasing force of the torsion spring leads to the effect that the regulating member 1600 can be immediately switched to the discharge state, and thereby the balls can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 quickly. The adopted structure will be described below.

In the present embodiment, the engagement portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. When the power transmission member 1400 is switched to, the power transmission member 1400 is pushed to the outside of the operation locus E1 along the rotation axis direction. The motion locus E1 is illustrated as the outer shape of the movement locus of the portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening/closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400, but the surface forming the rotation direction. Is applied in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) for urging the regulating member 1600 is directed in the direction of pushing back the opening/closing plate 1300 toward the closed state, but this urging force is the power no matter how large the urging force is. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

Thus, once the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening/closing plate 1300 from changing due to the load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the opening/closing plate 1300 at the maximum value.

That is, the applied voltage was reduced after exciting the solenoid 1510 so that a driving force enough to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of the operation. Even in this case, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state without being affected by the load.

As the fluctuating load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulation member 1600, the load given by the weight of the sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, since the opening/closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which the sphere lands on the rolling surface 1311, when the sphere lands, the load due to the weight of the sphere is received, and the number of the sphere changes frequently. A varying load is applied to 1300. Further, for example, since a load is applied to the regulation member 1600 from a sphere stored in the storage flow channel 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end portion of the storage flow channel 1231, the presence or absence of the sphere And gives a fluctuating load.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked with each other, the regulating member 1600 cannot be discharged while the opening/closing plate 1300 is kept open. Therefore, even if the open/close plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it is physically determined that more spheres (10 or more spheres in this embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. It can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the open/close plate 1300 from being fraudulently maintained in the open state and fraudulently increasing the number of prize balls to be acquired.

20 and 21, the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 is illustrated in chronological order. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20A. 20(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21(b) is of FIG. 21(a). 21C is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXIb-XXIb, FIG. 21C is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21D is XXId of FIG. 21C. It is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 on the line XXId.

20 and 21, in order to facilitate understanding, only the opening/closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 maintain the assembled state (see FIG. 5). In addition to the illustration of other components, the manner in which the opening/closing plate 1300 changes its state from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in time series.

That is, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the state (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 is shown. 20(c), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). 21(c) and FIG. 21(d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. The state in which 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 21B, the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as the illustration is an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening/closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the sphere.

From the state shown in FIG. 20A to the state shown in FIG. 20C, the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening/closing plate 1300 maintains the same posture. Note that, in FIG. 20C, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 are in contact with each other.

As a result, before the opening/closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state, the power transmission member 1400 can be urged, so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is rotated at the same time when the power transmission member 1400 starts rotating. Then, the driving force required at the start of rotation (at the time of initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 20(c) to the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharged state, while the opening/closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and the closed state and the open state. An intermediate state between them is set (see FIG. 21B).

In the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the sphere flows down to the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 (right side of FIG. 21B) due to the plate portion 1310 projecting to the front side, The rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 can receive the ball. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction in which the rolling surface 1311 is pushed down (clockwise in FIG. 21B), but the tip member 1520 moves rightward in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21A) to transmit power. Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing plate 1300 from rotating due to the weight of the ball.

Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to prevent the balls from passing downward on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 while allowing the balls to be discharged from the discharge port 1150. ..

As a result, the problem of maintaining the restriction member 1600 in the discharged state during the time required to discharge the spheres from the storage channel 1231 and the problem of shortening the closed state of the open/close plate 1300 that contradicts it (shortening the interval). In the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the plate portion 1310 is projected to an intermediate position while the ball is continuously discharged, and the ball is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the front cover plate 1200. , Can be achieved together.

At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21( b ), the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a posture that prevents the ball from passing downward while preventing the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, since the rolling surface 1311 is located below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the rolling surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ball riding on the vehicle from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the balls from passing the detection sensor 1240 when the restriction member 1600 is in the discharged state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the winning number of the balls by the first variable winning device 1000. ..

As shown in FIG. 21D, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, and at the same time, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked with each other by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used also as the driving force of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

20 and 21, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state has been described, but when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is understood by going back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

When the open state is switched to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21(d) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21(b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operation direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

That is, since the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated, it is impossible to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state after the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. You can Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the irregular winning of the ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts to be discharged.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 if the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball abuts on the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. In the present embodiment, that can be made impossible.

That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the open/close plate 1300 is being changed from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward, so that the rolling surface 1311 is not moved. When the balls come into contact with each other, a load that supports the opening/closing plate 1300 acting in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the balls does not occur. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 moves downward due to the weight of the ball, so that the ball cannot bounce to the detection sensor 1240. As a result, it is possible to prevent irregular winning.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 22C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 22A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first per random number table 202a, the first per type selection table 202b, and the second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is updated regularly (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first per random number counter obtained based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22B) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the big hit type. , And the special symbol is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, if the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

When it becomes the big hit A, a big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

The jackpot B is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 49” (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

When the big hit B is reached, an eight-round big hit game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 1200 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit C is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot C is reached, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 600 prize balls.

As described above, if the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is a big hit, in any case, the first variable winning device 1000 has the first operation pattern. Works with. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. The larger the number of rounds, the larger the number of prize balls to be paid out and the longer the jackpot game.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), you can win the jackpot of 15 rounds with a probability of 20%, and the jackpot of 4 rounds with a probability of 50%. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is finished in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, and therefore, the launch of a ball for the purpose of obtaining the subsequent jackpot can be started early.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

When it becomes the big hit a, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000, as in the case of the big hit A. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 89”, the big hit b is associated and defined (see 202b5 of FIG. 22B).

When it becomes the big hit b, a big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the prize balls to be paid out to the player are inevitably less than 2250 (1200 in this embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds that for the jackpot a.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit c is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

When the big hit c is reached, a 15-round big hit game is executed in a third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the prize balls to be paid out to the player are inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in the present embodiment), and further, the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of the jackpot a, and the prize to be paid out for each round. The time required to play a ball or jackpot varies.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to the difference in this operation pattern, the number of big hit rounds can be made invariable, while the number of payouts can be made different and the time required for the big hit game can be changed. In the present embodiment, when the payout number is small (big hit b and big hit c), the time required for the big hit game can be extended as compared to the case where the payout number is large (big hit a). That is, when a big hit (big hit b and big hit c) with a small number of payouts is obtained, the timing of hitting a ball aiming at the next big hit is delayed as compared with the case of the big hit a.

Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency It is possible to make a difference in the included number of payouts).

Thereby, in the breakdown of the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the jackpot (jackpot a) that can receive a large amount of time efficiently, and the payout inefficiently It is possible to provide a small number of jackpots (b jackpot b, jackpot c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the jackpot a is won. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts in the case of playing a game for a predetermined period of time while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a (the maximum value of the total number of acquired balls and the minimum value of the total number of acquired balls) It is possible to configure a gaming machine capable of increasing the (difference).

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second×2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it becomes easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol can be transitioned to the probability changing state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and when it is a big hit, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit a (maximum pitching big hit). As a result, the player can easily obtain a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 22(c)) is a data table in which the normal symbol hit determination value is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, "5-28" is defined as the judgment value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 of FIG. 22(c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is stipulated as the judgment value for winning the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4, which is acquired based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a hit. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23(b) is the time counting of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change, and Drawing 23 (c) is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth 1000a in a 3rd operation pattern.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). The drive is controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

The first interval time between rounds Int1 is set as a time during which the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged globally. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 and the spheres are discharged at intervals of approximately 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of stored spheres. To be done. Therefore, in order to eject 10 balls, it takes 2 seconds to adjust.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

In the first operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the first interval time Int1 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls do not remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round. Therefore, since the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning port 1000a even after the second round, the maximum length of the first operating time T1 of each round. The round game R can be ended without waiting for 30 seconds. Therefore, the round game R can be rapidly advanced.

After that, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum of the fifteenth round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open/close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drive-controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). The drive is controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

The inter-round second interval time Int2 is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 and the spheres are discharged at intervals of approximately 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of stored spheres. To be done. Therefore, the number of spheres that can be ejected in one second is five. For example, when ten spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the spheres are ejected at the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, five spheres still remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

In the second operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the second interval time Int2 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state may occur in which a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning port 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

Thereafter, similarly, the third round to the 15th round of the round game R are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts of the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game are compared. The ball can be fired at the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds.

First, in the case of playing the jackpot game with the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. If the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( =OP(10s)+(T1(6s)+Int1(2s))×15R+ED(11s)). Further, the payout number is 2250 (=15×10C×15R).

On the other hand, when the big hit game is performed in the second operation pattern, 10 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only 5 balls can be won in the second round and thereafter. The time that elapses from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (=OP(10s)+(T1(6s)+Int2(1s))+(T1(30s)+Int2(1s))×13R+T1(30s)+Int1( 2s)+ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 1200 (=(10C×1R+5C×14R)×15) because only 5 balls can be won in the round game R after the second round.

Therefore, when playing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern, it takes three times or more the time as in the case of playing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern, but the payout pitch is about half, and the time efficiency of the exit ball acquisition is high. Becomes dramatically worse.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when playing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rarity value of the big hit A and the big hit a, improve the attention to the big hit type notified for each big hit, and improve the interest in the big hit game.

In addition, although the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, it is not limited to this and can be set to various numerical values and can be changed in each round.

For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, since only two spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, a sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. When 10 are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, since only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, the payout number is also small (30).

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. When the individual balls are stored, the round game R is started in a state where the three balls remain. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, 7 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) can be paid out.

Further, the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds can be set to 2.0 seconds (the above time). In this case, there are no spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the immediately subsequent round game R, and 10 spheres can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. You can hope to shorten the progress time of the ball and round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). The drive is controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

By discharging the balls of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, a state in which the balls do not remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the second round is formed. (In the present embodiment, 10 pachinko balls) can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls can be paid out correspondingly, and the first operation time T1 of each round can be set. The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to receive the payout of prize balls in the same manner as in the first operation pattern while rapidly advancing the round game R.

Thereafter, similarly, the third round to the tenth round of the round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the round game R of the tenth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the 11th round game R is started.

In the eleventh round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the 11th round game R, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the 11th round game R is completed.

Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the 12th to 15th rounds is repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

By discharging the balls during the second interval time Int2 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R after the eleventh round. Therefore, after the eleventh round, there may occur a state in which a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning port 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

Also, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is smaller than that by the tenth round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than the big hit in the first operation pattern (1875=(10C×10R+5C×5R)×15), and the degree of payout in the big hit game (number or speed etc.) , It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on how many rounds the round game is being played.

In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the final round has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be small at the beginning, but the number of payouts may increase toward the final stage, or the number of payouts may peak in the middle round.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drive-controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout in the jackpot game (number or speed, etc.) is changed depending on how many rounds the round game R is to be performed, so that the jackpot game is moderated and the player's interest is improved. Can be made.

In addition, when the big hit game is performed with the third operation pattern, there is no change from the first operation pattern until the round game R of the tenth round, so that the player pays out according to the first operation pattern. You can play jackpot with the expectation that you can get the number.

In addition, the inter-round second interval time Int2 set to 1 second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary numerical value in association with each round for each jackpot type. For example, in one jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to be all 1.5 seconds, and in another jackpot type, the second interval time between rounds of the third operation pattern is set. Settings such as setting the interval time Int2 to be 0.5 seconds in odd rounds and 1.0 seconds in even rounds can be performed in advance.

That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games having different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, in the eleventh round and thereafter, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the jackpot game is over, and attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, the change in the degree of payout may be associated with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when playing a jackpot game in the third operation pattern, the running character's figure is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the stamina of that character remains (the first round) is displayed. The characters will run well, and many prize balls will be paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina disappears (in the final round), the displayed character will have difficulty running and will walk, and in conjunction with that, the prize balls will be less paid out.

In this way, by making the degree of payout of prize balls correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible for the player to easily empathize with the liquid crystal effect and improve the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

In addition, by performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced with the maximum value of the first operation time T1 as a reference, so that the jackpot game is predetermined. It is possible to proceed over the production time. In other words, for example, when the winning of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a is performed at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of the moving image that is loop-reproduced over a predetermined effect time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the viewer can fully view the effect in the jackpot.

The effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a cheering message from a character (such as "do your best") is displayed, the longer the jackpot game time, the easier it is to display a cheering message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather gladly) without stressing the player.

On the other hand, the display may be such that the player is stressed. For example, a case where a running character is displayed during a jackpot game and the character is displayed to take a break in the break area in the inter-round interval will be described. In the first operation pattern, the interval between rounds is set every time a specified number of balls are won, so that the character can complete the race without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the eleventh round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the specified number of prizes cannot be achieved and the interval between rounds is not reached unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited for. Therefore, the production of accumulated fatigue can be performed without deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is short, It is possible to perform the production that there is no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize a tired character and to give stress to the player, which can increase the player's aspiration to recover in the next big hit.

Further, in the case of performing the same display, it may be an effect that the character rehydrates at the timing of winning. In this case, while water can be sufficiently replenished in the first operation pattern, the number of times water is replenished (the number of winnings) is the first after the eleventh round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern. The amount of water that can be replenished is insufficient and the character is getting tired more and more compared to the sweat that comes out of the character, as the amount of water decreases and the period during which the character runs (the period of jackpot games) becomes longer compared to the operation pattern. It is possible to perform an effect that does not shift from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). This makes it possible to correlate the appearance of the character with the profit (payout balls including time efficiency) that the player can obtain, and what is the jackpot that the player has won (whether it is a medium hit or not) , Whether it is a jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily grasped by the player through the production of the entire jackpot game.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that can be stored inside the first variable winning a prize device 1000 is fixed has been described, but the first variable winning a prize device 2000 according to the second embodiment has spheres that can be stored inside. It is configured so that the number of can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In addition, in FIG. 24, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the arrangement of the spheres stored in the second storage channel 2251 when the sphere enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a are shown by hidden lines.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a driving device 1500 similar to those of the first embodiment, and a main body member slightly different from that of the first embodiment. 2100, a front cover plate 2200, a restricting member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and a second variable winning device 2800 that is new in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable winning device 2800 is provided with a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout in a big hit game passes.

The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds have passed). The operation of releasing the ball is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until the player wins or until 10 balls are won. Although details will be described later, the opening operation can be performed in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, and thus a larger amount of winning balls than normal is paid out.

The main body member 2100 is added to the configuration (the thin plate member 1110, the housing portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170) included in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole formed in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is also a through hole formed in the thin plate member 1110 and into which the second detection sensor 2255 can be inserted. A pair of wall portions arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and extending linearly in the left-right direction, and a pair of drive guide ribs 2183 extending along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110. Mainly provided are a transmission guide rib 2184 having wall portions arranged in parallel and extending in a straight line in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 2185 pivotally supporting a transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800.

The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 provided on the front cover plate 2200 is inserted.

The ribs 2183 and 2184 are ribs that guide the sliding operation of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

The front covering plate 2200 is connected to the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) included in the front covering plate 1200 of the first embodiment. The second storage portion 2250 is provided.

The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back surface side of the thin plate formed in a plane position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has a terminal end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. The storage channel 2251 and the second detection disposed in the second storage channel 2251 in a posture with an opening along the extension direction of the second storage channel 2251 near the upper end of the second storage channel 2251. The sensor 2255 and the front plate of the second housing portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 are closed at the left side portion of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in a front view, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. And a slanted surface 2257.

The number of stored spheres of the second storage passage 2251 is the number of stored spheres when the discharge port 1150 is closed and the spheres are stored when the spheres are stored inside the second storage portion 2250 after passing through the second detection sensor 2255. It is configured to have a maximum of 14.

The 2nd detection sensor 2255 is a detection device which has the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth 2255a and produces the same operation as detection sensor 1240. That is, when the sphere enters the accommodation unit 1230 by switching the opening/closing plate 1300, the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere, and by switching the second variable winning a prize device 2800, the sphere enters the accommodation unit 2250. When entering the ball 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects the ball.

The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and have not entered the second storage flow channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are directed to the flow channel forming portion on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. It Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player opens one of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open. When in a state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by performing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an inexperienced player can easily play the game.

The second detection sensor 2255 is arranged inside the second storage flow channel 2251 with a margin to arrange one sphere on the upstream side. Therefore, a plurality of spheres continuously flow into the second storage flow channel 2251 at the closing timing of the slide plate 2840 (the timing when the remaining one sphere passes the second detection sensor 2255 to reach a specified number). The structure is such that a specified number or more of balls can enter.

The restricting member 2600 has a structure (the shaft portion 1610, the extending portion 1620, and the ball receiving portion 1630) included in the restricting member 1600 of the first embodiment, and further, the shaft portion 1610 is further extended to the left, and the extending portion 1620 is provided. The second extending portion 2640 is formed so as to be bilaterally symmetrical to the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction.

The second extending portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as described later. Due to the formation of the second extended portion 2640, the restriction member 2600 allows the second variable winning a prize device 2800 or the opening/closing plate 1300 to be used regardless of whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs the switching operation or the opening/closing plate 1300 performs the switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

The second variable winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and an abdomen with one end supported by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by a shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and extended from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100, and a tip. A rod-shaped intervening rod portion 2850, one end of which is fixed to the member 2820 and slidably arranged inside the drive guide rib 2183, and one end of which is disposed at a position where it can contact the intervening rod portion 2850. A transmission rod portion 2860 that extends along the inner side of 2184 and has the other end disposed at a position where it can contact the second extended portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is mainly provided.

The intervening rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide ribs 2183 while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured to be closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer (the distance between the main guide member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 is narrowed). Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184 while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to be closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer (the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 is narrowed). Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The surfaces of the ends of the interposing rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. As a result, the force can be smoothly transmitted from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is configured with an arc-shaped cross section in which the facing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 is curved, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharging state. The biasing force of the biasing torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the facing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained in the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the ball cannot enter the both of the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for bringing the ball into the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

27A to 27C, the operations of the restriction member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. 27A to 27C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. 27(a) to 27(c), in order to facilitate understanding, a configuration unnecessary for the description is omitted, and the slide plate 2840 changes its state from the closed state to the open state. How to do is illustrated in time series.

In FIG. 27A, the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, and the tip member 2820 is arranged at the farthest position from the solenoid 2810, but in FIG. 27B, it is immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the tip member 2820 is arranged in the middle position of the movement range is arranged in the state in which the tip member 2820 is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). The respective states are shown. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. 27C, the slide plate 2840 is , An open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

As shown in FIG. 27A, when the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, the regulation member 2600 is in the ejected state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restriction member 2600 from being stored due to the action of the second variable winning device 2800 when the solenoid 2810 is not excited. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, the control mode that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains non-excitation) (for example, the control mode of the first embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

Further, when the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the sphere can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG. 27(a).

As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 to start displacement via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod portion 2860 to start displacement via the intervening rod portion 2850. To do. Here, in the present embodiment, since the contacting portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are slightly spaced apart in the state of FIG. The operation of the rod portion 2860 is started at substantially the same time.

When the transmission rod portion 2860 is displaced downward by being pushed by the end portion of the interposing rod portion 2850, the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulation member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and is in a state in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

As shown in FIG. 27C, when the tip member 2830 has moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down by the intervening rod portion 2850 to the end position, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27C, the intervening rod portion 2850 slides so that the inclined surface faces the transmission rod portion 2860 and the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod portion 2860. The load applied toward 2850 can flow in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of intervening rod portion 2850.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposition rod portion 2850 from changing along the moving direction of the interposition rod portion 2850 due to the change in the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulation member 2600. From this, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulation member 2600 from varying, and therefore, the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840, which changes state due to the displacement of the tip member 2820, in the open state. It is possible to prevent the driving force of the motor from changing. As a result, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860, and the state of the regulating member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810. As a result, fine adjustment of the state change timing of the restriction member 2600 is possible, and it is possible to suppress deviation between the actual discharge number and the control value of the discharge number designated for each interval time between rounds in the jackpot game. The number of discharged pieces can be stabilized.

FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent line of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the facing surface 2641 of the regulation member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) that biases the regulating member 2600 toward the disposition in the discharged state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) to the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the regulation by the interposition rod portion 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is generated. Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol in the present embodiment.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each big hit. It is defined in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

In addition, the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), Since it is the same as the one described in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. In the following, in the present embodiment, the case where the special symbol 2 is drawn by a lottery (lottery based on the entrance into the second entrance 640) explain.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with the jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

When the big hit d is reached, a 15-round big hit game is executed in a fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive a payout amount of about 2250 prize balls plus a limited amount of increase.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 99”, the big hit e is associated and defined (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

When it becomes the big hit e, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed by the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is 2250 prize balls plus a limited amount of increase, but the difficulty level of increasing the number of payouts is greater than that of the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the payout number is increased, the time required for the big hit game is configured to greatly exceed the case of the big hit d.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 is drawn in the lottery (the lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the jackpot type. Due to the difference in the operation pattern, the number of big hit rounds can be made invariable, while the number of payouts can be made different, and the time required for the big hit game can be changed.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the 1st to 7th rounds). When a predetermined number of balls or more are put into the first variable winning device 2000, an extra payout amount is deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (round game R of the eighth round) and the progress of the eighth round is advanced. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in a round game R after a specific round game R, the player can obtain the balls of the increased amount paid out by inserting a predetermined number or more of balls into the first variable winning device 2000 without being deducted. Is configured as follows.

In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit as the profit including the time efficiency is to hold the specified number of prizes up to the eighth round, and to round game R after the ninth round. The aim is to increase the number of payouts with the aim of winning more than the specified number. Therefore, depending on which round of the round game R, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put a predetermined number or more of balls in the first variable winning device 2000, and the player's attention to the jackpot game. Can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30(b) is a view showing the fifth operating pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1 specific winning opening 1000a and the 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). Thus, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means holds the open/close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the second identification. The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

The first interval time between rounds Int1 is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150, as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passage of the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (eg, 11 or 12) in each round game R can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, the number of balls exceeding 10 in each round game R has won the second specific winning port 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the number of balls that has exceeded the number is left in the storage channel 1231.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of pools when the ball is inserted from the side of the second storage channel 2251 is 14, so in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of prizes exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. It is limited to 4 through the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to limit the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that is equal to or more than the specified number and that can be acquired by the player who performs the big hit d jackpot to 60 (=15×4C). As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to differences in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

Similarly thereafter, the third round to the fifteenth round of the round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between the round games R being repeated, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the solenoid 2810 is displaced to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 2810 drive-controls the timer means to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). Thus, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the second identification. The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

The first interval time between rounds Int1 is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150, as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passage of the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (eg, 11 or 12) in each round game R can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, the number of balls exceeding 10 in each round game R has won the second specific winning port 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the number of balls that has exceeded the number is left in the storage channel 1231.

Thereafter, similarly, the third round to the seventh round of the round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the round game R of the seventh round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. After the passage of, the eighth round game R is started.

In the eighth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the eighth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state, and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eighth round game R is completed.

Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, if the number of balls exceeding the specified number has passed through the second specific winning opening 2255a, at the start of the round game R of the eighth round, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is reached. Since the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231, in the round game R of the eighth round, only the winning number of the prescribed number is subtracted from the remaining number (the number exceeding the prescribed number in the seventh round) Therefore, the payout of prize balls including the eighth round is made uniform to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the eighth round. In addition, since it is not possible to win a specified number of pachinko balls in the 8th round game R, after waiting for 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1, the next round It will move to the game.

Therefore, the player loses the feeling that the extra prize balls that were paid out up to the 7th round are gone, and the time loss that the round game R of the 8th round is prolonged longer than necessary. Will be received. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to encourage the player to carefully play the game so as not to win the balls exceeding the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning of the balls exceeding the specified number, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

In the seventh round, if there is no winning over the specified number of balls, the specified number of balls can be passed through one specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the specified number of balls will be paid out. It is possible to complete the eighth round game R without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, the specified number of prize balls can be paid out while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot e, it is in the interest of the player to intentionally suppress the winning exceeding the specified number until the seventh round. Therefore, the attention of the player in the game up to the seventh round can be kept high.

When the jackpot game R in the eighth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After the lapse of time Int1, the ninth round game R is started. It should be noted that at the start of the ninth round game R, it is possible to make a state in which no sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

In the ninth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is controlled to drive the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the ninth round of the round game R, The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the ninth round game R is completed.

Thereafter, similarly, the 10th to 15th round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds interposed between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drive-controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

In the round game R after the ninth round, since the opening/closing plate 1300 does not open and close, the prize balls paid out by the balls winning the second specific winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the ninth round are , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

Therefore, when performing the jackpot game of jackpot e, the jackpot game R is controlled so as not to exceed the specified number in the jackpot game R until the seventh round, and is defined in the jackpot game R after the ninth round. Aiming to win over the second specific winning opening 2255a in excess of the number is a gaming method that allows the player to obtain the largest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

That is, in the round game R of each round, by inserting more than the specified number of balls into the second specific winning port 2255a, it is possible to cause the player to make a profit and to suffer the damage. As a result, different playability can be given to each round of the big hit game, and the attention of the player who performs the big hit game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being played aimlessly). ..

Further, according to this operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the payout of the additional prize ball by substantially winning the specified number of balls in the second specific winning port 2255a is actually performed after the ninth round. Can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to the difference in the game mode (the timing of launching, the interval between launches, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the payout balls from greatly changing. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the balls that reach the flow path forming portion when the open/close plate 1300 is in the closed state and flow down to the downstream of the open/close plate 1300 in the open state fall as they are. The first variable winning device 3000 in 1 is configured such that when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the falling of the balls is delayed and some of the balls can be won in the first specific winning port 1000a. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 31, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the front plate 3200.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a restricting member 1600, and a rear cover 1700, which are the same as those in the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a front cover plate 3200, which are slightly different from those of the first embodiment, are provided. Note that FIG. 32 illustrates the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300.

The main body member 3100 is added to the configuration (the thin plate member 1110, the housing portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170) included in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , An additional winning port 3181 arranged in a manner of being continuously connected to the left side wall of the front cover 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and an upward direction from the left side wall part of the additional winning port 3181 in front view. And a curved extension plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

The additional winning opening 3181 is a winning opening for discharging the ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and the upper limit of 15 is obtained by the ball entering the additional winning opening 3181. The number of prize balls will be paid out. In this embodiment, 11 balls are set to be paid out.

The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts passage of a ball flowing down through the game area with a gap in the game area as viewed in the up-down direction being equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. .. Further, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed in a shape that descends from the middle abdomen to the left in front view and descends from the middle abdomen to the right in front view.

The front cover plate 3200 is provided between the side wall part 1220 and the storage part 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall part 1220, the storage part 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) included in the front cover plate 1200 of the first embodiment. In the region (3), the fall delay plate 3250 is provided extending from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface side.

The drop delay plate 3250 is arranged on the front side of the movement path of the opening/closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening/closing plate 1300, is arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. The extended plate portion 3251 that is a plate-shaped portion and extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210, and has a concave curved upper surface. And a formed rolling arc portion 3252.

The drop delay plate 3250 has an elongated shape to the left and right, and decelerates so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the sphere to flow down a distance half the length of the plate (including bouncing and rolling down). It is formed from the shape to be formed. The opening/closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that when the sphere flows down a distance that is half the length of the plate in the left-right direction, it flows down in 1 second or less.

As shown in FIG. 32, the extended plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the width of separation from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. A facing surface 3251a and a terminating surface 3251b, which is a surface facing a surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the housing portion 1230 and is formed with a space equal to or larger than a diameter of a sphere between the housing surface 1230 and the housing portion 1230, are provided.

The distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is such that the radius of the sphere in the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). In the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere in the state of being switched to the radius of the sphere or more at the intermediate position (the middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32) and arranged on the most downstream side (right side in FIG. 32). The radius is greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end portion of the facing surface 3251a extends in the front-rear direction and smoothly intersects with the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 3200. (The tangent line drawn on the plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 as viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-back direction can be reduced.

The sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the front cover plate 3200 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state rolls down on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls apart from the rolling arc portion 3252 to the right, is moved to the downstream position Pf2. To flow down.

In the present embodiment, the distance between the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is less than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3. , The ball is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the ball falls from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, a manner of flow of the sphere on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

34(a) to 34(c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. Note that FIG. 34(b) shows the sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34(c) shows the sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. Note that the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted in FIG. 34.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b) and 34(c), the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the plate portion 1310. The diametrical length of the sphere that has flown down to the contact portion with the drop delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere in the axial direction) is reduced as it flows down.

That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34(b), the radial length r1 to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34(c), the radial length r2 up to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the sphere.

These radial lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis along the front-rear direction as a rotation axis. In other words, if the spheres have the same rotation speed, the shorter the radial lengths r1 and r2, the more the rolling speed of the sphere decreases (the sphere is delayed). According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed so as to be inclined in such a manner that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Therefore, the radius of gyration of the sphere is gradually shortened as the sphere flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream side.

Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 is extended along the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate 1300, in FIG. 34 showing the axial direction thereof, as compared with the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in ), the sphere is displaced downward. That is, as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 toward the downstream side, the ball can be separated from the first specific winning port 1000a, so that the ball flowing down the drop delay plate 3250 can be deflected from the first specific winning port 1000a. it can.

As a result, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is not provided with the ball entrance prevention portion 1331, the balls flow down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream end and are directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with the same force. It is possible to prevent the situation of winning by winning by flying.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 35 in which the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250. 35(a) and 35(b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35(c) is a first variable winning device 3000 on the line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). FIG. Note that FIG. 35(a) illustrates the open/close plate 1300 in a closed state, and FIGS. 35(b) and 35(c) illustrate the open/close plate 1300 in an open state. In FIG. 35(c), the open/close plate 1300 is illustrated. The outer shapes of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 35( a) and FIG. 35( b ), an example of a sphere that has entered the flow path forming portion of the first variable winning device 3000 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 35( a ), when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball landed on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 moves to the right in the front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. When the opening/closing plate 1300 maintains the closed state as it is, it drops after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the extending plate portion 3251 described above, the rolling time of the ball can be maintained for a long time, and the attention to the ball can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35( b ), when the opening/closing plate 1300 moves up (rotates) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves up along the arc shape of the moving arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent to the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 in the portion where the ball abuts at the start of the movement of the ball faces the front-rear direction, the movement of the ball at the start of the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be smoothed. it can.

The downflow direction when the ball moves upward and rolls down the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 to flow down is parallel to the downflow direction illustrated in FIG. Therefore, compared with the case where the downward flow direction of the ball changes completely before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, it is possible to mitigate the discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the motion of the ball before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300. it can.

In this way, the sphere is opened by the upward movement of the opening/closing plate 1300 from the state in which the sphere is arranged below the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35(c)). By pushing back (backflowing) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, a ball that is placed below the opening/closing plate 1300 and is in a state in which it is impossible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a once is brought to a state in which it is possible to move to the first specific winning opening 1000a by moving upward. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

In other words, FIG. 35(a) and FIG. 35(b) both show the state in which the sphere is arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240 because the sphere may still pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be said. That is, due to the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the sphere can be continuously maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed.

Further, even when the winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a is impossible, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. The player can have an expectation that the player may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the attention of the player can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening/closing plate 1300 forms a closed state, the falling of a ball that has reached the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 is delayed, and when the opening/closing plate 1300 next changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311. By making it possible to revive above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that has arrived in front of the opening/closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening/closing plate 1300 from being obstructed due to the sphere being arranged on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure in which a sphere can freely flow down the front side of the opening/closing plate as in a conventional gaming machine, the opening/closing plate operates so that the sphere is sandwiched between the opening/closing plate and the glass plate, thereby opening/closing. There is a problem in that the opening of the board is obstructed, which may cause a loss to the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 in front of the opening/closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotating shaft of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the ball is kept substantially constant (limit). can do. Therefore, as compared with the case where the ball freely flows down on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distance between the rotating shaft and the ball freely changes, the ball is sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the glass plate to open and close. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 is disturbed can be reduced. In addition, in the present embodiment, compared with the arrangement of the spheres, which may be sandwiched between the glass plate and the opening/closing plate 1300 during the change of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 may be hindered, the position may be slightly higher. The drop delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the sphere is maintained at the position.

36(a) and 36(b) are schematic diagrams showing the flow-down mode of the sphere that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 36(a), the flow-down mode of two balls that have reached the first variable winning device 3000 when the ball is left unattended is shown in time series, and in FIG. 36(b), for example, the first ball A ball when two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 in a row by performing a special hitting method (so-called "twisting") to hit the ball weakly and hit the second ball strongly. The flow-down mode of is illustrated in time series.

As shown in FIG. 36( a ), when the ball is left unattended and the first ball P 1 and the second ball P 2 reach the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 with a predetermined gap, When the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state by P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be placed on the upstream side of the drop delay plate 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 completely flows down the drop delay plate 3250, and thus it is easy to maintain the ball on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 until the opening/closing plate 1300 is next opened. You can

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when two balls reach the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 in a row, the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed by the ball P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the state is switched to the state, the ball P2 is arranged in the vicinity of the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 (fall position Pf3), and therefore it is not possible to wait until the opening/closing plate 1300 next becomes the open state, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from the plate 3250.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as compared with the case where two balls are continuously flowed down by a special hitting method, two balls are flown down at a predetermined interval by hitting (normal hitting). This makes it easier to receive the action of the drop delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 during the round-to-round interval time so that it can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, it is possible to suppress a game caused by a special hitting method such as twisting.

FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, the state immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed from the closed state to the open state is illustrated, and a ball that bounces upward when the opening/closing plate 1300 collides with the opening/closing plate 1300 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open/close plate 1300 in the open state, the bouncing as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball landed on the open/close plate 1300 is repelled while the open/close plate 1300 is moving upward. Only, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

The subsequent flow-down mode of the bounced ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 again or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. 37. To be done. Therefore, the bouncing ball allows the player to receive the payout of the prize ball. Therefore, a situation in which the ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing during the switching of the opening/closing plate 1300 to the opening state eventually enters the first outlet 66, and the player cannot make a profit. Can be prevented.

Further, even when a ball is won in the additional winning opening 3181, a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls can be won separately in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The payout by winning in the mouth 3181 becomes a prize ball (additional profit) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, it is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained by the player depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing while the opening/closing plate 1300 is switching to the open state. It is possible to improve the attention to the ball flowing down in.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the probability variation state (high-probability state) of the special symbol is given as the added value after the jackpot is over, regardless of the difference in the flow-down mode of the balls entering the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 according to the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that performs determination regarding the right acquisition of the transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol by the difference in the flow mode of the sphere. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is enlarged and shown. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transparent window is formed in the game board 13 in the lower part of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (main body member 1100, front cover plate 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, restriction member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and further includes a new probability variation determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

The probability variation determination unit 4800 is a flow path through which the balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 flow down, and a communication path 4810 extending vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow path communicating with the lower end of the communication path 4810. The probability variation determination flow channel 4820, which is a road, the specific region 4830 that is arranged to communicate with the flow channel on the left side of the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and the specific region 4830 that is communicated with the flow channel on the right side of the front view. A non-specific area 4840, a distribution device 4850 that is disposed so as to be able to interfere with the game ball at the branch portion of the probability variation determination flow path 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 that detects passage of the game ball in the specific area 4830, A non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540 is mainly provided.

The communication passage 4810 is formed from a length in which approximately one second elapses before the ball entering from the discharge port reaches the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

The distribution device 4850 is disposed so as to project inside the stochastic fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and causes the sphere to flow down to the specific region 4830 (form an open state) and to flow to the non-specific region 4840 (closed state). A distribution operation member 4851 that is operable between a closed position (to be formed) and a solenoid 4852 that drives the distribution operation member 4851 are mainly provided.

It is only in the special round during the jackpot game (fifth round in this embodiment) that the probability variation determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding the right acquisition of the transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In the special round, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific region 4830 is in the open state and the non-specific region 4840 is in the closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state). In the present embodiment, in a high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 easily.

In the present embodiment, in a low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and in a high probability state of the special symbol (probably changed state of the special symbol), for example, 40. It is judged to be a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of one.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific region 4830, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times, and the special symbol lottery 50 times. It is configured to be set to the normal state after the end.

In the present embodiment, five types of "special jackpot", "big jackpot E", "big jackpot F", "big jackpot G", and "big jackpot f" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols (see FIG. 40). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000 or It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 indicates that each big hit type and special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the drawing of symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case where the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

When the big hit D is reached, a five-round big hit game is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot E is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 49” (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot E is reached, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability variation state (high probability state).

The jackpot F is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79” (see 202b43 of FIG. 40).

When the jackpot F is reached, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, the big hit G is associated and defined (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

When the big hit G is reached, a five-round big hit game is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 750 prize balls, and can rarely obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probability variation state (high probability state).

As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), there is a 50% probability that the special symbol has a right to change to the probability change state (high probability state). Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, it is possible to rarely acquire the right to transition to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, The jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When it becomes the big hit f, the big hit game of 5 rounds is executed by the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning a prize device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 as in the case of the big hit D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot g is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99” (see 202b45 of FIG. 40).

When the jackpot g is reached, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls, and can rarely obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 have a sixth probability with a probability of 95%. Operates in an operating pattern. At this time, since it is possible to almost certainly obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64). It is advantageous for the player as compared to the case of a big hit. Therefore, in order to win the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player plays the right-handed game. To do.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit becomes longer (1 Seconds × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it becomes easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol can be transitioned to the probability variation state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when it is a jackpot, the jackpot f (almost certainly a transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state)) It is easy for the player to obtain a large number of prize balls, because the probability of a special symbol that is likely to become a big hit) is likely to be repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41(b) is a first specific winning combination in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled to be held, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the third round game R is started.

In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the third round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the third round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the open/close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown), and then the third opening time is reached. After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 second in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is held in the closed state again. 4852 is drive-controlled to cause the sorting operation member 4851 to perform a short-time operation. This predetermined time is set as a time during which the sphere is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round game R is finished.

Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which the specified number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shoot balls one by one at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to shoot a specified number of balls. That is, normally, it is only possible to put about 5 balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 will be filled with about 5 winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, so that the feeling of strangeness given to the player due to the fact that the time of the fourth round game R is shorter than other rounds is suppressed. can do.

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1 during the period, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the elapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again removed. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to perform a long-time operation.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

In the second opening time OP2, when the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of storage is up to 6), all the discharged spheres are the probability variation determination flow channel 4820. If the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of stored pieces is 7 or more), it is at least one of the discharged spheres. It is set as a time shorter than the time required for all the balls to pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

In the present embodiment, the round game R of the fourth round is started in a state where five balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, even if the round game of the fourth round ends in the second operation time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily set to 7 or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the sphere remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the remaining sphere can be made to flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

Here, unlike the related art, in this operation pattern, it is not necessary to close the opening/closing plate 1300 while the sorting operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the fifth round game R. The opening/closing plate 1300 can be operated without a feeling of strangeness. This will be described below.

In the conventional technique, when the specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the round game R is finished before the operation of the sorting operation member 4581 is started, the sorting operation member 4851 is opened. Although there is a possibility that a ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the player cannot obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, there is a possibility that a defect may occur. In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the opening/closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 was in the closed state before the operation (opened twice within one round).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game property is to switch whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round can be inserted into the specific region 4830. Even when the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Since the ball toward the specific area 4830 has already won in the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

Therefore, in the present operation pattern, in the fifth round game R, even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation, by opening the open/close plate 1300, the open/close plate 1300 operates. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, prevent the problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state) due to the prize mode. can do.

In addition, since the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round stays in the storage channel 1231 for the first operating time T1, It is possible to prevent a ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination flow path 4820 while the sorting operation member 4851 is open. As a result, the player can obtain the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the manner of winning the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent the problem that the capability changes.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. It should be noted that the process up to the end of the round game R of the third round is the same as in the case of the jackpot D described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. The drive mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as the sixth operation pattern.

When the round game R of the third round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the open/close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown), and then the third opening time is reached. After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 second in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is held in the closed state again. 4852 is drive-controlled to cause the sorting operation member 4851 to perform a short-time operation. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round game R is finished.

Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which the specified number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shoot balls one by one at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to shoot a specified number of balls. That is, normally, it is only possible to put about 5 balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (all balls) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with about 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state in a state where the balls won in 3 seconds remain in the storage channel 1231. ..

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1 during the period, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the elapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again removed. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to hold it in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

In this operation pattern, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fifth round R is about 5 balls, so for some rare reason, 8 or more balls in 3 seconds are the first specific winning prize. Unless all the discharged balls have passed through the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced unless a prize is won in the mouth 1000a.

Therefore, since the sphere does not remain in the probability variation determination flow path 4820 when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round is the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, and thus the sixth operation pattern is also in this operation pattern. It is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above.

Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not spheres can be stored up to near the fullness of the storage flow path 1231 during the fourth round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right to transition to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the difference in the accumulation state of the balls, and thus the player can store it in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to improve the attention to the ball. As a result, the attention of the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter by the fourth round of the round game R, it is possible to almost certainly obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. You can, but because the time of the round game R is short, the more familiar the player is to the game, the more the player fails to acquire the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol even in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

That is, an unfamiliar player is more likely to play the game while hitting the jackpot, while a player who is more accustomed to the game avoids hitting the ball in order to avoid wasted balls during the jackpot and is easy to stop between rounds. It is the difference caused by.

To be more specific, if the game is a hit-and-miss game, a plurality of balls are always flowing near the opening/closing plate 1300, and the winning of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Since it occurs, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter if it lasts for 3 seconds. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

On the other hand, when the round game R of the fourth round is started and the shooting is started, when the ball is stopped during the round so as to avoid the ball from flowing near the opening/closing plate 1300 during the interval period, there is certainly no dead ball. Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening/closing plate 1300 until some time has passed since the start of the fourth round game R (for example, 2 seconds have not passed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining 1 second, and it becomes difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, even a player who has become accustomed to the game can be encouraged to hit the ball during the jackpot game.

As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent fear that a person who is more accustomed to the game may decrease the profit obtained depending on the launch mode. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or unfamiliar, the player can be encouraged to play the game in the midst of a big hit, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be secured.

On the other hand, on the other hand, after grasping the above-mentioned risks, it is possible to provide the player who stops the game between rounds with a jackpot game that requires concentration, which cannot be enjoyed by other pachinko machines 10. .. That is, the number of dead balls is reduced by performing the inter-round stop hitting in which the ball is calculated backward so that the ball flows into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round, and the ball is started. Meanwhile, it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In this case, the inter-rounds are stopped before the end of the third round game R, and the launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, while considering the randomness of the flow of the balls entering during the third round of the round game R, a high-level calculation is required to start the launch while predicting the entering timing. Therefore, when the timing at which the ball that has started the launch reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is calculated, the player's interest can be improved.

FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42(b) is a first specific winning combination in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. It should be noted that until the end of the round game R of the third round, it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.

When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). Then, after the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again arranged. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to hold it in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round game R is finished.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the round game R of the fourth round is the maximum value of the first operating time T1 of 30 seconds. Ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the elapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again removed. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to hold it in the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to operate for a long time. It should be noted that this opening operation is performed at the same time as the opening operation due to the elapse of the third opening time OP3.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage When the number is 7 or more), it is set as a time shorter than the time that at least a part of the discharged balls completely pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, the round game R of the fourth round is started with five balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, so the round game R of the fourth round waits for the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If there are seven or more spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, the sorting operation member 4851 can be opened with the spheres remaining in the probability variation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be made to flow down to the specific region 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round is the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, and thus the sixth operation pattern is also in this operation pattern. It is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. It should be noted that until the end of the round game R of the third round, it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. The drive mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as the eighth operation pattern.

When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). Then, after the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again arranged. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to perform a long-time operation.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round of the round game R, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round game R is finished.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the round game R of the fourth round is the maximum value of the first operating time T1 of 30 seconds. Ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1 during the period, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 0.2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage When the number is 7 or more), it is set as a time shorter than the time that at least a part of the discharged balls completely pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, the round game R of the fourth round is started in a state where no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, so a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fourth round. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to finish the fourth round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1. However, as in the case where the round game R of the fourth round is ended by a specified number of winnings, if the fourth round game R is ended without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, in many cases Immediately after that, the displacing member 4851 is displaced after the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

On the other hand, when the distribution operation member 4851 waits for the fourth round game R up to the maximum value of the first operation time T1 and ends, if there are seven or more balls discharged in the interval immediately after that. The sphere can be made to flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not hurry to win the specified number of prizes, but the special number of balls is awarded to the player by allowing the specified number of balls to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a just before the end of the fourth round R. It is possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of.

Further, as another method, by terminating the round game R of the fifth round immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the balls discharged in the interval immediately after the round game R of the fifth round are set in a specific area. The player can also acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability changing state (high probability state) by making it flow down.

Thus, according to this operation pattern, the player is allowed to change the probability of the special symbol (high probability state) at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning port 1000a). Whether or not the right to transfer can be acquired can be different.

When the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round game R is designated. If the operating time is specified (in the case of the eighth operating pattern), by continuing the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, no matter how the game is played, the player has a special symbol. Since the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) can be acquired, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, when the operation time is not designated (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player selects the operation time by himself/herself depending on the game mode (when the specified number of balls is to be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a). It may be possible to obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol by selecting. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player an uplifting feeling that he/she can obtain the probability variation state by himself/herself. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

As a feature of the sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern, the interval immediately after the round game R of the third round is shorter than usual, and the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 and the fourth round game. When R is started, it can be mentioned that it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a game property in which it is easy to acquire the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is long enough to discharge all the balls in the storage channel 1231, the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is granted. Hard to get. That is, when it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the gaming property that the payout of the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. As a result, more balls can be prepared for the player to hit in the subsequent normal state, which makes it easier to suppress the player's cash investment.

These differences can be grasped by whether or not the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fourth round, so at the start of the fourth round game R, the player expects the state after the jackpot game is over. can do. Then, even in the case of an operating pattern in which it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the ball entry mode. It is possible to obtain.

Here, in this embodiment, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player during the jackpot game by pressing the player for selection. In other words, the game mode in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is the exact opposite.

More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round game R, before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses, as many balls as possible are assigned to the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is more likely that you can get the right to move the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state) by winning the prize (it is profitable to win many balls from the start of the fourth round), while In the case of the operation pattern of 9, in the round game R of the fourth round, waiting for the specified number of balls to be won until the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, is extended, and the period of the round game R is extended. As a result, the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol increases (there is a benefit in suppressing the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

In this way, depending on how to win the ball in the round game R (game mode selected by the player), the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol changes. Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and maintain the concentration on the game.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the 10th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Note that the description up to the end of the fourth round of the round game R is omitted because it is the same as in the case of the sixth operation pattern described above.

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 0.2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a short time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the sorting operation member 4851 after the elapse of the second opening time OP2 is a short-time operation, basically, the ball cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

Further, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the fifth round of the round game R, if the round game can be finished early, the ball winning the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. There is a possibility of being made (for example, when the operation after the elapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), but in this operation pattern, the round game R of the fifth round starts in a state where the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231. As a result, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the fifth round game cannot be finished early. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

When the round game R of the fifth round is completed, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round has the same portions as the sixth operation pattern described above, so that in the operation pattern as well, The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of No. 6 can be exhibited.

Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the fourth round game R. Since the patterns of the other parts are the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000.

The tenth operation pattern causes the sphere to flow down to the specific region 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the fourth round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. They differ in that they cannot do it.

That is, by mixing the operation patterns, the player does not feel relieved even if he or she can fully store the balls in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R, and the discharged balls are in the specific area. You may be prompted to confirm whether to pass 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage (first step) of whether or not the sphere can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and the sorting operation member 4851 operates before the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes. It can be divided into the stage (second step) of whether or not, and attention can be paid to different places for each stage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game aimlessly, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a winning ball corresponding to the jackpot type can be obtained regardless of the progress state of the game in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment. 5000 is equipped with a ball exit adjusting device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to acquire more balls as the number of fluctuations until a big hit is won in a probability variation state (high probability state) of a special symbol is smaller. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 arranged near the lower right corner of the game board 13 has a main body member 2100, a cover front plate 2200, as in the second embodiment. In addition to having the opening/closing plate 1300, the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, and a new one in this embodiment, A ball output adjusting device 5900 that mainly adjusts the ball output by causing the ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is provided.

The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 that extends downward from the lower end of the rotation tip 1421 of the extension 1420 along the shape of the rotation tip 1421.

As shown in FIG. 45, the time difference forming portion 5423 has a lower end extending to a position where it abuts on the engaging portion 1333 of the open/close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not excited.

The second variable winning device 5800 is configured such that, in addition to the configuration described in the second embodiment, an intervening rod portion 5850 with a slightly added shape and a transmission rod portion 2860 can be slid vertically in the left direction when viewed from the rear, By being pushed down to the branched portion of the intervening rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion in rear view added to the configuration of the intervening rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), it is arranged so as to be able to contact the movable closing member 5931 of the ball exit adjusting device 5900. The pressing action portion 5870 is provided.

The exit adjusting device 5900 is formed so as to pass through the flow passage forming portion 5910 that causes the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 to flow down, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the flow passage forming portion 5910 to be stored. Mainly includes a communication hole 5920 arranged in such a manner that a sphere can flow into the flow path 1231 (opening diameter, arrangement), and an opening/closing member 5930 that opens/closes the communication hole 5920 in association with driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for The downflow passage forming portion 5910 is arranged so as to pass through the rear surface side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding. Also, the illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

The downflow passage forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which a ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is disposed so as to face the communication hole 5920, and the ball moves to the communication hole 5920. After the adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in and the number of spheres stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceed a prescribed number (30 in this embodiment), the ball is further entered into the second entrance 640. And a surplus sphere discharge flow path 5915 for discharging the formed spheres to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

The adjustment flow path 5911 is a deceleration flow path 5912 formed as a reverse U-shaped flow path in the rear view, which is curved by half a turn near the lower end, and the second entrance ball 640 from the upper end of the deceleration flow path 5912. It mainly includes a drop flow path 5913 that extends in the vertical direction toward the rear.

The shape of the deceleration flow path 5912 reduces the load given to the balls discharged from the communication holes 5920 from the subsequent balls that stay in the deceleration flow path 5912 in the opening direction of the communication holes 5920, regardless of the number of staying balls. be able to. That is, the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the weight of the following ball from the following ball, and the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle inclination (close to horizontal) near the communication hole 5920. Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, irrespective of the number of retained balls, the speed at which the balls immediately before the communication hole 5920 are discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the balls to the opening/closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

Since the drop flow path 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling ball does not undergo deceleration and falls freely. Therefore, when the balls enter the second ball entrance 640 consecutively, the preceding ball is decelerated earlier than the latter ball, and the latter ball is prevented from flowing down, so that the latter ball is erroneous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls from entering the surplus sphere discharge flow path 5915.

In the present embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the balls to stay in order from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of staying balls reaches 30, the upper end portion of the 30th ball is the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the 31st and subsequent balls enter the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. In other words, a maximum of 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, after the jackpot game is over, the high-probability state of 30 revolutions is entered. During this time, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 easily, and the player can aim for the next big hit while suppressing the ball loss by advancing the game by a right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball entering the second entrance 640 enters the adjustment flow path 5911, it stays in the adjustment flow path 5911 from the start of the high probability state toward the end of the high probability state. The sphere increases.

The opening/closing member 5930 is arranged at a position projecting to the inside of the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510, 2810 are not excited, and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere, while either solenoid 1510, 2810 is excited. Accordingly, the movable closing member 5931 arranged at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, and the movable closing member 5931 and the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 are connected to each other, and the movable closing member 5931 can be moved in the left-right direction when the solenoid 1510 is driven. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a slide rail portion 5933 disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 vertically and movably relative to the connecting rod portion 5932. An elastic spring 5934, one end of which is provided on the connecting rod portion 5932 and which applies a biasing force in the upward direction to the movable closing member 5931, is mainly provided.

46(a) and 46(b) are sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 taken along the line XLVI-XLVI of FIG. 45. 46(a) shows the communication hole 5920 in an open state, and FIG. 46(b) shows the communication hole 5920 in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 46( a ), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and a sphere can flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231 and stay there, up to the third ball AP 53 flows into the storage channel 1231. However, the sphere AP54 of the fourth ball is retained at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920.

In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flow into the storage channel 1231, so that the communication hole The space for entering the ball AP54 into the storage channel 1231 is filled with the inflowing ball IP51. Therefore, the sphere retained at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 even after that, and is maintained at that position.

As shown in FIG. 46B, as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharge state, the movable closing member 5931 extends from the overhang adjusting flow passage 5911 to the storage flow passage 1231. Inflow of spheres is restricted.

When the discharge of the spheres from the storage flow channel 1231 is completed, the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. 46(a) again, and the sphere AP54 that has been previously retained at the position where it has not come out from the communication hole 5920 becomes the first and the third sphere. The spheres up to flow into the storage channel 1231.

In the jackpot game, the inflow of spheres from the adjustment flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231 is repeated as described above, and the inflow is defined at a maximum of three per opening of the communication hole 5920. R.

With reference to FIG. 47, a case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. 47(a) to 47(c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. 47(a) to 47(c), the operations of the opening/closing plate 1300, the restriction member 2600, and the opening/closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 47A, when the solenoid 1510 is excited, in FIG. 47B, the solenoid 1510 is deenergized and the tip of the time difference forming unit 5423 is located on the rear side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 47(b) is shown in FIG. 47(c), and FIG. 47(c) shows the state in which the time difference forming section 5423 is arranged above the engaging section 1333.

As shown in FIG. 47A, the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, and the ball can pass therethrough.

When the state of FIG. 47( a) is changed to the state of FIG. 47( b ), the movable closing member 5931 moves along with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while the opening/closing plate 1300 is engaged. Since the portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and the movement of the opening/closing plate 1300 is regulated, the regulation member 2600 maintains the stored state.

In the state shown in FIG. 47(c), the regulation member 2600 is in the discharge state, and the spheres retained in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the balls from the discharge port 1150 is started, so that the adjustment flow path can be controlled by the force of discharging the balls from the discharge port 1150. It is possible to prevent a sphere from flowing in from 5911.

48(a) and 48(b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. In FIGS. 48A and 48B, the operations of the restricting member 2600 and the opening/closing member 5930 by driving the solenoid 2810 are illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 48A shows the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 in a non-excited state, and FIG. 48B shows the solenoid 2810 in an excited state.

As shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the pressing action portion 5870 pushes down the movable closing member 5931 to open the communication hole 5920. This allows the sphere to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

Therefore, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened so that the sphere can flow into the storage channel 1231. On the other hand, when the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is not excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened. It is closed and the flow into the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

In the jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled by the mechanism described above, a fixed number of balls (up to three balls in the present embodiment) flow into the storage passage 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

In the present embodiment, in a low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/320, and in a high probability state of the special symbol (probably changed state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes. With a probability of 1, it is judged as a special jackpot. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, after the jackpot game is finished, the special symbol random change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, and the special symbol lottery 30 times. It is configured to be set to the normal state after the end. In the present embodiment, in a high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 easily.

In the present embodiment, three types of "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i" are provided as big hit types of special symbols (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, so that the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Composed.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each big hit type and special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the drawing of symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". Is defined in association with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

If the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the big hit h Are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

When it becomes the big hit H or big hit h, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can pay out about 2250 prize balls, and can win a specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive a specified upper limit payout.

If the special symbol 2 is a big hit in the lottery (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the big hit i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

When it becomes the jackpot i, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of payouts of the prize balls and the time required for the jackpot game are variable according to the number of balls entered into the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is won.

That is, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a prescribed number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit, If the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, depending on the number of entrances of the second entrance 640 until the jackpot Since the maximum value of the number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the amusement feature of winning a jackpot in a right-handed game is different from the payout of prize balls depending on when the jackpot of a right-handed game occurs. Sex can be added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the right-handed game from being played casually, and it is possible to improve the attention to each variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50(a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50(b) is a diagram showing the twelfth operating pattern in the twelfth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1 specific winning opening 1000a and the 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the 11th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot H or jackpot game of jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). Thus, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

In the round game R of the first round, with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, the communication hole 5920 is opened, and up to three spheres flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48), but When storing the spheres from the second storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, since 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, the number of spheres (1 to 1) flowing from the communication hole 5920 can be stored. Even if the number is 3), the round game R can be finished by winning the specified number (10C).

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means holds the open/close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is controlled, and after the elapse of the third interval time Int3 between rounds, the second round game R is started. Here, at intervals of 3 seconds, a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150, so at the end of the first round game R, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251. It is possible to discharge all the balls (up to 14) that can be stored in series.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the second identification. The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

Similarly thereafter, the third round to the fifteenth round of the round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between the round games R being repeated, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the solenoid 2810 is displaced to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, three spheres flow from the adjustment flow path 5911 into the storage flow path 1231 for each drive operation (excitation) of the solenoid 2810. Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the entire flow is stored until the end of the jackpot game (the end of the 10th round game R). Since it is possible to enter the ball into the path 1231, the jackpot game can be ended in a state where the ball does not remain in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating in the 12th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). Thus, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started. Note that the description up to the fourth round game R is omitted because it is the same as the eleventh operation pattern.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

Here, even in the round game R of the fifth round, the balls can be allowed to flow from the communication hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the balls enter from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the inflow of balls from the communication hole 5920 is actually performed, it is not possible to win a specified number of balls. Therefore, the number of award balls that can be obtained in the fifth round game R of this operation pattern is smaller than the award balls that can be obtained in the same round game R during the eleventh operation pattern, and the first ball Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game becomes long.

Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the sixth round to the fifteenth round is repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drives and controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, a decrease in the number of prize balls that can occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and an extension of the round time means that the balls flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231. The decrease in the number of prize balls and the extension of the round time change depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the start of the jackpot. The number of spheres remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of spheres that have passed through the second ball entrance 640, while the number of balls that have passed through the second ball entrance 640 causes the special symbol 2 to be drawn (second ball entrance Since it is possible to receive a lottery based on the entry into 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 is related to the number of lottery of the special symbol 2.

In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Will be explained assuming that they are the same number.

As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a once. That is, by the round game R of the fourth round, a maximum of 12 spheres have already flowed into the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the balls flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920, and the jackpot game is started in a state where 13 or more balls are stored in the adjustment channel 5911. This is the case. In other words, it is a case where the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) is received 13 times or more after the transition to the high probability state. ..

Therefore, if the jackpot is won before the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) is received 12 times after the transition to the high probability state, the number of prize balls decreases. Since the extension of the round time does not occur, it is possible to improve the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th drawing.

Also, after the 13th drawing, the number of prize balls will decrease in each drawing, and the round time will be extended in every 3 drawing, so the player wonders how many drawing can win the jackpot. You can improve your attention.

That is, for example, if a jackpot is won in a state where 14 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of the special symbol 2), it is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of spheres flowing into the flow channel 1231 is two, the number of winning balls in this round is eight. Further, when a big hit is obtained in a state where 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the 15th lottery of the special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of spheres flowing into 1231 is three, the number of prizes that can be won in this round is seven. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the payout number of prize balls in the round game R of the fifth round decreases.

On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in each case, the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 by flowing into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R Is 0. Therefore, from the round game R of the 6th round, a specified number of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, whereby the round game R of the 6th round can be ended. There is no change in the degree of extension.

Further, when the number of remaining adjustment channels 5911 in the case of winning the jackpot is 16 to 18, in the sixth round game R, when it is 19 to 21, it is 22 to 24 in the seventh round game R. When the number is 8 in the round game R of the 8th round, when the number is 25 to 27, in the round game R of the 9th round, and when it is 28 to 30 in the round game R of the 10th round, the number of prize balls is reduced. And the extension of the round time occurs.

As a result, in the gaming property in which the high-probability state ends according to the number of times of lottery, as in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won soon after the transition to the high-probability state and when the jackpot is won just before the end of the high-probability state With, it is possible to make a difference in the profit given to the player (the number of prize balls to be paid out, the progress time of the big hit game, etc.).

In this case, in the present embodiment, the profit given to the player is reduced as the number of lottery from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot win increases, so when the number of lottery until the jackpot win is small, Originally, there should have been an opportunity to win the lottery with a high probability even with the remaining number of times of the lottery, but the dissatisfaction of the player who cannot receive the lottery can be partially solved.

In other words, if the jackpot was won in the first lottery after the high probability state was reached, the remaining 29 lottery would have been added, and the next 59 lottery would have been possible. In fact, the high-probability state after the jackpot game is finished can partially eliminate the player's dissatisfaction with being limited to 30 times again. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

Even in the high probability state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the second specific winning opening 2255a is in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of times the lottery has been opened/closed and transitioned to the high probability state. Therefore, in a high probability state, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming to win a ball at the first ball entrance 64.

In this case, as compared to the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls discharged from the first outlet 66 without increasing the number of special symbols is increased, and the interval during which the lottery is received becomes longer, and the game time is longer. May be long.

Therefore, as a way of playing the game in the high probability state, the player can suppress the number of balls discharged from the first outlet 66 before the jackpot is obtained, and can receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time in a jackpot type ( Whether you aim to win the jackpot h) (whether you play the right-handed game), the number of balls discharged from the first outlet 66 will increase until you get the jackpot, and be prepared to increase the game time. It is possible to appropriately select whether or not to aim for the jackpot of the jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of the reduction of the prize ball in (the left-handed game). As a result, it is possible to widen the range of game methods to be selected, depending on the player's taste and the situation in which the player is placed (such as the available game time).

Note that after the high-probability state ends, the second entrance 640 becomes difficult to open, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of spheres will remain in the adjusting flow path 5911, but in the big hit type (big hit H) that can be obtained by the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjusting flow path 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by winning the specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (both in terms of the number of prize balls and game time) is not impaired. Therefore, even when the player quits the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being impaired. The player can start the game at any timing.

In this embodiment, the number of special symbols 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (second entry) The number of balls entered into the mouth 640) is described as being the same number, but in the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the time of jackpot acquisition is a special symbol 2 until the jackpot acquisition. It should be noted that it is rare that the number is the same as the number of times of drawing.

That is, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed along with the ball winning in the second entrance 640. However, the player recognizes whether or not the jackpot is won in the lottery, the subsequent reach production and Since it is after the button press effect, etc., the player usually keeps hitting the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since up to four balls can be held in the second ball entrance 640, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player can effectively perform lottery, so-called hold stop) In addition to the number of times of lottery that allows the player to recognize the jackpot judgment, a state in which a maximum of about four balls are entering the second entrance 640 is maintained.

In addition, even if the player enters the second entrance 640 when the number of holdings is maximum, the lottery cannot be accepted, but the ball enters the adjustment flow path 5911, so that the player can obtain a profit in the jackpot game. The likelihood of reduction is increased. Since the hold is digested by the fluctuations being stopped and the next fluctuations being started, in other words, the longer the period until the fluctuations are stopped, the higher the possibility that the player's profit in the jackpot game is decreased. It will be.

Therefore, if the ball is left untouched in a long-reaching or other high-expectation performance, it is possible to form a gaming property in which there is a high possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game will decrease. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during high-reach production such as long reach, eliminating the concentration power that the player had to spend adjusting the firing output of the ball. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's ability to concentrate on the production such as long reach, and to improve the attention to the production.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described. However, the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the spheres by driving. Then, the arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability variation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is arranged below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 are the specific regions 4830. The state after the big hit game is configured to change depending on whether or not to pass.

52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 taken along the line LII-LII of FIG. 51. Note that FIG. 52 illustrates the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, front cover plate 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, driving device 1500, regulating member 1600). In addition to the provision of the rear cover 1700), a new interference device 6900 is provided in the sixth embodiment.

The interference device 6900 includes a solenoid 6910 disposed on the back surface side of the main body member 1100 and having a slide movable shaft arranged along a plane surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a tip of a movable portion of the solenoid 6910. Mainly includes a tip member 6920 fixed to the main body member 1100, and an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

The tip member 6920 includes an elongated hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The elongated hole 6921 is formed so as to be inclined in such a manner that the tip side of the tip member 6920 is closer to the thin plate member 1110.

The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction in a through hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 that is arranged so as to face the storage channel 1231 of the front cover 1200, and the rear end thereof is a long hole 6921. And the rear end portion moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. By this back-and-forth operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

The through hole H61 is arranged at a position slightly leftward from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. The interference member 6930 is slid forward from the through hole H61 to be in the projecting state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), so that the sphere P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231.

FIG. 53A and FIG. 53B are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. Note that FIG. 53A illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53B illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. A sphere that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and “V” is described in the sphere that first enters the specific area 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later. ..

As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 when the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, while the third ball is stored when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. Subsequent spheres are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231 and remain in the number of stored spheres less than 10 spheres. Therefore, when the specified number of each round game R of the big hit game is 10 as in the present embodiment, if the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended by winning the specified number of prizes, the end of the round game R is waited until the specified time. The effects that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in a low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/10, and in a high probability state of the special symbol (probably changed state of the special symbol), for example, quadrant. With a probability of 1, it is judged as a special jackpot.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times, and the special symbol lottery 10 times. While the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 after the game is configured to be set to the normal state after the end, normally after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times. It is configured to be in a time saving state of the design.

In this embodiment, two types of "special jackpot I" and "big jackpot j" are provided as the jackpot types of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 or It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Specifically, in the case where the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). .. When it becomes the big hit I, the big hit game of two rounds is executed with the 13th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 285 prize balls, and almost certainly cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability changing state (high probability state).

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 is a lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

When the jackpot j is reached, two rounds of jackpot games are executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probability changing state (high probability state).

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, almost certainly the right to transition to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol is acquired. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the special symbol 1 is drawn in a lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64). Therefore, in order to win the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player plays the right-handed game. To do.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit becomes longer (1 Seconds × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it becomes easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol can be transitioned to the probability variation state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when it is a jackpot, the jackpot j (almost certainly the transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state)) The probability that the special symbol that is a jackpot that can obtain the right) is likely to be repeated, and thus the player can easily obtain a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b), the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54(b) is a first specific winning combination in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

Note that, in FIG. 54, in order to facilitate the identification, the first interval time between rounds Int1 is described by ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long operating time TL). To be done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the lengths of time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed according to the time relationship described below.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300, the sorting operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the 13th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The drive control of the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 is performed to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the open/close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for the long-term operation time TL, and after the lapse of the long-term operation time TL, the solenoid 6910 is driven so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. The interference member 6930 is controlled to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53(b)). In the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, the interference member 6930 must be waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Since it becomes an evacuation state, it is virtually impossible to win a specified number of balls, and the first round of the round game R ends when the first operating time T1 elapses.

Simultaneously with the end of the first round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot be passed to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot obtain the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold each in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the 14th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The drive control of the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 is performed to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the open/close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the projecting state for a minute time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the minute time, the interference member 6930 is held in the retracted state again. The solenoid 6910 is drive-controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a minute time, it is in the retracted state for most of the time, so as shown in FIG. 53(a), the prescribed number of round games is used. It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, since the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed and the restricting member 1600 is in the discharge state while the sorting operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere can be discharged toward the stochastic variation determination flow path 4820. It can be made to flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold each in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time in which the winning number of balls in the first round game R is expected to be 3 or more and less than 6. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231, the line of sight of the player is blocked by the sphere, making it difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This can make it difficult for the player to confirm the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

Therefore, the change due to the protrusion of the interference member 6930 is limited to the third and subsequent balls slightly moving in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the player recognizes whether the change due to the interference member 6930 has occurred. It is possible to make it difficult, and to make the player enjoy playing the game of winning the ball in the first specific winning opening 1000a and storing the ball in the storage flow path 1231 without making the player feel uncomfortable by the operation of the interference member 6930. You can

Then, the balls are stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage flow channel 1231, and even after the first round game R is not finished, the player feels uncomfortable and actually counts the number of the balls stored in the storage flow channel 1231. For the first time, it is possible to form a new game property of recognizing the difference between jackpot types.

As described above, according to this embodiment, while it is difficult to recognize the change in the situation visually recognized through the game board 13 (the change in the state of the interference member 6930), the player can be operated by the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify the change of the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easily recognizable manner so that the player can recognize the difference of the jackpot type. Therefore, the attention of the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the sphere arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment is The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured in such a manner that the sphere arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of a front cover plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is a diagram of FIG. 35(b), XXXVc-XXXVc. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 7000 in a line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, except for the front cover plate 7200, and a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same structure as the structure described in the third embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall part 1220, housing part 1230, detection sensor 1240, and drop delay plate 3250). ) In addition to the second fall delay plate 7260, which is new in this embodiment.

The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member that extends on the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210 between the end surface 3251b and the housing portion 1230, and descends as the upper surface 7261 moves away from the detection sensor 1240. Incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 extends rearward to the extent that it does not interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the second fall delay plate 7260, the distance between the detection sensor 1240 and the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 is set to be less than the diameter of the sphere, and at the position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance from the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 is less than the diameter of the sphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the movement trajectory of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250. That is, the rolling arc portion 3252 does not act on the rolling ball. That is, the second drop delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member whose contact with the sphere changes depending on the path of arrival of the sphere. This will be described below.

58(a) and 58(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 taken along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35(b). FIG. 58A shows a case where the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state in a state where the ball is arranged near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, and in FIG. 58B, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. The case where the ball rolls toward the falling position Pf3 is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 58A, when the sphere is arranged near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the sphere is covered with the cover front plate due to the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 generated when the opening/closing plate 1300 operates. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, in the process of flowing down, it comes into contact with the second drop delay plate 7260, flows down to the drop delay plate 3250 side along the inclination of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 and falls again at the drop position Pf3. To reach.

Since the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball, the momentum of the ball is large. Is large, it is possible to prevent the ball from vertically falling on the back surface side of the second drop delay plate 7260.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58B, the ball rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 is on the main body member 3100 side along the rearward inclination of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250. Run down while touching.

At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the sphere is arranged below the second drop delay plate 7260, the length of extension of the second drop delay plate 7260 to the back side can be determined from the movement trajectory of the sphere. Also, the upper surface 7261 can catch the ball falling from the upper side, while the front surface side holds the ball.

The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and then falls as it is after reaching the drop position Pf3. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250 without delay.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the sphere receives the action of the second drop delay plate 7260 and the case where the sphere does not receive it, depending on which side the sphere approaches the second drop delay plate 7260.

In the present embodiment, while maintaining the function of smoothly dropping the ball rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, the two balls roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the previous ball rolls. Even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed by passing the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball arranged immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

In addition, even if the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 are arranged in front of the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 happens to be in the closed state, even if the balls are rolling in two rows. Also, the ball can be made to flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the ball rolls leftward on the upper surface 7261 of the second drop delay plate 7260, and then restarts rolling rightward along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to substantially keep the ball on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 for a time longer than rolling over the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300. As a result, the number of dead balls (balls that flow down the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first outlet 66) that may occur during the interval time can be reduced.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000.

59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away to make the opening/closing plate 8300 visible, and a part of the side wall portion 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are shown in phantom lines. Further, in FIGS. 59 and 61, after the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening/closing plate 8300 is in the open state (raising posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is in the open state (extended posture). 60 and 62, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (immersion posture). ) Is shown. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the drawing as the front (front) side and the back side of the drawing as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure respectively indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 62, the opening/closing plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 has a shaft portion 1320 described in each of the above embodiments, a loaded portion 1330, and a space between the shaft portions 1320 of about 4 degrees. It is divided into minutes, and a plate portion 8310 formed in a plate shape is provided in three sections on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) in front view.

That is, in this embodiment, a gap is formed between the opening/closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. Is set up.

Since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300 is shorter than that in the first embodiment, the range in which the rectangular recess 1122 is formed can be shortened. In this embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in the minimum necessary range for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the covering front plate 8200, and plays a role of a rolling surface of a ball guided by the detection sensor 1240. The configuration of the front cover plate 8200 is the same as that of the front cover plate 1200 described in the above embodiment except for the fixed receiving portion 8250. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the respective components, and detailed description thereof will be given. The description is omitted.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-shaped member that protrudes from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the main body member 1100 side, and the protruding end portion (back surface side end portion) thereof is the support recess 1121 on the right side of the main body member 1100. The main body member 1100 is brought into contact with the open end (front side end portion) of the above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed so that the upper surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) is in a plane position with the upper surface (the rolling surface) of the open/close plate 8300 in the open state, that is, as an inclined surface that descends downward toward the right. The lower surface is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. The arc that is the basis of the shape of the lower surface is formed as an arc having a shorter radius than the radius of the movement locus (circle) of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (the longest radius, that is, the radius of the movement locus of the upper end of the facing surface 8341b). To be done. As a result, the upper corner of the facing surface 8341b and the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 moves (rotates) by a predetermined angle or more to the fixed receiving portion 8250. Regulated.

As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion of the fixed receiving portion 8250 (overhanging length to the left) is designed so that a ball dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 does not directly ride on the rolling surface. It That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is arranged to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, even if the sphere may collide with the fixed receiving portion 8250 when the sphere falls vertically from the inclined surface 1237, the center of gravity of the sphere is on the left side of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250. The event that the ball flows down to the detection sensor 1240 hardly occurs, and the ball spills left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 and drops toward the first outlet 66.

In addition, when the ball spilled to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the load applied from the ball to the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 closes the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. The auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 from changing to the open state due to the load applied from the ball.

Further, from the upstream side configuration of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of nails, the second ball inlet 640, etc., see FIG. 2), a ball having a speed to the lower right to the fixed receiving portion 8250. The probability of a jumping event is extremely low.

Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having the rolling surface is disposed on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not have the effect of making the detection sensor 1240 excessively likely to guide the ball. Is composed of.

The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to suppress the occurrence of a defect in the flow of a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 while opening and closing the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 by a rotating operation. The details of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 will be described below.

The auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is a member that is rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110. The auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is provided on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and extends from the receiving plate 8341 toward the rotary shaft. The rod-shaped connecting portion 8342, the loaded portion 8343 disposed on the back surface side of the thin plate member 1110 and capable of contacting the power transmission member 1400, and the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 cannot be relatively rotated. A rod-shaped member to be connected, and mainly includes a shaft support rod portion 8344 rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110.

In the present embodiment, in the shaft support rod portion 8344, a supported portion supported by the thin plate member 1110 has a circular cross section, and a support portion supporting the connecting portion 8342 on the front side thereof and a loaded portion 8343 on the rear side thereof. The supporting portion that supports is formed to have a D-shaped cross section (a shape other than a circular shape). Fitting portions (holes or recesses) having a shape corresponding to the D-shape are formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343, and in the use state (see FIG. 59), the support portion and the fitting portion are fitted together. When combined, the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

The loaded portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is axially supported by the shaft support rod portion 8344, and a contact curved surface 8343a that is a curved upper surface that abuts the power transmission member 1400, and the loaded portion 8343. And a center of gravity portion 8343b including the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 regardless of the posture.

As shown in FIG. 62, the contact curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, and extends when the extending portion 1420 descends (tilts). The right end portion that starts contact with the extended portion 1420 has a surface that is substantially parallel to the contact start line FL1 that includes the point where the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start contact.

A smooth curved surface is formed from the right end of the extension 1420 toward the left end, which is the end point of contact with the extension 1420. The load transmission to and from the 8343 can be smoothly generated (with a small dynamic friction). Accordingly, the followability of the loaded portion 8343 with respect to the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

The center of gravity 8343b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the closed state (immersion posture) when the load from the power transmission member 1400 is not generated. That is, since the center of gravity 8343b includes the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (immersed posture) by the rotation due to its own weight. When the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 are in contact with each other, further rotation of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (immersion posture). To be done.

The connecting portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 (that is, a portion that is adjacent to the opening/closing plate 8300 and may cause a load). Thereby, the rigidity of the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while narrowing the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 causes the opening/closing plate 8300. Even if it collides with, the possibility that the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 will be damaged can be reduced.

It should be noted that the connecting portion 8342 only needs to be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, and the configuration mode thereof is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, the right end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344 may be connected (that is, two rods). It is also possible to support the left and right ends of the receiving plate 8341 with a rod), and in that case, two rods are connected and reinforced by a planar plate portion along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support rod portion 8344. Is also good.

The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-shaped portion having a front-back width that is approximately the same as the width in the lateral direction of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300, and is connected to the planar rolling plane 8341a and the left end of the rolling plane 8341a. And a facing surface 8341b that is disposed to face the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300 in the opened state (see FIG. 59).

The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a plane parallel to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the open/close plate 8300 in the open state (extended posture) in the open position (extended posture) in a plane position.

The facing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and the width in the lateral direction (thickness of the receiving plate 8341) is configured to be substantially equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. This makes it possible to increase the size of the surface that receives the load when the facing surface 8341b and the plate portion 8310 are in contact with each other, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged by the load when contacting (breakage or cracking). It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence or damage.

Here, the facing surface 8341b is disposed on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) of the plane that passes through the shaft support rod portion 8344 and is orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the movement locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60) is the rolling plane in the open state. It swells above 8341a (outward in the radial direction of the shaft support rod portion 8344). This makes it easier to push the ball (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240, which will be described later in detail.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, an operation mode and an operation sequence of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the opening/closing plate 8300, and the regulating member 1600 due to the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described.

63 and 64, the operations of the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 65 illustrates changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip end member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 with time.

63(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along the line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63(a). 63(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63(c).

64(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64(b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). 64(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along the line LXIVd-LXIVd of FIG. 64(c).

63 and 64, in order to facilitate understanding, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the restricting member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62 ), illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are closed (see FIG. 63 ( The state changing from (a) and FIG. 63(b)) to the open state (see FIG. 64(c) and FIG. 64(d)) is illustrated in time series.

That is, in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the state (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 is shown. 63(c) and 63(d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and the auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20(c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1. 64(a) and 64(b), the distal end member 1520 is displaced and is separated from the reference line O1 by the third distance h3 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a in the state of being arranged at the position separated by h2a. 64(c) and 64(d), the distal end member 1520 is displaced so that it is separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 which is shorter than the third distance h3 (the solenoid 1510 is located at the position of the solenoid 1510). The state of being arranged at the final arrival position when excited) is shown respectively.

In a state in which the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63(c)), the power transmission member 1400 sets the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 as the contact start line FL1. It is in agreement with the state of matching. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 63(c) and 63(d), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts to receive the load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the state shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), 63(c) and the state shown in FIG. 63(d), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state).

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (exciting) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the timings of the positions and states of the tip end member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 65, the distances h1, h2, h2a, h3, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

The opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip end member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening/closing plate 8300 starts its operation earlier than its auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and its operation ends earlier. ..

Further, the regulation member 1600 starts its operation toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts its operation toward the open state, and becomes the storage state at the same time when the opening/closing plate 8300 becomes the open state. As shown in the timing chart in FIG. 65, which is symmetrical, when the solenoid 1510 is deenergized, each member operates in the reverse order of driving (excitation).

As shown in FIG. 65, when the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is not in the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained (see FIGS. 63(c) and 63(d)). Therefore, during the period in which the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, the state in which the ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

Here, in the present embodiment, the movement locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is configured to bulge above the rolling plane 8341a, and the sphere P81 is detected at the timing when the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere P81. The center of the sphere P82 that flows down from the upstream side of the sphere P81 in a continuous manner is a plane that is orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320 and passes through the center of the shaft support rod portion 8344 (the maximum bulge point of the movement locus LC1. It is arranged closer to the detection sensor 1240 than the passing plane) (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes its state from the open state to the closed state, it is possible to apply a load to the ball P82 in the rightward direction (the direction to push it into the detection sensor 1240) at the upper end portion of the facing surface 8341b.

As a result, with the configuration of the present embodiment, assuming that a continuous ball is formed (the condition of the sphere upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfies the condition, see spheres P81 and P82 in FIG. 59), the sphere P81 is the detection sensor. When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled by being detected by the 1240 (for example, when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and a prescribed number of balls in the round game R are detected). However, only one ball (corresponding to the ball P82) riding on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 has an excess prize (so-called over prize. That is, the specified number of round games R (the book) In the embodiment, it is possible to allow more than 10 balls to be detected by the detection sensor 1240 (pass the first specific winning opening 1000a)).

In the present embodiment, the receiving surface 8341 operates in an arcuate trajectory to apply a load to the sphere P82, and after being pushed toward the detection sensor 1240 by the load, the receiving surface 8341 rolls on the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250. Therefore, as compared with the case where the ball P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 along the arcuate trajectory, the fluttering when the sphere P82 passes through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the sphere P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240 and falls down). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of delay, bounce, and the like).

In the present embodiment, the sphere is configured to be stored on the downstream side (storage channel 1231) of the detection sensor 1240. As described in the above embodiments, the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 detects the sphere. The passage of 1240 spheres can be regulated. Therefore, when the storage channel 1231 is full of spheres, the sphere P82 does not enter the storage channel 1231 by being regulated by the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. After the member 8340 is in the closed state, it is spilled and flows down toward the first outlet 66.

On the other hand, if there is a gap in the storage channel 1231, only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can allow the over-winning. Therefore, the arrangement of the spheres downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (that is, the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage channel 1231) can change the easiness of occurrence of the over-winning prize. This can be done by controlling the flow down of the sphere in the path 1231.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is smooth in such a manner that the radius of rotation is gradually shortened from the contact start portion (right end portion) with the power transmission member 1400 toward the contact end portion (left end portion). A curve was formed. As a result, the load can be transmitted with a small dynamic friction. Accordingly, the followability of the loaded portion 8343 with respect to the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

In the state where the continuous ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is limited to one ball on the rolling plane 8341a. When the state changes (rotates) from the open state to the closed state, a load is applied from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 rotates (when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is in the closed state), a limited number of balls (one in the present embodiment) enter the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). It is possible to make the ball easier. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that an over-winning prize with a limited number will occur.

In addition, the possibility of this over-winning prize changes depending on the degree of accumulation of the balls in the storage channel 1231. That is, it is possible to change the possibility of an over-winning prize depending on the arrangement state (the number of stored balls, etc.) of the balls in the storage channel 1231 when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 rotates (moves toward the closed state). Furthermore, the arrangement state of the balls in the storage channel 1231 can be adjusted by the drive (excitation) control mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the operation mode of the interference member 6930. That is, by controlling the driving (exciting) mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, it is possible to level the number of payout prize balls due to over-winning.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 in the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

66 and 68, a state after the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening/closing plate 8300 is in an open state (raising posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is in an open state (extended posture). 67 and 69, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (immersion posture). The state after the change is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiments except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from that in the above embodiments. Briefly described, the power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment is replaced with the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment.

As in the above-described embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front-side protruding end of the pressing portion 1422 and the front-side protruding end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are the same as the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400 and orthogonal to each other. It is placed on a plane. Therefore, the opening/closing plate 8300 is opened even when the time difference forming unit 5423 pushes the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 8300 (even before being pushed by the pushing unit 1422, corresponding to the state of FIG. 71A). The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

The thin plate member 9110 is extended to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with an auxiliary ball entrance 9111 having a size allowing a ball to pass therethrough, and a length capable of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. The rolling plate 9112 is mainly provided.

The auxiliary ball inlet 9111 is a through hole arranged to the left of the outlet 1150 in front view, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) balls are paid out by detecting passage of the balls. It is the prize ball mouth. Note that, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 may be a ball entrance (for example, an out hole) in which prize balls are not paid out.

The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate in which a ball flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the front cover plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (as it goes to the right, ) It is formed as an inclined surface that descends and inclines. Further, the rolling plate 9112 is formed to be connected to the lower side of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, and on the front side of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the rear side. It

That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided to the front side of the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 along the slope, then passes through the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in the present embodiment, three prize balls are paid out to the player.

The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed such that it does not pick up the sphere that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 and flows down the downflow path FK1 of the sphere that freely falls. That is, in a state in which the first variable winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball does not pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 no matter how many right hits are continued.

On the other hand, the opening/closing plate 8300 having an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the right is driven even slightly (for example, the opening/closing plate 8300 is excited for 0.1 seconds and rotated toward the open state), and the opening/closing plate 8300 moves to the right. When the ball flows down the load flow-down path FK2 in which the loaded ball flows down, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and can pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. That is, in the present embodiment, when the opening/closing plate 8300 is driven, the sphere contacting the opening/closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 other than the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Here, since the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 is different from that described in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

70 and 71, the operations of the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 72 illustrates changes in the driving (exciting) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600.

70(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70(a). 70(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70(c).

71(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71(a). 71(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71(c).

70 and 71, in order to facilitate understanding, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600, and the front cover plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69 ), the other components are omitted from the drawing, and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are closed (see FIG. 70 ( The state changing from (a) and FIG. 70(b)) to the open state (see FIG. 71(c) and FIG. 71(d)) is illustrated in time series.

That is, in FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b), the state (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 is shown. 70(c) and 70(d), the state in which the distal end member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIG. 71(c) and 71(b), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a is shown in FIGS. In FIG. 71(d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a. The states are illustrated respectively.

The state in which the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a (see FIG. 70C) is restricted by the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400. This is the same as the state in which the extension portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts contacting. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the restriction member 1600 starts to receive the load from the opening/closing plate 8300 (from the state shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b) to the state shown in FIG. 70( (c) and the state shown in FIG. 70(d), the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the raised posture (discharge state)).

Unlike the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing plate 8300 is opened when the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71(a)). The regulation member 1600 is in the storage state (the rising posture). Then, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71A) that was in the closed state is in the open state in the state where the tip end member 1520 is arranged at the position separated from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4 (FIG. 71A). 71(c)).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 71(d), the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (upward posture), and the regulation is performed. The member 1600 is maintained in the stored state.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (exciting) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

The opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but as shown in FIG. 72, there is a time difference in operation timing.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening/closing plate 8300 starts its operation earlier than the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the opening/closing plate 8300 moves. After the operation ends, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts the operation.

Further, the regulating member 1600 starts its operation toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts its operation toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time when the opening/closing plate 8300 is opened. As shown in the timing chart in FIG. 72, which is symmetrical, when the solenoid 1510 is de-energized, each member operates in the reverse order of driving (excitation).

As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 is driven from the non-excited state, only the opening/closing plate 8300 starts operating, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 does not start operating yet. Therefore, by shortening the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing a short opening), the state of the opening/closing plate 8300 can be changed while maintaining the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip end member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 over time. In FIG. 73, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

In FIG. 73, a case is shown in which the period for driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 is half of the time (0.1 second in this embodiment) required for the open/close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. (That is, the case of driving (exciting) for 0.05 seconds is shown).

In this case, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and the operation of raising only the opening/closing plate 8300 to the intermediate state is repeated. According to this operation, it is possible to apply a load to the sphere flowing down on the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300, so that the flow path of the sphere that has reached the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 8300 is driven flows down. The path FK1 can be switched to the load flow-down path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, the ball can be made to pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by continuing the right-handed ball launch, and the prize ball can be paid out to the player.

With this configuration, for example, it is possible to configure a game feature in which prize balls are paid out by a small hit game. In the small hitting game, by driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 in the open pattern shown in FIG. 73, the flow path of the ball reaching the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the opening/closing plate 8300 operates, and the auxiliary A ball can be guided to the ball entrance 9111 and a prize ball can be paid out.

Since the driving of the solenoid 1510 for the small hit game can be continuously executed a plurality of times, the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of times. For example, since one driving (exciting) period is 0.05 seconds, when the total driving (exciting) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) 36 times. be able to.

Further, by setting the drive (excitation) interval, it is possible to easily apply a load to the sphere via the opening/closing plate 8300. For example, when the sphere is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is set at an interval of 0.5 seconds because 0.6×X (the number of times the sphere reaches)=0.5×X+0.1×X= By driving (exciting) with, the load can be applied to the balls through the opening/closing plate 8300 at a rate of about one in five balls regardless of the timing of starting the driving (excitation).

In this case, about 7 balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 in one small hit game, and about 21 prize balls can be paid out to the player.

In this case, the period of the small hit game is 0.5 second interval×36 times=about 18 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the time of one small hit game, it is possible to prevent the situation where the special design holding ball runs out (cuts) by the end of the small hit game. Thereby, the small hit game can be generated without interruption.

Further, in this embodiment, since the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 arranged above the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is maintained in the closed state, as in the case where the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 operates (above the auxiliary ball entrance 9111). When a movable object is operated by, the sphere that flows down to the auxiliary inlet port 9111 side (that is, the sphere that flows down in the load flow-down path FK2) receives a load from the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and is repelled or opened/closed. It is possible to prevent the member 8340 from riding on the rolling plane 8341a and being guided by the detection sensor 1240.

It returns to FIG. 72 and demonstrates. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is not in the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained as described above in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, also in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily configure an overwinning prize with a limited number of balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the restriction member 1600 is controlled so as to change to the discharge state after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed. When the storage channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 from being accidentally accelerated, so that it is possible to prevent an over-winning.

Here, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing plate 8300 maintains the open state at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (see FIG. 71A). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be changed while maintaining the state in which the ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 (open state). This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (exciting) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and changes in the time and position of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 74, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is 1/4 of the time (0.1 second in this embodiment) required for the open/close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. The case is illustrated (that is, the case where the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is illustrated). In the following, this mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as "1/4 release".

In this case, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the state (maintain the storage of the sphere in the storage flow channel 1231), and only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the balls on the upper surfaces of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, several balls arranged on the upstream side of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the opening/closing plate 8300). The sphere arranged at the boundary of (1), mainly the sphere arranged outside the movement locus LC1) can be made to flow down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66).

As a result, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 passes the detection sensor 1240 (when 15 prize balls are paid out) when the opening/closing plate 8300 is still maintained in the open state. The case where the detection sensor 1240 passes through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 without passing through (the case where payout of three prize balls occurs) can be configured.

In this case, since the time until the specified number of balls passes the detection sensor 1240 is extended, the time of the round game R can be extended without causing a ball loss.

In addition, the upper and lower surfaces of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are provided with irregularities, or a vertically long rib is projected to the front side at a position on the front surface of the thin plate member 9110 where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 is in contact. Alternatively, the flow velocity of the spheres may be suppressed, and the spheres may be connected on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a sphere will be arranged at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the opening/closing plate 8300 when the 1/4 release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is executed. The function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved by canceling the driving (excitation) by ¼.

Moreover, the timing and the number of times of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set in a plurality of types by associating with the jackpot type.

For example, when the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1/4 of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released within 9.0 seconds required for 15 balls to reach the opening/closing plate 8300. Occurs five times, that is, once every 1.8 seconds, 1/4 release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, thereby assisting about five balls during the round game R. It can be guided to the entrance 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R.

In addition, this interval is doubled, that is, once every 3.6 seconds, the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, so that about 5 balls are played during the execution of the round game R twice. It can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific winning opening 1000a during the execution of the round game R twice.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to set equal intervals of 1.8 seconds in order to fill five times in 9.0 seconds. For example, the solenoid 1510 is 5 times during 9.0 seconds in a mode of adding 0.2 seconds in order of 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds and 2.2 seconds. 1/4 release may be caused. Further, the solenoid 1510 may be released by ¼ at different timings. This can make it difficult for the player to predict when the quarter release of the solenoid 1510 will occur.

Further, for example, by making the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 close to the first half of the round game R, the ball is guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by continuing to shoot the ball from the start point of the round game R. It is possible to configure a game feature that increases the probability of being played.

In this case, if the firing of the ball is stopped at the inter-round interval, the ball may not reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing when the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed. Can be suppressed.

That is, the player who has hit the ball in the interval between the rounds can start the next round game R while the hit ball has reached the vicinity of the first variable winning device 9000. Since the probability that the ball is guided to the ball opening 9111 can be increased, and as a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be increased, it is possible to allow the player to continue to hit the ball at an interval between rounds. it can.

Further, for example, by making the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 close to the latter half of the round game R, a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning (first identification) is reached until the middle of the round game R. It is possible to promote a loose jackpot game in which a ball is intermittently fired so that the winning hole 1000a does not occur.

In this case, in the latter half of the round game R, if the round game R is lengthened until the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed, the prize balls are paid out by the balls passing through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. Since it is possible to increase the number of payouts, it is possible to allow the player to execute a loose jackpot game such as willingly and intermittently firing a ball.

In this case, the number of times the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs in the latter half of the round game R is set to be different (for example, 0 times, 1 times, and 5 times). As a result, as a result of the loose jackpot game, it is possible to make a difference in the additional prize balls to be obtained, so that the player's attention to the falling manner of the balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 is maintained in a high state. can do.

On the other hand, the balls may be continuously fired and a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls may be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released. .. In this case, the payout of prize balls due to the passage of the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 cannot be expected, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R or the jackpot game end The timing to receive the lottery later can be advanced.

In this way, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim the payout of the prize balls through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 or ignore it and end the round game R early.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

It is configured such that a ball that collides with the opening/closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening/closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary entering port 9111 by being given a load toward the auxiliary entering port 9111. did. Thereby, even in the case of an operation mode in which the open/close plate 8300 is maintained in an open state for a short period of time, it is possible to easily pay out a prize ball. Therefore, at the time of a small hit game or the like, the player is given a ball. Can be fired at will.

A ball that reaches the upstream of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 at a specific timing by executing the 1/4 release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 while the opening/closing plate 8300 continues to guide the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Was made to flow toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. As a result, it is possible to provide variations in the progress mode of the round game R in the jackpot game and the payout mode of prize balls.

For example, even if the number of balls passing through the first specific winning port 1000a does not exceed the specified number, the player can pay the prize balls by entering the auxiliary winning port 9111 and the player can obtain the excess winning balls (first It is possible to obtain award balls (a number of award balls exceeding the number of award balls (150 in the present embodiment)) paid out when a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the specific winning opening 1000a.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 in the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

75 and 76, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is de-energized, and the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 reaches the lowest end. In FIG. 77, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is shown. Is driven (excited), and the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 can be discharged midway.

As shown in FIG. 75 to FIG. 77, the first variable winning device 10000 may include a case where a ball can be discharged from an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the front cover plate 10200. Except for the difference from the embodiment, the configuration described in the above embodiment is combined. Briefly described, the movable parts (that is, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600, the interference device 6900) excluding the intermediate discharge device 10180 are configured in the eighth embodiment. Is diverted as it is.

In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging a sphere at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231 will be described. In the present embodiment, the covering front plate 10200 extends in a box shape that opens toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage channel 1231, a projecting portion 1235, and a housing portion 10230 that includes an inclined surface 1237. ..

The housing portion 10230 is provided with a bulging portion 10232 formed such that the lower wall portion of the box bulges downward, and a through hole 10233 formed in the front-rear direction near the bulging portion 10232.

The bulging portion 10232 is bulged vertically below the sphere whose flow is restricted by the interference member 6930, and has a volume larger than that of the sphere. Is formed. Accordingly, the sphere staying at the position near the interference member 6930 can be configured to drop downward from the storage channel 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

The through hole 10233 is a horizontal hole 10233a extending horizontally below the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 and a vertical hole that is spatially connected to the horizontal hole 10233a and extends downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. 10233b and the vertical surface 10233b is provided with an inclined surface 10233c which is inclined downward toward the rear side as the upper bottom surface.

The lateral holes 10233a are arranged above the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right ends, below the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 near the right end, and at the left end near the storage channel 1231. It is configured to enter above a plane (a plane having a constant inclination) along the extension line of the lower bottom surface.

The main body member 10100 has the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, in addition to the structure described as the configuration of the main body member 1100 in the above embodiment. A lateral hole 10111 to be bored, an outlet 10112 through which a ball sent to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c is allowed to pass, and a thin plate member 10110 arranged to move along the lateral hole 10111. An intermediate ejection device 10180 having a portion.

The intermediate ejection device 10180 mainly includes a movable member 10181 which is inserted into both the lateral holes 10111 and 10233a and is movable left and right, and a solenoid 10182 which generates a driving force for moving the movable member 10181 left and right. Prepare

The movable member 10181 energizes the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes the opening (the opening leading to the through hole 10233) in the middle of the storage channel 1231 when the solenoid 10182 is not energized (non-driven). In the (driving) state, the state is switched to the open state (see FIG. 77) that allows passage of the sphere through the opening (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the middle of the storage channel 1231.

The movable member 10181 is maintained in a state where it is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not on it. As a result, it is possible to avoid friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232, and it is possible to reduce the movement resistance.

On the other hand, when the movable member 10181 is in the closed state, the upper surface of the bulging portion 10232 and the left and right end portions of the movable member 10181 are vertically supported by being vertically supported. Accordingly, when the movable member 10181 is closed, even if the sphere rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181, the movable member 10181 can be prevented from drooping excessively, and the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 can be prevented. The flow of water can be smoothed.

The movable member 10181 is an upper surface, is formed as an inclined surface that descends and inclines toward the left, and an inclined upper surface 10181a that functions as a rolling surface on which a ball rolls in a closed state, and a lower surface that is viewed from the front. An inclined lower surface 10181b that is formed at the left end portion and inclines downward toward the right is mainly provided.

The inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state before the ball rides, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 vertically (a state in which the movable member 10181 is floating), the right end portion is adjacent to the storage. The flow path 1231 is arranged slightly below the lower bottom surface. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the load (resistance) received by the sphere when the sphere transfers from the storage channel 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a.

Further, the inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state after the sphere has been ridden, and in the state where the movable member 10181 abuts the bulging portion 10232 in the vertical direction (the state in which the movable member 10181 is sunk), the left end portion is adjacent to the storage. The flow path 1231 has a shape that is flush with the lower bottom surface. This makes it possible to reduce the load (resistance) that the sphere receives when the sphere transfers from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage channel 1231.

Note that the above-described inclined upper surface 10181a has a gentler inclination than the shape of the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 and is not the same shape. However, since the difference is slight, the time required for discharging one sphere from the storage channel 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2 in this embodiment as in the above embodiment. Seconds.

The inclined lower surface 10181b makes it easier for the sphere to ride on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state, and to easily get on the bulging portion 10232 even when the movable member 10181 leans forward. Is an inclined surface provided on the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the tip portion of the movable member 10181 is restricted from moving to the inner side surface of the vertical hole 10233b and stops in that state, and the sphere of the storage channel 1231 is kept flowing down smoothly. be able to.

When the intermediate discharge device 10180 is opened (see FIG. 77), the upstream balls, including the third storage ball counting from the downstream end, flow down the vertical hole 10233b and are loaded from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is sent to the back surface side through the discharge port 10112 and is sent to a ball discharge path (not shown).

In the present embodiment, the discharge port 10112 is provided with a detection sensor 10112a for detecting the passage of spheres, and the number of spheres that have passed through the discharge port 10112 can be determined. The ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is a detection unit that detects the ball discharged from the detection sensor 10112a or the discharge opening 1150 (for example, the specific area detecting sensor 4860, the non-specific area detecting sensor 4870, FIG. 51). Passage is detected by the reference), and control is performed to determine whether the number of entered balls and the number of discharged balls match.

According to the present embodiment, due to the operation mode of the intermediate discharge device 10180 in the round game R, when a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel It is possible to switch between the case where 1231 becomes full and the state where the storage channel 1231 does not become full. This will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 78, for ease of understanding, it is assumed that the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state.

78(a) to 78(d) are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a and a change in time of the state of the movable member 10181 in the round game R. In addition, in FIG. 78(a), the first specific winning opening 1000a is in an open state (also shown as "open" in the figure. The closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also shown as "closed" in the figure. The same applies to the following figures), and the time change when the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also referred to as “closed” in the figures. The same applies in the following figures) In 78(b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also shown as “open” in the drawings. This is the same in the subsequent figures) for the period in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is in the open state. The time change of each case is illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 78(c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after a lapse of a first predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) after the first specific winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state, and then, When the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state after 2 predetermined times (3 seconds in the present embodiment) and is maintained as it is, in FIG. 78(d), the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened. The movable member 10181 changes to an open state after a lapse of a reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in the present embodiment) from the start of the state change, and then the movable member 10181 closes after a second predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses. The time change when the state is changed and maintained as it is is illustrated.

In this way, the drive of the movable member 10181 (drive of the solenoid 10182) is associated with (combined with) a combination of what round of the round game R to be executed and what the jackpot type is. It can be executed in various types of driving modes.

For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(a), during the round game R, the movable member 10181 is always in the closed state, so that the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is discharged similarly to the above-described embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the spheres are not discharged from the midway position of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is formed by entering a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls into the first specific winning port 1000a. It will be full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult (may be impossible) to generate an over-winning prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

Also, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(b), during the round game R, the movable member 10181 is always in the open state, so the sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 is different from the above embodiments. Before reaching the discharge port 1150, it falls into the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112. That is, even if a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 does not become full. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an overwinning prize exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

In FIG. 78(b), after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released as the end of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is passed 2 seconds (the period required for the sphere to pass through the storage channel 1231). Is changed to an open state, so that it is possible to drop the ball including the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (immediately before the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released) toward the through hole 10233. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a can be configured not to flow down to the outlet 1150 at all.

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the opened state 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R, and 3.0 seconds later, the movable member 10181 changes. Since it is controlled to change from the open state to the closed state, if a ball can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, a specified number (10 in the present embodiment). Even if the (individual) balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 is not filled up. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an overwinning prize exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

In order to arrange the sphere above the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, considering the time when the sphere flows down the storage channel 1231, about 2.5 from the start of the round game R. It is necessary for the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second has elapsed.

In the present embodiment, the time of about 2.5 seconds is the time required for the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (the shortest time). Time, about 4 seconds). Therefore, it would not be enough if the ball was shot from the start of the round game R.

Therefore, in order to prevent the storage channel 1231 from becoming full, it is necessary to continue firing the ball even in the inter-round interval before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval between rounds.

Also, the driving mode shown in FIG. 78(c) is configured by the display device or the like so that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the information as to which round of the round game R occurs and whether or not it occurs in the first place. Thereby, regardless of whether or not it is the round game R driven in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(c), suppressing the game mode in which the ball firing is stopped in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R. You can

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(d), when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is brought into the open state, and 2.0 seconds have elapsed from that point. After that, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change its state to the closed state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively executed while the round game R is continuing, but the control is skipped when the round game R is finished, and the movable member 10181 is forced to the closed state. To be switched.

In the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(d), for example, when the first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment). When the individual balls) pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R is completed before the movable member 10181 is opened, so that all the balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a are stored in the storage channel. It is stored in 1231 and the storage channel 1231 becomes full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult (may be impossible) to generate an over-winning prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

On the other hand, for example, when the second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls are the first specific winning. When passing through the mouth 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the round game R ends, the ball falls toward the through hole 10233, and is discharged from the discharge port 10112, so that the storage channel 1231 is full. It won't turn up. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an overwinning prize exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

Therefore, according to the drive mode of FIG. 78(d), depending on whether the time required for the round game R is less than the reference time T11s or not less than the reference time T11s, the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is set. It is possible to switch whether or not an overexceeding prize is generated.

In the case of this drive mode, if the payout number of the prize balls in the round game R is emphasized, it is preferable to execute the round game R for a long time. That is, it is preferable to intermittently stop the firing of balls so that a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of balls do not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a early. Therefore, there is a possibility that a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at an interval between rounds is promoted.

On the other hand, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78(c), as described above, by continuously firing the balls at the intervals between rounds, it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the excess winning.

In this way, by arranging the driving modes in which the preferable ball firing modes are contradictory, in the round game R of the jackpot game (the same round, it is controlled to be different driving modes depending on the jackpot type), The player's concentration on the jackpot game can be improved as compared with the case where the jackpot game is always executed in the same launch mode (the profits obtained by the player are the same).

According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the regulation member 1600 is maintained in the storage state, the number of balls that can enter the storage flow channel 1231 is determined by the operation mode of the movable member 10181. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the storage channel 1231 is filled with 10 balls and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not filled with 10 balls.

In addition, when the interference member 6930 is in an extended state, seven storage channels 1231 are provided (9 when two balls are already arranged downstream of the interference member 6930, see FIG. 75). It is possible to switch between the case where the tank is filled with the ball of) and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not filled with the ball (7 pieces or 9 pieces).

Although the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 in an extended state in response to the movable member 10181 being in the open state, it is possible to prevent the sphere from riding on the momentum and passing (jumping) in the left-right direction above the through hole 10233. Can be prevented.

The driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by operating the operation button 300.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

By opening the movable member 10181, the sphere can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. Thereby, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a.

That is, while keeping the first specific winning opening 1000a in an open state, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the number stored in the storage channel 1231, and the case of entering the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to configure a case where the number of balls is different from the number stored in the storage channel 1231. As a result, it is possible to change the possibility that an over-winning of the first specific winning opening 1000a will occur depending on the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 according to the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 taken along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the front plate 11200.

As shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of this embodiment, the shape of the opening/closing plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream side portion of the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted, and the main body member 11100 is provided with the first variable winning device 11000. It has the same configuration as the first variable winning a prize device 3000 of the third embodiment except that the 2 additional winning openings 11183 and the like are added. Therefore, the same elements as those of the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The main body member 11100 has the thin plate member 11110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, in addition to the configuration already described in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, separated by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. A pair of left and right protruding ribs 11111 protruding toward the front side of the thin plate member 1110, a guide hole 11112 formed as a horizontally long hole for guiding the movement of an opening/closing means 11190, which will be described later, and extending to the left of the guide hole 11112. And a guide recess 11113 configured as a bottomed recess.

The main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning opening 11183 configured to allow the ball to pass therethrough, and an opening/closing means 11190 for changing the winning probability of the ball into the second additional winning opening 11183. The details of the opening/closing means 11190 will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the fall delay plate 3250 formed on the front cover plate 11200 maintains only the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position farther from the side wall portion 1220 than the diameter of the sphere on the upstream side, The left part of the cut surface SP12 is omitted.

The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position at which the sphere rolling on the inclined surface 1237 and reaching the drop delay plate 3250 does not reach by itself. That is, the sphere that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the drop delay plate 3250 flows downward to the right (in the direction close to the detection sensor 1240) along the inclination of the drop delay plate 3250 unless an external force is applied. To do.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the ball and the ball is sent to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball drops to the second additional winning opening 11183 side with a high probability. This falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening/closing means 11190 newly described in the present embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening from which three prize balls are paid out by detecting passage of the ball.

The opening/closing plate 11300 is provided with an inclined surface 11340 that remains after being scraped off in a shape that inclines so as to approach the left shaft portion 1320 from the rotation tip side toward the rotation shaft side in the left half portion.

The inclined surface 11340 is located at a position where the left-right speed becomes 0 (final reaching position FP12, figure) after the end on the rotation tip side has landed on the drop delay plate 3250 to the right of the cutting surface SP12. 82(a) (see FIG. 82(a)).

Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state when the sphere exists at the position where the left-right direction velocity is 0 (final reaching position FP12, see FIG. 82A), the inclined surface 11340 is passed through. Then, the ball is loaded. This will be described with reference to FIG.

82(a) to 82(c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. 82(a) to 82(c) show changes in the state of the first variable winning device 11000 in chronological order. In FIG. 82(a), the opening/closing plate 11300 is in the closed state, and the tilt The final arrival position FP12 of the ball rolling on the surface 1237 and landing on the drop delay plate 3250 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIG. 82(b), the opening/closing plate 11300 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 82(a). The state after the change is illustrated, and in FIG. 82C, a state in which the sphere falls from the state illustrated in FIG. 82B is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), the sphere arranged at the final reaching position FP12 comes into contact with the inclined surface 11340 when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, and is given a leftward load. The ball to which the leftward load is applied is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the drop delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning opening 11183.

On the other hand, when the ball has not reached the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when the ball has flown slightly from the final arrival position FP12 and is arranged at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 82A), the opening/closing plate 11300 is opened. Even if the state changes, the inclined surface 11340 does not come into contact with the sphere, and the sphere has a rightward component because the opening/closing plate 11300 is in the rotation direction (the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal). Direction) and is pushed toward the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, depending on which position on the front side of the opening/closing plate 11300 the ball is arranged at, the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, and the ball moves toward the detection sensor 1240. , And can be switched to the second additional winning opening 11183.

The payout of the prize balls by the balls passing through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an excess prize ball that exceeds the award ball scheduled for the jackpot game for the player, so a ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183. The more is, the more profits the player can get.

As long as the opening/closing plate 11300 maintains the closed state (inter-round interval period), the ball is continuously emitted toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the opening/closing plate is compared with the case where the ball is stopped from being emitted. Since it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the ball is placed at the final reaching position FP12 at the timing when 11300 changes to the open state, it is possible to promote the game mode in which the ball is continuously fired over the interval period between rounds. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the player stops the ball firing during the inter-round interval period.

Since entering the second additional winning opening 11183 is conditional on the opening/closing plate 11300 changing to the open state, the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game). In the states other than the above, it is configured such that a ball does not easily enter the second additional winning hole 11183 even if the player continues to hit the ball to the right.

As a result, in a situation where the opening/closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation where a right-handed instruction effect is not executed), even if the player makes a right-handed stroke, the ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183. It can be configured such that it is difficult for the player to obtain the accompanying profit. That is, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be made to function as a winning opening that makes it easier for a ball to enter in a situation where the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven (small hit game or big hit game).

Next, the opening/closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c) show the arrangement of the protruding rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190, and the second additional winning port 11183. It is a schematic front view of the protruding rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190, and the second additional winning opening 11183 that are schematically shown. 85(a) to 85(c) show changes in the state of the opening/closing means 11190 with time.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening/closing means 11190 is a movable means that is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moves to the left and right in conjunction with the movement of the tip member 1520, and is supported in the guide hole 11112 in an inserted state. A main body support portion 11191, a transmission portion 11192 extending upward from a rear surface side portion of the main body support portion 11191 and supported by a tip member 1520, and a leftward extending portion from a front surface side portion of the main body support portion 11191. The extending portion 11193, the first protruding portion 11194 that protrudes to the front side at the left end of the extending portion 11193, and a space slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere are provided on the right side of the first protruding portion 11194. And a second projecting portion 11195 projecting in the same shape as the first projecting portion 11194.

A method of assembling the opening/closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically enlarged so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portions are slightly vertically longer than the main body support portion 11191. Is formed as a horizontally long hole.

Therefore, after transmitting the transmission portion 11192 to the back side through this enlarged portion, the opening/closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and then the drive device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100, and the transmission portion 11192 is supported by the tip end member 1520. Thus, the opening/closing means 11190 can be assembled in a manner interlocking with the tip member 1520. Note that, in the movable range of the solenoid 1510, the transmission portion 11192 does not reach the enlarged portion of the right end of the guide hole 11112 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), which prevents the opening/closing means 11190 from coming off the guide hole 11112. can do.

The extended portion 11193 is formed with a thickness that can be completely accommodated in the guide recess 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down on the front side of the opening/closing means 11190 from colliding with the extending portion 11193, the flow path of the ball changes in the front-rear direction, or the extending portion 11193 moves due to the load from the ball. It can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates that are inclined downward to the left when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, when the ball on the drop delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 and the opening/closing means 11190 enters the second additional winning opening 11183. It can be switched whether or not to do it. This will be described in detail.

In FIG. 85(a), the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end of the movement range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end of the second protruding portion 11195 and the right protruding rib 11111 are arranged on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

When a ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85(a), the balls come into contact with the second protruding portion 11195 and flow leftward. Therefore, since it deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down, it is possible to reduce the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183.

FIG. 85(b) shows a state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at an intermediate position in the movement range (see FIG. 20(c)). That is, it corresponds immediately after the opening/closing plate 11300 is closed.

In this case, the upper end of the first projecting portion 11194 is arranged to the left of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111, and the upper end of the second projecting portion 11195 is the second additional winning prize. It is located to the right of the centerline of the mouth 11183.

Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85(b), the ball abuts the first projecting portion 11194 and flows to the right, and abuts the second projecting portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the falling ball flows down toward the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be increased.

In FIG. 85(c), the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the right end position of the movement range (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state, as in FIG. 85(b).

In this case, the upper end portion of the first protruding portion 11194 is arranged to the right of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position between the pair of protruding ribs 11111.

Therefore, when the sphere falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85C, the sphere abuts the first protruding portion 11194 and flows leftward. Since the falling ball deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down, it is possible to reduce the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183.

That is, the opening/closing means 11190 maintains a low probability that a ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained in an open state or a closed state, and during the state change, the second additional winning award. It is configured to increase the probability that a ball will enter the mouth 11183.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing means 11190 is linked with the state of the opening/closing plate 1300 to change the probability that a ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183. Here, there will be described a case where a ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 and a case where it cannot be expected due to a difference in drive control of the solenoid 1510.

The phenomenon that the sphere flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the drop delay plate 3250 occurs when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82B and 82C).

Therefore, in the drive pattern (the operation pattern with a low probability of entering the ball) where the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the driven (excited) state, when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the protruding rib 11111, the tip member 1520. Similar to the arrangement described above, the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position. Since the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained and the state of the opening/closing means 11190 is maintained, the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

On the other hand, immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the drive (excitation) is once released (the opening/closing plate 11300 is opened for a short time) in the drive pattern (the operation pattern with a high probability of entering the ball) of the cut surface SP12. When the ball flowing to the left passes through the protruding rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position, but thereafter, the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released, so that the solenoid 1510 is released. The opening/closing means 11190 is moved toward the right end position by the urging force of the return spring. As a result, the sphere that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a rightward load from the first projecting portion 11194 and flows down along the second projecting portion 11195. Therefore, toward the second additional winning port 11183. Can flow down.

In this way, by providing variations in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 11300, the cut surface SP12 of the cut surface SP12 at the same timing (for example, the timing at which the inclined surface 11340 abuts the sphere at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82(b)). It is possible to change the probability that the ball that has flowed to the left will enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

Note that, in the operation pattern with a high probability of entering a ball, the timing of canceling the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the sphere that flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 under the load from the opening/closing plate 11300 passes through the protruding rib 11111 and reaches between the first protruding portion 11194 and the second protruding portion 11195. Is controlled so as to cancel the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510.

In addition, the second additional winning opening 11183 may be configured as a winning opening for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 by entering a ball. In this case, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be increased by the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 11300 during the interval period between rounds, it is in a high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol after the jackpot game is over. Despite this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon that causes a disadvantage to the player, because the variation accompanying the suspension of the special symbol 1 is started.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Depending on which position on the front side of the opening/closing plate 11300 the ball is placed at the timing when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, the ball moves toward the detection sensor 1240 (enters the ball), or the second additional winning opening 11183. In addition to being able to switch whether to go to (enter the ball), it is configured to make it easier for the ball to flow down to the second additional winning opening 11183 if the ball is continuously fired during the inter-round interval period. As a result, as a result, it is easier to increase the number of payout prize balls if the ball is continuously fired during the inter-round interval period. Therefore, a game mode in which the ball is continuously fired during the inter-round interval period is promoted. It can be done easily.

The second additional winning opening 11183 is configured such that it is difficult for the ball to enter even if the ball reaches while the state of the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained. As a result, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be made to function as a winning opening that makes it easier for a ball to enter in a state where the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven (small hit game or big hit game).

While the state of the opening/closing means 11190 is maintained, it is difficult to enter the second additional winning opening 11183, while the ball is likely to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 during the change of the state of the opening/closing means 11190. In addition to being configured as described above, a ball loaded from the opening/closing plate 11300 when the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state is connected to the second additional winning port 11183. It was configured to flow down to 11183. Thereby, by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 11300 after the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven toward the open state (the round game R has started), the probability that the ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183. Can be changed.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 140. 86(a) and 86(b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. 86(a) and 86(b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is visible, and a part of the side wall portion 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. It is illustrated by. In addition, in FIG. 86(a), a schematic diagram showing a shielded state of the first variable winning device 6000 is shown, and in FIG. 86(b), the inside is changed from the shielded state where it is difficult to visually recognize (is difficult to see but visible). The schematic diagram which shows the transparent state of the 1st variable winning a prize device 6000 at the time of performing the transparent production which changes to a visible transparent state is shown. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 by the thin plate member 1210 disposed on the front side of the storage channel 1231. It is configured (the thin plate member 1210 is configured to have low permeability).

In addition, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage channel 1231 is formed as a bent channel and the downstream side cannot be visually recognized. It is configured so that the number of spheres stored in can not be grasped. In addition, the arrangement position of the interference device 6900 is located downstream of the bent portion, so that the movable state of the interference device 6900 cannot be visually recognized.

Further, by extending the thin plate member 1210 on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 86(a)) in the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 14), the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is limited. However, the inside of the storage channel 1231 is configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

With such a configuration, it may be difficult to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the closed state of the first variable winning device 6000. it can.

In the variable winning device 6000 configured as described above, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on that a predetermined condition (for example, success of timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88(b)) is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the front cover plate 1200 is composed of a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside is visible. Accordingly, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on, it is possible for the player to know the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900.

An optical sensor for detecting light incident from the outside may be provided behind the front cover 1200. In this case, by utilizing the characteristics of the half mirror that makes it possible to visually recognize the inside by irradiating strong light from the outside, it is possible to detect that a fraudulent act of irradiating the inside of the front cover plate 1200 with strong light and visually recognizing the inside was performed. , It can be determined by the output of the optical sensor. Therefore, by setting an error command in response to a change in the output of the optical sensor and controlling so as to make it difficult to continue the game, fraud can be suppressed.

In the present control example, the cover front plate 1200 is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmissive state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a part of the front covering plate 1200 (for example, the thin plate member 1210) or the light emitting means is movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) that is constantly lit to the front covering plate 1200 is switched. It may be configured such that the inside thereof is in a visible state only when the movable portion is located at a predetermined position.

Alternatively, the front cover plate 1200 may be formed of a transparent color whose inside can be visually recognized, and the surface thereof may be subjected to a process (for example, a textured process) of irregularly reflecting the irradiated light. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the various lamps makes it difficult to see the inside of the first variable winning device 6000, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off (that is, various types). The inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible when the lamp is not lit. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the variable winning device 6000.

When such a configuration is used, a shield wall that shields the first variable winning device 6000 from being irradiated with light emitted from various lamps is provided, and the shield wall is made variable between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide a configuration. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 even while the game is being played.

Further, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the first variable winning device 6000 with light and performing light emission control on the light emitting means, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. A state (a state where light is emitted) and a visible state (a state where light is not emitted) may be switched.

Further, a movable member for decoration is provided on the cover front plate 1200 whose inside can be visually confirmed, and the operation of the movable member is controlled, so that the inside of the storage channel 1231 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is A state in which the storage channel 1231 does not overlap with the storage channel 1231) and a state in which the inside of the storage channel 1231 is difficult to visually recognize (a movable movable member for decoration covers the storage channel 1231). You may make it switch.

Further, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the cover front plate 1200 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire range of the storage channel 1231 and ensures that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the attitude in which a normal game is played.

For example, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize only the lower half (downstream side of the bent portion) of the storage channel 1231 and ensure the visibility of the upper half (even if the formation of the upper half mirror is omitted. It is also possible to make it difficult to visually recognize only the portion of the interference device 6900 that overlaps with the interference member 6930 in a front view, based on the same idea. This makes it possible to construct at low cost a structure that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900.

Further, for example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 may be ensured (the formation of the half mirror of the lower half is omitted), while the upper half may be made difficult to be visually recognized. In this case, the lower limit of the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 can be grasped by visually recognizing the spheres remaining in the lower half of the storage flow channel 1231 while being stored in the storage flow channel 1231. It can be difficult to know the exact number.

Therefore, when the player temporarily stops the firing of the balls in order to reduce the number of useless balls (the balls that do not enter the winning opening), it is difficult to set the timing of stopping the firing. In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in this control example, when the storage channel 1231 is full (10 balls are stored), no more balls can be expected. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to reduce waste balls by stopping the firing of the balls at that timing.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the number of balls that entered the first variable winning device 6000 in the predetermined number of round games R does not necessarily match the number of balls that are stored in the storage channel 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the 1-variable winning device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 cannot be accurately known. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to visually check the inside of the storage channel 1231.

That is, because of the configuration of the present control example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 is ensured (the formation of the half mirror of the lower half is omitted), while the configuration of making the upper half difficult to see is effective, It becomes difficult for the player to easily determine the timing to stop the ball firing. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention and concentration on the ball firing in the jackpot game, and prevent the player from playing the game casually.

A feature of this control example shown in FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) is that the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) is operated with respect to the operation timing of the interference member 6930 in addition to the above-described change in the visual recognition state. The timing that can be set in is prepared, but details will be described later.

Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. A plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be movable. Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

FIG. 87 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 87(b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main design with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached designs that imitate characters such as planers, furoshiki, and helmets. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom in a cyclical manner for variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second.

In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot). It is possible to suppress oversight. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a reserved ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time. If both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to leave a ball in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). Yes, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. to cause.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the type of the special symbol (either the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) in which the lottery is easy to be executed depending on the game state is configured differently. In the main display area Dm, a variable display in the case where the lottery of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed in the current game state is executed is displayed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, the variable display when the lottery of the special symbol which is difficult to be performed in the current game state is performed is displayed.

Here, the fact that the special symbol lottery that is difficult to perform the lottery is executed is a great attention matter for the player. For example, in the normal state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is difficult to be performed in the lottery is executed, and if the lottery result is a big hit, compared to the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the player There are cases where the degree of expectation of profits obtained is high. Further, for example, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol 1 which is difficult to perform the lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a big hit, compared to the case where the special symbol 2 is a big hit. In some cases, the degree of expectation of profits that the player can obtain may be low.

Therefore, in the small area Ds3, by performing the variable display only when the special symbol lottery in which the lottery is difficult to be executed in the current game state is executed (by separating the variable display in the main display area Dm), the game It becomes easier to attract the player's attention, and the player can be drawn into the variable display.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of a third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed in the right small region Ds3. In the small area Ds2 at the center, usually, a predetermined character 710 (in this control example, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character A notice production is performed by showing it up.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and, When a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed, the number of entered balls is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first. It is shown not only by the symbol display device 37 but also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small region Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol (second symbol) displayed in the lower half. The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640. FIG. 87 exemplifies a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed and zero second retained symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed to a part of the third symbol display device 81 by numbers, or the area divided into four is changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92, a timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described.

In the present control example, based on an operation on the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1 ), an effect related to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86) is executed. Note that examples of effects related to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 include, for example, effects that change the visibility inside the storage channel 1231 and discharge modes of the spheres stored inside the storage channel 1231. The effect etc. to change are illustrated. Then, these effects are configured such that the content of the effects changes depending on the degree of deviation between the operation timing that is a predetermined reference and the timing when the player operates the operation button 300.

Here, in this control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1 ). Then, according to the timing effect (operation effect), the effect is configured so that the profit obtained by the player is maximized by executing the operation at a good timing. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

First, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during timing production (operation production). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation situation with respect to the operation means (operation button 300) are used to change the operation based on the operation of the operation means. The display contents of the three-symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the third symbol display device 81, a round number display portion 714 displaying the current round number is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a mode indicating that the round game R of the third round is being performed, and In the area Ds2, the acquisition display indicating the number of balls won during the jackpot is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim right" is displayed on the guide display unit for guiding the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls obtained based on the fact that the balls have won the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 1000a. To be done. This acquisition number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 1000a, then is moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally, of the small area Ds2. It is added as an acquisition display.

In the number-of-rounds display unit 714, the display regarding the section of the game currently being executed (round number or interval) is displayed large on the left side, and the display regarding the section of the game started after the end of the section of the game currently being executed is displayed on the right side. It is displayed small.

Further, four circles are displayed side by side below the round number display. The filled circles are switched depending on the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the circle at the left end is filled (see FIG. 88(a), corresponding to the lack display) and stored in the storage channel 1231. When the number of spheres to be stored is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 If the number is less than 9, the second circle from the right is filled (see FIG. 92(a), corresponding to the lack display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10. In this case, the circle at the right end is filled (see FIG. 92(b), corresponding to full display).

At the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will start from the next round and a guide display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. .. Then, on the lower side of the screen, the effect area used for the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In this effect area, a button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and a display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88(b)) corresponding to the button display mode 715 is displayed as a sub display area Ds4. Below the sub-display area Ds4, there is provided a sub-display area Ds5 which is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and which displays information regarding the operation of the player.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 88(b), the sub display area Ds4 is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, and the display pointer 719 is a display mode indicating operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at a timing matched with the bar display portion 717, a success effect (see FIG. 88B described later) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display portion 717, the failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the transparent lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on in association with the success effect being executed in the fourth round game R (see FIG. 86(b)). In the description of this control example, as shown in FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b), the front cover plate 1200 is difficult to visually recognize the inside when the transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off, while the transmissive lamp is not visible. The half mirror is configured to switch to a transmissive state in which the inside can be visually confirmed by lighting 227ba to 227be. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flow-down state of the sphere flowing down near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)) (of the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231) It is possible to let the player grasp the storage mode).

Also, as shown in FIG. 89, in connection with the failure effect being executed in the fourth round game R, some of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on. As a result, the storage mode of the spheres arranged near the interference device 6900 (the lower half of the storage channel 1231) cannot be visually recognized, but is arranged near the detection sensor 1240 (the upper half of the storage channel 1231). The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 88( a ), while the notice effect is being executed, the characters “standby” are scroll-displayed from right to left in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

Next, the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b). When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scroll-displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing at which the display pointer 719a matches the bar display portion 717, the screen center is displayed. In addition to displaying the character “good” as the result display mode 720, the fact that the operation button 300 has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), at the same time that the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters "Attention to attacker!" are displayed in the vicinity of the result display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub display area Ds5. Similarly to, the character "good" is displayed.

In this case, the characters “good” are dispersedly arranged on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can easily notice the display and the attacker (the first variable winning device 6000) who notices the display. ). Then, the player can be made aware that the storage balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 can be visually recognized, and the player who notices this can determine the stored number. Accordingly, the appropriate launch ball adjustment can be performed.

The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719c does not coincide with the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect), and the result display mode 720 at the center of the screen is " The character "bad" is displayed, and the fact that the operation button 300 has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters “bad” are displayed in the sub display area Ds5 as in the result display mode 720. Note that the character "Attention to the attacker!" is not displayed here.

In this case, the characters "bad" are dispersedly arranged on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can easily notice the display. In addition, by not intentionally displaying the character "Attention to the attacker!", the player can attack the player (attacking the first variable) until the storage balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 are difficult to see. Since it is possible to suppress attention to the winning device 6000), it is possible to maintain the player's attention to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's confidence in the display of the characters “Attention to the attacker!” (reliability that profit can be obtained by following the display).

As described above, when the result display mode 720 is displayed as shown in FIG. 89, some of the transmissive lamps 227ba are lit. On the other hand, in this control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the round game R of the fourth round, the operation of the operation button 300 is continued even if 3 seconds have passed after the display pointer 719 passed the bar display portion 717. If not performed, since it is controlled to keep all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be turned off, in the round game R thereafter (from the fourth round to the sixth round), the storage channel 1231 It is configured so that it is extremely difficult to see the inside.

90(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R, and FIG. 90(b) to FIG. 91(b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation situation with respect to the operation means (operation button 300) are used to change the operation based on the operation of the operation means. The display contents of the three-symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90, on the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned number-of-rounds display section 714 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a mode showing that it is during an interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display that suggests the number of balls that have been won during the jackpot is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "aiming to the right" is displayed on the guide display unit that guides the game method.

At the center of the screen, an operation instruction display composed of the characters “press!” that prompts the user to operate the operation button 300 is executed. Then, on the lower side of the screen, the effect area used for the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, the band display section 716, which is a display mode indicating the operation timing, is displayed similarly to the bar display section 717. The band display section 716 is provided adjacent to the first band section 716a on the right side of the bar display section 717, on which the word "relief" is displayed, and on the left side of the first band section 716a. And a third band 716c in which the characters "highest" are overlapped with each other and the characters "Fail" are displayed on the left side of the second band 716b. ..

In the sub display area Ds4, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed from right to left as described above. In this control example, the profit obtained by the player is controlled so as to change depending on the position of the display pointer 719d on the band display portion 716 to operate the operation button 300 (operation means).

For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is above the first band portion 716a, the peace of mind effect (see FIG. 91A described later) is executed. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, the advantageous phenomenon of being able to acquire the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol occurs, while the payout of the prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced (the specified number. (In the present control example, the number of prize balls cannot be made as much as 10 balls cannot be entered), and a disadvantageous event occurs that the duration of the fifth round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds). ..

Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operating means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is above the second band 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90(b) described later) is executed. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, there is an advantageous event that the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol can be obtained, and in the round game R of the fifth round, the specified number (10) of balls are first The advantageous event that the ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds) occurs, but the disadvantage does not occur.

In addition, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the third band 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not operated, the failure effect is produced. (See FIG. 91(b) described later) is executed. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, the disadvantage of not being able to obtain the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol occurs, while the prescribed number (10) of balls is first in the round game R of the fifth round. An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

It is to be noted that the maximum benefit can be obtained by operating the operation button 300 (operating means) when the display pointer 719 is located on the second band portion 716b which vertically overlaps the bar display portion 717. Also, even if the display is immediately shifted from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90(b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scroll-displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the display pointer 719d is vertically aligned with the second band portion 716b, the operation button 300 is operated. , “Max!V acquisition!” (maximum effect) is displayed in the center of the screen as the result display mode 720, and the fact that the operation button 300 has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. It As a result, the player can visually recognize that the maximum profit can be obtained, and the interest of the player can be improved.

It should be noted that since the display pointer 719 is controlled so as to obtain the maximum profit by operating the operation button 300 (operating means) when the display pointer 719 is located in the second band portion 716b which vertically overlaps the bar display portion 717, Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the fourth round game R) displayed in FIG. 88(b) and FIG. 89 (immediately the effect in the interval between rounds is started. Also, the player can operate the operation buttons 300 (operation means) without feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88(a), since the guidance display displays "Don't be wary after the round ends," the inter-round interval after the end of the fourth round game R (Fig. Also in 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. As a result, the player may not be aware of the timing effect (operation effect) display shown in FIG. 90(b) and may not be able to operate the operation button 300 (operation means), which may reduce the possibility of a disadvantage. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(a), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation pointer 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719e vertically matches the first band portion 716a. In addition, while the result display mode 720 is displayed as a result display mode 720, the characters “relief! V acquisition with reason!” (safety effect) is displayed, and that the operation mode of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Is displayed. As a result, the player can visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a safe profit with some disadvantages, and the interest of the player can be improved.

It should be noted that, as described above, the slight disadvantage is that the payout of prize balls in the fifth round R is slightly less (a prescribed number (10 in this control example) cannot be entered. This means that the duration of the round game R of the fifth round becomes the maximum time (30 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scroll-displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719f vertically matches the third band portion 716c. , The character "Fail! V not! Next Expectation!" is displayed in the center of the screen as the result display mode 720, and the operation mode of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. It is displayed by doing. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a great deal of disadvantage will occur.

Incidentally, the great disadvantage is, as described above, a disadvantage that the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be acquired after the jackpot game is over. Further, in this case, as described above, a prescribed number (10) of balls can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round, and the round game R of the fifth round is continued. Since the time can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), compared to the case shown in FIG. 91(a), the timing of ending the jackpot game can be advanced, and the special symbol lottery can be executed early. Since it is possible, it is possible to easily advance the transition timing to the next jackpot game.

As described above, in this control example, the profit obtained by the player is based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R. Since it changes, the player's motivation for operating the operation button 300 (operation means) can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92(a) and FIG. 92(b), the display in the sixth round game R will be described. 92(a) and 92(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for informing the third round of the round game R by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in FIG. 92(a), it is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display when the jackpot type is "jackpot L" or "jackpot N", and in FIG. 92(b), the jackpot type is "jackpot K", It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k".

In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92(a), the jackpot type wins the jackpot of “jackpot L” or “jackpot N”, that is, the jackpot of the sixth round jackpot. The "big hit" character shown is displayed.

In addition, in the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92(b), the jackpot type is a jackpot of “jackpot K”, “jackpot M” or “jackpot k”, that is, a jackpot of 6 rounds. The character of “big hit” indicating that the player has been won is displayed, and the interference device 6900 is executed in the operation pattern (twentieth operation pattern) advantageous to the player in the sixth round of the round game R. The character “+ Chance” is displayed as the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721, and accordingly, the character “Dedicated to the right!” is displayed on the guide display portion in the small area Ds3.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot K, jackpot M, or jackpot k, in the sixth round of round game R, by continuing without firing the ball, more balls than the specified number are entered. The interfering device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence of noise (see FIG. 99(a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving the prize balls in excess of the specified number by continuing to shoot the balls according to the display in FIG. 92(b).

In this way, in addition to the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol was a big hit, by notifying the mode of notifying the operation status of the interference device 6900 during the big hit on the display screen in the round game R, It is possible to display various display patterns suitable for the round game R. In this control example, by continuing or stopping the ball firing in accordance with this display, the player can easily receive the maximum profit planned for each jackpot type as the profit given to the player. Controlled by. Therefore, the player can easily obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

In addition, in this control example, the performance mode of the timing performance (operation performance) is changed based on the operation content to the player executed in the timing performance (operation performance). In an operation effect that is executed other than (operation effect) (for example, a mini game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change), an operation history (operation) in which the player operates the operation button 300 (operation means) It may be configured to change the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the number of times, the operation content, and the operation result. As a result, the game can be motivated to perform various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, the timing effect is not limited to the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) by the player, but is based on, for example, the time period measured by the time measuring means (RTC) or the game period in which the player plays the game. You may comprise so that the production mode of (operation production) may be switched.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. Note that changes to FIG. 4 will be described, and description of the same parts will be omitted.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 100 is a model diagram illustrating a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of main controller 110. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery, and the selection of the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) Used for setting the initial value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the change type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern, and the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. The small hit type counter C5 is used to select the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 117). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the prize for the first entrance 64 and the prize for the second entrance 640. Special symbol 2 storage sphere storage 203b to be done is provided.

In the present control example, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 each have a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored in total. Therefore, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display, or when the special symbol can be drawn by lottery of the special symbol such as when the special symbol jackpot game is not being played, each counter value is a special symbol when the ball wins the first entrance 64. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processing for execution are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and various for displaying the special symbol 2 in a variable manner. Settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during the period in which the special symbols can not be selected by lottery such as during the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or during the jackpot game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, the game ball is the first entrance 64 or the second entry. If the number of holdings for the winning entrance (starting opening) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) when winning at the entrance 640, each counter value is acquired, and the winning The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entered ball entrance is stored. Further, when the number of holdings for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 in this control example) are not acquired. Only prize balls are treated as invalid balls paid out to the player.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in this control example), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (319 in this control example). There is. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first per random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 94(a)) of the main control device 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit defined in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state, in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0", If it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. If the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is within the range of “1 to 4”. If it is within the range of "1 to 4," it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a jackpot for the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. 202a (see FIG. 94(a)). In this way, while the total number of random number values is 320, the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/320”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values “1 to 4” are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 320, the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 4, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/80”.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94(b)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured such that the stop type selection counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach is generated, it is different from the symbol that the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "reach loss" (for example, the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops, and "complete loss" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) where the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203a. Moreover, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability time and a special symbol for low probability time, and a range of random number values set for each out-of-stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in the probability change state of the special symbol, a big hit is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89 Table is selected, "completely out" is easily selected, and "reach out" is narrowed to 90 to 99. Therefore, it is difficult to select "reach out". If the special symbol has a low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entrance 64. The table for low probability is selected, it becomes difficult to select “completely missed”, and the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “missed reach” is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, since it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do.

In the present control example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, reach a maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 117) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting fluctuation patterns. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables that are commonly used by the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each win/fail judgment result. Has been done.

In the present control example, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239 and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the execution area of the normal pattern of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the design is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 94(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number defined as the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined as a normal symbol (second symbol). In the present control example, in the second random number table 202c, when the probability of a normal symbol is low (during a normal state of a normal symbol), there are five random number values that are a symbol of a regular symbol, and the range is "5 to 9". It has become. The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random number values to be won is 5, so the probability of winning a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is "1. /48”.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol (during a time saving state of a normal symbol), there are 200 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and since the total number of random number values to be won is 200, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". .. In this way, in the present control example, the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is greatly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and thus the hit probability is greatly different. Further, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits is also different between the low probability and the high probability of the normal symbol. .. Therefore, the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the ease of entering the second entrance 640 is greatly different, so in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), It is possible to allow the player to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64.

In the low probability state of the normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 (FIG. In 2), the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67 (see FIG. 2), the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed for 1 second on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2). If the value of the executed second per random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second As the symbol), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for “1 second×2 times”. In the present control example, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary electric accessory opening time and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the game playability.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, “0 to 239”), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). It is updated and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 117) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 116). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 95. FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first per type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and at least an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided.

First, details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94(b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment of the first hit type counter C2. The value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per hit is selected.

As shown in FIG. 94(b), with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in a range of "0 to 24" in association with "big hit K". This "big hit K" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit K" is 25, so when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the "big hit K" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit K", and after the big hit ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 hour reductions (80 times ST). Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

Further, for the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49", "big hit L" is defined in association with. This “big hit L” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit L" is 25, so if the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the "big hit L" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big jackpot L", and transition to a high probability state of 80 hour reductions (80 times of ST) after the jackpot is the same as "big jackpot K", but as will be described later, In terms of game efficiency (number of payout prize balls/time required for jackpot game), it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than “jackpot K”.

Further, for the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 74", "major jackpot M" is defined in association with. The "big hit M" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit M” is 25, so when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the “big hit M” is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit M", and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Further, for the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "big hit N" is defined in association with. The "big hit N" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit N" is 25, so "big hit N" is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big hit. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit N", and the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the big hit is the same as "big hit M", but as will be described later, " This is disadvantageous in that the maximum payout number is small (the probability of over-winning (over-winning) is low) with respect to the “big hit M”.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, in the range (entire range) of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99", "big hit k" is associated and defined. The "big hit k" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the “big hit k” is 100, so when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the “big hit k” is determined. The ratio is 100%.

This "big hit k" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, whether to shift to a high probability state of 80 times/hours (80 times of ST) or 100 times of the hour/short state of a normal symbol is given. , It changes depending on the game mode of the player during the big hit game. Note that the game mode of the player is not limited at all, and the ball may be passed through a predetermined entrance, or a predetermined operation means may be operated. It will be described later.

In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the privilege (the time saving state or the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) that is given after the jackpot is finished, the special symbol 2 is more advantageous. (It becomes easy to shift to the high probability state).

In this way, in the present control example, in the case where the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery, when the special symbol 2 is selected in the lottery, the high-probability state, which is advantageous to the player, shifts. It is designed to be easy. Therefore, once the continuous game mode (high probability state of special symbol, and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by entering the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. And a jackpot game are likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the extended game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, detailed contents of the opening/closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The open/close plate/interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the open/close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. And using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game.

Specifically, in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 6 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario in which the open/close plate 1300 is set to “open (opened state)” and the interference member 6930 is set to “retracted state” for a maximum of 30 seconds. In the operation scenario 1, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor 1240 detects the specified number of balls (10 in this control example), so that the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends and the initial stage is completed. Control is performed so as to return to the state (the state in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed and the interference member is in the retracted state).

The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario in which the open/close plate 1300 is set to “open (opened state)” and the interference member 6930 is set to “retracted state” as the scenario contents for a maximum of 10 seconds. In the operation scenario 2, even if 10 seconds have not passed, the operation sensor of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario when the detection sensor 1240 detects a predetermined number of balls (10 in this control example). Controlled to return to the state.

In the operation scenario 3, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 0.2 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds→open (open state)” as the scenario content, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state”. This is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds in which “1.0 second→overhang state 0.1 second→evacuation state” is set. In the operation scenario 3, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario by detecting the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) by the detection sensor 1240. Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 1 and 2, the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state), so that the storage channel 1231 is formed. The remaining balls can be discharged, but details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, it takes 0.2 seconds to discharge one sphere).

Among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls discharged while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800. In this control example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, and 18.0 seconds after that (the fifth round of the round). The sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position after 20.0 seconds from the start of the game R).

This “after 2.0 seconds” is after the timing of the third sphere counting from the downstream side among the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 passing through the sorting operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51). It is a numerical value set as a time point before the timing at which the fourth ball passes the distribution operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the outlet 1150 immediately before the end of 0.8 seconds in which the closing (closed state) of the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained (from the start of the fifth round game R. It is a numerical value derived from the setting that it takes 1.0 seconds to pass through the communication passage 4810 from the discharge port 1150 (2.0 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R of the fifth round). ..

In the operation scenario 4, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 0.2 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds→open (open state)” as the scenario content, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state”. This is an operation scenario of 30 seconds at the maximum, in which “1.0 seconds→overhang state 24.0 seconds→evacuation state” is set. In the operation scenario 4, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor of the opening and closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario when the detection sensor 1240 detects a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this example). Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 4, similarly to the above-described operation scenario 3, the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), so that the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231. Can be discharged, but details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, it takes 0.2 seconds to discharge one sphere). Note that, among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls discharged while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800 as described above. is there.

The “extended state 24.0 seconds” of this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the extended state at least until the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as will be described later, it becomes impossible for a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of spheres to pass through the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In the configuration described above, since the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state is removed. It becomes impossible to make it flow down to the specific region 4830.

In the operation scenario 5, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 3.0 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds→open (open state)” as the scenario content, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state”. This is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds in which “0.2 seconds→overhang state 0.2 seconds→evacuation state 2.6 seconds→overhang state 20 seconds→evacuation state” is set. In operation scenario 5, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario when the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number of balls (10 in this control example). Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 5, the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state), so that one sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 is discharged, as described later. This is an operation scenario in which the flow of spheres can be regulated by the interference member 6930 and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is limited to 8 (see FIG. 53B, interference member 6930). Equivalent to the state that there is one sphere downstream).

In this case, it is possible to prevent the spheres from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the number of spheres that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 is less than the prescribed number (9 in this control example), and thus the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Since it is possible to allow the sphere to pass to the detection sensor 1240 based on the displacement of the sphere, it is possible to cause the sphere to pass to the detection sensor 1240 with a plurality of spheres arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240. it can. As a result, it is possible to easily generate an over-winning prize (so-called “over-winning prize”).

In the operation scenario 6, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 3.0 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds→open (open state)” as the scenario content, as in the operation scenario 5. In the operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds, the interference member 6930 is set to “withdrawal state 0.2 seconds → swelling state 2.6 seconds → withdrawal state 0.2 seconds → swelling state 0.2 seconds → withdrawal state” is there. In the operation scenario 6, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario when the detection sensor 1240 detects a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this example). Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 6, although the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state), the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed because the ball is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario in which the ball is not ejected from the ejection port 1150 while maintaining the closed state (closed state). Further, after 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, so that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is 10 (see FIG. (See a)), the round game R ends based on the detection sensor 1240 detecting the tenth ball. Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, it is not possible to easily cause an excess prize.

In this way, the operation scenarios are divided and stored based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, so that the profit that the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 currently executed gives to the player. It can be easily identified.

For each operation scenario, the opening/closing plate 1300 is forcibly closed (see FIGS. 8 and 9) when a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. However, even if a predetermined number of balls enter the first specific winning port 1000a in the middle of the operation scenario, the interference game 6930 is controlled so that the round game R is performed. The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the inter-round interval after the end of (1) is finished, and is controlled to change to the retracted state (the operation scenario ends) at the same time as the end of the inter-round interval.

FIG. 95B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f. This opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided with information on which predetermined scenario type corresponds to which jackpot type and what round of round game R.

In the MPU of the main controller 110, when executing the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930, information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided. It is read from the operation scenario storage area 202e, and the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved.

This opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is configured to be able to set a corresponding operation scenario based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

In this control example, the case where the interference member 6930 is movably controlled corresponding to the start timing of the round game R of the jackpot game is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario in which the setting order is stored in advance in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f, and the operation scenario changes in sequence every time the operation scenario ends after the power is turned on (or a predetermined operation start timing). It may be controlled. As a result, the correspondence between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, which makes it difficult for the player to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

96(a), FIG. 96(b), FIG. 97(a), FIG. 97(b), FIG. 98, FIG. 99(a), and FIG. 99(b), with reference to the jackpot type The operation modes of 1300 (the first specific winning opening 1000a), the interference member 6930, and the distribution device 4850 (the specific area 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

96(a), 96(b), 97(a), 97(b), 98, 99(a) and 99(b), the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a It is also shown as “open”, the closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also shown as “closed”, the protruding state of the interference member 6930 is also shown as “tensioned”, and the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is also shown as “retracted”. The state in which the sphere can flow into the region 4830 (that is, the state where the sorting operation member 4851 is arranged in the open position) is also referred to as “open”, and the state where the sphere cannot flow into the specific region 4830 (that is, the sorting action member) The state in which the 4851 is arranged in the closed position) is also referred to as “closed”.

As shown in FIG. 95(b), the operation mode between the opening/closing plate 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round game R to the fourth round game R is: Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round game R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

Further, as described above, the driving mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the type of jackpot (see FIG. 96(a)). That is, 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position (the ball is opened so that the ball can pass to the specific area 4830), and 18.0 seconds later (5 20.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the round), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position (the ball is blocked in the specific area 4830 so that it cannot pass).

FIG. 96(a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 96(a), in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds is sandwiched between the rounds of the fifth round. The game R is started and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 will be discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds×10 pieces). = 2.0 seconds) The balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R do not remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds until the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. No sphere is discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the balls are discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state (the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state). Since the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position so that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the sphere is opened so that the sphere can pass to the specific area 4830, the event that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 does not occur.

On the other hand, the storage channel 1231 is configured to store a regulated number (10 in this control example) of spheres, so the round game R of the fifth round is 10 balls to the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be ended by inserting individual balls. Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (20.0 seconds), the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round game R can be discharged. By continuing to shoot the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give an advantageous privilege to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to being able to do, the round game R of the fifth round can be finished in a short time (it can be finished by winning the specified number (10 in this control example)), so the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. Can be raised.

Further, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the round game R of the fifth round, it is unclear whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 over the round game R of the fifth round. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

FIG. 96(b) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In the present control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot L (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 96(b), in the 16th operation pattern, after the round R of the fourth round is finished, the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds is sandwiched and the round of the fifth round is inserted. The game R is started and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 will be discharged at an interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round of the game R (0.2 seconds×5). The number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R may remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the fifth round game R is started. For example, in the round game R of the fourth round, when five or more spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, the number of spheres obtained by subtracting 5 from the stored number remains in the storage channel.

Here, since the progress of the round game R of the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the cases will be described separately below.

First, in the round game R of the fourth round, if 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where 5 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. To be done.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round game R is started in a state where five balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the advantageous privilege for the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is also after the discharge. One ball remains at 1231. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 9 (the number is less than the specified number (10 in the present control example)), so the fifth round The eye round game R will not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1, elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game is lowered.

In addition, in FIG. 96(b), as a typical example, the time change when 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R is illustrated.

Secondly, in the round game R of the fourth round, when nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the round game R of the fifth round is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231. To be done.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the advantageous privilege for the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that had been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the round game R of the fifth round is set to the specified number of balls. The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved.

Thirdly, in the fourth round game R, if the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 0 to 8, 5 is stored in the storage channel 1231 from the number of stored spheres. The round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where the number of balls drawn (0 to 3 balls) is stored.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds until the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. No sphere is discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started, while the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the whole ball (0 to 3 pieces), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round game R is started does not occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that had been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the round game R of the fifth round is set to the specified number of balls. The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. In addition, if the ball is allowed to pass through the specific region 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the fifth round game R (19 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R). If a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls are put into the first specific winning opening 1000a before, a phenomenon occurs in which the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific region 4830. Since it is configured so that the ball passes through the specific region 4830, an advantageous privilege (continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol in this control example) is given to the player. be able to.

Summarizing the above-described first to third cases, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round R is round game R, the event in which the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 is early. While it can be generated, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game is reduced (in the first case), and 9 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R. In the case of the number of balls, it is possible to cause an event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 early, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the round game of the fifth round is increased (in the case of the second), the fourth round. In the case of 0 to 8 spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R, the event that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round R and the fifth round The time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the round game is improved (in the third case).

Therefore, in the case of controlling with the same operation pattern, it is possible to change the timing at which the player makes a profit and the amount of the profit obtained for each of the gaming modes of the jackpot game.

In the present control example, as described above, in the fourth round game R, by setting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to 9, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized. .. Therefore, at least when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, information about the guideline for the number stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88(b)). As a result, attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved and the player's line of sight can be guided.

FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the seventeenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 97(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot M (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the seventeenth operation pattern, after the fourth round game R is finished, the fifth round is inserted with the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between the rounds interposed. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, the upper limit of 9 balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 will be discharged in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round of the game R (0.2 seconds). ×9 = 1.8 seconds) The balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R can remain in the storage channel 1231 with an upper limit of 1 until after the start of the fifth round game. There is a nature. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is newly added in the fifth round game R. The entered ball is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 within 1 second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state (the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state), the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 are The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and the event of passing the specific area 4830 immediately after the sphere is opened to the specific area 4830 so that the ball can pass therethrough does not occur.

In addition, since 1.0 second has elapsed after the start of the round game R of the fifth round and 25.0 seconds have elapsed, the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state and regulates the flow of the ball (FIG. 86). (See (a)), the storage channel 1231 is in a state in which the regulated number (10 in this control example) of spheres cannot be stored (a state in which a maximum of 9 spheres can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930). Since spheres are not stored, a maximum of 7 spheres can be stored). Therefore, the second round game cannot be finished until 25.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round game R, and then 10 balls are inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Or, a predetermined time (30.0 seconds in this control example) has elapsed, and the fifth round game R is completed.

Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the fifth round), it is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fifth round. The ejected ball cannot be ejected. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, the event that the ball passes through the specific region 4830 does not occur after the end of the fifth round game R.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be unable to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give an advantageous privilege to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to that, the round game R of the fifth round becomes long, so it is not possible to increase (can decrease) the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game.

FIG. 97(b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the eighteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 97(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot N (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 97(b), in the 18th operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds is sandwiched between the rounds of the fifth round. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95(b)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the eighteenth operation pattern is different from the seventeenth operation, except that the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round is different. Since it is the same as the pattern, the description of the parts common to the above description will be omitted.

The difference between the eighteenth operation pattern and the seventeenth operation pattern is whether or not a residual ball that remains without being discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 occurs in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R.

That is, in the seventeenth operation pattern, as described above, the inter-round interval is set to the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds), so that the maximum discharge number is 9 and the stored number 1231 is a ball. When 10 are stored, one remaining ball is generated.

On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds), so that the maximum number of discharged particles is 10, and the number of stored particles 1231 is 10 (maximum). Even if they are stored, they can be discharged globally, and no residual balls will be produced.

In this case, in the seventeenth operation pattern, there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, so that it is specified immediately after the fifth round game R starts. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected normal jackpot), while in the eighteenth operation pattern, from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R. Since there is no ball (remaining ball) to be ejected, the player can understand that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round (no expectation normal jackpot).

Therefore, the player's expectation can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage flow channel 1231 while substantially sharing the same profit for the player.

Further, as described above, the 16th operation pattern in which the player can obtain a larger profit than the jackpot M of the jackpot type M, and the remaining ball is generated in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round (Fig. 96 (see (b)), it is possible to grasp the difference from the number of remaining balls in the storage flow channel 1231, so that the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage flow channel 1231 can be improved.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the nineteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot k (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 98, in the 19th operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the round game R is inserted with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds interposed. The round game R that is started and is the fifth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, how many balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R is changed by the player's operation.

That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) in accordance with the timing effect (operation effect, see FIG. 90 and FIG. 91) described above, the interference member 6930 changes to the projecting state, Since the discharge of the sphere after that is restricted, the sphere arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 remains in the storage channel 1231. It should be noted that the operation of the operation button 300 is controlled such that only the timing of the first push in the inter-round interval is determined to be valid and invalid for the subsequent push, but the details will be described later.

Here, since the progress of the fifth round game R changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to improve the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300. Hereinafter, the cases will be described separately.

First, a case where there are many spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (when there are five or more spheres) will be described. That is, it is a case where the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91(a)).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where five or more spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the spheres can pass through the specific area 4830, the spheres move in the specific area 4830. Since it passes, an advantageous privilege for the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the storage channel is also after the discharge. At 1231, one or more spheres remain. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 9 or less (the number is less than the specified number (10 in this control example)) The round game R of the round does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1, elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

In other words, in the first case, after the jackpot game is over, the advantageous phenomenon of being able to acquire the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol occurs, while the payout of the prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly less. Disadvantage (the number of stipulated balls (10 in this control example) cannot be entered, the number of prize balls is reduced) The disadvantage that the duration of round game R of the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds) Such a phenomenon occurs.

Secondly, a case where there are four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 will be described. That is, it is a case where the fifth round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is good (see FIG. 90(b)).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass through the specific region 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the advantageous privilege for the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that had been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the round game R of the fifth round is set to the specified number of balls. The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. The specified number of balls will enter the first specific winning opening 1000a only after 25.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R from the control mode of the interference member 6930. ..

That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol can be acquired after the jackpot game ends, and the specified number (10) in the round game R of the fifth round. There is an advantageous event that the ball can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), while the disadvantageous phenomenon is Does not occur.

Thirdly, a case where there are few spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (when the number is three or less) will be described. That is, this is a case where the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where three or less balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91(b)).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds until the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. No sphere is discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started, while the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the whole ball (0 to 3 pieces), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round game R is started does not occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231. Although all the balls that were being used are ejected, the interference member 6930 maintains the bulging state from the lapse of 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round to the lapse of 25.0 seconds. The number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be inserted into the first specific winning port 1000a. Furthermore, when 20.0 seconds have passed after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the sorting operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830.

Therefore, after the end of the fifth round game R, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 does not pass through the specific area 4830.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that had been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the round game R of the fifth round is set to the specified number of balls. It can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a (it can be ended without waiting for 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1).

Therefore, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. The specified number of balls will enter the first specific winning opening 1000a only after 25.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R from the control mode of the interference member 6930. ..

That is, in the third case, after the jackpot game is over, the disadvantage that the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol cannot be acquired occurs, while the prescribed number (10) of the round game R of the fifth round occurs. An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

Summarizing the above-described first to third cases, when five or more spheres remain in the storage channel 1231, an event in which the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 can be caused early, while 5 The time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the round game of the round decreases (first case), and when four balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, an event that the balls pass through the specific area 4830 is caused early. In addition, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round of the round game is improved (second case), and when the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 is three or less, the balls pass through the specific area 4830. While no event occurs, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout award balls in the fifth round game is increased (third case). Then, which case is applied changes depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

That is, since the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the timing of operating the operation button 300, the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved and the player can participate in the timing effect (operation effect). Can increase motivation.

FIG. 99(a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the twentieth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 99(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 99(a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the sixth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95(b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, the upper limit of the excessive number of balls (the number of balls that exceeds the specified number (10 in this control example)) into the first specific winning port 1000a It can be easily generated by one piece. Details will be described below.

The inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round of the round game R is set at the inter-round first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started in a state where there are no spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

Immediately after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, but immediately returns to the retracted state (see FIG. 95(a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a from the start of the sixth round game R until the lapse of 1.0 seconds is not restricted by the interference member 6930 to flow down, and is 2 It takes about 0.0 seconds to reach the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, a position in contact with the regulating member 1600).

This first ball entered is discharged when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed (the discharging opening 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened) 3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R. .. Here, since the period in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is limited to one.

3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the outlet 1150 starts to open, and at the same time, the interference member 6930 changes to the projecting state. Therefore, thereafter, the sphere arranged upstream of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

As for the internal shape of the storage channel 1231, when the interference member 6930 is in an extended state, a maximum of two spheres can be stored downstream of the interference member 6930 and a maximum of seven spheres can be stored upstream of the interference member 6930 (FIG. 86(b)).

After 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is regulated from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and therefore stays on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. It will be.

On the other hand, as described above, when one sphere arranged at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage channel 1231, as a result, the sphere arranged downstream of the interference member 6930 inside the storage channel 1231. 1 or less. Therefore, the maximum number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is eight. The total number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number (10 in this control example). Therefore, the specified number of balls is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the projecting state. Cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the sixth round game R cannot be ended.

During this time, since the open/close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86(b)), the player can continue right-handing according to the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92(b)). A plurality of balls can be aligned on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 (so-called “grape” can be generated).

When the interference member 6930 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state, the sphere that has been regulated to flow down inside the storage channel 1231 flows down along the inclination of the opening/closing plate 1300 so as to follow the flow down. (Runs down like an avalanche). The opening/closing plate 1300 starts its operation toward the closed state when a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a due to the flow of the balls, but it corresponds to the number of ejected balls. Since a space for one sphere is formed in the storage channel 1231, the momentum of the sphere flowing into the storage channel 1231 is maintained even after the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating.

Therefore, before the opening/closing plate 1300 closes the first specific winning opening 1000a, there is a possibility that a ball with a momentum may enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the upper limit of 1 is exceeded. Can generate winnings.

In addition, when the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 at the time when 3.0 seconds have passed from the start of the sixth round of the round game R, downstream of the interference member 6930 even after 3.0 seconds have elapsed. The number of spheres placed in does not change. Therefore, in this case, the number of spheres remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the spheres are not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the above-mentioned void is not formed inside the storage channel 1231 and it is not possible to exert the effect of causing the excess winning. It

FIG. 99(b) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 21st operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L or N (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 99(b), in the 21st operation pattern, the sixth round game R is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95(b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, an excessive amount of balls (number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example) into the first specific winning opening 1000a occurs. Can be difficult. Details will be described below.

The inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round of the round game R is set at the inter-round first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started in a state where there are no spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

Immediately after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the projecting state for 2.6 seconds (see FIG. 95(a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a within 1.0 second from the start of the sixth round of the round game R is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

When the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the sphere whose flow has been regulated restarts to flow down, but for 0.2 seconds (2.0 seconds which is the time required for the flow down of the storage channel 1231/10 storable numbers). In ), the sphere flows down only for the length of one sphere. Therefore, the sphere that has resumed flowing down has the lowest end of the storage channel 1231 (on the front side of the regulating member 1600, by the time the opening/closing plate 1300 starts to operate in the closed state (the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts opening). It is not possible to reach the position (contacting the regulation member 1600). Therefore, in this operation pattern, the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 does not occur at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round game R.

3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts opening, the interference member 6930 changes to the projecting state again, but immediately returns to the retracted state. Therefore, thereafter, the sphere arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is not restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and the sphere is sequentially stored in the storage flow path 1231.

With the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the twentieth operation pattern), the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. Changes to. At this time, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10, and the storage channel 1231 is full, so that more spheres are prevented from entering. Therefore, according to the present operation pattern, as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23(a)), the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (10 in the present control example). Limited to the number of individual) and cannot generate an excess prize.

Therefore, even if a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the opening/closing plate 1300 at the end of the sixth round jackpot game R, the ball does not lead to the player's profit. Therefore, in the round game R of the sixth round in the jackpot game of jackpot type L or N, the third symbol display device 81 has a display (see FIG. 92(a)) that does not strongly encourage the continuation of the ball firing. To be executed.

As shown in FIG. 99(a) and FIG. 99(b), the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state, and the interference member, based on the start time of the round game R of the sixth round It is difficult to occur when excessive winning is likely to occur in the round game R of the sixth round (see FIG. 99(a)) while performing control such that the timing when 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state is common. The case (see FIG. 99(b)) can occur.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the round game R of the sixth round in the jackpot game this time is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or the twenty-first operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball suitable for the operation pattern is fired while predicting the operation pattern. This can prevent the player from aimlessly digesting the big hit game.

As described above, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the twentieth operation pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is shortly opened (opening for 0.2 seconds), Two spheres do not remain downstream of the interference member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the 21st pattern, the interference member 6930 is opened after the first specific winning opening 1000a is shortly opened (opening for 0.2 seconds). Two spheres may remain downstream of.

Therefore, by confirming how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930, whether the sixth round game R is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or by the twenty-first operation pattern. Since the easiness of distinction is improved, the interference member 6930 becomes a retracted state on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 for a predetermined period (for example, 23.0 seconds after the sixth round game R is started). It may be configured such that it is difficult to visually recognize it before 0 second.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 is a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere. Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, exit flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , A closing flag 203q, a count start flag 203qa, a closing counter 203r, a V flag 203s, a V winning effective counter 203t, a notification counter 203u, a winning number counter 203w, a discharged number counter 203x, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter The respective values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

Then, in the main controller 110, when the special symbol is selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored are shifted.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area 203b, has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. When data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

Special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d, variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the third symbol) based on the entry into the first inlet 64 (starting winning) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first ball inlet 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 The value is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S211 of FIG. 108, S405 of FIG. 111). reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be obtained. As a result, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the variable display holding ball number managed by the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102(b)) are noise. Even if the number of spheres held in the main control unit 110 is actually deviated from the number of spheres held in the actual variable display due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of spheres to be held. ..

The voice lamp controller 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls, and notifies the display controller 114 (see FIG. 93) of the number of reserved balls every time the number of reserved balls changes. To send the display reserved ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved number of balls command.

Special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the third symbol) based on the entry into the second entry slot 640 (starting prize) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times.

This special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 The value is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 111).

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to.

The initial value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S704 in FIG. 114).

On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 of FIG. 114).

On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 114). ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state of the special symbols. That is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a natural number, the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is in the low probability state of the special symbol. In this control example, the probability variation state of the special symbol accompanies the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the numerical value of the probability variation counter 203g corresponds to the remaining time saving period (the number of times the special symbol varies).

The probability variation counter 203g is set to 80 at the end of the jackpot game by the ball passing through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the probability variation state after the big hit game is limited to 80 times.

Further, the probability variation counter 203g is a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol, and is set to 0 when the start of the big hit is set (see S219 of FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power-off occurs. In such a case, the state immediately before the power shutdown occurs is backed up.

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (the number of changes of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. When the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the jackpot game, 100 is set at the end of the jackpot game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, when the probability variation state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state of 100 times is given.

In this control example, the case where the time saving state is given regardless of the type of jackpot has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all or one of the jackpot types (“jackpot K”, “jackpot L”, and “jackpot k”) that can cause the ball to flow to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing a game in an appropriate game mode. In the section, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the big hit game, control may be performed so as not to give the time saving state.

In this case, the game was not executed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the firing of the ball was stopped or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification from the display device) ) Is excessively large (because the special symbol that was originally supposed to be moved does not change to the probability changing state and the time saving state is not given), it is possible to improve the motivation to execute the game in an appropriate game mode. it can.

In the operation scenario storage area 203i, when the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) (see S1004 of FIG. 117) is started, the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f (FIG. 95(b This is an area for reading and storing the operation scenario according to ()). The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter for determining the timing for movably controlling the interference member 6930 in the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set in the operation counter 203j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

The projecting flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state, and if it is ON, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state (see FIG. 53(b)). , OFF, the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

This output flag 203k is determined to be the operation start timing when it is determined in the storage control process (see S1008 of FIG. 125) that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected during the effective period (S1403 of FIG. 19: Yes). If it is (S1408 of FIG. 125: Yes), it is set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 of FIG. 128) is executed by being set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 of FIG. 128). ) Is finished, it is set to OFF (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 of FIG. 123) (see S1282 of FIG. 123), and is used to start counting of the remaining ball timer 203n described later.

The remaining ball timer 203n is a timer counted to specify the normal range in the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (a value corresponding to 1 second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific area detection sensor If the number of spheres detected by 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the total number of spheres detected by the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) do not match, the difference between these numbers is It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting the difference between the number of incoming balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 over each round. When it is determined that the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0 in the ending process (S1110 of FIG. 121) (S1231: No of FIG. 121), an error command is set.

The closing flag 203q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, and is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 of FIG. 123) (of FIG. 123). (See S1278), and is used to start counting of the closing counter 203r described later. The closing flag 203q is set to OFF based on the closing counter 203r having reached a predetermined value or more in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

The count start flag 203qa is set to ON based on the closing flag 203q being set to ON in the fifth round game R, and is used to start counting of the closing counter 203r. Then, the count start flag 203qa is based on that the closing counter 203r has reached the upper limit value (a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) in the V winning process (see S1009 of FIG. 129). It is set to OFF (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129) that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 at normal timing. It is a counter for doing. The closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 each time the V winning process is executed.

In this control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as the interval period after the round game R according to various timings. The closing counter 203r is used for determining an abnormality in the V winning timing in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

The V flag 203s has a sphere in a specific region 4830 (FIG. 51) at a predetermined timing (within a set value, a predetermined period after the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is closed in this control example). This flag is set to ON when it is detected that the vehicle has passed (see). The V flag 203s is set to OFF after the value of the probability variation counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 of FIG. 121) (see S1236 of FIG. 121).

The V winning effective counter 203t is a counter that is decremented by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V winning effective counter 203t is for determining that the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 has normally passed through the specific area 4830 in the state where the sorting operation member 4851 is arranged at the open position. Therefore, in the winning process (S1112 of FIG. 123), a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) is set with the closing flag 203q being turned on.

The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts the time until the notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) is set with reference to a predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). ..

The winning number counter 203w is a counter that counts the number of balls won in the first specific winning port 1000a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S1112 of FIG. 123).

The discharge number counter 203x is a counter that counts the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numerical values of the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x is determined every time the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormality processing (see S1113 in FIG. 124).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 1000a ( (Solenoid 1510) and a solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a solenoid 6910 for driving an interference member 6930 are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands to them via the input/output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, in the input/output port 205, various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 described below provided in the power supply device 115, and a game during operation performance An operation button 300 operated by a person is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208, signals output from the operation button 300, and RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253. To execute various processes.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113, and the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation content. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

The opening/closing plate/interference member operation scenario 222b is provided for the audio lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation status of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 whose operations are controlled by the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the opening/closing plate/interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and the opening/closing plate/interference member operation scenario table 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 is stored.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223d, a variation start flag 223e, a stop type selection Flag 223f, production counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, storage counter 223n, operation flag 223p, Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, effect execution flag 223x, and pressed period information storage area 223y. And other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b corresponds to the holding ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, the second special symbol ( Corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110 special symbols When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e The command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball is received from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c (see S2210 of FIG. 132). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is updated. , The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

The value of the first special symbol reservation sphere counter 223b, the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 223c is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to receiving the holding ball number command. Together with the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b after storage, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c, the display holding sphere number command to the display control device 114 Send.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b, the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c is synchronized with the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d, the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. You can change it while you do. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when the command set when the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f of the main controller 110 is increased or decreased. A counter to be used, which is used to synchronize the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the main control unit 110 side with the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the voice lamp control unit 113 side. is there. The value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is used, for example, when displaying the holding sphere number of the normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as for the detailed content when the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the number of reserved spheres of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is incremented by 1 and updated each time the main process (see FIG. 131) is executed. .. The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown). When the effect pattern is determined by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop processing, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, and thus it is possible to suppress the deviation of the effect pattern to be set. In addition, you may comprise so that a production pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processes with respect to the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one digit of the acquired value is referred to in one selection, ten digit of the acquired value is referred to in another selection, and one digit of the acquired value is referred to in another selection. You may make it refer to the ones digit of the obtained value by multiplying the value which tripled|upper one place of the value and the value which multiplied fives of the tens place. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game, and when a round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( In S2504 of FIG. 133), the value of the counter is reset to 0 by the reception of the jackpot ending command (S2510 of FIG. 133). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display command regarding the display during the big hit game is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

The probability variation state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol. If the probability variation state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223i is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110.

In the present control example, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the state command is in a mode indicating that the probability variation game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is If it is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving game is in progress, and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is a mode indicating that a normal game is being performed.

Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probability variation state of the special symbol, or whether to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the time saving state counter 223j is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if it is OFF, it is in the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state). At this time, the time saving state counter 223j is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main controller 110. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the present time is the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86(a)), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the spheres discharged from the discharge port 1150. The setting is made based on the detection result of. When the storage state flag 223k is ON, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of balls are stored in the storage flow channel 1231. When the storage state flag 223k is OFF, less than the storage number of balls is stored in the storage flow channel 1231. Indicates that.

The storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is a predetermined number (four in this control example) or more. (See S2807 in FIG. 137), and when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the predetermined number, it is set to off (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, the intermediate number display is executed on the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF, the shortage display (FIG. 88). (See (a)) is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in this control example), and is the detection result of the detection sensor 1240. The setting is made based on the detection result of the balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage flow channel 1231. If it is off, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is not stored in the storage flow channel 1231. Show.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is the upper limit (see S2814 in FIG. 137). , Is set to OFF when it is determined that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the upper limit number (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON, the full tank display (see FIG. 92B) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF, the dissatisfaction display (Fig. 92(a)) is executed.

The storage counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the sphere, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by 1, and the sphere is discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (or a dedicated area detection sensor 4870). The value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 when the value is detected by the ball discharge sensor (1).

The operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the operation button 300 has been operated. When the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 has been operated, and when it is off, it indicates that the operation button 300 is not operated. The operation flag 223p is set to ON when an operation command is received in the command determination process (S2218: Yes in FIG. 132), and set to OFF in the button input monitoring/effect process (see S3007 in FIG. 139). ..

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the effect contents that have been set until the effect is executed, and, for example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big hit. The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored for a period from the timing of setting (third round) to the timing of executing timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit (fourth round). This effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and when the round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is executed in the big hit medium effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134). Are read out (S2537 of FIG. 134).

The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for executing an effect that causes the player to operate the operation means (operation button 300). If it is ON, it means that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if it is OFF, it means that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

In this control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the fact that the fourth round game R has started with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa indicates that the second operation effect flag 223wb has been started. On the other hand, it is set that the round game R of the four round surface of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k has started. Then, the effect information read from the effect temporary storage area changes depending on the setting states of the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb.

Further, the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are turned off after the effect execution flag 223x is turned on (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

The first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are flags for limiting the number of times the operation button 300 is operated during the corresponding production (in the present control example, it is limited to one), and each operation is performed. When the first operation is executed during the period or when the operation period is exceeded, it is set to ON, and the subsequent input of the operation button 300 is invalidated. Further, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to OFF after the round game R of the fifth round is started and the effect executing flag 223x is set to OFF (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

The effect execution flag 223x is a flag for determining whether the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (operation button 300) is an operation based on a timing effect (operation effect).

This effect execution flag 223x indicates that the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started in the big hit medium effect process (see S2505 of FIG. 134) (S2532 of FIG. 134: Yes), and the display effect round command is displayed. After the setting, it is set to ON (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) ends, it is set to off (S2542 in FIG. 134).

The pressed period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set so as to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). ..

In the pressed period information storage area 223y, a successful pressed period is set in correspondence with the set display pointer (effect pointer). The successful pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring/effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is the successful pressing period.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display controller 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure. The same applies to the following), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a line on a plurality of pages continuously, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that form the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data blocks. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in the one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is the first program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231 a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231 a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a moves the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization process executed after the boot process by the boot program is completed is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced by the data size of the image data to be transferred.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect when the entry into the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control unit 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", a "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuating effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", a "x" symbol is stopped after the fluctuating effect. Display for a certain period.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. If so, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The MPU 231 gives an instruction to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed at 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, the city, the sea, the sky, etc. are displayed. A right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as rear images.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing among the sub areas provided from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area in which the image data should be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes the process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. R. After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a.

As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started and the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot (big hit K etc. ), the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is opened, and the round effect is This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big hit state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variable effect was stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for one variable effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...), and light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, a boy image, a character used for various effects such as characters, and the like is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this control example, the case where only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table will be described. However, instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbol. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, since the third symbol is invisible to the player, during that time, the symbol offset information of the variable effect stop symbol that was previously performed is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 104) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 105). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time specified by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Is defined as Null data (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 105).

As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address Is included.

It should be noted that, as with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 105, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is selected. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed. Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, Set off.

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time when the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected, and when the simple image display flag 233c is ON, The simple command determination process and the simple display setting process are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing and display setting processing are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process, and when the simple image display flag 233c is ON, it is stored in the resident video RAM 235. Since there is no resident target image data, the resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed, and when the simple image display flag 233c is off, it is necessary for the drawing process. A normal image transfer setting process for transferring various image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thus, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237, the pointer is set. The update process is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time the pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later is displayed. (Refer to FIG. 106), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will be described below with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 106, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, combined processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character The detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235. Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set and the image controller 237 is set. The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a.

On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237, in parallel with the drawing process, reads previously drawn drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and, together with the drive signal, the image to the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. R. After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 107 to 129. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 319, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through with the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the big symbol of the special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e indicating the value of the holding ball number command (special figure 2 holding ball number command) is set (S206).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) Is acquired (S208), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). By the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). , A special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) changed by calculation is set to a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol fluctuation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, or jackpot k.

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 when the big hit K occurs, and the red LED is turned on when the big hit L occurs. When the jackpot is M, N, or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and when the jackpot is off, the green LED is turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the jackpot start is set (S218). .. The operation scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won) for 1 to 4 rounds, and in the 5th and 6th rounds, the jackpot type is set. This shows that the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened in a corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95(b)). When the process of S218 ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery is off this time (S216: No), the state command setting process for determining whether or not the time saving state has ended is executed (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

In the processing of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and various types of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203h. This is a process for determining the game state based on the value of the counter and setting a state command (S234, S238).

In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes), the probability variation is determined. The value of the counter 203g is decremented by 1, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S232). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233), and when it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S233: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), the state command indicating the normal gaming state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S235), and the time saving medium counter. When it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S235: No), the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour/hour counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is 0 (S237), and when it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S237: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour saving counter 203h is 0 (S237: Yes), the state command indicating the normal game state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and first It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302), and if it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S301, Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, four random numbers “1 to 4” are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as a jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2. Different random number values may be used. By configuring in this way, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are jackpots may be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state). Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired. (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the jackpot of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes) , A display mode at the time of a big hit showing a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the special symbol jackpot of five types (big hit K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k), the jackpot type is determined.

In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k). .. Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

As the fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as deviation patterns for deviation, "off (for long time)", "off (for short time)", "off chance", and "off" Various "normal reach", "outside super reach", and "outside chance reach" are specified. In addition, various common patterns for various jackpots, such as "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared chance reach", and "shared special reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is out of reach or out of reach.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 117). Sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize (start prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In the case where there is a start winning, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

When the starting winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set to the holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S405, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. , The special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The processes of S407 to S412 are different only in that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are the same as the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each processing of S407 to S412 is completed, the prefetching processing is executed (S413), and this processing is completed.

Next, the prefetch processing (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413). The prefetching process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is determined. However, if there is no new winning (S501: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is a probability change state of the special symbol, It is determined (S502) and if the special symbol is in the probable variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the special variation state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. Transition to.

In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640 are attached. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is (S608: Yes), the second obtained in the processing of S607. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the high-probability-time second winning random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, Ordinarily, it is determined that the design is off (see 202c2 in FIG. 94(c)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607. And, based on the second winning random number table for low probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,10 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see 202c1 in FIG. 94(c)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 determines whether or not it is a hit of the normal symbol (S611), and if it is determined to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes) , The display mode of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S613: Yes), the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 640. The opening period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of releases is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the processing of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of position (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the processing proceeds to S617.

In the processing of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of 1 is set to 1 second (S618), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 1 second", further, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623).

In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows.

By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624).

If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening/closing of the electric accessory is opened when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 are completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 107), and it is judged whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times variable display is held in the ordinary symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved sphere number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704).

Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The first area is stored (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed by the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93), and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set to the stack pointer. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off has not been normally completed, the process proceeds to S910 in this case as well.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S910.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1017 of FIG. 117. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial values, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S912) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner even when the information about the occurrence of power failure is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). When the process of S912 is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether it is a time saving state of a normal symbol, or the time saving number of a normal symbol.

A status command is generated according to the value of the hour/hour counter 203h or the value of the probability variation counter 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, in spite of the low probability state of the normal symbol, the right-hand navigation (for example, see the small area Ds3 of FIG. 88(a)) is displayed, or conversely, the high probability state of the normal symbol. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (not shown) from being displayed when the player makes a right-handed hit. That is, the game state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

When the process of S913 ends, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions (S914). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S915), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001).

Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command.

Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 111) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the number-of-holding-balls command set. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Also, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 1000a of the one variable winning device 6000 is executed (S1004).

In the big hit control process, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 1000a is set according to the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) for each round of the big hit state. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric auditors is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, every time the main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In the first symbol display update process, in the first symbol display device 37, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends. The variation display being executed is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37. Display (lighting display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on.

Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

After executing the processing of S1007, the storage control processing is executed (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, but a process for setting retraction and extension of the interference member 6930 is executed. Next, when the process of S1008 ends, the V winning process is executed (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, other processes are executed (S1010).

When the process of S1010 ends, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1012). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1012: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1011, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 115 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1015 is executed.

First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1016). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1017), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1011 is at the timing of the end of the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1010, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001.

That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut off, the stack pointer is not saved in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed, or the first identification is performed. This is processing for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big symbol of the special symbol (including during the special symbol big hit game) and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), the present process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

The operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851, the solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set by the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). After that, this process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851, the solenoid 4852) and the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 are set for each round.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the process of S1105 ends, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this processing ends.

The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp controller 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the opening/closing process is executed (S1108).

Here, the opening/closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of this opening/closing process (S1108). In the opening/closing processing (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 that matches the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the jackpot control processing (S1004) is returned to. , This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1109). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed after 6 rounds are completed, and the waiting time which is the ball throwing time (3.0 seconds or more from the design of the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800 is set. It is required, and in the present control example, when 3 seconds) have elapsed, the ending timing is determined as the start timing. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). Then, this process is completed.

Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 121, S1110). In the ending processing (FIG. 121, S1110), first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as a ball clogging may occur, or the player may illegally stop the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 with a strong magnet or the like. Therefore, the error command is set (S1232), and then the ending command is set (S1233).

The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command according to the selected display mode of the error notification is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, error notification is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, the characters "Ejection error. Please call the hall clerk" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is informed that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) strongly emits red light, or the voice output device 226. (See FIG. 4), a loud sound (in the present control example, the sound of a black telephone bell) is output, and the hall clerk is controlled so as to notice the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, the ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S1233 ends, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set to ON (that is, whether the sphere has passed through the specific region 4830) (S1234), and it is set to ON (that is, the specific region 4830). (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 80, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to off. (S1236), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1234, when it is determined that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is set. It sets to 100 (S1237), returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and ends this process.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set in the probability variation counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the ball is passing through the specific area 4830 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over.

Furthermore, if the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game. The game can be played with interest.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification processing (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No). The present process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). The determination of the end timing of the fourth round is made in the fourth round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won, or when it has been determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1253, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: No), this process ends. Here, by setting the counter of 0.5 second in S1254, the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during 2 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after the completion of the four rounds, and the voice of "press" is given. Is output.

Therefore, the distribution device 4850 operates in the fifth round, but the player has to operate the operation button 300 during the interval time after the end of the fourth round, and attention is paid to the operation button 300 and the liquid crystal. It is possible to make it difficult for the number of spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 to be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing through the specific area 4830 from being discriminated from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, at the start of the fifth round, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific region 4830 by performing the above-described control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. The player can play the game until the end of the big hit game (and also after the end of the big hit game) with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given (given).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notification counter 203u is provided to perform the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal over the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1252, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is larger than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is updated by -1 (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), the notification command is set (S1257). Then, this process is completed. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the output of the voice "press".

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1271). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state to when it is in a closed state and the interval period ends. If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1271: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed. If it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1273). Then, the process of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 has not been passed (S1272: No), the process of S1274 is executed.

In the process of S1274, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203q is on (S1277), and when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on. (S1277: Yes), this process ends, and the jackpot control process (S1004) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1277, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the closing flag 203q is set to on (S1278), and then the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t ( In this control example, a value range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2×number of stored balls) seconds or more is set (S1279), and then the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a. 1300 is set to be closed (state change of closed state) (S1280), and thereafter, a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) is set to the V winning effective counter 203t (S1281), The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being removed from the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closing time. Then, this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V winning effectiveness counter 203t changes based on the number of stored balls. As a result, when only three spheres are stored in the storage flow channel 1231 (control is performed so that the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830), the sphere may flow down due to dirt inside the storage flow channel 1231. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a delay, it is possible to invalidate the passage of the specific area 4830 out of the range of the set value of the V winning counter 203t.

As a result, when a display effect that differs depending on the number of storages in the storage channel 1231 is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the degree of expectation indicated by the display effect (amount of payout of prize balls and the end of the jackpot game) It is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the actual game result and the degree of possibility of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol later).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1274, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processes of S1277 to S1282 are executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether the opening/closing plate 1300 is halfway closed based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, if it is determined that it is the timing to close midway (S1276: Yes), the processing of S1277 to S1282 is executed, and if it is determined that it is not the timing to close midway (S1276: No), this processing is executed. It ends and returns to the big hit control process (S1004).

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing for monitoring whether the specific area 4830 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is the round valid period (S1301). If it is outside the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302). It should be noted that whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 is determined by whether or not the specific region detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) detects the passage of the game ball. Done.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203x is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303). Then, the process of S1304 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: No), the process of S1304 is executed.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1305). The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether the upper limit value (various interval times in this control example) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1306: Yes), the number of discharged particles (the number of balls detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51)). It is determined whether or not the total value of the number of spheres detected in step 4) and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203w) match (S1307).

If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the process of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), the value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharge number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the process of S1309 is executed. To do.

In the processing of S1309, it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1309). When it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: No), the process of S1312 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is the ending effect start timing (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). When the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the process of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set because there is an abnormality in discharging the ball (S1311), and the process of S1312 is executed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, even if the game ball is left illegally in the storage channel 1231 or the probability variation determination unit 4800, and the jackpot type of the jackpot to be acquired later is the jackpot M or N, the game ball is passed through the specific area 4830. Can be suppressed.

In this way, by controlling so as to notify the ball discharge error at the start timing of the ending effect, even if there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged in the round game R of each round, the error is notified. The game can be executed without it. As a result, it is possible to partially restrict the discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 in the interval between rounds and to start the next round with the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. ..

In addition, even if there is a difference between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, the game can be executed without issuing an error notification, so the interval between rounds is set to 2 seconds (reserve). It can be set to a period shorter than the period required to discharge the spheres stored in the flow path 1231 to the entire sphere.

It should be noted that the method of setting the error command for discharging the ball is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, set a value that can occur normally as the difference between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls, and if the difference in the number is within the range of that value, do not set the error command However, if the value is out of the range, it may be controlled to set an error command. In this case, it is possible to determine that a ball ejection error has occurred without waiting for the ending effect start timing, and thus it is possible to detect the occurrence of abnormality early. Thereby, when the error of discharging the ball is caused by the illegal act, the illegal act can be detected early.

In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1313). After that, the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x are respectively reset to initial values (S1314), and thereafter, this processing is ended.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this storage control processing (S1008). The storage control process (S1008) is a process for executing the main process (see FIG. 117) and setting the state of the interference member 6930.

As described above, depending on the situation, the interference member 6930 changes its state in response to the player operating the operation button 300 (S1403 to S1407) and changes its state at a preset timing (S1403 to S1407). S1408 to S1411), but both are included in the storage control process (S1008).

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 It means that it is in the retracted state. Next, it is determined whether or not the operation period of the operation button 300 is valid (S1402).

When it is determined that the period is the valid period (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

In the processing of S1403, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (that is, the depression detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept in the retracted state as it is. In order to keep it, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected (that is, the depression detection signal is detected) (S1403: Yes), the upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter is executed (S1404). Here, the upper limit value setting processing 1 (S1404) of the operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the content of the upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) of the operation counter. In the upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) of the motion counter, a process of setting an upper limit value that differs depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as the upper limit value of the motion counter is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), from the inter-round interval period, the depression (operation) of the operation button 300 after the inter-round interval period is started is detected (that is, the depression detection signal is (Detected) is subtracted, a value indicating the remaining period is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state, the projecting flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is projecting (the projecting state based on the operation of the operation button 300, the projecting state). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the output state 1) has been reached, a storage state command corresponding to the extended state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1407), the present process is terminated, and storage control is performed. The process returns to the process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the period is not the valid period (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). When it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 is executed (S1409). Here, the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) of the operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) for this operation counter. In the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) of the motion counter, a process of setting the upper limit value preset by the motion scenario as the upper limit value of the motion counter is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), it is first determined whether or not it is the timing of changing the interference member 6930 to the overhang state based on the operation scenario (S1431). When it is determined that it is not the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the projecting state (S1431: No), this process ends and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the projecting state (S1431: Yes), an appropriate value from the operation scenario (the interference member 6930 is maintained in the projecting state based on the operation scenario). The value corresponding to the period) is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state, the projecting flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is projecting (the projecting state based on the operation scenario, the projecting state). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that it has become 2), a storage state command corresponding to the extended state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1411), and this processing is ended.

The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the bulging state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs to the display control device 114 a display rear image changing command for setting the rear face type corresponding to the bulging state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command.

That is, for example, it is set to a mode in which the character "during passage ball storage" is displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87(a)). This allows the player to easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the stored state.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is turned on in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, this storage valve operation processing (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of this storage valve operation processing (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

In the storage valve operation processing (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not shown, if the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443).

In the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to OFF (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to OFF (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and this processing is ended. Also, in the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), this process is ended.

When the process of S1412 ends, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, on) (S1413: No), this process ends. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), it means that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and thus the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of this, a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this processing ends.

The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command corresponding to the retracted state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the retracted state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command.

By executing this storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set according to the operation status of the operation button 300. Accordingly, it is possible to switch between a state in which the flow of the ball is regulated by the interference member 6930 and a state in which the regulation is released and the flow of the ball is allowed at any timing of the player.

Further, by this storage control process, it is possible to drive the interference member 6930 at a timing other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, the member that operates according to the operation status of the operation button 300 and the member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be configured by the same member.

Next, the V winning process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this V winning process (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for controlling the flow of the ball after the first specific winning port 1000a is closed. ..

In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). When it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203q is on (S1502). When it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the currently executed fifth round is the fifth round (S1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), and in the processing of S1503, it is determined that the fifth round is currently being executed. If so (S1503: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), it means that it is near the timing at which the distribution operation member 4851 that opens and closes the specific region 4830 operates. In order to determine whether the passing of the ball into the specific area 4830 is normally occurring, the closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1505), and then the V winning effectiveness counter 203t is similarly decremented by 1. Update.

Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the closing counter 203r is a predetermined value (that is, whether the period in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507), and if it is the predetermined value (S1507). : Yes), the closing flag 203q is turned off and set (S1508), and then the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is not the predetermined value (S1507: No), the process directly proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (4.0 seconds). If the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (S1509: Yes), it means that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t becomes 0, so the count start flag 203qa is set to OFF (S1510). The closing counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, when the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process directly proceeds to S1512.

As described above, after the closing counter 203r reaches the upper limit value (that is, after 4.0 seconds have elapsed after the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state), the count start flag 203qa is turned off. The process of S1512 is not executed. That is, the processing of S1512 is executed only until 4.0 seconds elapse after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed.

In the process of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). When it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V winning effectiveness counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513).

In the process of S1513, if it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the range of the set value (S1513: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 normally. , V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and this processing ends.

The V winning effective counter 203t is set to a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and is subtracted from the value. As described above, the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is set as the timing at which the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific region 4830, and is 3.0 seconds in this control example. Below, it is set to a numerical range corresponding to (3-0.2×number of stored spheres) seconds or more.

Therefore, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is larger than 3.0 seconds), the value is out of the set range. In this case, it is suspected that the ball stagnated near the lower end of the communication passage 4810 (stopped due to clogging or improperly holding the ball), and the ball started to flow immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 was closed. , Is controlled so as to notify an error.

In addition, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a long time has passed after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is less than (3-0.2×the number of stored balls) seconds), It is out of the set value range. In this case, a problem (such as ball catching or improper retention due to improperly holding the ball) occurs when the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the timing of discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231 (the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed). Since it is suspected that the balls have started to be ejected after a delay from the timing (when the state is reached), it is controlled to notify the error just in case.

It should be noted that, as the illegality to hold the ball, it is possible to improperly hold the ball with a strong magnet or illegally operate the ball by hitting the ball with a thread attached to the game area and operating the thread by the player. .. In the pachinko machine 10, a magnetic sensor (not shown) is arranged in the vicinity of the storage channel 1231 or the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800 are prevented from reaching the magnetic force with respect to fraud caused by a magnet. This is dealt with by arranging the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) behind the glass unit 16 with a space therebetween or by thickening the glass unit 16.

Further, with respect to the illegality caused by the ball to which the thread is adhered, when the thread is made to crawl into the communication path 4810 via the storage channel 1231 and the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331. When the yarn is fixed by being sandwiched between the side wall of the housing portion 1230 and the portion that holds the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7 ), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened, the regulating member 1600 and the discharge member The yarn is fixed by being sandwiched with the outlet 1150. Therefore, even if the player operates the yarn, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the ball in the communication path 4810. For example, the yarn held by the player is released at an arbitrary timing. Even if the ball is illegally aimed to pass through the specific area 4830, as described above, since the thread is fixed in places, it is easy to prevent the ball from illegally passing through the specific area 4830. You can

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is not within the set value range (S1513: No), it is suspected that there is some injustice or a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, so an error command is set. Then (S1515), this processing ends. In this case, the V flag 203s is not turned on.

In this control example, the case where the fraud and the defect are determined by setting the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t based on the number of stored channels 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, it is possible to determine the occurrence of fraud or failure by detecting the interval at which the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Alternatively, by detecting the period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged, the occurrence of fraud or failure can be determined. The determination may be made, or if the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the required number (less than 4), the occurrence of fraud or failure is detected based on the detection of passage of the sphere in the specific area 4830 May be determined.

In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, the case where the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is not within the set value, the V flag 203s is set to ON and the game is disabled until the error due to the error command is resolved. You may control. The elimination of this error command is executed by turning off the power supply, but not limited to this, the RAM 203 may be cleared.

In this case, if the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 is not correct by the player's injustice, after it is discovered, the player has no problem in a high probability state of the special symbol. A game can be executed.

On the other hand, if it is caused by the illegality of the player, after it is discovered, first, the game of the illegal player is stopped, the hall clerk clears the RAM 203, and the special symbol has a low probability state. To force the control. As a result, it is possible to prevent another customer from having an extra waiting time before starting a game on the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraudulent operation is performed.

In the present control example, while the error command is set in S1515, for example, the ball is controlled so that it cannot be fired, or when the ball is fired, an error notification is given to notify the clerk. Control such that the prize ball is not paid out even if the ball is launched into the winning opening (for example, the function of the payout control device 111 is stopped), or the ball is launched or won. It is controlled so as to be inoperable by a control mode such as controlling the power to be turned off based on the ball entering the mouth.

<Regarding Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2120 (see FIG. 131) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. ) Is determined during the execution of () (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 131), the power-off process in S2117 is executed. The power-off processing in progress flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing in-process flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the current power-up processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S2120 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2120 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see S2116 in FIG. 131). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2117 is executed. Therefore, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag being turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is a case where processing has been started or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability variation state flag 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability variation state flag 223i based on the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004 when the process of S2008 is passed through the processes of S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S2101 this time has been executed (S2101), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S2102 to S2110 that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S2111, the variable display setting processing of S2112, and the storage state monitoring processing of S2113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay. Further, by performing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104).

The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to the process of S2105 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the retained quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on a reservation lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol reservation ball counter 223b is performed.

After that, button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring/production process monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the production corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform. In this process, when the player's operation of the operation button 300 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set in the display control device 114.

When the button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the lamp edit process is executed (S2108), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S2110 is completed, the command determination process of performing the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.

Then, the process proceeds to S2112. In the process of S2112, the variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136.

Then, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, the storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 131) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

In the command determination processing (FIG. 132, S2113), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area 223a and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main controller 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each of the symbols.

In the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the fluctuation pattern type is received from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol) that is a variation pattern type of the special symbol. In the case of notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol, which is stored in the format and which will be described later in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136). (When setting a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols) is used.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2204). When it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) is received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON.

Next, the stop type (any one of complete loss, out-of-reach, small hit, big hit K, L, M, N, and k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and this processing ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this processing ends.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the holding ball number command is received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the received holding ball number command Value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and corresponding to the extracted counter value, which is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this processing ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c.

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start prize), the start prize. Every time there is, by the process of S2210, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol 1 hold of the main controller 110 It can be adjusted to the values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, respectively.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e, if the holding sphere number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

In addition, in the processing of S2209, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is not received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S2212). In the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command is received (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving process is executed (S2213).

In the prize information command receiving process (S2213), various flags and various counters to be referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, before the fluctuation of the pending special symbol is started (that is, the special symbol that is executed before the fluctuation of the target special symbol) (Variable display), it is possible to execute the effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol that sent the prize information command, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of the plurality of special symbols. It is possible to give a suggestion and to enhance the effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command is not received (S2212: No), it is determined whether the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), the display notification command is set (S2215), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2214, when it is determined that the notification command is not received (S2214: No), the storage device related command (the storage state command corresponding to the retracted state (S1414, see FIG. 125)) or the bulging state is handled. It is determined whether or not a storage state command (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received (S2216), and in S2216, when it is determined that a storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the corresponding display rear image change. A command is set (S2217), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), it is next determined whether the operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, when it is determined that the operation command has been received (the operation button 300 has been operated (pressed down) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and the process ends. To do. This operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the hit related command has been received (S2220).

In the process of S2220, when it is determined that the hit related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S2221), and the present process ends. The details of this hit-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, in the process of S2220, when it is determined that the hit related command is not received (S2220: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S2222), and the present process is ended.

In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114, for example, a ball entry command set based on the fact that a ball has entered each of the entrances provided in the game board 13. When is received, a process of accumulating the number of entered balls is executed for each type of the entrance into which the ball entered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a hit related process (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the hit related processing (S2221). The hit related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 of FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the main control This is a process executed when a hit related command is received from the device 110.

When the hit related process (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit opening command is received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the opening command is not received (S2501: No), it is determined whether the round number command is received (S2503). In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S2503: Yes), the round number cumulative counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the big hit medium effect process is executed ( In step S2505, this process ends.

The big hit medium effect process (S2505) is a process for selecting a mode of the round effect (effect of the round game R and effect of the interval between rounds), and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not the round number command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from main controller 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. In the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command is received (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set ( (S2507), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the jackpot ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and this process is ended. Also, in the processing of S2508, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this processing is ended.

Here, the big hit medium effect process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the big hit mid-sized effect process (S2505). In this big hit medium effect process (S2505), as an effect executed during the big hit, in addition to the big hit game effect for celebrating the big hit, the player operates the operation button 300 to visually check the inside of the storage channel 1231. A possible first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) and a second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) in which the state of the interference member 6930 is changed by causing the player to operate the operation button 300, and regulation. After the number of balls has been entered, the continuous launch effect that encourages the ball to continue to be launched, the effect mode and the presence/absence of the effect are set, and each effect is executed.

When the big hit midtime production process (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether the production execution flag 223x is on (S2531). If it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is ON (S2531: YES), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is not on (off) (S2531: No), then the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the third round of the jackpot. Is determined (S2532).

When it is determined in the process of S2532 that the command is the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the process proceeds to S2534.

In the process of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534), and when it is determined that the jackpot k is the jackpot (S2534: Yes), the second operation effect flag 223wb is turned on (S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not the big hit k (S2534: No), the process directly proceeds to S2536.

That is, if the jackpot k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to ON, but if it is a jackpot other than the jackpot k (jackpot K, L, M, N). , Only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON.

Here, the display effect round command setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the display effect round command setting process (S2536), first, it is determined whether or not the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551), and if the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), The first display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2552), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit medium effect process (S2505).

In the first display mode, as the display effect round command, in the round game R of the third round, it is displayed that there is an operation effect in the next round and that there is an operation effect also in the interval period after the end of the next round (Fig. 88 (a)), and the operation effect is displayed in the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R (see FIGS. 90 and 91).

The display during the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display during the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, it is off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is jackpot L or M (S2553). ), when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as the information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the big hit medium effect process (S2505).

In the second display mode, as the display effect round command, there is an operation effect in the next round in the third round game R (see FIG. 88(a)), and regarding the number of stored balls in the fourth round game. It is set so as to display information (see FIG. 88(b)), and is set to display a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect during the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R. To be done.

Here, the information about the number of stored balls is prepared so that it can be displayed, and is based on the operation button 300 being operated at the success timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing at which the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display portion 717). The display is controlled to be executed.

The display during the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display during the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S2553, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot L or M (that is, jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), it is determined as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r. , The third display mode is set (S2555), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit medium effect process (S2505).

In the third display mode, as the display effect round command, in the round game R of the third round, there is an operation effect in the next round, and a character for urging the ball to be shot toward the first specific winning opening 1000a is displayed. (See FIG. 88), and the moving image (or still image) without operation effect is set to be displayed in the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R.

The display during the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display during the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

As described above, the display of the third round game R and the fourth round game R is collectively set as a display effect round command.

It returns to FIG. 134 and demonstrates. After the process of S2536, the effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and a display effect round command for display effect of the third round game R and the fourth round game R is set (S2537). The effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF (S2539), and the present process is ended.

Although not shown in detail, regarding the process of S2539, if the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to OFF, the process is skipped. doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2532 that it is not the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the fourth round of the jackpot ( S2540).

In the processing of S2540, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), the display command indicating that the fourth round has been reached is set. Since the display mode of the fourth round has already been selected as described above, this process is ended to avoid selecting another display mode redundantly, and the process returns to the hit related process (S2221).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2540, when it is determined that the round number command received this time is not the fourth round of jackpot (S2540: No), the round number command received this time is the fifth round of jackpot. It is determined (S2541).

When it is determined in the processing of S2541 that the command is the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect execution flag 223x is set to OFF (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second The input flag 223wd is set to OFF (S2543), and the process proceeds to S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is not the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: No), the process proceeds to S2544.

In the process of S2544, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the sixth round of the big hit (S2544). In the processing of S2544, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot K, M, or k (S2545).

When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M, or k (S2545: Yes), the continuous firing round command for display is set (S2546), the present process is terminated, and the hit related process (S2221) is returned to. ..

The continuous firing round command for display is set to be a display including a display (see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 92B) urging the ball to continue firing without being stopped, as a display effect round command. .. This display is executed only in the jackpot type (jackpot K, M or k, see FIG. 94(b)) in which the excess winning is expected in the sixth round game R. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of over-winning by continuing to shoot the ball according to the display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2544, when it is determined that the command is not the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or in the processing of S2545, the jackpot type is not jackpot K, M, or k (that is, jackpot L, If it is determined to be N (S2545: No), the display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and this processing is ended.

Therefore, in the present control example, when the round number command for the first, second, fifth rounds and the sixth round when the jackpot types are big hits L and N, the display round number command is set by the processing of S2547. It On the other hand, when the other round number command is received, the display effect round command or the display continuous firing round command is set. In this way, by changing the display of the round game R according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds, the jackpot game can be advanced without making the player tired.

The various display round number commands and the like (the display round number command, the display effect round command, and the display continuous emission round command) set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by. When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the present round number is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be omitted by including the information indicating the current round number in the round number command.

Further, when the round number command of the third round is acquired, the display mode of the fourth round is also selected, but other configurations are also possible, for example, the round number command of the third round is acquired. The same control as that performed when the number of rounds command is performed may be repeated when the round number command of the fourth round is acquired. Further, for example, when the third round number command is acquired, only the display mode is set, and when the fourth round number command is acquired, the display mode is selected. May be.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, at the time of the round (3 rounds) before the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed, In the round (1), the notice effect for notifying that the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is executed (see FIG. 88(a)). Then, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88(b)).

In this way, since the notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the effect of operating the operation button 300 is executed. it can. Further, since the notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed despite the notice effect being executed. Can be prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the storage channel 1231. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls have been stored, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. This allows the player to more positively play a game in which the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2112). The variable display setting process (S2112) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) is, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110, the first special symbol. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely out, reach out, big hit), a process for setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each processing of S2702-S2705 for performing is performed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), the display fluctuation pattern command is set (S2704), and then the corresponding 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter (the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c), and the winning information included in the command storage area based on the subtracted value The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706.

In the process of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2707), and then the command determination process (FIG. 132). In the processing of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2710), and this processing ends.

Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring process (S2113) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51). This is a process for determining that the

Here, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage flow path 1231 is provided as a part of a storage device capable of storing spheres on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 spheres can be stored. Is configured.

A detection sensor 1240 is arranged at the upstream end of the storage channel 1231 and the detection sensor 1240 detects the ball entering the storage channel 1231. The sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (that is, whether the detection sensor 1240 has detected passing of the ball) (S2801), and the first specific winning opening. If the ball has passed 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, when the ball has not passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

In the process of S2803, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the discharge port 1150 (that is, whether the sphere has been detected by the specific region detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870) (S2803), and the discharge port 1150 is determined by the sphere. If it is determined that the data has passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805.

In the process of S2805, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is turned on. It is determined whether or not (S2806). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to on (S2807), and the display intermediate number command is set (S2808). ), and proceeds to the processing of S2812. On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to S2812.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON ( S2809). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2809: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF (S2810), the display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. .. On the other hand, in the process of S2809, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

In the process of S2812, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is turned on. It is determined (S2813). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on (S2814) and the display full tank command is set (S2815). ), and ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2813, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is turned on (S2813: Yes), this process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2812, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816). ). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2817), the display dissatisfaction command is set (S2818), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S2816, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2816: No), this processing is directly terminated.

In this way, the settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are updated as needed based on the detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage state of the sphere in the storage flow channel 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 1231.

In the above description, the number of balls entered based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls based on the detection results of the specific region detection sensor 4860 and the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 are stored in the storage channel 1231. However, the number is not limited to this.

For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a sphere is arranged at an arbitrary position of the storage channel 1231, and when the sphere is detected by the sensor for a predetermined period of time, the sphere is stored downstream thereof. You may decide that there is. As an example, when the sensor is arranged at the position where the third sphere stays from the downstream side, the sensor causes the three spheres including the two spheres arranged on the downstream side to be stored in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to determine that it is stored in.

Further, even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, if the sensor continues to detect the sphere, it can be suspected that the sphere is illegally parked. Can be discovered early. That is, the sensor for detecting spheres can be used both for detecting the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and for detecting fraud.

Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets the lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. This is processing for.

Here, in the present control example, as the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, a decorative lamp 227a (described above) used for an effect provided over the entire pachinko machine 10 is provided. (Including the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) and the covering front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided so as to cover the storage channel 1231, the inside of the covering front plate 1200 is A transmissive lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for making the transmissive state visible to the player and another lamp 227z are provided.

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, the predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) that is timed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2905.

When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, all the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled (lighted) to be lit.

Here, in this control example, the cover front plate 1200 is provided so that the player cannot easily see the internal condition of the storage channel 1231 and the operation condition of the interference member 6930 in the normal game condition. There is. As described above, the front cover plate 1200 is configured to change from the shield state to the transmission state by irradiating the back surface with predetermined light (light of the transmission lamp).

Then, during the predetermined period after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (the predetermined period after the start-up process is executed), the transparent lamp is turned on regardless of the gaming state. Accordingly, immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the store clerk, the inside of the storage channel 1231 covered by the front cover plate 1200 can be easily visually recognized. it can.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the current time is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( (S2901: No), then, it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 detects passage of a sphere (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the sphere (S2902: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 ( S2903) and S2906.

Note that the transmission lamp lighting command in this case is a transmission lamp 227b for a sufficient time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the sphere to pass through the area covered by the covering front plate 1200 in the storage channel 1231. Is set to be turned on, and while the permeable state is maintained during the period in which the sphere flows down the storage channel 1231, the permeable state is released after the sphere is stopped, It is not limited to this. For example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (shielded from the transmission state) on the condition that the sphere has passed through the discharge port 1150 or the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 has detected the passage of the sphere. (Change to a state). Accordingly, the front cover plate 1200 can be maintained in a transparent state during the period in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 does not detect the passage of the sphere (S2902: No), it is then determined whether or not the transmission lamp-related command is set (S2904), and the transmission lamp-related command is set. If so (S2904: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command designated in advance is set (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906. On the other hand, when the transmission lamp-related command is not set (S2904: No), the process directly proceeds to S2906.

The setting of the transmission lamp-related command is mainly performed by the sphere number confirmation process (S3004) described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the process of S2906, a decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state) (S2906), and the present process is ended. The decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107). In this button input monitoring/production process (2107), the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform a corresponding effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, an operation button effect command that notifies the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated is set, and various flags based on the operation content are set. Settings are made.

Specifically, firstly, during the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is the pressing success period, and Set the transparent lamp lighting command to execute the lamp lighting based on the determination result, and set the display command to display the corresponding ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect). (See FIG. 140). Secondly, in the interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is a large depression success period or a successful depression period. It is determined whether it is a push-down failure period or not, and a display command for displaying an effect (great success effect, success effect, failure effect) based on the result is set.

When the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether the effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). When it is determined in the process of S3001 that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently-executed jackpot type is the jackpot k (S3002). .. In the process of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot is k (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is the interval period (S3003). If it is the interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that it is not the big hit k (that is, big hit K, L, M, N) (S3002: No), or in the process of S3003, it is not in the interval (that is, round game). If it is determined that R is in progress (S3003: No), the number-of-spheres confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process ends.

Here, the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the sphere number confirmation processing (S3004). The number-of-balls confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring/effect process (see S2107 of FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

This ball number confirmation processing (S3004) corresponds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether the operation button 300 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, as described above, various flags are set based on the operation contents, a transmission lamp lighting command for executing lamp lighting is set, For example, a display command is set to display a ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect).

When the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004) is executed, it is first determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes). Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display sphere number grasping related command have already been set, this process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107).

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, it is off) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected. Yes (S3102). When the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the sphere number grasping period (S3103).

Here, the sphere number grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 at least partially coincides with the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect) described above (see FIG. 88(b)). The length of the sphere number grasping period can be adjusted by the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the lateral width of the bar display unit 717.

In the present control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], the operating speed thereof is 20 [cm/s], and the width of the bar display portion 717 is 1 [cm]. In this case, the sphere count grasping period is 0.2 [s] because it is the same as the time when the display pointer 719 moves 4 [cm].

In the process of S3103, when it is determined that it is within the number of spheres (S3103: Yes), a display sphere number grasping success command is set (S3104), and a transmission lamp lighting command (strong/long) is set (S3105). ), and proceeds to the processing of S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping success command is set, a display prompting the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (for example, a character display "Attention to attacker!!") is the third symbol display. This is executed in the device 81, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 88(b)).

The transmission lamp lighting command (strong/long) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on at least from the fourth round game R to the fifth round game R.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that it is not within the sphere number period (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed at the timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 are displaced (see FIG. 89)). (S3103: No), the display ball number grasping failure command is set (S3106), the transmission lamp lighting command (medium/long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping failure command is set, the display prompting the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720 and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (medium/long) is set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is turned on at least from the fourth round game R to the fifth round game R.

On the other hand, in the process of S3102, when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is not detected (S3102: No), the process proceeds to S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether the time limit (3 seconds from the start of the fourth round game R in the present control example) has elapsed (S3108). When it is determined that the time limit has elapsed (S3108: Yes), a display ball number unrecognizable command is set (S3109), a transmission lamp lighting command (weak/short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S3108, when it is determined that the time limit has not elapsed (less than 3 seconds from the start of the fourth round game R), this processing ends, and button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). ) Return to.

Here, when the display ball number unrecognizable command is set, the display prompting the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 does not change (see FIG. 88(a)).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (weak/short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the subsequent round game R.

In this way, in this control example, the player who operates the operation button 300 can obtain the player from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b rather than operating the operation button 300. Controlled to increase profits. Further, when operating the operation button 300, it is better to perform the operation in the sphere number grasping period (0.2 seconds in this control example) than to perform the operation at other timings. It is controlled so that the player can obtain a large profit from the display in FIG. 6 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b.

Therefore, the player's motivation to operate the operation button 300 during the fourth round R of the game R can be improved, and the player can concentrate on the operation. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is trying to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to ON (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the time limit), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to ON, the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004) is skipped. Therefore, only the first operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is valid in the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004).

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully operate the operation button 300 while avoiding an operation mode in which the operation button 300 is repeatedly hit blindly. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (display of a caution) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation button 300 is operated. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of times of service early, and it is possible to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

When the process of S3111 ends, this process ends, and the process returns to the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107).

It returns to FIG. 139 and demonstrates. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). If it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is turned on (S3005: Yes), the display operation button-related effect command has already been set, so this process is terminated and the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107). Return to.

On the other hand, in the process of S3005, when it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is not on (that is, it is off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). The fact that the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132) means that the interference member 6930 is changed to the projecting state (see FIGS. 90 and 91). In FIG. 125, the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, it means that the state change of the interference member 6930 to the extended state is executed.

When it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to off (S3007), from the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the fourth round game R, the round After subtracting a value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the inter-interval by 0.2, it is further determined whether the number of remaining balls is 4, which is indicated by a value obtained by subtracting 2 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of spheres left on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 in the storage channel 1231.

Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4 when the display pointer 719d is located at a position where at least a part of the display band 719d and the second band portion 716b vertically match in the timing effect (operation effect). The control is performed so that the operation is performed (see FIG. 90(b)). Here, during a period in which the display pointer 719d and the second band 716b at least partially coincide with each other in the vertical direction, depending on the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second band 716b. , The length can be adjusted.

In the present control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], and the width of the second band portion 716b is newly set to 4.2 [cm]. Since the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 0.2 seconds, the time required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second band portion 716b is 0.1 second. The operating speed of the display pointer 719 becomes 72 [cm/s]. After being set in this way, the display pointer 719 is controlled so that its left end reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (0.8 seconds). At the timing, the right end passes through the left end of the second band portion 716b). In this control example, by performing control in this manner, the period in which the display pointer 719 and the second band portion 716b at least partially coincide with each other in the vertical direction can be limited to 0.1 seconds.

In the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 4 (S3008: Yes), the display operation button great success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, when the display operation button great success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 4 (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the number of remaining balls becomes 5 or more in S3010 because the operation pointer 300 is operated when all of the display pointers 719d are vertically aligned with the first band 716a in the timing effect (operation effect). Is controlled so as to be executed (see FIG. 91(a)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too early) before 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period.

In the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), the display operation button success effect command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a medium profit (that is, neither the highest nor the lowest profit) as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). The display shown is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91(a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. When the time limit (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), the display operation button failure effect command is set (S3013), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, in S3010, the number of remaining balls becomes 3 or less because the operation button 300 is operated when all the display pointers 719d are vertically aligned with the third band 716c in the timing effect (operation effect). Is controlled so as to be executed (see FIG. 91(b)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too late) after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period, or the operation button 300 is not operated.

Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the lowest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 91(b)).

As described above, in this control example, the profit obtained by the player is larger when the operation button 300 is operated than when the operation button 300 is not operated, and accordingly, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is also changed. To be controlled. Further, when operating the operation button 300, the operation can be performed at the timing when the number of remaining balls becomes 4 (from 0.7 seconds after the start of the interval period until 0.8 seconds has elapsed). It is controlled so that the highest profit is obtained, the medium profit is obtained before the timing, and the lowest profit is obtained after the timing.

Therefore, the player can increase the motivation to operate the operation button 300 in the interval period immediately after the fourth round R of the round game R, and can select the operation mode of the operation button 300.

In other words, if the player wants to obtain at least a medium profit, he or she can press the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period to safely obtain a medium profit (stable). In profit). On the other hand, if you want to get the highest profit, if you delay the operation even a little, you will not get a medium profit and you will get the lowest profit, so consider the disadvantage and perform the operation. (Profit is unstable and fluctuations are large).

In this way, by changing the operation mode of the operation button 300, the player selects whether the player can stably obtain a medium profit or the player who is unstable but can obtain the highest profit. be able to.

Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation button 300. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is trying to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to ON (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the time limit). While the second input flag 223wd is set to ON, the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107) is performed. Since it is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is valid in the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107).

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully operate the operation button 300 while avoiding an operation mode in which the operation button 300 is repeatedly hit blindly. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (display of a caution) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation button 300 is operated. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of times of durability early, and it is possible to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

According to the present control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The visibility inside the storage channel 1231 is changed according to the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ease of grasping the operation mode of the interference device 6900.

In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to remove the line of sight from the storage channel 1231 and pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) to participate in the timing effect (operation effect). I was configured to go up. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends while the player's line of sight is concentrated on the first variable winning device 6000.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect) and the storage channel 1231 is in the transparent state, the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage channel 1231 is arranged is noted. It is configured to display a message prompting you to do so. Thereby, the line of sight of the player who pays attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) can be urged to be moved to the storage channel 1231 when necessary.

A circle is displayed on the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) so that the range of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. This makes it easier for the player to predict the internal state of the storage channel 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and to easily determine how many more balls should be shot before the specified number of winnings. be able to. Therefore, the firing mode of the sphere can be easily selected.

As a timing effect (operation effect) performed on the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), different qualities for the player (in this control example, those relating to the visibility of the storage channel 1231 and payout of prize balls) If the timing effect (operation effect) that gives the profit of (the one directly connected to) is continuously executed, the operation timing that gives the highest profit to the player is understood as the same timing (similar timing) to the player. Configured to be done. Thereby, even when the transition from the previous timing effect (operation effect) to the subsequent timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, it is possible for the player to execute the operation without feeling uncomfortable.

Depending on the type of jackpot, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the sixth round), when the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (20th operation pattern, operation scenario 5) and when not discharged (21st operation pattern) The operation pattern and the operation scenario 6) are generated. As a result, it is possible to define whether or not an excess prize has occurred in a predetermined round game R, depending on the type of jackpot.

By changing the predetermined inter-round interval period (for example, the interval period between the fourth round and the fifth round) according to the jackpot type, the inside of the storage channel 1231 in the round game R immediately after the inter-round interval period. The state (the number of stored spheres) was changed. Thereby, even if the state change state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the round game R is the same, the progress mode of the round game can be changed.

The predetermined round game R (in the present control example, the fourth round game R), the number of balls (9 in the present control example) different from the specified number (10 in the present control example) By terminating the game in a state where the specific winning port 1000a is inserted, the profit obtained by the player in the next round game R (the fifth round game R in this control example) is maximized. did. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from aimlessly digesting the jackpot game.

In a configuration in which the sphere flows down toward the specific area 4830 as the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, a predetermined number of balls are provided in the first specific winning opening 1000a while the interference member 6930 maintains the extended state. It was constructed so that the ball could not enter. Thereby, the operation mode of the interference member 6930 can define the timing when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R, and the ball reaches the upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing and the timing of ending the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, it is possible to define the timing when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R.

In the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls are configured to easily stay in an aligned state on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the stayed spheres are in the closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is configured to flow down toward the first specific winning opening 1000a at a changing timing. As a result, it is possible to collectively collect a plurality of accumulated balls in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and it is possible to increase the possibility that an excessive winning will occur.

In addition, the number of over-winning prizes can be defined. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excessive winning prizes from becoming excessive and hindering game play.

Further, the presence or absence of occurrence of excess winning is configured to be stipulated by the operation mode of the interference member 6930 arranged downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 is predetermined based on the jackpot type. It As a result, even if the balls are similarly retained on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between the case where the excessive winning occurs and the case where the excessive winning does not occur, based on the jackpot type.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the profit obtained by the player in the round game R (for example, the visibility of the inside of the storage channel 1231, the number of discharge balls discharged from the storage channel 1231, or based on that) It is configured such that whether or not a ball has entered the specific area 4830 and the maximum number of balls entered in the round game R are changed. As a result, the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the player is configured so that the two kinds of profits to be obtained are seesaw, and the player can grasp the mode of the profits to be obtained by the display device (the third symbol). The display device 81) is configured to display. With this, the player who visually recognizes the display on the display device can obtain the profit at the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit to be preferentially obtained. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the timing effect (operation effect) can be increased.

Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 141, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of “0 to 49” in association with “big hit P”. The “big hit P” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit P” is 50, so when the special symbol 1 is selected by lottery, the “big hit P” is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit P", and after the big hit, the special symbols and the normal symbols shift to a high probability state. In the present control example, the special symbol is controlled so that at least one big hit is determined before the transition to the low-probability state after the transition to the high-probability state. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", "big hit Q" is associated and defined. The "big hit Q" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Q" is 50, so if the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1, the "big hit Q" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

This "big hit Q" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, in the range (entire range) of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99", "major jackpot m" is associated and defined. The "big hit m" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "major jackpot m" is 100. Therefore, when the jackpot is the jackpot in the special symbol 2, the "bonanza m" is determined. The ratio is 100%.

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit m", and after the big hit, the special symbols and the normal symbols shift to a high probability state. In the present control example, the special symbol is controlled so that at least one big hit is determined before the transition to the low-probability state after the transition to the high-probability state. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the privilege (normal probability high probability state of the special symbol or high probability state of the special symbol) given after the jackpot is the special symbol 2 Is more advantageous (it is easier to shift to the high probability state).

In this way, in the present control example, in the case where the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery, when the special symbol 2 is selected in the lottery, the high-probability state, which is advantageous to the player, shifts. It is designed to be easy. Therefore, once the continuous game mode (high probability state of special symbol, and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by entering the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. And a jackpot game are likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the extended game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, in the round game R of the sixth round, it will be described with reference to FIG. 142 that the operation pattern is controlled to be different depending on the jackpot type. In this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described in the ninth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing a time change of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the 22nd operation pattern, and FIG. 142(b) is a drawing showing the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing in the 23rd operation pattern. FIG. 142C is a diagram showing a time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142C is a diagram showing a time change of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the 24th operation pattern.

In this control example, in the round game R of the sixth round of jackpot P, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven in the 22nd operation pattern, and in the round game R of the sixth round of jackpot Q, the 23rd one. The opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven by the operation pattern, and in the round game R of the sixth round of jackpot m, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven by the 24th operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), in the 22nd operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), and the round game R is started. After the waiting time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) has elapsed, the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state.

Note that the interference member 6930 returns to the retracted state when the round game R ends (skips if the round game R ends before the waiting time TK). Here, in the round game R, passage of a prescribed number of balls (10 in this control example) is detected at the first specific winning port 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example, After 30 seconds), the process ends.

In the sixth round game R of the jackpot P in which the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are drive-controlled in the 22nd operation pattern, the specified number (10 in this control example) before the waiting time TK elapses. When the ball of No. enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R is finished without waiting for the waiting time TK.

On the other hand, if the specified number of balls does not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a before the waiting time TK elapses, the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state, and 10 balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231. Since it disappears, it becomes impossible to insert a specified number of balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the time required for the round game R becomes the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1.

The waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) does not stop the ball firing even during the inter-round interval from the end of the round game R of the fifth round, and even after the start of the round game R of the sixth round. By continuing the firing, a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls are set as a period in which the first specific winning port 1000a can be sufficiently reached. In this control example, the ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

On the other hand, for example, if the firing of the ball is stopped during the inter-round interval from the end of the round game R of the fifth round, and the firing of the ball is started at the start of the sixth round, the shot ball is From the balance with the time required to reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (about 4.0 seconds), the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls are provided to the first specific winning opening before the waiting time TK elapses. 1000a cannot be passed.

Therefore, in the case where the ball firing is stopped at the inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round game R, the sixth round game R is compared with the case where the ball firing is continued at the inter-round interval. Can be configured to take longer. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the ball firing is stopped in the interval between rounds.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), in the 23rd operation pattern, while the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), before the waiting time TK elapses. The drive control is performed so that only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, one side is opened/closed). That is, the control for canceling the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

It should be noted that, after the waiting time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) has elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state in the same manner as the 22nd operation pattern. ..

According to this operation pattern, not all balls on the opening/closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow down toward the auxiliary winning opening 9111. It is possible to make it difficult for a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) has elapsed rather than the operation pattern. ..

Therefore, with a high probability, the sixth round game R can be played for a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 22nd operation pattern, since the prize balls can be paid out when the auxiliary balls 9111 enter, the number of prize balls paid out is larger than that in the 23rd operation pattern. can do.

As shown in FIG. 142(c), in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, while the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulation member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), before and after the waiting time TK elapses. The drive control is performed so that only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, one side is opened/closed). That is, the control for canceling the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

In addition, after waiting time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) has elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state in the 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. It is similar to the operation pattern.

In this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening/closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow down toward the auxiliary entering opening 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similar to the 23rd operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the probability that the round game R will end when a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, with a high probability, the sixth round game R can be played for a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 23rd operation pattern, it is possible to enter the ball into the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the waiting time TK elapses. Therefore, in a longer period than the 23rd operation pattern. The payout of prize balls due to the ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be generated. Therefore, as compared with the 23rd operation pattern, more prize balls can be paid out.

In this operation pattern, control is performed so that one-side opening/closing occurs even after the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. That is, even after the storage flow channel 1231 is filled with spheres (filled up) and the spheres stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one side opening and closing occurs, so that the spheres are arranged. It is possible to make it easier to guide the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 when opening and closing on one side, as compared with the case where is unspecified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), the display in the sixth round game R will be described. 143(a) and 143(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for informing the third round of the round game R by the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 143(a), an example of the display of the round game R of the sixth round when the jackpot type is "big jackpot P" or "big jackpot Q", or the sixth round of the round game when "big jackpot m" A schematic diagram showing an example of a display before the waiting time TK in R is shown, and in FIG. 143(b), the waiting time TK in the round game R of the sixth round in the case where the jackpot type is “big hit m” A schematic diagram showing an example of the display after the passage is shown.

That is, when the jackpot type is "jackpot P" or "jackpot Q", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143(a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is "jackpot". In the case of "m", after the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143(a) is maintained, the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143(b) after the waiting time TK has elapsed, and then, The display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143(b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

As shown in FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the round number display section 714 for displaying the current round number is in the sixth round game R. A sub-round display unit 714b that is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a mode and below the number-of-rounds display unit 714 that displays a period during which additional prize balls can be expected in the round game R is displayed.

In FIG. 143(a), the round number display unit 714 is illuminated (brightly displayed), while the sub-round display unit 714b is unlit (darkly displayed), and in FIG. 143(b), conversely, the round number display is displayed. The sub-round display section 714b is illuminated (displayed brightly) while the section 714 is extinguished (displayed darkly).

That is, in this control example, the round game R is executed by the display in the mode shown in FIG. 143(a) during the period when the payout of the prize balls accompanying the entrance to the first specific winning port 1000a is the main. In addition to notifying the player of this, after the waiting time TK elapses, it is impossible to expect the payout of the prize balls accompanying the entrance to the first specific winning opening 1000a, but it is possible to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111. It is possible to let the player recognize that the period during which the payout of the prize balls can be expected continues.

Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display portion 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the substantial change in the profit that the player can obtain by entering the ball. That is, the payout of one award ball due to one ball entering the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 is three as described above, and is 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specific award winning slot 1000a. Is. This change in the number of prize balls with respect to the number of entered balls can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, the sphere flows to the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 only when the sphere is arranged between the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 during the short time when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened. The ball does not always flow to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 every time the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened.

Accordingly, the frequency of balls entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 during the period in which the sub-round display section 714b is emitting light (brightly displayed) is determined by the number of rounds in which the round number display section 714 is emitting light (brightly displayed). The frequency is low as compared with the frequency with which balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

As described above, according to this control example, the profit obtained by the player (change of prize ball paid out by entering one ball or ball, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended) It is possible to notify at the same time that there is a change in the frequency of entering the ball.

In an example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 143(b), the character “+ chance” is displayed as the above-described excess winning probability increase notification mode 721. In this control example, the character "+ Chance" may cause the ball to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by firing a ball, and the ball may enter the auxiliary entrance 9111. It corresponds to being able to receive the payment of.

Thus, in the present control example, in the round game R, it is controlled to pay out an additional prize ball due to the ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. Therefore, in the round game R, the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) are paid out to the player when a predetermined number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a (150 in this control example). The number of award balls (exceeding award balls) exceeding the number can be paid out.

In particular, in the 24th operation pattern, there is a high possibility that the player will enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 even after the waiting time TK elapses, and compared with other 22nd operation patterns and 23rd operation patterns, the game The number of prize balls paid out to a player may increase. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

That is, in the 22nd to 24th operation patterns in the present control example, it is possible to provide a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, while the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

Since the maximum number of times the ball is inserted into the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 corresponds to the number of times the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed in the round game R, the number of times the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed is set to exceed the above-mentioned excess. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

According to the present control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

In the inter-round interval period, the case where the ball firing is stopped is configured so that the period required for the next round game R tends to be longer than the case where the ball firing is continued in the inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval period between rounds.

The number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in the round game R can be positively changed by the driving mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (that is, depending on whether or not the above-mentioned “one side opening/closing” occurs). .. In other words, whether the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 passes the first specific winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary ball opening 9111 downstream thereof is determined by the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member. It can be switched depending on the driving mode of 8340.

Thus, the timing when the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 and the timing when the ball is hard to be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be configured separately. Therefore, for example, during the round game R, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the period. In this case, comparison is made when spheres that have reached a movable object that circulates are sorted in the order of arrival and a predetermined number of spheres that are reached are guided to a winning opening (a winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary winning opening 9111). As a result, the attention power in the vicinity of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved.

That is, the number of shot balls can be reduced with respect to the number of payouts by shooting the ball at a timing when the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 and stopping the shooting of the ball at other timings.

On the other hand, the timing for firing a ball aiming at winning in the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is configured to be different based on the jackpot type. Accordingly, it is possible to request the player to change the firing mode of the ball for each jackpot game, and thus it is possible to easily prevent the player from casually playing the jackpot game. In addition, by making it difficult to grasp the jackpot type, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a strategy, and to give an excessive profit to a specific player (experienced player) (for example, the number of payout balls rather than the number of shot balls). Can be prevented from occurring).

The auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is arranged at a position where the ball is not guided (difficult to be guided) when the opening/closing plate 8300 is not driven (non-excited). As a result, the player's concentration on the game can be improved as compared with the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are not driven.

In the round game R, the player can easily understand the change in the expected value of the number of payout prize balls with respect to the number of balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (third symbol display device 81). As configured. Thereby, during the same round game R, it is possible for the player to easily select, from the display on the display device, whether to continue firing the ball or stop firing the ball.

Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202c, a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and an opening/closing plate. In addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f, at least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided.

This small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is what is done.

The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 145. 145(a) to 145(c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), the first hit random number table 202a indicates whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C3 obtained by the game ball entering the first entrance 64 is a big hit. Special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not, the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640, it is determined whether or not a big hit It is a table in which the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145(b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entrance into the first entrance 64. It is a table in which (determination value) is set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 319”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145(c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) that is determined as a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C3 is “0”, and if “0”, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, if it is determined to be "319", it is determined to be out of position.

As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the entry into the first entrance 64, the random number that is the jackpot for the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is Among 320, since the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 1, the probability of being a big hit for the first special symbol is "1/320". Also, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 3, the probability of being a small hit for the first special symbol is “3/320”.

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the random number value that is the big hit of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random number values is 320, and it is Since the total number of random numbers is 1, the probability of being a jackpot for the second special symbol is "1/320". Also, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 318, the probability of being a small hit for the second special symbol is “318/320”.

As in the above-described respective embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbols are lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is shortened, but is only opened for 0.2 seconds when the time is not shortened. Therefore, even if the value of the second winning random number counter C5 is won when the time is not shortened, it is difficult to win the game ball to the second winning opening 640. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to enter the second winning opening 640 even though he/she is not in a time saving period (a big hit with a time saving is not displayed).

FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. Similar to the above, the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C4 is It is defined in association with the jackpot type and the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

Specifically, in the case where the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with jackpot R (see 202b21 of FIG. 146).

When the jackpot R is reached, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is a time saving state (100 times) until the variation of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

The jackpot S is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b22 of FIG. 146).

When the big hit S is reached, a 16-round big hit game is executed, and the game state after the big hit game is finished becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls, but cannot obtain the profit in the time saving state after the jackpot game is over.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shortened with a probability of 50%. During the time saving period, you will aim to further win big jackpots through the small jackpot game described later.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0-9", a big hit n is associated and defined (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). This jackpot n provides the player with the same profit as the jackpot R described above.

That is, 16 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot games are finished is a time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “10 to 99”, the big hit p is associated and defined (see 202b24 of FIG. 146). The jackpot p is provided with a difference in the number of fluctuations in the time saving game while giving the player the same payout of prize balls as the jackpot n described above.

That is, a 16-round big hit game is executed, and the game state after the big hit game is in a time saving state (4 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is exhausted 4 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

As described above, the jackpot generated in the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) shifts to a time saving state with the establishment of 100%. Therefore, as compared to the case where the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery, the possibility of winning the next big hit in a short time after the big hit game is finished is increased.

As described above, during the shortening of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol increases, the variation time of the ordinary symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol It is set to be long (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640, it is easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Then, when the jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol 2 is achieved, the jackpot will be shortened after the jackpot, so that the jackpot due to the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be easily obtained.

Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol time saving state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and when the big symbol is a big hit, the special symbol easy to become G is likely to be repeated, so that the player is It is easy to get a lot of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the special symbol time saving state, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present control example, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved special symbols are associated with each other, and the sphere is in the specific area 4830 (in the present control example, the next jackpot due to the passage of the sphere). It is determined whether or not to pass through the area to be determined (see FIG. 51), and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 147. 147(a) to 147(c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g.

The small hit type selection table 202g is a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202g1 for selecting a small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147(a)).

As shown in FIG. 147(b), at the time of a small hit based on the first entrance 64, when the value of the small hit type counter C6 is "0-1", the small hit A is selected, and "2 to 99" is selected. In the case of ", a small hit B is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147(c), when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is "0 to 9" during the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, the small hit A is selected, and "10" is selected. In the case of "~99", the small hit B is selected.

In this control example, the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 148). Although the details will be described later, the small hit A is a small hit that is given with a high probability that the big hit is caused by the game ball passing through the specific area 4830, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given the big hit with a high probability. ..

Further, in the present control example, the big hits given after the small hit A and the small hit B are big hits G (16R time shortened big hits).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of small hit, but as a specification other than that, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot which has won the right is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area 4830 in the subsequent jackpot game. May be. By doing so, the player can select a small hit to pass through the specific area 4830, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes of the opening/closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 in the small hit A, and timing changes of the opening/closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 in the small hit B (see FIG. 51). Is. The operation of the distribution device 4850 is the same for the small hit A and the small hit B.

It should be noted that in FIG. 148, illustration of the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the driving timing of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and the operation is illustrated to start at the same point.

First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In the small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.0 second from the start of the small hit, and after 1.0 second, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). Excitation) is released. 0.2 seconds after the release of the excitation, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, the open/close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, and then the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released.

Next, the outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small hit B, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.8 seconds from the start of the small hit, and after 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). ) Is released.

In this way, the small hit A and the small hit B have the same small hit time itself (1.8 seconds), but are different in whether the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hit game. ..

In this control example, if the small hit game is started immediately after the end of the small hit game, that is, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol remains, and the small hit game occurs continuously, between the small hit games The period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to 0.4 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the above-mentioned mode, when the small hit game occurs continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51), the discharge is performed from the discharge port 1150 between the small hit games. The number of spheres formed is limited to two. Therefore, the ball that entered the storage channel 1231 in the previous small hit game can remain in the storage channel 1231 even during the next small hit game.

The operation mode of the distribution device 4850 will be described. The distribution device 4850 maintains the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the solenoid 1510 was started (excited) at the start of the small hit game, and after 2.0 seconds had elapsed. The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds, the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. In addition, the distribution device 4850 moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position and maintains it for 0.5 seconds after 3.2 seconds have elapsed since the solenoid 1510 was started (excited) at the start of the small hit game, When 0.5 seconds has elapsed, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in a manner that the sorting operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again.

That is, the sorting operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for each small hit game. The first movement corresponds to 1 second (corresponding to the time elapsed until the ball passing through the discharge port 1150 reaches the sorting operation member 4851) after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed in the small hit A. ..

From this, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is driven by the small hit A, if the sphere remains in the storage flow channel 1231 in advance, the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 when the first sorting operation member 4851 moves. Can be made. On the other hand, since the probability of the small hit A is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, it is difficult to frequently cause the sphere to pass to the specific region 4830 at this timing.

The second movement of the sorting operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hitting game (corresponding to immediately after the second ball passing through the discharge port 1150 passes through the sorting operation member 4851). Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is a mode in which the balls are not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 as long as the number of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the small hit game is two.

That is, according to the present control example, in the case where only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time-saving game, unless the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes 0, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830. Can be configured as.

As a result, in the case where only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be limited to the time when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. In this case, the payout prize balls that are collected in the time-saving game can be obtained by the prize balls that are paid out by the game in which the balls are continuously inserted into the second ball entrance 640 so that the number of reserved balls does not become zero.

On the other hand, since it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 while continuing to put the ball in the second entrance 640, in order to obtain the next jackpot (pass the ball to the specific area 4830). , The player needs to make a timing to set the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time saving game. As a result, in the time saving game, when the remaining time saving time becomes small, it is possible to increase the profit obtained to the player by frequently setting the timing to set the number of reserved balls to 0.

According to the setting of the second movement, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is three, the balls pass through the specific region 4830, but the number is not limited to this. That is, the number of discharges may be set when the number of discharges is greater than the number (2) discharged in the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small hit game. The second movement may be set at the passing timing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hit game). Also, the shortest interval of the small hit game may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of ejected pieces is 1), and in this case, the second movement is more than the number of ejected pieces (1 piece). It may be set, and for example, the second movement may be set at the timing when the second ball passes the specific area 4830 (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hitting game).

In addition, since the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 in one small hit game is about 1 or 2 on average, the storage channel 1231 is stored before the small hit game in which the number of reserved balls becomes 0. By accumulating the sphere at the position, the possibility that the sphere will pass through the specific area 4830 can be increased. Therefore, the timing to set the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 to 0 can be selected by the number of balls in the storage channel 1231 that increases or decreases each time a small hit game is performed. This can improve the attention to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

In the present control example, the longer the time-saving game period is, the more payout prize balls are obtained due to the balls entering the second ball entrance 640. Here, by setting the number of prize balls in the second ball inlet 640, the player can select whether to shorten or lengthen the time saving game period.

For example, if the number of prize balls in the second ball entrance 640 is 1, there is no profit (the number of prize balls to be paid out) obtained by the player by subtracting from the number of shots (0). Therefore, it is beneficial for the player to shorten the time saving game period.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is 2 or more (for example, 5), there is a profit (the number of prize balls to be paid out) obtained by the player by subtracting from the number of shots (1 prize). that's all). Therefore, it may be advantageous for the player to suppress the ball from entering the specific area 4830 and lengthen the time saving game period.

In the present control example, the opening time of the opening and closing plate 1300 for one small hit game is set to 1.8 seconds from the first opening start to the closing, so to the first specific winning opening 1000a in one small hit game. The number of incoming balls is 3, 4 but is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hit game with an opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) during one small hit game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by disposing the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, even if the opening time of the opening/closing plate 1300 is short, the sphere is at the lower end of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. It is possible to prolong the time until the ball falls downward, and it is possible to guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

In this control example, the ball is controlled so that it can be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so the small hit game (small hit A, small hit B) whose period from opening to closing is 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0 When repeated every 4 seconds, the number of small hit games for the number of balls that can be fired is 11 balls/3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be shot during three small hit games.

Here, in order to generate a small hit game, it is necessary to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so when the number of reserved balls in the second ball entrance 640 is 0, such as at the start of a right hit. Therefore, it is necessary to insert three balls into the second entrance 640 as the number of balls for generating the small hit game three times. Therefore, the remaining eight balls deviate from the second ball entrance 640 toward the first specific winning hole 1000a. In three small hit games, for example, if all the small hits are the above small hit B, six balls are discharged by passing the small hit game three times. Therefore, after three small hit games, two spheres remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the expected number of additional balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 when the balls are continuously fired is two for every three small win games.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hit game is not discharged unless it has reached the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It takes 2 seconds to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231 from the first specific winning opening 1000a, and considering that the opening in the small hitting game is completed in 1.8 seconds, it is the first in the small hitting game. It is possible that the opening of the next small hit game is started before the sphere that has passed through the one specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, when the balls start to accumulate in the storage channel 1231 (when the number is not 0, the first time), the small hitting game in a state where the number is not 0 (for example, in a state where two balls remain in the storage channel 1231). It is possible to make it easier for the balls to remain in the storage flow path 1231 as compared with the case of additionally increasing the balls in the small hit game to be executed, continuous times).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is not 0, even if three balls do not enter the second entrance 640, the number of remaining reserved balls and If the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 exceeds 3, it is possible to execute three small hit games at the shortest interval (0.4 second interval). In this case, the number of balls toward the first specific winning opening 1000a becomes eight or more during the three small hit games, and more balls can be directed to the storage flow path 1231. It is possible to additionally leave more than two spheres in the storage channel 1231.

As described above, in the present control example, the small hitting game generated based on the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and as many balls as possible are It is controlled so that it is more profitable for the player to insert the ball into one specific winning opening 1000a and leave the ball in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 does not contribute to the occurrence of the small hit game (when the number of reserved balls is full (4 in this control example), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It becomes a disadvantage for the player from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls and the number of balls to be additionally retained in the storage channel 1231 (to the second ball entrance 640 during the right-handed game). There may be a disadvantage for the player entering the ball).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 during the right-handed game.

Here, in the present control example, when aiming to pass a ball through the specific area 4830, when the number of reserved balls of the second ball entrance 640 becomes 0, more than two balls are accumulated. It is necessary to be stored in the flow path 1231. That is, if the number of balls held is larger than twice the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640 (identified), unless the number of balls held is reduced, the balls flow into the specific area 4830. It is configured to be difficult to let. Thereby, in addition to the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the attention to the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

In this control example, the adjustment of the game area (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which the ball easily passes through the normal ball entrance 67 during the right hitting game and a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640. However, it is possible to reduce the loss given to the player even in the adjustment in which it is difficult for the balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 and a large number of the balls can easily go to the first specific winning hole 1000a.

That is, for example, when it is an adjustment that a large number of balls enter the second ball inlet 640 during a right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to accumulate in the storage channel 1231 and the small hit game B continues to occur. Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, if the small hitting game A selected by establishment of 10% occurs, the ball can pass to the specific area 4830, so the ball enters the specific area 4830. It is possible to aim to pay out a large number of award balls by inserting a large number of balls into the second ball entrance 640 until.

Further, for example, during the right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 and it is easy to move many balls to the first specific winning hole 1000a. Because it is difficult to enter, most of the right-handed game balls can be entered into the storage flow path 1231, and in addition, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on entering the second entrance port 640 is 0. Since it is easy to maintain as it is, it becomes easy to discharge two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 early, the time saving game can be ended early, and a loss occurs due to the ball not easily entering the second ball inlet 640 (that is, the time saving game Period) can be shortened.

In addition, in the present control example, since the opening/closing plate 1300 and the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hitting game, it is desirable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hitting game. For example, as described in the second embodiment, the second specific winning opening 2255a different from the first specific winning opening 1000a may be set as the winning opening used in the jackpot game.

In this case, the storage channels 1231 do not necessarily have to be joined, and for example, the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a may form independent storage channels. The second specific winning opening 2255a may not constitute the storage flow path (is discharged to the ball discharge path).

In addition, this control example illustrates one means of a technical idea regarding a gaming machine in which “the player can select the timing at which the ball flows into the specific area 4830 (target can be hit)”, and another means for the same purpose. May be used.

For example, a small hit (small hit A in this control example) that drives (excites) the opening/closing plate 1300 in a driving mode in which the ball easily (flows) into the specific region 4830 and a ball hardly flows into the specific region 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (small hit B in this control example) for driving (exciting) the opening/closing plate 1300 in the driving mode (which does not flow) is selected depending on the small hit type, which small hit is to be executed is played. By controlling so as to notify the person and including the case where the ball shot after grasping the content of the notification can pass through the specific area 4830, the timing of inflowing the ball into the specific area 4830 is played. The person may be allowed to select. According to this, it is possible to allow "a game mode in which the ball is prevented from entering the specific area 4830 by not firing the ball at a predetermined timing".

The notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be notified by the display of the third symbol display device 81 or may be notified by voice.

In the third control example, as described above, the ball passes through the special area 4830 so that a big hit can be obtained. That is, it is controlled so that it can operate as a so-called "mixer of one type and two types". In addition, by associating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 with the number of balls flowing down toward the specific region 4830, when the ball passes through the specific region 4830, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is It is configured to occur at most 0. Next, an example of the effect of this control example will be described.

149(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, on the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the current state of the storage channel 1231 that is not actually arranged therein is schematically illustrated inside the circular broken line. Further, the display of the main display region Dm is omitted for easy understanding. In addition, the display at the time when the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 148) is opened by the small hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 is illustrated.

149(a) and (b), as shown in the small area Ds1, it is the same that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is two, as shown inside the circular broken line. The number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is different. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 149(a), three balls are stored, while in the state shown in FIG. 149(b), seven balls are stored.

In the small area Ds2, a semi-circular picture, a first display Ds21 in which "sorry" is written on the left side of the semi-circular picture, and a predetermined profit can be obtained on the right side The second display Ds22 described as "V" and the needle Ds23 that rotates around the central axis of the semicircle as a rotation axis while overlapping with the semicircular picture are displayed.

In the small area Ds3, an appropriate display is displayed on the guide display unit that guides the game method. That is, in FIG. 149(a), since the player is in a state in which the player is likely to receive a profit by firing the ball toward the second entrance port 640, the player launches the ball toward the second entrance port 640. "Aim for the right" is displayed to indicate that. On the other hand, in FIG. 149(b), as will be described later, since it is in a state in which the player is likely to receive a profit even by suppressing the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the player can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. "A chance to stop" is displayed, which indicates that it is possible to stop the firing of the aimed ball.

Here, in the state of FIGS. 149(a) and 149(b), the subsequent game progress in the case of stopping the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 will be described. The display content of the small area Ds2 is set according to the progress of the game. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, all lottery corresponding to the reserved display of the special symbol 2 shown in FIGS. 149(a) and 149(b) is a small hit, and all the small hit types are small. The description will be made assuming that the hit is B (see FIG. 147(c) and FIG. 148).

First, when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 149(a), a small hit occurs for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (that is, twice). Here, as described above, when the small hits are continuously generated due to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remaining, the upper limit number of balls discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 is set to 2 balls. Therefore, after the state shown in FIG. 149(a), a small hit occurs twice, and the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 2 balls and 1 ball in this order.

As described above, after the small hit B is repeatedly generated, the spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific region 4830 when three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Limited Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 149(a), the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) thereafter.

Next, when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 149(b), a small hit occurs for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (that is, twice). .. Here, as described above, when the small hits occur continuously due to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remaining, the upper limit number of balls discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 is set to 2 balls. Therefore, after the state shown in FIG. 149(b), a small hit occurs twice, and the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 2 balls, 2 balls, and 3 balls in this order.

As described above, after the small hit B is repeatedly generated, the spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific region 4830 when three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Limited Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 149(b), the ball then passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51).

In this way, the display of the small areas Ds2, Ds3 is based on the number of reserved special symbols 2 and the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, and then whether or not the spheres pass through the specific area 4830. It has a role as a notification.

That is, when the ball cannot be expected to pass through the specific area 4830 even if the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped, the needle Ds23 and the first display Ds21 and the first display Ds21 are displayed as shown in FIG. 149(a). The second display Ds22 is arranged at an intermediate position.

It should be noted that the needle Ds23 does not need to be arranged at an accurate intermediate position, and it is difficult for the player to determine whether the needle Ds23 is tilted toward the first display Ds21 side or the second display Ds22 side. Any arrangement will do. Further, the needle Ds23 may be stopped or may be vibrated left and right.

Further, as another case where the needle Ds23 is arranged at the intermediate position, the needle Ds23 may be inclined toward the first display Ds21 side. For example, when the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are completely discharged before the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 due to a small hit of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is completed (in the state of FIG. 149(a)). Correspondingly, that is, ((the number of reserved balls × 2) ≧ the number of stored balls), the needle Ds23 is displayed so as to incline toward the first display Ds21 side, and opening and closing by the small hit of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 When the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can remain until after the opening/closing operation of the plate 1300 is completed (for example, in FIG. 149(a), five or six balls are stored in the storage channel 1231). In the case of ((reserved sphere number×2)<reserved sphere number<(reserved sphere number×2)+3)), the needle Ds23 is located at an intermediate position between the first display Ds21 and the second display Ds22. May be displayed so as to be arranged.

By doing so, as compared with the case where the needle Ds23 is arranged at the intermediate position, the case where the needle Ds23 is tilted toward the first display Ds21 side is a period until the opportunity to make the ball enter the specific area 4830. It is possible to let the player understand that the number of balls is long (the number of balls to be inserted into the second entrance 640 by the time of entering the specific area 4830 is large).

Therefore, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be used as a notification that the player can predict the time (or the number of shot balls) required until the opportunity to put the ball into the specific area 4830.

Note that, in FIG. 149(b), as a display corresponding to a state in which a ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 can pass through the specific region 4830, the needle Ds23 is tilted toward the second display Ds22 in the small region Ds2. However, the process leading to this state is not one, and various modes are illustrated.

For example, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are in the state shown in FIG. 149(b), the needle Ds23 is inclined to the second display Ds22 side. Alternatively, the needle Ds23 may be secondly displayed after a predetermined time delay (for example, 3 seconds has elapsed or the opening/closing time of the second entrance 640 has elapsed) from the time point of such determination. It may be inclined to the Ds22 side, or when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 becomes larger than that shown in FIG. 149(b) (when an excess of the number of spheres occurs). The needle Ds23 may be tilted toward the second display Ds22 side.

In addition, in the above description, the case where all the small hits of the special symbol 2 are the small hits B has been described, but when the small hit A occurs, the display change may be caused in another mode. That is, in the case of the small hit A, regardless of the number of reserved special symbols 2, as long as the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are in a dischargeable state, they can pass through the specific region 4830. It is desirable to control the display so that the display can be changed regardless of the relationship between the reserved number of the symbols 2 and the stored number of the storage channel 1231.

Here, when the small hit of the special symbol 2 is the small hit A, the timing of switching to the display in which the needle Ds23 is inclined to the second display Ds22 side is not limited at all. For example, when it is determined that the small hit A has occurred, the display may be switched regardless of the storage state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 (the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 is an operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 1300). If there is a sphere that can pass through the specific area 4830, if a small hit A occurs and it is determined that the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 so as to be discharged, the display may be switched. However (corresponding to the case where the ball is likely to pass through the specific area 4830), the display may be switched according to the actual operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 by the small hit A (the ball passes through the specific area 4830). Equivalent to switching the display by calculating the timing backwards).

When the display is switched in accordance with the actual operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 by the small hit A, the time required for the balls discharged from the storage area 1231 to reach the specific area 4830 is about 1 second as described above, Immediately after the needle Ds23 is switched to incline toward the second display Ds22, the player shifts his line of sight to the specific region 4830 (see FIG. 51) at the lower right of the game region, so that the ball passes through the specific region 4830. Can be seen.

In other words, since it is possible to define the time from the switching of the display to the time when the sphere passes through the specific area 4830, the third symbol display device 81 can be focused until the display is switched to the third symbol display device 81. The display is switched one second before the ball passes through the specific area 4830 while ensuring a long period in which the player pays attention to 81, thereby preventing the player from overlooking the state where the ball passes through the specific area 4830. You can try to do it.

This is not a ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game that is being executed, but a ball that has previously entered the first specific winning opening 1000a can pass through the specific area 4830. It is possible only if there are features. That is, in the case of the conventional gaming machine, in the structure where the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game being executed passes through the specific area 4830, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing at which the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 may be influenced by the timing. Therefore, most of the display on the third symbol display device 81 focuses on the specific area 4830 during the period in which the sphere can pass through the specific area 4830.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, in the case of a small hitting game executed before the small hitting game being executed, if the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a passes through the specific area 4830, it is currently executed. Regardless of the manner in which the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is determined by the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 (discharging mode of the ball from the storage channel 1231). Can be defined.

Therefore, even if the player performs a display that suggests that the player sees the specific area 4830 by limiting the timing (moment) at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830, the player can detect the ball passing through the specific area 4830. The possibility of overlooking can be reduced. Thereby, while prolonging the time to pay attention to the third symbol display device 81, it is less likely that the player misses the ball passing through the specific region 4830 (region arranged outside the third symbol display device 81). be able to.

In addition, when the deviation of the special symbol 2 is included (the value of the first random number counter C3 is 319), it means that the sphere easily passes through the specific area 4830 by the number of the deviation held. Then, it becomes advantageous to the player side. For example, if the holding of the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 149(a) is both disengaged, since there is no small hit after this, the three balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are The balls are discharged all at once and the sphere passes through the specific area 4830.

As described above with reference to FIG. 145(c), the probability that the special symbol 2 will be missed due to being reserved is the same as the probability of a big hit. And, the fact that the special symbol 2 is unreserved has an advantageous effect on the player side when the sphere stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is going to pass through to the specific region 4830. That is, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the special symbol 2 to come off as much as (or more) that the special symbol 2 is a big hit.

In addition, when the big hit (the value of the first random number counter C3 is 0) is included in the fluctuation currently being executed or the suspension of the special symbol 2, whether or not the sphere passes through the specific area 4830. Regardless, the jackpot game is transitioned to, so the notification indicating that may be controlled separately.

For example, when the currently executed variation is a big hit, the needle Ds23 displays the small area Ds2 while keeping the display of the small area Ds3 at “aiming at the right” (see FIG. 149(a)). You may change so that it may incline to the 2nd display Ds22 side (refer FIG. 149(b)).

The timing at which the needle Ds23 tilts is not limited at all. For example, it may be inclined from the timing when the fluctuation starts, or may be inclined at the timing when the fluctuation stops.

Further, for example, when there is a big hit in the hold of the special symbol 2, the corresponding hold may be different from the display mode of another hold. For example, the color may be changed to another color, blinking, flashing light may be emitted, or the shape may be changed.

In addition, as described above, the display of the small area Ds2 may be changed so that the needle Ds23 is inclined toward the second display Ds22 (see FIG. 149(b)). In addition, the change in the display mode of the hold and the change in the display of the small area Ds2 may be executed in conjunction (combined).

FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the game state, the special symbol type, the variable time, and the holding type. To facilitate understanding, only the special symbol 2 will be described, and the description of the special symbol 1 will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game is set to either the normal state or the time saving state described above, and the game progresses based on the set game state. In addition, in FIG. 150, it is assumed that only the above-mentioned small hit B is executed as the small hit.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the normal state, when the deviation symbol is determined based on the holding of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 10 minutes. Further, in the time saving state, when the deviation symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.1 seconds.

As a result, even if the same deviating symbol is used, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on whether the time-variant state changes or the normal state changes. When it fluctuates in the time saving state, as described above, the discharge mode of the balls from the storage channel 1231 expected from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is. The special symbol 2 acts so as to be advantageous to the player by the number of deviating symbols included in the number of reserved balls.

For example, the number of reserved balls is 2, the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 is 5, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened due to the small hit currently being executed, so that the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. If it is regulated, there is no disengagement symbol in the hold, and if the remaining hold is a small hit symbol, there will be two, two, and one spheres for each small hit based on the number of reserved balls. The balls will be ejected and will not pass through the specific area 4830.

On the other hand, in the same case, if there is one disengagement symbol in the hold and the remaining hold is a small hit design, one small hit occurs, so two for each occurrence of a small hit, The balls are ejected in the order of three, and the balls pass through the specific area 4830.

As another case, for example, even if the number of holding balls is 2 and the number of storing balls of the storage channel 1231 is 3, if all the holding is out of the design, the small hit currently being executed Since a small hit does not occur after the above, the three balls are collectively discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the balls pass through the specific area 4830.

Therefore, the inequality ((the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 − the number of reserved balls of the deviating symbol)×2≧3) can be used as a standard of whether or not the sphere passes through the specific region 4830, and thus the special symbol 2 It is possible to improve the player's attention to the determination of the missed symbol based on the holding of the.

On the other hand, the variation time of the deviation symbol in the normal state is set to 10 minutes, so once the deviation symbol is determined, the next fluctuation is not started for 10 minutes even if the special symbol 2 is retained. Even if the small hitting pattern is determined by the remaining hold, the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is not limited by the small hitting.

As an example, a case will be described in which three spheres are stored in the storage flow channel 1231 and the number of time saving is 0 when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is four and the time saving state is shifted to the normal state. When the small hitting symbol is determined based on all of the four reserved, the variation time does not change to the time saving state up to 10 times after the transition to the normal state, so the discharge mode of the balls from the storage flow channel 1231 is The ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 because it is divided into two and one.

On the other hand, in the case of the same transition, if the deviation symbol is determined based on the hold that is variably displayed for the first time or the second time, the execution of the subsequent small hit game will be delayed, so the storage channel 1231 Are ejected together, which allows the spheres to pass through the specific area 4830. Unlike the fluctuation of the deviation symbol in the time saving state, a sufficient time for discharging all the spheres from the storage channel 1231 elapses in one fluctuation, so that the presence or absence of the deviation symbol is noted, and the number of deviation symbols is a problem. Don't

On the other hand, in the case of the same transition, when the deviation symbol is determined based on the variable display that is variably displayed for the third time or the fourth time, the ball is already stored in the storage channel 1231 by the execution of the previous small hit game. Since it has been discharged, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 does not pass through the specific region 4830. In this way, even if the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are the same, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on which hold determines the deviation symbol. (In this control example, it is more likely for the player to benefit if the deviation symbol is determined based on the hold that the start of fluctuation is early).

That is, the player advances the game with the expectation that the off symbol will be determined based on the hold that the start of the change is early with respect to the hold of the special symbol 2 after the transition to the normal state. Thereby, based on the holding of the special symbol 2 after the transition to the normal state, it is possible to configure the game nature in which the player is more likely to gain a profit by determining the off symbol.

Further, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is determined based on the holding of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be a predetermined time (0.1 seconds) from the start of the normal state to 10 variations, After that, a random time of 5 to 10 minutes is set. Further, in the time saving state, when the small hit symbol is determined based on the holding of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be a predetermined time (0.1 seconds).

The variable time is set to a long time of 5 minutes to 10 minutes so that the profit obtained by the player who attempts to execute the game (illegal game) of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 under normal circumstances is obtained. This is to lower it. That is, this is to suppress the generation of illegal profits. On the other hand, the 10 fluctuations after the transition to the normal state has the same variation time as that in the short-time state because the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 just before the end of the short-time state is accompanied by the transition to the normal state. This is to prevent it from being discharged all at once. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the sphere from easily protruding and easily passing through the specific region 4830 when shifting from the time saving state to the normal state.

On the contrary, the variation time may be set to be long regardless of the number of variations after the transition to the normal state. In this case, the interval of small hits after the shift to the normal state can be extended, and the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged at one time. Therefore, the shift from the time saving state to the normal state can be performed. It can be configured so that the sphere easily protrudes and the sphere easily passes through the specific region 4830.

In the present control example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 within a predetermined number of times (10 times in the present control example) after the game state is changed to the normal state, it is normally performed. It is controlled so that the jackpot game is started. That is, even when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the time saving game is over, the big hit game may be started.

On the other hand, if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the game state has been changed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this control example) after the normal state, an error command is set. Controlled by. Accordingly, if the player executes the game in a game mode in which the notification is ignored and the ball is shot toward the second entrance 640, even if the ball may pass through the specific area 4830, It is possible to prevent the shift to the jackpot game at that occasion.

Moreover, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 0.1 seconds. Further, in the time saving state, when the big hit symbol is determined based on the holding of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 0.1 seconds. Thereby, by stopping the fluctuation early and starting the jackpot game, the timing at which the ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific region 4830 can be put in the jackpot game, so the jackpot symbol is determined. It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from occurring a plurality of times due to being played. Also, by stopping the fluctuation early, it is possible to immediately shift to the production of the jackpot game, so that the player does not have to feel the disconnection of the hour-short game and the jackpot game, and the jackpot game can be changed from the hour-short game. The transition to can be felt smoothly.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 178. In the first control example, the case where the operation effect of the operation button 300 is executed while continuing the firing of the sphere toward the storage flow channel 1231 is described, but in the fourth control example, the operation effect of the operation button is performed. However, it is executed during execution of the effect of stopping the firing of the sphere toward the storage flow path 1231 (the effect of preventing the excessive entry ball). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the description will be given by diverting the variable winning device 4000 described in the fourth embodiment. First, an outline of this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152.

FIG. 151(a) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the jackpot game in the fourth control example, and FIG. 151(b) shows the contents of the start round selection table Tb that defines the discharge mode at the end of the start round Rpb. FIG. 151(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing, and FIG. 151(c) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the game in the effect round Rpt, and FIG. 151(d) defines the discharge mode at the end of the after effect game round Rpa. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the after-production game round selection table Ta.

FIG. 152 is a timing chart showing changes in the electrical states of the solenoid 1510, the detection sensor 1240, and the specific area 4830 and changes in the display of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 151 and FIG. 152, in the present control example, as the round game R for executing continuous production toward the V winning round Rv, the starting round Rpb, the production round Rpt, and the post-production game round Rpa are continuous. (See FIG. 151(a)).

Then, in each round, a participation promotion effect that encourages the player to participate is performed, and a player who executes the game in accordance with the participation promotion effect is a V-winner as compared to a case where the game is executed without following the participation promotion effect. In the round Rv, it is controlled so that the difficulty of passing the ball through the specific area 4830 can be lowered. Therefore, the player's motivation to operate in each round can be maintained, and it is possible to prevent the player's attention on the display from decreasing in any round game R of the player.

As shown in the start round selection table Tb (see FIG. 151(b)), the start round Rpb is controlled so that the discharge mode from the storage flow path 1231 after the end of the round game R can be changed, and the discharge mode. Is defined as an interval time in association with the jackpot type, but details will be described later.

When the first ejection mode Tb1 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the inter-round fifth interval time Int5 (1.2 seconds). That is, it is set as the time for discharging exactly 6 spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the sphere is fully stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the fifth inter-round time Int5 has elapsed, four spheres remain in the storage channel 1231 (a discharge shortage occurs).

The expression “full” in the present control example means a state in which the storage channel 1231 stores balls until a state in which an additional ball cannot be entered (also referred to as “full”). ). In other words, the storage channel 1231 indicates a state in which the maximum number of balls that can be defined in advance (10 in this control example) are stored in the storage channel 1231. In the following, the expression “full tank” is used with the same meaning unless otherwise specified.

When the second discharging mode Tb2 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) described in the above embodiment. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly nine balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the sphere is fully stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 elapses, one sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 (a discharge shortage occurs).

When the third ejection mode Tb3 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the inter-round first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) described in the above embodiment. That is, it is set as the time for discharging exactly 10 spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231. Therefore, even if the spheres are fully stored in the storage flow channel 1231, the spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 are discharged globally due to the passage of the first interval time Int1 between rounds (due to insufficient discharge. Does not occur).

The starting round selection table Tb assumes the occurrence of insufficient discharge of the balls from the state where the storage channels 1231 are fully filled with the balls. Therefore, depending on how the player plays the game, the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 may differ from the planned number.

For example, in the start round Rpb, when the player voluntarily plays a game in which the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is fixed to six, the discharge shortage does not occur regardless of the selection of the start round selection table Tb. ..

On the other hand, in the present control example, the larger the number of winnings in the starting round Rpb (the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231), the greater the profit that the player can obtain in the production round Rpt immediately thereafter. It As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the firing of the ball in the start round Rpb and improve the motivation to execute the firing of the ball.

As shown in FIG. 151(c), in the production round Rpt, the ball entry possible period is started in a state where the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 and the storage channel 1231 is filled with the Xth (X is set to X. An integer from 1 to 10. Enter the period after the sphere (see FIG. 152) is detected by the detection sensor 1240 (after the storage flow path 1231 is full with less than the specified number of balls in the round game R). During the (non-ball-remaining remaining period), it is controlled so as to execute the attention effect described later. In addition, at the same time, the notification indicating the stop of the launch is executed (see FIG. 152, “stop instruction”).

In addition, as the attention effect, a player participation type operation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, information that is beneficial to the player displayed along with the operation effect, display, and the like are illustrated.

It should be noted that the notification indicating the stop of the launch is not limited to the notification simply recommending the stop of the launch, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a mode in which the player is informed that the profit that can be obtained for the predetermined winning opening is the maximum, and that the player is not profitable to shoot more balls than this, or the launch is stopped. It may be a notification mode that also includes the period to be played, or may be a mode in which the target winning opening is changed.

As described above, in the round game R, by designating the timing to stop the ball firing to the player, the ball is continued to be fired during the remaining period during which the player cannot enter the ball, and the ball is discharged through the outlet 66 without entering any prize hole. It is possible to prevent such a situation.

Further, by executing the attention effect related to the player's profit at the timing of stopping the ball firing, it is possible to maintain the player's concentration during the remaining non-enterable period. In addition, in this control example, the effect of maintaining the player's concentration can be enhanced by including the timing effect (operation effect) in the attention effect.

As shown in the post-production game round selection table Ta (see FIG. 151(d)), the post-production game round Rpa is controlled so that the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the round game R can be changed. The discharge mode is defined as an interval time by associating with the jackpot type, and details will be described later.

When the post-production first discharge mode Ta1 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to an inter-round sixth interval time Int6 (0.4 seconds). That is, it is set as the time for discharging exactly two spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when three or more spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, the spheres remain in the storage channel 1231 immediately after the sixth round-to-round interval Int6 elapses (a discharge shortage occurs).

When the post-production second discharge mode Ta2 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds). That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly nine balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when 10 or more spheres (10 spheres in this control example) are stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 elapses, the spheres remain in the storage channel 1231 (discharge). Shortage occurs).

When the post-production third discharge mode Ta3 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the inter-round first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, it is set as the time for discharging exactly 10 spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231. Therefore, even when the spheres are fully stored in the storage channel 1231, the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are completely discharged (emission) immediately after the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses. There will be no shortage).

If a remaining ball occurs in the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the end of the post-production game round Rpa, the V winning round Rv (see FIG. 152) cannot be ended by a specified number of balls, so the V winning round Rv is specified. It does not end until the time (30 seconds in this control example) elapses. In this control example, the opening period Tv, which is the period during which the specific region 4830 is opened, is set to be less than the specified time of the V winning round Rv, so the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the end of the post-production game round Rpa. If there is a residual ball in the area, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, information regarding which of the discharge modes Ta1 to Ta3 is selected from the post-production game round selection table Ta becomes the player's attention.

In the present control example, the mode of notification (see FIG. 152, “discrimination display”) that indicates which of the discharge modes Ta1 to Ta3 is selected from the post-production game round selection table Ta is the target production of the production round Rpt. It is controlled differently depending on whether the player succeeded in the operation in the operation effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect can be improved.

According to the post-rendering game round selection table Ta, since the minimum number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the after-rendering game round Rpa is two, regardless of the presence or absence of the notification and the mode of the notification. If the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 in the post-game round Rpa is suppressed to 2 or less, it is possible to prevent the V winning round Rv from being started in the state where there are remaining balls in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to end the V winning round Rv by allowing a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls to enter the detection sensor 1240 before the open period Tv has elapsed, and allow the balls to pass through the specific area 4830. it can.

Therefore, even if there is a circumstance that the operation in the production round Rpt cannot be performed (for example, even if the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) is out of order), the ball is allowed to pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv. It is possible to play a game in a game mode in which the game can be played.

On the other hand, in this game method, there is a possibility that the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained in the post-production game round Rpa while maintaining the situation where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv cannot be obtained. By performing an appropriate operation in the production round Rpt, the appropriate number of entered balls in the post-production game round Rpa is notified.

By playing the game in accordance with the notification, the player can easily obtain the maximum prize ball that can be obtained in the post-production game round Rpa while maintaining the situation where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv. it can.

As shown in FIG. 152, all the above-described attention effect, stop instruction, and determination display are executed in display example 1, and all are omitted in display example 2. The presence/absence of execution of the attention production, the stop instruction, and the discrimination display are controlled to be determined according to the jackpot type and the winning mode of the ball, which will be described later in detail.

The display contents of display example 1 (see FIG. 152) will be described. The display content of the display example 1 corresponds to the case where the shortage of discharge occurs immediately after the end of the start round Rpb. 153 and 154 are schematic diagrams showing, in a time series, changes in the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the effect round Rpt to the start of the post-production game round Rpa in the display example 1.

In addition, in each display content, four round marks are displayed side by side below the round number display. Similar to the first control example, the filled circles are switched depending on the number of spheres stored in the storage passage 1231. That is, similarly to the first control example, when the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is less than 4, the circle at the left end is filled in and the spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 When the number is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled, and when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more and less than 10, the number is right. If the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is 10, the circle at the right end is filled.

In FIGS. 153 and 154, common display examples are illustrated up to the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side). That is, in the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), five enemies and a tank bombarding the enemy are shown in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)). The eyes (display example shown on the left side in the middle) illustrate the state in which the enemy cannot be seen due to smoke associated with the fire, and the third timing (display example shown on the lower left side) shows the timing effect (attention). The sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 for executing the operation effect in the effect, see FIG. 88(a) are illustrated.

The switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is executed at the timing when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is full. From the second frame, it is not possible (or impossible) to expect a ball to enter the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the display of the small area Ds3 on the guide display unit is “aiming at the right” (indicating continuation of launch). Display. Launch command) is switched to "Do not hit" (display that suggests launch stop. Stop command).

From the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), different display examples are shown in FIGS. 153 and 154, which will be described in order. In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side) of FIG. 153, a state where the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88A) is successful is shown, and the fifth frame (shown in the middle right side). In the display example), it is displayed that the remaining number of enemies is two, and after that, the state after the production round Rpt is finished and the post-production game round Rpa is started is the sixth frame (shown on the lower right side). Display example). In the display of the sixth frame, "insert two" is displayed in the guide display portion of the small area Ds3, thereby making a notification that explicitly indicates the number of balls entered.

As shown in FIG. 153, when the timing effect (operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88(a)) is successful, the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow channel 1231) should be allowed to enter the ball in the post-production game round Rpa. Since the display (discrimination display) indicating the number of balls is explicitly notified, the player can play the game without hesitation.

In the present control example, when a larger number of balls than the number explicitly notified is put into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), the player is disadvantageous (the specified number of pieces in the V winning round Rv (the book In the control example, it is controlled to receive (10 balls cannot enter the detection sensor 1240).

On the other hand, in the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side) of FIG. 154, the state in which the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88(a)) has failed is shown, and the fifth frame (the right center side). In the display example shown in (1), it is displayed that the smoke is still not clear and the number of remaining enemies is unknown, and then the production round Rpt ends and the state after the post-production game round Rpa is started is 6 frames. It is illustrated in the eye (display example shown on the lower right side). In the display of the sixth frame, "?? Insert" is displayed on the guide display portion of the small area Ds3, thereby making a notification indicating that the number of entered balls is unknown.

As shown in FIG. 154, if the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88(a)) fails, the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) should be allowed to enter the ball in the post-production game round Rpa. Since the display indicating the number of balls (discrimination display) is not explicitly notified and the number of balls to enter is unknown, the player wonders how many balls should be shot by the detection sensor 1240. You will play a game.

Here, if a larger number of balls than the number of balls notified when the timing effect (operation effect) is successful in the post-production game round Rpa is entered into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), the player Since it is controlled so as to be disadvantaged, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in a game mode for causing a large amount of balls to enter the detection sensor 1240.

Further, as will be described later, since the number of pieces to be notified is 2 as a lower limit, if the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) in the post-production game round Rpa is suppressed to two, the player Can avoid suffering disadvantages. Therefore, as the number of entered balls that the player does not receive a disadvantage, the display of "up to two is OK" is the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower part of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a))). ) Is displayed.

FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the attention production operation difficulty level switching table and the discrimination display switching table. As shown in FIG. 155, in the present control example, the length of the attention effect and the difficulty level of the operation effect are changed depending on the entry timing of the Xth ball (timing at which the storage channel 1231 is full). Controlled by.

That is, when the Xth entry timing is before 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect round Rpt, the “long moving image” is selected as the effect of interest. In this long moving image, the display pointer 719 moves from end to end of the sub display area Ds4 over 10 seconds, so that the operation button 300 can be easily operated when the display pointer 719 is aligned with the bar display portion 717. Can be done (difficulty level is "easy").

If the Xth entry timing is 15 seconds after the start of the effect round Rpt and before 25 seconds have elapsed after the start of the effect round Rpt, “short moving image” is selected as the noticeable effect. In this short moving image, since the display pointer 719 moves from end to end of the sub display area Ds4 over 5 seconds, the difficulty level of operating the operation button 300 when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 is set. It can be increased (compared with difficulty "easy", the moving speed of the display pointer 719 is double. Difficulty "difficult").

Here, the moving mode of the display pointer 719 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may disappear at a predetermined position during movement and then suddenly reappear at another position, the display pointer may be hidden in a predetermined section, or the speed may be increased from the predetermined position during movement for a predetermined section. It may be moved or momentarily moved (sliding may be performed), or the direction may be changed once at a predetermined position during movement and then changed again at another position.

In any case, since the time from the start of the noticeable effect to the period in which the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display portion 717 is determined in advance, during the timing effect, the audio lamp control device 113 starts the noticeable effect. Is measured, and when the operation of the operation button 300 is detected at the timing when the time until the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 has elapsed, it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate. (See S4763 in FIG. 176).

If the Xth entry timing is 25 seconds after the start of the effect round Rpt and before 30 seconds have elapsed after the start, the "still image" is selected as the noticeable effect. In this still image, a large message "Press!" is displayed on the entire screen (not shown). Then, in the present control example, if the operation of the operation button 300 is detected at the same time when the still image is displayed, it is determined that the operation is successful.

That is, in order to succeed in the operation effect, it is required to match the ball entry timing to the detection sensor 1240 with the operation timing, while the display timing of the “still image” is set to the detection sensor 1240 due to control. Since it will be slightly later than the ball entry timing of, the timing at which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 is confirmed, and the operation button 300 is operated with a slight delay instead of completely adjusting the operation timing to that timing, or It is required to operate the operation button 300 at the moment when it is confirmed that is executed (operation difficulty level “extremely difficult”).

As described above, the earlier the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) for the Xth ball, the easier it is to control the success of the timing effect. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for shortening the period until winning the prize.

As shown in the discrimination display switching table, when the timing effect is successful, the number explicit display (see the fifth and sixth frames in FIG. 153) is executed, while when the timing effect fails, the number unknown display (the fifth and sixth frames in FIG. 154) is displayed. (See eye) is executed.

Here, the entry timing of the X-th sphere is likely to be earlier as the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the effect round Rpt is larger. In the present control example, the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the effect round Rpt is associated with the jackpot type and changes depending on the selection of the start round selection table Tb, so the jackpot type (see FIG. 160(b)). ) (That is, due to factors other than the sphere launching mode and the falling mode in the rendering round Rpt), the possibility that the Xth ball entry timing can be accelerated can be changed.

The start timing of the attention production changes depending on the player's ball firing mode during the round game R. Therefore, if the form of the noticeable effect is uniform, there is a possibility that the V winning round Rv may be ended in the middle of the noticeable effect depending on the game mode (the manner of shooting the ball or the manner of entering the detection sensor 1240). On the other hand, in the present control example, the attention effect to be executed is updated over time.

Thereby, in the present control example, regardless of the timing at which the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), the noticeable effect can be ended before the effect round Rpt is ended. Therefore, even if important information is displayed at the end of the noticeable effect, the effect round Rpt does not end before the display, so that the degree of freedom in designing the noticeable effect can be improved.

In this control example, the case where the timing effect of different difficulty is executed once depending on the timing at which the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited.

For example, the timing effect is executed a plurality of times from the start of the effect round Rpt until the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), and the number of successes in the timing effect (success probability). ), the difficulty level of the timing effect executed after the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) may be changed. For example, the greater the number of successes (the higher the probability of success), the lower the difficulty of the timing effect executed after the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). Is also good.

In this case, if the X-th ball does not participate in the timing effect until the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) or fails, the timing effect with high importance (for example, in FIGS. 153 and 154). As the difficulty level of the 3rd and 4th frames increases and it becomes difficult to succeed, pay attention to the timing effect to the player even before the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to pay attention to the flow down state of the sphere inside and around the storage channel 1231. In this case, the player shoots the balls regardless of the number of balls inside the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the balls that do not completely enter the storage channel 1231 are discharged from the outlet 66, which causes a ball loss for the player. ..

That is, the player should play the timing effect repeatedly while being prepared for a certain amount of ball loss, and play the game so as to reduce the difficulty of the timing effect of high importance, or the storage channel so that the ball loss does not occur. By paying attention to the flow-down situation of the balls inside and around 1231, you can play or make a choice so as to be prepared to adjust the firing of the balls and increase the difficulty of timing production with high importance. Can be prevented from becoming slow.

In addition, by making the timing of the Xth ball entering the detection sensor 1240 earlier, the difficulty of the timing effect is lowered (control is performed so that the difficulty is determined by multiplying the conditions). Therefore, when the timing effect until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 is being executed, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the ball is stopped from being emitted.

Further, in this case, depending on the jackpot type, the case where the player is forced to make the above selection and the operation of timing effect and the timing of entering the storage flow channel 1231 are divided as in the present control example. This may be provided in the case where the player is not forced to make a selection (when it is sufficient to execute the game in order as informed). In addition, the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed may be notified so that the player can know which one corresponds to it, or it may be notified so that it is difficult to understand.

It should be noted that various aspects are exemplified as the profit obtained by the player in the timing effect. For example, a profit in which a rare image (premier image) of a character that cannot be normally seen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be used. In this case, at the start of the effect round Rpt, a plurality of cloud-like figures are displayed so as to hide at least a part of the character, and the timing until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240. The display may be switched so that the cloud-shaped figure disappears little by little and the character can be visually recognized each time the rendering is successful.

In this case, important information about the character (for example, by displaying the face, the character is displayed in the part that can be visually recognized when the X-th ball has succeeded in the timing effect after entering the detection sensor 1240). Information that shows whether it is an ordinary character or a special character that indicates a jackpot), and important information for future games (such as the game status to be executed and information on the number of payouts to the number of balls launched so far) By making the symbols drawn, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

In addition, for example, the display corresponding to the desired number of entered balls described in this control example (for example, the display of the sixth frame in FIG. 153) is correct with about 50% accuracy (accuracy of less than 100%). Alternatively, the display number may be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the free game of the player, and the display effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be configured as a display (effect display) that has little effect on the number of payouts.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the method of setting the accuracy of the correct answer to less than 100%. For example, a plurality of numbers may be displayed in advance, and it may be unclear whether "+" or "-" is inserted between them (the four arithmetic operations are expected by the player), or a known sequence of numbers. It is also possible to hide the number of the predetermined digit (for example, the number of digits after the decimal point of the pi) and display it as "the number of hidden numbers", or to display the number only for a moment. You may let me.

Next, the display content of Display Example 2 (see FIG. 152) will be described with reference to FIG. 156. The display content of the display example 2 corresponds to the case where the shortage of discharge does not occur immediately after the end of the start round Rpb (global discharge). FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 in time series from the start of the effect round Rpt to the start of the post-production game round Rpa in the display example 2.

In FIG. 156, in the first frame (display example shown on the upper left), as in FIGS. 153 and 154, five enemies and their enemies are displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)). A bombarding tank is shown. In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), several enemies (two in FIG. 156) have fallen down due to the bombardment, and in the third frame (display example shown in the middle right), all The state in which the enemy has fallen is illustrated, and after that, the state after the production round Rpt is finished and the post-production game round Rpa is started is shown in the fourth frame (display example shown on the lower right side).

The display switching is performed based on the number of detection sensors 1240 detected. That is, the display is switched so that one enemy falls each time two balls are detected. That is, the display of the second frame is a state in which four balls have passed the detection sensors 1240 in the production round Rpt, and the display of the third frame is a state in which ten balls have passed the detection sensors 1240 in the production round Rpt. Corresponds to each.

In the display example shown in FIG. 156, the display of the small area Ds3 on the guide display unit is maintained at “aiming to the right” (display indicating continuous launching. launching instruction). Therefore, the player can proceed the jackpot game without hesitation while continuing the launch.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159, switching of the display of the V winning round Rv will be described. The display of the V winning round Rv is switched to a different display depending on the jackpot type described later, but the display mode to be started is the same basic effect regardless of the jackpot type. That is, various factors that change depending on the type of jackpot (presence or absence of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231, round digestion time that changes accordingly, presence or absence of sphere discharge from the storage channel 1231 during round game R, etc.) are determined. The control for switching the display is executed.

FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 of the basic effect of the V winning round Rv in time series. The basic effect is a display mode that is started at the same time as the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the first frame of the basic effect (display example shown on the upper left), in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)), the treasure box hidden in the dent and five rocks (number 1 Note) and a tank that fires at the rock. The display of the first frame is maintained until 10 seconds elapse from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the second frame (display example shown on the left side of the center), a situation where rocks are crushed and a plurality of rocks (additional reference numeral 2) fall into the created space is illustrated. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 157, three rocks fall after this. The switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is executed at the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), a situation is illustrated in which five dropped rocks (additional reference to number 2) are accumulated again to close the depression. The display of the third frame is maintained for 10 seconds after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), a situation where rocks are crushed and a plurality of rocks (additional reference numeral 3) fall into the created space is illustrated. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 157, three rocks fall after this. The switching from the display of the third frame to the display of the fourth frame is executed at the timing when 20 seconds have passed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the fifth frame (display example shown on the right side of the center), the situation is illustrated in which five rocks (additional reference numeral 3) that have fallen are accumulated again to close the depression. The display of the fifth frame is maintained for 10 seconds after the lapse of 20 seconds from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), the treasure box is enlarged, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in this control example, a ball passes through the specific area 4830 to shift to a high-probability state after the jackpot game is over). The word "sorry" is displayed to indicate that the profit was not obtained.

The switching from the display of the fifth frame to the display of the sixth frame is executed at a timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv, and the display is maintained during the interval period immediately after that. Then, in the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A) after the end of the interval period, the display for the ending time prepared in advance is switched.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the display example of this control example, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)) is displayed in the second and third frames and in the fourth and fifth frames. It is common except for the numbers attached to rocks. As a result, the number of images required to display a moving image over the V winning round Rv can be reduced.

FIG. 158 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the V winning round Rv in time series.

In the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), a display similar to the basic effect described in the first frame of FIG. 157 is illustrated. That is, in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)), a treasure box hidden in a depression, five rocks (additional reference numeral 1) blocking the depression, and a tank bombarding the rock are illustrated.

In the second frame (display example shown on the left side in the middle), a state where rocks are crushed is illustrated. It should be noted that the rock does not fall into the created space, and the state in which the depression is opened is maintained. The switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is performed by determining that a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). To be executed. That is, the display of the second frame is switched to the end timing of the V winning round Rv, and the display is maintained during the interval time immediately after.

Note that the basic effect described in FIG. 157 is continued until the display is switched to the second frame. It is not determined that the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) within the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) of the V winning round Rv. In the case of, the display is not switched to the display of the second frame, but is switched from the basic effect to the display of the ending time ED.

In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), the treasure box is enlarged and opened, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in this control example, the ball is passed through the specific area 4830 to increase the amount after the jackpot game is over). The letter "V" is displayed to indicate that the profit of shifting to the probability state has been obtained. For the purpose of matching the timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830, the display of the third frame is switched 1.0 seconds after the display of the second frame is switched.

Then, the display of the third frame is maintained until the end of the interval time, and when the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A) is entered, the display for the ending time prepared in advance is switched.

As described above, the display example shown in FIG. 158 can be explained as a display example in which the timing of switching to the display of the second frame is unknown, while the display of the third frame is certainly within the interval time.

FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the V winning round Rv in time series.

In the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), a display similar to the basic effect described in the first frame of FIG. 157 is illustrated. That is, in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)), a treasure box hidden in a depression, five rocks (additional reference numeral 1) blocking the depression, and a tank bombarding the rock are illustrated.

In the second frame (display example shown on the left side of the center), a situation where rocks are crushed and a plurality of rocks (additional reference numeral 2) fall into the created space is illustrated. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 159, three rocks fall after this. When switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame, the open/close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is in a closed state for a short time (in this control example, less than 0.2 seconds. Specifically, 0). (1 second) It is executed according to the switching timing.

Note that the basic effect described in FIG. 157 is continued until the display is switched to the second frame. Here, as will be described later, in this control example, the first timing for switching to the closed state for a short time is set to be before 10 seconds after the start of the V winning round Rv, and thus the second frame in FIG. 159. The switching timing to the display is set to be earlier than the switching timing in the basic effect (switching timing to the display of the second frame in FIG. 157). Therefore, display switching can be performed without a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, the timing at which the closed state is switched for a short time is closer to the timing at which the display is switched in the basic effect (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the V winning round Rv, 20 seconds after, etc.). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the displayed display is the display of the basic effect or the display example shown in FIG. 159. As a result, during the V winning round Rv, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (in the present control example, a profit that shifts to a high-probability state after the jackpot game is over by passing the ball through the specific area 4830). The game can be executed with the expectation that it may be.

In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), a situation is illustrated in which five dropped rocks (additional reference to number 2) are accumulated again to close the depression. The display of the third frame is maintained until the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is switched to the closed state next time. When the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state for a short time while the display of the third frame is continued, the display is switched to the second frame (the number attached to the rock increases by 1) again. That is, every time the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state for a short time, the continuous display of the second frame display and the third frame display is repeatedly switched.

In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), the character "Moshiya" is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)). In FIG. 159, the display of the fourth frame is switched from the display of the first frame or the third frame, and is controlled not to be switched from the display of the second frame.

The switching to the display of the fourth frame is a timing at which the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is switched to the closed state for a long time (0.2 seconds or more in this control example, specifically 0.2 seconds). It is executed according to.

In the fifth frame (display example shown on the right side in the middle), a state in which rocks are crushed is illustrated, as in the second frame in FIG. 158. It should be noted that the rock does not fall into the created space, and the state in which the depression is opened is maintained. In addition, the letter "V" flying toward the treasure box is displayed. The letter "V" is displayed so as to fly at a speed of reaching the treasure box one second after the timing of switching to the fourth frame (timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830).

In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), the treasure box is enlarged and opened, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in this control example, the ball is passed through the specific area 4830 to increase the high hit after the jackpot game is over). The letter "V" is displayed to indicate that the profit of shifting to the probability state has been obtained. In the display of the fifth frame, after the character "V" reaches the treasure box, the display continuously shifts to the sixth frame.

Then, the display of the sixth frame is maintained until the end of the interval time, and when the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A) is entered, the display for the ending time prepared in advance is switched.

As described above, in the display example shown in FIG. 159, the timing of switching to the display of the second frame or the display of the fourth frame is defined by the operation pattern, and the timing at which the treasure box is opened is also the winning mode of the V winning round Rv. It is set in advance regardless of.

This display is particularly effective in the jackpot type in which the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is determined regardless of the winning mode of the V winning round Rv (that is, is determined by the winning mode before that), which will be described later. Becomes That is, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 and the timing at which the treasure box is opened can be matched, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

In the display examples described in FIGS. 157 to 159, in the case of the display example in which the basic effect as shown in FIG. 157 is continuously displayed, the game is compared to the display examples shown in FIGS. 158 and 159. The profit that the person can obtain is low. In other words, in the V winning round game Rv, the player continues the game while expecting the display to be switched from the basic effect.

On the other hand, in common between FIGS. 157 to 159, since the basic effect is displayed until the display is switched, even if the display is switched in any of the display examples of FIGS. 157 to 159, the player , It can be expected that the display can be switched from the basic effect. Therefore, as a result, even if the V winning round Rv ends after a stipulated time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (it takes a relatively long time to digest the round game R), the player plays the game. You can prevent getting tired of.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first type selection table 202b3, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3, At least an opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is provided.

First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b3. The first hit type selection table 202b3 is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is stipulated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b3, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected. In FIG. 160(b), the contents of the post-rendering game round selection table Ta, the start round selection table Tb, and the V winning round Rv whose contents are switched according to the selected jackpot type are also shown.

In this control example, by providing a variation in the combination of the post-production game round selection table Ta, the start round selection table Tb, and the V winning round Rv, the player can identify the jackpot type in the middle of the jackpot game and expect to win. We are trying to prevent the profit that can be obtained from being grasped in advance.

That is, in the distribution of the special symbol 1, the first difference that can be grasped by the player is the interval time (difference according to the start round selection table Tb) between the effect round Rpt and the after effect game round Rpa. In this control example, whether the first discharge mode Tb1 or the second discharge mode Tb2 is selected as the interval time, the distribution of the post-production game round selection table Ta and the V winning round Rv is the same for each of them. The first hit type selection table 202b3 is configured to occur (with the same probability).

Similarly, even if the player grasps the difference in the interval time (post-production gaming round selection table Ta) immediately before the V winning round Rv, whether the subsequent V winning round Rv is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Since there is no change in the distribution probability of, the player can be allowed to execute the game while predicting the jackpot type until the V winning round Rv is being executed. As a result, the player can be attracted to the game and the player's concentration can be improved, as compared with the gaming machine in which the jackpot type can be grasped quickly.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "big hit Ua" ( See 202b31 in FIG. 160(b)). The "big hit Ua" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit Ua" is 10, so "big hit Ua" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

This "big hit Ua" has 6 rounds set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 hour reductions (ST 80 times) after the big hit ends. When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, the specified number within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv (this control example Then, it is required to insert 10 balls into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) to end the round game R. Therefore, when the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific region 4830.

Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the after-production first discharge mode Ta1 (0. 4 seconds), the second post-production discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) discharges all the balls when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is structured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, since the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, in the jackpot game of "big hit Ua", the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 should be adjusted. In many cases, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830 without being able to move.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 24", "big hit Ub" is associated and defined (see 202b32 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This "big hit Ub" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Ub" is 15, so "big hit Ub" is determined when the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit Ub", and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot ends and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv has an opening pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161(a)) that is closed for a long time during the round game R), the specified number (book) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv. In the control example, 10 balls are inserted into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, in the form of entering the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv. Regardless, the ball is passed through the specific region 4830 by discharging the sphere (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) from the storage channel 1231 when the round game R is long closed. be able to. Therefore, even if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not decided whether or not the sphere can be passed through the specific region 4830.

Further, for the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 34", "big hit Va" is associated and defined (see 202b33 in FIG. 160(b)). ). The “big hit Va” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Va" is 10, so "big hit Va" is determined when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit Va", and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, after the big hit, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 shortening times (ST80 times), but the specific area When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that only closes briefly during the round game R (operation scenario 34 (see FIG. 161(a))), in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, V In the winning round Rv, it is required to enter a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) within the opening period Tv and to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the after-production first discharge mode Ta1 (0. 4 seconds), after the production second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds), when the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres (when 10 spheres are stored), all spheres are discharged. It is structured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, the ball will remain in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, so in the jackpot game of "big hit Va", the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 should be adjusted. In many cases, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830 without being able to move.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 49", "big hit Vb" is associated and defined (see 202b34 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This "big hit Vb" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit Vb" is 15, so "big hit Vb" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this “big hit Vb”, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, after the big hit ends, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 shortening of time (ST 80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv has an opening pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161(a)) that is closed for a long time during the round game R), the specified number (book) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv. In the control example, 10 balls are inserted into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, in the form of entering the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv. Regardless, the ball is passed through the specific region 4830 by discharging the sphere (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) from the storage channel 1231 when the round game R is long closed. be able to. Therefore, even if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not decided whether or not the sphere can be passed through the specific region 4830.

Further, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 59" in association with "big hit Wa" (see 202b35 in FIG. 160(b)). ). This "big hit Wa" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit Wa” is 10, so the “big hit Wa” is determined when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

This “big hit Wa” has 6 rounds set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 shortening of time (ST80 times) after the big hit ends, but the specific area When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, the specified number within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv (this control example Then, it is required to insert 10 balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the after-production first discharge mode Ta1 (0. 4 seconds), the second post-production discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) discharges all the balls when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is structured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, the ball will remain in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, so in the jackpot game of "big hit Wa", the number of balls entered into the storage channel 1231 should be adjusted. In many cases, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830 without being able to move.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 74", "big hit Wb" is associated and defined (see 202b36 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This “big hit Wb” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Wb" is 15, so "big hit Wb" is determined when the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit Wb", and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot ends and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv has an opening pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161(a)) that is closed for a long time during the round game R), the specified number (book) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv. In the control example, 10 balls are inserted into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, in the form of entering the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv. Regardless, the ball is passed through the specific region 4830 by discharging the sphere (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) from the storage channel 1231 when the round game R is long closed. be able to. Therefore, even if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not decided whether or not the sphere can be passed through the specific region 4830.

In addition, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "75 to 84" in association with "big hit Ya" (see 202b37 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This "big hit Ya" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Ya" is 10, so "big hit Ya" is determined when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds in this “big hit Ya”, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot is moved to a high-probability state of 80 reductions in time (ST80 times) after the end of the big hit. When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that only closes briefly during the round game R (operation scenario 34 (see FIG. 161(a))), in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, V In the winning round Rv, it is required to enter a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) within the opening period Tv and to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the after-production first discharge mode Ta1 (0. 4 seconds), the second post-production discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds) discharges all the balls when the storage channel 1231 is filled with the balls (when ten balls are stored). It is structured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, the ball will remain in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, so in the jackpot game of "big hit Ya", the number of balls entered into the storage channel 1231 should be adjusted. In many cases, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830 without being able to move.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “85 to 99”, “big hit Yb” is associated and defined (see 202b38 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This “big hit Yb” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit Yb" is 15, so "big hit Yb" is determined when the special symbol 1 lottery results in a big hit. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this “big hit Yb”, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot ends and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv has an opening pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161(a)) that is closed for a long time during the round game R), the specified number (book) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv. In the control example, 10 balls are inserted into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, in the form of entering the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv. Regardless, the ball is passed through the specific region 4830 by discharging the sphere (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) from the storage channel 1231 when the round game R is long closed. be able to. Therefore, even if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not decided whether or not the sphere can be passed through the specific region 4830.

On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in a range (entire range) of "0 to 99" in association with "big hit q". This "big hit q" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit q” is 100, so when the special prize 2 is a big hit, the “big hit q” is determined. The ratio is 100%.

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit q", and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot ends and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, the specified number within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv (this control example Then, it is required to insert 10 balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

In addition, since the discharge mode in the immediately preceding interval time is the post-production third discharge mode Ta3, the V winning round does not depend on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (even if the tank is full). Rv can be started in a state where no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds in the jackpot game, but in the jackpot game of the special symbol 2, regardless of the number of entered balls in the post-production game round Rpa immediately before the V winning round Rv. Since the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830, the player can proceed with the jackpot game without stopping the firing of the ball (without adjusting the number of balls entered into the storage flow channel 1231). .. Therefore, compared to the big hit of the special symbol 1, the big hit of the special symbol 2 can proceed the big hit game smoothly.

In this way, in the present control example, in the case where the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery, the special symbol 2 is selected in the lottery, which is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the game can be smoothly advanced. Therefore, once the continuous game mode (high probability state of special symbol, and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by entering the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. And the jackpot game is easily repeated, and the digestion speed of the jackpot game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the extended game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the detailed contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. 161(a). FIG. 161(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3. The opening/closing board operation scenario storage area 202e3 is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening/closing board 1300 (see FIG. 6) are stored for each scenario type, and is stored in the opening/closing board operation scenario storage area 202e3. The opening/closing plate 1300 is operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information that is provided.

Specifically, in the open/close plate operation scenario storage area 202e3, operation scenarios 31 to 34 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 31 is an operation scenario for which the open/close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is set to “open (open state)” as the scenario content, and which has a maximum duration of 30 seconds. In the operation scenario 31, even if 30 seconds have not elapsed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number (10 in this example) of spheres, and the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends. It is controlled to return to the state (state in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed).

The operation scenario 32 is an operation scenario of 10 seconds at maximum, in which “open (open state)” is set in the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 32, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number of balls (10 in the present control example) even before 10 seconds have elapsed, and thus the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends, and Controlled to return to the state.

The operation scenario 33 includes “open (open state) 9.0 seconds→closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds→open (open state) 5.0 seconds on the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) as the scenario content. → Closed (closed state, long closed) 0.2 seconds → Opened (open state) 4.0 seconds → Closed (closed state, long closed) 0.2 seconds → Later open (open state) 4.0 seconds → Closed (Closed state, long closed) 0.2 seconds is set as a loop”, which is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds.

In the operation scenario 33, even if 30 seconds have not elapsed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number (10 in this example) of spheres, and thus the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends and the initial stage is completed. Controlled to return to the state.

In the operation scenario 33, unlike the operation scenarios 31 and 32 described above, the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened (open state) and then closed (closed state, long closed state), so that the storage channel The balls remaining in 1231 can be discharged. Therefore, it is possible to allow the sphere to pass through the specific region 4830, and it is possible to newly enter the sphere into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow channel 1231) by eliminating the fullness of the storage flow channel 1231.

That is, the round game R is started from the state that the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231, the storage flow path 1231 is full, and in the situation where the round game R continues, the remaining time of the round game R is wasted. In order to suppress the sphere, it is desirable to stop the firing of the sphere. On the other hand, this playability gives the player some time to spare, which may reduce the player's concentration and reduce the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the operation scenario 33, even if the storage channel 1231 is full, one ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 each time the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (closed state, long closed). Therefore, it becomes possible to newly enter the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). In this case, it is preferable to restart the launch of an appropriate number of balls from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls to be paid out and the rapid digestion of the round game R. That is, according to this control example, even after the storage channel 1231 is full, the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (closed state, long closed) so that the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) enters. Since the ball can be restarted, it is possible to maintain a high attention level for the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 and a high concentration level for the ball launch.

As described above, the closing of the opening/closing plate 1300 is concerned with the player's profit in two points, that is, the possibility of passing the ball to the specific region 4830 and the new ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the storage flow channel 1231). Therefore, the player's attention to the closing (movement) of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be improved.

The operation scenario 34 is as follows: “Open (open state) 9.0 seconds→closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds→open (open state) 5.1 seconds on the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6). → Closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds → Opened (opened state) 4.1 seconds → Closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds → After that open (open state) 4.1 seconds → closed (Closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds is set as a loop”, which is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds.

In the operation scenario 34, even if 30 seconds have not passed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number (10 in this example) of spheres, and the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends. Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 34, unlike the above-described operation scenario 33, the closing after the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened (opened state) is configured only by closing (closed state, short closed state). Therefore, like the operation scenario 33, the opening/closing plate 1300 operates from the open state (open state), but the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are not discharged. Therefore, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific region 4830 at the timing of closing (closed state, short closing) of the opening/closing plate 1300, and the storage channel 1231 cannot be completely filled.

That is, in the operation scenario 34, while maintaining the effect of the operation scenario 33 of paying attention to the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the profit obtained by the player does not change. It can be maintained (if the storage channel 1231 is full, it remains full even after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, and the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

The closing timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 is common to the operation scenario 33 and the operation scenario 34, and the difference in the operation length is 0.1 seconds. Therefore, the opening/closing plate 1300 may be in either the operation scenario 33 or the operation scenario 34 pattern. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the player is operating.

Therefore, when the player restarts the ball firing in accordance with the closing of the opening/closing plate 1300, if the player can obtain the additional profit as expected (in the case of the operation scenario 33), most of the fired balls become the prize balls. The case of not being connected (case of operation scenario 34) can be configured.

In this way, the operation scenarios are divided and stored based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, so that the profit that the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 currently being executed gives to the player is controlled. 110 can be easily identified.

FIG. 161(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3. The opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is provided with information as to which jackpot type and which round game R of which round each predetermined scenario type corresponds to.

When executing the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300, the MPU of the main control unit 110 reads information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 from the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 and opens/closes it. The plate 1300 is movable.

The opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is configured such that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening/closing plate 1300 is movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

<Main controller flow>
Next, details of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 162, the RAM 203 is the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, and the special control example (see FIG. 101) described above. Symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, action counter 203j, exit flag 203k, remaining ball Timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p, closing flag 203q, count start flag 203qa, closing counter 203r, V flag 203s, V winning effective counter 203t, notification counter 203u, winning number counter 203w, discharging number counter 203x. In addition to the other memory area 203z, it has at least an unreached flag 203qb and a post-winning counter 203wa.

The unreachable flag 203qb is a flag for determining whether or not a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage flow channel 1231, and the timing at which the detection sensor 1240 detects that the sphere has entered the sphere and the storage flow channel 1231 has a sphere. It is switched on and off depending on the relationship with the time required to flow down. When the unreached flag 203qb is on, a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231, and when the unreached flag 203qb is off, a sphere is not arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

The post-winning counter 203wa is a counter that measures the time since the last ball hitting the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) in a predetermined round (V winning round Rv in this control example). That is, it is set to be reset every time a ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) is detected.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 163(a), the ROM 222 has at least the variation pattern selection table 222a described above in the first control example and the opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b3.

The opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b3 is provided to allow the voice lamp control device 113 side to also grasp the operation status of the opening/closing plate 1300 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the open/close plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 and the open/close plate operation scenario table 202f3 is stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 163(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 in this control example. In the RAM 223, the command storage area 223a, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, and the normal symbol holding ball number, similar to those described above in the first control example. Counter 223d, fluctuation start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag. 223m, a storage counter 223n, an operation flag 223p, an effect temporary storage area 223r, a first operation effect flag 223wa, a second operation effect flag 223wb, a first input flag 223wc, a second input flag 223wd, At least an effect execution flag 223x, a pressed period information storage area 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided, and in addition, an attention effect timer 223ga, an effect switching flag 223gb, a V winning round timer 223gc, and a skip. At least a flag 223gd, an unreached effect flag 223qb, a first effect start flag 223ya, a second effect start flag 223yb, a third effect start flag 223yc, and a fourth effect start flag 223yd are provided.

The attention effect timer 223ga is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of a predetermined round (in this control example, the effect round Rpt), and is used for setting the display effect to be executed.

The effect switching flag 223gb is a flag for preventing a defect that is updated to another effect after the display effect accompanied by the operation effect, which is executed in a predetermined round (in this control example, the effect round Rpt), is set. Is. If the effect switching flag 223gb is on, it means that the display effect to be executed has been decided, and if the effect switching flag 223gb is off, it means that the display effect to be executed has not been decided.

The V winning round timer 223gc is a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the V winning round Rv.

The skip flag 223gd is a flag for preventing the display from being updated by mistake after the display is updated.

The unreached effect flag 223qb is a flag which is on/off switched and controlled in conjunction with the on/off switching of the unreached flag 203qb of the RAM 203. Therefore, when the unreached effect flag 223qb is on, the sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. When the unreached flag 223qb is off, the sphere is not arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. ..

The first effect start flag 223ya to the fourth effect start flag 223yd are flags which are on/off switched and controlled in association with the progress of the jackpot game.

The first effect start flag 223ya is a flag that can be switched depending on the progress status of the big hit game, and if it is on, before the end of the start round Rpb (the third round in the present control example) from the start of the big hit game (effect round Rpt). Before the start), and if it is off, it means after the end of the start round Rpb (after the start of the effect round Rpt).

The second effect start flag 223yb is a flag that can be switched depending on the progress status of the jackpot game, and if it is on, from after the end of the start round Rpb (the third round in this control example) (after the start of the effect round Rpt). Shows that it is before the end of the effect round Rpt (the fourth round in the present control example) (before the start of the post-production game round Rv), and if it is off, before the end of the start round Rpb (before the start of the effect round Rpt). ) Or after the end of the production round Rpt (after the start of the post-production game round Rpa).

The third effect start flag 223yc is a flag that can be switched depending on the progress status of the jackpot game, and if it is on, after the end of the effect round Rpt (the fourth round in this control example) (after the start of the after effect game round Rpa). ) Indicates that it is before the end of the post-production game round Rpa (in the present control example, the fifth round) (before the start of the V winning round Rv), and if it is off, before the end of the production round Rpt (post-production game). It indicates that it is before the start of the round Rpa) or after the end of the after-game gaming round Rpa (after the start of the V winning round Rv).

The fourth effect start flag 223yd is a flag that can be switched depending on the progress status of the jackpot game, and if it is turned on, after the end of the after effect game round Rpa (fifth round in this control example) (start of the V winning round Rv). It shows that it is before the end of the V winning round Rv (in the present control example, the sixth round) (before the start of the ending time), and if it is OFF, before the end of the post-production game round Rpa (V winning round). It indicates that it is before the start of Rv) or after the end of the V winning round Rv (after the start of the ending time).

<Flow of main controller>
Next, with reference to FIG. 164, main processing in the fourth control example executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described in the first control example will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing a main process in the fourth control example executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process. In this control example, the jackpot control process S1004 is changed to S4004, the V winning process S1009 is changed to S4009, and the main control process of the first control example (FIG. 117), and the storage control process. It is common except that S1008 is deleted. Therefore, the same parts as those in the main process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S4004) in this control example. This jackpot control processing (S4004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 164), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed or the first identification is performed. This is processing for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

In the jackpot control process (S4004) of this control example, the notification process (S1111) is omitted from the jackpot control process (S1004) of the first control example (the control of the voice lamp controller 113 whose role will be described later). It is common to the jackpot control process (S1004), except that the winning process (S1112) is changed to the winning process (S4112). Therefore, the same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the winning process (S4112) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S4112) in the fourth control example. This winning process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 164) similarly to the winning process (FIG. 123) in the first control example, and the first specific winning opening opened during the round game R ( This is a process for closing the (large opening) 1000a and setting a condition value (setting value and initial value) for determining whether or not the specific area 4830 has normally passed after the closing.

The winning process (S4112) in the fourth control example is performed after the setting value selection setting process (S4290) is executed after the process of S1278 is executed with respect to the winning process (S1112) in the first control example. The only difference is that the setting value is set (S4297), and the other points are the same. Therefore, the setting value selection setting process (S4290) will be described with reference to FIG. 167.

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the setting value selection setting process (S4290). In the set value selection setting process (S4290), a process of selecting a range of set values to be set in the V winning effectiveness counter 203t according to the situation is executed.

First, the outline of the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example will be described. The setting value selection setting process (S4290) is a process provided to cope with the difference from the first control example.

First, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example in which the discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 is limited at the start of the round game R, from the storage channel 1231 in the middle of the V winning round Rv. Since the discharge of the sphere occurs at a predetermined interval, there is a possibility that the sphere may be arranged in a separated state inside the storage channel 1231 at the end of the round game R. In other words, the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow channel 1231 is started before the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 collides with the sphere staying on the downstream side of the storage flow channel 1231 (to form a complete continuous ball). May be.

Further, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, when the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the V winning round Rv, regardless of the number stored in the storage channel 1231, A predetermined number of balls (one in this control example) are discharged.

That is, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, it is necessary to determine the set value in consideration of the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage flow channel 1231 and the timing at which the closing is performed. The process of selecting a value is the set value selection setting process (S4290).

Next, details of the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example will be described. In the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example, in the process of S4290, it is determined whether the round game R is closed at the end (S4291). When it is not the closing at the end of the round game R (S4291: No), it is judged from the operation scenario currently being executed whether the closing is a long closing (closing for 0.2 seconds) (S4922).

In the processing of S4292, when it is determined that the closed state is not the long closed state (S4292: No), the closed state is a short closed state (closed for 0.1 second), so that the sphere is not discharged from the storage flow channel 1231. Therefore, this process is terminated and the process returns to the winning process S4112.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4292, when it is determined that the closed state is long (S4292: Yes), it is determined whether or not the sphere stays at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It is determined whether 2.0 seconds have passed since the sphere passed through the detection sensor 1240 (S4293).

This determination is made, for example, by providing a plurality of counters (for example, 10 counters) that start counting by detecting a ball entering the detection sensor 1240 like the post-winning counter 203wa. Based on the entry into the ball, either counter is controlled to start timing (that is, since the timing is started sequentially, the value to be counted will be different for all counters), and the timing has been started. After that, it is controlled so that the counter is reset every time 10 balls enter the detection sensor 1240, which is common to each counter. Under this assumption, the value of the counter corresponding to the most downstream sphere among the spheres remaining inside the storage channel 1231 which is grasped from the detection timing of the detection sensor 1240 and the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 based on the operation scenario. It is executed by checking.

In the process of S4293, when it is determined that 2.0 seconds or more has elapsed (S4293: No), the lower limit of the numerical range described in the first control example is set as the number of stored balls=1 and the set value range is selected. To do. That is, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2×1) seconds or more (S4294), and the process proceeds to S4299. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S4293, when it is determined that 2.0 seconds have not elapsed (S4293: Yes), the unreached flag 203qb is set to ON (S4295), this processing is ended, and the winning processing S4112 is performed. Return.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4291, when it is determined that the game is closed at the end of the round game R (S4291: Yes), the value of the post-winning counter 203wa is a predetermined determination formula (2-(stored number)×0.2. It is determined whether it is smaller than () (S4296).

The process of S4296 is a process for determining whether the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 constitutes a continuous sphere with all the spheres, or whether there is a part separated from the sphere.

In the process of S4296, if it is determined that the value of the post-prize counter 203wa is not smaller than the predetermined determination formula (2-(the number of stored)×0.2) (S4296: No), the inside of the storage channel 1231 Since it indicates that all the spheres form a continuous ball, the range of the set value is selected within the numerical range described in the first control example. That is, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2×the number of stored balls) seconds or more (S4297), and the process proceeds to S4299. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S4296, when it is determined that the value of the post-prize winning counter 203wa is smaller than the predetermined determination formula (2-(the number of stored)×0.2) (S4296: Yes), the storage channel It is inappropriate to select the set value range from the stored number because there is a portion (distance) between the balls inside 1231. Therefore, the lower limit of the set value is set as the time at which the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 last reaches the specific area 4830. That is, the range of the setting value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-(3-value after the winning counter 203wa)=value after the winning counter 203wa) or more. Then, (S4298), the process proceeds to S4299.

In addition, the part of (3-value after the winning counter 203wa) in the above equation is the period (2.0 seconds in this control example) in which the sphere passes through the storage channel 1231 and the communication path 4810 from the discharge port 1150. The current position of the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 last is deducted from the post-prize counter 203wa from "3" which is the sum of the period (1.0 second in this control example) that the ball passes, and the ball passes the communication path 4810. This is a portion in which the period until the specific area 4830 is passed through is calculated.

In the process of S4299, the range of the set value of the V winning effectiveness counter 203t selected in any of S4294, S4297, or S4298 is set. After that, this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the winning processing S4112.

It returns to FIG. 164 and demonstrates. In this control example, the V winning process (S4009) is changed from the first control example. This will be described with reference to FIG. 168.

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example. This V winning process (S4009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 164) like the V winning process (FIG. 129) in the first control example, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. This is a process for performing control to monitor the flow of the ball after it has fallen.

The V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example is a portion after the count start flag 203qa is determined to be OFF in the process of S1501 in contrast to the V winning process (S1009) in the first control example. Only the difference (S1501: No) and the others are the same, and therefore, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

First, the outline of the changes in the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example from the first control example will be described. Firstly, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, the opening/closing plate 1300 is controlled so that it can be closed (short closed) in a mode in which discharge of the spheres from the storage flow channel 1231 does not occur. We are dealing with. Secondly, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, there is a case where the ball can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the middle of the V winning round Rv, but the ball is discharged at this time. Whether or not it depends on the arrangement of the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 (whether or not the sphere is arranged at the lower end) is dealt with. Thirdly, there are cases where the opening/closing plate 1300 closes in the middle of the V winning round Rv and cases where the opening/closing plate 1300 closes at the end of the V winning round Rv. Therefore, different predetermined values should be set in the closing counter 203r. It corresponds to.

Next, details of the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example will be described. In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), the subsequent processing is the same as in the first control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203q is on (S1502).

In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), the process proceeds to S4526.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether the current closing is closing (short closing) that does not discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 (S4521).

When it is determined in the processing of S4521 that the closing is the closing (short closing) in which the sphere is not discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (S4521: Yes), the closing flag 203q is set to OFF (S4522), and the processing of S4526. Move to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4521, the closing is not the closing (short closing) that does not discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 (that is, the closing is the closing that discharges the sphere (long closing or closing at the end of round game R)). ) Is determined (S4521: No), it is determined whether the closing is a closing (long closing) in the middle of the V winning round Rv (S4523).

In the processing of S4523, when it is determined that the closing is the closing (long closing) in the middle of the V winning round Rv (S4523: Yes), it is determined whether the unreached flag 203qb is ON (S4524).

In the process of S4524, when it is determined that the unreached flag 203qb is ON, it indicates that the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231. The unreached flag 203qb is set to OFF (S4525), and the closing flag is set. 203q is set to OFF (S4522), and the process proceeds to S4526.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4523, when it is determined that the closing is the closing at the end of the V winning round Rv (S4523: No), and in the processing of S4524, the unreached flag 203qb is not on (that is, off). When it is determined that there is (S4524: No), the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S4528), a different numerical value is selected from the closing contents, and the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set (S4529). finish.

In the process of S4529, a numerical value according to the closing time is selected. That is, 0.1 seconds is selected when the closing is short, 0.2 seconds is selected when the closing is long, and the interval time immediately after is selected when closing at the end of the round game R. In the present control example, if normal, the process of S4529 is not executed at the time of short closing, but if the process of S4529 is executed due to some trouble (such as occurrence of noise), the above process is performed. A numerical value is selected for the closing counter 203r.

In the process of S4526, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4526). Since S4526 is a process executed when the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 in the normal game. Therefore, in the processing of S4526, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4526: Yes), it is expected that the sphere has been illegally passed through the specific area 4830, so an error command is set (S4527). , This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 in the processing of S4526 (S4526: No), this processing is ended as it is.

Note that the control after the error command is set is the same as the content described in the first control example (the processing of S1515 in the above), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

<Control of voice lamp controller>
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, in the present control example, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the main process of this control example, the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107) is omitted from the main process of the first control example, and the command determination process (S4111). Is mainly different from the storage state monitoring process S2113 after the production switching process S4701 is added. Therefore, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals as in the first control example. Will be omitted and only different parts will be described.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the command determination processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 169) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

The command determination process (S4111) is different from the command determination process (S2111) in the first control example only in that the hit related process (S2221) is changed to the hit related process 2 (S4221). It is the same.

Also, FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the hit related process 2 (S4221). In the hit related process 2 (S4221), the point that the effect start flag setting process (S4301) is executed after the round number command is received, with respect to the hit related process (S2221) in the first control example, The big hit medium effect process (S2505) that is transferred after the reception is changed to the process of S4505 (the process of setting the display round number command corresponding to the received round number), and after receiving the big hit ending command. The only difference is that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to OFF (S4509), and the others are the same. Therefore, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals as in the first control example, and the description thereof is omitted.

Every time the round number command is received in the process of S2503, the effect start flag setting process (S4301) is executed, the display round number command is set in the process of S4505, and the command output process (S2102, see FIG. 169) Is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this output, the display control device 114 can grasp the number of rounds to be executed next.

The effect start flag setting processing (S4301) will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the effect start flag setting process (S4301) in the fourth control example. This effect start flag setting process (S4301) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 169), and is a process for setting a flag for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents of the currently executed round game R. Is.

In the effect start flag setting process (S4301) in the fourth control example, it is determined whether the started round is round 1 in the process of S4301 (S4302).

If it is determined that the started round is Round 1 (S4302: Yes), the first effect start flag 223ya is set to ON (S4303), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the started round is not round 1 (S4302: No), it is determined whether the started round is the effect round Rpt (round 4 in this control example) (S4304).

In the process of S4304, when it is determined that the started round is the effect round Rpt (S4304: Yes), the first effect start flag 223ya is set to OFF (S4305), and the second effect start flag 223yb is set to ON. (S4306), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the started round is not the effect round Rpt (S4304: No), it is determined whether the started round is the post-production game round Rpa (round 5 in this control example). (S4307).

In the processing of S4307, when it is determined that the started round is the post-production game round Rpa (S4307: Yes), the second production start flag 223yb is set to OFF (S4308), and the third production start flag 223yc is turned on. The setting is made (S4309), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the started round is not the post-production game round Rpa (S4307: No), it is determined whether the started round is the V winning round Rv (round 6 in this control example). Yes (S4310).

In the process of S4310, when it is determined that the started round is the V winning round Rv (S4310: Yes), the third effect start flag 223yc is set to OFF (S4311), and the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to ON. Then (S4312), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4310, when it is determined that the started round is not the V winning round Rv (S4310: No), this processing is ended as it is. The fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to OFF in the process of S4509 after receiving the jackpot ending command (S2508). As described above, in this control example, the currently executed round is configured to be discriminable by the states of the first effect start flag 223ya to the fourth effect start flag 223yd.

Next, the effect switching process (S4701) will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the effect switching process (S4701). This effect switching process (S4701) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing an effect that changes depending on the progress of the jackpot game. is there.

It should be noted that this process includes a process of detecting a winning mode of a ball to the first variable winning device 4000, and is therefore configured to be executed in a short cycle (within 1 msec) in the main process. As a result, the setting for detecting the winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 4000 can be performed without delay.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the effect switching process, in the process of S4701, it is determined whether or not the second effect start flag 223yb is ON (S4702). When the second effect start flag 223yb is turned on (S4702: Yes), effect round display mode setting processing (S4703) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, the effect round display mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (S4703). FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect round display mode setting process (S4703). In the production round display mode setting process (S4703), first, it is determined whether or not it is the first process after the jackpot is started (S4720). If it is the first process (S4720: Yes), the basic production prepared in advance is performed. To set the display basic effect command (S4721), if it is not the first process (S4720: No), the process of S4721 is skipped, and at the start of the effect round Rpt currently being executed, the detection sensor is detected. It is determined whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering 1240 is 1 or more (S4722).

Note that in the process of S4720, various methods are conceivable as the method of determining that it is the first time. For example, as the process of S4720, a process of setting the value of a predetermined counter to 1 or more is provided, and a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4720 and S4721, and the predetermined counter is set at the start of the jackpot game. The value of may be set to 1.

The basic effect in the process of S4721 is the display shown in the first frame (upper left display example) of FIGS. 153, 154, and 156 in this control example.

In the process of S4722, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S4722: No), the effect This means that the storage channel 1231 was empty at the start of the round Rpt (there were no remaining balls), and the display number erase is set to erase the number display in the post-production game round Rpa. A command is set (S4723), and this processing ends.

When the display number erasing command is set, in this control example, the display in which the notification of the number is intentionally omitted (see the display example of the fourth frame (lower right) in FIG. 156) is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4722, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 is 1 or more (S4722: Yes), at the start of the production round Rpt. In this case, it means that there is a residual sphere in the storage channel 1231. Then, the process proceeds to S4724.

In S4724, it is determined whether the effect switching flag 223gb is on (S4724), and when it is determined that the effect switching flag 223gb is not on (that is, it is off) (S4724: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. Is determined (S4725).

In the processing of S4725, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S4725: No), the attention effect timer 223ga is set to 1 in order to see the time elapsed from the start of the effect round Rpt. This is added and updated (S4726), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4725, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is turned on (S4725: Yes), the attention effect setting processing (S4727) is executed.

Here, the attention effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 175 (S4727). FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the attention effect setting process (S4727). In the attention production setting process (S4727), first, the difference between the prescribed time (30 seconds in this control example) of the production round Rpt and the value of the attention production timer 223ga is set as a determination numerical value (S4740), and then, It is determined whether the numerical value for determination is included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741).

In the process of S4741, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741: Yes), the attention effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155) is used as the attention effect. , “Long video” (easy) is selected, and this processing ends (S4742).

On the other hand, in the process of S4741, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is not included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741: No), the determination numerical value is included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds. It is determined whether or not (S4743).

In the processing of S4743, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4743: Yes), the attention effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155) is used as the attention effect. , “Short video” (difficult) is selected, and this processing ends (S4744).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4743, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is not included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4743: No), it means that the determination numerical value is less than 5 seconds. Therefore, "still image" (extremely difficult) is selected as the noticeable effect from the noticeable effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155), and this processing ends (S4745).

Returning to FIG. 174, description will be made. Following the processing of S4727, a display attention production command for the selected attention production is set (S4728), the production switching flag 223gb is set to ON, and this processing is ended (S4729).

On the other hand, in the process of S4724, when it is determined that the effect switching flag 223gb is off (S4724: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S4730).

If it is determined in the process of S4730 that the operation flag 223p is turned on (S4730: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4730, when it is determined that the operation flag 223p is not on (that is, it is off) (S4730: No), the operation determination process is executed, and this process is ended (S4731).

Here, the operation determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (S4731). FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the content of this operation determination process (S4731). In the operation determination process (S4731), first, it is determined whether or not it is the operation waiting period (S4761).

In the processing of S4761, when it is determined that it is the operation waiting period (in this control example, before entering the inter-round interval) (S4761: Yes), it is determined whether the operation of the operation button 300 is detected (S4762). ).

In the processing of S4762, when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is not detected (S4762: No), this processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4762, when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected (S4762: Yes), it is determined whether the operation timing is appropriate (S4763). Here, in the present control example, whether or not the operation timing is appropriate is determined by whether or not the operation is performed at the timing when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 (appropriate) or not (inappropriate) ( (See FIGS. 153 and 154).

When it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate (S4763: Yes), a display command for success display (see the display example of the fourth frame in FIG. 153) and explicit display (see the display example of the fifth frame in FIG. 153) Is set (S4764), and the number explicit display (see the display example of the sixth frame in FIG. 153, see FIG. 155 in this control example) is set as the display for the next round (post-production gaming round Rpa) (S4765). The operation flag 223p is set to ON, and this processing ends (S4766).

In addition, since how many are displayed in the explicit display changes depending on the mode of the post-production game round selection table Ta, it indirectly corresponds to the jackpot type (see FIG. 160(b)). In other words, in the jackpot type of the first post-drafting discharge mode Ta1 (0.4 seconds), the number of balls to be discharged is two. Therefore, when the explicit display is displayed, “2” is displayed. .. Further, in the jackpot type of the post-production second ejection mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds), the number of balls to be ejected is 9, so that "9" is displayed when the explicit display is displayed. Further, in the jackpot type of the post-production third discharge mode Ta3 (2.0 seconds), the number of discharged balls is 10, so when displaying the explicit display, “10” is displayed.

In addition, if there is a possibility that the player may obtain an excessive profit by notifying an appropriate number each time by the explicit display, the probability that the above-mentioned number is displayed as the explicit display may be lowered (the reliability of the numbers). You can lower it). As a result, the explicit display can be a display for reference only.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4763, when it is determined that the operation timing is inappropriate (S4763: No), a failure display (see the display example of the fourth frame in FIG. 154) and an unknown display (the fifth frame in FIG. 154) are displayed. The display command of the display example is set (S4767), and the number unknown display is displayed as the display of the next round (post-production gaming round Rpa) (in the present control example, refer to the display example of the sixth frame of FIG. 154, see FIG. 155). ) Is set (S4768), the operation flag 223p is set to ON, and this processing is ended (S4766).

Further, in the processing of S4761, if it is determined that it is not the operation waiting period (S4761: No), it means that the operation button 300 has not been operated until the interval period is entered. Then, the process of S4766 is executed, and this process ends.

In the control flow, for the sake of convenience, the operation flag 223p is set to be turned on even when the operation button 300 has not been operated (when the operation waiting period has elapsed). Since this is after the time when 300 can be operated is overrun, the player will not be disadvantaged by this control.

In addition, the effect switching flag 223gb and the operation flag 223p set in the effect round Rpt are set to OFF at the timing when the jackpot game currently being executed ends, and the attention effect timer 223ga ends the jackpot game currently being executed. It is reset at the timing.

Returning to FIG. 173, the description will be continued. In the process of S4702, if the second effect start flag 223yb is not on (that is, it is off) (S4702: No), then it is determined whether the third effect start flag 223yc is on (S4704).

In the process of S4704, when it is determined that the third effect start flag 223yc is on (S4704: Yes), the display command based on the setting in the immediately previous round game R (effect round Rpt) is set, and this process is executed. It ends (S4705).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4704, when it is determined that the third effect start flag 223yc is not on (that is, it is off) (S4704: No), it is determined whether the fourth effect start flag 223yd is on (S4706). ).

In the process of S4706, when it is determined that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is turned on (S4706: Yes), the V display setting process (S4707) is executed, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4706, when it is determined that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4706: No), this process is directly terminated.

The V display setting process (S4707) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of this V display setting processing (S4707). In the V display setting process (S4707), first, it is determined whether it is the first process after starting the current jackpot (S4781), and if it is the first process (S4782: Yes), the display prepared in advance is displayed. A basic effect command is set (S4782), loading of display material is set (S4783), and the process proceeds to S4784.

It should be noted that in the process of S4781, various methods can be considered as a method of determining that it is the first time. For example, as the processing of S4781, the processing of whether the value of the predetermined counter is 1 or more is provided, and the processing of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4781 and S4782, and the predetermined counter is started when the jackpot game is started. The value of may be set to 1.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4781, when it is determined that the processing is not the first processing (S4781: No), the process directly proceeds to S4784.

By the setting of the display basic effect command in the process of S4782, in this control example, a predetermined moving image is displayed on the third symbol display device (a table of the first frame which is a common display in FIGS. 157 to 159). See example).

Also, the necessary materials in the processing of S4783 are various display materials that can be switched from the basic effect (see FIG. 157) at a predetermined timing (for example, display of broken rock (second frame in FIG. 158), when V is acquired. (The third frame in FIG. 158), the V preparation display (the fourth frame and the fifth frame in FIG. 159), and the like.

In the processing of S4784, the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is incremented by 1 and updated (S4784), and the opening/closing pattern of the V winning round Rv is determined from the jackpot type (S4785). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is halfway closed in the V winning round Rv.

When it is determined that the open/close plate 1300 is not closed midway in the V winning round Rv (S4785: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv. To be done.

There are various methods for determining whether the sphere remains inside the storage channel 1231. In this control example, whether the value of the remaining sphere counter 203p is 0 (no remaining sphere) (remaining sphere). Yes).

When it is determined that the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv (S4786: Yes), the V winning round Rv ends when the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) elapses. Therefore, the sphere cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the basic effect is continued (S4787), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4786, when it is determined that there are no remaining balls (empty) in the storage channel 1231 (S4786: No), it is determined whether the skip flag 223gd is on (S4788).

When it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4788: No), 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv based on the value of the V winning round timer 223gc. It is determined (S4789).

The numerical value of 5 seconds is set as the number of seconds with a low probability that a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of winning will occur, and can be changed according to the situation.

When it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv (S4789: Yes), a display command for displaying the broken rock (see the display example of the second frame in FIG. 158) is set (S4790). , The process proceeds to S4792.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed since the start of the V winning round Rv (S4789: No), it is determined whether a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls has entered the detection sensor 1240. It is determined (S4791).

If it is determined in the process of S4791 that the specified number of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4791: Yes), the process proceeds to S4790 and S4792.

In the process of S4792, the skip flag 223gd is set to ON (S4792), and then the process proceeds to the process of S4793. Also, in the process of S4788, when it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is ON (S4788: Yes), the process proceeds to S4793.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4791 that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4791: No), the process directly proceeds to S4793.

In the process of S4793, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4793). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4793: Yes), a display command for displaying a notification that the V prize has been won (in this control example, refer to the display example of the third frame in FIG. 158). The setting is made, and this processing is ended (S4794). On the other hand, in the processing of S4793, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S4793: No), the present processing ends.

The sphere whose passage through the specific area 4830 is detected in the process of S4793 is a sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 since the V winning round Rv was started. That is, at the end of the V winning round Rv, the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific area 4830.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4785, when it is determined that the jackpot type in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is halfway closed in the V winning round Rv is determined (S4785: No), the halfway closing display switching processing (S4795) is executed, and this processing is executed. To finish.

The display switching process for midway closing (S4795) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display switching process for midway closing (S4795). In the display switching process for midway closing (S4795), first, it is determined whether the skip flag 223gd is ON (S4801).

If it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), then a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240. It is determined (S4802).

When it is determined that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4802: No), the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is referred to, and short closing (0.1 second in this control example). It is determined whether or not it is the timing of closing (closing in which the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231) (S4803).

Note that the timing determination is configured such that the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the jackpot game currently being executed using the opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b3 (see FIG. 163) provided in the ROM 222. Therefore, it can be easily performed.

In the process of S4803, when it is determined that it is the timing when the short closing occurs (S4803: Yes), the gaze effect display command is set (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, in the processing of S4803, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the short closing occurs (S4803: No), the process directly proceeds to the processing of S4805.

In the present control example, a display example in which the display is returned to the original display after the display is changed from the previous display, as shown in the display example of the second frame and the third frame of FIG. To be done.

In the processing of S4805, it is the timing at which the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is referred to and a long closing (in this control example, closing for 0.2 seconds. Closing for discharging the ball from the storage flow channel 1231) occurs. It is determined whether or not (S4805). When it is determined that it is not the timing of the long closing (S4805: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the timing of long closing (S4805: Yes), it is determined whether or not a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806). In this control example, if the unreached effect flag 223qb is on, it is determined that a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. If the unreached effect flag 223qb is off, the sphere is located at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It can be determined that is not placed.

When it is determined that the sphere is not arranged at the lower end of the storage flow channel 1231 (S4806: No), the sphere is not discharged from the storage flow channel 1231. Therefore, a gasse effect display command is set and the present process ends ( S4807). Note that, as the galleries effect, the same effects as the effects described above are executed in the process of S4804.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4806, when it is determined that the sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806: Yes), the V preparation effect display command is set (S4808), and the skip flag 223gd is turned on. (S4809), and the process proceeds to S4812.

Further, in the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is on (S4801: Yes), the processing directly proceeds to S4812. Further, in the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the specified number of balls (10 in the present control example) have entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4810.

In the processing of S4810, when it is determined that this is the first processing (S4810: Yes), the processing proceeds to S4811 and then to S4812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the first time (S4810: No), the process directly proceeds to S4812.

Note that in the process of S4810, various methods are conceivable as the method of determining that it is the first time. For example, as the process of S4810, a process of setting the value of a predetermined counter to 1 or more is provided, and a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4810 and S4811, and a predetermined counter is set at the start of the jackpot game. The value of may be set to 1.

In the process of S4811, a display command for displaying the crushed rock (see the display example of the second frame in FIG. 158) is set (S4811), and then the process proceeds to S4812. In the process of S4812, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4812). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4812: Yes), a display for notifying that the V prize has been won (in the present control example, the display example of the third frame of FIG. 158 or the sixth frame of FIG. 159). The display command is set (see the display example), and this processing ends (S4813). On the other hand, in the processing of S4812, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S4812: No), this processing ends as it is.

In this control example, the V preparation effect is a display for notifying that a V prize has been won, as shown in the display examples of the fourth frame and the fifth frame of FIG. 159 (see the display example of the sixth frame of FIG. 159). ) Means a display (a display that makes you feel).

The sphere whose passage through the specific region 4830 is detected in the process of S4812 is not limited to the sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 after the start of the V winning round Rv, but is not limited to the sphere that enters the storage channel at the start of the V winning round Rv. It may be the sphere remaining at 1231. In other words, by providing the processing of S4812, it is felt that the sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv is not an existence that makes the player feel unfortunate only, but may be profitable. Can be made to exist.

The skip flag 223gd set in the V display setting process (S4707) is set to OFF at the timing when the jackpot game currently being executed ends, and the updated V winning round timer 223gc is used for the jackpot game currently being executed. Is reset at the timing when is finished.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 1300 rolls to the right and passes through the detection sensor 1240. A sphere that is symmetrical and rolls to the left is configured to face the detection sensor 1240. It should be noted that the same parts as those of the above-described respective embodiments (including a part that is changed symmetrically) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179 is a front view of the game board 13 of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, in the first variable winning device 12000, in comparison with the configuration of the third embodiment, the opening/closing plate 12300 is a longer plate (in the present embodiment, the width in the lengthwise direction is 135 [mm]). ), and additionally includes a drop delay plate 12250 having a similar shape to the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment.

The opening/closing plate 12300 has the same configuration as the opening/closing plate 1300 described in each of the above embodiments, except that the plate portion 12310 is long in the axial direction. Therefore, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main difference between the drop delay plate 12250 and the third embodiment is that the configuration is different for each section in the left-right direction. Here, the fall delay plate 12250 will be described with reference to FIG. 180.

FIG. 180 is a rear perspective view of the front cover plate 12200. As shown in FIG. 180, the drop delay plate 12250 is arranged on the front side of the movement path of the opening/closing plate 12300 while avoiding interference with the opening/closing plate 12300, and is arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 12300 in the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 that is a linear plate portion that is parallel to and that extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210. A rolling arc portion 12252 whose upper surface is formed of a concave curved shape is mainly provided.

In addition, compared to the third embodiment, in the present embodiment, the extended plate portion 3251 is configured to have a longer length, but since the other shapes are the same and configured for the same purpose, The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

Supplementing the facing surface 3251a, in the present embodiment, the distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 12110 of the main body member 12100 is the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (right side in FIG. 179). In a state where the radius is set to be equal to or smaller than the radius of the sphere in a portion arranged vertically below, the radius is changed to be equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere at an intermediate position (the middle position in the horizontal direction in FIG. 179), and the most downstream side (left side in FIG. 179) is arranged In the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere, the radius is equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the inclination of the facing surface 3251a with respect to the thin plate member 12110 is gentler than that of the third embodiment.

The rolling arc portion 12252 is divided into three equal parts along the longitudinal direction of the fall delay plate 12250. That is, the first rolling portion 12252a, the second rolling portion 12252b, and the third rolling portion 12252c are mainly provided from the side far from the detection sensor 1240.

Similar to the rolling arc portion 3252 in the third embodiment, the first rolling portion 12252a has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end portion of the facing surface 3251a extends in the front-rear direction. At the same time, it is configured so as to smoothly intersect the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 12200 (the tangent line drawn on the plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the first rolling portion 12252a as viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the first rolling portion 12252a can be reduced.

In the second rolling portion 12252b, the upper end portion of the upstream end surface (end surface farther from the detection sensor 1240) is the upper end portion of the downstream end surface (end surface closer to the detection sensor 1240) of the first rolling portion 12252a. They are arranged at the same position, and the radius of curvature when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of curvature of the first rolling portion 12252a.

Therefore, the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the second rolling portion 12252b increases as compared with the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the first rolling portion 12252a. That is, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction can be increased in rolling in the second rolling portion 12252b as compared with rolling in the first rolling portion 12251a. it can.

In the third rolling portion 12252c, the upper end portion of the upstream end surface (end surface farther from the detection sensor 1240) is the upper end portion of the downstream end surface (end surface closer to the detection sensor 1240) of the second rolling portion 12252b. They are arranged at the same position, and the radius of curvature when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of curvature of the second rolling portion 12252b.

Therefore, the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the third rolling portion 12252c increases as compared with the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the second rolling portion 12252b. That is, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction can be increased in rolling in the third rolling portion 12252c as compared with rolling in the second rolling portion 12251b. it can.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the degree of deceleration when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the rolling arc portion 12252 can be changed depending on the lateral position of the ball. That is, when there are a plurality of spheres that flow down on the rolling arc portion 12252 at the same speed, if these spheres are similarly rolled back and forth, it is compared with the deceleration degree of the sphere arranged on the upstream side. The degree of deceleration of the sphere arranged on the downstream side can be increased. Therefore, the interval between the plurality of balls can be shortened, and by rolling back and forth a plurality of times, the interval between the balls can be eliminated (constituting a continuous ball).

With reference to FIG. 181, an example of a flow-down mode of a sphere flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing changes in the arrangement of spheres flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300.

In FIG. 181, a schematic graph is shown as an example of the arrangement of spheres that flow along the horizontal axis and the vertical axis that flow down on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300. The vertical axis represents the rolling start point of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 at the intersection of the lower end and the horizontal axis, and the rolling end point of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 (detection sensor). 1240). The horizontal axis is graduated at equal intervals, similar to the interval at which balls are fired. That is, in the present control example, since the sphere firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the scale interval on the horizontal axis corresponds to 0.6 seconds.

In FIG. 181, a curve connecting the arrangement of spheres over time is illustrated. For ease of understanding, the flow of the sphere will be described as a flow due to gravitational acceleration. Therefore, when a load other than gravity is not applied to the sphere, the curve shown in FIG. 181 becomes a quadratic curve, and this curve will be described as a basic curve BPF.

Here, in the twelfth embodiment, the open/close plate 12300 rolls on the upper surface of the open/close plate 12300 maintained in the open state after the ball reaches the open/close plate 12300 maintained in the open state, and the detection sensor. It takes about 4 seconds to enter 1240. Therefore, the basic curve BPF is illustrated as a quadratic curve that reaches the upper end position (position of the detection sensor 1240) on the vertical axis after 4 seconds. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the mechanism forming the continuous ball, description will be made assuming that the downflow velocity of the ball reaching the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 is zero.

The sphere flowing down the opening/closing plate 12300 basically flows down along the curve BPF. Therefore, when the open/close plate 12300 maintains the open state, the interval at which the ball reaches the open/close plate 12300 is the same as the interval at which the ball enters the detection sensor 1240. On the other hand, when the opening/closing plate 12300 changes its state between the closed state and the open state, the sphere may be decelerated and the interval may change.

In FIG. 181, an example of when the open/close plate 12300 changes between the closed state and the open state (corresponding to midway closing in operation scenarios 51 and 52 described later) is illustrated at the closing timings TC1 to TC3. The closing timings TC1 to TC3 are shown as straight lines parallel to the vertical axis. The interval between the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing TC3 is shown at 1 second intervals in order to facilitate understanding of operation scenarios 51 and 52 described later.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the degree of deceleration changes depending on the arrangement of the balls. That is, whether the ball is arranged above the first rolling part 12252a, the ball is arranged above the second rolling part 12252b, or the ball is arranged above the third rolling part 12252c. The degree of deceleration changes depending on whether or not there is.

In FIG. 181, the change in this degree will be described by the change in the curve immediately after the closing timings TC1 to TC3. That is, when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state where the balls are arranged above the first rolling portion 12252a, it is assumed that the subsequent flow-down mode of the balls is not affected (the degree of deceleration is small. ), when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state in which the ball is arranged above the second rolling portion 12252b, the subsequent flow-down mode of the ball is the intermediate position HC of the curve BPF (1 second after the flow-down starts State)) (the degree of deceleration is medium), and when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached with the ball placed above the third rolling portion 12252c, the subsequent balls It is assumed that the flow-down mode of is restarted from the start position SC of the curve BPF (the degree of deceleration is large).

The downward trajectory of the sphere indicated by the first curve BP1 is the first closing timing TC1 while flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, but is located above the first rolling portion 12252a. This is the trajectory when the flow continues without being received.

On the other hand, the downward trajectory of the sphere shown by the second curve BP2 is the same as the sphere shown by the first curve BP1 at the first closing timing TC1 while flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300. The locus, which is located above the two-rolling portion 12252b, has been decelerated and has resumed the downward flow as a locus from the midway position HC.

Since the first curve BP1 and the second curve BP2 intersect at the intersection position UC before reaching the upper end of the vertical axis, the sphere shown by the first curve BP1 and the sphere shown by the second curve BP2 are continuous balls. Make up.

The downward trajectory of the sphere indicated by the third curve is the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing while flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, and is located above the third rolling portion 12252c. , The locus from which the flow is resumed as the locus from the start position SC.

The downward trajectory of the sphere shown by the fourth curve is the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing while flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, and at the second closing timing TC2, the first rolling portion. Since it was placed above 12252a, it continued to be Chinese without being affected, and at the time of the third closing timing TC3, because it was placed above the second rolling portion 12252b, it was decelerated, and as a locus from the midway position HC. This is the trajectory where the flow started again.

Since the third curve BP3 and the fourth curve BP4 intersect at the intersection position UC before reaching the upper end of the vertical axis, the sphere shown by the third curve BP3 and the sphere shown by the fourth curve BP4 are continuous balls. Make up.

The twelfth embodiment is used in the fifth control example described next. In the fifth control example, a case will be described in which during the round game R, a timing at which an over-winning is likely to occur and a timing at which the over-winning is not performed are configured. Further, the third symbol display device 81 executes the notification regarding the timing.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183. FIG. 182(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first per type selection table 202b5, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5, At least an opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is provided.

First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b5 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b5. The first hit type selection table 202b5 is a data table in which judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is stipulated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b5, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39". Is defined in association with jackpot (see 202b51 in FIG. 182(b)).

When the big hit Ta is reached, a 15-round big hit game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 12000 (see FIG. 23(a)). In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

The jackpot Tb is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “40 to 79” (see 202b52 of FIG. 182(b)).

When the jackpot Tb is reached, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the 25th operation pattern, which will be described later, of the first variable winning device 12000. In this case, in addition to paying out about 2250 prize balls, the player can receive a prize ball for an extra winning with a high probability.

The jackpot Tc is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99” (see 202b53 of FIG. 182(b)).

When the jackpot Tc is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern (see FIG. 23(c)) of the first variable winning device 12000. In this case, the player receives, in addition to the payout of the prize balls obtained by subtracting the unobtainable amount from the influence of the remaining balls from about 2250 pieces, the payout of some prize balls accompanying the balls winning the general winning opening 63. be able to.

Here, the similar operation pattern means that the second inter-round interval Int2 is arranged after the tenth round in the third operation pattern, and the second interval time Int2 is arranged between the predetermined rounds. Correspond. In this control example, the second interval time Int2 is arranged between at least the fifth round and the sixth round.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”, The jackpot r is associated and defined (see 202b54 in FIG. 182(b)).

When it becomes the big hit r, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the 25th operation pattern to be described later of the first variable winning a prize device 12000, as in the case of the big hit Tb. In this case, in addition to paying out about 2250 prize balls, the player can receive a prize ball for an extra winning with a high probability.

As described above, when the jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), a jackpot game in which the extra prize balls can be received with a high probability is executed. It Thereby, the player's motivation for winning the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery can be increased.

Next, in order to describe the configuration of the 25th operation pattern, the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 will be described with reference to FIG. 183.

FIG. 183(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5. The opening/closing board operation scenario storage area 202e5 is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening/closing board 12300 (see FIG. 179) are stored for each scenario type, and is stored in the opening/closing board operation scenario storage area 202e5. The opening/closing plate 12300 is operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information provided.

Specifically, the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 defines operation scenarios 51 and 52 as scenario types. The operation scenario 51 includes, as the scenario content, “(open (open state) 5.0 seconds→(closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 second)→open (open state) 0” on the opening/closing plate 12300 (see FIG. 179) .9 seconds)×5 (repetition))×3 (repetition)” is set, and the operation scenario is 30 seconds at maximum.

In the operation scenario 51, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number of balls (10 in this control example) even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and thus the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 12300 ends, and Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 51, closing after the open/close plate 12300 is opened (open state) is configured only by closing (closed state, short closed state). Therefore, the opening/closing plate 12300 operates from the open state (open state), but the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are not discharged. Therefore, it is not possible to reduce the number of storage balls in the storage channel 1231 during the round game R.

In the case of an operation scenario such as the operation scenario 51 in which the closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 is released before the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, the position shift of the balls occurs particularly in the vicinity of the restriction member 1600. That is, since the regulating member 1600 is in the ejected state for 0.1 seconds when the opening/closing plate 12300 is in the closed state, the balls are ejected for 0.1 second, and then the regulating member 1600 is in the stored state. This pushes the ball back.

Therefore, when the sphere is pushed back, it is feared that the entire sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is pushed back and detected again by the detection sensor 1240. However, in the present invention, the arrangement of the detection sensor 1240 is defined. This prevents re-detection. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, in the detection sensor 1240, the widthwise center as the detection position is on the upstream side of the sphere arranged ninth from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 and the detection is performed. It is arranged so that the downstream side hemispherical portion of the tenth sphere from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 enters the center in the width direction as a position.

By arranging the detection sensor 1240 in this way, even if the sphere that has once flowed to the downstream (displaced by less than the diameter of the sphere) is pushed back by the operation of the regulating member 1600, it is located downstream of the storage channel 1231. The tenth sphere from the side is always kept in the center in the width direction as the detection position of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the sphere is detected again by the detection sensor 1240 during the operation of the regulating member 1600, but the sphere is detected again.

In this control example, the arrangement of the detection sensor 1240 is devised to prevent the occurrence of re-detection due to being pushed back to the regulating member 1600, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, during the operation of the regulating member 1600, a preventive means for preventing the displacement of the storage sphere upstream from the predetermined position may be provided, or even if the regulating member 1600 operates, the sphere starts to flow down for 0.1 second. In order not to do so, a flow-down regulation means for regulating the flow-down of the sphere may be provided.

Further, the operation scenario 52 includes, as the contents of the scenario, "(open (open state) 5.0 seconds → → (closed (closed state, long closed) 0.2 seconds → open (open state) on the opening/closing plate 12300 (see FIG. 179). ) 0.8 seconds)×5 (repetition))×3 (repetition)” is set and the operation scenario is 30 seconds at maximum.

In the operation scenario 52, even before 30 seconds elapse, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number of balls (10 in this control example), so that the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 12300 ends and the initial stage is completed. Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 52, the opening/closing plate 12300 is opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state, long closed state), so that the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. Therefore, since the number of storage channels 1231 can be reduced, a gap can be easily formed inside the storage channel 1231 when a predetermined number of balls enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Since it is easy to form a state in which less than the allowable number of 1231 (10 balls) is stored), it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of excess winning.

In this control example, the 25th operation pattern is set such that the case where the over-winning is difficult to occur (in the operation scenario 51) and the case where the over-winning is likely to occur (in the operation scenario 52) are different for each round. Is composed of. Specifically, the even-numbered round is the operation scenario 51 and the odd-numbered round is the operation scenario 52, and the twenty-fifth operation pattern is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress the excessive occurrence of excessive winning.

In this way, the operation scenarios are divided and stored based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, so that the profit given to the player by the operation of the opening/closing plate 12300 currently being executed is controlled by the main controller. 110 can be easily identified.

The closing timing of the opening/closing plate 12300 is common to the operation scenarios 51 and 52, and the difference in closing length is as short as 0.1 seconds. It is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine which pattern the player is operating in.

FIG. 183(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5. The opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is provided with information as to which of the jackpot types and which round game R each predetermined scenario type corresponds to.

When executing the operation control of the opening/closing plate 12300, the MPU of the main control unit 110 reads information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 from the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 to open/close it. The plate 12300 is movable.

The opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is configured to be able to set a corresponding operation scenario based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening/closing plate 12300 is movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

Next, an example of display contents during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 184. 184 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 12000 operates in the 25th operation pattern, in a time series.

The first frame (display example shown on the upper left side) of FIG. 184 is a display following the part in the middle of the above-described basic effect (for example, the third frame of FIG. 157 (display example on the lower left side)). That is, the display example shown in FIG. 184 is a display that is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display is being executed in the basic effect.

In the first frame of FIG. 184 (display example shown on the upper left side), in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)), the treasure box hidden in the depression and five rocks (number 2) that block the depression are displayed. (Note) and a tank bombarding the rock are shown, and the display in the guide display section of the small area Ds3 is “target right” (display indicating continuation of launch. launch instruction (see FIG. 157)) Is it?” (display that makes it difficult to continue launching. It is equivalent to a stop suggestion instruction).

Switching from the basic effect to the display of the first frame in FIG. 184 includes the average time (1 second) for the ball to reach the opening/closing plate 12300 from the firing of the ball, and the second frame in FIG. 184 (display example in the middle left). ) To the 6th frame (display example on the lower right side), the opening/closing plate for the total (2.5 seconds) of the time (display is switched at equal intervals, total 1.5 seconds) related to the countdown effect illustrated in the figure. The display is switched at the timing of rewinding from the start of the period in which the closing of 12300 is repeated. That is, in this control example, at the timing of 2.5 seconds, 12.5 seconds, or 22.5 seconds from the start of the above-described operation scenarios 51, 52, the basic effect is displayed in the display example of the first frame in FIG. 184. Can be switched.

In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), a child (an image that suggests stopping the ball firing) is displayed, trying to pass in front of the rock, and in the third frame (display example shown in the lower left) , A state in which a child is passing in front of a rock is shown, and the display on the guidance display unit of the small area Ds3 is switched to "3".

Thereafter, in the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), a state in which the child has passed in front of the tank is illustrated, and the display on the guidance display unit of the small area Ds3 is switched to "2". After that, in the fifth frame (display example shown in the middle right), a state in which the child has passed in front of the tank (an image that suggests reunion of the ball launch) is shown, and the display in the guidance display section of the small area Ds3 is shown. Is switched to "1". The number on the guidance display portion of the small area Ds3 is displayed as an example of a so-called "countdown effect" in which the number is decreased by one and some notification is given at a timing when it can be "0".

In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), a state in which a tank starts bombarding (a display indicating the firing of a ball) is illustrated, and the display on the guidance display portion of the small area Ds3 is “aim right”. The display is switched to (display indicating suggestion of launching. Launching instruction (see FIG. 157)).

When changing the firing and stop of the ball according to the display that can be switched as shown in FIG. 184, the ball launch is stopped from the first frame to the fifth frame of FIG. 184, and the ball launch is started at the sixth frame ( Will be restarted). In this case, the ball shot immediately after switching to the sixth frame (in the present control example, immediately after the timing of 4 seconds, 14 seconds, or 24 seconds from the start of the above-described operation scenarios 51 and 52) is 1 second later. The opening/closing plate 12300 is reached at the timing when the closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 is started.

Therefore, the ball that is fired during a predetermined period after that (4 seconds in this control example) rolls toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening/closing plate 12300 during the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 repeats the closing operation. The kinetic energy is reduced with the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 12300.

In addition, as described above, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy due to the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 12300 is larger in the sphere arranged on the downstream side (the side closer to the detection sensor 1240), and therefore, along the opening/closing plate 12300. The distance between rolling balls can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a continuous ball.

On the other hand, when the balls are fired in the first to fifth frames, the balls reach the opening/closing plate 12300 while the opening/closing plate 12300 maintains the open state. Therefore, the interval between the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 is easily maintained without changing from the interval at the time when the balls reach the opening/closing plate 12300. Therefore, it is difficult to form a continuous ball.

That is, according to the present control example, when the sphere is fired and stopped according to the display example shown in FIG. 184, the sphere is moved along the opening/closing plate 12300 as compared with the case where the sphere is continuously emitted ignoring the display example. The ball rolling toward the detection sensor 1240 can easily form a continuous ball.

Here, when the balls rolling toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening/closing plate 12300 form a continuous ball, a specified number (in the present control example, when the preceding ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240). In the case where 10) winnings are detected and the opening/closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state, it becomes easier for a ball connected to the upstream side of the preceding ball to enter the detection sensor 1240 before the switching.

Therefore, the player can increase the profit (payout of prize balls) obtained in the jackpot game by firing the balls so as to form a continuous ball. In the present control example, in the third symbol display device 81, since the timing at which the continuous ball is likely to be formed is notified, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

In the present control example, the display change as shown in FIG. 184 is executed both in the operation scenario 51 (the even round in the present control example) and in the operation scenario 52 (the odd round in the present control example). .. On the other hand, when the continuous ball is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, the excess winning can be expected only in the operation scenario 52.

By doing this, by displaying an indication to the player to stop the launch, while maintaining the action of extending the digestion time of the round game R, an excessive prize occurs in each round and the player's profit becomes excessively large. Can be prevented.

The configuration of the display example is not limited to this. For example, the display change shown in FIG. 184 may be executed only in the case of the operation scenario 52 (odd round in this control example). In this case, since it is not necessary to stop the ball firing to form a continuous ball even when the excess winning cannot be expected, the round game R can be smoothly advanced.

Further, for example, the display change shown in FIG. 184 may be executed only in the case of the operation scenario 51 (even round in this control example). In this case, it is possible to suppress excessive winning and to slow the progress of the round game R.

According to this control example, the open/close plate 12300 repeatedly changes to the closed state for 5 seconds after the ball is fired in accordance with the display switching of the sixth frame in FIG. 184. During this period, as described above, the ball heading toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening/closing plate 12300 is decelerated by different degrees to facilitate the formation of a continuous ball. However, if the opening/closing plate 12300 changes to the closed state immediately before or during the passage of the plurality of balls forming the continuous ball through the detection sensor 1240, the balls may fall between the detection sensor 1240 and the end surface 3251b. Yes, in this case, there is a possibility that the continuously-constructed continuous ball is eliminated (for example, when the balls between the continuous balls fall).

Therefore, if a continuous ball can be constructed, a period during which the opening/closing plate 12300 maintains the open state (in this control example, from the start of the operation scenarios 51 and 52 to the time point of 5 seconds elapsed, from the time of 10 seconds to the time point of 15 seconds elapsed, Alternatively, it is preferable to pass the detection sensor 1240 from the time point of 20 seconds to the time point of 25 seconds). Here, as described above, in the twelfth embodiment, after the ball reaches the opening/closing plate 12300 maintained in the opened state, the detection sensor 1240 rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 maintained in the opened state. It takes about 4 seconds to enter the ball.

Therefore, for example, the opening/closing plate 12300 is provided about 4 seconds before the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started (and before the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started). When a continuous ball is formed with the ball that has reached the top as a head, a situation in which the ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 can be generated with a high probability while the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state.

On the other hand, even before about 4 seconds before, if the ball stays on the opening/closing plate 12300 for 4 seconds or more, the ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 during the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state. It is possible to generate a situation with a high probability.

Here, according to this control example, the timing shown in the sixth frame in FIG. 184 (display example on the lower right side) is about 6 seconds before the period in which the open/close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started, Immediately after this, the ball launched to reach the opening/closing plate 12300 is about 5 seconds before the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started, and thus is before about 4 seconds.

However, after this, the opening/closing plate 12300 repeatedly executes switching to the closed state, so that the ball flowing down along the opening/closing plate 12300 is decelerated. That is, there is a circumstance that the ball stays on the opening/closing plate 12300 for 4 seconds or more. Therefore, the time that the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 12300 about 5 seconds before the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state starts to stay on the opening/closing plate 12300 is extended by 1 second (that is, the falling velocity of the ball). By decelerating the average of 80% to 80%), the timing at which the leading ball passes the detection sensor 1240 can be included in the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state.

In addition, the ball shot at the timing shown in the sixth frame of FIG. 184 (display example on the lower right side) is near the upstream end of the opening/closing plate 12300 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 12300 starts the switching operation to close. To reach. Therefore, the ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 12300 while the opening/closing plate 12300 is performing the switching operation (repeating operation) to the closing, or the closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 while the opening/closing plate 12300 is rolling. It is possible to maximize the number of decelerations due to the operation of the opening/closing plate 12300 as compared with a ball or the like in which the switching operation of 1 is started. Therefore, the most continuous ball can be formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an example of display contents during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram showing in time series changes in the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 12000 operates in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern.

The first frame (display example shown on the upper left side) of FIG. 185 is a display following the part in the middle of the above-described basic effect (for example, the third frame of FIG. 157 (display example on the lower left side)). That is, the display example shown in FIG. 185 is a display that is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display is being executed in the basic effect.

Here, this predetermined condition is that when the storage channel 1231 is full (see S5032 of FIG. 189), the detection sensor 1240 has detected that a specified number of balls have passed in the currently executed round game R. If not (see S5033 in FIG. 189), the condition is satisfied (hereinafter, also referred to as “full tank unreached condition”). That is, it is premised that the round game is started in a state where there are remaining balls in the storage channel 1231.

Here, the round game R is started from the state that the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is full, and in the situation where the round game R is continuing, in the remaining time of the round game R In order to prevent the generation of dead balls, the firing of the balls should be stopped. On the other hand, when the firing of the ball is stopped, the player has a leisure time, which may reduce the player's concentration and reduce the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the storage channel 1231 is full and even in a situation in which the ball is prevented from passing through the first specific winning port 1000a (when the full tank non-reaching condition is satisfied). , The display is switched so as to inform the player that the expected profit (payout of prize ball) has been switched while maintaining the display that prompts the launch of the ball (the display that suggests launch) To do.

The present control example uses the above-described structure capable of storing spheres in the storage channel 1231. That is, in the present control example, the open/close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state (upward posture) until the specified time (30 seconds in the present control example) of the round game R has elapsed after the above-described full tank unachieved condition is satisfied. To be done.

Therefore, if the sphere continues to be fired (right-handed) while the unfilled condition is not satisfied, the sphere that reaches the opening/closing plate 12300 moves in the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the opening/closing plate 12300, and the storage channel 1231 moves. Since the opening/closing plate 12300 is restricted from abutting against the balls stored in the opening/closing plate 12300 and the downward movement is restricted by the opening/closing plate 12300, it is held on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 until the opening/closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state. That is, since the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in an unknown destination until the opening/closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state, whether the ball is a prize ball or not, is discharged from the outlet 66 as it is and the ball loss. It will be unknown at present whether or not it will be.

When the ball remains on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, the opening/closing plate 12300 shifts to the closed state, and then becomes the opened state again, in other words, when the previous round game R is not the final round. The ball on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 may be scooped up again.

More specifically, in the twelfth embodiment, a drop delay plate 12250 is disposed below the opening/closing plate 12300, and when the open/close plate 12300 is in a closed state, a ball causes the upper surface of the drop delay plate 12250 to extend in the longitudinal direction of the opening/closing plate 12300. It rolls in the direction along the direction (the direction along the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240) and falls toward the outlet 66 on the left side of the end surface 3251b. Therefore, the ball that has not reached the end surface 3251b before the opening/closing plate 12300 changes to the open state, rests on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 again and passes through the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a).

Therefore, even if the ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 while the condition of not reaching the full tank is satisfied, there is a possibility that the payout of the prize ball can be obtained by winning the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning port 1000a). You can Therefore, as compared to the case where the payout of the prize ball due to the winning to the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a) cannot be expected (there is almost no possibility, for example, the normal state), the ball is emitted (right). The player's motivation to continue hitting can be improved.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, since the length of the opening/closing plate 12300 in the longitudinal direction is about 135 [mm], when the balls (diameter 11 [mm]) are arranged side by side without overlapping vertically. Up to 12 balls can be placed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the ball is continuously fired (right-handed) while the full tank underachievement condition is satisfied, and some of the balls that have not reached the opening/closing plate 12300 are stored in the general winning opening 63. Win a prize. The payout number of the general winning opening 63 is set to five. The larger the proportion of balls to the general winning opening 63, the larger the total number of prize balls paid out to the player in the jackpot game.

The display example shown in FIG. 185 uses these structures. That is, the structure of the opening/closing plate 12300 and the fall delay plate 12250 promotes the game in which the possibility of ball loss is low and the player is allowed to enter the general winning opening 63 to pay out the prize ball while appealing to the player. Is.

If a movable object that can change the storage state of the sphere is arranged inside the storage channel 1231, the round game R is started with the storage channel 1231 being empty (there is no remaining ball). In some cases, the condition of not reaching full tank may be satisfied. For example, when the interference device 6900 described above in the sixth embodiment is provided, the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 is extended after the round game R is started, so that the above-described predetermined condition can be satisfied. ..

In the first frame (display example on the upper left side) of FIG. 185, the sub-round display portion 714b is displayed in the small area Ds1 (FIG. 87(a)). Before switching to the first frame in FIG. 185, the round number display portion 714 is illuminated (brightly displayed), while the sub-round display portion 714b is unlit (darkly displayed). Then, conversely, the round number display portion 714 is displayed off (dark display), while the sub-round display portion 714b is light-emitting display (bright display). Note that the meaning of displaying that the sub-round display portion 714b indicates a period during which an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R is the same as that described above (see FIG. 143).

In addition, in the first frame of FIG. 185 (display example on the upper left side), the display that promotes the launch of the ball (the display that suggests launching) is maintained in the small area Ds3 while the background is displayed at 1-second intervals. The character "3" is displayed as the number to be counted down.

In the second frame (display example in the middle left) of FIG. 185, the state in which the display of the small area Ds3 is cantted down and the number “1” is displayed is shown, and one second after that, 3 of FIG. 185 is displayed. It is possible to switch to the top frame (display example on the lower left).

In the third frame (display example on the lower left side) of FIG. 185, a region including the main display region Dm is maintained below the small region Ds3 while the display for promoting the launch of the sphere (the display suggesting the launch) is maintained. In the figure, a plurality of circular figures are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a display (the character "hit") is added near the center of each figure to accelerate the launch of a ball. In this state, a "treasure box" figure to be described later is prepared in advance on the back side of the plurality of figures.

In the fourth frame (display example on the upper right side) of FIG. 185, the above-mentioned circular figure is partially erased and a part of the “treasure box” is exposed, and the fifth frame of FIG. In the display example on the right), a state in which all the above-mentioned circular figures are erased and the entire "treasure box" is exposed is shown.

In this control example, it is possible to switch the number of erased circular figures corresponding to the number of balls entering the general winning opening 63 after the display is switched to the display example of the first frame in FIG. 185. It is said that That is, as the number of balls entering the general winning opening 63 increases, the number of erased circular figures increases.

As an example, in this control example, four circular figures are displayed in the third frame of FIG. 185, and one circular figure is erased every time one ball enters the general winning opening 63. Have control over. That is, the display example of the fourth frame shows a state in which two balls have entered the general winning opening 63 (a state in which 10 payout prize balls are generated by entering the general winning opening 63). The display example of the frame shows a state in which four or more balls have entered the general winning opening 63 (a state in which there are 20 or more payout award balls due to entering the general winning opening 63).

The "treasure box" in the display example of the fifth frame has a meaning as a display showing the amount of profit obtained by the player. That is, when the entire "treasure box" is displayed, there are 20 or more prize balls to be paid out by entering a ball other than the first variable winning device 12000. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the general winning opening 63 by grasping the number of times the "treasure box" is displayed (a predetermined number (in this control example, the treasure box). It can be used as a guide for winning over prizes).

In addition, this display will be displayed separately from the prize balls obtained by entering the first variable winning device 12000. Therefore, from the display of the "treasure box", the player can predict the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the first variable winning device 12000 in the jackpot game (that is, (the number of rounds) x (the specified number of round games R). It is possible to understand how much the number of payout prize balls can be increased based on ()×(the number calculated from the number of payout prize balls for one prize).

In the display example of the fifth frame, the display corresponding to the number of paid-out prize balls is described, but the display is not limited to this. For example, instead of “treasure chest”, one of the characters “probability change”, “normal” or “time saving” (display indicating the game state) is made to correspond to the game state after the jackpot game in advance. You may prepare. In this case, the player can grasp the game state after the completion of the jackpot game that is currently being executed by increasing the number of balls that enter the general winning opening 63.

In addition, it is often difficult to enter two to four balls into the general winning opening 63 within 30 seconds (during the round game R). Therefore, by the time of switching to the display example of the fifth frame in FIG. 185, a corresponding ball loss (after the top of the opening/closing plate 12300 is full, the ball flows to the right of the opening/closing plate 12300, and reaches the outlet 66). The player who does not find a real profit here may stop the ball firing to suppress the ball loss.

That is, the player continues to shoot the ball so that he can see advantageous information (for example, the display indicating the above-mentioned game state) even if the ball loss occurs as the game mode, or the ball is used to prevent the ball loss. You can choose whether to stop the firing of the.

If the display is switched to the fifth frame in FIG. 185 before the opening/closing plate 12300 is full (when four or more balls can be inserted into the general winning opening 63), the game is The person can obtain advantageous information with a minimum ball loss. Therefore, after the display is switched to the first frame in FIG. 185, it is possible to continue the firing of the ball eagerly.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 186(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b5.

The opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b5 is provided in order for the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation status of the opening/closing plate 12300 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the open/close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and the open/close plate operation scenario table 202f5 is stored.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 186(b). FIG. 186(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223d, a variation start flag 223e, a stop type selection Flag 223f, production counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, storage counter 223n, operation flag 223p, Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, effect execution flag 223x, and pressed period information storage area 223y. And other memory area 223z, at least a display switching flag 223pa, a light emission timer 223yh, and a display erasing counter 223yj are provided.

The display switching flag 223pa is a flag that is set to ON when the storage channel 1231 is full in the middle of the round game R, and the voice lamp control device 113 performs the sub-round effect process (S5036, see FIG. 190). ) Is a flag for grasping the timing of executing.

The light emission timer 223yh is a timer for managing a period during which the transmission lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) arranged near the first variable winning device 12000 emits light. In this control example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on every time the ball passes through the general winning opening 63, and is turned off after one second has passed.

The display erasing counter 223yj is a counter that manages the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 63 after the display switching flag 223pa is set to an upper limit of four. Every time the number of the display erasing counter 223yj is decreased, the circular figure displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see the third frame to the fifth frame of FIG. 185) is erased, and the back side display (Fig. The "treasure box" at 185) is controlled so that it can be easily seen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, in the present control example, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

The main process in this control example is the same as the main process in the first control example except that the storage state monitoring process (S2113) is followed by the effect switching process 3 (S5001). Therefore, the same portions will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and different portions will be described.

Next, the effect switching process 3 (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the effect switching process 3 (S5001). This effect switching process 3 (S5001) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing an effect that changes depending on the progress of the jackpot game. Is.

It should be noted that this process includes a process of detecting the winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 12000 and a process of detecting the winning mode to the general winning opening 63, so that the main process has a short cycle (1 msec or less). Configured to run on. As a result, the setting that is performed by detecting the winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 12000 or the general winning opening 63 can be performed without delay.

As shown in FIG. 188, in the effect switching process 3, in the process of S5001, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (S5011). If it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S5011: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5011, when it is determined that the big hit is in progress (S5011: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit type is big hit Tb or big hit r (S5012). When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot Tb or the jackpot r (S5012: Yes), it is determined whether it is the display switching timing by referring to the opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b5 (S5013), and the display switching timing ( When it is determined that it is 2.5 seconds, 12.5 seconds, 22.5 seconds from the start of the round game R described above (S5013: Yes), the first countdown effect display command is set (S5014). ), and ends this processing. In addition, in the processing of S5013, when it is determined that it is not the timing for switching the display (S5013: No), the present processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5012, when it is determined that the jackpot type is neither the jackpot Tb nor the jackpot r (S5012: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot Tc (S5015).

In the process of S5015, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot Tc (S5015: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5015, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot Tc (S5015: Yes), the process proceeds to the sub-round switching process (S5016), and then this process ends.

Next, the sub-round switching process (S5015) will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing this sub-round switching processing (S5015). This sub-round switching process (S5015) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the storage channel 1231 is in a full state during the round game R. It is a process for executing the production after the end.

As shown in FIG. 189, in the sub-round switching process, in the process of S5015, it is determined whether the display switching flag 223pa is on (S5031). When it is determined that the display switching flag 223pa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5031: No), it is determined whether the storage channel 1231 is full (S5032).

Various methods are illustrated as a method of determining that the storage channel 1231 is full. In the present control example, it is determined that the length by which the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere exceeds a predetermined period (two seconds in the present control example). In this case, the entry timing of the Xth ball may be set at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed, or at the start of the predetermined period (that is, the timing of entering the detection sensor 1240) or when the predetermined period has elapsed. A flag may be set at an intermediate point in time, and when it is determined that the tank is full when a predetermined period has elapsed, the timing at which the flag is set may be set.

In the processing of S5032, when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is not full (S5032: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5032, when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is full (S5032: Yes), a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls are detected in the currently executed round game R. It is determined whether the ball has entered the sensor 1240 (S5033).

In the processing of S5033, when it is determined that the specified number of balls has entered the detection sensor 1240 (S5033: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5033, when it is determined that the specified number of balls has not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S5033: No), a display switching command is set (S5034), and the display switching flag 223pa is turned on. The setting is made (S5035), and this processing is ended.

In the present control example, after the display switching command is set (S5034), in the third symbol display device 81, the round number display portion 714 is displayed off (dark display), while the sub-round display portion 714b emits light. The display is controlled so as to be displayed (brightly displayed) (see the first frame in FIG. 185).

On the other hand, in the process of S5031, when it is determined that the display switching flag 223pa is on (S5031: Yes), the process proceeds to the sub-round effect process (S5036). The details of the sub-round effect process (S5036) will be described later.

After the processing of S5036, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the round (S5037), and if it is determined to be the timing to end the round (S5037: Yes), the display switching flag 223pa is set to OFF (S5038), and the book The process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing to end the round (S5037: No), the present process is terminated.

Next, the sub-round effect process (S5036) will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the sub-round effect process (S5036). The sub-round effect process (S5036) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and includes lighting effect after the storage channel 1231 is full. It is a process for executing a display effect.

As shown in FIG. 190, in the sub-round effect process, in the process of S5036, it is determined whether the timing is 5 seconds before reaching the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) in the round game R currently being executed. (S5051).

In the processing of S5051, when it is determined that the timing is 5 seconds before the specified time is reached (S5051: Yes), the second countdown effect display command is set (S5052), and the value of the display deletion counter 223yj is set. “4” is set, and the process proceeds to S5054. On the other hand, in the process of S5051, when it is determined that it is not the timing 5 seconds before the specified time is reached (S5051: No), the process directly proceeds to S5054.

In the present control example, after the second countdown effect display command is set (S5052), the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to execute a series of display effects starting from the first frame of FIG. 185. To be done. Since the value of the display erasing counter 223yj is 4, four circular figures are displayed as shown in the display example of the third frame in FIG. 185.

In the process of S5054, it is determined whether or not a ball has won in the general winning opening 63 arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 12000 (S5054). In the processing of S5054, if it is determined that the ball has won the general winning opening 63 (S5054: Yes), the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) in the currently executed round game R has passed within 5 seconds. It is determined whether it is the timing (S5055).

In the processing of S5055, when it is determined that it is the timing when the specified time elapses within 5 seconds (S5055: Yes), the value of the display erasing counter 223yj is subtracted (S5056), and the display erasing command is set ( The process proceeds to S5057) and S5058. On the other hand, in the processing of S5055, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the specified time period elapses within 5 seconds (S5055: No), the process directly proceeds to S5058.

After the value of the display erasing counter 223yj is subtracted (S5056) and the display erasing command is set (S5057), the circular figure shown in the display example of the third frame of FIG. 185 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled so that the display can be switched in such a manner that one is deleted. Note that the display of the fourth frame in FIG. 185 shows the state after the processing of S5057 has been executed twice from the display of the third frame in FIG. 185, and the display of the fifth frame in FIG. It shows the state after the processing of S5057 has been executed twice (or more) from the display of the frame. After the processing of S5056 and S5057 is executed for the fifth time (the value of the display erasing counter 223yj<0), the circular figure is maintained in the display of the fifth frame in FIG. 185.

In the process of S5058, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on (S5058), the numerical value corresponding to “1 second” is set in the light emission timer 223yh (S5059), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5054, when it is determined that the general winning opening 63 is not won (S5054: No), the light emission timer 223yh is subtracted (S5060), and it is determined whether the value of the light emission timer 223yh is 0 ( S5061).

In the process of S5061, when it is determined that the value of the light emission timer 223yh is 0 (S5061: Yes), it is determined whether the transmissive lamp 227b is on (S5062), and the transmissive lamp 227b is on. If it is determined to be true (S5062: Yes), the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (S5063), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5061 that the value of the light emission timer 223yh is not 0 (S5061: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5062 that the transmission lamp 227b is not lit (S5062: No). ), and this processing is ended as it is.

As described above, according to the present control example, each time the ball wins the general winning opening 63, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on for one second, and control is performed so that the visibility of the internal state of the storage channel 1231 is improved. To be done.

In the present embodiment, at the end of the round game R, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged, so by visually observing the internal state of the storage channel 1231, the end timing of the round game R can be easily performed. It becomes possible to grasp. Further, the end timing of the round game R is one of the important timings for the player as a material for the timing of switching the shooting and stopping of the ball.

Therefore, the timing of the end of the round game R is grasped by grasping the change in the state of the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 by not making the timing at which the production such as the display effect is switched correspond to the end timing of the round game R. When the game machine that can be used is configured, it is possible to improve the motivation to insert a ball into the general winning opening 63.

<Another Example of Fifth Control Example>
Next, another example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. Another example of the fifth control example will be described using the first variable winning device 13000 described as the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 191 is a front view of the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 191, the first variable winning device 13000 is different from the configuration of the twelfth embodiment in that it has three routes through which the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 can pass, and whether or not each route can pass. Is provided with a path switching device 13800 configured to be switchable in association with driving of the solenoid 1510, and other points are the same as the first variable winning device 12000 of the twelfth embodiment, and therefore different. The points will be described in detail, the same portions will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The route switching device 13800 is visible under the opening/closing plate 12300 in a front view (visible because at least a part of the game board 13 is transparent), and is disposed on the back side of the game board 13. One discharge path sensor 13811 to 13813 is provided, and a sphere discharged from the lower end of the storage channel 1231 through the discharge port 1150 is detected by any of the discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813 and arranged downstream thereof. It is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown). Next, the details of the route switching device 13800 will be described.

192 and 193 are rear views of the first variable winning device 13000, and FIG. 194 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 13000 taken along the line CXCIV-CXCIV of FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 192 shows a state where the drive of the solenoid 1510 is released (non-excitation state), and FIGS. 193 and 194 show a state where the solenoid 1510 is driven (excitation state). Also, in FIGS. 192 and 193, the rear cover 1700 is illustrated in phantom lines for ease of understanding, and the discharge path sensors 1381 to 13813 are arranged behind the discharge path sensors 1381 to 13813 as the discharge path sensors 1381 to 13813 are cross-sectionally viewed. The illustration of the wall member having a U-shaped cross section is omitted, and in FIG. 194, the resistance change member 13854 is omitted for easy understanding, and the cross section of FIG. 194 is similar to the cross section of FIG. It is configured as a surface (or a surface that cuts the center of the stored sphere) along the slope on the lower end side of the storage channel 1231.

As shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, the route switching device 13800 of the first variable winning device 13000 includes a plurality of discharge route sensors 13810 arranged side by side downstream of the discharge port 1710 and a tip member of the solenoid 1510. The movement member 13820 that moves according to the movement of the 1520, and the groove shape for defining the movement locus of the movement member 13820, which is formed in the same shape on the thin plate member 12110 and the rear cover 1700 (formed in the groove shape (thin plate member 12110) or perforated (rear cover 1700)), a first switching device 13840 that switches the state each time the operating member 13820 makes one revolution of the defining portion 13830, and a corner portion 13831 of the defining portion 13830. The second switching device 13850 is mainly configured to be operated each time the operating member 13820 reaches, and to be able to change the state by the load from the operating member 13820.

The part that can switch the path of the ball before guiding the ball to the discharge path sensor 13810 will be described first. As shown in FIG. 192, the defining portion 13830 is formed in an elliptical groove shape in a rear view, and has a known shape for defining the moving direction of the operating member 13820 by switching the depth of the groove. Then, every time the solenoid 1510 is switched between the excited state and the non-excited state, the operating member 13820 is guided in one direction along the defining portion 13830.

That is, when switching from the non-excited state to the excited state, it passes through the upper half groove (state change from FIG. 192 to FIG. 193), and when switching from the excited state to the non-excited state, passes through the lower half groove (FIG. State change from 193 to FIG. 192).

The defining portion 13830 includes a corner portion 13831 formed as a path that deviates from a round path of the elliptical shape. The corner portion 13831 is configured as a portion reached by the operating member 13820 when the operating state is switched to the excited state again before the operating member 13820 is completely moved after the switching from the excited state to the non-excited state is started ( The defining portion 13830 is configured so that the operating member 13820 can reach the corner portion 13831).

Accordingly, in the corner portion 13831, the operating member 13820 does not reach when the de-energized state is maintained for a sufficient time (for example, 2 seconds) like the normal inter-round interval, while the operating scenario 51, When the non-excited state is maintained for a short time (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds) and is immediately switched to the excited state, as in the case of closing during the round game R of 52 (see FIG. 183(a)). Is configured as the part reached by the operating member 13820. That is, according to the present configuration, the operation member 13820 comes into contact with the object to be loaded by closing in the interval between rounds (the first switching device 13840 in this control example), and the operation member 13820 hits by closing during the round game R. The target (the second switching device 13850 in the present control example) to which the contact load is applied can be different.

The first switching device 13840 is configured to be able to transfer a load applied from the operating member 13820 to the switching valve 13841 having a slide body that can slide back and forth above the first discharge path sensor 13811. And a transmission member 13842.

The slide body of the switching valve 13841 is switched and maintained in position by a known notch mechanism, and switches its position between a front position 13841a and a rear position 13841b each time a load is applied from the transmission member 13842. When the slide body is in the front position 13841a, the sphere flowing down from the discharge port 1710 is directed to the first discharge path sensor 13811, but when the slide body is in the rear position 13841b, the sphere flowing down from the discharge port 1710 is the first discharge path. Before reaching the sensor 13811, it collides with the slide body and flows down to the second discharge path sensor 13812 side along the inclination of the upper surface of the slide body. That is, the discharge path sensor 13810 through which the ball flowing down from the discharge port 1710 passes changes according to the state of the slide body.

Transmission member 13842 is configured as a load-bearing object against which movement member 13820 abuts upon closure during inter-round intervals. When the transmission member 13842 is loaded as the operating member 13820 moves along the defining portion 13830 (as the lower half of the defining portion 13830 moves), the transmitting member 13842 slightly moves about the predetermined axis. However, it is configured to return to its original position by its own weight when the load applied from the operating member 13820 is released. That is, the transmission member 13842 is configured to repeat the same posture change (swing) every time a load is applied from the operation member 13820.

Then, due to the change in the posture of the transmission member 13842, the load is transmitted to the slide body of the switching valve 13841, and the arrangement of the slide body is switched. That is, the arrangement of the slide bodies of the switching valve 13841 is configured to be switched every time the operating member 13820 operates along the defining portion 13830 by closing in the inter-round interval.

The second switching device 13850 has a special rotation member 13851 that rotates due to stacking of posture changes due to the load applied from the operation member 13820, and the arrangement is switched according to the state of the rotation direction of the special rotation member 13851, and the third discharge path A restriction member 13852 configured to be able to switch the passage mode of the sphere to the sensor 13813, a belt-shaped connection band 13853 for connecting the predetermined angular position of the special rotation member 13851 and the upper end of the restriction member 13852, and a special rotation member. A resistance changing member 13854 capable of changing the resistance of the rotation direction 13851 in the rotation direction is mainly provided.

The special rotation member 13851 is a member having a rotationally symmetric shape (for example, a gear shape or a disk shape) that is rotatably supported on the lower rear side of the rear cover 1700, and is loaded from the operating member 13820 that reaches the corner portion 13831. It is arranged to be able to give. The operating member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831 from the left-right intermediate position of the defining portion 13830, and at this time, applies a load in the rotation direction to the special rotation member 13851, and the special rotation member 13851 rotates by a predetermined amount. According to the present embodiment, the connecting band 13853 rotates in the rotation direction in which it is pulled up.

In the special rotation member 13851, when the operation member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831, the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 is increased by the action of the resistance change member 13854 to be described later, and the rotation of the restriction member 13852 due to its own weight is restricted. Therefore, as the number of times the operating member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831 increases, the rotation angle of the special rotating member 13851 increases. In the present embodiment, when the number of times the operating member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831 is two or more, the restriction of the discharge path sensor 13810 by the restriction member 13852 is released, and the ball can enter the third discharge path sensor 13813. Is configured to be.

Note that the number of times the operating member 13820 needs to reach the corner portion 13831 before the restriction of the discharge path sensor 13810 by the restriction member 13852 is released is not limited and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, in consideration of the amount of rotation of the special rotation member 13851 each time a load is applied from the operation member 13820 and the movement amount of the regulation member 13852 that accompanies the load, the regulation member 13852 on the side of the second discharge path sensor 13812 is considered. The position of the end may be adjusted.

The restriction member 13852 has a groove shape in which one end is connected to the connecting band 13853 and the other end extends obliquely left and right (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 192 and 193) above the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is supported by the guide portion 13852a.

The restriction member 13852 normally closes the third discharge path sensor 13813 in a tilted state (see FIG. 193), but when one end of the restriction member 13852 is pulled up to the coupling band 13853 as the special rotation member 13851 rotates. , The other end slides along the guide portion 13852a (moves to the side where the distance between the one end and the left and right is reduced), and the regulating member 13852 gradually stands (from the tilted state to the special rotation). The member 13851 goes to a state in which the operating member 13820 is loaded more than once. Then, when the load via the special rotation member 13851 is released, the state returns to the state of falling by its own weight (see FIG. 193).

When the regulating member 13852 is in a tilted state (see FIG. 193), the upper surface is inclined downward toward the second discharge path sensor 13812, and thus the sphere that has deviated from the first discharge path sensor 13811 due to the action of the switching valve 13841. The second discharge route sensor 13812 can be smoothly guided.

The restricting member 13852 is arranged at a position where the other end of the restricting member 13852 does not interfere with the passage of the ball to the third discharge path sensor 13813 in the standing state. As a result, the ball that has deviated from the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the action of the switching valve 13841 is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812 or the third discharge path sensor 13813.

The connecting band 13853 is made of a material having low elasticity such as a string or cloth, or a thin wire (thin metal plate) made of metal. Therefore, the rotation position of the special rotation member 13851 and the arrangement of the restriction member 13852 correspond one-to-one.

The resistance change member 13854 is a member that is vertically long and long and is arranged in a posture of falling down on the special rotation member 13851. One end portion (upper end portion) of the resistance change member 13854 is an end portion (left and right end portions) of the defining portion 13830 and an upper portion. The other end (lower end) is rotatably supported below the rear cover 1700 so as to abut the special rotation member 13851 in the middle portion.

The resistance change member 13854 has an action of increasing the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 by contacting the special rotation member 13851. That is, while the resistance change member 13854 leans against the special rotation member 13851 and abuts against the special rotation member 13851, the rotation of the special rotation member 13851 is restricted (maintains the posture) by the dead weight of the restriction member 13852, and the operation member 13820 is moved. Only rotation due to the load when reaching the corner 13831 occurs.

On the other hand, when the operating member 13820 is arranged at the end of the defining portion 13830 at the time of closing and opening at the intervals between rounds, the upper end of the resistance changing member 13854 is pushed by the operating member 13820, and the resistance changing member 13854. And the contact of the special rotation member 13851 is released. As a result, the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 decreases, the special rotation member 13851 rotates due to the weight of the restriction member 13852, and the restriction member 13852 falls down (the special rotation member 13851 is in a state before being loaded). Become.

Note that the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 may increase at timings other than the interval between rounds (for example, the timing at which the operation member 13820 is arranged at the corner portion 13831 during opening/closing during the round game R). In this case, the states of the special rotation member 13851 and the restriction member 13852 are maintained.

Next, the arrangement and action of each sensor of the discharge path sensor 13810 will be described in order. The first discharge path sensor 13811 is configured as an detection port that is an opening through which a sphere that has passed through the discharge port 1710 rearward and falls vertically downward. That is, the sphere that has passed through the discharge port 1710 passes through the first discharge route sensor 13811 and is detected by the first discharge route sensor 13811 unless an external force other than its own weight is applied.

In the present control example, the first discharge route sensor 13811 is configured as a detection device that sets the V flag 203s to ON when detecting passage of a sphere. In other words, the same operation as the specific area 4830 and the specific area detection sensor 4860 in each of the above-described embodiments is produced.

The first switching device 13840 is arranged between the first discharge path sensor 13811 and the discharge port 1710, but since the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is switched at each inter-round interval, the round Regardless of the game R, by normally playing the jackpot game in a mode in which the ball enters the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be passed through the first discharge route sensor 13811 by the end of the jackpot game.

The second discharge path sensor 13812 is a detection sensor arranged next to the first discharge path sensor 13811. The second discharge path sensor 13812 is configured as a detection sensor that only detects passage of a sphere. That is, the state of the V flag 203s does not change (is maintained) even when the ball passes through the second discharge route sensor 13812.

The third discharge path sensor 13813 is arranged next to the second discharge path sensor 13812, and when a ball that deviates from the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the action of the switching valve 13841 and flows down does not pass through the second discharge path sensor 13812. It is a detection sensor that passes through. Note that when the restriction of the passage of the ball by the restriction member 13852 is released (when the restriction member 13852 is in a standing state), the ball is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812 or the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is configured so that there is no large difference in the guidance (random).

In the present control example, the third discharge route sensor 13813 is configured as a detection device that sets the V flag 203s to off in accordance with the detection of passage of a sphere. That is, in the ending process (S1110, refer to FIG. 121) described in the above control example, whether the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is the probability change state or the time saving state is delayed during the big hit game. It is possible to configure a game feature that changes depending on whether the first discharge route sensor 13811 or the third discharge route sensor 13813 has detected the change.

By approaching this control example, the following gaming characteristics can be configured. In this control example, the jackpot type described in the fifth control example is used (see FIGS. 182 and 183).

As described above, in the interval between rounds, the restriction member 13852 is in a tilted state, and the passage of the ball of the third discharge path sensor 13813 is restricted. Therefore, when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 only by closing in the interval between rounds (for example, in the case of jackpot Ta and Tc), the sphere is detected by the third discharge path sensor 13813 and is once turned on. There is no possibility that the flag 203s will be set to OFF.

On the other hand, in the 25th operation pattern including the operation scenarios 51 and 52 in which the opening/closing plate 12300 closes at intervals other than the inter-round interval, balls may be discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 at intervals other than the inter-round interval. Since the turned-on V flag 203s may be set to off, it is possible to improve the attention of the whereabouts of the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231.

The description will be given below by focusing on the 25th operation pattern. In this control example, in the 25th operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 12300 is drive-controlled in the operation scenario 52 in the all-round game R.

Since the 25th operation pattern is configured as a jackpot game of 15 rounds (odd times), the state of the first switching device 13840 in the predetermined round is not fixed, and the jackpot game of the 25th operation pattern is continuous. If you do, the jackpot will be replaced each time.

For example, when the slide body of the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is in the front position 13841a in the round game R of the fifteenth round in the first big jackpot game, the round game R of the fifteenth round in the second jackpot game. The slide body of the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is set to the rear position 13841b.

Therefore, once every two times, the passage of the ball to the first discharge route sensor 13811 is restricted in the fifteenth round (the V flag 203s may be set to OFF), and once every two times, the fifteenth round. At, the ball is guided to the first discharge route sensor 13811 (it is easy to end the jackpot game by turning on the V flag 203s). In other words, it is possible to configure a gaming machine capable of guaranteeing two sets of probability variation states with a high probability (up to two times the state after the jackpot game is in the probability variation state).

When the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the round game R in a state where the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is arranged at the rear position 13841b, the restriction member 13852 is still the third discharge path when discharging the first ball. Since the passage of the ball to the sensor 13813 is restricted, the ball is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812.

As described above, in discharging the first ball, the player can visually recognize the discharged ball in a front view while the state of the V flag 203s is not changed. That is, the discharge of the ball can be used to direct the player's attention to the route switching device 13800.

After the second discharge, the sphere of the third discharge path sensor 13813 is allowed to pass. Therefore, the discharge of the balls during the round game R is one every 1 second in 5 seconds, and a total of 5 balls are discharged, but the 4 balls after the second one are discharged to the third discharge route sensor 13813. Can be guided.

Here, when the interval between rounds is reached, the regulating member 13852 shifts to a fallen state, so that the player can set the number of balls entered within a short time after the discharge of the balls during the round game R is started. It is advisable to start the inter-round interval.

In other words, the specified number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 at a timing at which one sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (one sphere in the storage channel 1231 that is directly connected to the excess winning number). According to the game mode such as 10) in the present control example, the ball is not detected by the third discharge route sensor 13813 and the game can be executed with peace of mind.

On the other hand, two or more balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 to secure a sufficient space in the storage channel 1231 or to open and close after 15 seconds from the start of the round game R. In a game mode in which a continuous ball is formed or an excessive excess prize is aimed (a game mode in which the ball is stopped during the round game R and the ball is restarted in synchronization with the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 12300) Since the balls are continuously discharged from the discharge port 1710 in a state where the balls can be guided to the third discharge route sensor 13813, the third discharge route sensor 13813 enters the third discharge route sensor 13813 as a reaction to the increase in the number of excessive winning prizes. The chances of a sphere increasing. That is, when the degree of aiming for the excessive winning is excessive, it is possible to configure the gaming property in which the possibility that the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished becomes the probability changing state is reduced.

In this control example, opening and closing during the round starts 5 seconds after the start of the round game R, but if the game mode is to continue the firing without stopping the firing of the ball, the specified number (this control example Then, 10 balls are fired in 6 seconds, so if the total of the balls that have been fired before the start of the round game R, 10 balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 within 5 seconds. Things happen with a high probability. In addition, the fall delay plate 12250 (see FIG. 191) guides the ball to the end surface 12251b in front of the detection sensor 1240 regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 12300 is opened or closed.

Therefore, in the present control example, as the notification relating to the firing mode in the jackpot game, the notification “Aim right” is continuously maintained in the sub display area Ds3 (see FIG. 158). In the present control example, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball is guided to the third discharge route sensor 13813 by continuously firing the ball in accordance with this notification.

In addition, in a game mode in which the ball is stopped from being emitted without following the notification that the ball is continuously emitted, the ball may be guided to the third discharge route sensor 13813. Therefore, it is controlled to notify that fact. Is also good.

For example, the notification may be divided every 5 seconds, and it may be clearly notified that the possibility that the ball is guided to the third discharge route sensor 13813 increases every 5 seconds. In this case, by notifying at the same time whether the V flag 203s is currently turned on, whether to shoot the ball to the player or not to shoot the ball, the interval between rounds becomes the next round interval after the stipulated time has elapsed. You can select whether to proceed to the round game.

Further, based on the same notification, whether or not to link the position of the first switching device 13840 and the effect changes depending on the desired game property, and either one may be controlled. For example, when the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is arranged at the front position 13841a, all the discharged balls pass through the first discharge path sensor 13811 regardless of the state of the regulating member 13852, so the third discharge path Since the possibility that the ball is guided to the sensor 13813 does not increase, the above notification may be omitted, or the above notification may be executed as an effect regardless of the position of the switching valve 13841.

In the case of the former, the player is given a correct state so that the game can be made to be hurry (shooting the ball while it is still hitting (sudden) and allowing it to stop firing (slow)). be able to. In the latter case, anyway, it can be directed to continue the firing of the ball, it is possible to speed up the jackpot game progress.

In this control example, the switching valve 13841 is configured to slide back and forth, and since it is difficult to understand the change in the state of the switching valve 13841 from the front view, the state of the switching valve 13841 is visually confirmed to play. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be executed ignoring the production intention.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the storage flow channel 1231 is configured as a flow channel that extends on a plane, but the flow channel is not limited to this. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be configured such that the right side of the plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-back direction. That is, the flow path may extend in the left-right direction from the detection sensor 1240 to the bending position, extend in the front-rear direction from the bending position, and extend again in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150.

The flow path extending in the front-rear direction is a flow path shape in which the shape of the storage flow path 1231 is diverted and the extending direction is switched from the left to the right and the front (rotated by 90 degrees on the vertical axis). It is formed by joining two substantially symmetrical light-transmissive members having a concave portion forming one side surface of the flow path on the opposite side from the left and right.

The storage channel 1231 including the channels extending in the front-rear direction is different from the above embodiment in the direction of the channel, but the number of spheres that can be stored downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (in the present embodiment, 10). Individual) is designed. That is, also in this embodiment, the same playability as the playability described in each of the above embodiments can be configured.

With respect to the storage channel 1231 including the channel extending in the front-rear direction, the solenoid 6910 enters the channel in a state where the solenoid 6910 is driven (excited), and the solenoid 6910 is in an overhang state that restricts the flow of a sphere in the channel. In the state where the drive (excitation) of is released, an interference member is provided which can be switched from the flow path to the retracted state that allows the sphere to flow down in the flow channel.

Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow path is the same as in the sixth embodiment. That is, among the spheres stored on the downstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, a flow path extending forward and backward on the upstream side of the second sphere counted from the sphere at the lowermost end regulated by the regulating member 1600. It is arranged so as to regulate the downward flow of the third ball by entering the inside, and when the interference member is in the projecting state, seven at the position upstream of the interference member and downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be stored.

The flow path extending in the front-rear direction is formed such that the third and subsequent spheres are stored behind the second sphere counted from the lowermost sphere whose flow is regulated by the regulation member 1600. Therefore, when the second sphere is arranged, the sphere is arranged on the front side of the interference member, so that the interference member is hidden by the sphere. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the interference member with the sphere.

Compared with the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, it is not possible to visually recognize the entire spheres, and the flow path itself extends to the back side, so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the visually recognizable object is When the storage channel 1231 includes a channel that extends in the front-back direction due to the distance, etc., the interference member is retracted so that 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. It is difficult to grasp the state in which the nine spheres are overhanging and are stored in the storage channel 1231 from the arrangement of the spheres. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls even if the first variable winning device 1000 is directly visually recognized.

In the case where such a feature is provided, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may display the number of balls entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, it is better to look at the third symbol display device 81 than to visually recognize the storage channel 1231 in which the number of stored balls is poorly discerned, and to grasp the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since it can be configured to be easy, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be relatively improved with respect to the attention to the first variable winning device 1000. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be easily removed from the first variable winning device 1000.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port restricting member that opens and closes the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You can In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged, without strictly controlling the operating length of the second discharge port restriction member. Therefore, the number of balls to be discharged can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened at the same time, the time required to discharge all the balls can be shortened and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is composed of an opening/closing plate 1300 that moves up and down, and when it is arranged at an upper position, the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a, and when it is arranged at a lower position, the ball can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a. You may try to divert. In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200 when the ball is lifted, the ball rising motion can be made smoother.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the additional discharge port may be arranged at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed depending on whether the discharge is performed from the discharge port 1710 or the additional discharge port. In other words, it is difficult to discharge the sphere jammed on the side of the discharge port 1710 from the additional discharge port. Further, by discharging both discharge ports at the same time, the discharge efficiency of the balls can be improved and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts operation based on the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the spheres depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination flow path 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, regardless of the discharge speed (interval) of the balls, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of the discharged balls.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the operation start timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operations may be started simultaneously. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the resistance of the ball entering the ball changes depending on whether or not there is a gap in which the ball enters the storage channel 1231 (whether the storage channel 1231 is in a full state). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the predetermined number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 may be decelerated depending on whether the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is close to a full state. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of the round game R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to suppress winning more than the specified number. Further, in this case, as compared with the case of decelerating the ball regardless of the stored number, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended while suppressing the winning of a predetermined number or more. The deceleration is not limited to the deceleration and may be accelerated. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than the specified number of prizes.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 to restrict the ball entering the first specific winning port 1000a by the stored balls has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electrically operated member may be provided that moves a predetermined amount by passing a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a and makes it easier to regulate the ball entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the inter-round interval can be shortened as compared with the case of discharging the stored spheres at once.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the specified number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, but the number is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to store a prescribed number of balls+1. In this case, it is possible to limit the number of balls that exceed the specified number and pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the passage of the eleventh ball is restricted may be switched for each round.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) at the position in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and thus two balls are not won at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held so that the opening/closing plate 1300 may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before being closed. Further, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the opening through which the ball passes is configured as an opening that benefits the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled so that a falling flag (a flag that shifts the probability variation state to the normal state or the time saving state) is set to ON when the ball enters the predetermined winning opening. In this case, it is possible to execute a game that takes care so that a predetermined winning hole is not entered.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the regulating member 1600 mechanically interlocks with the opening/closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the regulation member 1600 may be driven by a drive device different from the solenoid 1510 that drives the opening/closing plate 1300, or the regulation member 1600 may be configured to be driven by the solenoid 1510 or another drive device.

In the second embodiment described above, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage flow channel, and the flow channel may branch toward the outlet midway. In this case, a predetermined number of spheres can remain in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the spheres are discharged from.

In the second embodiment described above, the case where the number of storable balls when entering from the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of storable balls when entering from the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be less than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R, and the number of storable balls when entering from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or more than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to form a game in which the round time is inevitably extended in the case of entering the ball from the first specific winning opening 1000a while discharging the whole ball at intervals between rounds.

In the above-described third embodiment, the case has been described in which the ball that has flowed down below the opening/closing plate 1300 is lifted above the opening/closing plate 1300 by the opening/closing plate 1300 again, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the sphere may be raised by a movable accessory having a constant motion capable of picking up the sphere. In this case, the movement of the ball can entertain the player.

In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (fall delay plate 3250) is arranged below the opening/closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib protruding from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be disposed above the opening/closing board 1300. The balls may not come into contact with the ribs when the opening/closing plate 1300 that slides is in the open state, and the balls may come into contact with the ribs in the closed state. As a result, the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed above the opening/closing plate 1300 to delay the flow.

As a method of preventing the sphere from coming into contact with the rib, it is possible to bring the sphere closer to either the front or back by tilting in the front-rear direction and dispose the rib on the opposite side.

In the third embodiment described above, the case where the falling delay plate 3250 disposed on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 delays the flow of the sphere is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be configured by a curved flow path passing through the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that is once difficult for the player to visually recognize by the opening/closing plate 1300 by passing through the entrance from the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and flowing down on the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300 is discharged again from the exit. It is possible to perform the effect by flowing down, and since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round is started even when the interval is long. It is possible to secure a sufficient section for

The inlet is preferably below the opening/closing plate 1300, and the outlet is preferably above the opening/closing plate 1300. Further, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state, it is desirable that a part of the opening/closing plate 1300 narrows the opening of the entrance to the extent that the passage of a ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening/closing plate 1300 can prevent balls from entering the entrance when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

In the third embodiment, the case where the sphere is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of gravity acceleration in the downflow direction of the sphere becomes smaller, and the sphere can be decelerated.

The change in acceleration/deceleration may be reversed. When the balls accelerate toward the downstream side, it is possible to prevent continuous balls from being formed on the drop delay plate 3250.

In the third embodiment described above, by arranging the drop delay plate 3250 below the opening/closing plate 1300, only the ball that has passed through the opening/closing plate 1300 is contacted with the opening/closing plate 1300. However, this is not always the case. It is not limited to. For example, in the front-back slide type opening/closing plate, when the ball is in the pocket where the winning opening is arranged in the open state and the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate in the closed state, the rolling ball opens and closes. A rib may be arranged so that the rib can come into contact with the plate when it reaches the downstream side. Balls that enter the pocket as they are do not come into contact with the ribs. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the closed plate, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down as the plate moves.

In the third embodiment described above, the case where the formation of the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted at the drop position Pf3 and the sphere falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the drop delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, a through hole is formed through which the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 to the right can pass, and the sphere is discharged from the through hole. You may do it. In this case, even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is placed immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be placed above the opening/closing plate 1300.

Note that this is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the drop delay plate 3250 is extended to a position that passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has dropped at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and has landed on the drop delay plate 3250 is to the right (detection sensor). A ball that has flowed down to the side close to 1240) but has fallen to the second drop delay plate 7260 due to the same drop once flows down to the left (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then to the drop delay plate 3250 again. To reach. That is, the period in which the flow of the sphere is delayed below the opening/closing plate 1300 and the path along which the sphere flows are different.

In the said 5th Embodiment, the flow path where the ball which entered from the 2nd entrance 640 and each specific winning opening 1000a, 2255a flows down merges with the storage flow path 1231, and the case where the number of entered balls is related. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls may be automatically supplied to the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

In the fifth embodiment described above, in the high-probability state, the more profits the player can obtain as the number of lottery until the big hit is increased is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the more profits the player can get as the number of lottery until the big hit is increased. In this case, the profits obtained by the jackpots obtained in a short time are small, and the profits obtained by the jackpots acquired in a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency for the profits obtained by the player can be equalized.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation member that operates in the storage flow channel 1231 and changes the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow channel 1231 may be provided in accordance with the number of storages. In this case, since the operating member moves depending on the number of stored sheets regardless of the driving timing of the driving device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the reason that the operating timing of the operating member is different from usual.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming the overhang state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a portion (especially, a U-shaped portion) forming the storage channel 1231 is configured to move in the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the channel to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231. May be. In this case, even if the player moves in advance, the player can hardly notice whether or not the player has moved because of the small movement amount. Therefore, it is possible to form a game in which the movement of the member (change of the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) becomes noticeable only after the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 is increased. Can be improved.

The members may be moved by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the movement of the members may be switched by the driving device and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in the storage channel 1231 with a predetermined number of balls stored therein has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bulged state may be formed before the balls start entering the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be set to seven. In addition, a pattern in which the sphere is formed in the overhang state after being stored and a pattern in which the sphere is in the overhang state before starting to enter the storage channel 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, it is possible to switch between a round in which the number of stored pieces is 7 and a round in which the number of stored pieces is 9 by a single member.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be allowed to change to the projecting state while discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing of discharging the ball and the timing of setting the interference member 6930 in the extended state, the discharging mode of the ball can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

In the above eighth and ninth embodiments, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is seen as an auxiliary, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may be opened/closed, and the opening/closing plate 8300 may be a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping the sphere from vertically above to prevent the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 from passing to the left. In this case, it is possible to allow a limited number of excess winnings based on the continuous ball mode.

Further, for example, for each round game R, the opening/closing mode of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may be switched depending on whether long-term opening or short-term opening is repeated. In this case, at the end of the round game R is detected by the detection sensor 1240 and closed, or closed as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240, and a predetermined number of balls that have passed the detection sensor 1240 while being closed. It is possible to switch whether or not the round game R ends by the detection of and the next opening does not occur. In this case, the possibility of over-winning is lower in the case of repeated short-opening than in the case of long-term opening.Therefore, the possibility of over-winning should be different depending on the operation pattern. You can

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven by the same drive device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a dedicated driving device may be provided for each and controllable so as to be independently driven.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening/closing plate 8300 rotates in a rising manner toward the front, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 moves toward the left. The case where the opening/closing plate 8300 is configured to rotate so as to approach the opening/closing plate 8300 from the upper side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are parallel (for example, the axis in the front-rear direction), and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are in opposite directions (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). You may make it operate. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect such that the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 sandwich the ball as the state changes.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate 8300 is provided with the ball entrance prevention portion 1331 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the entry prevention unit 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening/closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be used as a member that restricts the guide of the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Further, for example, the front surface portion of the ball entrance prevention portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed toward the back surface side. In this case, the period from when the opening/closing plate 8300 starts to change its state toward the closed state until when the detection sensor 1240 cannot pass the ball can be lengthened.

In the above eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 have been described as members for allowing passage of a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, by omitting the ball entrance prevention portion 1331, the passage of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a can be switched only by the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the opening/closing plate 8300 allows the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entrance. It may be interpreted that the ball is sent to 9111 or the first outlet 66. That is, the opening/closing plate 8300 only serves to guide the ball to the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether the ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a is switched depending on the state of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. You may interpret that it is possible. In this case, the attention of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be improved as compared with the attention of the opening/closing plate 8300.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, a case will be described in which a plurality of members that move upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a are provided, and a driving mode that operates a member on one side is configured to cause a ball to flow down to the auxiliary winning opening 9111. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of movable members is one (for example, the opening/closing plate 1300), and the interference member 6930 is controlled to be in the projecting state at the timing of closing the opening/closing plate 1300, thereby closing the opening/closing plate 1300. The discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or the period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state is set to be short (the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the discharge port 1150). It is possible to suppress the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 by setting the time to be less than 0.2 seconds.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is configured as a general winning hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to a lottery for special symbols. In this case, the special symbol 2 is configured to be able to obtain the lottery of the special symbol 2 by the ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 on the basis of the control that changes in preference to the special symbol 1, so that the jackpot game of It is possible to prevent the variation of the special symbol 1 from starting immediately after the end.

Although the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate in the ninth embodiment, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling plate 9112 changes its state between a state of retracting from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state where it does not collide with a game ball) and a state of projecting to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state colliding with a game ball). It may be configured as a movable plate which is driven and controlled as described above. In this case, the operation pattern is exemplified in various modes. For example, it may be a constant operation after the power is turned on, or a predetermined operation starting from the start of a big hit game.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the operation speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depending on the restoring mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a damper that applies a load to the power transmission member 5400 after the auxiliary transmission member 8340 is in the closed state during the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 may be provided. In this case, since the period during which the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state can be extended after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed, it is possible to easily control the opening on one side.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the entrance to the auxiliary entrance 9111 is switched on the assumption that the opening/closing plate 8300 changes its state toward the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the balls may enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 at a predetermined rate during the period in which the opening/closing plate 8300 maintains the closed state. For example, another movable object having a constant motion may be provided, and a ball may collide with the movable object to cause the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the sphere is discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181 and the number of spheres equal to or more than the storable number of the storage channel 1231 can pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the volume of the storage channel 1231 may be variable. In this case, the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made to correspond to the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, and the like are illustrated as the detection unit that detects the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, the opening of the outlet 1150 (or the opening arranged in the vicinity of the opening) may be configured as the detection unit (ball passage sensor). In this case, it is possible to suppress the time delay from the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 to the detection of the ball by the detection means as much as possible.

In the tenth embodiment, the operation of the movable member 10181 discharges the spheres from the middle of the storage channel 1231 to create a space inside the storage channel 1231, which is advantageous for the player who can aim for over-winning. Although the case where various changes occur has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ball discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181 has a predetermined probability of falling detection sensor (a detection sensor that sets the V flag 203s to OFF, a third discharge path sensor of the thirteenth embodiment). (Same as 13813). In this case, the movement of the movable member 10181 causes the sphere to be discharged from the middle of the storage flow path 1231, so that not only the change advantageous to the player but also the disadvantageous change may occur.

In particular, in the tenth embodiment, since a plurality of types of operation patterns of the movable member 10181 are prepared, the player is notified in advance by which operation pattern the movable member 10181 is driven, so that the player can: Play the ball in a mode that allows the discharge of the ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 (as an example, always continue firing (without hitting)) or shoot the ball so that it does not enter the storage channel 1231 as much as possible. It is possible to select whether to play the game in a firing mode that adjusts the execution and the stop of. That is, the player selects whether to aim for the excess prize by knowing the risk that the V flag 203s may be set to OFF, or to eliminate the risk that the V flag 203s is set to OFF instead of giving up the excess prize. can do.

In the first control example described above, the case where the periphery of the first variable winning device 6000 is brightly turned on based on the operation of the operation button 300 and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit part does not have to be in the vicinity of the first variable winning device 6000, but may be in a wide range (center frame 86 etc.) including the first variable winning device 6000.

Note that various modes are exemplified as means for changing the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, data of the lighting mode is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rising edge of the clock pulse, and the transmitted data is corresponded at the falling edge of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when turning off the light, the data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. It may also be combined with a latch.

Further, a plurality of types of lighting pattern tables may be prepared in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the tables. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining this lighting pattern table with the above-mentioned clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or the control may be performed using a serial port driver.

The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be based on a so-called dynamic lighting system (a lighting system that makes a difference in light and dark by changing a time interval of lighting and extinguishing), or may be due to a high and low voltage.

In the first control example described above, the case where the transmission lamp 227b is kept lit while the operation effect is successful has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on for a short period (for a moment). In this case, attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. Further, based on the success of the operation effect, not the lighting of the lamp but, for example, how many remaining balls to enter the storage channel 1231 may be notified.

In the first control example, when five or more spheres are stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 and the interference member 6930 is retracted by operating the operation button 300, the sphere flows into the specific region 4830. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of spheres stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is set to 4 or less, and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, so that the general winning opening is arranged at a position where the stored spheres can pass. You may do it. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called “holding device”.

In the first control example described above, the case where the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 is notified by the display in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the round in which the operation effect is executed may be moved forward by one round, and the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 may be notified in the round game after the round in which the operation effect is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from accumulating too much in the storage channel 1231 before the notification.

Further, in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, when notifying the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231, the time that is insufficient to reach that number (continuously firing balls) In such a case, it is desirable to execute the notification at an insufficient time). As a result, even if the ball is continuously emitted from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball enters the storage channel 1231 too much at the notification execution timing.

In the first control example, the case where the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect has been described, but the operation speed is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the number of displayed images may be controlled to be changeable based on a predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, for example, the number of times the special symbol changes up to the big hit, the number of points accumulated by the number of games, and the like are illustrated. In this case, for example, if the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is large, or if the privilege is high, by controlling the difficulty of the operation effect to be low, the burden required by the player until the jackpot (the number of fluctuations, The greater the number of games played, the greater the profit that the player can obtain by the operation effect.

Here, examples of the degree of difficulty include the degree of difficulty of the operation effect itself and the degree of difficulty of obtaining a profit after the operation effect. When the difficulty of gaining profit after the operation effect is high, for example, the operation effect and the accompanying execution timing of the notification are in the latter half of the round game R (the period when a prescribed number of balls can enter the storage channel 1231). It is illustrated that it is arranged in (later). In this case, a situation may occur in which the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 exceeds the number notified as the number of balls to enter the storage channel 1231 at the notification timing.

Further, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself may be associated with the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is slow, it is easy to succeed in the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is long, the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 by that time is set. There is a possibility that more balls than the number notified will enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is fast, it is difficult to succeed in the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is short, the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 by that time is short. It is possible to prevent more than the number of balls informed as.

Since the duration of the remaining round game R is different depending on the execution timing of the notification, the display effect to be adopted may be controlled to be switchable in correspondence with the duration of the remaining round game R. For example, if the remaining round game R has a short duration, the display effect is configured with a video that can be completed in a short period, and if the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, it is displayed with a video that continues for a long period. You may configure the performance. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the loading of the moving image does not end in the remaining time of the round game R and the round game R ends without being displayed.

In the first control example described above, the number of balls to enter the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number. However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of balls to enter is arbitrary. Can be set to. For example, by controlling an extremely small number (for example, two) of balls into the storage channel 1231, it is possible to control so that the profit obtained by the player is increased. In this case, the player can be prompted to stop the ball firing at the start of the round when the notification is started. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 or the like may give a notification such as "Stop firing".

In the first control example described above, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted for a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation button 300 from being operated with the state in the vicinity of the interference member 6930 (flowing state of the ball) as a guide, and it is possible to improve the attention to the operation effect.

In the first control example described above, the timing at which the error command is set in S1515 is the timing at which the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the solenoid 1510 is turned off. When the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 even after the setting, the discharge from the storage channel 1231 is continued, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, another movable object that restricts the passage of the balls of the discharge port 1150 is provided, and when the power is turned on, it is driven (excited) so as to allow the passage of the balls of the discharge port 1150, and while the error command is generated. May be controlled so as to change the state so as to restrict passage of the sphere. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated, it is not illegal, and some trouble (ball clogging, sphere If an error command is set for deceleration due to dirt, etc., the disadvantage to the player can be reduced. After that, by canceling the error command by turning off the power and turning on the power again, the game can be restarted from the state where the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (the state immediately before the error command is set). ..

The control of the movable object is not limited to the control based on the presence/absence of the error command setting. For example, control may be performed so that the state changes when the power is turned on and off. In this case, for example, when the game cannot be continued due to a sudden power failure, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be prevented from being discharged from the storage channel 1231.

Further, the control mode of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, it is not necessary to be able to restart the game from the state immediately before the error command is set until it is discovered that the setting of the error command is based on fraudulent activity and the RAM 203 is cleared. The operation of the movable object may be controlled before the game is resumed, and the balls may be discharged from the storage channel 1231.

The form of this movable object is not limited at all. For example, a driving device may be separately provided, and the regulation member 1600 may be used as the means for preventing the discharge of the balls, or the interference member 6930 can be maintained in an extended state as a process when the power is turned off. The interference member 6930 may be adopted as the movable member.

In the first control example described above, the control flow is configured based on how many rounds are started in the big hit medium performance process S2505, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control is performed based on the start of a specific effect such as the start of a round game R in which a ball can pass in the specific area 4830 or the start of a round game R in which an operation effect is started. You may make it comprise a flow. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of specification changes because it is not necessary to make a large change in the control flow even if the number of rounds in which the effect is executed is changed due to specification changes. it can.

In addition, in the big hit medium effect process S2505, the control flow is configured such that the flag turned on in the control flow when it is determined to be the third round is turned off in the control flow when it is determined to be the fifth round. , But not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flag may be controlled to be turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the fourth round of the round game R. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of changing specifications when adopting a four-round jackpot game.

In the first control example described above, as the nineteenth operation pattern, the case where the interference member 6930 retracts at the start timing of the round game R of the fifth round has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game may be withdrawn 0.5 seconds before the start timing of the round game R. In this case, the round game R of the fifth round can be started in a state in which the sphere whose downflow is regulated by the interference member 6930 is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

In the first control example described above, the case where the operation flow path 3001 of the first variable winning a prize device 6000 emits light by pressing the operation button 300 according to the effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of whether or not there is a presentation, when the operation button 300 is operated at a predetermined timing, the surroundings of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 may be controlled to emit light. In this case, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for pressing the operation button 300 when the operation effect during the round game R is not executed.

In the first control example described above, the case of controlling the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment may be controlled. In this case, by the action of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, it is possible to easily set the excess winning number and determine whether or not the excess winning occurs.

In the second control example described above, the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by the drive control in which only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the opening/closing plate 1300 described in the first embodiment, and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a drive (excitation) mode that maintains the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, the auxiliary ball entrance The sphere may flow down to 9111. In this case, it is possible to allow the ball to flow down to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 without dividing the plate that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Further, in this case, the period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to less than 0.2 seconds, so that the discharge port 1150 is again discharged before the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 (in a state where they are discharged). You can regulate the passage of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to allow the balls to flow down to the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 without reducing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

In the second control example described above, the case where the display modes of the number-of-rounds display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b are controlled so as to be switched based on the elapse of the waiting time TK has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited. For example, it may be controlled to be switched based on the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, control is performed so as to switch the display based on the number of spheres stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a being 9 (the storage flow channel 1231 is full when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state). It is possible for the player to recognize the change timing of the display mode as the timing when the storage channel 1231 is full.

The number of spheres inside the storage channel 1231 may be determined by the value of the remaining sphere counter 203p, or a separate contact sensor may be provided in the storage channel 1231 to directly detect the number of spheres. You can

In the second control example described above, the case where the character "+ chance" is displayed as the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721 at the predetermined timing of the predetermined jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. There is no. For example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the character "+ chance" may be controlled to be displayed as the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721 during a period in which the ball can enter the auxiliary entrance port 9111. The character "+ Chance" of the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721 may be controlled to be displayable as a swaying display during a period when the player cannot enter the ball opening 9111. For example, the character "+ chance" may be displayed when the round number display portion 714 is displayed brightly.

Further, as the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721, the character “+chance” may be continuously displayed for a certain period, or may be displayed so as to be switched between display and non-display in a short period. May be.

In the second control example described above, it is configured to control whether or not the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened on one side, based on the jackpot type and the time elapsed from the start of the jackpot, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the frequency of occurrence of one-sided opening and the timing of occurrence may be changed based on the type of jackpot and the elapsed time from the start of jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the firing mode in which the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed and the firing mode of aiming the ball to reach the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (to reduce the effect of the firing mode).

In the third control example described above, the case where the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are continuously discharged while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by adopting the interference member 6930 and controlling the bulging state at a predetermined timing, the case where the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 while the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is configured. be able to. As a result, it is possible to complicate the player's selection of the firing mode of the ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from casually playing the game.

In the third control example described above, the case in which the type of the jackpot game that is transferred based on the ball passing through the specific region 4830 is one type has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of jackpot games, which differ in the number of rounds, the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained, the number of time saving that can be obtained after the jackpot game, etc., are prepared, and the jackpot determined by when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 You may comprise so that the kind of game may change. In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting the timing for stopping the firing of the ball aiming at the passage of the ball to the specific area 4830, and to improve the interest of the player.

In the third control example described above, the case where the small hit is determined from a plurality of small hit types based on the numerical value of the small hit type counter value C6 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the small hit type counter value C6, the small hit A or the small hit B (or another small hit) may be determined. In this case, the relationship between the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be made uniform.

In the third control example, the case where the time (0.4 seconds) in which the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is two is set as the interval at which the small hits are continuously executed. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper limit of the number of balls to be ejected may be one (the interval for the small hit is 0.2 seconds), or may be three or more (the interval for the small hit is 0.6 seconds or more). good. In addition, it is naturally permissible to change the operation pattern of the distribution device 4850 with changing the small hitting interval.

In the third control example described above, the case where the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is limited to the sphere that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a has been mainly described, but the sphere is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as described in the fifth embodiment, the balls that have entered the second ball inlet 640 may also be configured to join the storage channel 1231. In this case, as compared with the case described in the third control example, the number of storage in the storage flow channel 1231 should be kept larger by the amount that has entered the second ball inlet 640 but flows into the storage flow channel 1231. You can

Therefore, even when the gauge configuration in which the ball is excessively guided to the second ball entrance 640 or the nail state and the ball is difficult to be guided to the first specific winning hole 1000a (or, depending on the situation) However, it is possible to prevent a sufficient number of balls from being difficult to be stored in the storage channel 1231 in the time saving game. As a result, since the timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 can be maintained for a long time by stopping the firing of the ball, the timing that the player can select as the timing at which the ball stops firing can be increased. it can.

That is, the player can stop the firing of the ball at any timing while grasping the remaining number of times saved, so that the player's concentration can be improved as compared with the case where the player plays a time saving game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, means for suppressing the timing that the player can select as the timing to stop the ball firing may be adopted. For example, by providing distribution to the variation time of the special symbol 2 (including the case where the variation time becomes long), even if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remains Can be configured (a small hit is not executed until the variable stop). Therefore, it is possible to increase the types of modes in which the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 and to provide a part that is difficult to predict in the progress of the game, so that the player's interest can be improved. Furthermore, by providing the distribution for the variation time of the special symbol 2, it is possible to have a plurality of variations in the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and it is possible to make the effect complicated.

Further, the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 may be configured not to join the storage channel 1231 but to act on the ball flowing down inside the storage channel 1231. In this case, the effect exerted on the spheres flowing down the inside of the storage channel 1231 may be changed according to the number (or frequency) of the spheres entering the second entrance 640.

As a first method, for example, a movable piece that can be displaced is arranged in the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640, and the movable piece is displaced when the game ball collides with the movable piece. If the movable piece enters the storage channel 1231 due to the displacement, while the game ball separates from the movable piece (passes), the movable piece retracts to the outside of the storage channel 1231 by the return spring or the like. By doing so, the movable piece may be allowed to enter the storage channel 1231 to prevent (stop or decelerate) the downward flow of the sphere inside the storage channel 1231.

As a second method, for example, a sphere that has entered the second ball inlet 640 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 but partially enters (for example, arranged like the ball AP54 in FIG. 46A). It may be configured to be able to come into contact with a ball that enters the first specific winning port 1000a and flows down the storage flow path 1231 by being configured to flow down via the state of being). In this case, it is possible to associate the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 with the flow-down mode of the ball inside the storage channel 1231 while eliminating the need for the movable piece.

In the third control example described above, the case where the small hit A or the small hit B that is completed in 1.8 seconds is determined as the small hit type has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to the small hit A and the small hit B, the small hit Z that executes the above-described opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times in 0.1 seconds between the openings can be determined. It may be controlled to.

In this case, it is possible to secure 3.3 seconds as the time for the balls to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger number of balls than the case of the small hit A or the small hit B can be used for the first specific prize. The guide to the mouth 1000a can be facilitated. In addition, since the open period (the period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state) is 0.1 seconds, the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3.3 seconds can be stored in the storage channel 1231.

For the player, the small hit Z has a position as a small hit that makes it easier to store balls in the storage flow channel 1231 at the time of one small hit, as compared to the small hit A and the small hit B. Therefore, after the small hit Z occurs, the game can be continued in a state where the spheres are sufficiently stored in the storage flow path 1231, and therefore the firing of the sphere is stopped aiming at the passage of the sphere to the specific region 4830. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting the timing to perform.

In the third control example, the small hitting game execution interval corresponds to the ball entering the specific area 4830, and it is the player's interest to play the ball so that the ball easily enters the specific area 4830. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a gaming state after a jackpot game, it is possible to shift to a probability changing state with a predetermined probability, and a ball passes through the specific area 4830 to turn on a fall flag (a flag that shifts the probability changing state to a normal state or a time saving state). It may be controlled to be set. That is, since it is disadvantageous for the player to enter the ball into the specific area 4830, it is possible to execute the game in a game mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830 while the probability variation state continues. it can.

Here, in the third control example, since three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231 at a time, the spheres will pass through the specific area 4830 with a high probability, and therefore the spheres are moved to the specific area 4830. As a game mode in which it is difficult to enter the ball, for example, a mode in which the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) is 2 or less for one small hit game, or a small hit game In order to maintain the interval in a period in which only two balls are discharged, a mode in which the holding of the special symbol 2 is not stopped is exemplified.

In the third control example, as the small hit type, the small hits A and B in which the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 during the small hit game is small have been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as another operation mode of the small hit C which is completed in the same 1.8 seconds, the opening/closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state, and after maintaining the open state for 0.2 seconds, changes to the closed state. Then, the operation is performed in such a manner that the closed state is maintained for 1.4 seconds, the state is changed to the open state, and the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds, and then the state is changed to the closed state. The driving to the open position may be omitted (or the operation may be returned to the closed position in the minimum time). In this case, when a small hit C occurs, it is possible to discharge a large number of balls from the storage channel 1231 while reducing the probability of passing the balls to the specific region 4830, so that the number of stored balls up to that point is significantly reduced (reset). The meaning of the small hit can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved by providing surprise to the player.

In addition, the small hit C is a great loss to the player that the meaning of storing the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 is suddenly lost after passing the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 several times to pass the spheres to the specific region 4830. Since it is a small hit to be felt, it is desirable to set the probability of occurrence to several% (for example, 0.1%). In addition, in order to distinguish from the other small hits A and B, the effect dedicated to the small hit C may be controlled to be executed by the third symbol display device 81, or common to the other small hits A and B. You may make it difficult to notice the discharge of a large number of balls until the player finishes the production and confirms the storage flow path 1231 by looking.

In the third control example described above, the case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state after the small hit game and the balls are discharged entirely from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the number of discharges is adjusted by another drive device that is arranged so that the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state, or the interference member 6930 is arranged in the storage channel 1231 to open/close the plate. Even when 1300 is closed, the number of ejected balls may be adjusted by the interference member 6930. In this case, for example, a long variation (for example, about 2 to 3 minutes) is selected as the variation of the special symbol, and even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state for a predetermined time, the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 is selected. It is possible to prevent the number of the cells from decreasing.

In the fourth control example described above, the starting round Rpb is the third round, and the case where the effect round Rpt, the post-effect round Rpa, and the V winning round Rv are continuously formed is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, the jackpot game may be configured with 16 rounds, which is more than 6 rounds, and the starting round Rpb may be configured instead as the 10th round, or both the 3rd round and the 10th round may be configured as the starting round Rpb. May be. In this case, if the timing for setting the corresponding effect start flags 223ya to 223yd to be changed, the control flow (control flow of effect switching process (S4701)) can be diverted, so that the specification can be changed easily. You can

In the fourth control example described above, the case where the effect in the round game R and the effect in the interval period are separated is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if it is determined during the previous round (post-production game round Rpa) of the V-winning round Rv that the game ball passes through the specific area Rv in the V-winning round Rv, the V-winning round Rv and the post-production game. It is also possible to execute the effect from the middle of the interval period between the round Rpa and the V winning round Rv. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect from being delayed even when a long effect is executed.

In the fourth control example, even if the ball is continued to be fired after the word "Do not hit" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the ball flows from the storage channel 1231 during the fourth round game R. Since the discharge sensor is controlled so as not to be discharged, the case has been described in which the specified number of balls does not enter the detection sensor 1240, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the fourth round game R, the opening and closing plate may be closed (long closed) at a predetermined timing, and the ball may be discharged from the storage channel 1231. In this case, if there are a plurality of balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300, an additional ball is generated in the detection sensor 1240, so the fourth round game R ends without waiting for a prescribed time (30 seconds). there's a possibility that. Therefore, as a disadvantage given to the player when the ball is continued to be fired after being displayed as "Do not hit" on the third symbol display device 81, the effect executed in the fourth round game R is in the middle. There can be a disadvantage that you can only see up to.

In addition, when such a disadvantage is provided, it is desirable that the timing of “do not hit” is before the storage channel 1231 is full. For example, the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is monitored from the detection mode by the detection sensor 1240 and the detection mode of the spheres passing through the discharge port 1150, and the number of spheres inside the storage flow channel 1231 becomes full. When it is near the tongue (for example, 7), "Do not hit" may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where an extra ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 due to the slow execution of the display, although the firing of the ball is stopped according to the display.

In the fourth control example, when the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres, a predetermined operation effect is executed during the round game R, and when the operation effect is successful, advantageous information in the next round game R is obtained. The case has been described in which the predetermined profit can be obtained by playing the next round game R according to the information (the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined operation effect is executed at an interval between rounds which is started when a specified number of balls enter the detection sensor 1240, and when the operation effect is successful, advantageous information in the next round game R is acquired. It may be possible to obtain a predetermined profit by playing the next round game R according to the information. In this case, since the operation effect can be executed in the invariable period depending on the game mode of the inter-round interval, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the operation effect is interrupted.

In the above fourth control example, a case will be described in which the Xth sphere has entered the storage channel 1231 due to the fact that the detection sensor 1240 has detected the sphere for a long time (2 seconds). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R is controlled so as to be determined in advance by a predetermined counter (winning number counter 203w, discharge number counter 203x), and the spheres are stored. On the other hand, the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 after the start of the round game R is added, and when it is determined that the total has reached the specified number (10 in this control example), the Xth ball is It may be determined that the player has entered the ball.

In the fifth control example described above, in the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52, the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 repeatedly changes between the open state and the closed state is configured to be one second intervals, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It can be changed by design. For example, the interval may be shortened or lengthened, or the interval may be different, depending on the degree of deceleration of the ball when the load is applied from the rolling arc portion 12252, the frequency with which the continuous ball is desired to be generated, and the like. May be combined to form an operation scenario. In this case, basically, the shorter the distance is, the larger the total load that the ball receives when moving forward and backward while being sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 12300 and the rolling arc portion 12252 is. The action becomes remarkable, and continuous balls are likely to occur.

In the fifth control example described above, the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52 are the closing (short closing) of the opening/closing plate 12300 that cannot discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 and the opening/closing plate that can discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231. Although it is described as a difference from the closing (long closing) of 12300, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 capable of discharging the spheres from the storage channel 1231, an operation scenario of performing a closing operation (second long closing, 0.4 second closing) in order to have a variation in length is described. It may be provided. In this case, the longer the opening/closing plate 12300 is closed, the larger the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 12300 is next opened, the number of spheres that can be entered is large. can do.

In the fifth control example described above, the case in which the tempo of winning (the period required to win the specified number of winnings) is changed by closing the opening/closing plate 12300 for a short time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the long-time closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 is executed immediately after the start of the round game R, and from the start of the round game R until the ball is actually guided by the detection sensor 1240 (until the opening/closing plate 12300 is in the open state). ) May be secured for a long period. In this case, when the open/close plate 12300 is in the closed state, it reaches the front side of the open/close plate 12300, reaches the end face 3251b before the open/close plate 12300 is in the open state, and falls between the detection sensor 1240 and the end face 3251b. The struck ball heads for the outlet 66 as it is.

In another example of the fifth control example described above, a case has been described in which the V flag 203s may be set to off by a ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 during a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. There is no. For example, if a probability variation state is provided as a game state that shifts after the jackpot game is over, and a special symbol that fluctuates mainly in the probability variation state (for example, special symbol 2) is provided with a small hit distribution, during a small hit game. The falling flag (the flag that shifts the probability variation state to the normal state or the shortened state) may be set to ON by the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 and that has entered the third discharge path sensor 13813.

In this case, for example, as the small hit type, the second switching device 13850 allows the ball to pass the third discharge path sensor 13813, and the second switching device 13850 allows the ball to pass the third discharge path sensor 13813. The two-switching device 13850 may be provided with a small hit to regulate. As a result, the probability variation state can be configured as a game feature in which there is a possibility that the probability variation state will be ended by the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the small hitting game during the probability variation state.

In another example of the fifth control example described above, a case has been described in which the discharge path sensor 13810 that guides the ball is switched according to the states of the switching devices 13840 and 13850 that are switched in conjunction with the operation of the solenoid 1510, but not necessarily. It is not limited to this. For example, whether or not a ball rides at a predetermined probability (a big hit type, a game mode, etc., a gate passage timing when a big hit game is started by passing a predetermined gate, etc., is provided downstream of the discharge port 1710. A rotating member that rotates at a constant speed is provided with a ball receiving portion on which the ball rides, and the ball moves a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) after the ball rides on the ball receiving portion. The rotating member may be configured to rotate so as to pass through a falling sensor that turns on a falling flag (a flag that shifts the probability variation state to the normal state or the time saving state).

In another example of the fifth control example, while the resistance change member 13854 is in contact with the special rotation member 13851, the special rotation member 13851 does not rotate under the weight of the restriction member 13852 (the resistance is sufficient. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special rotation member 13851 may slowly rotate (the resistance is slightly small) due to the weight of the restriction member 13852 even while the resistance change member 13854 is in contact with the special rotation member 13851. By setting this rotation speed to a rotation speed sufficient to return the regulation member 13852 to the collapsed state in 5 seconds, the regulation member 13852 is collapsed at the timing when the short opening/closing during the round game R is started. It can be in a state.

In the other example of the fifth control example, the case where the resistance change member 13854 interferes with the left and right ends of the defining portion 13830 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference may be made only at one end of the defining portion 13830 (end reached by the operating member 13820 when the solenoid 1510 is in the excited state). In this case, the arrangement of the restricting member 13852 is maintained during the inter-round interval, the solenoid 1510 is excited, and the restricting member 13852 goes to the collapsed state only after the round game R of the next round is started. Therefore, during the inter-round interval. It is possible to configure a high playability by increasing the occurrence rate of events in which the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 are guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813.

In another example of the fifth control example described above, the case where the resistance increase of the special rotation member 13851 is canceled after the inter-round interval has passed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the resistance changing member 13854 may be in contact with the special rotation member 13851 even in the interval between rounds, and the posture of the special rotation member 13851 may be periodically switched while the resistance increase is maintained. In this case, the special rotation member 13851 does not return to the original state at the end or start of the big hit game, and the number of times the special rotation member 13851 changes its posture in one big hit game also differs depending on the game mode of the player. In addition, since the jackpot game is allowed to start regardless of the state of the special rotation member 13851, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and prevent capture.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Points that prevent you from winning more than the target number>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. The game is characterized in that the detection means comprises a ball entrance preventing means for making it difficult for the ball to pass through the ball entrance in a state where a predetermined number of balls have been detected to enter the ball entrance in a predetermined period. Machine A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by having passed through the mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly on the operating member with extraordinary force, extra balls are provided from the start of the operation of the operating member until the balls fall from the operating member. There is a possibility that a certain number or more of spheres may pass through the detection opening because there is a possibility that they will pass through the detection opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to make it difficult for the predetermined number or more of balls to pass through the detection means by the ball entry prevention means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball in the state arranged upstream of the entrance, the ease of passage when the ball passes through the entrance is determined by It can be changed with subsequent spheres. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

Incidentally, as the ball entrance preventing means, a means for changing the ease of passing through the ball entrance depending on the detection result of the detecting means, a means for constantly maintaining the ease of passing through the ball entrance, etc. Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A1, the ball entrance prevention means includes a housing means for housing a ball that has passed through the ball entrance, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the housing means, and an outlet for the ball. A discharge switching unit that switches between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, wherein the accommodating unit is provided between the ball inlet port and the discharge port. A gaming machine A2, which is formed with a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the storage means is formed with a capacity for storing a predetermined number of balls at the maximum between the ball inlet and the outlet, so that the discharge switching can be performed. When the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the housing means, the balls housed in the housing means can prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the entrance.

In the gaming machine A2, while the discharge switching means is in the first state, the incoming ball switching means is formed to be maintainable in the second state, the gaming machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering from the ball entrance toward the housing means while the ball is being discharged from the housing means. The operation timings of the discharge switching means and the incoming ball switching means may be the same or different.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is provided with a driving means that is also used as the discharge switching means and the incoming ball switching means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the driving means that also serves as the switching means. As a result, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the discharge switching means changes from the first state to the first state after the entrance switching means starts changing the state from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the state changes are sequenced in the manner of starting the state changes toward the two states, and these state changes are completed substantially at the same time.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible that the ball that has entered the accommodating means after the entering ball switching means is in the first state is discharged from the discharge port. While preventing (while preventing irregular winning), since the ball switching means can be started from the second state before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port is completed, the discharge from the discharge port is possible. It is possible to reduce the number of balls that flow down through the game area through the entrance switching means and go to the outlet, as compared to the case where the operation of the entrance switching means is started after completion.

The ordering of the state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching unit, or each switching unit may be provided with a dedicated driving unit to control the timing. May be.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is provided with a changing means for changing the maximum number of accommodated accommodation means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, it is possible to change the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means by the changing means, so that it can be temporarily (for example, in a specific round) predetermined. It is possible to form a state in which more than the number of balls is accommodated in the accommodation means. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, by using the accommodating means having the same shape, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine in which a predetermined number of numerical values are changed (it is possible to cope with a difference in specifications). As a result, the development cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the shape is made for each specification.

In the gaming machine A6, the ball entrance is communicated with a first ball entrance and the housing means downstream of the first ball entrance, and a ball flowing down the game area is allowed to pass therethrough. A second ball entrance through which the possibility of passage is switched by the ball entrance switching means, and a case where a ball enters the housing means from the first ball entrance and a case where the ball enters from the second ball entrance. The maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means is changed depending on the case where the ball enters the means, and the changing means selectively sets from which entrance the ball can pass. Gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the ball entering from the first entrance and the ball entering from the second entrance can both be stored in the accommodation means. Therefore, the required space can be suppressed as compared with the case where separate accommodating means are provided for each.

In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interfering means capable of projecting to the inside of the accommodating means, the interfering means interfering with a sphere overhanging inside the accommodating means and the accommodating means. A gaming machine A8, which is configured such that the maximum number of accommodation units can be changed depending on the case where the game machine A8 is evacuated to the outside.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the number of balls to be accommodated is changed by changing the internal volume of the accommodation means without changing the ball entry path of the balls into the accommodation means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the accommodation number without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the accommodation means, and the sphere can be arranged on the front side when retreating. Gaming machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of retreat can be hidden by the ball arranged in front. Thereby, the operation of the interference unit can be made inconspicuous while the additional shielding member is unnecessary.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. A detecting means for preventing a ball from passing through the entrance when it is detected that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance during a predetermined period. Is provided with a housing means for housing a ball that has passed through the ball entrance, and a visibility obstructing means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the ball housed in the housing means. AK1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by passing through the mouth and drops the balls that were on the operating member at the time of operation to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the visibility of the downstream of the detection opening does not change, the effect of the effect of the ball passing through the detection opening becomes insufficient, and the attention may be reduced. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AK1, at least a part of the spheres housed in the housing means is made difficult to be visually recognized by the visually obstructing means, so that the effect is different depending on the number of spheres housed in the housing means. When a mechanism that causes the effect is adopted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's expectation of the effect that occurs coincides with the effect that occurs. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the above-mentioned effect.

In the gaming machine AK1, when a ball comes out of the containing means, a discharge port through which the ball passes, a first state in which the ball can pass through the discharge port, and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port. And a discharge switching means that can be switched by, wherein the housing means is formed with a volume in which the predetermined number of balls are stored at a maximum between the ball inlet and the outlet. Machine AK2.

According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK1, the balls can be stored in the housing means, so that it is possible to lengthen the period during which the effect produced by the balls can be maintained.

In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the gaming machine AK3 is configured to change the action of the visually recognizable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined condition.

It should be noted that the form of the predetermined condition is not limited at all. For example, as the predetermined condition, it may be adopted that the operation means operable by the player is detected to be operated by the player at a predetermined timing. In this case, the magnitude of the degree of deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means and the actual operation timing is detected, and the degree of change in the action of the visibility obstructing means is changed according to the magnitude. Is also good. For example, the sphere accommodated in the accommodating means may be changed to have better visibility when the degree of deviation is smaller than when the degree of deviation is large. In this case, the player's motivation for the operation of the operation means can be improved. The reverse is also possible.

Further, for example, as the predetermined condition, it may be adopted that the ball has passed through a predetermined entrance. In this case, for example, the degree of change in the action of the visibility obstructing means may be changed according to the number of balls that have passed through the predetermined ball entrance within the predetermined period. For example, the larger the number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance, the better the visibility of the balls stored in the storage means may be changed. In this case, the player can be motivated to shoot more balls. The reverse is also possible. In this case, since it is possible to enthusiastically adjust the firing strength of the ball, it is possible to suppress a daunting game.

<Points for creating a launch stop instruction effect utilizing this structure: Aim A>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. In a state in which it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a notification that prompts the player to stop the launch of the game ball toward the entrance. The game machine AKK1 characterized by being played.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by having passed through the mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly on the operating member with extraordinary force, extra balls are provided from the start of the operation of the operating member until the balls fall from the operating member. There is a possibility that a certain number or more of spheres may pass through the detection opening because there is a possibility that the light will pass through the detection opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AKK1, since it is possible to execute the notification for prompting the stop of the firing of the game ball, the extra ball passes the detection opening by causing the player to play the game according to the notification. Possibility can be reduced.

The notification is for the purpose of preventing further ball entry, which occurs when the ball entry port is configured as a starting port and the number of holdings becomes full, and Although the lottery is obtained, the entrance is configured as a big winning opening and the purpose is to prevent a ball loss that occurs when the end of the round game is approaching.

Further, the mode of executing the notification is not limited at all. For example, the target notification may be executed by generating a display that prompts the user to stop the firing, or the target notification may be executed by turning off the display that prompts (prompts) the firing (makes it difficult to see, hide, or erase). You may do it.

Further, the influence given to the player when the notification is ignored is not limited at all. For example, the player may be notified of an abnormality (error notification) by ignoring the notification and continuing to shoot the game ball, or a ball loss may occur (probability increases). Alternatively, the profit other than the prize ball (for example, the right to shift to the special game state) may not be able to be obtained.

That is, it may be set so that the profit that would normally be obtained cannot be obtained if the game ball is fired or stopped in the firing manner as informed. In this case, even if the player shoots according to the notification, or ignores the notification and shoots or stops, similarly, it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the special game state, and the type of the special game acquired (the player after the shift). It is also possible to configure the profit given to the) to be changeable.

In addition, as the predetermined period, a period required until a predetermined number of game balls are stored in a housing means (storage channel) in which the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are stored (a period that varies depending on the mode of ball entry). ), or a period until a predetermined control mode started by entering a game ball into the entrance is ended.

The gaming machine AKK1 is provided with a lottery entrance ball slot for executing a lottery related to a change in the entrance slot state, and a special game state is started when the number of game balls stored in the entrance slot is zero. The gaming machine AKK2, which is configured so as to occur at the maximum.

According to the gaming machine AKK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK1, the number of balls stored in the entrance can be changed in size to a possibility of shifting to the special gaming state. That is, the sense of expectation of shifting to the special game state can be greatly changed depending on whether the number of game balls stored in the ball entrance is 0 or not.

As the number of game balls to be stored, the number of game balls in the case of actually accumulating the game balls, such as when the balls are retained downstream of the ball entrance, and the ball entry data to the ball entrance. For example, the number of data (held number) in the case of being held is exemplified.

In the gaming machine AKK2, the gaming machine AKK3 is configured such that a time point at which the game ball shifts to the special gaming state can be perceived in advance based on the fact that the gaming balls are stored in the ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine AKK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK2, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of an event in which the player leaves the seat before shifting to the special gaming state, by knowing the time when the player shifts to the special gaming state. ..

Examples of the means for perceiving include a method of perceiving by visually recognizing the flowing down mode of the game ball, a method of notifying by a display device, and the like.

In the gaming machine AKK2 or AKK3, even after the possibility of transitioning to the special game state occurs, the game ball is added to the above-mentioned ball entrance so that the player can enter the ball. A gaming machine AKK4, which is configured to be able to shift to a special gaming state later than a scheduled transition time.

According to the gaming machine AKK4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK2 or AKK3, the transition time point to the special gaming state changes due to the launch of the game ball after the possibility of shifting to the special gaming state occurs, It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost before the special game state is entered.

<Points for setting the upper limit of ball entry: Aim B>
In the gaming machine AKK1, an upper limit within a predetermined condition period is set in the calculation of the predetermined number of balls, the gaming machine AKK11.

According to the gaming machine AKK11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AKK1, the higher the frequency of the ball entering the entrance, the more the game enters the entrance before the notification for prompting the stop of the shooting is executed. The number of spheres can be increased.

The gaming machine AKK1 or the gaming machine AKK11, which is configured such that the length of the predetermined period corresponds to a large number of the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine AKK12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AKK1 or the gaming machine AKK11, it is possible to easily understand the relationship between the period required for the game and the gaming ball shot toward the entrance.

In any of the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11, or the gaming machine AKK12, the number of gaming balls that can enter the ball entrance by the end of the predetermined period is determined by the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entrance. The game machine AKK13, which is configured to be changeable depending on the difference.

According to the gaming machine AKK13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11, and the gaming machine AKK12, the number of gaming balls that can enter the entrance by the end of the predetermined period depends on the entering mode. Since they are different, it is possible to allow the player to devise the manner in which the game balls are fired and prevent the player from feeling leisure.

In any of the gaming machine AKK1 and the gaming machines AKK11 to AKK13, by stopping the firing of the gaming ball based on the notification, it is possible to prevent a delay in the determination of the profit based on the ball entering the ball entrance. A gaming machine AKK14, which is provided with fixed delay prevention means capable of executing control.

According to the gaming machine AKK14, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AKK1 and AKK11 to AKK13, control for preventing delay in the determination of the profit to be given to the player due to the stop of the firing of the gaming ball Since it is feasible that the player can get the planned profit because the period (including the predetermined period) that allows the player to enter the entrance before the fixed profit is confirmed has passed. It can be prevented from being missed.

<When launching continues after the launch stop suggestion is displayed: Aim C>
The gaming machine AKK15, wherein any one of the gaming machine AKK1 and the gaming machines AKK11 to AKK14 maintains the mode of the state change of the entrance switching means before and after the notification is executed.

According to the game machine AKK15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine AKK1 and the game machine AKK11 to the game machine AKK14, a game ball can be generated under the same condition even after the notification, even if the player can enter the ball into the entrance. The degree of freedom in selecting the firing mode can be improved.

Based on the premise that the size of the profit obtained by stopping the launch of the game ball and the profit obtained by continuing the launch can be changed, the launch mode of the game ball can be determined based on the comparison result. Can be changed.

For example, if the profit obtained by stopping the launch is the early jackpot acquisition (obtaining the right to transition to the special gaming state), and there is not enough time left to execute the jackpot game. If the player has a circumstance or is close to the closing time, etc., many payouts of prize balls based on allowing the game balls to enter the entrance even if the early win of the jackpot is abandoned. The more you win, the greater the profit for the player.

In this case, if the probability of entering the entrance is changed before and after the notification is performed (the probability of entering the ball decreases after the notification), the player stops firing the game ball and shifts to the jackpot. There is a possibility of ending the game without seeing the production. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine of the present case, if the launch of the game ball is continued even after the notification, there is a possibility that the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the entrance may be obtained, so that It is possible to increase the motivation to play until full time. Thereby, the operating rate of the gaming machine (for example, an index of the ratio of the length of the gaming time to the business hours) can be improved.

<Providing operation instructions at the time of launch stop notification>
In any of the gaming machine AKK1 and the gaming machines AKK11 to AKK15, the player is provided with an operating means, and a second notification for urging the operation of the operating means is provided during the notification. A gaming machine AKK16 characterized by comprising instruction means.

According to the game machine AKK16, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine AKK1 and the game machine AKK11 to the game machine AKK15, by letting the player operate the operation means by a notification prompting the operation of the operation means, It is possible to prevent the player from being idle while the firing is stopped.

In the gaming machine AKK16, the second notification is updated corresponding to the timing at which the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed.

According to the gaming machine AKK17, the second notification is updated in correspondence with the timing at which the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed, so that the player gets tired compared to the case where the content of the second notification is the same every time. Can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine AKK17, the second notification is configured such that the operation difficulty of the operation means becomes easier as the timing at which the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed becomes earlier. ..

According to the gaming machine AKK18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK17, the earlier the timing at which the notification for prompting the firing to be stopped is executed, the easier the success of the operation. be able to.

<Direction decision by entering the ball>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. In the state in which the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance for a predetermined period, the aspect of the effect related to the game ball entering the entrance is being executed. A gaming machine AKK20, which is defined regardless of whether a game ball enters the ball entrance in the first state.

According to the game machine AKK20, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect related to the game ball entering the ball entrance.

In the case where the gaming machine includes an operating means and executes an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation in the effect, a timing at which a predetermined number of game balls are detected to enter the entrance (timing in a predetermined period) According to the above, the mode of the effect may be changed. For example, the control may be performed such that the earlier the timing, the lower the difficulty level of the operation effect. In this case, the greater the profit that the player can obtain by the successful operation effect, the more the launch of the game ball to the entrance can be promoted (the stop of the launch of the game ball can be suppressed).

In the gaming machine AKK20, the effect is configured on the basis of the time of entry of the game ball into the right generation entrance located below the entrance.

According to the game machine AKK21, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine AKK20, an effect corresponding to the time of entering the right generation entrance is formed, so that the effect is associated with the actual downflow of the game ball. It can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine AKK20 or AKK21, in the case of the first state, the effect according to the entry mode of the game ball into the entry port during the period of being switched to the first state until the previous time. Gaming machine AKK22 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine AKK22, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AKK20 or AKK21, even if the game ball entering mode is the same in the first state during execution, the first state up to the previous time Since the effects can be made different when the manner of entering the game ball into the entrance is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the effect currently being executed.

In any of the gaming machines AKK20 to AKK22, when the effect is executed in the first state, the start time of the effect is set before the first state is started. Amusement machine AKK23.

According to the gaming machine AKK23, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AKK20 to AKK22, since the effect can be started before the entrance switching means is switched to the first state, the switching timing of the entrance switching means. It is possible to continue the game while making it difficult for the player to be aware of.

Further, when the effect is started in the period in which the entry switching means is maintained in the second state, the player's attention to the effect can be improved. Further, as compared with the case where the effect starts during the first state, it is possible to easily execute the effect that continues for a long time.

<Points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. , A delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at the upstream position of the entrance when the entrance switching means is in the second state, compared to the case where the entrance switching means is in the first state. A gaming machine B1 comprising:

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by passing through the mouth and drops the balls that were on the operating member at the time of operation to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the outlet, it is possible to hit the ball so that no ball falling from the operating member occurs. There is a problem in that some of the actual balls are produced depending on whether or not (the player has high or low launching technique).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the delay means operates when the ball entrance switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side position of the ball entrance cannot be guided to the ball entrance. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily arrange the ball at the upstream position of the ball entrance until the ball switching means switches to the first state. If the ball input switching means is in the first state while the ball is located upstream of the ball entrance, the ball is guided to the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the effect of the player's launching technique on the actual amount of the ball, so that it is possible to configure a game machine that is easy for beginners.

The mode of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be a fall restricting means that is composed of a horizontally long member that supports the sphere from below and restricts the fall to the end, or a convex means that is formed by a protrusion that decelerates the sphere by contact.

In the gaming machine B1, the delay means increases the degree of delay in a state where the balls are arranged on the downstream side, as compared with the case where the balls are arranged on the upstream side.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases in a state in which the ball is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, so that the attention force of the ball flowing down along the delay means is increased. Can be improved.

It should be noted that the mode of the level of the delay is not limited at all. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the backflow of the ball may be high or low when the incoming ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means has a shape in which a sphere arranged on the downstream side has a larger distance from the sphere arranged on the upstream side in the opening direction of the ball entrance. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delaying means is arranged such that when it is arranged on the downstream side of the delaying means, the interval between the ball and the opening direction of the ball entrance increases. Therefore, when the ball flows down vigorously through the delay means, it is possible to suppress the ball from directly entering the ball entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the entrance switching means includes ascending means for ascending a game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means has the first state. A gaming machine B4, which is arranged below the rising means in the state.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is arranged lower than the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball moves from the entrance switching means. The ball can be delayed after making the player visually recognize that it has dropped. This can improve the attention to the ball.

In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B5 is provided, which is arranged on the upstream side of the descending path of the ball with respect to the ascending means, and is provided with ascending restricting means for restricting ascending movement of the ball and guiding it in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is regulated by the ascent control means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

The gaming machine B5 is provided with a rescue ball which allows the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascent restriction means to enter and provides the player with a predetermined profit.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the profit that occurs when the ball passes through the entrance is caused by the ball that is thrown due to the load when the ascending means is raised. , It is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the relief entrance. As a result, even if the ball deviates from the flow-down path to the ball entrance, it is possible to prevent the attention from being lowered, and it is possible to improve the player's interest by the movement of the ball.

The gaming machine B7 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, characterized in that the delay means includes a variable action portion that acts differently on a ball due to a difference in a manner of reaching the delay means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be changed depending on the manner of reaching the delay means. This makes it possible to select different spheres and give different effects.

In addition, the mode of the difference in the mode of arrival is not limited. For example, the arrival position of the ball with respect to the entrance may be different, or the downflow direction of the ball until reaching the delay unit may be different.

In the gaming machine B7, the variable action portion delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position spaced apart from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating the ball from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or more. A gaming machine B8, which does not act on a ball reaching the delay means at a position.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B7, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action portion for a ball that is close to the entrance and the state of the entrance switching means cannot be switched in time. On the other hand, the variable action part does not act on a ball far from the ball entrance and sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball switching means, so that an appropriate game speed can be maintained.

<Point BK to utilize the ball that arrived at the interval>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. , While the incoming ball switching means is in the first state, compared to a ball that has reached the incoming ball switching means, while the incoming ball switching means is in the second state or from the second state A gaming machine BK1 provided with a profit giving means for easily giving a profit to a player by a ball reaching the incoming ball switching means while changing the state to the first state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by passing through the mouth and drops the balls that were on the operating member at the time of operation to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the outlet, it is possible to hit the ball so that no ball falling from the operating member occurs. Depending on whether or not (the level of skill of the player's launch) is high or low, there is a problem in that the player is forced to play carefully, which may reduce the interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, by adopting the profit giving means, it becomes easy to give a profit to the player by the ball reached while the incoming ball switching means changes the state, so that it is given to the player. Since it is possible to incorporate chances into the size of profits, it is possible to get rid of caution from the game and improve interest.

It should be noted that the form of the profit given to the player by the profit giving means is not limited at all. For example, prize balls may be paid out, a predetermined symbol may be drawn, the right to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game may be acquired, or the next jackpot may be confirmed.

For example, if the aspect of the profit given to the player by the profit giving means is a lottery of the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 of the special symbol 2 is reached by causing the ball to reach the entrance switching means at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. The number of reserved balls can be increased to a predetermined upper limit. As a result, when the high probability state is transitioned to after the jackpot game is over, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 that has been suspended starts. You can As a result, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player, unintentionally winning a big prize in the special symbol 1 lottery reduces the possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player. can do.

In the gaming machine BK1, the gaming machine BK2 is characterized in that the balls are sent to the profit giving means by a load given from the incoming ball switching means.

According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the ball is thrown to the profit giving means when the incoming ball switching means is stopped.

In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the profit that can be given to the player by the profit giving means is equal to or more than the loss that can occur while the entrance switching means keeps the second state. ..

According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the player's attention to the profit giving means can be improved, and the game is played so that the profit given by the profit giving means can be obtained. Can be directed to do so.

The gaming machine BK4 in any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, wherein the profit-giving means is controlled so that a plurality of types can be selected for a period maintained in the second state.

According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, a plurality of types of periods in which the profit giving means is maintained in the second state are selected. It is possible to make it difficult to shoot a ball by checking the timing of change to the second state. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball through the profit giving means, it is possible to configure the game property that the ball has to be continuously fired.

<Points for adjusting the jackpot game>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. When the entrance switching means maintains the first state, the balls that can pass through the entrance are associated with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance before the first state was formed. A gaming machine C1 comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, by the number changing means, the number of balls passing through the ball entrance in the state where the ball entering switching means forms the first state Since it can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance in the case of forming one state, in the series of operation patterns in which the entrance switching means repeatedly forms the first state, the profit given to the player is reduced. Adjustments can be made.

The method of adjusting profits is not limited. For example, due to the fact that a large number of balls have passed through the ball entrance when the ball entrance switching means has previously formed the first state, the ball entered when the ball entrance switching means has formed the first state next time. A mode in which the number of balls that can be entered into the mouth is suppressed may be used, and when the entrance switching means forms the first state next time due to the same phenomenon, the player's profit (not limited to the payout, For example, the right to shift to the high-probability state may be acquired) may be increased.

In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means is a storage means for storing the sphere that has passed through the ball entrance, a discharge opening through which the sphere passes when the ball exits the storage means, and a ball for the discharge opening. Of the discharge switching means, and a discharge switching means for switching the discharge switching means between a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port and a discharge switching means that can operate in a plurality of types of operation modes. A gaming machine C2, comprising: an operating mode switching means capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the housing means depending on a difference in operating mode.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the number of spheres stored in the storing means can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the spheres remain in the storing means. It is possible to change the number of remaining balls. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres required to fill the housing means with spheres, and to physically change the maximum number of spheres that pass through the ball entrance.

In addition, the mode of the difference in the operation mode is not limited at all. For example, different operation periods are used, and when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, which discharge port the discharge switching unit is operated (operation target) is changed.

In the gaming machine C2, the number changing means is provided with an interval maintaining means for maintaining a discharge interval of balls from the discharge port, the gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the interval for discharging the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the discharging is performed regardless of the number of balls stored in the housing means. The number of balls to be discharged from the discharge port can be specified according to the length of the period during which the switching unit is in the first state. Therefore, the number of spheres discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot pattern.

The form of the space maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load received by the ball immediately preceding the discharge port from the ball following the discharge port may be perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or from the inner wall of the containing means. A rib that is convexly provided and that applies a load to the ball to decelerate the ball may be used as the means.

In the gaming machine C3, the spacing maintaining means is provided with a projecting portion projecting from an inner side surface of the housing means in a flow path of the sphere in the vicinity of the discharge port.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, since the projecting portion is projected in the flow-down path, the flow-down sphere is brought into contact with the projecting portion to decelerate the sphere, which is close to the discharge port. It is possible to prevent the flow-down velocity from changing significantly between the sphere and the sphere whose distance from the discharge port is short, and to make the flow-down velocity of the sphere uniform.

In the gaming machine C4, the accommodating means is provided with a discharge path that causes the balls to continuously flow downward in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the projecting portions are staggered from opposing surfaces forming the discharge path. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being projected at predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the projecting portions are alternately projected from the facing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the projecting portions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path to move the balls. It is possible to cause the projections to collide with each other at predetermined intervals while shifting the position in the vertical direction of the predetermined flow-down direction, and to maintain the action of decelerating the ball for a long period of time.

In the gaming machine C5, the accommodating means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6, wherein the flow-down speed of the ball is formed so as to be higher than the flow-down speed of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so the balls stored in the storage means. Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port can be kept constant.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the ball entrance is provided with a starting opening for determining a big hit of a special symbol by the passage of a ball.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of times of special symbol big hit determination can be associated with the number of balls entered into the entrance. As a result, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed depending on the number of times the special symbol is determined until the big hit is obtained.

In the gaming machine C7, there is provided a starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting opening can enter the accommodating means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices provided can be reduced.

By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port which are arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching unit independently changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are arranged in the storage means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port (under the same conditions). It may be arranged at a position where the number of remaining balls can be changed.

In this case, the number of balls remaining in the containing means can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first outlet or the second outlet, so that the flow velocity of the balls flowing down the containing means is changed. Even in such a case, it is possible to maintain the number of balls discharged from the containing means.

The arrangement of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branching channel for distributing spheres is arranged upstream thereof. You can

Further, the operation mode of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited. For example, either one may be opened or both may be opened. When both are opened, the period required to eject the same number of balls from the accommodating means can be shortened as compared with the case where the balls are ejected from a single outlet. Thereby, the interval in the big hit game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the outlet during the big hit game can be reduced.

By the way, the first discharge port may be arranged at a lower end portion of the accommodating means, and the second discharge port may be arranged upstream of the first discharge port.

In this case, when the balls are discharged from the second discharge port, the balls arranged between the first discharge port and the second discharge port are used as the accommodating means regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls stored in the storing means varies, the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls can be easily kept constant. Further, even if the number of balls that are hit is reduced due to a ball clogging or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the balls remain inside the housing means.

Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side branched at the lower end of the accommodating means.

In this case, it is possible to switch from which discharge port the last discharged ball is discharged from the state in which the same number of balls are stored in the storage means by the operation mode of the discharge switching means. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the discharge mode of the ball from the behavior at the start. That is, for example, when the benefit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port the ball to be finally discharged is discharged, the attention to the flowing-down mode of the ball can be improved.

<During the round, direct as if the round had changed>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. And an opening-state switching unit configured to be able to switch between a period during which the ball easily passes through the inlet and a period during which the ball hardly passes through when the ball switching unit maintains the first state. A gaming machine CK1 characterized by.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the manner of entering the ball into the special winning opening in each round is the same, there is a problem that it may be difficult to sufficiently improve the attention to the special winning opening. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CK1, the attention to the entering mode of the ball into the entrance can be improved by the switching means during the open state while the entrance switching means maintains the first state. ..

The mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of the movable object arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detecting means. May be.

The gaming machine CK1 is provided with an informing means for informing a change in the profit to be given to the player while the entrance switching means maintains the first state.

According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, it is understood that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the entrance switching means maintained the first state. The person can grasp. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by the notification of the notification means.

The notification mode of the notification means is not limited in any way. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, it may be informed to make a break (switch screens or output sound) in the middle of the round game R, or turn off the display of the number of rounds. , It may be informed as if a new round game R has been started, so that it is displayed as a sub-round. In any case, when the start timing of the round game R and the timing of the notification by the notification means are the breaks in the game, the number of times the maximum number of rounds in the control state (for example, 16 rounds) is exceeded, and the break in the jackpot game is detected. By setting (for example, a break for 20 times), the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine CK2, it is configured such that a predetermined profit can be easily given to the player based on the fact that the number of balls exceeding the number allowed to pass through the entrance is guided to the entrance switching means. A gaming machine CK3, which is provided with a conditional profit giving means.

According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CK2, it is possible to prevent all of the balls from being wasted when the number of balls that can pass through the ball entrance is shot. As a result, it is possible to link the interest to the player by the production and the substantial profit (payout of prize balls).

It should be noted that it is also possible to visually recognize that the ball has stopped passing through the ball entrance and give a notification instructing the player to continue firing so that the player does not stop firing. Various modes are exemplified as the mode of notification in this case. For example, it may be a direct notification such as "Continue to fire", a notification euphemistically indicating the number of fired such as "If you put five, you have a great chance", or "There is something visible through the ball." Notification may be made (In this case, when there is no sphere, it is not visible, and when there is a sphere, a light ray that visually displays some figure or picture should be irradiated to a predetermined position near the entrance switching means where the sphere accumulates. Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. , A switching drive means that is controlled to be switchable to the second state when the specified number of balls has passed through the entrance for a predetermined period of time, and the specified number of balls is used as a reference. A game machine DKK1 comprising: an adjusting unit configured to adjust an excessive number of balls entering the ball entrance.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DKK1, the adjusting means can adjust the excessive entrance into the entrance, so that the profit given to the player due to the ball passing through the entrance fluctuates in a short time. However, it can be leveled for a long time.

It should be noted that the mode of adjusting the excess ball is not limited at all. For example, the entrance switching means may be adjusted so that an equivalent excess entrance can be expected every time based on a prescribed number of balls that can pass through the entrance during the first state. ) In contrast to the first excess ball that occurs when the first state is set at the timing, the second excess ball that is generated when the first state is set at the other (plural or singular) timing is reduced. , The first excess ball and the second excess ball may be adjusted so as to be in balance, and depending on whether the time period during which the ball input switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit game The number of occurrences of excess balls may be distinguished and adjusted so that they may be balanced, or depending on whether the period when the ball switching means is in the second state is short or long (between rounds). It may be an interval or a state change during the round), and the number of occurrences of excess balls may be distinguished.

In the gaming machine DKK1, the adjusting means is configured to be able to change at least one of a frequency with which the entrance switching means is switched to the second state or a period of being maintained in the second state. Machine DKK2.

According to the gaming machine DKK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DKK1, it is possible to pay attention to the frequency and the period in which the entrance switching means is switched to the second state, and as a result, the player's attention to the entrance switching means. Power can be improved.

Various modes are exemplified as the frequency of switching. For example, the number of times of switching may be small, or whether or not the switching has occurred. That is, when the second state is switched once in the predetermined period, it is switched to the second state in comparison with the case where the second state cannot be switched in the predetermined period (when the switching has occurred 0 times). Frequent.

In addition, when the frequency of switching to the second state is high, it may be configured that an excessive ball is likely to occur, and when the frequency of switching to the second state is low, it may be configured to easily cause an excessive ball of entry. ..

In the gaming machine DKK1 or DKK2, the adjusting means includes a load applying means configured to apply a load to the game ball when the state of the entering ball switching means changes, and the load applying means is the entrance opening. A gaming machine DKK3 configured to change the load applied to the gaming ball in accordance with the distance between the gaming ball and the gaming ball.

According to the game machine DKK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine DKK1 or DKK2, it is possible to focus attention on the arrangement of the game balls when the state change of the ball entrance switching means occurs, and as a result, the player with respect to the ball entrance switching means. You can improve your attention.

In the gaming machine DKK3, the load applying means is configured such that the load applied to the gaming ball increases as the distance between the ball entrance and the gaming ball decreases.

According to the game machine DKK4, in addition to the effect of the game machine DKK3, the attention to the game ball close to the entrance can be improved. In this case, the load given to the game ball may be a load in the direction toward the ball entrance (a load along the opening direction of the ball entrance) or a load in the direction of retreating from the ball entrance ( Load along the opening direction of the ball entrance) or in a direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the ball entrance.

For example, if the load is in the direction toward the entrance, the game ball placed near the entrance will be pushed into the entrance by the load, and the expectation that excess entrance will occur will occur. It can be directed.

For example, if the load is in the direction of withdrawing from the entrance (or if the load is applied in the direction orthogonal to the opening of the entrance and the game ball slows down due to friction, etc.), Compared to the game ball far from the entrance, the closer game ball has a greater degree of deceleration of the speed toward the entrance, and the interval between the game balls can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to guide a plurality of game balls to the entrance port in a lump, so that it is possible to produce an expectation that an excessive entrance will occur.

In any one of the game machines DKK1 to DKK4, the adjusting means includes a ball entrance preventing means capable of preventing a later ball entering the ball entrance with the previous ball entering the ball entrance, A game machine DKK5, characterized in that the maintenance of the entry ball prevention by the entry ball prevention means can be determined based on the drive mode of the switching drive means.

According to the gaming machine DKK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK4, the switching drive means which is not visually recognized by the player as to whether or not the entry prevention means maintains the prevention of entry. Since it is determined based on the driving mode, the player's imagination regarding whether or not the player can enter the entrance can be agitated.

<Technical thought in consideration of V flag off route>
In any of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK5, a game ball is provided with a profit entrance that gives a predetermined profit by entering the game ball, and the mode of the game ball entering the profit entrance is switched as described above. A gaming machine DKK6, which changes in response to driving of a driving unit.

According to the gaming machine DKK6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK5, the switching drive means is used not only for switching the mode of entry into the entrance, but also for entering the game ball into the profit entrance. It can also be used to switch the sphere mode.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the predetermined profit. For example, it may be a positive profit for the player or a negative profit (loss, positive for the game store) for the player.

In the gaming machine DKK6, the gaming machine DKK7 is configured so that it is easy to enter the profit entrance as the number of balls adjusted by the adjusting means to allow excess entrance increases.

According to the game machine DKK7, in addition to the effect of the game machine DKK6, a game in which a profit from the entry into the profit entry slot is provided in addition to the payout prize ball as a benefit provided by the excess entry. Can be configured.

For example, when the profit provided by the entrance into the profit entrance is a positive profit for the player, it can be recommended that the player aim at the excess entrance and play the game.

On the other hand, for example, if the profit provided by the entrance into the profit entrance is a negative profit (loss) for the player, whether or not the player is prepared for the negative profit (loss) and aims for an excessive entrance, It is possible to let the player choose whether or not to give up (not aim) the excessive ball in order to avoid a negative profit (loss).

The gaming machine DKK6 or DKK7, wherein the profit entrance is disposed downstream of the entrance.

According to the gaming machine DKK8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DKK6 or DKK7, the attention to the gaming ball after entering the ball entrance can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines DKK6 to DKK8, a gaming machine DKK9 in which a mode of entering the game ball into the profit slot is set in correspondence with the drive mode of the switching drive means.

According to the game machine DKK9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DKK6 to DKK8, the switching drive means can be effectively utilized.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. Switching driving means for switching the ball entering switching means to the second state when a specified number of balls have passed through the ball entrance while the ball entering switching means is in the first state, A game machine DK1 comprising: adjusting means configured to be able to adjust an excess ball entering the ball entrance based on a specified number.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DK1, the adjusting means can adjust the excessive entrance to the entrance, so that the profit given to the player due to the ball passing through the entrance fluctuates in a short time. However, it can be leveled for a long time.

It should be noted that the mode of adjusting the excess ball is not limited at all. For example, the entrance switching means may be adjusted so that an equivalent excess entrance can be expected every time based on a prescribed number of balls that can pass through the entrance during the first state. ) In contrast to the first excess ball that occurs when the first state is set at the timing, the second excess ball that is generated when the first state is set at the other (plural or singular) timing is reduced. , The first excess ball and the second excess ball may be adjusted so as to be in balance, and depending on whether the time period during which the ball input switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit game It is also possible that the number of occurrences of excess balls is distinguished and adjusted so that they are in balance.

The incoming ball switching means may be arranged in a single arrangement or in a plurality of arrangements.

The gaming machine DK1 includes a load applying means configured to apply a load toward the detecting means to a sphere arranged at a predetermined position on the upstream side of the detecting means in the process of the switching drive by the switching drive means. Game machine DK2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DK1, the ball arranged upstream of the detecting means can be easily detected by the detecting means by the action of the load applying means.

The number of balls to which the load is applied by the load applying means is not limited. For example, it may be one or plural.

In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the time of starting the switching drive, it is possible to switch between a permissible state that allows passage of the ball to the entrance and a regulation state that regulates passage of the ball after driving. A gaming machine DK3, which is provided with state switching means.

According to the gaming machine DK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass through the ball entrance regardless of the flow mode of the ball to the ball entrance or the operation speed of the ball entrance switching means. Since it can be regulated by the after-driving ball entering state switching means, it is possible to easily adjust the degree of excessive entering of the ball into the entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, the load applied from the ball to the incoming ball switching means is given in a direction along the direction in which the incoming ball switching means is driven during the switching drive. Machine DK4.

According to the gaming machine DK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress the problem that the load from the ball prevents the incoming ball switching means from changing to the second state. ..

In addition, as a mode of applying a load from the ball, for example, the incoming ball switching means is configured to be driven in a manner of dropping (dripping) downward by switching drive, and the own weight of the ball is applied to the incoming ball switching means. The case is illustrated.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. Switching drive means for switching and driving the incoming ball switching means to the second state when a prescribed number of balls have passed through the incoming ball opening while the incoming ball switching means is in the first state, After the switching drive by the switching drive means is started, a permissible state allowing passage of the ball to the ball entrance, and a driven post-entering ball state switching means capable of forming a regulation state restricting passage of the ball, A gaming machine D1 comprising:

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the after-driving ball entering state switching unit switches whether or not the ball can enter after the entrance port is closed by the switching driving unit, so that an extra ball can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls can be made uniform throughout the big hit game.

In the gaming machine D1, the ball entrance has a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the after-drive ball entrance state switching means forms the regulation state in the first ball entrance. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the allowable state is formed in the second entrance.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number depending on whether the ball passes through the first entrance or the second entrance. Since it can be switched whether or not the ball can be entered, it is possible to improve the attention of which entrance the opening switching means opens.

In the gaming machine D2, the first ball entrance has a drop hole on the front side of the opening, and from the front side of the opening of the first ball entrance when the ball switching means starts switching to the second state. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that the ball arranged on the upstream side is also dropped in the drop hole.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entrance, the ball drop hole is maintained while the entrance switching means maintains the second state. It can be dropped from the entrance and kept away from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent more than the specified number of balls from passing through the first ball entrance.

<Points where spheres join the storage channel from multiple winning openings>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. A housing means for housing a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance, and a ball housed in the housing means from the housing means based on the entrance ball switching means being switched to the second state. A gaming machine EK1 which is provided with a discharging means for discharging, and is configured to be able to switch the incoming ball switching means to the first state before the discharging operation by the discharging means is completed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, the ejecting action by the ejecting means can be completed with the ball left in the accommodating means remaining, so that the number of balls that can enter the entrance in each round is related. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in prize balls throughout the big hit game.

Further, since the sphere can be accommodated in the accommodating means for a period in which the state of the sphere switching means is switched a plurality of times, the number of spheres that can pass through the sphere entrance while the sphere switching means is maintained in the first state. More balls can be stored in the storage means. As a result, since it is possible to notify the guideline of the frequency of entering the ball, it is possible to show the player the gaming efficiency of the gaming machine currently playing.

The means for indicating the game efficiency is not limited at all. For example, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the number of balls to be launched (prize balls/number of balls to be launched) may be used, or each time the entrance switching means is in the first state, the number of consecutive entrances to the entrance may be increased. It may be an index indicating whether or not the ball is passed.

Note that the number of ball entrances, ball entrance switching means, and accommodating means is not limited to one, but may be plural. In this case, it is possible to provide entrance switching means and accommodating means corresponding to each entrance, and to change the status of each entrance switching means in order. You may comprise so that a state may change partially simultaneously.

In the gaming machine EK1, the gaming machine EK2 is configured such that whether or not the discharging action ends with the ball accommodated in the accommodating means left is adjustable by the manner of launching the ball.

According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine EK1, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the game in which the gaming ball is shot toward the entrance.

In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the ball entrance includes at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance join together. A game machine EK3 in which the accommodation means is formed by.

According to the gaming machine EK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the balls that have passed through the first entrance opening or the second entrance entrance merge inside the accommodation means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls that can pass through the second ball entrance can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the first ball entrance. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts accompanying this) can be made uniform throughout the game.

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. And a storage means for storing a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance, the ball entrance including at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the first ball entrance. Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the accommodating means is formed in such a manner that the balls that have passed through the second ball entrance merge.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance merge within the accommodating means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. The number of spheres that can pass through the second entrance slot can be changed in association with the number of spheres that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts accompanying this) can be made uniform throughout the game.

In the gaming machine E1, the number of spheres that can be accommodated in the accommodating means by passing through the first ball entrance and the accommodating by passing through the second ball entrance in the empty state of the housing means A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the number of balls that can be stored in the means is different.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance is different from the number of balls that can enter the second entrance. It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the entrance port of the player is opened.

In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first ball inlet is set to be smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second ball inlet, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls are discharged in a closed state of each ball inlet. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance, and the first entrance is opened during opening when the second entrance is opened a plurality of times. A gaming machine E3 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, a ball that has passed through the second entrance before opening the first entrance and a second entrance after opening the first entrance The passing ball can make the actual profit to the player different.

That is, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance before opening the first ball entrance, the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance is exceeded even if the ball passes through the second ball entrance. The amount is not discharged, and the number of balls after subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated in the first entrance, so that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the second entrance is the same as the number that can be accommodated in the first entrance. The player can only get the same profits as when the player passed the number of.

On the other hand, if after passing through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, if more balls than can be accommodated from the first entrance have passed through the second entrance, they will be deducted. Since it is not played, the player can obtain an additional profit.

The number of game balls that can be accommodated is set in various modes. For example, it can be performed by setting the length and thickness of the flow path in which the game balls are stored. Further, the change in the substantial profit given to the player is not limited to only the number of prize balls, and for example, the substantial profit given to the player may be changed depending on whether or not the ball can pass through a specific area. You can

<Points where the interference member extends>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. And an interfering means that is disposed in a downflow path of the ball that has passed through the ball entrance, and that can switch between an extended state capable of interfering with the ball and a retracted state not interfering with the ball. A gaming machine F1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the interference means is arranged in the downward path of the sphere that has passed through the ball entrance, so by maintaining the interference means in the bulged state, from the ball entrance to the interference means. The ball can be blocked in the path of, and more balls can be prevented from passing through the entrance. Thereby, the prize balls can be adjusted throughout the big hit game by the operation mode of the interference means.

The gaming machine F2 is provided with a stopping means for stopping the ball in front of the interference means in the retracted state of the interference means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, it is possible to change the interference means to the projecting state in a state where the ball is stopped in front of the interference means, so that the state of the interference means is changed in advance. The action can be hidden by the sphere compared to. Therefore, the operation can be made difficult to be noticed by the player.

In the gaming machine F2, the detention means is switched between a detention state in which the balls that have passed the detection means are detained and a passage state in which the balls that have passed the detection means are passed, and the switching mode of the detention means is changed. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the state of the interference means can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of state changes of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means, so that while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state, It is possible to change the timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means by a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of privilege from the number of stored items>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. , Provided with an operating means arranged in a downflow path of the ball passing through the ball entrance and capable of operating in a plurality of operating patterns, and changing profits obtainable by a player based on the operating pattern of the operating means A gaming machine FK1 characterized by being configured to be possible.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the special winning opening, so the attention to the downstream of the special winning opening may be reduced. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, the operating means is arranged on the downstream side of the ball entrance, and the profit obtainable to the player can be changed by the operation pattern of the operating means. The attention to the downstream side of can be improved.

A game machine FK1 characterized in that the game machine FK1 is provided with operation means that can be operated by a player, and the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the player operating the operation means.

According to the game machine FK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine FK1, the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the operation of the operation means by the player, so that the player's willingness to operate the operation means is improved. Can be made.

In the gaming machine FK2, a first benefit and a second benefit are set as a profit to be given to the player based on the game ball passing through the entrance, and the first benefit is set according to the operation mode of the operation means. An amusement machine FK3, characterized in that the mode of acquiring the privilege and the second privilege is changed.

According to the gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player directly changes depending on the operation mode of the operating means, so that the player's motivation for operating the operating means can be improved. it can.

The modes of the first privilege and the second privilege are not limited at all. For example, the first benefit may be set as payout of prize balls, the second benefit may be set as confirmation of a probability variation state after a jackpot game (as a V-probability variation gaming machine), or the second benefit may be determination of a jackpot. It may be set (as a small hit game in a 1 type and 2 type mixer).

The relationship between the first benefit and the second benefit is not limited at all. For example, it may have a large or small relationship, may have another property, or may have a contradictory relationship.

Here, for example, the profits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both payouts of prize balls, which are in a relationship of size, compared with the number of payout balls in the first benefit. When there are more payout balls in the 2 benefits, the profits given to the player in the 1st benefit and the 2nd benefit are both transitions to the jackpot game state, and compared to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st benefit. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

Further, as another characteristic, for example, while the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a transition to the jackpot gaming state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is a prize. In the case of a payout of a ball, or while the profit given to the player in the first benefit is an indication of the gaming state, the payout award ball in which the profit given to the player in the second benefit is maximized And the like are exemplified.

In addition, as a conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). Information), the profit given to the player in the second benefit is the state of the game after the jackpot game is over (or information relating to the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). For example, the case of destruction is exemplified.

<Points when trying to pass "passing" without entering the entrance. Difference from "Entering Ball">
A game area in which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area can pass, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the entrance A game machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. In, in the above, provided is an operating means arranged in the downflow path of the ball that has passed through the ball entrance and capable of operating in a plurality of operating patterns, and the profit obtainable by the player based on the operating pattern of the operating means is obtained. A game machine FKK1 which is configured to be changeable, wherein a game ball passes through the ball entrance in the second state of the ball entrance switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round depends on the situation on the upstream side of the special winning opening and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. However, there is a problem that the player's line of sight is concentrated and the entire game board surface cannot be effectively utilized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FKK1, the operating means is arranged on the downstream side of the entrance, and the profit obtainable to the player can be changed by the operation pattern of the operating means. The attention to the downstream side of can be improved.

In addition, the game ball that has passed through the ball entrance without entering the ball will affect the profit that can be obtained by the player, so that the player's attention to the ball can be improved. ..

In addition, when a game ball is set to be given to the player by the action of the game ball passing through the ball entrance, It is possible to construct a gaming property that expects a game ball to pass without entering the mouth. As a result, the attention of the area on the downstream side of the entrance can be improved.

In the gaming machine FKK1, the after-passage entrance port in which the game ball that has passed through the above-mentioned entrance port is arranged to be able to enter, and the ball that flows down from the upstream side of the after-passage entrance port A post-passage ball entrance switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the post-passage entrance port and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the post-passage entrance port cannot be guided to the post-passage entrance port, The gaming machine FKK2, wherein the after-entry ball input switching means is configured to be able to shorten the interval for switching to the first state as the game ball enters the ball inlet.

According to the gaming machine FKK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine FKK1, whether or not a game ball enters the entrance will affect whether or not the ball enters the entrance after passing. , The attention to the entrance can be improved.

In the gaming machine FKK1 or FKK2, provided with a lottery entry slot that is arranged upstream of the entry slot and can start a predetermined lottery with the entry of the game ball, depending on the lottery result of the lottery entry slot. A game machine FKK3, wherein a pattern in which the state of the entrance switching means is switched is selected.

According to the gaming machine FKK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine FKK1 or FKK2, the switching of the state of the ball entrance switching means occurs based on the pattern selected by entering the lottery entrance. That is, the entry of the game ball into the lottery entrance is a condition for changing the state of the entry switching means, so that the area where the player's attention is improved can be expanded to the lottery entrance.

In the gaming machine FKK3, the gaming ball that has entered the lottery entry ball entrance is configured to be able to enter the entry ball entrance after the passage.

According to the game machine FKK4, in addition to the effect of the game machine FKK3, the role of conditioning the state change of the game entrance switching means in the game ball entering the entrance, and the entrance into the entrance after passing In this case, the player can share the role of giving a predetermined profit to the player. Thereby, the attention of the game ball can be improved.

The gaming machine FKK5 according to any one of the gaming machines FKK1 to FKK4, wherein the entry switching means has a plurality of rules for switching between the first state and the second state.

According to the gaming machine FKK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines FKK1 to FKK4, attention to the entry switching means can be improved.

In addition, as a plurality of prepared rules, for example, a rule in which the length of the period maintained in the first state is different, or a rule in which the state change start timing after the game ball starts flowing down toward the entrance switching means is different. Are exemplified.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether to win a V prize from the attacker's actions>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth is switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detection means for detecting the entrance into the entrance, and the entrance. A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. In a gaming machine provided with a profit switching means that can be switched with, in a mode of operation in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, a case where a ball can pass through the profit giving means, and the profit A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it can be switched between a case where a ball cannot pass through the giving means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through the special winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution. There is a game machine that does this (for example, see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening during the period when the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route.In the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, the case where the ball can pass the profit giving means and the case where the ball passes the profit giving means. Since it can be switched to the case where it is impossible, there is no interruption of the ball entering the entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball moving toward the entrance.

The gaming machine G1 is provided with a stopping means which is arranged upstream of the profit switching means and which is switched between a stopped state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is passed. , The incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stopping means is switched from the stationary state to the passing state, and the ball flowing down to the downstream of the stationary means is the profit switching. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the ball passing through the ball entrance is once stopped by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball is profitable at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent reaching the switching means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing, no matter how the ball passes through the ball entrance while the entrance switching means is in the first state. it can.

The gaming machine G2 is provided with period changing means for changing the period during which the ball passing through the stopping means and flowing down after changing the stopping means to the passing state can reach the profit switching means. Gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period changing means changes the period during which the ball can reach the profit switching means after the ball passes through the stopping means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game playability and improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

Incidentally, the period changing means may be a means for changing the flow-down velocity of the ball passing through the stopping means, or a means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the ball starts to flow down, It may be a means for changing the number of balls held in the stopping means.

In the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so that the number of balls retained in the retaining means can be switched according to the profit given to the player.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to predict the profit to be given to the player by the number of balls retained in the retaining means, and therefore attention to the balls retained in the retaining means. Power can be improved.

The means for switching the number of balls retained by the retaining means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be retained in the retaining means can be changed by a combination of a period in which the retaining means is in the passing state and a period in which the entry switching means is in the first state immediately after that.

That is, for example, when the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened and then immediately after that, the period during which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened, Since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means even if no new balls enter from the entrance.

On the other hand, if the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state is set to be sufficiently long and then the period during which the incoming ball switching means is set to the first state is extremely shortened immediately thereafter, among the balls that are stopped in the stopping means, In addition to the majority of the balls flowing downstream of the stopping means, no new balls enter from the entrance, which means that almost no balls are stopping at the stopping means.

In this way, by changing the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period during which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state immediately after that, the ball is stopped at the stopping means regardless of the firing mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the entrance switching means is provided with setting means for selecting and setting a closing maintenance period in which the second state is maintained in a plurality of types, and a predetermined period from the end point of the closing maintenance period. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a lapse of time.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods during which the incoming ball switching means maintains the second state. Since the period from the passage of the profit switching means to the switching of the profit switching means to the first state is formed by a plurality of types, even if the number of balls held in the stopping means is the same, the balls pass the profit giving means. It is possible to control whether to perform or not to pass. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the attention to the flow of the ball.

It should be noted that, for example, a period during which the incoming-ball switching means is maintained in the first state for a long enough period so that a prescribed number of balls can pass through the incoming-ball entrance, and immediately after that, the incoming-ball switching means is maintained in the second state. When the setting means selects the closed maintaining period in a manner of making it extremely short (shorter than the ball passing through the stopping means reaching the profit switching means), immediately after that, the incoming ball switching means is in the first state. By changing the state of the profit switching means from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set the period from when the retention means is in the passing state to when the profit switching means is in the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the staying means passes through the profit giving means. This makes it possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not a ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit giving means, regardless of the number of balls that stop at the stopping means and the mode (for example, timing) of stopping.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the entrance switching means is not a first operation caused by a specified number of balls entering the entrance, but a second operation caused by a lapse of a specified time. As described above, the gaming machine G6 is provided with an intentional selection means for intentionally selecting.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the operation of the intentional selection means limits the switching operation of the entrance switching means to the operation at a preset time, Randomness of switching depending on the passage mode of the ball at the entrance can be eliminated. Accordingly, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which the ball is not allowed to enter while the profit switching means is in the first state.

In addition, as the intentional selection means, it is exemplified that a state in which the balls do not pass through the entrance is achieved by passing less than the specified number of balls. This can be realized by intentionally blocking (not allowing) the ball on the way through the entrance.

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth is switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detection means for detecting the entrance into the entrance, and the entrance. A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. In the gaming machine provided with the profit switching means switched by, the flow-down mode determination means for determining whether the flow-down mode of the sphere to the profit giving means is normal, and the notification based on the determination result by the flow-down mode determination means A gaming machine GK1 comprising: a notifying means for performing.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through the special winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution. There is a game machine that does this (for example, see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that a large number of players try to obtain unfair profits due to fraudulent acts that exert a load (magnetic force or shock) on the ball before reaching the distribution unit. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GK1, when an abnormality is determined, the informing means informs of it, so that it is possible to suppress fraud. That is, even if the flow of the ball is illegally obstructed, there is a high possibility that the illegal profit will not be obtained by the notification, so a person who tries to illegally profit (hereinafter referred to as “cheating person” or (It is also called an “illegal person”).

The mode of determining the abnormality is not limited in any way. For example, it is possible to set a timing at which the balls are completely discharged after the profit switching means is switched to the first state, and the notification is made when the discharging of the balls is not detected even at the timing. In this case, since the notification can be given before the ball passes through the profit switching means, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction from the player.

In the gaming machine GK1, the downflow mode determination means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged between the ball entrance and the profit giving means.

According to the gaming machine GK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether or not the flow-down mode of the ball is abnormal regardless of how much the gaming ball is accumulated between the entrance and the profit giving means. it can.

In the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, the gaming machine GK3 is provided with an arrangement suppressing means for suppressing a change in the arrangement of the balls on the upstream side of the profit giving means after the informing means has executed the notification.

According to the gaming machine GK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, it is possible to suppress the change in the arrangement of the balls by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when the game is restarted when an unexpected error occurs. The loss can be minimized.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize will be won based on the attacker's actions, and there is a duck>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth is switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detection means for detecting the entrance into the entrance, and the entrance. A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. A gaming machine comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched with the game machine H1, wherein the manner in which the balls reach the profit switching means can be changed by the operation mode of the incoming ball switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through the special winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution. There is a game machine that does this (for example, see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening during the period when the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route.In the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching unit can be changed by the operation mode of the ball input switching unit while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control how the sphere reaches the profit switching means.

In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the number of balls related to the time when the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine H1, the player can see how the balls are guided to the profit switching means from the length that the incoming ball switching means is maintained in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the entrance switching means.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a start state is formed in which the ball transfer to the profit switching means is started while the entrance switching means is being switched from the first state to the second state. Amusement machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means for the first time in the starting state, the operation of the entrance switching means is stopped immediately before the starting state, Since it is possible to set the state to the first state again, it is possible to form a game in which the start of the operation from the first state does not necessarily mean that the ball transfer to the profit switching means is started. As a result, it becomes necessary to directly confirm whether or not the sphere reaches the profit switching means, so that attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth is switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detection means for detecting the entrance into the entrance, and the entrance. A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. In the gaming machine including the profit switching means that can be switched by, the state changing means is configured so that the entrance switching means is in a state in which the state can be changed by detecting passage of a ball, and the state changing means. The game machine HK1 is configured so that the number of balls that can be sent to the profit switching means can be switched based on the passing frequency of the balls to the game.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through the special winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution. There is a game machine that does this (for example, see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening during the period when the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route.In the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine HK1, since the number of balls that can be sent to the profit switching means can be switched based on the frequency of passage of the balls to the state changing means, a mode in which the balls enter the profit switching means Can be changed. This can improve the attention to the behavior of the sphere that has passed through the entrance.

In the gaming machine HK1, when the frequency of entering the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency, an upper limit value of the number of balls sent to the profit switching means is set for a predetermined period. Machine HK2.

According to the gaming machine HK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HK1, it is possible to escape from the gaming property that the more the ball is passed through the state changing means, the better.

In the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the gaming machine HK3 is configured to be able to send to the profit switching means, together with the balls that have passed through the ball entrance when the ball entrance switching means is opened and closed a plurality of times. ..

According to the gaming machine HK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, it is possible to correlate the entrance to the entrance opening when the entrance switching means is opened and closed a plurality of times with the sending mode to the entrance switching means. Therefore, it is possible to increase variations of the pitching mode as compared with the case where the pitching mode for the pitching switching unit is independent by opening and closing the pitching switching unit once.

The number of times the entrance switching means is opened and closed is not limited in any way. For example, it may be counted by the number of operations of the entrance switching means, or may be counted by the number of occurrences of a combination of operations of the entrance switching means (for example, a preset operation pattern such as a small hit game).

Operation means that can be operated by the player, a storage state in which the balls entered in the entrance switching means are temporarily stored, and a passing state in which the storage of the balls is released and the balls can flow down toward the profit giving means. A gaming machine HP1 comprising: a temporary storage means that can be switched by and the state of the temporary storage means can be switched by operating the operating means.

According to the gaming machine HP1, the player can switch the state of the temporary storage means at any timing, so that the player's motivation to participate in the operation of the operating means can be increased.

In the gaming machine HP1, the gaming machine HP2 is characterized in that the profit to be given to the player is selected from the first benefit or the second benefit according to the operation timing of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine HP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine HP1, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operating means.

The relationship between the first benefit and the second benefit is not limited at all. For example, it may have a large or small relationship, may have another property, or may have a contradictory relationship.

Here, for example, the profits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both payouts of prize balls, which are in a relationship of size, compared with the number of payout balls in the first benefit. When there are more payout balls in the 2 benefits, the profits given to the player in the 1st benefit and the 2nd benefit are both transitions to the jackpot game state, and compared to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st benefit. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

Further, as another characteristic, for example, while the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a transition to the jackpot gaming state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is a prize. In the case of a payout of a ball, or while the profit given to the player in the first benefit is an indication of the gaming state, the payout award ball in which the profit given to the player in the second benefit is maximized And the like are exemplified.

In addition, as a conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). Information), the profit given to the player in the second benefit is the state of the game after the jackpot game is over (or information relating to the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). For example, the case of destruction is exemplified.

In the gaming machine HP2, based on the selection of the first privilege, passage of the ball in the entrance is restricted when the entrance switching means is in the first state. Gaming machine HP3.

According to the gaming machine HP3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HP2, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the entrance regardless of the state of the entrance switching means, based on the selection of the first privilege. Therefore, when the player does not want the ball to pass through the entrance, it is not necessary to temporarily stop the firing of the ball at the timing (so-called “stop hitting”). it can. In this case, the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the entrance switching means, so that the desired game can be executed smoothly.

In the gaming machine HP3, the gaming machine HP4 is controlled so that the game can be continued regardless of the detection time of the ball by the detecting means, based on the selection of the first privilege.

According to the gaming machine HP4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HP3, by blocking the ball in the detecting means, it is possible to realize the gaming property of restricting the incoming ball.

<Technical idea to secure the shortest time of R game longer than expected from the firing interval>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball is provided with a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. The flow-down mode changing means for changing the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the upstream side of the ball entrance is provided, and the flow-down mode changing means is configured to be able to change the ball entrance interval to the ball entrance according to a predetermined rule. Characteristic game machine IKK1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a ball shot to a special winning opening is guided to the special winning opening with almost no ball spill (see, for example, JP-A-2015-177858). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to balance with other gaming machines, a large amount of award balls can be paid out in a short time in the jackpot game, but the progress of the normal game is set to be slow. Has been done. For example, by increasing the interval at which the game balls are fired, the number of times the lottery is drawn is reduced, and the time until a jackpot is won is lengthened.

The interval at which the game balls are fired is directly linked to the ball exit speed in the jackpot game. That is, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to balance the big hit game with a game different from the big hit game in the normal state or the probability variation state, the firing interval of the game ball may be determined, and in that case, There was a problem that the degree of freedom in setting the interval at which the game balls were fired was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine IKK1, since the flow-down mode changing means changes the pitching interval into the ball entrance, the presence or absence of the flow-down mode changing means is set for each ball entrance, or a predetermined rule is set. By adjusting or the like, it is possible to set a ball entry mode (speed, interval) for each ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the interval at which the game balls are fired.

In the gaming machine IKK1, the flow-down mode changing means includes contact means arranged so as to be capable of contacting the game ball, and the contact means is provided while the ball input switching means maintains the first state. A game machine IKK2, which is configured at a position different from a flow path of a game ball entering the ball entrance.

According to the game machine IKK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine IKK1, the contact means does not interfere with the game ball reaching the entrance in the first state of the entrance switching means, so that the entrance of the game ball is reached. The change in the ball entry interval can be limited to the case where the ball entry switching means is switched to the second state.

In the gaming machine IKK1 or IKK2, the flow-down mode changing means is provided with a ball entrance prevention means configured to prevent a game ball entering the ball entrance by the game ball entering the ball entrance. A game machine IKK3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine IKK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IKK1 or IKK2, the entrance preventing means is configured to prevent the entrance to the entrance by using the game ball entering the entrance. Therefore, the timing at which the ball is prevented from entering the entrance can be associated with the manner of entering the entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines IKK1 to IKK3, the flow-down mode changing means is configured to be able to extend a pitching interval into the ball entrance as compared with a ball firing interval. ..

According to the gaming machine IKK4, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines IKK1 to IKK3, while the interval between the ball entrances to the ball entrances arranged downstream of the flow-down mode changing means is extended, other ball entrances It is possible to prevent the interval of entering the ball from being extended. As a result, for example, while maintaining a short ball entrance interval to the starting opening, to a ball entrance (eg, a large winning opening) arranged downstream of the downflow mode changing means as compared with the ball entering interval to the starting opening. Since the prize winning interval can be extended, it becomes easy to configure a gaming machine that increases the number of prize balls in one jackpot game while shortening the interval at which the special symbol lottery is executed.

In the gaming machine IKK4, the flow-down mode changing means is provided with a second ball inlet that is a ball that flows down the game area and does not enter the ball inlet. Playing machine IKK5.

According to the gaming machine IKK5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine IKK4, it is possible to reduce the frequency of entering the second entrance by causing the second entrance. Therefore, the flow-down mode changing means can be configured by using the second ball inlet which is usually arranged in the game area, and the member can be used in common.

In the gaming machine IKK5, the flow-down mode changing means changes a pitching interval into the ball entrance according to a predetermined rule regardless of the number of balls entering the second ball entrance. ..

According to the gaming machine IKK6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IKK5, it is possible to prevent the change mode of the pitch of the ball entering the ball entrance from changing due to a slight difference in the number of balls entering the second ball entrance. You can

In the gaming machine IKK5, the flow path in which the ball entering the ball entrance flows down and the flow path in which the ball entering the second ball entrance flows down are configured to join together. Game machine IKK7 to be.

According to the gaming machine IKK7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IKK5, the flow passages are configured to join together, so that the second ball entrance mode and the ball entrance mode can be achieved. Can be associated. Thereby, a complicated game play can be configured.

<Technical ideas related to playability of falling through gates>
A game area in which a game ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance. The game ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance is provided with a ball entrance switching means that can be switched to a second state in which the game ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and the game state can be changed by entering the game ball. The variable ball entering means configured as described above, the first state in which the game ball can enter the variable ball entering means, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entering means can be changed in state. A game machine J1 characterized by comprising a configured second switching means, wherein the second switching means is configured to be capable of changing the state in accordance with the operation of the incoming ball switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. By opening and closing the ball for a short time, it can be switched according to each round to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round and improve the attention to the big winning opening. (For example, see JP-A-2005-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the special winning opening has been recognized as a target for only the game ball to enter, so there is a problem that the degree of improving the attention of the player may be insufficient. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the state of the second switching means for switching between allowing and not allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball means related to the change of the game state is Since it is configured to change in response to the operation of the switching means, the operation of the entrance switching means arranged around the entrance is related to the change in the game state. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the means.

In the gaming machine J1, the incoming ball switching means is capable of changing states in a plurality of modes, and the second switching means is capable of changing states in different modes corresponding to the mode of changing states of the incoming ball switching means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J1, if the state change occurs regardless of the state change mode of the incoming ball switching means, the second switching means changes the state, The attention to the switching means can be improved.

It should be noted that various modes are exemplified as the mode of changing the state of the incoming ball switching means. For example, if the length maintained in a predetermined state is different (long or short), the state change interval is different, the number of state changes is different, or until the state change starts (until end). A mode in which the time is different and a combination thereof are exemplified.

In the gaming machine J2, the variable ball entrance means comprises a plurality of variable ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and the second switching means are arranged corresponding to the variable ball entrances. A gaming machine J3, characterized in that the switching member changes its state in response to execution of a different state change as the state change of the ball entrance switching means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, it is possible to improve the attention to the incoming ball switching means.

In the gaming machine J3, the plurality of variable ball entrances include at least a disadvantageous side variable ball entrance that is configured so that the game state can be changed to a side that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball enters. Characteristic game machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, a disadvantageous side variable entrance is provided, so that when the player enters the variable entrance, the game state changes to the advantage side for the player. Compared with, it is possible to improve the attention to the variable entrance.

In the gaming machine J4, the plurality of variable ball entrances are provided with at least an advantageous side variable ball entrance that is configured so that a game state can be changed to an advantageous side for a player by entering a game ball. When the game ball enters both the advantageous side variable entrance and the disadvantage side variable entrance, the change in the game state is the variable entrance on the side where the game ball entered later in the predetermined period. A gaming machine J5 that is compatible with.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J4, it is possible to obscure the direction of change in the gaming state due to the entry of the gaming ball into the variable entry slot until the end of the predetermined period. The attention to the variable entrance can be maintained during the period.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the predetermined period. For example, if it is a jackpot game, it may be a period of a predetermined round game R or a period until the end of the ending effect.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, a driving means is provided, and the driving means is also used as the incoming ball switching means and the second switching means.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the control mode of the driving means can be simplified.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 In the gaming machine Z1, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 In the gaming machine Z2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 In the gaming machine Z3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board 81 Third symbol display device (part of the notification means, part of the operation instruction means)
110 main controller (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selecting means, part of downflow mode determining means, part of fixed delay preventing means, adjusting means Part of)
300 operation buttons (operation means)
640 2nd entrance (part of entrance, start opening, part of state changing means, lottery entrance)
640a Electric accessory (a part of entrance switching means)
1000a First specific winning opening (part of the winning entrance, first winning entrance)
1140 Projection (part of spacing maintaining means, projection)
1150 Discharge port (part of ball entrance prevention means, part of number change means)
1210 Thin plate member (visualization obstruction means)
1231 Storage channel (part of ball entrance preventing means, part of number changing means, part of post-driving ball entering state switching means, housing means, discharge path, adjusting means)
1231a Guide surface (a part of spacing maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of gap maintaining means, rolling discharge plate portion)
1235 Projection (part of the spacing maintaining means, projection)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Open/close plate (part of the entrance switching means)
1310 Plate (ascending means)
1331 Ball entry prevention unit (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 regulating member (part of ball entrance preventing means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, staying means, part of arrangement suppressing means, part of adjusting means, part of post-passing ball entering switching means )
2251 Second storage flow path (part of ball entrance preventing means, part of number changing means, part of post-driving ball entering state switching means, accommodating means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a Second specific winning opening (part of the entrance, second entrance)
2840 Slide plate (a part of entrance switching means)
3181 Additional prize hole (relief entrance hole)
3182 Curved extension plate (rising control means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b Terminal surface (part of the drop hole)
4830 Specified area (part of profit giving means, right generation entrance)
4850 Sorting device (profit switching means, part of operating means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit-giving means)
5900 Ball exit adjusting device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means, part of adjusting means, part of post-driving entrance state switching means, part of operating means, part of arrangement suppressing means)
7260 2nd fall delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Open/close plate (a part of entrance switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening/closing member (part of entrance switching means, part of opening state switching means, part of adjusting means, part of load applying means, part of post-driving entrance state switching means)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit giving means, part of conditional profit giving means)
10112a Detection sensor (a part of detection means)
10180 Intermediate discharge device (part of operation means, part of entrance switching means)
11183 Second additional winning opening (part of entrance)
11190 Opening/closing means (a part of entrance state switching means after driving)
12250 Drop delay plate (part of adjusting means, load applying means)
13811 First discharge path sensor (part of profit entrance, part of variable entrance means, part of variable entrance, variable entrance on advantageous side)
13813 Third discharge route sensor (part of profit entrance, part of variable entrance means, part of variable entrance, disadvantageous side variable entrance)
13840 First switching device (part of second switching means, part of switching member)
13850 Second switching device (part of second switching means, part of switching member)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a ball entry switching unit is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the ball entrance in a predetermined period (Patent Document 1).

[Patent Document 1] JP-A-2005-181574

However, the above-mentioned conventional game machine has a problem that there is room for improvement regarding the switching of the state of the entrance switching means .

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the switching of the state of the incoming ball switching means .

To achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a game area in which the ball flows down, a game area in which the ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball entrance Incoming ball switching means for switching between a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side can be guided to the ball entrance and a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance cannot be guided to the ball entrance. And a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance, and a space constructing means for forming a predetermined space in which a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance can exist at the same time. And a discharging means capable of discharging a sphere existing in the predetermined space from the predetermined space when the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state, and the sphere exists in the predetermined space. In this state, the incoming ball switching means can be switched to the first state .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to improve the switching of the state of the entry switching means .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of a first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the IX-IX line of FIG. It is a front view of a first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XI-XI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XII-XII line of FIG. 11A and 11B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along line XII-XII of FIG. 10. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XIX-XIX line of FIG. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 20B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning device. 21A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 21B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line XXIb-XXIb of FIG. 21A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a line XXId-XXId of Drawing 21 (c). (A) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of ROM in a main control unit, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter and the big hit classification in a special symbol. And, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth in the 1st operation pattern, and (b) is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth in a 2nd operation pattern. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening in the third operation pattern. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. 25. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XXVIII-XXVIII line of Drawing 27 (c). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter and the big hit classification in a special symbol. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth in the 4th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the 1st specific prize hole in a 5th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning a prize mouth. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 3rd embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the XXXII-XXXII line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a front cover plate. 31A to 31C are sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. 31. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of a 1st variable winning a prize device, (c) is a partial sectional view of a 1st variable winning a prize device in line XXXVc-XXXVc of Drawing 35 (b). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the falling mode of the ball which reached the 1st variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the first variable winning device. It is a front view of the game board in 4th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a game board. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter and the big hit classification in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the specific area|region in a 6th operation pattern, (b) is the timekeeping of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and a specific area in a 7th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. (A) is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the specific area|region in an 8th operation pattern, (b) is the timekeeping of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and a specific area|region in a 9th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the specific area in a 10th operation pattern. It is a partial front view of the game board in the fifth embodiment. It is a partial rear view of the game board. 45A and 45B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device taken along the line XLVI-XLVI of FIG. 45. (A) to (c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device. (A) And (b) is a partial rear view of the first variable winning device. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter and the big hit classification in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth in the 11th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specific winning a prize mouth and the 1st specific prize hole in a 12th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of 2 specific winning a prize mouth. It is a partial front view of the game board in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along the line LII-LII of FIG. 51. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st variable winning a prize device. (A) is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the 1st specific winning opening and the specific area|region in a 13th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st specific winning opening and the timekeeping of a specific area in a 14th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change. It is a rear perspective view of the covering front plate in a 7th embodiment. It is a top view of a first variable winning device. FIG. 36 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device, taken along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35A and 35B are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device, taken along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 8th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) is a rear view of a 1st variable winning a prize device, (b) is a sectional view of a 1st variable winning a prize device in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of Drawing 63 (a), (c) is a 1st. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in line LXIIId-LXIIId of Drawing 63 (c). 64A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 64B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, and (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in line LXIVd-LXIVd of Drawing 64 (c). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member, the opening/closing plate, the auxiliary opening/closing member, and the regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 9th embodiment. It is a front view of a first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. 70A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 70B is a sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a line LXXd-LXXd of Drawing 70 (c). 71A is a rear view of the first variable winning device, FIG. 71B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71A, and FIG. It is a rear view of a variable winning a prize device, (d) is a sectional view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a line LXXId-LXXId of Drawing 71 (c). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member, the opening/closing plate, the auxiliary opening/closing member, and the regulating member. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member, the opening/closing plate, the auxiliary opening/closing member, and the regulating member. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid of the drive device, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member, the opening/closing plate, the auxiliary opening/closing member, and the regulating member. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in a 10th embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (d) is a diagram showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening and a state change of the movable member in the round game R. It is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in an 11th embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the LXXX-LXXX line of FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a front cover plate. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the protruding ribs, the opening/closing means, and the second additional winning opening, which schematically show the arrangement of the protruding ribs, the opening/closing means, and the second additional winning opening. (A) And (b) is a front view of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during the notice production performed in the round before the timing production (operation production) is executed, and (b) is a timing production (operation production). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content inside. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during timing production (operation production). (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the 5th round, (b) is during timing effect (operation effect) It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content in timing effect (operation effect). (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which notifies with the 3rd symbol display device that the round game of the 6th round is being performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of a main control apparatus, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 1st hit classification selection table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and the interference member operation scenario table. Is. (A) is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in a 15th operation pattern, and (b) is a 1st specific winning a prize mouth, interference in a 16th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the member and the specific area. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in a 17th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, interference in an 18th operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the member and the specific area. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st specific winning opening, the interference member, and the specific area|region in a 19th operation pattern. (A) is a figure showing the time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, an interference member, and a specific field in a 20th operation pattern, and (b) is the 1st specific winning a prize mouth, interference in a 21st operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of a member and a specific field. It is a model diagram explaining the counter etc. which are provided in RAM of the main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a main controller. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of a change display data table among display data tables. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process. 7 is a flowchart showing a state command setting process. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting process. It is a flow chart which shows main processing. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of big hit operation setting processing. 6 is a flowchart showing the contents of opening/closing processing. 6 is a flowchart showing the contents of ending processing. It is a flowchart showing the content of the notification process. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of winning a prize processing. 6 is a flowchart showing the content of abnormality processing. It is a flow chart which shows storage control processing. 6 is a flowchart showing the content of an upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of an upper limit value setting process 2 of the operation counter. It is a flow chart which showed the contents of storage valve operation processing. It is a flowchart showing a V winning process. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a hit related process. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing during the big hit. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of production round command setting processing for display. 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a storage state monitoring process. It is the flowchart which showed the lamp output process. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of button input supervisory/production process. It is a flow chart which shows sphere number confirmation processing. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table 202b in the 2nd control example. (A) is the figure which showed the timekeeping change of the opening/closing board and auxiliary opening/closing member in a 22nd operation pattern, (b) showed the timekeeping change of the opening/closing board and auxiliary opening/closing member in a 23rd operation pattern. It is a figure and (c) is a figure showing a time change of an opening-and-closing plate and an auxiliary opening-and-closing member in a 24th operation pattern. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content which notifies with the 3rd symbol display device that the round game of the 6th round is being performed. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example. (A) to (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a timekeeping change of an opening/closing plate, a solenoid and a distribution device in a small hit A and a timekeeping change of an opening/closing plate, a solenoid and a distribution device in a small hit B. (A) And (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content of a 3rd symbol display device. It is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the game state, the type of special symbol, the variation time, the hold type. (A) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the jackpot game in the fourth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the start round selection table that defines the discharge mode at the end of the start round It is a figure, (c) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the game of the production round, (d) is a schematic content of the post-production game round selection table that defines the discharge mode at the end of the post-production game round. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the electrical state of a solenoid, a detection sensor, and a specific area, and the change of the display of the 3rd symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device from the start of the production round to the start of the post-production gaming round in display example 1 in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device from the start of the production round to the start of the post-production gaming round in display example 1 in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of an attention production operation difficulty level switching table and a discrimination display switching table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device from the start of a production round to the start of a game round after production in a display example 2 in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of the basic production of a V winning round in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of a V winning round in time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device of a V winning round in time series. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM in the MPU of the main control unit in this control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the opening-closing-plate operation scenario storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the opening-closing-plate operation scenario table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of a main controller. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the MPU of the audio lamp control device in the present control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM in the present control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus after a starting process. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot control processing. It is a flowchart showing a winning process. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of setting value selection setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a V winning process. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process. It is a flow chart which shows hit related processing 2. It is the flowchart which shows the production start flag setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production change processing. It is the flowchart which shows the contents of production round indicatory feature setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of attention production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of operation judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of V display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the display switching process for halfway closing. It is a front view of the game board of 12th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a front cover plate. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the change of arrangement|positioning of the sphere which flows down the upper surface of an opening/closing plate. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of ROM in MPU of the main control apparatus in the 5th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st hit classification selection table. Is. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the opening-closing-plate operation scenario storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the content of an opening-closing-plate operation scenario table typically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in the jackpot game which the 1st variable winning device operates with a 25th operation pattern in a time series. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the display content of the 3rd symbol display device in the jackpot game which the 1st variable winning device operates with an operation pattern similar to a 3rd operation pattern in time series. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of ROM of MPU of an audio lamp control device, (b) is a block diagram which shows the content of RAM. It is a flow chart which shows main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production change processing 3. It is a flowchart which shows a sub-round switching process. It is a flowchart showing a sub-round effect process. It is a front view of the game board of 13th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is a rear view of the first variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st variable winning a prize device in the CXCIV-CXCIV line of FIG.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 23, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape and an outer frame 11 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by flowing a ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface that projects toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress, or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, a display lamp 34, which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs, is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the player turns the operation handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the turning operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby a ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails and a windmill for ball guide, rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first prize. It is configured by assembling a ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a first variable winning device 1000, a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. (See 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structural bodies arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is located inside the outer rail 62 similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1 ). A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70 made of resin connecting between the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and is bounced back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of special symbols (first symbol) is carried out by the fact that there is a winning in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball enters the normal entrance 67. When passing, the lottery for the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol that is performed for the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as a probability variation state of the special symbol), For example, it is determined with a probability of 1/60 that the special symbol is a big hit. For convenience of explanation, a lottery for special symbols performed for entering the first inlet 64 will be referred to as "lottery for special symbol 1", and will be performed for entering the second inlet 640. The lottery of the special symbol which is referred to is called "lottery of special symbol 2".

When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won). The operation to be released is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

In addition, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, six types of “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot a”, “jackpot b”, and “jackpot c” are provided (FIG. 22). reference). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and is configured to change the number of balls to the first variable winning device 1000.

When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances depends on the type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display according to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

In the lottery for ordinary symbols (second symbol), it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbols are hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes easy. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily selected by lottery.

Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next regular symbol is drawn and the variable display according to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

In the present embodiment, as a value added after the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state (high-probability state) is given from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, and the special symbol lottery After 100 times, the normal state is set.

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probability variation state of the special symbol is configured to end according to the number of times the special symbol is drawn, The jackpot machine 10 is not limited to, but, for example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot a described later), after the jackpot ends and until the next jackpot. It may be possible to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol (during a change in the special symbol). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c described later), the special symbol lottery is configured to be in a time saving state until the lottery is completed 100 times.

In addition, the number of times of special symbol lottery to which the probability variation state (high probability state) of the above-mentioned special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

Further, the number of times the special symbols are drawn in the time saving state of the above-mentioned normal symbols is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 5 times.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol in the present embodiment (during the change of the special symbol) includes the state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) increases and the ball easily wins the second entrance 640. .. On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" means a time when the special symbol is not in the probability change, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than during the probability change of the special symbol.

Also, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during time saving) refers to a state of a game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily wins the second ball entrance 640. In addition, the normal state refers to a state of a game that is neither during a special symbol's probability change nor during normal symbol time saving (a state in which the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) are not up).

During the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, not only the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is the normal state. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the sphere easily enters the second entrance 640. That is, the lottery for special symbols is facilitated.

In addition, during the sudden change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time. The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in the case of hitting a normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened is not changed, and the normal symbol ( Only the winning probability of (second pattern) may be configured to be increased as compared with the normal state.

The first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the lower left side in the front view of the game area (lower left side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the special symbol lottery performed along with the entry (starting winning) into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is being executed by a lighting state. By performing a variable display, as a stop symbol after the variation ends, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64 Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of balls is reserved up to four times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of holdings is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, The special design (first design) according to the big hit a, big hit b, big hit c) is shown.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is used as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display device 37, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") for performing variable display, and a second symbol is variably displayed by the passage of a ball through a normal entrance 67 (through gate) as a trigger. The second symbol display device 83 configured by the LED is provided. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display ends. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

For example, if the special symbol lottery results are "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit b", and "big hit c", even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" were added. A variable display in which the main symbols are aligned is displayed. On the other hand, if it is a "big hit A" or "big hit a", then one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including all odd numbers The variable display in which the main symbols to which is added are aligned is displayed. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment, a variable display in which the main symbols having the same number are not arranged is displayed.

Next, the display (right-handed navigation) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and that prompts the player to hit the ball at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 will be described.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed to a certain state or the normal symbol is shortened, so that the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting (right hitting), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the jackpot is achieved by the special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the fact that the ball has entered the second inlet port 640, the first inlet port 64 Compared to the case where the special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 1) is performed based on the fact that the ball is hit, the jackpot (maximum jackpot a) is likely to be the largest profit. Therefore, in the probability changing state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if the special symbol is changed to the probable state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the ball cannot be entered into the second entrance 640 unless the player makes a right hit, so the special The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, by displaying a specific image (right-hand navigation), the player can make the probability variation state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol. It is configured so that the benefits of becoming

In the right-handed navigation, the character "Aim for the right!!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying these characters and the arrow, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to surely make the player obtain the benefit of the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be right-handed, even though it is not a period in which the player should hit the ball (right-handed) to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of. More specifically, in a normal state (a state in which the special symbol is neither the probability changing state nor the normal symbol time saving state), it is displayed when it is determined that the player is right-handed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in a normal state (even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, when the player hits the ball right in the normal state, the chance of receiving the special symbol lottery decreases compared to when the player hits the ball with the left ball hitting the first entrance 64. That is, if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, it is less likely to hit the jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying a right-handed warning image and urging the player to left-handedly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

When it is determined that the player is right-handed in the normal state, the words "warning" and "left-handed game" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The characters and are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player notice that the player should not hit the right side (should be left). Also, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning screen, the clerk in the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of right-handed in the normal state.

As a method for determining whether or not the ball is hitting to the right, for example, the ball enters a normal entrance 67 (see FIG. 2) into which the ball can flow when hitting to the right. Judging by whether or not the ball is hit.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed warning image is displayed when it is detected that the ball enters the normal entrance 67 (see FIG. 2) in the normal state. It is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (first entered) the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is determined that an illegal game is being performed, and the right The hit warning image may be displayed. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a, a signal indicating that the fraudulent operation is being performed is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraud, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraudulent activity is performed.

Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the first variable winning device 1000 is exemplified by, for example, a case where a ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is detected even though the special game state (big hit state) is not detected.

When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the first variable winning device 1000, the word "warning" is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the text "Please call the gate error clerk" is displayed at the bottom. With these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and thus can promptly request repairs or the like to the clerk in the hall or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (through gate). Is displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variable symbol of the second symbol is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by the predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is attached. It is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set so that the special symbol is changed during the probability change or the normal symbol is shortened in time as compared with the normal state in the gaming state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chances of winning the normal symbol are increased, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make a state in which the ball can easily win the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the winning probability is increased, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a and the number of times of opening are increased, or the like, to the second entrance 640. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than during the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, and the hit probability of the regular symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one normal symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board at the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, the ball flowing down the right side of the game board. Is configured to be able to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of passages through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is reserved up to 4 times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and at the second symbol retaining lamp 84. Is also lit. Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of balls through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, and is set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). You may do it. Further, the number of normally-entered ball entrances (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball is won in the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused mainly by turning on the first entrance switch. The control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view, a second entrance 640 in which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main is caused by the turning on of the second entrance switch. The control device 110 (see FIG. 4) performs a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 are different from each other, for example, in the case of the first prize. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second entrance 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed upon the passage of the ball to the normal entrance (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83, the electric winning combination The object 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for displaying the variation of the ordinary symbol is also short, so the variation of the ordinary symbol In the display, the symbol "○" is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, the time for which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in the case where the ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the case where the ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 in the low probability state and the high probability state. is there. However, the probability of being the jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot a) that gives the maximum profit (balls) as the jackpot type selected in the case of a jackpot is when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640. Is set higher than when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64.

During normal operation, the electric accessory that accompanies the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Toward the left side of the variable display device unit 80, the ball is fired so that the ball passes (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances for the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize in the first entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for

On the other hand, during the sudden change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second inlet port 640 is easily opened by passing the ball through the ordinary inlet port (through gate) 67. Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the second ball entrance 640, the ball is shot toward the second ball entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”). ), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit by winning the second entrance 640 while passing the normal entrance 67 (through gate) to open the electric accessory 640a. Becomes

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a sudden change, in a short time, or in a normal state). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 1000 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball entrance 64 (lower left side of the second ball entrance 640), and the first identification is opened in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion thereof. A winning opening (large opening) 1000a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot in the special symbol lottery performed due to the winning of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the jackpot is stopped. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is notified. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The first specific winning opening 1000a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened again for the predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the first specific winning opening 1000a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and a large amount of game value (game value) is added to the player as compared to the normal time (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). Based on the winning of one ball, 15 prize balls are paid out.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 1000 includes an open/close plate 1300 that forms an open state that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a by rotating upward, and a solenoid 1510 that operates the open/close plate 1300. I have it. The first specific winning opening 1000a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the solenoid 1510 is driven to rotate the opening/closing plate 1300 upward to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the open state and the normally closed state are set. The operation is repeated.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 66 below the first inlet 64. Balls flowing down the game area, which have not won any of the ball entrances 63, 64, 1000a, 640, are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device. To do.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a is an axis. As a solenoid, a solenoid 209 (including solenoids 1510, 2810, 4852, 6910, etc.) including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 inputs and outputs. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the port 205.

In addition, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 (including a detection sensor 1240, a second detection sensor 2255, etc.) including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detection sensor S and the rotational position detection sensor R, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115 is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. To do.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 in which a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data are stored, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear surface image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the first variable winning device 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 23. FIG. 5 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. Due to the inclined surface 1237 provided on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 1000, the player makes a right hit to enter the second ball entrance 640 of the sphere flowing down to the right of the variable timer device unit 80. Instead of spheres, almost all the spheres that flow down to the downstream side are guided to the flow path forming portion.

FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000. The first variable winning device 1000 includes a body member 1100 having a horizontally long rectangular plate shape, a cover front plate 1200 fastened and fixed to the body member 1100 from the front side, and the body members 1100 and the cover front plate. An opening/closing plate 1300 that is pivotally supported by being sandwiched between 1200, a power transmission member 1400 that is rotatably supported by the back side of the main body member 1100 and applies a load to the opening/closing plate 1300, and the power transmission member thereof. A drive device 1500 that drives 1400, a regulation member 1600 that regulates the discharge of balls in cooperation with the opening/closing plate 1300, and a power transmission member 1400, a drive device 1500, and a regulation member 1600 that cover the main body member 1100 from the back side. And a rear cover 1700 that is fastened and fixed as described above.

The main body member 1100 includes a thin plate member 1110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, and a shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 that is recessed in the thin plate member 1110 from the front side to the rear side. A housing portion 1120 which is housed and partially penetrated, a holding hole 1130 which is a through hole into which the detection sensor 1240 is inserted and inserted on the right side of the housing portion 1120 in front view, and a sphere flows down on the front surface side of the thin plate member 1110. A projecting portion 1140 projecting along the path, a discharge port 1150 for discharging a sphere from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member 1110, and a rotation projecting to the back side of the thin plate member 1110 and supporting the power transmission member 1400. It mainly includes a support portion 1160 and a support claw portion 1170 that is provided in an upper portion of the discharge port 1150 so as to support the shaft portion 1610 of the regulating member 1600 in a claw shape.

The accommodating portion 1120 includes a pair of left and right support recesses 1121 in which the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated, a rectangular recess 1122 formed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses 1121, and a rectangular shape thereof. A through-hole formed in a rectangular shape perpendicular to a straight line connecting the pair of support recesses 1121 in order to move the loaded portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 that moves along the right end of the recess 1122 to the front and rear of the thin plate member 1110. 1123 and the like.

The support recess 1121 is formed to have a width slightly larger than the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is accommodated, and the recessed opening is closed on the back surface of the front cover plate 1200. It That is, the opening/closing plate 1300 is pivotally supported by the support recess 1121 and the back surface of the front cover 1200.

The rectangular recess 1122 has a larger surface area than the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and the recessed depth thereof is slightly deeper than the plate portion 1310. This allows the plate portion 1310 to be completely housed in the rectangular recess 1122 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is tilted (closed state), and prevents the opening/closing plate 1300 from projecting to the front side of the thin plate member 1110.

The protruding portion 1140 is protruded to a position where it abuts on a sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 of the front cover 1200. The falling ball is decelerated by contacting the protruding portion 1140. A similar protruding portion 1235 is also provided in the storage channel 1231 of the front cover plate 1200 at a position that does not overlap the protruding portion 1140 in the front-rear direction.

The rotation support portion 1160 has a shaft portion 1161 that rotatably supports the power transmission member 1400, and a uniform protruding height toward the back side of the thin plate member 1110 along a circular or arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion 1161. And a circular rib 1162 formed in a rib shape.

The circular rib 1162 maintains the distance between the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the back surface of the thin plate member 1110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, the circular rib 1162 is formed in the entire angular range in which it abuts on the rotating tip portion 1421.

The front cover plate 1200 includes a thin plate member 1210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 on the front side, and a side wall portion extending from the left end of the thin plate member 1210 in front view to the rear side. 1220, an accommodating portion 1230 extending in the shape of a box that is open to the rear surface side toward the rear surface side of the thin plate member 1210 on the opposite side of the side wall portion 1220, and is disposed at the upper end portion of the accommodating portion 1230. And a detection sensor 1240.

The thin plate member 1210, the right side wall portion of the side wall portion 1220 in front view, the left side wall portion of the housing portion 1230 in front view, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 form a flow path that is a hole through which a sphere flows vertically. The department is composed.

The housing portion 1230 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front, and has a storage channel 1231 formed therein with a width that allows a sphere to flow down, and a storage channel 1231 that protrudes toward the back side in the middle part of the storage channel 1231. The projection 1235 (see FIG. 12) and an inclined surface 1237 formed as an upper surface on the right side in front view are mainly provided.

The storage channel 1231 is configured in such a manner that a side wall portion having a U-shaped cross-section opening to the back side is extended while being bent in a U-shaped front shape, and the opening is blocked by the main body member 1100 to allow a sphere to pass therethrough. A flow path is formed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the thin plate member 1210 corresponding to the front side portion of the region where the storage channel 1231 is formed is formed of a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231.

The storage channel 1231 has a guide surface 1231a (see FIG. 12) that is an inclined surface that guides the sphere toward the back side at the lowermost end, and rolling that moves the sphere guided by the guide surface 1231a in the front-back direction. The surface 1231b is mainly provided.

The inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the front side (the right side in FIG. 12) of the storage channel 1231 that reaches the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane.

The protruding portion 1235 has substantially the same structure as the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. That is, the projecting portion 1235 is projected to a position where it can come into contact with the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231, and decelerates the sphere by coming into contact with the sphere.

The inclined surface 1237 inclines downward toward the left as viewed from the front. As a result, the ball landed on the inclined surface 1237 can be rolled to the left and guided to the flow path forming portion.

The detection sensor 1240 includes a through hole as the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the sphere passes through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the detection sensor 1240 detects the passing, and the winning number is counted.

The opening/closing plate 1300 is a member that switches between rolling the ball toward the detection sensor 1240 and dropping the ball downward without contacting the ball, depending on the posture, and is a horizontally long rectangular plate portion 1310. And a pair of shaft portions 1320 projecting from the lateral end of the plate portion 1310 along the longitudinal direction, and extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion 1320 at the root of the shaft portion 1320 on the right side in front view. The load receiving part 1330 provided is mainly provided.

The plate portion 1310 includes a rolling surface 1311 on which a ball rolls in an ascending posture (open state), and the length in the lateral direction is covered in the ascending posture (open state) with the latitudinal direction along the front-rear direction. The distance from the front plate 1200 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end portion in the longitudinal direction is close to the detection sensor 1240.

Further, the plate portion 1310 includes a chamfered portion 1312 that is chamfered in an arc shape in cross section at an upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1320 in the raised posture (open state).

The plate portion 1310 is formed to be long in the left-right direction, and has a length such that up to five spheres can be placed side by side.

The loaded portion 1330 includes an arc-shaped ball entry prevention portion 1331 extending on the front side of the rolling surface 1311, an intervening transmission portion 1332 extending on the rear side of the rolling surface 1311, and the intervening transmission portion. 1332 mainly includes an engaging portion 1333 projecting from the rear side to the right side in the rear view (on the side where the power transmission member 1400 is disposed).

The engagement portion 1333 is extended to a position where it interferes with the operation trajectory of the power transmission member 1400, and includes a chamfered portion 1333a that is chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. When contacting the power transmission member 1400, the chamfered portion 1333a, not the corners, contacts the power transmission member 1400. Therefore, concentration of stress at the time of contact between the engagement portion 1333 and the power transmission member 1400 can be avoided. ..

The power transmission member 1400 mainly includes a disc-shaped main body 1410 and an extending portion 1420 extending from the main body 1410 in the axial radial direction.

The main body portion 1410 mainly includes a support hole 1411 through which the shaft portion 1161 is inserted, and a projecting pin 1412 projecting from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole 1411.

The projecting pin 1412 is a portion that engages with the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and as the tip member 1520 moves linearly by switching the excitation of the drive device 1500, the projecting pin 1412 is displaced and power is transmitted. The member 1400 rotates.

The extending portion 1420 has a rotating tip portion 1421 formed in an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole 1411 at the extending tip portion, and a pushing portion 1422 protruding from the rotating tip portion 1421 to the front side. Equipped with.

The drive device 1500 includes a solenoid 1510 that linearly moves a movable member by switching excitation, and a front end member 1520 having an H shape in a front view (a shape having concave portions on the upper and lower sides) disposed at the distal end of the movable member of the solenoid 1510. , Mainly.

The upper end of the tip member 1520 has a shape capable of accommodating the projecting pin 1412 of the power transmission member 1400. Specifically, the concave portion is formed in a shape that allows the protruding pin 1412 to be housed inside while the power transmission member 1400 is rotating (see FIG. 20 ).

The regulating member 1600 includes a rod-shaped shaft portion 1610 that is axially supported by the support claw portion 1170, an extending portion 1620 that extends in the radial direction of the shaft portion 1610 with a thickness equivalent to the diameter of the shaft portion 1610, and a main body. The surface on the member 1100 side is mainly provided with an extended portion 1620 and a ball receiving portion 1630 which is formed at a surface position and is thicker than the extended portion 1620.

The extended portion 1620 is arranged on the movement locus of the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and receives a pressing load from the intervening transmission portion 1332 when the opening/closing plate is in the raised posture (open state).

The ball receiving portion 1630 overlaps with the discharge port 1150 in a tilted posture (a posture in which the opposite end of the shaft portion 1610 is arranged in a lower position, a storage state) (a ball discharges the opening of the discharge port 1150). It is formed so that it is narrowed to the extent that it is not formed.

The restriction member 1600 is urged by a torsion spring (not shown) in a direction to maintain the rising posture (the posture in which the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion 1610 is located at the upper position, the discharging state).

The rear cover 1700 includes a discharge port 1710 which is a through hole through which the balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 pass. The balls discharged from the discharge port 1710 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line IX-IX of FIG. 8 and 9, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a closed state, and in FIG. 8, the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is housed in the rectangular recess 1122, thereby covering the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the cover member 1110. The opening/closing plate 1300 can be along the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 without narrowing the gap between the front plate 1200 and the thin plate member 1210. Since the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 1200 are juxtaposed at an interval that allows balls to pass therethrough, in the state shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the thin plate members 1110 and 1210 are By guiding the sphere in between, the sphere can be dropped along the flow path forming portion.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the ball entry prevention portion 1331 of the load receiving portion 1330 partially covers the opening of the detection sensor 1240 so that the front surface side of the main body member 1100 is covered. Overhang. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240, and the irregular winning (for example, even if the ball is not guided by the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball hit by a nail or the like is blown laterally and is detected by the detection sensor 1240). 1240) can be prevented.

Although the details will be described later, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, so that the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, FIG. 8 illustrates a state in which no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

The open state of the opening/closing plate 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. 10 is a front view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XI-XI of FIG. 10. 10 and 11, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state, and in FIG. 10, the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 1200 is partially broken and illustrated. Further, in FIG. 11, the outer shape of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened, the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 projects to the front side, and the distance between the plate portion 1310 and the thin plate member 1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. By doing so, the ball guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover 1200 is prevented from falling.

The sphere guided between the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100 and the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 1200 rolls on the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 along the inclination, and the detection sensor 1240 is detected from the right end thereof. To enter the storage channel 1231.

In the opened state of the opening/closing plate 1300, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate portion 1310 and the front cover plate 1200. Therefore, compared with the case where the plate portion 1310 is extended to the extent that it comes in contact with the front cover plate 1200, the required material can be reduced, and the material cost required for the opening/closing plate 1300 can be reduced.

Further, by reducing the diameter of the movement path of the tip end of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the lateral direction, it is easy to avoid interference between the opening/closing plate 1300 and a ball passing in front of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates. be able to.

Here, as will be described later in detail, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the regulating member 1600 is in the storage state, so that the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 Stored in. Therefore, FIG. 10 illustrates a state in which the spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231.

As shown in FIG. 10, the storage channel 1231 of the present embodiment is formed with a length capable of storing spheres with a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) as the upper limit. When ten spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere stops at the position detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Therefore, the tenth ball serves as a plug and the eleventh ball is prevented from passing through the detection sensor 1240. In other words, the resistance when the eleventh sphere tries to pass the detection sensor 1240 becomes extremely large, and the eleventh sphere can be made difficult to enter the detection sensor 1240.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state when the tenth ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240, so that the balls remaining on the opening/closing plate 1300 flow down to below the opening/closing plate 1300. Then, with the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, the restricting member 1600 is switched to the discharge state, so that the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10, in a state where the spheres are not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the tenth sphere is stopped at a position where the tenth sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240 but does not pass through the detection sensor 1240. To do.

When the 10th sphere is detected by the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state, but the 10th sphere is stored while receiving the load from the ball entry prevention unit 1331 in the middle of the switching. It is pushed into the inside of the passage 1231 (see FIG. 21(b)). That is, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the tenth ball stays in a state of closing the opening of the detection sensor 1240, and in the middle of switching the opening/closing plate 1300 to the closed state, the tenth ball prevention unit 1331 is the tenth ball. Since the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is closed while abutting (rubbing) with the detection ball 1240, the timing at which the tenth ball passes the detection sensor 1240 and the timing at which the ball entrance prevention unit 1331 operates are deviated from each other. It is possible to prevent the moment when the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is opened from occurring and prevent the eleventh ball from passing through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, it is not necessary to set the period from the detection of the specified number of balls by the detection sensor 1240 until the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and it can be arbitrarily set. For example, the opening/closing operation may be started 0.2 msec after the detection, or the opening/closing operation may be started 1 second after the detection. In the present embodiment, wait until the tenth sphere comes into contact with the ninth sphere (after the center of the sphere is placed on the detection sensor 1240 side beyond the front side of the entry prevention unit 1331). In order to operate the opening/closing plate 1300, the opening/closing plate 1300 is controlled to open/close 0.5 seconds after being detected by the detection sensor 1240.

Due to the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 described above, in the present embodiment, the number of spheres passing through the detection sensor 1240 can be limited to 10 while the opening/closing plate 1300 forms the open state. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent (delay) the ball from entering the ball only for the 11th ball. That is, the first to tenth balls can pass through the detection sensor 1240 at high speed. This leads to an increase in the progress speed of the special game state as compared with the case where the passage of the ball is delayed in the whole ball.

For example, in the case of a structure in which a ball that has passed through the detection sensor 1240 is decelerated once at the passing position to delay the winning of the succeeding ball, it is easy to suppress the winning of the eleventh ball, but the first ball Since each of the 10th to 10th balls slows down even when rolling partially on the rolling surface 1311, the time until the 10th ball passes the detection sensor 1240. There was a problem that the game became longer and the game was delayed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration of decelerating the first to tenth balls is not adopted, and only the eleventh ball is not entered into the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, the first to tenth balls are Even if spheres flow down in a row, the detection sensor 1240 can be passed through at the same running speed, so that the speed of the game can be increased.

Further, even if most of the period in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state has elapsed due to repairs such as ball clogging, and the game is started at the end of the period, no ball will enter the detection sensor 1240. Since it does not slow down the meaning, more balls can be entered.

In addition, regardless of how fast the 11th ball flows down toward the detection sensor 1240 (at a speed at which the opening/closing plate 1300 can reach the detection sensor 1240 before the tilting operation starts), regardless of the speed. It is possible to physically prevent the 11th ball from passing through the detection sensor 1240 by the 10th ball.

The arrangement of the spheres staying in the storage channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along the line XII-XII of FIG. Note that, in FIG. 12, spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are illustrated.

Here, a mechanism in which the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 have the same arrangement every time will be described. First, the sphere P1 that first enters the empty storage channel 1231 is guided to the rearwardly inclined guide surface 1231a at the lowermost portion of the storage channel 1231 and arranged at a position where it abuts against the front surface of the regulating member 1600. It

The sphere P1 is weighted by the sphere P2 entering the sphere subsequently reaching the lower end, and settles in the arrangement shown in FIG. The sphere P2 has a degree of freedom in arrangement in the front-rear direction on the right side (right side in FIG. 12) of the sphere P1 in front view. That is, depending on how the pachinko machine 10 is tilted in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 10 is placed, the pachinko machine 10 may be closer to the front cover plate 1200 side or may be closer to the protruding portion 1140 of the main body member 1100. As shown in FIG. 12, since the projecting portion 1140 is arranged at the position where the projecting tip of the projecting portion 1140 contacts the ball P2, the ball P2 is in contact with the ball P1. There is no contact with the thin plate member 1110 of 1100.

The sphere P2 is weighted when the sphere P3 that has subsequently entered reaches a position where the sphere P3 comes into contact with the sphere P2. Here, in the present embodiment, the protruding portion 1235 arranged on the front cover plate 1200 is located on the right side of the sphere P2 and the protruding portion 1235 regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction. The ball P3 is disposed between the positions P and P and is not in contact with the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover 1200 (a position for keeping a small gap with the ball P2).

Therefore, regardless of the position of the sphere P2 in the front-rear direction, the center position of the sphere P3 is arranged on the back side of the center position of the sphere P2, and the sphere P3 is on the back side of the sphere P2 (upper side of FIG. 12). ) Will come into contact. Therefore, the load of the ball P3 brings the ball P2 closer to the front side (lower side in FIG. 12). This causes the ball P2 to settle in the arrangement shown in FIG.

Thereafter, the sphere P3 is loaded by the sphere P4, which is subsequently entered, under substantially the same conditions as the sphere P2 being loaded by the sphere P3 (except that the front-back direction is reversed), so that the sphere P3 Settles in the arrangement illustrated in FIG.

In other words, the arrangement of the nth ball entering the storage channel 1231 is fixed to a unique position by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the (n+1)th ball entering the storage channel 1231. Further, in the present embodiment, instead of fixing the arrangement of the spheres by narrowing the storage channel 1231, while maintaining the cross-sectional area of the storage channel 1231 larger than the diameter of the sphere, the projection 1140, This is realized by disposing 1235. As a result, the arrangement of the stored balls can be fixed at a unique position while preventing the occurrence of ball clogging.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 at appropriate positions, the sphere is stored in a fixed arrangement every time the action of storing the sphere in the storage flow channel 1231 occurs. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to unify the number of storages each time.

The discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 will be described with reference to FIG. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XII-XII in FIG. 10. In FIG. 13(a), the ball P1 is ejected and the ball P2 is on the rolling surface 1231b. In FIG. 13(b), the ball P2 is ejected and the ball P3 is the position of the ball P2 in FIG. The state of being arranged at is shown.

As will be described later, when the solenoid 1510 is de-excited and the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the regulating member 1600 is in the discharge state, and the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231. When ejecting the ball. The sphere arranged at the lowermost end (sphere P1 in FIG. 12) is discharged to the back side along the inclination of the rolling surface 1231b, and the following sphere (sphere P2 in FIG. 12) flows into the space created thereby. The balls are ejected in sequence.

Here, since the inclination angle of the rolling surface 1231b with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231 (the channel extending in the left-right direction) with respect to the horizontal plane, the flow velocity of the ball P1 Since the flow velocity of the ball P2 is higher than that of the ball P2, a gap is formed between the ball P1 and the ball P2 (see FIG. 13A). Therefore, since the load applied from the ball P2 to the ball P1 at the time of discharging the ball P1 can be minimized, the speed at the time of discharging the ball P1 can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P1. Can be converted.

After the sphere P1 is discharged, the following spheres P2, P3, P4 flow down to the downstream side (left side in FIG. 12) along the slope of the extended portion of the storage channel 1231. Here, the sphere P2 smoothly reaches the guide surface 1231a and rides on the rolling surface 1231b, while the spheres P3 and P4 come into contact with the protruding portions 1140 and 1235 during the flow-down process (see FIG. 13A). By this abutment, the spheres P3 and P4 are redirected to the directions DP3 and DP4 having the front-rear direction component, pass through the positions of the spheres P2 and P3 that are respectively guided, and decelerate.

In other words, the spheres P3 and P4 are rearranged in the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the storage channel 1231 by contacting the protruding portions 1140 and 1235, and the spheres previously stored are retained. It is relocated to the position where it was, and it slows down.

As a result, a gap is created between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 (see FIG. 13B), and the load given from the sphere P3 to the sphere P2 when the sphere P2 is discharged can be minimized. , The speed at the time of discharging the ball P2 can be made uniform regardless of the number of balls stored after the ball P2.

That is, since the subsequent spheres flow down the storage channel 1231 for a longer distance, the more the number of stored spheres changes, the more the sphere accelerates due to gravity, and the discharge mode of the sphere P2 (speed at the time of discharge, The discharge interval between the ball P1 and the like may change, but the change in the discharge mode is caused by the action of the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 described above (the ball discharged on the rolling surface 1231b and the following). The effect of eliminating the load due to gravity is provided by forming a gap between the ball and the ball.

After that, the succeeding spheres repeatedly flow down from the arrangement shown in FIG. 13A to the arrangement shown in FIG. 13B, whereby the spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. As described above, the discharged balls are discharged without receiving the weight of the succeeding balls by creating a gap between the balls that are discharged by rolling on the rolling surface 1231b and the succeeding balls. As a result, it is possible to make the discharge mode of the balls (velocity at the time of discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the projecting portions 1140 and 1235 can make the discharge mode of the balls (speed at discharge, discharge interval, etc.) uniform. In the present embodiment, it takes about 0.2 seconds for one ball to be discharged. Therefore, by maintaining the restriction member 1600 in the discharged state for 2 seconds or more, it is possible to discharge all the maximum number (10) of balls that can be stored in the storage channel 1231.

14 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 16 is a first variable winning device taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. FIG. 10 is a sectional view of 1000. 14 to 16, the open/close plate 1300 is shown in the closed state, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the solenoid 1510 is in a non-excited state, and the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is located above the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300. Spaced apart.

Since the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the upper side and is separated from the regulating member 1600, the regulation member 1600 does not receive a load from the intervening transmission portion 1332, and the regulation member 1600 is a torsion spring (not shown). The discharged state is maintained by the biasing force.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball entry prevention unit 1331 overhangs in such a manner that the size of the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is equal to or smaller than the projected area of the ball. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the sphere from passing the detection sensor 1240.

17 is a rear perspective view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 19 is a first variable winning device taken along line XIX-XIX of FIG. FIG. 10 is a sectional view of 1000. 17 to 19, the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300 is shown, and the rear cover 1700 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state, the solenoid 1510 is in an excited state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 is displaced counterclockwise, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened. The engaging portion 1333 is pushed into the pushing portion 1422.

The intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the lower side as the power transmission member 1400 rotates, and in this state, the extending portion 1620 of the regulating member 1600 receives a load from the intervening transmission portion 1332, and the posture of the regulating member 1600 is increased. Is switched to a tilted posture (the regulation member 1600 is switched to the storage state).

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 1300, the regulation member 1600 is given a load accompanying the driving force of the solenoid 1510 and a biasing force of a torsion spring (not shown). In the present embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring is applied. The structure is such that the driving force of the solenoid 1510 when the open/close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state can be suppressed while maintaining a large value. The large biasing force of the torsion spring leads to the effect that the regulating member 1600 can be immediately switched to the discharge state, and thereby the balls can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 quickly. The adopted structure will be described below.

In the present embodiment, the engagement portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged on the operation locus E1 of the power transmission member 1400 when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating from the closed state, while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state. When the power transmission member 1400 is switched to, the power transmission member 1400 is pushed to the outside of the operation locus E1 along the rotation axis direction. The motion locus E1 is illustrated as the outer shape of the movement locus of the portion including the pushing portion 1422 (see FIG. 6).

Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening/closing plate 1300 to the power transmission member 1400 after the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member 1400, but the surface forming the rotation direction. Is applied in the axial direction, which is the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft portion 1320 applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 from being transmitted to the solenoid 1510 via the power transmission member 1400.

That is, the urging force of the torsion spring (not shown) for urging the regulating member 1600 is directed in the direction of pushing back the opening/closing plate 1300 toward the closed state, but this urging force is the power no matter how large the urging force is. It is not applied to the solenoid 1510 via the transmission member 1400.

Thus, once the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, it is possible to prevent the driving force of the solenoid 1510 for maintaining the opening/closing plate 1300 from changing due to the load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300. Therefore, it is not necessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the solenoid 1510 to the opening/closing plate 1300 at the maximum value.

That is, the applied voltage was reduced after exciting the solenoid 1510 so that a driving force enough to switch the regulating member 1600 to the stored state is generated against the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) at the start of the operation. Even in this case, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state.

Therefore, even if a fluctuating load is applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600, the opening/closing plate 1300 can be maintained in the open state and the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state without being affected by the load.

As the fluctuating load applied to the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulation member 1600, the load given by the weight of the sphere is exemplified. That is, for example, since the opening/closing plate 1300 has a configuration in which the sphere lands on the rolling surface 1311, when the sphere lands, the load due to the weight of the sphere is received, and the number of the sphere changes frequently. A varying load is applied to 1300. Further, for example, since a load is applied to the regulation member 1600 from a sphere stored in the storage flow channel 1231, particularly a sphere arranged at the lowermost end portion of the storage flow channel 1231, the presence or absence of the sphere And gives a fluctuating load.

As described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19, since the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked with each other, the regulating member 1600 cannot be discharged while the opening/closing plate 1300 is kept open. Therefore, even if the open/close plate 1300 is illegally maintained in the open state, it is physically determined that more spheres (10 or more spheres in this embodiment) that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 pass through the detection sensor 1240. It can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the open/close plate 1300 from being fraudulently maintained in the open state and fraudulently increasing the number of prize balls to be acquired.

20 and 21, the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 is illustrated in chronological order. 20A is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 20B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXb-XXb of FIG. 20A. 20(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, FIG. 21(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21(b) is of FIG. 21(a). 21C is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 taken along line XXIb-XXIb, FIG. 21C is a rear view of the first variable winning device 1000, and FIG. 21D is XXId of FIG. 21C. It is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 1000 on the line XXId.

20 and 21, in order to facilitate understanding, only the opening/closing plate 1300, the power transmission member 1400, the distal end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the regulating member 1600 maintain the assembled state (see FIG. 5). In addition to the illustration of other components, the manner in which the opening/closing plate 1300 changes its state from the open state to the closed state is illustrated in time series.

That is, in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the state (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 is shown. 20(c), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the second distance h2 shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b). 21(c) and FIG. 21(d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and is disposed at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the third distance h3 shorter than the second distance h2. The state in which 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the third distance h3 is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 21B, the first specific winning opening 1000a arranged on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line for reference, and the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape of the sphere in the same cross section as the illustration is an imaginary line. Illustrated. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 10, the opening/closing plate 1300 can rotate to the state shown in FIG. 21B without interfering with the sphere.

From the state shown in FIG. 20A to the state shown in FIG. 20C, the power transmission member 1400 rotates, but the opening/closing plate 1300 maintains the same posture. Note that, in FIG. 20C, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 and the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 are in contact with each other.

As a result, before the opening/closing plate 1300 is moved from the closed state to the open state, the power transmission member 1400 can be urged, so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is rotated at the same time when the power transmission member 1400 starts rotating. Then, the driving force required at the start of rotation (at the time of initial movement) can be reduced, and the operating speed of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be increased.

From the state shown in FIG. 20(c) to the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the regulating member 1600 maintains the discharged state, while the opening/closing plate 1300 operates from the closed state, and the closed state and the open state. An intermediate state between them is set (see FIG. 21B).

In the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, when the sphere flows down to the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 (right side of FIG. 21B) due to the plate portion 1310 projecting to the front side, The rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 can receive the ball. In this case, the weight of the sphere acts in the direction in which the rolling surface 1311 is pushed down (clockwise in FIG. 21B), but the tip member 1520 moves rightward in rear view (rightward in FIG. 21A) to transmit power. Since a load in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 21B) is applied to the engaging portion 1333 via the member 1400, it is possible to prevent the opening/closing plate 1300 from rotating due to the weight of the ball.

Therefore, in the intermediate state of the opening/closing plate 1300 shown in FIG. 21B, it is possible to prevent the balls from passing downward on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 while allowing the balls to be discharged from the discharge port 1150. ..

As a result, the problem of maintaining the restriction member 1600 in the discharged state during the time required to discharge the spheres from the storage channel 1231 and the problem of shortening the closed state of the open/close plate 1300 that contradicts it (shortening the interval). In the state shown in FIG. 21(a), the plate portion 1310 is projected to an intermediate position while the ball is continuously discharged, and the ball is sandwiched between the rolling surface 1311 and the front cover plate 1200. , Can be achieved together.

At the same time, in the state shown in FIG. 21( b ), the opening/closing plate 1300 is in a posture that prevents the ball from passing downward while preventing the ball from entering the detection sensor 1240. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, since the rolling surface 1311 is located below the bottom surface of the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the rolling surface 1311 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the ball riding on the vehicle from passing through the detection sensor 1240 as it is. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the balls from passing the detection sensor 1240 when the restriction member 1600 is in the discharged state, and it is possible to effectively maintain the function of limiting the winning number of the balls by the first variable winning device 1000. ..

As shown in FIG. 21D, the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the open state, and at the same time, the regulating member 1600 is switched to the storage state. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600 are interlocked with each other by the operation of the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500. That is, the driving force of the solenoid 1510 (see FIG. 6) of the driving device 1500 can be used also as the driving force of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the regulating member 1600.

20 and 21, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state has been described, but when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is understood by going back to FIGS. 20 and 21. can do.

When the open state is switched to the closed state, first, the state shown in FIG. 21(d) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 21(b). Here, since the loaded portion 1330 of the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged in the operation direction of the regulating member 1600, the regulating member 1600 does not move more than the moving amount of the loaded portion 1330.

That is, since the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state after the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated, it is impossible to maintain the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state after the regulating member 1600 is switched to the discharge state. You can Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the irregular winning of the ball passing through the detection sensor 1240 at a timing slightly after the ball starts to be discharged.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 21B, it seems that the ball can enter the detection sensor 1240 if the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is still open and the ball abuts on the rolling surface 1311 and bounces. In the present embodiment, that can be made impossible.

That is, when the state shown in FIG. 21B is viewed as a state in which the open/close plate 1300 is being changed from the open state to the closed state, the rotating tip portion 1421 of the power transmission member 1400 moves upward, so that the rolling surface 1311 is not moved. When the balls come into contact with each other, a load that supports the opening/closing plate 1300 acting in the direction opposite to the weight direction of the balls does not occur. Therefore, when the ball comes into contact with the rolling surface 1311, the plate portion 1310 moves downward due to the weight of the ball, so that the ball cannot bounce to the detection sensor 1240. As a result, it is possible to prevent irregular winning.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 22B is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 22C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 22A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first per random number table 202a, the first per type selection table 202b, and the second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is updated regularly (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first per random number counter obtained based on the starting winning is equal to any of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 22B) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the big hit type. , And the special symbol is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, if the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 22B).

When it becomes the big hit A, a big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

The jackpot B is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 49” (see 202b2 in FIG. 22B).

When the big hit B is reached, an eight-round big hit game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 1200 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit C is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 22B).

When the jackpot C is reached, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the player can receive about 600 prize balls.

As described above, if the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is a big hit, in any case, the first variable winning device 1000 has the first operation pattern. Works with. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out by the player appears as a difference depending on the number of rounds. The larger the number of rounds, the larger the number of prize balls to be paid out and the longer the jackpot game.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), you can win the jackpot of 15 rounds with a probability of 20%, and the jackpot of 4 rounds with a probability of 50%. So basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is finished in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, and therefore, the launch of a ball for the purpose of obtaining the subsequent jackpot can be started early.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is associated and defined (see 202b4 in FIG. 22B).

When it becomes the big hit a, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000, as in the case of the big hit A. In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 89”, the big hit b is associated and defined (see 202b5 of FIG. 22B).

When it becomes the big hit b, a big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the prize balls to be paid out to the player are inevitably less than 2250 (1200 in this embodiment), and the time required for the jackpot game exceeds that for the jackpot a.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit c is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 22B).

When the big hit c is reached, a 15-round big hit game is executed in a third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 1000. In this case, the prize balls to be paid out to the player are inevitably less than 2250 (1875 in the present embodiment), and further, the time required for the jackpot game exceeds the case of the jackpot a, and the prize to be paid out for each round. The time required to play a ball or jackpot varies.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 1000 changes according to the big hit type. Due to the difference in this operation pattern, the number of big hit rounds can be made invariable, while the number of payouts can be made different and the time required for the big hit game can be changed. In the present embodiment, when the payout number is small (big hit b and big hit c), the time required for the big hit game can be extended as compared to the case where the payout number is large (big hit a). That is, when a big hit (big hit b and big hit c) with a small number of payouts is obtained, the timing of hitting a ball aiming at the next big hit is delayed as compared with the case of the big hit a.

Therefore, in addition to providing a difference in the number of prize balls, by forcibly prolonging the time required for the jackpot game, the profit per unit time (time efficiency It is possible to make a difference in the included number of payouts).

Thereby, in the breakdown of the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the jackpot (jackpot a) that can receive a large amount of time efficiently, and the payout inefficiently It is possible to provide a small number of jackpots (b jackpot b, jackpot c), and it is possible to increase the profit of the player obtained when the jackpot a is won. As a result, the difference in the number of payouts in the case of playing a game for a predetermined period of time while maintaining a large probability of winning the jackpot a (the maximum value of the total number of acquired balls and the minimum value of the total number of acquired balls) It is possible to configure a gaming machine capable of increasing the (difference).

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second×2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it becomes easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol can be transitioned to the probability changing state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and when it is a big hit, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit a (maximum pitching big hit). As a result, the player can easily obtain a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 22(c)) is a data table in which the normal symbol hit determination value is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, "5-28" is defined as the judgment value for hitting the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 of FIG. 22(c)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5-204" is stipulated as the judgment value for winning the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 22(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4, which is acquired based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a hit. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first operation pattern, and FIG. 23(b) is the time counting of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the second operation pattern. It is a figure showing a change, and Drawing 23 (c) is a figure showing a time change of the 1st specific winning a prize mouth 1000a in a 3rd operation pattern.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the first operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, or jackpot a game, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). The drive is controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

The first interval time between rounds Int1 is set as a time during which the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged globally. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 and the spheres are discharged at intervals of approximately 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of stored spheres. To be done. Therefore, in order to eject 10 balls, it takes 2 seconds to adjust.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

In the first operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the first interval time Int1 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls do not remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round. Therefore, since the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls can be passed through the first specific winning port 1000a even after the second round, the maximum length of the first operating time T1 of each round. The round game R can be ended without waiting for 30 seconds. Therefore, the round game R can be rapidly advanced.

After that, similarly, the round game R of the third round to the maximum of the fifteenth round is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open/close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drive-controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the second operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot b, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). The drive is controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the second round game R is started.

The inter-round second interval time Int2 is set as a time during which at least a part of the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 10 spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231 and the spheres are discharged at intervals of approximately 0.2 seconds regardless of the number of stored spheres. To be done. Therefore, the number of spheres that can be ejected in one second is five. For example, when ten spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, even if the spheres are ejected at the second interval time Int2 between rounds. Therefore, five spheres still remain in the storage channel 1231.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

In the second operation pattern, by discharging the balls during the second interval time Int2 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of each round. Therefore, in the second and subsequent rounds, a state may occur in which a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning port 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

Thereafter, similarly, the third round to the 15th round of the round game R are repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drive-controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the elapsed time and the number of payouts of the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern in the 15-round jackpot game are compared. The ball can be fired at the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds.

First, in the case of playing the jackpot game with the first operation pattern, the time required for 10 balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a is 6 seconds at the shortest. If the time required to continue this for 15 rounds, the opening time OP, the first interval time between rounds Int1, and the ending time RD are added, the time elapsed from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 141 seconds ( =OP(10s)+(T1(6s)+Int1(2s))×15R+ED(11s)). Further, the payout number is 2250 (=15×10C×15R).

On the other hand, when the big hit game is performed in the second operation pattern, 10 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the first round, but only 5 balls can be won in the second round and thereafter. The time that elapses from the start to the end of the jackpot game is 463 seconds (=OP(10s)+(T1(6s)+Int2(1s))+(T1(30s)+Int2(1s))×13R+T1(30s)+Int1( 2s)+ED (11s)). The number of payouts is 1200 (=(10C×1R+5C×14R)×15) because only 5 balls can be won in the round game R after the second round.

Therefore, when playing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern, it takes three times or more the time as in the case of playing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern, but the payout pitch is about half, and the time efficiency of the exit ball acquisition is high. Becomes dramatically worse.

As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when playing the jackpot game in the first operation pattern. That is, it is possible to increase the rarity value of the big hit A and the big hit a, improve the attention to the big hit type notified for each big hit, and improve the interest in the big hit game.

In addition, although the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.0 second, it is not limited to this and can be set to various numerical values and can be changed in each round.

For example, the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the first round game R is 0.5 seconds, and the second interval time Int2 between rounds after the end of the second round game R is 1.5 seconds. It is also possible to

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 0.5 seconds, since only two spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231, for example, a sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. When 10 are stored, the round game R is started with 8 balls remaining. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, since only two balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, the payout number is also small (30).

In the round game R immediately after the second interval time Int2 between rounds is set to 1.5 seconds, seven balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, for example, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the previous round. When the individual balls are stored, the round game R is started in a state where the three balls remain. Therefore, in the round game R of the round, 7 balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and a certain number (105) can be paid out.

Further, the length of the second interval time Int2 between rounds can be set to 2.0 seconds (the above time). In this case, there are no spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the immediately subsequent round game R, and 10 spheres can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a. You can hope to shorten the progress time of the ball and round game R.

<When operating in the third operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot c, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 sets the solenoid 1510 to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). The drive is controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

By discharging the balls of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, a state in which the balls do not remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R of the second round is formed. (In the present embodiment, 10 pachinko balls) can be passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls can be paid out correspondingly, and the first operation time T1 of each round can be set. The round game R can be ended without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to receive the payout of prize balls in the same manner as in the first operation pattern while rapidly advancing the round game R.

Thereafter, similarly, the third round to the tenth round of the round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

When the round game R of the tenth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the 11th round game R is started.

In the eleventh round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the 11th round game R, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the 11th round game R is completed.

Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the 12th to 15th rounds is repeated with the second interval time Int2 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

By discharging the balls during the second interval time Int2 between rounds, it is possible to form a state in which the balls remain inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R after the eleventh round. Therefore, after the eleventh round, there may occur a state in which a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls cannot be passed through the first specific winning port 1000a. In this case, the round game R ends only after the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round has elapsed. Therefore, the progress of the round game R is delayed as compared with the first operation pattern.

Also, the number of prize balls paid out in each round game is smaller than that by the tenth round. Therefore, the total number of payouts is smaller than the big hit in the first operation pattern (1875=(10C×10R+5C×5R)×15), and the degree of payout in the big hit game (number or speed etc.) , It can be changed (depending on the timing) depending on how many rounds the round game is being played.

In the third operation pattern, the case where the number of payouts is large in the first round and the number of payouts decreases toward the final round has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be small at the beginning, but the number of payouts may increase toward the final stage, or the number of payouts may peak in the middle round.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drive-controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, the degree of payout in the jackpot game (number or speed, etc.) is changed depending on how many rounds the round game R is to be performed, so that the jackpot game is moderated and the player's interest is improved. Can be made.

In addition, when the big hit game is performed with the third operation pattern, there is no change from the first operation pattern until the round game R of the tenth round, so that the player pays out according to the first operation pattern. You can play jackpot with the expectation that you can get the number.

In addition, the inter-round second interval time Int2 set to 1 second in the present embodiment can be set to an arbitrary numerical value in association with each round for each jackpot type. For example, in one jackpot type, the second interval time Int2 between rounds of the third operation pattern is set to be all 1.5 seconds, and in another jackpot type, the second interval time between rounds of the third operation pattern is set. Settings such as setting the interval time Int2 to be 0.5 seconds in odd rounds and 1.0 seconds in even rounds can be performed in advance.

That is, by further subdividing the jackpot type, it is possible to form various jackpot games having different second interval times Int2 between rounds. Therefore, in the eleventh round and thereafter, the number of balls finally paid out can be made unpredictable until the jackpot game is over, and attention to the jackpot game can be improved.

Further, the change in the degree of payout may be associated with the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, when playing a jackpot game in the third operation pattern, the running character's figure is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the stamina of that character remains (the first round) is displayed. The characters will run well, and many prize balls will be paid out in conjunction with it. On the other hand, when the character's stamina disappears (in the final round), the displayed character will have difficulty running and will walk, and in conjunction with that, the prize balls will be less paid out.

In this way, by making the degree of payout of prize balls correspond to the effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen, it is possible for the player to easily empathize with the liquid crystal effect and improve the player's interest in the jackpot game. be able to.

In addition, by performing the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern described above, each round can be advanced with the maximum value of the first operation time T1 as a reference, so that the jackpot game is predetermined. It is possible to proceed over the production time. In other words, for example, when the winning of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a is performed at an unexpectedly high speed, it is displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) during the jackpot game. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends in the middle of the first reproduction of the moving image that is loop-reproduced over a predetermined effect time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from ending before the viewer can fully view the effect in the jackpot.

The effect displayed on the liquid crystal screen when the jackpot game is performed in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern is not limited. For example, in a mode in which a cheering message from a character (such as "do your best") is displayed, the longer the jackpot game time, the easier it is to display a cheering message from a character with a lower appearance rate. Thereby, the jackpot game in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern can be advanced (rather gladly) without stressing the player.

On the other hand, the display may be such that the player is stressed. For example, a case where a running character is displayed during a jackpot game and the character is displayed to take a break in the break area in the inter-round interval will be described. In the first operation pattern, the interval between rounds is set every time a specified number of balls are won, so that the character can complete the race without accumulating fatigue. On the other hand, after the eleventh round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the specified number of prizes cannot be achieved and the interval between rounds is not reached unless the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 is waited for. Therefore, the production of accumulated fatigue can be performed without deviation from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode), and since the interval between rounds is short, It is possible to perform the production that there is no time to rest. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize a tired character and to give stress to the player, which can increase the player's aspiration to recover in the next big hit.

Further, in the case of performing the same display, it may be an effect that the character rehydrates at the timing of winning. In this case, while water can be sufficiently replenished in the first operation pattern, the number of times water is replenished (the number of winnings) is the first after the eleventh round of the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern. The amount of water that can be replenished is insufficient and the character is getting tired more and more compared to the sweat that comes out of the character, as the amount of water decreases and the period during which the character runs (the period of jackpot games) becomes longer compared to the operation pattern. It is possible to perform an effect that does not shift from the game mode (in a mode in which the time is controlled in advance regardless of the winning mode). This makes it possible to correlate the appearance of the character with the profit (payout balls including time efficiency) that the player can obtain, and what is the jackpot that the player has won (whether it is a medium hit or not) , Whether it is a jackpot or a super jackpot) can be easily grasped by the player through the production of the entire jackpot game.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 30. In the first embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that can be stored inside the first variable winning a prize device 1000 is fixed has been described, but the first variable winning a prize device 2000 according to the second embodiment has spheres that can be stored inside. It is configured so that the number of can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 24 is a front view of the first variable winning device 2000 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 25 is a rear view of the first variable winning device 2000. In addition, in FIG. 24, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the arrangement of the spheres stored in the second storage channel 2251 when the sphere enters from the second specific winning opening 2255a are shown by hidden lines.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the first variable winning device 2000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, and a driving device 1500 similar to those of the first embodiment, and a main body member slightly different from that of the first embodiment. 2100, a front cover plate 2200, a restricting member 2600, and a rear cover (not shown), and a second variable winning device 2800 that is new in the second embodiment. The second detection sensor 2255 of the second variable winning device 2800 is provided with a second specific winning opening 2255a through which a ball serving as a reference for payout in a big hit game passes.

The second specific winning opening 2255a is a winning opening having the same function as the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds have passed). The operation of releasing the ball is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until the player wins or until 10 balls are won. Although details will be described later, the opening operation can be performed in a plurality of operation patterns (fourth operation pattern, fifth operation pattern). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a, and thus a larger amount of winning balls than normal is paid out.

The main body member 2100 is added to the configuration (the thin plate member 1110, the housing portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170) included in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , A slide guide hole 2181 which is a through hole formed in the thin plate member 1110, and a holding hole 2182 which is also a through hole formed in the thin plate member 1110 and into which the second detection sensor 2255 can be inserted. A pair of wall portions arranged in parallel along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110 and extending linearly in the left-right direction, and a pair of drive guide ribs 2183 extending along the surface direction of the thin plate member 1110. Mainly provided are a transmission guide rib 2184 having wall portions arranged in parallel and extending in a straight line in the vertical direction, and a shaft portion 2185 pivotally supporting a transmission member 2830 of the second variable winning device 2800.

The slide guide hole 2181 is a long hole that guides the operation of the slide plate 2840 of the second variable winning device 2800. The holding hole 2182 is a through hole into which the second detection sensor 2255 provided on the front cover plate 2200 is inserted.

The ribs 2183 and 2184 are ribs that guide the sliding operation of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that are interlocked when the second variable winning device 2800 is driven.

The front covering plate 2200 is connected to the upper right direction of the housing portion 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall portion 1220, the housing portion 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) included in the front covering plate 1200 of the first embodiment. The second storage portion 2250 is provided.

The second accommodating portion 2250 has a functional portion on the back surface side of the thin plate formed in a plane position with the thin plate member 1210, has an upward opening, and has a terminal end connected to the middle of the storage channel 1231. The storage channel 2251 and the second detection disposed in the second storage channel 2251 in a posture with an opening along the extension direction of the second storage channel 2251 near the upper end of the second storage channel 2251. The sensor 2255 and the front plate of the second housing portion 2250 and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 are closed at the left side portion of the opening of the second storage channel 2251 in a front view, and the upper surface is inclined downward to the left. And a slanted surface 2257.

The number of stored spheres of the second storage passage 2251 is the number of stored spheres when the discharge port 1150 is closed and the spheres are stored when the spheres are stored inside the second storage portion 2250 after passing through the second detection sensor 2255. It is configured to have a maximum of 14.

The 2nd detection sensor 2255 is a detection device which has the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth 2255a and produces the same operation as detection sensor 1240. That is, when the sphere enters the accommodation unit 1230 by switching the opening/closing plate 1300, the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere, and by switching the second variable winning a prize device 2800, the sphere enters the accommodation unit 2250. When entering the ball 1230, the second detection sensor 2255 detects the ball.

The inclined surface 2257 causes the ball to flow down to the side where the opening/closing plate 1300 is arranged. Therefore, all the balls that are blocked by the slide plate 2840 and have not entered the second storage flow channel 2251 flow down along the inclined surface 2257 and are directed to the flow channel forming portion on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. It Therefore, during the jackpot game, the player opens one of the specific winning openings 1000a and 2255a regardless of whether the first specific winning opening 1000a is open or the second specific winning opening 2255a is open. When in a state, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out by performing a right-handed game. Therefore, even an inexperienced player can easily play the game.

The second detection sensor 2255 is arranged inside the second storage flow channel 2251 with a margin to arrange one sphere on the upstream side. Therefore, a plurality of spheres continuously flow into the second storage flow channel 2251 at the closing timing of the slide plate 2840 (the timing when the remaining one sphere passes the second detection sensor 2255 to reach a specified number). The structure is such that a specified number or more of balls can enter.

The restricting member 2600 has a structure (the shaft portion 1610, the extending portion 1620, and the ball receiving portion 1630) included in the restricting member 1600 of the first embodiment, and further, the shaft portion 1610 is further extended to the left, and the extending portion 1620 is provided. The second extending portion 2640 is formed so as to be bilaterally symmetrical to the extending portion 1620 when viewed in the plane direction.

The second extending portion 2640 is a portion that receives a load when the second variable winning device 2800 operates, as described later. Due to the formation of the second extended portion 2640, the restriction member 2600 allows the second variable winning a prize device 2800 or the opening/closing plate 1300 to be used regardless of whether the second variable winning device 2800 performs the switching operation or the opening/closing plate 1300 performs the switching operation. The state can be switched in conjunction with the operation of.

The second variable winning device 2800 includes a solenoid 2810 fixed to the back surface of the main body member 2100, a tip member 2820 that slides in the left-right direction by driving the solenoid 2810, and an abdomen with one end supported by the tip member 2820. A transmission member 2830 rotatably supported by a shaft portion 2185, a slide plate 2840 connected to the other end of the transmission member 2830 and extended from the slide guide hole 2181 to the front side of the main body member 2100, and a tip. A rod-shaped intervening rod portion 2850, one end of which is fixed to the member 2820 and slidably arranged inside the drive guide rib 2183, and one end of which is disposed at a position where it can contact the intervening rod portion 2850. A transmission rod portion 2860 that extends along the inner side of 2184 and has the other end disposed at a position where it can contact the second extended portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is mainly provided.

The intervening rod portion 2850 is guided in the left-right direction by the drive guide ribs 2183 while being restricted from moving in the up-down direction and the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of drive guide ribs 2183 are configured to be closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer (the distance between the main guide member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 is narrowed). Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The transmission rod portion 2860 is guided in the vertical direction by the transmission guide rib 2184 while being restricted from moving in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of transmission guide ribs 2184 are configured to be closer to each other as the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 becomes longer (the distance between the main body member 2100 and the thin plate member 1110 is narrowed). Movement in the front-back direction is restricted.

The surfaces of the ends of the interposing rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 that come into contact with each other are formed to be inclined so as to face the mating member. As a result, the force can be smoothly transmitted from the intervening rod portion 2850 to the transmission rod portion 2860.

FIG. 26 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. As shown in FIG. 26, the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600 is configured with an arc-shaped cross section in which the facing surface 2641 on the side facing the transmission rod portion 2860 is curved, and the regulating member 2600 is directed toward the discharging state. The biasing force of the biasing torsion spring (not shown) is transmitted to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the facing surface 2641. As a result, the transmission rod portion 2860 is maintained in the standby position in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26.

In the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the ball cannot enter the both of the detection sensor 1240 and the second detection sensor 2255. Hereinafter, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 2800 for bringing the ball into the second detection sensor 2255 will be described.

27A to 27C, the operations of the restriction member 2600 and the second variable winning device 2800 are illustrated in chronological order. 27A to 27C are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 2000. 27(a) to 27(c), in order to facilitate understanding, a configuration unnecessary for the description is omitted, and the slide plate 2840 changes its state from the closed state to the open state. How to do is illustrated in time series.

In FIG. 27A, the solenoid 2810 is de-energized, and the tip member 2820 is arranged at the farthest position from the solenoid 2810, but in FIG. 27B, it is immediately after the solenoid 2810 is excited. In FIG. 27C, the state in which the tip member 2820 is arranged in the middle position of the movement range is arranged in the state in which the tip member 2820 is most attracted to the solenoid 2810 (final arrival position when the solenoid 2810 is excited). The respective states are shown. Note that in the state shown in FIG. 27A, the slide plate 2840 constitutes a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second detection sensor 2255, and in the state shown in FIG. 27C, the slide plate 2840 is , An open state that allows the ball to enter the second detection sensor 2255.

As shown in FIG. 27A, when the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state, the regulation member 2600 is in the ejected state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restriction member 2600 from being stored due to the action of the second variable winning device 2800 when the solenoid 2810 is not excited. That is, even when the second variable winning device 2800 is added as in the present embodiment, the control mode that does not cause the operation of the solenoid 2810 (maintains non-excitation) (for example, the control mode of the first embodiment). Thereby, it is possible to configure a jackpot game similar to that described in the first embodiment.

Further, when the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 or the second storage channel 2251, the sphere can be discharged from the first variable winning device 2000 by switching to the state of FIG. 27(a).

As shown in FIG. 27B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the displacement of the tip member 2820 causes the slide plate 2840 to start displacement via the transmission member 2830 and the transmission rod portion 2860 to start displacement via the intervening rod portion 2850. To do. Here, in the present embodiment, since the contacting portions of the intervening rod portion 2850 and the transmission rod portion 2860 are slightly spaced apart in the state of FIG. The operation of the rod portion 2860 is started at substantially the same time.

When the transmission rod portion 2860 is displaced downward by being pushed by the end portion of the interposing rod portion 2850, the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 applies a load in the downward direction to the second extending portion 2640 of the regulating member 2600. As a result, the regulation member 2600 is slightly pushed down, and is in a state in the middle of the discharge state and the storage state.

As shown in FIG. 27C, when the tip member 2830 has moved, the transmission rod portion 2860 is pushed down by the intervening rod portion 2850 to the end position, and the regulating member 2600 is maintained in the stored state. As shown in FIG. 27C, the intervening rod portion 2850 slides so that the inclined surface faces the transmission rod portion 2860 and the inclined surface passes through the transmission rod portion 2860. The load applied toward 2850 can flow in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of intervening rod portion 2850.

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the interposition rod portion 2850 from changing along the moving direction of the interposition rod portion 2850 due to the change in the load applied to the transmission rod portion 2860 via the regulation member 2600. From this, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the tip member 2820 via the regulation member 2600 from varying, and therefore, the solenoid 2810 for maintaining the slide plate 2840, which changes state due to the displacement of the tip member 2820, in the open state. It is possible to prevent the driving force of the motor from changing. As a result, the driving force required for the solenoid 2810 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the first embodiment, the displacement in the sliding direction caused by the solenoid 2810 is used as it is as the displacement of the transmission rod portion 2860, and the state of the regulating member 2600 is even changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness of the operation of the regulating member 2600 to the switching of the excitation mode to the solenoid 2810. As a result, fine adjustment of the state change timing of the restriction member 2600 is possible, and it is possible to suppress deviation between the actual discharge number and the control value of the discharge number designated for each interval time between rounds in the jackpot game. The number of discharged pieces can be stabilized.

FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 2000 taken along the line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. As shown in FIG. 28, the tangent line of the contact portion between the lower end portion of the transmission rod portion 2860 and the facing surface 2641 of the regulation member 2600 forms an angle with the moving direction (vertical direction) of the transmission rod portion 2860. Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring (not shown) that biases the regulating member 2600 toward the disposition in the discharged state effectively acts on the transmission rod portion 2860.

Therefore, if the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the open state (see FIG. 27C) to the closed state (see FIG. 27A) and the regulation by the interposition rod portion 2850 is released, the urging force of the torsion spring is generated. Thus, the transmission rod portion 2860 can be raised, and the transmission rod portion 2860 can be maintained at the standby position (see FIG. 27A).

FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol in the present embodiment.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 29) in the present embodiment is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is each big hit. It is defined in association with the type and the type of the entrance that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

In addition, the jackpot type defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), Since it is the same as the one described in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. In the following, in the present embodiment, the case where the special symbol 2 is drawn by a lottery (lottery based on the entrance into the second entrance 640) explain.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with the jackpot d (see 202b21 in FIG. 29).

When the big hit d is reached, a 15-round big hit game is executed in a fourth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the player can receive a payout amount of about 2250 prize balls plus a limited amount of increase.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 99”, the big hit e is associated and defined (see 202b22 in FIG. 29).

When it becomes the big hit e, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed by the fifth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the first variable winning device 2000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is 2250 prize balls plus a limited amount of increase, but the difficulty level of increasing the number of payouts is greater than that of the fourth operation pattern. Depending on the timing at which the payout number is increased, the time required for the big hit game is configured to greatly exceed the case of the big hit d.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 is drawn in the lottery (the lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 2000 changes according to the jackpot type. Due to the difference in the operation pattern, the number of big hit rounds can be made invariable, while the number of payouts can be made different, and the time required for the big hit game can be changed.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot e, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the 1st to 7th rounds). When a predetermined number of balls or more are put into the first variable winning device 2000, an extra payout amount is deducted in the subsequent specific round game R (round game R of the eighth round) and the progress of the eighth round is advanced. It is configured to maximize the time required. On the other hand, in a round game R after a specific round game R, the player can obtain the balls of the increased amount paid out by inserting a predetermined number or more of balls into the first variable winning device 2000 without being deducted. Is configured as follows.

In this case, in the case of the jackpot e, the game method in which the player can obtain the highest profit as the profit including the time efficiency is to hold the specified number of prizes up to the eighth round, and to round game R after the ninth round. The aim is to increase the number of payouts with the aim of winning more than the specified number. Therefore, depending on which round of the round game R, it is possible to switch whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to put a predetermined number or more of balls in the first variable winning device 2000, and the player's attention to the jackpot game. Can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 30(b) is a view showing the fifth operating pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1 specific winning opening 1000a and the 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating with the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot d, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). Thus, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means holds the open/close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Drive control is performed, and after the lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the second identification. The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

The first interval time between rounds Int1 is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150, as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passage of the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (eg, 11 or 12) in each round game R can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, the number of balls exceeding 10 in each round game R has won the second specific winning port 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the number of balls that has exceeded the number is left in the storage channel 1231.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of pools when the ball is inserted from the side of the second storage channel 2251 is 14, so in the jackpot game of jackpot d, the number of prizes exceeding the specified number is 15 rounds. It is limited to 4 through the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to limit the upper limit of the number of payouts (the number of payouts due to over-winning) that is equal to or more than the specified number and that can be acquired by the player who performs the big hit d jackpot to 60 (=15×4C). As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of payouts from greatly changing due to differences in the game mode (launch timing, launch interval, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

Similarly thereafter, the third round to the fifteenth round of the round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between the round games R being repeated, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the solenoid 2810 is displaced to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid 2810 drive-controls the timer means to keep the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot e, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the fifth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). Thus, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the second identification. The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

The first interval time between rounds Int1 is set as the time for discharging ten balls from the discharge port 1150, as described above in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, depending on the timing of passage of the second specific winning opening 2255a, more than 10 balls (eg, 11 or 12) in each round game R can be won in the second specific winning opening 2255a. It is possible. However, on the other hand, since the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the first interval time Int1 between rounds is 10, the number of balls exceeding 10 in each round game R has won the second specific winning port 2255a. Immediately after the start of the round game R, the number of balls that has exceeded the number is left in the storage channel 1231.

Thereafter, similarly, the third round to the seventh round of the round game R are repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so as to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

When the round game R of the seventh round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. After the passage of, the eighth round game R is started.

In the eighth round, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the eighth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state, and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the eighth round game R is completed.

Here, in the round game R before the seventh round, if the number of balls exceeding the specified number has passed through the second specific winning opening 2255a, at the start of the round game R of the eighth round, the number of balls exceeding the specified number is reached. Since the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231, in the round game R of the eighth round, only the winning number of the prescribed number is subtracted from the remaining number (the number exceeding the prescribed number in the seventh round) Therefore, the payout of prize balls including the eighth round is made uniform to the payout of the specified number of prize balls up to the eighth round. In addition, since it is not possible to win a specified number of pachinko balls in the 8th round game R, after waiting for 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1, the next round It will move to the game.

Therefore, the player loses the feeling that the extra prize balls that were paid out up to the 7th round are gone, and the time loss that the round game R of the 8th round is prolonged longer than necessary. Will be received. As a result, by the seventh round, it is possible to encourage the player to carefully play the game so as not to win the balls exceeding the specified number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning of the balls exceeding the specified number, and it is possible to enhance the fairness of the game.

In the seventh round, if there is no winning over the specified number of balls, the specified number of balls can be passed through one specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the eighth round, and the specified number of balls will be paid out. It is possible to complete the eighth round game R without waiting for the maximum length (30 seconds) of the first operation time T1 of each round. Therefore, the specified number of prize balls can be paid out while the round game R is rapidly advanced.

Therefore, in the jackpot game of jackpot e, it is in the interest of the player to intentionally suppress the winning exceeding the specified number until the seventh round. Therefore, the attention of the player in the game up to the seventh round can be kept high.

When the jackpot game R in the eighth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to keep the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses, and the first interval between rounds. After the lapse of time Int1, the ninth round game R is started. It should be noted that at the start of the ninth round game R, it is possible to make a state in which no sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

In the ninth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Is controlled to drive the slide plate 2840 to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the ninth round of the round game R, The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the ninth round game R is completed.

Thereafter, similarly, the 10th to 15th round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between rounds interposed between each round game R, and the slide plate 2840 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is driven and controlled to be displaced and open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drive-controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

In the round game R after the ninth round, since the opening/closing plate 1300 does not open and close, the prize balls paid out by the balls winning the second specific winning opening 2255a in excess of the specified number after the ninth round are , Can be received by the player without being deducted.

Therefore, when performing the jackpot game of jackpot e, the jackpot game R is controlled so as not to exceed the specified number in the jackpot game R until the seventh round, and is defined in the jackpot game R after the ninth round. Aiming to win over the second specific winning opening 2255a in excess of the number is a gaming method that allows the player to obtain the largest profit when considering profit including time efficiency.

That is, in the round game R of each round, by inserting more than the specified number of balls into the second specific winning port 2255a, it is possible to cause the player to make a profit and to suffer the damage. As a result, different playability can be given to each round of the big hit game, and the attention of the player who performs the big hit game can be improved (it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being played aimlessly). ..

Further, according to this operation pattern, the round in which the player can receive the payout of the additional prize ball by substantially winning the specified number of balls in the second specific winning port 2255a is actually performed after the ninth round. Can be restricted. As a result, it is possible to narrow the timing at which the number of payouts changes due to the difference in the game mode (the timing of launching, the interval between launches, etc.), and it is possible to prevent the payout balls from greatly changing. Therefore, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the player can enjoy the profit fairly regardless of the experience value of the player.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the balls that reach the flow path forming portion when the open/close plate 1300 is in the closed state and flow down to the downstream of the open/close plate 1300 in the open state fall as they are. The first variable winning device 3000 in 1 is configured such that when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the falling of the balls is delayed and some of the balls can be won in the first specific winning port 1000a. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

31 is a front view of the first variable winning device 3000 according to the third embodiment, FIG. 32 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 31, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the front plate 3200.

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the first variable winning device 3000 includes an opening/closing plate 1300, a power transmission member 1400, a driving device 1500, a restricting member 1600, and a rear cover 1700, which are the same as those in the first embodiment. A main body member 3100 and a front cover plate 3200, which are slightly different from those of the first embodiment, are provided. Note that FIG. 32 illustrates the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300.

The main body member 3100 is added to the configuration (the thin plate member 1110, the housing portion 1120, the holding hole 1130, the protruding portion 1140, the discharge port 1150, the rotation support portion 1160, and the support claw portion 1170) included in the main body member 1100 of the first embodiment. , An additional winning port 3181 arranged in a manner of being continuously connected to the left side wall of the front cover 3200 on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and an upward direction from the left side wall part of the additional winning port 3181 in front view. And a curved extension plate 3182 that is curved and extended.

The additional winning opening 3181 is a winning opening for discharging the ball flowing down the game area from the upstream side to the back side of the game board 13, and the upper limit of 15 is obtained by the ball entering the additional winning opening 3181. The number of prize balls will be paid out. In this embodiment, 11 balls are set to be paid out.

The curved extension plate 3182 is a plate that restricts passage of a ball flowing down through the game area with a gap in the game area as viewed in the up-down direction being equal to or less than the diameter of the ball, and extends in a rib shape from the thin plate member 1110 to the front side. .. Further, the curved extension plate 3182 is formed in a shape that descends from the middle abdomen to the left in front view and descends from the middle abdomen to the right in front view.

The front cover plate 3200 is provided between the side wall part 1220 and the storage part 1230 in addition to the configuration (the thin plate member 1210, the side wall part 1220, the storage part 1230, and the detection sensor 1240) included in the front cover plate 1200 of the first embodiment. In the region (3), the fall delay plate 3250 is provided extending from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the back surface side.

The drop delay plate 3250 is arranged on the front side of the movement path of the opening/closing plate 1300 so as to avoid interference with the opening/closing plate 1300, is arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 1300, and is a linear plate parallel to the axial direction. The extended plate portion 3251 that is a plate-shaped portion and extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210, and has a concave curved upper surface. And a formed rolling arc portion 3252.

The drop delay plate 3250 has an elongated shape to the left and right, and decelerates so that it takes about 2 seconds or more for the sphere to flow down a distance half the length of the plate (including bouncing and rolling down). It is formed from the shape to be formed. The opening/closing plate 1300 is formed in such a manner that when the sphere flows down a distance that is half the length of the plate in the left-right direction, it flows down in 1 second or less.

As shown in FIG. 32, the extended plate portion 3251 is a surface on the side facing the main body member 3100, and is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the width of separation from the main body member 3100 becomes longer as it approaches the detection sensor 1240. A facing surface 3251a and a terminating surface 3251b, which is a surface facing a surface facing the side wall portion 1220 of the housing portion 1230 and is formed with a space equal to or larger than a diameter of a sphere between the housing surface 1230 and the housing portion 1230, are provided.

The distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is such that the radius of the sphere in the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (left side in FIG. 32). In the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere in the state of being switched to the radius of the sphere or more at the intermediate position (the middle position in the left-right direction in FIG. 32) and arranged on the most downstream side (right side in FIG. 32). The radius is greater than or equal to the radius of the sphere and less than the diameter of the sphere.

The rolling arc portion 3252 has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end portion of the facing surface 3251a extends in the front-rear direction and smoothly intersects with the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 3200. (The tangent line drawn on the plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the rolling arc portion 3252 as viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, the resistance when the ball rolls on the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-back direction can be reduced.

The sphere that has flowed down the inclined surface 1237 of the front cover plate 3200 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state rolls down on the rolling arc portion 3252 and flows down. At that time, as shown in FIG. 32, the path from the upstream position Pf1 on the most upstream side to the falling position Pf3, which is the position immediately before the ball falls apart from the rolling arc portion 3252 to the right, is moved to the downstream position Pf2. To flow down.

In the present embodiment, the distance between the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 is less than the diameter of the sphere, so that the sphere reaches the drop position Pf3. , The ball is prevented from passing through the rolling arc portion 3252 and falling. Therefore, the ball falls from the rolling arc portion 3252 only after the ball reaches the drop position Pf3. Hereinafter, a manner of flow of the sphere on the rolling arc portion 3252 will be described.

34(a) to 34(c) are cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 3000 taken along line XXXIVa-XXXIVa in FIG. Note that FIG. 34(b) shows the sphere arranged at the upstream position Pf1, and FIG. 34(c) shows the sphere arranged at the downstream position Pf2. Note that the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted in FIG. 34.

As shown in FIGS. 34(b) and 34(c), the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 rolls the rolling arc portion 3252 in the front-rear direction and is in contact with the plate portion 1310. The diametrical length of the sphere that has flown down to the contact portion with the drop delay plate 3250 (the length between the contact portion and the center of the sphere in the axial direction) is reduced as it flows down.

That is, at the upstream position Pf1 shown in FIG. 34(b), the radial length r1 to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is equal to the radius of the sphere. On the other hand, at the downstream position Pf2 shown in FIG. 34(c), the radial length r2 up to the portion where the sphere contacts the drop delay plate 3250 is shorter than the radius of the sphere.

These radial lengths r1 and r2 correspond to the radius of gyration of the sphere when the sphere rotates about an axis along the front-rear direction as a rotation axis. In other words, if the spheres have the same rotation speed, the shorter the radial lengths r1 and r2, the more the rolling speed of the sphere decreases (the sphere is delayed). According to the present embodiment, the facing surface 3251a is formed so as to be inclined in such a manner that the distance from the main body member 3100 increases toward the downstream side. Therefore, the radius of gyration of the sphere is gradually shortened as the sphere flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream side (the right side in FIG. 31). Therefore, the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream side.

Further, when the extension plate portion 3251 is extended along the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate 1300, in FIG. 34 showing the axial direction thereof, as compared with the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in ), the sphere is displaced downward. That is, as the ball flows down the drop delay plate 3250 toward the downstream side, the ball can be separated from the first specific winning port 1000a, so that the ball flowing down the drop delay plate 3250 can be deflected from the first specific winning port 1000a. it can.

As a result, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is not provided with the ball entrance prevention portion 1331, the balls flow down the drop delay plate 3250 to the downstream end and are directed toward the first specific winning opening 1000a with the same force. It is possible to prevent the situation of winning by winning by flying.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 35 in which the opening/closing plate 1300 moves upward to the open state while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250. 35(a) and 35(b) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 3000, and FIG. 35(c) is a first variable winning device 3000 on the line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35(b). FIG. Note that FIG. 35(a) illustrates the open/close plate 1300 in a closed state, and FIGS. 35(b) and 35(c) illustrate the open/close plate 1300 in an open state. In FIG. 35(c), the open/close plate 1300 is illustrated. The outer shapes of the plate portion 1310 and the sphere in the closed state are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the illustration of the rear cover 1700 is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 35( a) and FIG. 35( b ), an example of a sphere that has entered the flow path forming portion of the first variable winning device 3000 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 35( a ), when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball landed on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 moves to the right in the front view along the extending direction of the extending plate portion 3251. When the opening/closing plate 1300 maintains the closed state as it is, it drops after reaching the drop position Pf3. At this time, the rolling speed of the ball can be gradually reduced by the action of the extending plate portion 3251 described above, the rolling time of the ball can be maintained for a long time, and the attention to the ball can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 35( b ), when the opening/closing plate 1300 moves up (rotates) toward the open state while the ball rolls, the ball pressed by the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 1310 rolls. It smoothly moves up along the arc shape of the moving arc portion 3252. As described above, since the tangent to the surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 in the portion where the ball abuts at the start of the movement of the ball faces the front-rear direction, the movement of the ball at the start of the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be smoothed. it can.

The downflow direction when the ball moves upward and rolls down the upper surface of the rolling surface 1311 to flow down is parallel to the downflow direction illustrated in FIG. Therefore, compared with the case where the downward flow direction of the ball changes completely before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, it is possible to mitigate the discomfort felt by the player who visually recognizes the motion of the ball before and after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300. it can.

In this way, the sphere is opened by the upward movement of the opening/closing plate 1300 from the state in which the sphere is arranged below the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the open state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 35(c)). By pushing back (backflowing) above the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, a ball that is placed below the opening/closing plate 1300 and is in a state in which it is impossible to win the first specific winning opening 1000a once is brought to a state in which it is possible to move to the first specific winning opening 1000a by moving upward. Since it can be returned, the interest of the player can be improved.

In other words, FIG. 35(a) and FIG. 35(b) both show the state in which the sphere is arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240 because the sphere may still pass through the detection sensor 1240. Can be said. That is, due to the action of the drop delay plate 3250, the sphere can be continuously maintained on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 even after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed.

Further, even when the winning in the first specific winning opening 1000a is impossible, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 flows down in the direction approaching the first specific winning opening 1000a. The player can have an expectation that the player may win the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the attention of the player can be maintained.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the opening/closing plate 1300 forms a closed state, the falling of a ball that has reached the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 is delayed, and when the opening/closing plate 1300 next changes to the open state, the rolling surface 1311. By making it possible to revive above, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball that has arrived in front of the opening/closing plate 1300 during the inter-round interval time in the jackpot game will win the first specific winning opening 1000a in the next round game. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and entering the first out port 66 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the opening of the opening/closing plate 1300 from being obstructed due to the sphere being arranged on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300. That is, in a structure in which a sphere can freely flow down the front side of the opening/closing plate as in a conventional gaming machine, the opening/closing plate operates so that the sphere is sandwiched between the opening/closing plate and the glass plate, thereby opening/closing. There is a problem in that the opening of the board is obstructed, which may cause a loss to the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the ball rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 in front of the opening/closing plate 1300, the separation distance between the rotating shaft of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the ball is kept substantially constant (limit). can do. Therefore, as compared with the case where the ball freely flows down on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distance between the rotating shaft and the ball freely changes, the ball is sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the glass plate to open and close. The risk that the operation of the plate 1300 is disturbed can be reduced. In addition, in the present embodiment, compared with the arrangement of the spheres, which may be sandwiched between the glass plate and the opening/closing plate 1300 during the change of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 may be hindered, the position may be slightly higher. The drop delay plate 3250 is formed in such a manner that the sphere is maintained at the position.

36(a) and 36(b) are schematic diagrams showing the flow-down mode of the sphere that has reached the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 36(a), the flow-down mode of two balls that have reached the first variable winning device 3000 when the ball is left unattended is shown in time series, and in FIG. 36(b), for example, the first ball A ball when two balls reach the first variable winning device 3000 in a row by performing a special hitting method (so-called "twisting") to hit the ball weakly and hit the second ball strongly. The flow-down mode of is illustrated in time series.

As shown in FIG. 36( a ), when the ball is left unattended and the first ball P 1 and the second ball P 2 reach the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 with a predetermined gap, When the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state by P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a, the ball P2 can still be placed on the upstream side of the drop delay plate 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time until the ball P2 completely flows down the drop delay plate 3250, and thus it is easy to maintain the ball on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 until the opening/closing plate 1300 is next opened. You can

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36(b), when two balls reach the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 in a row, the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed by the ball P1 winning the first specific winning opening 1000a. When the state is switched to the state, the ball P2 is arranged in the vicinity of the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 (fall position Pf3), and therefore it is not possible to wait until the opening/closing plate 1300 next becomes the open state, and the ball P2 is delayed in falling. It falls from the plate 3250.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as compared with the case where two balls are continuously flowed down by a special hitting method, two balls are flown down at a predetermined interval by hitting (normal hitting). This makes it easier to receive the action of the drop delay plate 3250 (changing the ball that has reached the front surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 during the round-to-round interval time so that it can enter the first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, it is possible to suppress a game caused by a special hitting method such as twisting.

FIG. 37 is a partial front view of the first variable winning device 3000. In FIG. 37, the state immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed from the closed state to the open state is illustrated, and a ball that bounces upward when the opening/closing plate 1300 collides with the opening/closing plate 1300 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, when the ball lands on the open/close plate 1300 in the open state, the bouncing as shown in FIG. 37 does not occur, and the ball landed on the open/close plate 1300 is repelled while the open/close plate 1300 is moving upward. Only, the sphere bounces in the manner shown in FIG.

The subsequent flow-down mode of the bounced ball is limited to either returning to the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 again or winning the additional winning opening 3181 along the curved extension plate 3182 as shown in FIG. 37. To be done. Therefore, the bouncing ball allows the player to receive the payout of the prize ball. Therefore, a situation in which the ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing during the switching of the opening/closing plate 1300 to the opening state eventually enters the first outlet 66, and the player cannot make a profit. Can be prevented.

Further, even when a ball is won in the additional winning opening 3181, a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls can be won separately in the first specific winning opening 1000a. The payout by winning in the mouth 3181 becomes a prize ball (additional profit) paid out in excess of the specified number. That is, it is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained by the player depending on whether or not the ball reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 at a special timing while the opening/closing plate 1300 is switching to the open state. It is possible to improve the attention to the ball flowing down in.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the probability variation state (high-probability state) of the special symbol is given as the added value after the jackpot is over, regardless of the difference in the flow-down mode of the balls entering the first variable winning device 1000. However, the first variable winning device 4000 according to the fourth embodiment includes a probability variation determination unit that performs determination regarding the right acquisition of the transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol by the difference in the flow mode of the sphere. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 39, the vicinity of the first variable winning device 4000 is enlarged and shown. As shown in FIG. 39, in the present embodiment, a transparent window is formed in the game board 13 in the lower part of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 4000, and the probability variation is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The determination unit 4800 is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 39, the first variable winning device 4000 has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment (main body member 1100, front cover plate 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, drive device 1500, restriction member 1600). And a rear cover 1700), and further includes a new probability variation determination unit 4800 in the fourth embodiment.

The probability variation determination unit 4800 is a flow path through which the balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 flow down, and a communication path 4810 extending vertically downward, and a bifurcated flow path communicating with the lower end of the communication path 4810. The probability variation determination flow channel 4820, which is a road, the specific region 4830 that is arranged to communicate with the flow channel on the left side of the probability variation determination flow path 4820, and the specific region 4830 that is communicated with the flow channel on the right side of the front view. A non-specific area 4840, a distribution device 4850 that is disposed so as to be able to interfere with the game ball at the branch portion of the probability variation determination flow path 4820, a specific area detection sensor 4860 that detects passage of the game ball in the specific area 4830, A non-specific area detection sensor 4870 that detects passage of a game ball in the specific area 4540 is mainly provided.

The communication passage 4810 is formed from a length in which approximately one second elapses before the ball entering from the discharge port reaches the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

The distribution device 4850 is disposed so as to project inside the stochastic fluctuation determination flow path 4820, and causes the sphere to flow down to the specific region 4830 (form an open state) and to flow to the non-specific region 4840 (closed state). A distribution operation member 4851 that is operable between a closed position (to be formed) and a solenoid 4852 that drives the distribution operation member 4851 are mainly provided.

It is only in the special round during the jackpot game (fifth round in this embodiment) that the probability variation determination unit 4800 makes a determination regarding the right acquisition of the transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In the special round, the sorting operation member 4851 is moved to the right for a time that allows the game ball to pass. At this time, the specific region 4830 is in the open state and the non-specific region 4840 is in the closed state. When the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state). In the present embodiment, in a high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 easily.

In the present embodiment, in a low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/99, and in a high probability state of the special symbol (probably changed state of the special symbol), for example, 40. It is judged to be a jackpot of a special symbol with a probability of one.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific region 4830, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 50 times, and the special symbol lottery 50 times. It is configured to be set to the normal state after the end.

In the present embodiment, five types of "special jackpot", "big jackpot E", "big jackpot F", "big jackpot G", and "big jackpot f" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols (see FIG. 40). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 4000 or It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 40) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 indicates that each big hit type and special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the drawing of symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, in the case where the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29". Is defined in association with jackpot D (see 202b41 in FIG. 40).

When the big hit D is reached, a five-round big hit game is executed in the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot E is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “30 to 49” (see 202b42 in FIG. 40).

When the jackpot E is reached, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the seventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls and can rarely acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability variation state (high probability state).

The jackpot F is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 79” (see 202b43 of FIG. 40).

When the jackpot F is reached, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99”, the big hit G is associated and defined (see 202b44 in FIG. 40).

When the big hit G is reached, a five-round big hit game is executed in the eighth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 750 prize balls, and can rarely obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probability variation state (high probability state).

As described above, in the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), there is a 50% probability that the special symbol has a right to change to the probability change state (high probability state). Can be reliably obtained. On the other hand, even with the remaining 50%, it is possible to rarely acquire the right to transition to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 94”, The jackpot f is associated and defined (see 202b45 in FIG. 40).

When it becomes the big hit f, the big hit game of 5 rounds is executed by the sixth operation pattern of the first variable winning a prize device 4000 and the distribution device 4850 as in the case of the big hit D. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 675 prize balls, and can almost certainly acquire the right to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

The jackpot g is defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “95 to 99” (see 202b45 of FIG. 40).

When the jackpot g is reached, five rounds of jackpot games are executed in the tenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 600 prize balls, and can rarely obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the first variable winning device 4000 and the sorting device 4850 have a sixth probability with a probability of 95%. Operates in an operating pattern. At this time, since it is possible to almost certainly obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64). It is advantageous for the player as compared to the case of a big hit. Therefore, in order to win the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player plays the right-handed game. To do.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit becomes longer (1 Seconds × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it becomes easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol can be transitioned to the probability variation state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when it is a jackpot, the jackpot f (almost certainly a transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state)) It is easy for the player to obtain a large number of prize balls, because the probability of a special symbol that is likely to become a big hit) is likely to be repeated. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the sixth operation pattern, and FIG. 41(b) is a first specific winning combination in the seventh operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the sixth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot D or jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the sixth operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled to be held, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the second round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the third round game R is started.

In the third round, similarly to the start of the second round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the third round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the third round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the open/close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown), and then the third opening time is reached. After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 second in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is held in the closed state again. 4852 is drive-controlled to cause the sorting operation member 4851 to perform a short-time operation. This predetermined time is set as a time during which the sphere is not allowed to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round game R is finished.

Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which the specified number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shoot balls one by one at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to shoot a specified number of balls. That is, normally, it is only possible to put about 5 balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 will be filled with about 5 winnings that can be made in 3 seconds, so that the feeling of strangeness given to the player due to the fact that the time of the fourth round game R is shorter than other rounds is suppressed. can do.

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the elapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again removed. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to perform a long-time operation.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

In the second opening time OP2, when the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is less than 7 (when the number of storage is up to 6), all the discharged spheres are the probability variation determination flow channel 4820. If the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more (when the number of stored pieces is 7 or more), it is at least one of the discharged spheres. It is set as a time shorter than the time required for all the balls to pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

In the present embodiment, the round game R of the fourth round is started in a state where five balls remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, even if the round game of the fourth round ends in the second operation time T2, The number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be easily set to 7 or more. Therefore, since the distribution operation member 4851 can be opened while the sphere remains in the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the remaining sphere can be made to flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

Here, unlike the related art, in this operation pattern, it is not necessary to close the opening/closing plate 1300 while the sorting operation member 4851 is closed before the operation in the fifth round game R. The opening/closing plate 1300 can be operated without a feeling of strangeness. This will be described below.

In the conventional technique, when the specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the round game R is finished before the operation of the sorting operation member 4581 is started, the sorting operation member 4851 is opened. Although there is a possibility that a ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a and the player cannot obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, there is a possibility that a defect may occur. In order to prevent this, it was necessary to close the opening/closing plate 1300 while the distribution operation member 4851 was in the closed state before the operation (opened twice within one round).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game property is to switch whether or not the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a by the round game R of the round immediately before the fifth round can be inserted into the specific region 4830. Even when the ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 1000a while the distribution operation member 4851 is closed before the operation, the distribution operation member 4851 is opened. Since the ball toward the specific area 4830 has already won in the first variable winning device 4000, the player can acquire the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

Therefore, in the present operation pattern, in the fifth round game R, even while the distribution operation member 4851 is in the closed state before the operation, by opening the open/close plate 1300, the open/close plate 1300 operates. On the other hand, while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable, prevent the problem that the player cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state) due to the prize mode. can do.

In addition, since the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round stays in the storage channel 1231 for the first operating time T1, It is possible to prevent a ball that has won the specific winning opening 1000a from entering the probability variation determination flow path 4820 while the sorting operation member 4851 is open. As a result, the player can obtain the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the manner of winning the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round (special round). It is possible to prevent the problem that the capability changes.

<When operating in the seventh operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the seventh operation pattern. It should be noted that until the end of the round game R of the third round, it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. The drive mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as the sixth operation pattern.

When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, unlike the start of the other rounds, the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to win the first specific prize. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the open/close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 performs measurement until a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown), and then the third opening time is reached. After OP3 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (0.1 second in the present embodiment), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is held in the closed state again. 4852 is drive-controlled to cause the sorting operation member 4851 to perform a short-time operation. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round game R is finished.

Here, the second operation time T2 is set as a time during which the specified number of balls cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shoot balls one by one at the fastest interval of 0.6 seconds, but it takes 6 seconds to shoot a specified number of balls. That is, normally, it is only possible to put about 5 balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3 seconds. Therefore, the round game R of the fourth round ends exclusively in 3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operating time T2.

On the other hand, in this operation pattern, 10 balls (all balls) are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, the storage channel 1231 is not filled with about 5 winnings possible in 3 seconds, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state in a state where the balls won in 3 seconds remain in the storage channel 1231. ..

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the elapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again removed. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to perform a long-time operation.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

In this operation pattern, the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fifth round R is about 5 balls, so for some rare reason, 8 or more balls in 3 seconds are the first specific winning prize. Unless all the discharged balls have passed through the probability variation determination flow path 4820, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced unless a prize is won in the mouth 1000a.

Therefore, since the sphere does not remain in the probability variation determination flow path 4820 when the distribution operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round is the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, and thus the sixth operation pattern is also in this operation pattern. It is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above.

Here, the difference between the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern is whether or not spheres can be stored up to near the fullness of the storage flow path 1231 during the fourth round game R. That is, it is possible to predict whether or not the player can acquire the right to transition to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the difference in the accumulation state of the balls, and thus the player can store it in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to improve the attention to the ball. As a result, the attention of the first variable winning device 4000 can be improved.

In addition, in the sixth operation pattern, if three or more balls enter by the fourth round of the round game R, it is possible to almost certainly obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. You can, but because the time of the round game R is short, the more familiar the player is to the game, the more the player fails to acquire the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol even in the sixth operation pattern. An easy situation is formed.

That is, an unfamiliar player is more likely to play the game while hitting the jackpot, while a player who is more accustomed to the game avoids hitting the ball in order to avoid wasted balls during the jackpot and is easy to stop between rounds. It is the difference caused by.

To be more specific, if the game is a hit-and-miss game, a plurality of balls are always flowing near the opening/closing plate 1300, and the winning of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the start of the fourth round game R. Since it occurs, there is enough room for three or more balls to enter if it lasts for 3 seconds. Therefore, an unfamiliar player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem.

On the other hand, when the round game R of the fourth round is started and the shooting is started, when the ball is stopped during the round so as to avoid the ball from flowing near the opening/closing plate 1300 during the interval period, there is certainly no dead ball. Although it can be suppressed, the ball does not reach the vicinity of the opening/closing plate 1300 until some time has passed since the start of the fourth round game R (for example, 2 seconds have not passed). Therefore, it becomes necessary to enter three or more balls in the remaining 1 second, and it becomes difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. Therefore, even a player who has become accustomed to the game can be encouraged to hit the ball during the jackpot game.

As described above, the sixth operation pattern has an inherent fear that a person who is more accustomed to the game may decrease the profit obtained depending on the launch mode. Therefore, regardless of whether the player is unfamiliar or unfamiliar, the player can be encouraged to play the game in the midst of a big hit, and the fairness of the profit obtained by the game can be secured.

On the other hand, on the other hand, after grasping the above-mentioned risks, it is possible to provide the player who stops the game between rounds with a jackpot game that requires concentration, which cannot be enjoyed by other pachinko machines 10. .. That is, the number of dead balls is reduced by performing the inter-round stop hitting in which the ball is calculated backward so that the ball flows into the first specific winning opening 1000a immediately after the opening of the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fourth round, and the ball is started. Meanwhile, it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In this case, the inter-rounds are stopped before the end of the third round game R, and the launch is started before the end of the third round game R. That is, while considering the randomness of the flow of the balls entering during the third round of the round game R, a high-level calculation is required to start the launch while predicting the entering timing. Therefore, when the timing at which the ball that has started the launch reaches the vicinity of the first specific winning opening 1000a is calculated, the player's interest can be improved.

FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 42(b) is a first specific winning combination in the ninth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot F, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the sorting operation member 4851 operate based on the eighth operation pattern. It should be noted that until the end of the round game R of the third round, it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above, so the description thereof will be omitted.

When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the elapse of the second interval time Int2, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). Then, after the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again arranged. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to perform a long-time operation.

Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (3 seconds which is the maximum value of the second operation time T2) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round game R is finished.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the round game R of the fourth round is the maximum value of the first operating time T1 of 30 seconds. Ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the elapse of the second opening time OP2, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again removed. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to perform a long-time operation. It should be noted that this opening operation is performed at the same time as the opening operation due to the elapse of the third opening time OP3.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage When the number is 7 or more), it is set as a time shorter than the time that at least a part of the discharged balls completely pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, the round game R of the fourth round is started with five balls remaining in the storage flow path 1231, so the round game R of the fourth round waits for the maximum value of the first operation time T1. If there are seven or more spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, the sorting operation member 4851 can be opened with the spheres remaining in the probability variation determination channel 4820. it can. Therefore, the remaining ball can be made to flow down to the specific region 4830, and the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round is the same as the sixth operation pattern described above, and thus the sixth operation pattern is also in this operation pattern. It is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the above.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot G, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the ninth operation pattern. It should be noted that until the end of the round game R of the third round, it is the same as the case of the jackpot D described above, so the description thereof will be omitted. The drive mode of the distribution device 4850 is the same as the eighth operation pattern.

When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the fourth round game R is started.

In the fourth round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until a timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined third opening time OP3 (32.3 seconds). Then, after the lapse of the third opening time OP3, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851 is again arranged. The solenoid 4852 is drive-controlled so as to maintain the closed state, and the sorting operation member 4851 is caused to perform a long-time operation.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the fourth round of the round game R, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fourth round game R is finished.

In this operation pattern, only five balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 in the interval immediately before the fourth round. Therefore, in the round game R of the fourth round, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the round game R of the fourth round is the maximum value of the first operating time T1 of 30 seconds. Ends with the passage of.

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round is executed. After the lapse of the first interval time Int1, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 0.2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a short time. Note that this short-time operation is set as an operation that does not allow the ball to pass through the specific area 4830.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

The third opening time OP3 is an interval immediately after the fourth round game R continues for the maximum value of the first operation time T1, and when seven or more balls are discharged from the discharge port 1150 (storage When the number is 7 or more), it is set as a time shorter than the time that at least a part of the discharged balls completely pass through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

In this operation pattern, the round game R of the fourth round is started in a state where no balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, so a specified number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fourth round. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to finish the fourth round game R without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1. However, as in the case where the round game R of the fourth round is ended by a specified number of winnings, if the fourth round game R is ended without waiting for the maximum value of the first operating time T1, in many cases Immediately after that, the displacing member 4851 is displaced after the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 passes through the probability variation determination flow path 4820.

On the other hand, when the distribution operation member 4851 waits for the fourth round game R up to the maximum value of the first operation time T1 and ends, if there are seven or more balls discharged in the interval immediately after that. The sphere can be made to flow down to the specific area 4830. Therefore, the player does not hurry to win the specified number of prizes, but the special number of balls is awarded to the player by allowing the specified number of balls to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a just before the end of the fourth round R. It is possible to acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of.

Further, as another method, by terminating the round game R of the fifth round immediately after the fourth round at an appropriate timing, the balls discharged in the interval immediately after the round game R of the fifth round are set in a specific area. The player can also acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability changing state (high probability state) by making it flow down.

Thus, according to this operation pattern, the player is allowed to change the probability of the special symbol (high probability state) at the discretion of the player (selection of the timing of winning the ball to the first specific winning port 1000a). Whether or not the right to transfer can be acquired can be different.

When the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

Here, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern is whether or not the operation time of the fourth round game R is designated. If the operating time is specified (in the case of the eighth operating pattern), by continuing the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a, no matter how the game is played, the player has a special symbol. Since the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) can be acquired, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

On the other hand, when the operation time is not designated (in the case of the ninth operation pattern), the player selects the operation time by himself/herself depending on the game mode (when the specified number of balls is to be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a). It may be possible to obtain the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol by selecting. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to concentrate on the round game R, improve the attention to the ball flowing down the game area, and give the player an uplifting feeling that he/she can obtain the probability variation state by himself/herself. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

As a feature of the sixth operation pattern to the ninth operation pattern, the interval immediately after the round game R of the third round is shorter than usual, and the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 and the fourth round game. When R is started, it can be mentioned that it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol. That is, when the number of prize balls obtained in the round game R of the fourth round is small, it is possible to realize a game property in which it is easy to acquire the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if the interval immediately after the third round of the round game R is long enough to discharge all the balls in the storage channel 1231, the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is granted. Hard to get. That is, when it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, it is possible to realize the gaming property that the payout of the prize balls obtained in the jackpot game increases. As a result, more balls can be prepared for the player to hit in the subsequent normal state, which makes it easier to suppress the player's cash investment.

These differences can be grasped by whether or not the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the fourth round, so at the start of the fourth round game R, the player expects the state after the jackpot game is over. can do. Then, even in the case of an operating pattern in which it is difficult to acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol depending on the ball entry mode. It is possible to obtain.

Here, in this embodiment, it is possible to maintain the concentration of the player during the jackpot game by pressing the player for selection. In other words, the game mode in which it is easy to acquire the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol is the exact opposite.

More specifically, in the case of the seventh operation pattern, in the fourth round game R, before the second operation time T2 (maximum 3 seconds) elapses, as many balls as possible are assigned to the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is more likely that you can get the right to move the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state) by winning the prize (it is profitable to win many balls from the start of the fourth round), while In the case of the operation pattern of 9, in the round game R of the fourth round, waiting for the specified number of balls to be won until the end of 30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1, is extended, and the period of the round game R is extended. As a result, the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol increases (there is a benefit in suppressing the winning of the ball at the start of the fourth round).

In this way, depending on how to win the ball in the round game R (game mode selected by the player), the possibility of acquiring the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol changes. Therefore, even if the jackpot game continues a plurality of times, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and maintain the concentration on the game.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the tenth operation pattern.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the 10th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot g, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 4852 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 operate based on the tenth operation pattern. Note that the description up to the end of the fourth round of the round game R is omitted because it is the same as in the case of the sixth operation pattern described above.

When the round game R of the fourth round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the lapse of the second interval time Int2, the round game R of the fifth round (special round) is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the sorting operation member 4851 until a predetermined second opening time OP2 (0.3 seconds) elapses by a timer means (not shown). After the second opening time OP2 has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, about 0.2 seconds), and after the predetermined time elapses, the distribution operation member 4851. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a short time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

In this operation pattern, since the opening operation of the sorting operation member 4851 after the elapse of the second opening time OP2 is a short-time operation, basically, the ball cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

Further, since the distribution operation member 4851 is opened during the fifth round of the round game R, if the round game can be finished early, the ball winning the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round flows down to the specific area 4830. There is a possibility of being made (for example, when the operation after the elapse of the third opening time OP3 is long), but in this operation pattern, the round game R of the fifth round starts in a state where the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231. As a result, the specified number of balls cannot be entered, and the fifth round game cannot be finished early. Therefore, the ball that has won the first specific winning opening 1000a in the fifth round game R cannot flow down to the specific area 4830.

When the round game R of the fifth round is finished, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between the rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The solenoids 1510 and 4852 are drive-controlled so that the big hit game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this operation pattern, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 in the round game R of the fifth round has the same portions as the sixth operation pattern described above, so that in the operation pattern as well, The same effect as the effect in the operation pattern of No. 6 can be exhibited.

Here, the main difference between the sixth operation pattern and the tenth operation pattern in the first specific winning opening 1000a is the length of the interval immediately after the fourth round game R. Since the patterns of the other parts are the same, it is difficult to grasp the difference, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000.

The tenth operation pattern causes the sphere to flow down to the specific region 4830 even if the storage channel 1231 can be filled in the fourth round game R in relation to the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern. They differ in that they cannot do it.

That is, by mixing the operation patterns, the player does not feel relieved even if he or she can fully store the balls in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R, and the discharged balls are in the specific area. You may be prompted to confirm whether to pass 4830. That is, in the jackpot game, the stage (first step) of whether or not the sphere can be stored in the storage channel 1231, and the sorting operation member 4851 operates before the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 passes. It can be divided into the stage (second step) of whether or not, and attention can be paid to different places for each stage. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game aimlessly, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 50. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a winning ball corresponding to the jackpot type can be obtained regardless of the progress state of the game in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but the first variable winning device in the fifth embodiment. 5000 is equipped with a ball exit adjusting device 5900 that makes it easier for a player to acquire more balls as the number of fluctuations until a big hit is won in a probability variation state (high probability state) of a special symbol is smaller. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 44 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a partial rear view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the first variable winning device 5000 arranged near the lower right corner of the game board 13 has a main body member 2100, a cover front plate 2200, as in the second embodiment. In addition to having the opening/closing plate 1300, the drive device 1500, and the regulation member 2600, a power transmission member 5400 slightly different from the second embodiment, a second variable winning device 5800, and a new one in this embodiment, A ball output adjusting device 5900 that mainly adjusts the ball output by causing the ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 to enter the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920 is provided.

The power transmission member 5400 includes a time difference forming portion 5423 that extends downward from the lower end of the rotation tip 1421 of the extension 1420 along the shape of the rotation tip 1421.

As shown in FIG. 45, the time difference forming portion 5423 has a lower end extending to a position where it abuts on the engaging portion 1333 of the open/close plate 1300 in the closed state when the solenoid 1510 is not excited.

The second variable winning device 5800 is configured such that, in addition to the configuration described in the second embodiment, an intervening rod portion 5850 with a slightly added shape and a transmission rod portion 2860 can be slid vertically in the left direction when viewed from the rear, By being pushed down to the branched portion of the intervening rod portion 5850 (the L-shaped portion in rear view added to the configuration of the intervening rod portion 2850 of the second embodiment), it is arranged so as to be able to contact the movable closing member 5931 of the ball exit adjusting device 5900. The pressing action portion 5870 is provided.

The exit adjusting device 5900 is formed so as to pass through the flow passage forming portion 5910 that causes the ball that has entered the second entrance 640 to flow down, and the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 2100 at the lower end portion of the flow passage forming portion 5910 to be stored. Mainly includes a communication hole 5920 arranged in such a manner that a sphere can flow into the flow path 1231 (opening diameter, arrangement), and an opening/closing member 5930 that opens/closes the communication hole 5920 in association with driving of the solenoids 1510 and 2810. Prepare for The downflow passage forming portion 5910 is arranged so as to pass through the rear surface side (the front side in FIG. 45) of the second variable winning device 5800, and is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding. Also, the illustration of the intermediate portion is omitted.

The downflow passage forming portion 5910 is a bifurcated flow path through which a ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640 flows down, and the opening at the lower end is disposed so as to face the communication hole 5920, and the ball moves to the communication hole 5920. After the adjustment flow path 5911 formed so as to be able to flow in and the number of spheres stored in the adjustment flow path 5911 exceed a prescribed number (30 in this embodiment), the ball is further entered into the second entrance 640. And a surplus sphere discharge flow path 5915 for discharging the formed spheres to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

The adjustment flow path 5911 is a deceleration flow path 5912 formed as a reverse U-shaped flow path in the rear view, which is curved by half a turn near the lower end, and the second entrance ball 640 from the upper end of the deceleration flow path 5912. It mainly includes a drop flow path 5913 that extends in the vertical direction toward the rear.

The shape of the deceleration flow path 5912 reduces the load given to the balls discharged from the communication holes 5920 from the subsequent balls that stay in the deceleration flow path 5912 in the opening direction of the communication holes 5920, regardless of the number of staying balls. be able to. That is, the ball discharged from the communication hole 5920 is subjected to a load due to the weight of the following ball from the following ball, and the deceleration flow path 5912 has a gentle inclination (close to horizontal) near the communication hole 5920. Therefore, the influence of the load due to its own weight can be reduced. Therefore, irrespective of the number of retained balls, the speed at which the balls immediately before the communication hole 5920 are discharged from the communication hole 5920 can be made uniform, and the load applied from the balls to the opening/closing member 5930 can be made uniform.

Since the drop flow path 5913 extends in the vertical direction, the falling ball does not undergo deceleration and falls freely. Therefore, when the balls enter the second ball entrance 640 consecutively, the preceding ball is decelerated earlier than the latter ball, and the latter ball is prevented from flowing down, so that the latter ball is erroneous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls from entering the surplus sphere discharge flow path 5915.

In the present embodiment, the adjustment flow path 5911 causes the balls to stay in order from the front of the communication hole 5920, and when the number of staying balls reaches 30, the upper end portion of the 30th ball is the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. The flow path length is designed to exceed the lower end of the inlet opening. Therefore, the 31st and subsequent balls enter the surplus ball discharge flow path 5915. In other words, a maximum of 30 balls stay in front of the communication hole 5920.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, after the jackpot game is over, the high-probability state of 30 revolutions is entered. During this time, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 easily, and the player can aim for the next big hit while suppressing the ball loss by advancing the game by a right-handed game. On the other hand, since the ball entering the second entrance 640 enters the adjustment flow path 5911, it stays in the adjustment flow path 5911 from the start of the high probability state toward the end of the high probability state. The sphere increases.

The opening/closing member 5930 is arranged at a position projecting to the inside of the communication hole 5920 when the solenoids 1510, 2810 are not excited, and closes the opening below the outer shape of the sphere, while either solenoid 1510, 2810 is excited. Accordingly, the movable closing member 5931 arranged at a position retracted to the outside of the communication hole 5920, and the movable closing member 5931 and the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 are connected to each other, and the movable closing member 5931 can be moved in the left-right direction when the solenoid 1510 is driven. A connecting rod portion 5932 supported by the thin plate member 1110, and a slide rail portion 5933 disposed at the tip of the connecting rod portion 5932 and supporting the movable closing member 5931 vertically and movably relative to the connecting rod portion 5932. An elastic spring 5934, one end of which is provided on the connecting rod portion 5932 and which applies a biasing force in the upward direction to the movable closing member 5931, is mainly provided.

46(a) and 46(b) are sectional views of the first variable winning device 5000 taken along the line XLVI-XLVI of FIG. 45. 46(a) shows the communication hole 5920 in an open state, and FIG. 46(b) shows the communication hole 5920 in a closed state.

As shown in FIG. 46( a ), when the movable closing member 5931 is retracted and a sphere can flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231 and stay there, up to the third ball AP 53 flows into the storage channel 1231. However, the sphere AP54 of the fourth ball is retained at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920.

In the jackpot game, a plurality of balls IP51 (only one ball is shown in FIG. 46) that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a in this state flow into the storage channel 1231, so that the communication hole The space for entering the ball AP54 into the storage channel 1231 is filled with the inflowing ball IP51. Therefore, the sphere retained at a position where it does not come out of the communication hole 5920 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 even after that, and is maintained at that position.

As shown in FIG. 46B, as the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are de-energized and the regulating member 2600 changes to the discharge state, the movable closing member 5931 extends from the overhang adjusting flow passage 5911 to the storage flow passage 1231. Inflow of spheres is restricted.

When the discharge of the spheres from the storage flow channel 1231 is completed, the state is switched to the state shown in FIG. 46(a) again, and the sphere AP54 that has been previously retained at the position where it has not come out from the communication hole 5920 becomes the first and the third sphere. The spheres up to flow into the storage channel 1231.

In the jackpot game, the inflow of spheres from the adjustment flow path 5911 to the storage flow path 1231 is repeated as described above, and the inflow is defined at a maximum of three per opening of the communication hole 5920. R.

With reference to FIG. 47, a case where the jackpot game proceeds by driving the solenoid 1510 will be described. 47(a) to 47(c) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. 47(a) to 47(c), the operations of the opening/closing plate 1300, the restriction member 2600, and the opening/closing member 5930 driven by the solenoid 1510 are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 47A, when the solenoid 1510 is excited, in FIG. 47B, the solenoid 1510 is deenergized and the tip of the time difference forming unit 5423 is located on the rear side of the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 47(b) is shown in FIG. 47(c), and FIG. 47(c) shows the state in which the time difference forming section 5423 is arranged above the engaging section 1333.

As shown in FIG. 47A, the communication hole 5920 is opened as the solenoid 1510 is excited, and the ball can pass therethrough.

When the state of FIG. 47( a) is changed to the state of FIG. 47( b ), the movable closing member 5931 moves along with the movement of the tip member 1520 to close the communication hole 5920, while the opening/closing plate 1300 is engaged. Since the portion 1333 still contacts the time difference forming portion 5423 of the power transmission member 5400 in the front-rear direction and the movement of the opening/closing plate 1300 is regulated, the regulation member 2600 maintains the stored state.

In the state shown in FIG. 47(c), the regulation member 2600 is in the discharge state, and the spheres retained in the storage channel 1231 are discharged. That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven, the communication hole 5920 can be closed before the discharge of the balls from the discharge port 1150 is started, so that the adjustment flow path can be controlled by the force of discharging the balls from the discharge port 1150. It is possible to prevent a sphere from flowing in from 5911.

48(a) and 48(b) are partial rear views of the first variable winning device 5000. In FIGS. 48A and 48B, the operations of the restricting member 2600 and the opening/closing member 5930 by driving the solenoid 2810 are illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 48A shows the solenoid 1510 and the solenoid 2810 in a non-excited state, and FIG. 48B shows the solenoid 2810 in an excited state.

As shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B, when the solenoid 2810 is excited, the pressing action portion 5870 pushes down the movable closing member 5931 to open the communication hole 5920. This allows the sphere to flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920. On the other hand, when the excitation of the solenoid 2810 is released, the movable closing member 5931 is moved upward by the urging force of the elastic spring 5934, and the communication hole 5920 is closed.

Therefore, when either the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened so that the sphere can flow into the storage channel 1231. On the other hand, when the solenoid 1510 or the solenoid 2810 is not excited, the communication hole 5920 is opened. It is closed and the flow into the storage channel 1231 is regulated.

In the jackpot game in which the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled by the mechanism described above, a fixed number of balls (up to three balls in the present embodiment) flow into the storage passage 1231 through the communication holes 5920.

In the present embodiment, in a low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/320, and in a high probability state of the special symbol (probably changed state of the special symbol), for example, 20 minutes. With a probability of 1, it is judged as a special jackpot. Then, if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, after the jackpot game is finished, the special symbol random change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 30 times, and the special symbol lottery 30 times. It is configured to be set to the normal state after the end. In the present embodiment, in a high probability state of the special symbol, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 easily.

In the present embodiment, three types of "big hit H", "big hit h", and "big hit i" are provided as big hit types of special symbols (see FIG. 49). Although the details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, so that the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 5000 can be changed. Composed.

FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 49) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each big hit type and special It is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the drawing of symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". Is defined in association with the jackpot H (see 202b51 in FIG. 49).

If the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 19", the big hit h Are defined in association with each other (see 202b52 in FIG. 49).

When it becomes the big hit H or big hit h, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the eleventh operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the player can pay out about 2250 prize balls, and can win a specified number of balls regardless of the timing of winning the jackpot, and can receive a specified upper limit payout.

If the special symbol 2 is a big hit in the lottery (lottery based on entering the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99", the big hit i Are defined in association with each other (see 202b53 in FIG. 49).

When it becomes the jackpot i, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the twelfth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 4000. In this case, the maximum value of the number of payouts of the prize balls and the time required for the jackpot game are variable according to the number of balls entered into the second entrance 640 until the jackpot is won.

That is, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), a prescribed number of prize balls can be paid out regardless of the timing of the big hit, If the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, depending on the number of entrances of the second entrance 640 until the jackpot Since the maximum value of the number of payouts and the time required for the jackpot game are variable, the amusement feature of winning a jackpot in a right-handed game is different from the payout of prize balls depending on when the jackpot of a right-handed game occurs. Sex can be added. As a result, it is possible to prevent the right-handed game from being played casually, and it is possible to improve the attention to each variation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, an opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 50(a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the second specific winning opening 2255a in the eleventh operation pattern, and FIG. 50(b) is a diagram showing the twelfth operating pattern in the twelfth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1 specific winning opening 1000a and the 2nd specific winning opening 2255a.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the 11th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot H or jackpot game of jackpot h, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the eleventh operation pattern.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). Thus, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the second specific winning opening 2255a. Then, the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the slide plate 2840 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so as to close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the first round game R is completed.

In the round game R of the first round, with the opening of the second specific winning opening 2255a, the communication hole 5920 is opened, and up to three spheres flow into the storage channel 1231 (see FIGS. 46 and 48), but When storing the spheres from the second storage channel 2251 to the storage channel 1231, since 13 spheres can be stored downstream of the second detection sensor 2255, the number of spheres (1 to 1) flowing from the communication hole 5920 can be stored. Even if the number is 3), the round game R can be finished by winning the specified number (10C).

When the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means holds the open/close plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. Is controlled, and after the elapse of the third interval time Int3 between rounds, the second round game R is started. Here, at intervals of 3 seconds, a maximum of 15 balls can be discharged from the discharge port 1150, so at the end of the first round game R, a part of the storage channel 1231 and the second storage channel 2251. It is possible to discharge all the balls (up to 14) that can be stored in series.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the slide plate 2840 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the second identification. The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 2255a, and the slide plate 2840 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled to displace the slide plate 2840 to the closed state and close the second specific winning opening 2255a, and the second round game R is completed.

Similarly thereafter, the third round to the fifteenth round of the round game R is repeated with the first interval time Int1 between the rounds between the round games R being repeated, and the slide plate 2840 is in the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 2810 is driven and controlled so that the solenoid 2810 is displaced to open and close the second specific winning opening 2255a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round is completed, the solenoid 2810 is drive-controlled so that the timer means holds the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

According to this operation pattern, three spheres flow from the adjustment flow path 5911 into the storage flow path 1231 for each drive operation (excitation) of the solenoid 2810. Therefore, even if the maximum number (30) of balls are stored in the adjustment flow path 5911, the entire flow is stored until the end of the jackpot game (the end of the 10th round game R). Since it is possible to enter the ball into the path 1231, the jackpot game can be ended in a state where the ball does not remain in the storage channel 1231.

<When operating in the 12th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot i, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids 1510 and 2810 so that the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 operate based on the twelfth operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 holds the opening/closing plate 1300 and the slide plate 2840 in a closed state until the timer means (not shown) elapses a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). Thus, the solenoids 1510 and 2810 are drive-controlled, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started. Note that the description up to the fourth round game R is omitted because it is the same as the eleventh operation pattern.

When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 2810 so as to hold the slide plate 2840 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 (3.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the elapse of the third interval time Int3, the fifth round game R is started.

In the fifth round, the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Is controlled to cause the opening/closing plate 1300 to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the round game R of the fifth round, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the fifth round game R is completed.

Here, even in the round game R of the fifth round, the balls can be allowed to flow from the communication hole 5920, but unlike the fourth round, the balls enter from the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, when the inflow of balls from the communication hole 5920 is actually performed, it is not possible to win a specified number of balls. Therefore, the number of award balls that can be obtained in the fifth round game R of this operation pattern is smaller than the award balls that can be obtained in the same round game R during the eleventh operation pattern, and the first ball Since the end of the round game R is waited until the operation time T1 elapses, the time until the end of the jackpot game becomes long.

Thereafter, similarly, the round game R of the sixth round to the fifteenth round is repeated with the third interval time Int3 between the rounds interposed between the round games R, and the open/close plate 1300 is between the closed state and the open state. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to be displaced and open and close the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Then, when the round game R of the final round ends, the solenoid 1510 drives and controls the timer means to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the third interval time Int3 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. Then, the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

In this operation pattern, a decrease in the number of prize balls that can occur in the subsequent round game R from the fifth round game R and an extension of the round time means that the balls flow from the communication hole 5920 into the storage channel 1231. The decrease in the number of prize balls and the extension of the round time change depending on the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 at the start of the jackpot. The number of spheres remaining in the adjustment flow path corresponds to the number of spheres that have passed through the second ball entrance 640, while the number of balls that have passed through the second ball entrance 640 causes the special symbol 2 to be drawn (second ball entrance Since it is possible to receive a lottery based on the entry into 640), the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 is related to the number of lottery of the special symbol 2.

In the following description, in this operation pattern, the number of lottery of the special symbol 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911. Will be explained assuming that they are the same number.

As described above, in the jackpot game of this operation pattern, three balls flow into the storage channel 1231 by opening the first specific winning opening 1000a or the second specific winning opening 2255a once. That is, by the round game R of the fourth round, a maximum of 12 spheres have already flowed into the storage channel 1231. Therefore, in the round game after the fifth round, the balls flow into the storage channel 1231 through the communication hole 5920, and the jackpot game is started in a state where 13 or more balls are stored in the adjustment channel 5911. This is the case. In other words, it is a case where the jackpot game is started in a state where the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) is received 13 times or more after the transition to the high probability state. ..

Therefore, if the jackpot is won before the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) is received 12 times after the transition to the high probability state, the number of prize balls decreases. Since the extension of the round time does not occur, it is possible to improve the player's attention to winning the jackpot by the 12th drawing.

Also, after the 13th drawing, the number of prize balls will decrease in each drawing, and the round time will be extended in every 3 drawing, so the player wonders how many drawing can win the jackpot. You can improve your attention.

That is, for example, if a jackpot is won in a state where 14 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (14th lottery of the special symbol 2), it is stored through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of spheres flowing into the flow channel 1231 is two, the number of winning balls in this round is eight. Further, when a big hit is obtained in a state where 15 balls remain in the adjustment flow path 5911 (the 15th lottery of the special symbol 2), the storage flow path passes through the communication hole 5920 at the start of the fifth round game R. Since the number of spheres flowing into 1231 is three, the number of prizes that can be won in this round is seven. Therefore, as the remaining number increases, the payout number of prize balls in the round game R of the fifth round decreases.

On the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the 13th to 15th lottery, in each case, the ball remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 by flowing into the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round game R Is 0. Therefore, from the round game R of the 6th round, a specified number of balls can be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a, whereby the round game R of the 6th round can be ended. There is no change in the degree of extension.

Further, when the number of remaining adjustment channels 5911 in the case of winning the jackpot is 16 to 18, in the sixth round game R, when it is 19 to 21, it is 22 to 24 in the seventh round game R. When the number is 8 in the round game R of the 8th round, when the number is 25 to 27, in the round game R of the 9th round, and when it is 28 to 30 in the round game R of the 10th round, the number of prize balls is reduced. And the extension of the round time occurs.

As a result, in the gaming property in which the high-probability state ends according to the number of times of lottery, as in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won soon after the transition to the high-probability state and when the jackpot is won just before the end of the high-probability state With, it is possible to make a difference in the profit given to the player (the number of prize balls to be paid out, the progress time of the big hit game, etc.).

In this case, in the present embodiment, the profit given to the player is reduced as the number of lottery from the transition to the high probability state to the jackpot win increases, so when the number of lottery until the jackpot win is small, Originally, there should have been an opportunity to win the lottery with a high probability even with the remaining number of times of the lottery, but the dissatisfaction of the player who cannot receive the lottery can be partially solved.

In other words, if the jackpot was won in the first lottery after the high probability state was reached, the remaining 29 lottery would have been added, and the next 59 lottery would have been possible. In fact, the high-probability state after the jackpot game is finished can partially eliminate the player's dissatisfaction with being limited to 30 times again. Thereby, the fairness of the game can be maintained.

Even in the high probability state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entry slot 64), the second specific winning opening 2255a is in the eleventh operation pattern. It is possible to receive the maximum payout regardless of the number of times the lottery has been opened/closed and transitioned to the high probability state. Therefore, in a high probability state, the player may play a game (left-handed game) aiming to win a ball at the first ball entrance 64.

In this case, as compared to the case of performing a right-handed game, the number of balls discharged from the first outlet 66 without increasing the number of special symbols is increased, and the interval during which the lottery is received becomes longer, and the game time is longer. May be long.

Therefore, as a way of playing the game in the high probability state, the player can suppress the number of balls discharged from the first outlet 66 before the jackpot is obtained, and can receive the maximum number of payouts in a short time in a jackpot type ( Whether you aim to win the jackpot h) (whether you play the right-handed game), the number of balls discharged from the first outlet 66 will increase until you get the jackpot, and be prepared to increase the game time. It is possible to appropriately select whether or not to aim for the jackpot of the jackpot type (jackpot H) that can eliminate the risk of the reduction of the prize ball in (the left-handed game). As a result, it is possible to widen the range of game methods to be selected, depending on the player's taste and the situation in which the player is placed (such as the available game time).

Note that after the high-probability state ends, the second entrance 640 becomes difficult to open, and the player shifts to the left-handed game. In this case, a plurality of spheres will remain in the adjusting flow path 5911, but in the big hit type (big hit H) that can be obtained by the left-handed game, regardless of the number of balls remaining in the adjusting flow path 5911. Since the maximum number of payouts can be obtained by winning the specified number of prizes, the profit given to the player (both in terms of the number of prize balls and game time) is not impaired. Therefore, even when the player quits the game with the ball remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 and the next player plays the game, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from being impaired. The player can start the game at any timing.

In this embodiment, the number of special symbols 2 in the high probability state (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640) and the number of balls remaining in the adjustment flow path 5911 (second entry) The number of balls entered into the mouth 640) is described as being the same number, but in the actual game, the number of balls remaining in the adjustment channel 5911 at the time of jackpot acquisition is a special symbol 2 until the jackpot acquisition. It should be noted that it is rare that the number is the same as the number of times of drawing.

That is, the lottery for the special symbol 2 is performed along with the ball winning in the second entrance 640. However, the player recognizes whether or not the jackpot is won in the lottery, the subsequent reach production and Since it is after the button press effect, etc., the player usually keeps hitting the ball into the second entrance 640 during that time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since up to four balls can be held in the second ball entrance 640, a normal game mode (a game mode in which the player can effectively perform lottery, so-called hold stop) In addition to the number of times of lottery that allows the player to recognize the jackpot judgment, a state in which a maximum of about four balls are entering the second entrance 640 is maintained.

In addition, even if the player enters the second entrance 640 when the number of holdings is maximum, the lottery cannot be accepted, but the ball enters the adjustment flow path 5911, so that the player can obtain a profit in the jackpot game. The likelihood of reduction is increased. Since the hold is digested by the fluctuations being stopped and the next fluctuations being started, in other words, the longer the period until the fluctuations are stopped, the higher the possibility that the player's profit in the jackpot game is decreased. It will be.

Therefore, if the ball is left untouched in a long-reaching or other high-expectation performance, it is possible to form a gaming property in which there is a high possibility that the profit obtained by the player in the jackpot game will decrease. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing to launch the ball during high-reach production such as long reach, eliminating the concentration power that the player had to spend adjusting the firing output of the ball. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's ability to concentrate on the production such as long reach, and to improve the attention to the production.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the arrangement of the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is fixed at a unique position has been described. However, the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment interferes with the spheres by driving. Then, the arrangement of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 can be changed. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 51, the probability variation determination unit 4800 described above in the fourth embodiment is arranged below the first variable winning device 6000 in the present embodiment, and the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 are the specific regions 4830. The state after the big hit game is configured to change depending on whether or not to pass.

52 is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 6000 taken along the line LII-LII of FIG. 51. Note that FIG. 52 illustrates the retracted state of the interference member 6930. The first variable winning device 6000 has the same configuration as the first variable winning device 1000 in the first embodiment (main body member 1100, front cover plate 1200, opening/closing plate 1300, power transmission member 1400, driving device 1500, regulating member 1600). In addition to the provision of the rear cover 1700), a new interference device 6900 is provided in the sixth embodiment.

The interference device 6900 includes a solenoid 6910 disposed on the back surface side of the main body member 1100 and having a slide movable shaft arranged along a plane surface of the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 1100, and a tip of a movable portion of the solenoid 6910. Mainly includes a tip member 6920 fixed to the main body member 1100, and an interference member 6930 that slides in the front-rear direction of the main body member 1100 by the operation of the tip member 6920.

The tip member 6920 includes an elongated hole 6921 that is inclined with respect to the surface of the thin plate member 1110. The elongated hole 6921 is formed so as to be inclined in such a manner that the tip side of the tip member 6920 is closer to the thin plate member 1110.

The interference member 6930 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction in a through hole H61 formed in the thin plate member 1110 that is arranged so as to face the storage channel 1231 of the front cover 1200, and the rear end thereof is a long hole 6921. And the rear end portion moves back and forth along the elongated hole 6921 as the solenoid 6910 is driven. By this back-and-forth operation, it is possible to enter the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the through hole H61.

The through hole H61 is arranged at a position slightly leftward from the center of the third sphere P3 stored in the storage channel 1231. The interference member 6930 is slid forward from the through hole H61 to be in the projecting state (see the imaginary line in FIG. 52), so that the sphere P3 is pressed and pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231.

FIG. 53A and FIG. 53B are front views of the first variable winning device 6000. Note that FIG. 53A illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 53B illustrates the case where the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. A sphere that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and “V” is described in the sphere that first enters the specific area 4830 according to a thirteenth operation pattern and a fourteenth operation pattern described later. ..

As shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B, 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 when the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, while the third ball is stored when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. Subsequent spheres are pushed to the upstream side of the storage channel 1231 and remain in the number of stored spheres less than 10 spheres. Therefore, when the specified number of each round game R of the big hit game is 10 as in the present embodiment, if the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state, the specified number of balls cannot be won. Since the round game R cannot be ended by winning the specified number of prizes, the end of the round game R is waited until the specified time. The effects that can be realized by utilizing this difference will be described below together with the description of the game mode in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in a low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol with a probability of 1/10, and in a high probability state of the special symbol (probably changed state of the special symbol), for example, quadrant. With a probability of 1, it is judged as a special jackpot.

Then, when the game ball passes through the specific area 4830, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times, and the special symbol lottery 10 times. While the game ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 after the game is configured to be set to the normal state after the end, normally after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times. It is configured to be in a time saving state of the design.

In this embodiment, two types of "special jackpot I" and "big jackpot j" are provided as the jackpot types of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port 1000a and the operation pattern of the sorting device 4850 are configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 6000 or It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right to transition to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

Specifically, in the case where the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the jackpot I is associated and defined (see FIG. 54). .. When it becomes the big hit I, the big hit game of two rounds is executed with the 13th operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 285 prize balls, and almost certainly cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability changing state (high probability state).

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 is a lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the jackpot j is associated and defined (see FIG. 54).

When the jackpot j is reached, two rounds of jackpot games are executed in the fourteenth operation pattern of the first variable winning device 6000 and the sorting device 4850. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 300 prize balls, and can almost certainly obtain the right to shift the special symbol to the probability changing state (high probability state).

As described above, when the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640) is a big hit, almost certainly the right to transition to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol is acquired. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the special symbol 1 is drawn in a lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64). Therefore, in order to win the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), in the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the player plays the right-handed game. To do.

During the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit becomes longer (1 Seconds × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it becomes easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol can be transitioned to the probability variation state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when it is a jackpot, the jackpot j (almost certainly the transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol (high probability state)) The probability that the special symbol that is a jackpot that can obtain the right) is likely to be repeated, and thus the player can easily obtain a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b), the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 54(a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a and the specific area 4830 in the thirteenth operation pattern, and FIG. 54(b) is a first specific winning combination in the fourteenth operation pattern. It is a figure showing time change of mouth 1000a and specific field 4830.

Note that, in FIG. 54, in order to facilitate the identification, the first interval time between rounds Int1 is described by ignoring the relative relationship with other times (sixth opening time OP6 and long operating time TL). To be done. Therefore, it is not used for the relative comparison of the lengths of time in FIG. 54, and the relative comparison of the lengths of each time is performed according to the time relationship described below.

When MPU201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure hit determination, after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect), it starts control of the decided kind of big hit game. Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300, the sorting operation member 4851, and the interference member 6930 performed when the big hit game is given will be described.

<When operating in the 13th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot I, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 operate based on the thirteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The drive control of the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 is performed to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the open/close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the lapse of the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the extended state for the long-term operation time TL, and after the lapse of the long-term operation time TL, the solenoid 6910 is driven so as to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state again. The interference member 6930 is controlled to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

In the present embodiment, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for the long-term operation time TL. During this time, the specified number of balls cannot be won in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 53(b)). In the present embodiment, the sum of the sixth opening time OP6 and the long-term operation time TL becomes the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Therefore, the interference member 6930 must be waited until the maximum value of the first operation time T1. Since it becomes an evacuation state, it is virtually impossible to win a specified number of balls, and the first round of the round game R ends when the first operating time T1 elapses.

Simultaneously with the end of the first round game R, the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, and the distribution operation member 4851 is switched to the closed state. Therefore, the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 cannot be passed to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player cannot obtain the right to shift to the special variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold each in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the 14th operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game of jackpot j, the MPU 201 drives the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 so that the opening/closing plate 1300, the distribution operation member 4851 and the interference member 6930 operate based on the fourteenth operation pattern. Control.

When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) is completed, the MPU 201 closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds). , The drive control of the solenoids 1510, 4852, 6910 is performed to hold the interference member 6930 in the retracted state, and after the lapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first actuation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to drive the solenoid 1510 to open the first specific winning opening 1000a. Then, the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

When the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 closes the distribution operation member 4851 until the timer means (not shown) has passed a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds). After the sixth opening time OP6 has elapsed, the long-term operation time TL (27 seconds in the present embodiment) distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position, and after the long-term operation time TL has elapsed, the distribution operation member 4851. The solenoid 4852 is driven and controlled so as to keep the closed state again, and the sorting operation member 4851 is operated for a long time.

When the open/close plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the MPU 201 holds the interference member 6930 in the retracted state until a predetermined sixth opening time OP6 (3.0 seconds) has elapsed by the timer means (not shown). Then, after the sixth opening time OP6, the interference member 6930 is changed to the projecting state for a minute time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and after the minute time, the interference member 6930 is held in the retracted state again. The solenoid 6910 is drive-controlled so that the interference member 6930 operates for a short time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) elapses or a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the winning) is satisfied, the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the solenoid 1510 so as to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the first round game R is finished.

In the present embodiment, although the interference member 6930 is in the extended state for a minute time, it is in the retracted state for most of the time, so as shown in FIG. 53(a), the prescribed number of round games is used. It is possible to win a ball. Therefore, since the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed and the restricting member 1600 is in the discharge state while the sorting operation member 4851 is in the open state, the sphere can be discharged toward the stochastic variation determination flow path 4820. It can be made to flow down to the specific region 4830. Therefore, the player can acquire the right to shift to the special change state (high probability state) of the special symbol.

When the round game R of the first round is finished, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 1510 so as to hold the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses, and the round After the first interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round game R is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state to make the first identification. The solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to open the winning opening 1000a, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is operated for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the second round, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The opening/closing plate 1300 is displaced to the closed state and the solenoid 1510 is drive-controlled to close the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the second round game R is completed.

When the round game R of the second round is finished, the timer means closes the opening/closing plate 1300 and the distribution operation member 4851 until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse, and the interference member 6930. The solenoids 1510, 4852, and 6910 are drive-controlled so as to hold each in the retracted state, and the jackpot game ends with the passage of the time.

Here, the sixth opening time OP6 is set as a time in which the winning number of balls in the first round game R is expected to be 3 or more and less than 6. In this case, since the interference member 6930 is arranged on the back side of the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231, the line of sight of the player is blocked by the sphere, making it difficult to visually recognize the operation of the interference member 6930. Become. This can make it difficult for the player to confirm the operation mode of the interference member 6930.

Therefore, the change due to the protrusion of the interference member 6930 is limited to the third and subsequent balls slightly moving in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the player recognizes whether the change due to the interference member 6930 has occurred. It is possible to make it difficult, and to make the player enjoy playing the game of winning the ball in the first specific winning opening 1000a and storing the ball in the storage flow path 1231 without making the player feel uncomfortable by the operation of the interference member 6930. You can

Then, the balls are stored up to the vicinity of the entrance of the storage flow channel 1231, and even after the first round game R is not finished, the player feels uncomfortable and actually counts the number of the balls stored in the storage flow channel 1231. For the first time, it is possible to form a new game property of recognizing the difference between jackpot types.

As described above, according to this embodiment, while it is difficult to recognize the change in the situation visually recognized through the game board 13 (the change in the state of the interference member 6930), the player can be operated by the operation mode of the first variable winning device 6000. It is possible to notify the change of the situation of the game board 13 from the given discomfort in an easily recognizable manner so that the player can recognize the difference of the jackpot type. Therefore, the attention of the first variable winning device 6000 can be improved.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 58. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which the sphere arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 falls as it is when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, but the first variable winning device 7000 in the seventh embodiment is The second drop delay plate 7260 is configured in such a manner that the sphere arranged at the vertical position of the drop position Pf3 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed can flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a rear perspective view of a front cover plate 7200 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 56 is a top view of the first variable winning device 7000, and FIG. 57 is a diagram of FIG. 35(b), XXXVc-XXXVc. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 7000 in a line corresponding to the line. The configuration of the first variable winning device 7000 of the present embodiment is the same as that of the first variable winning device 3000 described above in the third embodiment, except for the front cover plate 7200, and a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the covering front plate 7200 has the same structure as the structure described in the third embodiment (thin plate member 1210, side wall part 1220, housing part 1230, detection sensor 1240, and drop delay plate 3250). ) In addition to the second fall delay plate 7260, which is new in this embodiment.

The second drop delay plate 7260 is a plate member that extends on the back surface side of the thin plate member 1210 between the end surface 3251b and the housing portion 1230, and descends as the upper surface 7261 moves away from the detection sensor 1240. Incline. As shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 extends rearward to the extent that it does not interfere with the plate portion 1310 of the opening/closing plate 1300.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the second fall delay plate 7260, the distance between the detection sensor 1240 and the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 is set to be less than the diameter of the sphere, and at the position farthest from the detection sensor 1240. Also, the distance from the front side wall surface of the thin plate member 1110 is less than the diameter of the sphere.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, the second drop delay plate 7260 is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the movement trajectory of the ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250. That is, the rolling arc portion 3252 does not act on the rolling ball. That is, the second drop delay plate 7260 is configured as a plate member whose contact with the sphere changes depending on the path of arrival of the sphere. This will be described below.

58(a) and 58(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the first variable winning device 7000 taken along a line corresponding to the line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. 35(b). FIG. 58A shows a case where the opening/closing plate 1300 changes to the closed state in a state where the ball is arranged near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, and in FIG. 58B, the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state. The case where the ball rolls toward the falling position Pf3 is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 58A, when the sphere is arranged near the vertical position of the drop position Pf3, the sphere is covered with the cover front plate due to the forward inclination of the plate portion 1310 generated when the opening/closing plate 1300 operates. It flows down toward the 7200 side. Therefore, in the process of flowing down, it comes into contact with the second drop delay plate 7260, flows down to the drop delay plate 3250 side along the inclination of the upper surface, and then rolls on the upper surface of the drop delay plate 3250 and falls again at the drop position Pf3. To reach.

Since the distance between the second drop delay plate 7260 and the front side wall of the thin plate member 1110 (the distance between the rolling surface 1311 of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state) is less than the diameter of the ball, the momentum of the ball is large. Is large, it is possible to prevent the ball from vertically falling on the back surface side of the second drop delay plate 7260.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58B, the ball rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 1300 is on the main body member 3100 side along the rearward inclination of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250. Run down while touching.

At this time, since the center position (maximum diameter position) of the sphere is arranged below the second drop delay plate 7260, the length of extension of the second drop delay plate 7260 to the back side can be determined from the movement trajectory of the sphere. Also, the upper surface 7261 can catch the ball falling from the upper side, while the front surface side holds the ball.

The ball rolling on the rolling arc portion 3252 does not come into contact with the second drop delay plate 7260 in the process of flowing down, and then falls as it is after reaching the drop position Pf3. Therefore, similarly to the third embodiment, the ball can be dropped from the lower end of the drop delay plate 3250 without delay.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between the case where the sphere receives the action of the second drop delay plate 7260 and the case where the sphere does not receive it, depending on which side the sphere approaches the second drop delay plate 7260.

In the present embodiment, while maintaining the function of smoothly dropping the ball rolling on the drop delay plate 3250 to the position facing the end surface 3251b, the two balls roll on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the previous ball rolls. Even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed by passing the detection sensor 1240, it is possible to delay the fall of the ball arranged immediately before the detection sensor 1240.

In addition, even if the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 are arranged in front of the detection sensor 1240, the opening/closing plate 1300 happens to be in the closed state, even if the balls are rolling in two rows. Also, the ball can be made to flow down to the drop delay plate 3250 side. In this case, the ball rolls leftward on the upper surface 7261 of the second drop delay plate 7260, and then restarts rolling rightward along the upper surface of the rolling arc portion 3252 of the drop delay plate 3250.

Therefore, it is possible to substantially keep the ball on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 for a time longer than rolling over the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300. As a result, the number of dead balls (balls that flow down the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and are discharged from the first outlet 66) that may occur during the interval time can be reduced.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 65. 59 and 60 are front views of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment, and FIGS. 61 and 62 are rear views of the first variable winning device 8000.

59 and 60, the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away to make the opening/closing plate 8300 visible, and a part of the side wall portion 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are shown in phantom lines. Further, in FIGS. 59 and 61, after the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening/closing plate 8300 is in the open state (raising posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is in the open state (extended posture). 60 and 62, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (immersion posture). ) Is shown. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the drawing as the front (front) side and the back side of the drawing as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side, respectively. Further, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure respectively indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 62, the opening/closing plate 8300 of the first variable winning device 8000 has a shaft portion 1320 described in each of the above embodiments, a loaded portion 1330, and a space between the shaft portions 1320 of about 4 degrees. It is divided into minutes, and a plate portion 8310 formed in a plate shape is provided in three sections on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) in front view.

That is, in this embodiment, a gap is formed between the opening/closing plate 8300 and the detection sensor 1240 on the front surface of the thin plate member 1110, and the fixed receiving portion 8250 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are arranged in this gap. Is set up.

Since the axial length of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300 is shorter than that in the first embodiment, the range in which the rectangular recess 1122 is formed can be shortened. In this embodiment, the rectangular recess 1122 is formed in the minimum necessary range for the plate portion 8310 to enter (see FIG. 59).

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a portion fixed to the covering front plate 8200, and plays a role of a rolling surface of a ball guided by the detection sensor 1240. The configuration of the front cover plate 8200 is the same as that of the front cover plate 1200 described in the above embodiment except for the fixed receiving portion 8250. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given to the respective components, and detailed description thereof will be given. The description is omitted.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is a rod-shaped member that protrudes from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210 toward the main body member 1100 side, and the protruding end portion (back surface side end portion) thereof is the support recess 1121 on the right side of the main body member 1100. The main body member 1100 is brought into contact with the open end (front side end portion) of the above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 8300 is rotatably supported by the support recess 1121 and the fixed receiving portion 8250.

The fixed receiving portion 8250 is formed so that the upper surface (the rolling surface of the sphere) is in a plane position with the upper surface (the rolling surface) of the open/close plate 8300 in the open state, that is, as an inclined surface that descends downward toward the right. The lower surface is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. The arc that is the basis of the shape of the lower surface is formed as an arc having a shorter radius than the radius of the movement locus (circle) of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (the longest radius, that is, the radius of the movement locus of the upper end of the facing surface 8341b). To be done. As a result, the upper corner of the facing surface 8341b and the fixed receiving portion 8250 come into contact with each other in the moving direction of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 moves (rotates) by a predetermined angle or more to the fixed receiving portion 8250. Regulated.

As shown in FIG. 59, the protrusion of the fixed receiving portion 8250 (overhanging length to the left) is designed so that a ball dropped from the left end of the inclined surface 1237 does not directly ride on the rolling surface. It That is, in the present embodiment, the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is arranged to the left of the left end of the inclined surface 1237, but the overhang length is less than the radius of the sphere. Therefore, even if the sphere may collide with the fixed receiving portion 8250 when the sphere falls vertically from the inclined surface 1237, the center of gravity of the sphere is on the left side of the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250. The event that the ball flows down to the detection sensor 1240 hardly occurs, and the ball spills left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 and drops toward the first outlet 66.

In addition, when the ball spilled to the left from the fixed receiving portion 8250 rolls on the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the load applied from the ball to the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 closes the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. The auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 from changing to the open state due to the load applied from the ball.

Further, from the upstream side configuration of the first variable winning device 8000 in the game area (arrangement of nails, the second ball inlet 640, etc., see FIG. 2), a ball having a speed to the lower right to the fixed receiving portion 8250. The probability of a jumping event is extremely low.

Therefore, while the fixed receiving portion 8250 having the rolling surface is disposed on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240, the fixed receiving portion 8250 alone does not have the effect of making the detection sensor 1240 excessively likely to guide the ball. Is composed of.

The essence of the fixed receiving portion 8250 is to suppress the occurrence of a defect in the flow of a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 while opening and closing the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 by a rotating operation. The details of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 will be described below.

The auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is a member that is rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110. The auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is provided on the front side of the thin plate member 1110, and extends from the receiving plate 8341 toward the rotary shaft. The rod-shaped connecting portion 8342, the loaded portion 8343 disposed on the back surface side of the thin plate member 1110 and capable of contacting the power transmission member 1400, and the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 cannot be relatively rotated. A rod-shaped member to be connected, and mainly includes a shaft support rod portion 8344 rotatably supported by the thin plate member 1110.

In the present embodiment, in the shaft support rod portion 8344, a supported portion supported by the thin plate member 1110 has a circular cross section, and a support portion supporting the connecting portion 8342 on the front side thereof and a loaded portion 8343 on the rear side thereof. The supporting portion that supports is formed to have a D-shaped cross section (a shape other than a circular shape). Fitting portions (holes or recesses) having a shape corresponding to the D-shape are formed in the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343, and in the use state (see FIG. 59), the support portion and the fitting portion are fitted together. When combined, the connecting portion 8342 and the loaded portion 8343 are configured to rotate integrally.

The loaded portion 8343 is a substantially fan-shaped portion whose end is axially supported by the shaft support rod portion 8344, and a contact curved surface 8343a that is a curved upper surface that abuts the power transmission member 1400, and the loaded portion 8343. And a center of gravity portion 8343b including the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 regardless of the posture.

As shown in FIG. 62, the contact curved surface 8343a is a straight line that overlaps the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 during the operation of the power transmission member 1400, and extends when the extending portion 1420 descends (tilts). The right end portion that starts contact with the extended portion 1420 has a surface that is substantially parallel to the contact start line FL1 that includes the point where the portion 1420 and the loaded portion 8343 start contact.

A smooth curved surface is formed from the right end of the extension 1420 toward the left end, which is the end point of contact with the extension 1420. The load transmission to and from the 8343 can be smoothly generated (with a small dynamic friction). Accordingly, the followability of the loaded portion 8343 with respect to the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

The center of gravity 8343b is a portion for maintaining the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the closed state (immersion posture) when the load from the power transmission member 1400 is not generated. That is, since the center of gravity 8343b includes the position of the center of gravity of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes its posture toward the closed state (immersed posture) by the rotation due to its own weight. When the receiving plate 8341 of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the left end of the fixed receiving portion 8250 are in contact with each other, further rotation of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is restricted, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state (immersion posture). To be done.

The connecting portion 8342 is coupled to the receiving plate 8341 at the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 (that is, a portion that is adjacent to the opening/closing plate 8300 and may cause a load). Thereby, the rigidity of the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 can be improved while narrowing the arrangement range of the connecting portion 8342. Therefore, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 causes the opening/closing plate 8300. Even if it collides with, the possibility that the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 will be damaged can be reduced.

It should be noted that the connecting portion 8342 only needs to be able to connect the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, and the configuration mode thereof is not limited to this. For example, in addition to connecting the left end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344, the right end portion of the receiving plate 8341 and the shaft support rod portion 8344 may be connected (that is, two rods). It is also possible to support the left and right ends of the receiving plate 8341 with a rod), and in that case, two rods are connected and reinforced by a planar plate portion along a plane orthogonal to the shaft support rod portion 8344. Is also good.

The receiving plate 8341 is a plate-shaped portion having a front-back width that is approximately the same as the width in the lateral direction of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300, and is connected to the planar rolling plane 8341a and the left end of the rolling plane 8341a. And a facing surface 8341b that is disposed to face the right end surface of the plate portion 8310 of the opening/closing plate 8300 in the opened state (see FIG. 59).

The rolling plane 8341a is formed as a plane parallel to the rolling surface 1311 of the plate portion 8310 of the open/close plate 8300 in the open state (extended posture) in the open position (extended posture) in a plane position.

The facing surface 8341b is configured as a plane orthogonal to the rolling plane 8341a, and the width in the lateral direction (thickness of the receiving plate 8341) is configured to be substantially equal to the thickness of the plate portion 8310. This makes it possible to increase the size of the surface that receives the load when the facing surface 8341b and the plate portion 8310 are in contact with each other, so that the receiving plate 8341 or the plate portion 8310 is damaged by the load when contacting (breakage or cracking). It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence or damage.

Here, the facing surface 8341b is disposed on the left side (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) of the plane that passes through the shaft support rod portion 8344 and is orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, the movement locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 operates in the open state (see FIG. 59) and the closed state (see FIG. 60) is the rolling plane in the open state. It swells above 8341a (outward in the radial direction of the shaft support rod portion 8344). This makes it easier to push the ball (one in the present embodiment) on the upper surface of the rolling plane 8341a into the detection sensor 1240, which will be described later in detail.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65, an operation mode and an operation sequence of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the opening/closing plate 8300, and the regulating member 1600 due to the load transmitted through the power transmission member 1400 will be described.

63 and 64, the operations of the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 65 illustrates changes in the drive (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip end member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 with time.

63(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along the line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63(a). 63(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 63(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along line LXIIId-LXIIId of FIG. 63(c).

64(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64(b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along the line LXIVb-LXIVb of FIG. 64(a). 64(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 8000, and FIG. 64(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 8000 taken along the line LXIVd-LXIVd of FIG. 64(c).

63 and 64, in order to facilitate understanding, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the tip end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the restricting member 1600, and the covering front plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown maintaining the arrangement in the assembled state (see FIGS. 59 to 62 ), illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are closed (see FIG. 63 ( The state changing from (a) and FIG. 63(b)) to the open state (see FIG. 64(c) and FIG. 64(d)) is illustrated in time series.

That is, in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), the state (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 is shown. 63(c) and 63(d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and the auxiliary second distance shorter than the second distance h2 (see FIG. 20(c)) shorter than the first distance h1 from the reference line O1. 64(a) and 64(b), the distal end member 1520 is displaced and is separated from the reference line O1 by the third distance h3 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a in the state of being arranged at the position separated by h2a. 64(c) and 64(d), the distal end member 1520 is displaced so that it is separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 which is shorter than the third distance h3 (the solenoid 1510 is located at the position of the solenoid 1510). The state of being arranged at the final arrival position when excited) is shown respectively.

In a state in which the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 63(c)), the power transmission member 1400 sets the lower surface of the extending portion 1420 as the contact start line FL1. It is in agreement with the state of matching. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 63(c) and 63(d), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts to receive the load from the power transmission member 1400 (from the state shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), 63(c) and the state shown in FIG. 63(d), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state).

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (exciting) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the timings of the positions and states of the tip end member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 65, the distances h1, h2, h2a, h3, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

The opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but there is a time difference in operation timing as shown in FIG.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip end member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening/closing plate 8300 starts its operation earlier than its auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and its operation ends earlier. ..

Further, the regulation member 1600 starts its operation toward the storage state after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts its operation toward the open state, and becomes the storage state at the same time when the opening/closing plate 8300 becomes the open state. As shown in the timing chart in FIG. 65, which is symmetrical, when the solenoid 1510 is deenergized, each member operates in the reverse order of driving (excitation).

As shown in FIG. 65, when the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is not in the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained (see FIGS. 63(c) and 63(d)). Therefore, during the period in which the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state, the state in which the ball can pass through the detection sensor 1240 is maintained.

Here, in the present embodiment, the movement locus LC1 of the facing surface 8341b of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is configured to bulge above the rolling plane 8341a, and the sphere P81 is detected at the timing when the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere P81. The center of the sphere P82 that flows down from the upstream side of the sphere P81 in a continuous manner is a plane that is orthogonal to the central axis of the shaft portion 1320 and passes through the center of the shaft support rod portion 8344 (the maximum bulge point of the movement locus LC1. It is arranged closer to the detection sensor 1240 than the passing plane) (see FIG. 59). Therefore, when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes its state from the open state to the closed state, it is possible to apply a load to the ball P82 in the rightward direction (the direction to push it into the detection sensor 1240) at the upper end portion of the facing surface 8341b.

As a result, with the configuration of the present embodiment, assuming that a continuous ball is formed (the condition of the sphere upstream of the detection sensor 1240 satisfies the condition, see spheres P81 and P82 in FIG. 59), the sphere P81 is the detection sensor. When the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is canceled by being detected by the 1240 (for example, when the ball P81 is detected by the detection sensor 1240, and a prescribed number of balls in the round game R are detected). However, only one ball (corresponding to the ball P82) riding on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 has an excess prize (so-called over prize. That is, the specified number of round games R (the book) In the embodiment, it is possible to allow more than 10 balls to be detected by the detection sensor 1240 (pass the first specific winning opening 1000a)).

In the present embodiment, the receiving surface 8341 operates in an arcuate trajectory to apply a load to the sphere P82, and after being pushed toward the detection sensor 1240 by the load, the receiving surface 8341 rolls on the upper surface of the fixed receiving portion 8250. Therefore, as compared with the case where the ball P82 is pushed into the detection sensor 1240 along the arcuate trajectory, the fluttering when the sphere P82 passes through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 (the sphere P82 collides with the inner surface of the detection sensor 1240 and falls down). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of delay, bounce, and the like).

In the present embodiment, the sphere is configured to be stored on the downstream side (storage channel 1231) of the detection sensor 1240. As described in the above embodiments, the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 detects the sphere. The passage of 1240 spheres can be regulated. Therefore, when the storage channel 1231 is full of spheres, the sphere P82 does not enter the storage channel 1231 by being regulated by the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. After the member 8340 is in the closed state, it is spilled and flows down toward the first outlet 66.

On the other hand, if there is a gap in the storage channel 1231, only one ball on the rolling plane 8341a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can allow the over-winning. Therefore, the arrangement of the spheres downstream of the detection sensor 1240 (that is, the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage channel 1231) can change the easiness of occurrence of the over-winning prize. This can be done by controlling the flow down of the sphere in the path 1231.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The contact curved surface 8343a of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is smooth in such a manner that the radius of rotation is gradually shortened from the contact start portion (right end portion) with the power transmission member 1400 toward the contact end portion (left end portion). A curve was formed. As a result, the load can be transmitted with a small dynamic friction. Accordingly, the followability of the loaded portion 8343 with respect to the extended portion 1420 can be improved.

In the state where the continuous ball is formed on the upstream side of the ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a), the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is limited to one ball on the rolling plane 8341a. When the state changes (rotates) from the open state to the closed state, a load is applied from the rolling plane 8341a to the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). As a result, when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 rotates (when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is in the closed state), a limited number of balls (one in the present embodiment) enter the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a). It is possible to make the ball easier. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that an over-winning prize with a limited number will occur.

In addition, the possibility of this over-winning prize changes depending on the degree of accumulation of the balls in the storage channel 1231. That is, it is possible to change the possibility of an over-winning prize depending on the arrangement state (the number of stored balls, etc.) of the balls in the storage channel 1231 when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 rotates (moves toward the closed state). Furthermore, the arrangement state of the balls in the storage channel 1231 can be adjusted by the drive (excitation) control mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the operation mode of the interference member 6930. That is, by controlling the driving (exciting) mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the interference member 6930, it is possible to level the number of payout prize balls due to over-winning.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. 66 and 67 are front views of the first variable winning device 9000 in the ninth embodiment, and FIGS. 68 and 69 are rear views of the first variable winning device 9000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

66 and 68, a state after the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is driven (excited), the opening/closing plate 8300 is in an open state (raising posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is in an open state (extended posture). 67 and 69, the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is closed (tilted posture), and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (immersion posture). The state after the change is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 66 to 69, the first variable winning device 9000 is a combination of the configurations described in the above embodiments except that the thin plate member 9110 of the main body member 9100 is different from that in the above embodiments. Briefly described, the power transmission member 1400 of the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment is replaced with the power transmission member 5400 described in the fifth embodiment.

As in the above-described embodiment, in the power transmission member 5400, the front-side protruding end of the pressing portion 1422 and the front-side protruding end of the time difference forming portion 5423 are the same as the rotation axis of the power transmission member 5400 and orthogonal to each other. It is placed on a plane. Therefore, the opening/closing plate 8300 is opened even when the time difference forming unit 5423 pushes the engaging portion 1333 of the opening/closing plate 8300 (even before being pushed by the pushing unit 1422, corresponding to the state of FIG. 71A). The state changes to the state (see FIGS. 66 and 68).

The thin plate member 9110 is extended to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 with an auxiliary ball entrance 9111 having a size allowing a ball to pass therethrough, and a length capable of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. The rolling plate 9112 is mainly provided.

The auxiliary ball inlet 9111 is a through hole arranged to the left of the outlet 1150 in front view, and a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) balls are paid out by detecting passage of the balls. It is the prize ball mouth. Note that, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, for example, the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 may be a ball entrance (for example, an out hole) in which prize balls are not paid out.

The rolling plate 9112 is configured as a plate in which a ball flowing down between the main body member 9100 and the front cover plate 8200 rolls on the upper surface, and as the upper surface approaches the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (as it goes to the right, ) It is formed as an inclined surface that descends and inclines. Further, the rolling plate 9112 is formed to be connected to the lower side of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, and on the front side of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111, the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the rear side. It

That is, the ball on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 is guided to the front side of the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 along the slope, then passes through the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 and is discharged from the game area. At this time, in the present embodiment, three prize balls are paid out to the player.

The length of the rolling plate 9112 is designed such that it does not pick up the sphere that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined surface 1237 and flows down the downflow path FK1 of the sphere that freely falls. That is, in a state in which the first variable winning device 9000 is not driven, the ball does not pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 no matter how many right hits are continued.

On the other hand, the opening/closing plate 8300 having an upper surface that is inclined downward toward the right is driven even slightly (for example, the opening/closing plate 8300 is excited for 0.1 seconds and rotated toward the open state), and the opening/closing plate 8300 moves to the right. When the ball flows down the load flow-down path FK2 in which the loaded ball flows down, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate 9112 and can pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. That is, in the present embodiment, when the opening/closing plate 8300 is driven, the sphere contacting the opening/closing plate 8300 can pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 other than the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Here, since the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 is different from that described in the eighth embodiment, it will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

70 and 71, the operations of the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, and the restriction member 1600 are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 72 illustrates changes in the driving (exciting) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip end member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the restriction member 1600.

70(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXb-LXXb of FIG. 70(a). 70(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 70(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXd-LXXd of FIG. 70(c).

71(a) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXIb-LXXIb of FIG. 71(a). 71(c) is a rear view of the first variable winning device 9000, and FIG. 71(d) is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 9000 taken along line LXXId-LXXId of FIG. 71(c).

70 and 71, in order to facilitate understanding, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 5400, the tip end member 1520 of the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600, and the front cover plate 8200 are fixed. Only the receiving portion 8250 is shown in the assembled state (see FIGS. 66 to 69 ), the other components are omitted from the drawing, and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are closed (see FIG. 70 ( The state changing from (a) and FIG. 70(b)) to the open state (see FIG. 71(c) and FIG. 71(d)) is illustrated in time series.

That is, in FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b), the state (the state in which the solenoid 1510 is not excited) in which the tip member 1520 of the drive device 1500 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the first distance h1 is shown. 70(c) and 70(d), the state in which the distal end member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a shorter than the first distance h1 is shown in FIG. 71(c) and 71(b), the state in which the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a shorter than the auxiliary first distance h1a is shown in FIGS. In FIG. 71(d), the tip member 1520 is displaced and arranged at a position (final arrival position when the solenoid 1510 is excited) separated from the reference line O1 by a fourth distance h4 shorter than the auxiliary second distance h2a. The states are illustrated respectively.

The state in which the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary first distance h1a (see FIG. 70C) is restricted by the intervening transmission portion 1332 of the opening/closing plate 8300 pushed down by the power transmission member 5400. This is the same as the state in which the extension portion 1620 of the member 1600 starts contacting. That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the restriction member 1600 starts to receive the load from the opening/closing plate 8300 (from the state shown in FIGS. 70(a) and 70(b) to the state shown in FIG. 70( (c) and the state shown in FIG. 70(d), the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the raised posture (discharge state)).

Unlike the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing plate 8300 is opened when the tip member 1520 is arranged at a position separated from the reference line O1 by the auxiliary second distance h2a (see FIG. 71(a)). The regulation member 1600 is in the storage state (the rising posture). Then, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (see FIG. 71A) that was in the closed state is in the open state in the state where the tip end member 1520 is arranged at the position separated from the reference line O1 by the fourth distance h4 (FIG. 71A). 71(c)).

Therefore, from the state shown in FIGS. 71(a) and 71(b) to the state shown in FIGS. 71(c) and 71(d), the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (upward posture), and the regulation is performed. The member 1600 is maintained in the stored state.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (exciting) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes over time in the positions and states of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 72, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

The opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 are each driven by driving (excitation) of a single solenoid 1510, but as shown in FIG. 72, there is a time difference in operation timing.

That is, when the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), that is, when the tip member 1520 moves from the left end to the right end, the opening/closing plate 8300 starts its operation earlier than the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the opening/closing plate 8300 moves. After the operation ends, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts the operation.

Further, the regulating member 1600 starts its operation toward the storage state before the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 starts its operation toward the open state, and enters the storage state at the same time when the opening/closing plate 8300 is opened. As shown in the timing chart in FIG. 72, which is symmetrical, when the solenoid 1510 is de-energized, each member operates in the reverse order of driving (excitation).

As shown in FIG. 72, when the solenoid 1510 is driven from the non-excited state, only the opening/closing plate 8300 starts operating, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 does not start operating yet. Therefore, by shortening the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 (by performing a short opening), the state of the opening/closing plate 8300 can be changed while maintaining the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the closed state. This will be described with reference to FIG. 73.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (excitation) state of the solenoid 1510 of the drive device 1500, and changes in the positions and states of the tip end member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600 over time. In FIG. 73, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, and h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

In FIG. 73, a case is shown in which the period for driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 is half of the time (0.1 second in this embodiment) required for the open/close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. (That is, the case of driving (exciting) for 0.05 seconds is shown).

In this case, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is maintained in the closed state, and the operation of raising only the opening/closing plate 8300 to the intermediate state is repeated. According to this operation, it is possible to apply a load to the sphere flowing down on the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300, so that the flow path of the sphere that has reached the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 8300 is driven flows down. The path FK1 can be switched to the load flow-down path FK2 (see FIG. 66). Therefore, the ball can be made to pass through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by continuing the right-handed ball launch, and the prize ball can be paid out to the player.

With this configuration, for example, it is possible to configure a game feature in which prize balls are paid out by a small hit game. In the small hitting game, by driving (exciting) the solenoid 1510 in the open pattern shown in FIG. 73, the flow path of the ball reaching the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300 is switched at the timing when the opening/closing plate 8300 operates, and the auxiliary A ball can be guided to the ball entrance 9111 and a prize ball can be paid out.

Since the driving of the solenoid 1510 for the small hit game can be continuously executed a plurality of times, the timing at which the ball reaches the front side of the opening/closing plate 8300 can be set at a plurality of times. For example, since one driving (exciting) period is 0.05 seconds, when the total driving (exciting) period of the solenoid 1510 is 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) 36 times. be able to.

Further, by setting the drive (excitation) interval, it is possible to easily apply a load to the sphere via the opening/closing plate 8300. For example, when the sphere is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is set at an interval of 0.5 seconds because 0.6×X (the number of times the sphere reaches)=0.5×X+0.1×X= By driving (exciting) with, the load can be applied to the balls through the opening/closing plate 8300 at a rate of about one in five balls regardless of the timing of starting the driving (excitation).

In this case, about 7 balls can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111 in one small hit game, and about 21 prize balls can be paid out to the player.

In this case, the period of the small hit game is 0.5 second interval×36 times=about 18 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the time of one small hit game, it is possible to prevent the situation where the special design holding ball runs out (cuts) by the end of the small hit game. Thereby, the small hit game can be generated without interruption.

Further, in this embodiment, since the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 arranged above the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is maintained in the closed state, as in the case where the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 operates (above the auxiliary ball entrance 9111). When a movable object is operated by, the sphere that flows down to the auxiliary inlet port 9111 side (that is, the sphere that flows down in the load flow-down path FK2) receives a load from the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and is repelled or opened/closed. It is possible to prevent the member 8340 from riding on the rolling plane 8341a and being guided by the detection sensor 1240.

It returns to FIG. 72 and demonstrates. As shown in FIG. 72, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the opening/closing plate 8300 is not in the closed state at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 reaches the closed state, and the first specific winning opening 1000a The state in which the hemisphere can enter is maintained as described above in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, as described in the eighth embodiment, also in the present embodiment, it is possible to easily configure an overwinning prize with a limited number of balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, the restriction member 1600 is controlled so as to change to the discharge state after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed. When the storage channel 1231 is full, it is possible to prevent the discharge of the balls from the storage channel 1231 from being accidentally accelerated, so that it is possible to prevent an over-winning.

Here, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing plate 8300 maintains the open state at the timing when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed (see FIG. 71A). Therefore, the state of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be changed while maintaining the state in which the ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 (open state). This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing changes in the driving (exciting) state of the solenoid 1510 of the driving device 1500, and changes in the time and position of the tip member 1520, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the regulating member 1600. In FIG. 74, the distances h1, h1a, h2a, h4 are shown in the column of the tip member 1520 in correspondence with the position of the tip member 1520.

In FIG. 74, the period for releasing the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is 1/4 of the time (0.1 second in this embodiment) required for the open/close plate 8300 to change from the closed state to the open state. The case is illustrated (that is, the case where the drive (excitation) is released for 0.025 seconds is illustrated). In the following, this mode of releasing the drive (excitation) is also referred to as "1/4 release".

In this case, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the regulating member 1600 maintain the state (maintain the storage of the sphere in the storage flow channel 1231), and only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 changes from the open state to the closed state. According to this operation, among the balls on the upper surfaces of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, several balls arranged on the upstream side of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the opening/closing plate 8300). The sphere arranged at the boundary of (1), mainly the sphere arranged outside the movement locus LC1) can be made to flow down toward the auxiliary entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66).

As a result, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 passes the detection sensor 1240 (when 15 prize balls are paid out) when the opening/closing plate 8300 is still maintained in the open state. The case where the detection sensor 1240 passes through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 without passing through (the case where payout of three prize balls occurs) can be configured.

In this case, since the time until the specified number of balls passes the detection sensor 1240 is extended, the time of the round game R can be extended without causing a ball loss.

In addition, the upper and lower surfaces of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are provided with irregularities, or a vertically long rib is projected to the front side at a position on the front surface of the thin plate member 9110 where a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 8300 is in contact. Alternatively, the flow velocity of the spheres may be suppressed, and the spheres may be connected on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that a sphere will be arranged at the boundary position between the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 and the opening/closing plate 8300 when the 1/4 release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is executed. The function of guiding the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved by canceling the driving (excitation) by ¼.

Moreover, the timing and the number of times of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 can be set in a plurality of types by associating with the jackpot type.

For example, when the balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, 1/4 of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released within 9.0 seconds required for 15 balls to reach the opening/closing plate 8300. Occurs five times, that is, once every 1.8 seconds, 1/4 release of the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, thereby assisting about five balls during the round game R. It can be guided to the entrance 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R.

In addition, this interval is doubled, that is, once every 3.6 seconds, the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs once, so that about 5 balls are played during the execution of the round game R twice. It can be guided to the auxiliary entrance 9111.

In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be the same as the case where only one ball is excessively won in the first specific winning opening 1000a during the execution of the round game R twice.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to set equal intervals of 1.8 seconds in order to fill five times in 9.0 seconds. For example, the solenoid 1510 is 5 times during 9.0 seconds in a mode of adding 0.2 seconds in order of 1.4 seconds, 1.6 seconds, 1.8 seconds, 2.0 seconds and 2.2 seconds. 1/4 release may be caused. Further, the solenoid 1510 may be released by ¼ at different timings. This can make it difficult for the player to predict when the quarter release of the solenoid 1510 will occur.

Further, for example, by making the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 close to the first half of the round game R, the ball is guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by continuing to shoot the ball from the start point of the round game R. It is possible to configure a game feature that increases the probability of being played.

In this case, if the firing of the ball is stopped at the inter-round interval, the ball may not reach the first variable winning device 9000 at the timing when the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed. Can be suppressed.

That is, the player who has hit the ball in the interval between the rounds can start the next round game R while the hit ball has reached the vicinity of the first variable winning device 9000. Since the probability that the ball is guided to the ball opening 9111 can be increased, and as a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be increased, it is possible to allow the player to continue to hit the ball at an interval between rounds. it can.

Further, for example, by making the timing of executing the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 close to the latter half of the round game R, a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning (first identification) is reached until the middle of the round game R. It is possible to promote a loose jackpot game in which a ball is intermittently fired so that the winning hole 1000a does not occur.

In this case, in the latter half of the round game R, if the round game R is lengthened until the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 is executed, the prize balls are paid out by the balls passing through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. Since it is possible to increase the number of payouts, it is possible to allow the player to execute a loose jackpot game such as willingly and intermittently firing a ball.

In this case, the number of times the 1/4 release of the solenoid 1510 occurs in the latter half of the round game R is set to be different (for example, 0 times, 1 times, and 5 times). As a result, as a result of the loose jackpot game, it is possible to make a difference in the additional prize balls to be obtained, so that the player's attention to the falling manner of the balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 is maintained in a high state. can do.

On the other hand, the balls may be continuously fired and a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls may be won in the first specific winning opening 1000a before the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released. .. In this case, the payout of prize balls due to the passage of the ball to the auxiliary entrance 9111 cannot be expected, but by shortening the time required for the round game R, the start timing of the next round game R or the jackpot game end The timing to receive the lottery later can be advanced.

In this way, the player can arbitrarily select whether to aim the payout of the prize balls through the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 or ignore it and end the round game R early.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

It is configured such that a ball that collides with the opening/closing plate 8300 during the operation of driving the opening/closing plate 8300 from the closed state to the intermediate state can enter the auxiliary entering port 9111 by being given a load toward the auxiliary entering port 9111. did. Thereby, even in the case of an operation mode in which the open/close plate 8300 is maintained in an open state for a short period of time, it is possible to easily pay out a prize ball. Therefore, at the time of a small hit game or the like, the player is given a ball. Can be fired at will.

A ball that reaches the upstream of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 at a specific timing by executing the 1/4 release of the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 while the opening/closing plate 8300 continues to guide the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Was made to flow toward the auxiliary entrance 9111. As a result, it is possible to provide variations in the progress mode of the round game R in the jackpot game and the payout mode of prize balls.

For example, even if the number of balls passing through the first specific winning port 1000a does not exceed the specified number, the player can pay the prize balls by entering the auxiliary winning port 9111 and the player can obtain the excess winning balls (first It is possible to obtain award balls (a number of award balls exceeding the number of award balls (150 in the present embodiment)) paid out when a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the specific winning opening 1000a.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. FIG. 75 is a front view of the first variable winning device 10000 in the tenth embodiment, and FIGS. 76 and 77 are rear views of the first variable winning device 10000. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

75 and 76, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is de-energized, and the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 reaches the lowest end. In FIG. 77, the solenoid 10182 of the intermediate discharge device 10180 is shown. Is driven (excited), and the sphere flowing down the storage channel 1231 can be discharged midway.

As shown in FIG. 75 to FIG. 77, the first variable winning device 10000 may include a case where a ball can be discharged from an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231 formed by the main body member 10100 and the front cover plate 10200. Except for the difference from the embodiment, the configuration described in the above embodiment is combined. Briefly described, the movable parts (that is, the opening/closing plate 8300, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, the power transmission member 1400, the drive device 1500, the restriction member 1600, the interference device 6900) excluding the intermediate discharge device 10180 are configured in the eighth embodiment. Is diverted as it is.

In the present embodiment, a mechanism for discharging a sphere at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231 will be described. In the present embodiment, the covering front plate 10200 extends in a box shape that opens toward the back side of the thin plate member 1210, and includes a storage channel 1231, a projecting portion 1235, and a housing portion 10230 that includes an inclined surface 1237. ..

The housing portion 10230 is provided with a bulging portion 10232 formed such that the lower wall portion of the box bulges downward, and a through hole 10233 formed in the front-rear direction near the bulging portion 10232.

The bulging portion 10232 is bulged vertically below the sphere whose flow is restricted by the interference member 6930, and has a volume larger than that of the sphere. Is formed. Accordingly, the sphere staying at the position near the interference member 6930 can be configured to drop downward from the storage channel 1231 toward the bulging portion 10232.

The through hole 10233 is a horizontal hole 10233a extending horizontally below the bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 and a vertical hole that is spatially connected to the horizontal hole 10233a and extends downward with a width equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. 10233b and the vertical surface 10233b is provided with an inclined surface 10233c which is inclined downward toward the rear side as the upper bottom surface.

The lateral holes 10233a are arranged above the bulging portion 10232 at the left and right ends, below the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 near the right end, and at the left end near the storage channel 1231. It is configured to enter above a plane (a plane having a constant inclination) along the extension line of the lower bottom surface.

The main body member 10100 has the same shape as the horizontal hole 10233a in the thin plate member 10110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, in addition to the structure described as the configuration of the main body member 1100 in the above embodiment. A lateral hole 10111 to be bored, an outlet 10112 through which a ball sent to the back side along the inclined surface 10233c is allowed to pass, and a thin plate member 10110 arranged to move along the lateral hole 10111. An intermediate ejection device 10180 having a portion.

The intermediate ejection device 10180 mainly includes a movable member 10181 which is inserted into both the lateral holes 10111 and 10233a and is movable left and right, and a solenoid 10182 which generates a driving force for moving the movable member 10181 left and right. Prepare

The movable member 10181 energizes the solenoid 10182 in a closed state (see FIGS. 75 and 76) that closes the opening (the opening leading to the through hole 10233) in the middle of the storage channel 1231 when the solenoid 10182 is not energized (non-driven). In the (driving) state, the state is switched to the open state (see FIG. 77) that allows passage of the sphere through the opening (opening connected to the through hole 10233) in the middle of the storage channel 1231.

The movable member 10181 is maintained in a state where it is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 when the ball is not on it. As a result, it is possible to avoid friction between the movable member 10181 and the bulging portion 10232, and it is possible to reduce the movement resistance.

On the other hand, when the movable member 10181 is in the closed state, the upper surface of the bulging portion 10232 and the left and right end portions of the movable member 10181 are vertically supported by being vertically supported. Accordingly, when the movable member 10181 is closed, even if the sphere rides on the upper surface of the movable member 10181, the movable member 10181 can be prevented from drooping excessively, and the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 can be prevented. The flow of water can be smoothed.

The movable member 10181 is an upper surface, is formed as an inclined surface that descends and inclines toward the left, and an inclined upper surface 10181a that functions as a rolling surface on which a ball rolls in a closed state, and a lower surface that is viewed from the front. An inclined lower surface 10181b that is formed at the left end portion and inclines downward toward the right is mainly provided.

The inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state before the ball rides, and in a state where the movable member 10181 is not in contact with the bulging portion 10232 vertically (a state in which the movable member 10181 is floating), the right end portion is adjacent to the storage. The flow path 1231 is arranged slightly below the lower bottom surface. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the load (resistance) received by the sphere when the sphere transfers from the storage channel 1231 to the inclined upper surface 10181a.

Further, the inclined upper surface 10181a is in a state after the sphere has been ridden, and in the state where the movable member 10181 abuts the bulging portion 10232 in the vertical direction (the state in which the movable member 10181 is sunk), the left end portion is adjacent to the storage. The flow path 1231 has a shape that is flush with the lower bottom surface. This makes it possible to reduce the load (resistance) that the sphere receives when the sphere transfers from the inclined upper surface 10181a to the storage channel 1231.

Note that the above-described inclined upper surface 10181a has a gentler inclination than the shape of the lower bottom surface of the storage channel 1231 and is not the same shape. However, since the difference is slight, the time required for discharging one sphere from the storage channel 1231 in the closed state of the movable member 10181 is 0.2 in this embodiment as in the above embodiment. Seconds.

The inclined lower surface 10181b makes it easier for the sphere to ride on the upper surface of the movable member 10181 before the movable member 10181 reaches the open state, and to easily get on the bulging portion 10232 even when the movable member 10181 leans forward. Is an inclined surface provided on the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the tip portion of the movable member 10181 is restricted from moving to the inner side surface of the vertical hole 10233b and stops in that state, and the sphere of the storage channel 1231 is kept flowing down smoothly. be able to.

When the intermediate discharge device 10180 is opened (see FIG. 77), the upstream balls, including the third storage ball counting from the downstream end, flow down the vertical hole 10233b and are loaded from the inclined surface 10233c. The ball is sent to the back surface side through the discharge port 10112 and is sent to a ball discharge path (not shown).

In the present embodiment, the discharge port 10112 is provided with a detection sensor 10112a for detecting the passage of spheres, and the number of spheres that have passed through the discharge port 10112 can be determined. The ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is a detection unit that detects the ball discharged from the detection sensor 10112a or the discharge opening 1150 (for example, the specific area detecting sensor 4860, the non-specific area detecting sensor 4870, FIG. 51). Passage is detected by the reference), and control is performed to determine whether the number of entered balls and the number of discharged balls match.

According to the present embodiment, due to the operation mode of the intermediate discharge device 10180 in the round game R, when a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel It is possible to switch between the case where 1231 becomes full and the state where the storage channel 1231 does not become full. This will be described with reference to FIG. In the description of FIG. 78, for ease of understanding, it is assumed that the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state.

78(a) to 78(d) are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a and a change in time of the state of the movable member 10181 in the round game R. In addition, in FIG. 78(a), the first specific winning opening 1000a is in an open state (also shown as "open" in the figure. The closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also shown as "closed" in the figure. The same applies to the following figures), and the time change when the movable member 10181 is maintained in the closed state (also referred to as “closed” in the figures. The same applies in the following figures) In 78(b), the movable member 10181 is maintained in the open state (also shown as “open” in the drawings. This is the same in the subsequent figures) for the period in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is in the open state. The time change of each case is illustrated.

Further, in FIG. 78(c), the movable member 10181 changes to the open state after a lapse of a first predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment) after the first specific winning opening 1000a starts to change to the open state, and then, When the movable member 10181 changes to the closed state after 2 predetermined times (3 seconds in the present embodiment) and is maintained as it is, in FIG. 78(d), the first specific winning opening 1000a is opened. The movable member 10181 changes to an open state after a lapse of a reference time T11s (about 15 seconds in the present embodiment) from the start of the state change, and then the movable member 10181 closes after a second predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses. The time change when the state is changed and maintained as it is is illustrated.

In this way, the drive of the movable member 10181 (drive of the solenoid 10182) is associated with (combined with) a combination of what round of the round game R to be executed and what the jackpot type is. It can be executed in various types of driving modes.

For example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(a), during the round game R, the movable member 10181 is always in the closed state, so that the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is discharged similarly to the above-described embodiments. It is discharged from the outlet 1150. That is, since the spheres are not discharged from the midway position of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is formed by entering a specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of balls into the first specific winning port 1000a. It will be full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult (may be impossible) to generate an over-winning prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

Also, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(b), during the round game R, the movable member 10181 is always in the open state, so the sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 is different from the above embodiments. Before reaching the discharge port 1150, it falls into the through hole 10233 and is discharged from the discharge port 10112. That is, even if a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 does not become full. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an overwinning prize exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

In FIG. 78(b), after the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is released as the end of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is passed 2 seconds (the period required for the sphere to pass through the storage channel 1231). Is changed to an open state, so that it is possible to drop the ball including the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (immediately before the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released) toward the through hole 10233. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a can be configured not to flow down to the outlet 1150 at all.

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(c), the movable member 10181 changes from the closed state to the opened state 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R, and 3.0 seconds later, the movable member 10181 changes. Since it is controlled to change from the open state to the closed state, if a ball can be dropped toward the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, a specified number (10 in the present embodiment). Even if the (individual) balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, the storage channel 1231 is not filled up. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an overwinning prize exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

In order to arrange the sphere above the through hole 10233 before 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, considering the time when the sphere flows down the storage channel 1231, about 2.5 from the start of the round game R. It is necessary for the ball to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the second has elapsed.

In the present embodiment, the time of about 2.5 seconds is the time required for the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to flow down the game area and reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (the shortest time). Time, about 4 seconds). Therefore, it would not be enough if the ball was shot from the start of the round game R.

Therefore, in order to prevent the storage channel 1231 from becoming full, it is necessary to continue firing the ball even in the inter-round interval before the round game R. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval between rounds.

Also, the driving mode shown in FIG. 78(c) is configured by the display device or the like so that it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the information as to which round of the round game R occurs and whether or not it occurs in the first place. Thereby, regardless of whether or not it is the round game R driven in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(c), suppressing the game mode in which the ball firing is stopped in the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R. You can

Further, for example, in the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(d), when the reference time T11s (15 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the round game R, the movable member 10181 is brought into the open state, and 2.0 seconds have elapsed from that point. After that, the movable member 10181 is controlled to change its state to the closed state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the control of the movable member 10181 is effectively executed while the round game R is continuing, but the control is skipped when the round game R is finished, and the movable member 10181 is forced to the closed state. To be switched.

In the drive mode shown in FIG. 78(d), for example, when the first end time T11a (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment). When the individual balls) pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R is completed before the movable member 10181 is opened, so that all the balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a are stored in the storage channel. It is stored in 1231 and the storage channel 1231 becomes full. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult (may be impossible) to generate an over-winning prize exceeding the prescribed number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

On the other hand, for example, when the second end time T11b (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the reference time T11s elapses from the start of the round game R, a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of balls are the first specific winning. When passing through the mouth 1000a, the movable member 10181 is opened before the round game R ends, the ball falls toward the through hole 10233, and is discharged from the discharge port 10112, so that the storage channel 1231 is full. It won't turn up. Therefore, it is possible (and possible) to easily generate an overwinning prize exceeding the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of the round game R.

Therefore, according to the drive mode of FIG. 78(d), depending on whether the time required for the round game R is less than the reference time T11s or not less than the reference time T11s, the specified number of round games R (10 in this embodiment) is set. It is possible to switch whether or not an overexceeding prize is generated.

In the case of this drive mode, if the payout number of the prize balls in the round game R is emphasized, it is preferable to execute the round game R for a long time. That is, it is preferable to intermittently stop the firing of balls so that a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of balls do not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a early. Therefore, there is a possibility that a game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped at an interval between rounds is promoted.

On the other hand, in the driving mode shown in FIG. 78(c), as described above, by continuously firing the balls at the intervals between rounds, it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the excess winning.

In this way, by arranging the driving modes in which the preferable ball firing modes are contradictory, in the round game R of the jackpot game (the same round, it is controlled to be different driving modes depending on the jackpot type), The player's concentration on the jackpot game can be improved as compared with the case where the jackpot game is always executed in the same launch mode (the profits obtained by the player are the same).

According to the present embodiment, when the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state and the regulation member 1600 is maintained in the storage state, the number of balls that can enter the storage flow channel 1231 is determined by the operation mode of the movable member 10181. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to switch between the case where the storage channel 1231 is filled with 10 balls and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not filled with 10 balls.

In addition, when the interference member 6930 is in an extended state, seven storage channels 1231 are provided (9 when two balls are already arranged downstream of the interference member 6930, see FIG. 75). It is possible to switch between the case where the tank is filled with the ball of) and the case where the storage channel 1231 is not filled with the ball (7 pieces or 9 pieces).

Although the case where the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state has been described in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by setting the interference member 6930 in an extended state in response to the movable member 10181 being in the open state, it is possible to prevent the sphere from riding on the momentum and passing (jumping) in the left-right direction above the through hole 10233. Can be prevented.

The driving mode of the movable member 10181 is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to be driven by operating the operation button 300.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

By opening the movable member 10181, the sphere can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. Thereby, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be changed independently of the state of the first specific winning opening 1000a.

That is, while keeping the first specific winning opening 1000a in an open state, the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is the same as the number stored in the storage channel 1231, and the case of entering the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is possible to configure a case where the number of balls is different from the number stored in the storage channel 1231. As a result, it is possible to change the possibility that an over-winning of the first specific winning opening 1000a will occur depending on the driving mode of the movable member 10181.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. 79 is a front view of the first variable winning device 11000 according to the eleventh embodiment, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 11000 taken along line LXXX-LXXX in FIG. 79, and FIG. It is a rear perspective view of the front plate 11200.

As shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, in the first variable winning device 11000 of this embodiment, the shape of the opening/closing plate 11300 is changed, the formation of the upstream side portion of the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted, and the main body member 11100 is provided with the first variable winning device 11000. It has the same configuration as the first variable winning a prize device 3000 of the third embodiment except that the 2 additional winning openings 11183 and the like are added. Therefore, the same elements as those of the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The main body member 11100 has the thin plate member 11110 formed of a horizontally long rectangular thin plate arranged on the front side of the game board, in addition to the configuration already described in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, separated by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. A pair of left and right protruding ribs 11111 protruding toward the front side of the thin plate member 1110, a guide hole 11112 formed as a horizontally long hole for guiding the movement of an opening/closing means 11190, which will be described later, and extending to the left of the guide hole 11112. And a guide recess 11113 configured as a bottomed recess.

The main body member 11100 mainly includes a second additional winning opening 11183 configured to allow the ball to pass therethrough, and an opening/closing means 11190 for changing the winning probability of the ball into the second additional winning opening 11183. The details of the opening/closing means 11190 will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the fall delay plate 3250 formed on the front cover plate 11200 maintains only the right side of the cut surface SP12 formed at a position farther from the side wall portion 1220 than the diameter of the sphere on the upstream side, The left part of the cut surface SP12 is omitted.

The position of the cut surface SP12 is set as a position at which the sphere rolling on the inclined surface 1237 and reaching the drop delay plate 3250 does not reach by itself. That is, the sphere that rolls on the inclined surface 1237 and reaches the drop delay plate 3250 flows downward to the right (in the direction close to the detection sensor 1240) along the inclination of the drop delay plate 3250 unless an external force is applied. To do.

On the other hand, when a load is applied to the ball and the ball is sent to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball drops to the second additional winning opening 11183 side with a high probability. This falling ball enters the second additional winning opening 11183 after passing through the opening/closing means 11190 newly described in the present embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, the second additional winning opening 11183 is configured as a winning opening from which three prize balls are paid out by detecting passage of the ball.

The opening/closing plate 11300 is provided with an inclined surface 11340 that remains after being scraped off in a shape that inclines so as to approach the left shaft portion 1320 from the rotation tip side toward the rotation shaft side in the left half portion.

The inclined surface 11340 is located at a position where the left-right speed becomes 0 (final reaching position FP12, figure) after the end on the rotation tip side has landed on the drop delay plate 3250 to the right of the cutting surface SP12. 82(a) (see FIG. 82(a)).

Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state when the sphere exists at the position where the left-right direction velocity is 0 (final reaching position FP12, see FIG. 82A), the inclined surface 11340 is passed through. Then, the ball is loaded. This will be described with reference to FIG.

82(a) to 82(c) are partial front views of the first variable winning device 11000. 82(a) to 82(c) show changes in the state of the first variable winning device 11000 in chronological order. In FIG. 82(a), the opening/closing plate 11300 is in the closed state, and the tilt The final arrival position FP12 of the ball rolling on the surface 1237 and landing on the drop delay plate 3250 is illustrated by an imaginary line. In FIG. 82(b), the opening/closing plate 11300 is opened from the state shown in FIG. 82(a). The state after the change is illustrated, and in FIG. 82C, a state in which the sphere falls from the state illustrated in FIG. 82B is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), the sphere arranged at the final reaching position FP12 comes into contact with the inclined surface 11340 when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, and is given a leftward load. The ball to which the leftward load is applied is pushed to the left of the cut surface SP12, spills from the drop delay plate 3250, and enters the second additional winning opening 11183.

On the other hand, when the ball has not reached the final arrival position FP12 (for example, when the ball has flown slightly from the final arrival position FP12 and is arranged at the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 82A), the opening/closing plate 11300 is opened. Even if the state changes, the inclined surface 11340 does not come into contact with the sphere, and the sphere has a rightward component because the opening/closing plate 11300 is in the rotation direction (the rotation axis is inclined to the lower right with respect to the horizontal). Direction) and is pushed toward the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, in this case, the ball does not enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, depending on which position on the front side of the opening/closing plate 11300 the ball is arranged at, the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, and the ball moves toward the detection sensor 1240. , And can be switched to the second additional winning opening 11183.

The payout of the prize balls by the balls passing through the second additional winning opening 11183 is an excess prize ball that exceeds the award ball scheduled for the jackpot game for the player, so a ball passing through the second additional winning opening 11183. The more is, the more profits the player can get.

As long as the opening/closing plate 11300 maintains the closed state (inter-round interval period), the ball is continuously emitted toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that the opening/closing plate is compared with the case where the ball is stopped from being emitted. Since it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the ball is placed at the final reaching position FP12 at the timing when 11300 changes to the open state, it is possible to promote the game mode in which the ball is continuously fired over the interval period between rounds. it can. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the player stops the ball firing during the inter-round interval period.

Since entering the second additional winning opening 11183 is conditional on the opening/closing plate 11300 changing to the open state, the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven to the open state (big hit game or small hit game). In the states other than the above, it is configured such that a ball does not easily enter the second additional winning hole 11183 even if the player continues to hit the ball to the right.

As a result, in a situation where the opening/closing plate 11300 does not change to the open state (for example, a situation where a right-handed instruction effect is not executed), even if the player makes a right-handed stroke, the ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183. It can be configured such that it is difficult for the player to obtain the accompanying profit. That is, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be made to function as a winning opening that makes it easier for a ball to enter in a situation where the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven (small hit game or big hit game).

Next, the opening/closing means 11190 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. 83 and 84 are rear views of the first variable winning device 11000. FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c) show the arrangement of the protruding rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190, and the second additional winning port 11183. It is a schematic front view of the protruding rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190, and the second additional winning opening 11183 that are schematically shown. 85(a) to 85(c) show changes in the state of the opening/closing means 11190 with time.

As shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the opening/closing means 11190 is a movable means that is guided by the guide hole 11112 and moves to the left and right in conjunction with the movement of the tip member 1520, and is supported in the guide hole 11112 in an inserted state. A main body support portion 11191, a transmission portion 11192 extending upward from a rear surface side portion of the main body support portion 11191 and supported by a tip member 1520, and a leftward extending portion from a front surface side portion of the main body support portion 11191. The extending portion 11193, the first protruding portion 11194 that protrudes to the front side at the left end of the extending portion 11193, and a space slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere are provided on the right side of the first protruding portion 11194. And a second projecting portion 11195 projecting in the same shape as the first projecting portion 11194.

A method of assembling the opening/closing means 11190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in the present embodiment, the right end of the guide hole 11112 is vertically enlarged so as to be slightly longer than the transmission portion 11192, and the other portions are slightly vertically longer than the main body support portion 11191. Is formed as a horizontally long hole.

Therefore, after transmitting the transmission portion 11192 to the back side through this enlarged portion, the opening/closing means 11190 is slid to the left, and then the drive device 1500 is assembled to the main body member 11100, and the transmission portion 11192 is supported by the tip end member 1520. Thus, the opening/closing means 11190 can be assembled in a manner interlocking with the tip member 1520. Note that, in the movable range of the solenoid 1510, the transmission portion 11192 does not reach the enlarged portion of the right end of the guide hole 11112 (see FIGS. 83 and 84), which prevents the opening/closing means 11190 from coming off the guide hole 11112. can do.

The extended portion 11193 is formed with a thickness that can be completely accommodated in the guide recess 11113. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down on the front side of the opening/closing means 11190 from colliding with the extending portion 11193, the flow path of the ball changes in the front-rear direction, or the extending portion 11193 moves due to the load from the ball. It can be prevented from being damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 85(a) to 85(c), the first projecting portion 11194 and the second projecting portion 11195 are formed as inclined plates that are inclined downward to the left when viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, when the ball on the drop delay plate 3250 flows to the left of the cut surface SP12, the ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 and the opening/closing means 11190 enters the second additional winning opening 11183. It can be switched whether or not to do it. This will be described in detail.

In FIG. 85(a), the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end of the movement range (see FIG. 84). In this case, the upper end of the second protruding portion 11195 and the right protruding rib 11111 are arranged on the center line of the second additional winning opening 11183.

When a ball falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85(a), the balls come into contact with the second protruding portion 11195 and flow leftward. Therefore, since it deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down, it is possible to reduce the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183.

FIG. 85(b) shows a state in which the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at an intermediate position in the movement range (see FIG. 20(c)). That is, it corresponds immediately after the opening/closing plate 11300 is closed.

In this case, the upper end of the first projecting portion 11194 is arranged to the left of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position of the pair of projecting ribs 11111, and the upper end of the second projecting portion 11195 is the second additional winning prize. It is located to the right of the centerline of the mouth 11183.

Therefore, when the ball falls between the projecting ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85(b), the ball abuts the first projecting portion 11194 and flows to the right, and abuts the second projecting portion 11195. It flows to the left. Since the falling ball flows down toward the second additional winning opening 11183, the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183 can be increased.

In FIG. 85(c), the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released, and the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the right end position of the movement range (see FIG. 83). Also in this case, the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained in the closed state, as in FIG. 85(b).

In this case, the upper end portion of the first protruding portion 11194 is arranged to the right of the vertical line passing through the intermediate position between the pair of protruding ribs 11111.

Therefore, when the sphere falls between the protruding ribs 11111 in the state shown in FIG. 85C, the sphere abuts the first protruding portion 11194 and flows leftward. Since the falling ball deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down, it is possible to reduce the probability of entering the second additional winning opening 11183.

That is, the opening/closing means 11190 maintains a low probability that a ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183 while the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained in an open state or a closed state, and during the state change, the second additional winning award. It is configured to increase the probability that a ball will enter the mouth 11183.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the opening/closing means 11190 is linked with the state of the opening/closing plate 1300 to change the probability that a ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183. Here, there will be described a case where a ball can be expected to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 and a case where it cannot be expected due to a difference in drive control of the solenoid 1510.

The phenomenon that the sphere flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 of the drop delay plate 3250 occurs when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state (see FIGS. 82B and 82C).

Therefore, in the drive pattern (the operation pattern with a low probability of entering the ball) where the solenoid 1510 continues to maintain the driven (excited) state, when the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 passes through the protruding rib 11111, the tip member 1520. Similar to the arrangement described above, the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position. Since the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is maintained and the state of the opening/closing means 11190 is maintained, the ball flowing to the left of the cut surface SP12 deviates from the second additional winning opening 11183 and flows down (see FIG. 82). ).

On the other hand, immediately after the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited), the drive (excitation) is once released (the opening/closing plate 11300 is opened for a short time) in the drive pattern (the operation pattern with a high probability of entering the ball) of the cut surface SP12. When the ball flowing to the left passes through the protruding rib 11111, the opening/closing means 11190 is arranged at the left end position, but thereafter, the excitation (drive) of the solenoid 1510 is temporarily released, so that the solenoid 1510 is released. The opening/closing means 11190 is moved toward the right end position by the urging force of the return spring. As a result, the sphere that has flowed to the left of the cut surface SP12 receives a rightward load from the first projecting portion 11194 and flows down along the second projecting portion 11195. Therefore, toward the second additional winning port 11183. Can flow down.

In this way, by providing variations in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 11300, the cut surface SP12 of the cut surface SP12 at the same timing (for example, the timing at which the inclined surface 11340 abuts the sphere at the start of the round game R, see FIG. 82(b)). It is possible to change the probability that the ball that has flowed to the left will enter the second additional winning opening 11183.

Note that, in the operation pattern with a high probability of entering a ball, the timing of canceling the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is not particularly limited. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the sphere that flows to the left of the cut surface SP12 under the load from the opening/closing plate 11300 passes through the protruding rib 11111 and reaches between the first protruding portion 11194 and the second protruding portion 11195. Is controlled so as to cancel the driving (excitation) of the solenoid 1510.

In addition, the second additional winning opening 11183 may be configured as a winning opening for starting the variation of the special symbol 2 by entering a ball. In this case, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be increased by the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 11300 during the interval period between rounds, it is in a high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol after the jackpot game is over. Despite this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon that causes a disadvantage to the player, because the variation accompanying the suspension of the special symbol 1 is started.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

Depending on which position on the front side of the opening/closing plate 11300 the ball is placed at the timing when the opening/closing plate 11300 changes to the open state, the ball moves toward the detection sensor 1240 (enters the ball), or the second additional winning opening 11183. In addition to being able to switch whether to go to (enter the ball), it is configured to make it easier for the ball to flow down to the second additional winning opening 11183 if the ball is continuously fired during the inter-round interval period. As a result, as a result, it is easier to increase the number of payout prize balls if the ball is continuously fired during the inter-round interval period. Therefore, a game mode in which the ball is continuously fired during the inter-round interval period is promoted. It can be done easily.

The second additional winning opening 11183 is configured such that it is difficult for the ball to enter even if the ball reaches while the state of the opening/closing plate 11300 is maintained. As a result, the second additional winning opening 11183 can be made to function as a winning opening that makes it easier for a ball to enter in a state where the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven (small hit game or big hit game).

While the state of the opening/closing means 11190 is maintained, it is difficult to enter the second additional winning opening 11183, while the ball is likely to enter the second additional winning opening 11183 during the change of the state of the opening/closing means 11190. In addition to being configured as described above, a ball loaded from the opening/closing plate 11300 when the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven from the closed state to the open state is connected to the second additional winning port 11183. It was configured to flow down to 11183. Thereby, by providing a variation in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 11300 after the opening/closing plate 11300 is driven toward the open state (the round game R has started), the probability that the ball will enter the second additional winning opening 11183. Can be changed.

Next, a first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 140. 86(a) and 86(b) are front views of the first variable winning device 6000 in the first control example. 86(a) and 86(b), the thin plate member 1210 is partially cut away so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is visible, and a part of the side wall portion 1220 and a part of the inclined surface 1237 are imaginary lines. It is illustrated by. In addition, in FIG. 86(a), a schematic diagram showing a shielded state of the first variable winning device 6000 is shown, and in FIG. 86(b), the inside is changed from the shielded state where it is difficult to visually recognize (is difficult to see but visible). The schematic diagram which shows the transparent state of the 1st variable winning a prize device 6000 at the time of performing the transparent production which changes to a visible transparent state is shown. The same elements as those in the above-described embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the first variable winning device 6000 described in this control example makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 by the thin plate member 1210 disposed on the front side of the storage channel 1231. It is configured (the thin plate member 1210 is configured to have low permeability).

In addition, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the storage channel 1231 through the opening of the detection sensor 1240, the storage channel 1231 is formed as a bent channel and the downstream side cannot be visually recognized. It is configured so that the number of spheres stored in can not be grasped. In addition, the arrangement position of the interference device 6900 is located downstream of the bent portion, so that the movable state of the interference device 6900 cannot be visually recognized.

Further, by extending the thin plate member 1210 on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 86(a)) in the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 14), the direction of the line of sight when looking through the opening of the detection sensor 1240 is limited. However, the inside of the storage channel 1231 is configured to be difficult to visually recognize.

With such a configuration, it may be difficult to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the closed state of the first variable winning device 6000. it can.

In the variable winning device 6000 configured as described above, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on that a predetermined condition (for example, success of timing effect (operation effect) (see FIG. 88(b)) is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the front cover plate 1200 is composed of a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside is visible. Accordingly, when the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on, it is possible for the player to know the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the movable state of the interference device 6900.

An optical sensor for detecting light incident from the outside may be provided behind the front cover 1200. In this case, by utilizing the characteristics of the half mirror that makes it possible to visually recognize the inside by irradiating strong light from the outside, it is possible to detect that a fraudulent act of irradiating the inside of the front cover plate 1200 with strong light and visually recognizing the inside was performed. , It can be determined by the output of the optical sensor. Therefore, by setting an error command in response to a change in the output of the optical sensor and controlling so as to make it difficult to continue the game, fraud can be suppressed.

In the present control example, the cover front plate 1200 is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmissive state, but other configurations may be used. For example, a part of the front covering plate 1200 (for example, the thin plate member 1210) or the light emitting means is movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) that is constantly lit to the front covering plate 1200 is switched. It may be configured such that the inside thereof is in a visible state only when the movable portion is located at a predetermined position.

Alternatively, the front cover plate 1200 may be formed of a transparent color whose inside can be visually recognized, and the surface thereof may be subjected to a process (for example, a textured process) of irregularly reflecting the irradiated light. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the various lamps makes it difficult to see the inside of the first variable winning device 6000, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off (that is, various types). The inside of the variable winning device 6000 may be made visible when the lamp is not lit. Thereby, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the variable winning device 6000.

When such a configuration is used, a shield wall that shields the first variable winning device 6000 from being irradiated with light emitted from various lamps is provided, and the shield wall is made variable between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide a configuration. This allows the player to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 even while the game is being played.

Further, by providing a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the first variable winning device 6000 with light and performing light emission control on the light emitting means, it is difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. A state (a state where light is emitted) and a visible state (a state where light is not emitted) may be switched.

Further, a movable member for decoration is provided on the cover front plate 1200 whose inside can be visually confirmed, and the operation of the movable member is controlled, so that the inside of the storage channel 1231 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is A state in which the storage channel 1231 does not overlap with the storage channel 1231) and a state in which the inside of the storage channel 1231 is difficult to visually recognize (a movable movable member for decoration covers the storage channel 1231). You may make it switch.

Further, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 86(a), the cover front plate 1200 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire range of the storage channel 1231 and ensures that the movable state of the interference device 6900 is visually recognized. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be any configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900 in the attitude in which a normal game is played.

For example, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize only the lower half (downstream side of the bent portion) of the storage channel 1231 and ensure the visibility of the upper half (even if the formation of the upper half mirror is omitted. It is also possible to make it difficult to visually recognize only the portion of the interference device 6900 that overlaps with the interference member 6930 in a front view, based on the same idea. This makes it possible to construct at low cost a structure that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the interference device 6900.

Further, for example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 may be ensured (the formation of the half mirror of the lower half is omitted), while the upper half may be made difficult to be visually recognized. In this case, the lower limit of the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 can be grasped by visually recognizing the spheres remaining in the lower half of the storage flow channel 1231 while being stored in the storage flow channel 1231. It can be difficult to know the exact number.

Therefore, when the player temporarily stops the firing of the balls in order to reduce the number of useless balls (the balls that do not enter the winning opening), it is difficult to set the timing of stopping the firing. In the first variable winning device 6000 (see FIG. 53) described in this control example, when the storage channel 1231 is full (10 balls are stored), no more balls can be expected. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to reduce waste balls by stopping the firing of the balls at that timing.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the number of balls that entered the first variable winning device 6000 in the predetermined number of round games R does not necessarily match the number of balls that are stored in the storage channel 1231. Even if the number of balls entering the 1-variable winning device 6000 is counted, the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 cannot be accurately known. Therefore, in order to directly grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to visually check the inside of the storage channel 1231.

That is, because of the configuration of the present control example, the visibility of the lower half of the storage channel 1231 is ensured (the formation of the half mirror of the lower half is omitted), while the configuration of making the upper half difficult to see is effective, It becomes difficult for the player to easily determine the timing to stop the ball firing. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention and concentration on the ball firing in the jackpot game, and prevent the player from playing the game casually.

A feature of this control example shown in FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b) is that the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) is operated with respect to the operation timing of the interference member 6930 in addition to the above-described change in the visual recognition state. The timing that can be set in is prepared, but details will be described later.

Next, the screen configuration of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81, a second symbol display device 83, and a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. A plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be movable. Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

FIG. 87 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 87(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 87(b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main design with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached designs that imitate characters such as planers, furoshiki, and helmets. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 93) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 87(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom in a cyclical manner for variable display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second.

In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot). It is possible to suppress oversight. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this control example) is aligned on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a reserved ball, a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time. If both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are present, the lottery based on the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the removal of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to leave a ball in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). Yes, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. to cause.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the type of the special symbol (either the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) in which the lottery is easy to be executed depending on the game state is configured differently. In the main display area Dm, a variable display in the case where the lottery of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed in the current game state is executed is displayed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, the variable display when the lottery of the special symbol which is difficult to be performed in the current game state is performed is displayed.

Here, the fact that the special symbol lottery that is difficult to perform the lottery is executed is a great attention matter for the player. For example, in the normal state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is difficult to be performed in the lottery is executed, and if the lottery result is a big hit, compared to the case where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is a big hit, the player There are cases where the degree of expectation of profits obtained is high. Further, for example, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the lottery of the special symbol 1 which is difficult to perform the lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is a big hit, compared to the case where the special symbol 2 is a big hit. In some cases, the degree of expectation of profits that the player can obtain may be low.

Therefore, in the small area Ds3, by performing the variable display only when the special symbol lottery in which the lottery is difficult to be executed in the current game state is executed (by separating the variable display in the main display area Dm), the game It becomes easier to attract the player's attention, and the player can be drawn into the variable display.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 87(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of a third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display region Dm are displayed in the right small region Ds3. In the small area Ds2 at the center, usually, a predetermined character 710 (in this control example, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character A notice production is performed by showing it up.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and, When a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed, the number of entered balls is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first. It is shown not only by the symbol display device 37 but also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small region Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64, and the symbol (second symbol) displayed in the lower half. The number of reserved balls) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640. FIG. 87 exemplifies a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed and zero second retained symbols are displayed (the second reserved symbols are all blank).

In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is changed to a part of the third symbol display device 81 by numbers, or the area divided into four is changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 to 92, a timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example in the first control example will be described.

In the present control example, based on an operation on the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1 ), an effect related to the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86) is executed. Note that examples of effects related to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 include, for example, effects that change the visibility inside the storage channel 1231 and discharge modes of the spheres stored inside the storage channel 1231. The effect etc. to change are illustrated. Then, these effects are configured such that the content of the effects changes depending on the degree of deviation between the operation timing that is a predetermined reference and the timing when the player operates the operation button 300.

Here, in this control example, a timing effect (operation effect) is executed as an effect for notifying the timing of operating the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1 ). Then, according to the timing effect (operation effect), the effect is configured so that the profit obtained by the player is maximized by executing the operation at a good timing. As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the operation button 300 can be improved.

First, the content of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89. 88(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display content during timing production (operation production). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation situation with respect to the operation means (operation button 300) are used to change the operation based on the operation of the operation means. The display contents of the three-symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the third symbol display device 81, a round number display portion 714 displaying the current round number is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a mode indicating that the round game R of the third round is being performed, and In the area Ds2, the acquisition display indicating the number of balls won during the jackpot is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "Aim right" is displayed on the guide display unit for guiding the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for indicating the number of balls obtained based on the fact that the balls have won the specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls of the specific winning opening 1000a. To be done. This acquisition number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 1000a, then is moved and displayed toward the small area Ds2, and finally, of the small area Ds2. It is added as an acquisition display.

In the number-of-rounds display unit 714, the display regarding the section of the game currently being executed (round number or interval) is displayed large on the left side, and the display regarding the section of the game started after the end of the section of the game currently being executed is displayed on the right side. It is displayed small.

Further, four circles are displayed side by side below the round number display. The filled circles are switched depending on the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than four, the circle at the left end is filled (see FIG. 88(a), corresponding to the lack display) and stored in the storage channel 1231. When the number of spheres to be stored is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled (corresponding to the intermediate number display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 If the number is less than 9, the second circle from the right is filled (see FIG. 92(a), corresponding to the lack display), and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10. In this case, the circle at the right end is filled (see FIG. 92(b), corresponding to full display).

At the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will start from the next round and a guide display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. .. Then, on the lower side of the screen, the effect area used for the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In this effect area, a button display mode 715 corresponding to the operation button 300 is displayed, and a display pointer 719 (see FIG. 88(b)) corresponding to the button display mode 715 is displayed as a sub display area Ds4. Below the sub-display area Ds4, there is provided a sub-display area Ds5 which is arranged in the same shape as the sub-display area Ds4 and which displays information regarding the operation of the player.

As will be described later with reference to FIG. 88(b), the sub display area Ds4 is an area in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, and the display pointer 719 is a display mode indicating operation timing. By operating the operation button 300 (operation means) at a timing matched with the bar display portion 717, a success effect (see FIG. 88B described later) is executed. Further, when the operation means is operated at the timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display portion 717, the failure effect (see FIG. 89 described later) is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88(b), the transparent lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on in association with the success effect being executed in the fourth round game R (see FIG. 86(b)). In the description of this control example, as shown in FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b), the front cover plate 1200 is difficult to visually recognize the inside when the transmissive lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off, while the transmissive lamp is not visible. The half mirror is configured to switch to a transmissive state in which the inside can be visually confirmed by lighting 227ba to 227be. Therefore, by turning on the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the flow-down state of the sphere flowing down near the interference device 6900 (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)) (of the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231) It is possible to let the player grasp the storage mode).

Also, as shown in FIG. 89, in connection with the failure effect being executed in the fourth round game R, some of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on. As a result, the storage mode of the spheres arranged near the interference device 6900 (the lower half of the storage channel 1231) cannot be visually recognized, but is arranged near the detection sensor 1240 (the upper half of the storage channel 1231). The storage mode of the sphere is configured to be visible.

As shown in FIG. 88( a ), while the notice effect is being executed, the characters “standby” are scroll-displayed from right to left in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

Next, the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described with reference to FIG. 88(b). When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scroll-displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing at which the display pointer 719a matches the bar display portion 717, the screen center is displayed. In addition to displaying the character “good” as the result display mode 720, the fact that the operation button 300 has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), at the same time that the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters "Attention to attacker!" are displayed in the vicinity of the result display mode 720, and the result display mode 720 is displayed in the sub display area Ds5. Similarly to, the character "good" is displayed.

In this case, the characters “good” are dispersedly arranged on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can easily notice the display and the attacker (the first variable winning device 6000) who notices the display. ). Then, the player can be made aware that the storage balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 can be visually recognized, and the player who notices this can determine the stored number. Accordingly, the appropriate launch ball adjustment can be performed.

The state shown in FIG. 89 is a state in which the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719c does not coincide with the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect), and the result display mode 720 at the center of the screen is " The character "bad" is displayed, and the fact that the operation button 300 has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715.

As shown in FIG. 89, at the same time as the result display mode 720 is displayed, the characters “bad” are displayed in the sub display area Ds5 as in the result display mode 720. Note that the character "Attention to the attacker!" is not displayed here.

In this case, the characters "bad" are dispersedly arranged on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can easily notice the display. In addition, by not intentionally displaying the character "Attention to the attacker!", the player can attack the player (attacking the first variable) until the storage balls stored in the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 are difficult to see. Since it is possible to suppress attention to the winning device 6000), it is possible to maintain the player's attention to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's confidence in the display of the characters “Attention to the attacker!” (reliability that profit can be obtained by following the display).

As described above, when the result display mode 720 is displayed as shown in FIG. 89, some of the transmissive lamps 227ba are lit. On the other hand, in this control example, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the round game R of the fourth round, the operation of the operation button 300 is continued even if 3 seconds have passed after the display pointer 719 passed the bar display portion 717. If not performed, since it is controlled to keep all of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be turned off, in the round game R thereafter (from the fourth round to the sixth round), the storage channel 1231 It is configured so that it is extremely difficult to see the inside.

90(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R, and FIG. 90(b) to FIG. 91(b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents during a timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 and a schematic diagram showing the operation situation with respect to the operation means (operation button 300) are used to change the operation based on the operation of the operation means. The display contents of the three-symbol display device 81 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90, on the third symbol display device 81, the above-mentioned number-of-rounds display section 714 is displayed on the upper left of the screen in a mode showing that it is during an interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round, In the small area Ds2, an acquisition display that suggests the number of balls that have been won during the jackpot is executed, and in the small area Ds3, "aiming to the right" is displayed on the guide display unit that guides the game method.

At the center of the screen, an operation instruction display composed of the characters “press!” that prompts the user to operate the operation button 300 is executed. Then, on the lower side of the screen, the effect area used for the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed.

In the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the lower part of the effect area, the band display section 716, which is a display mode indicating the operation timing, is displayed similarly to the bar display section 717. The band display section 716 is provided adjacent to the first band section 716a on the right side of the bar display section 717, on which the word "relief" is displayed, and on the left side of the first band section 716a. And a third band 716c in which the characters "highest" are overlapped with each other and the characters "Fail" are displayed on the left side of the second band 716b. ..

In the sub display area Ds4, the display pointer 719d is scrolled and displayed from right to left as described above. In this control example, the profit obtained by the player is controlled so as to change depending on the position of the display pointer 719d on the band display portion 716 to operate the operation button 300 (operation means).

For example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is above the first band portion 716a, the peace of mind effect (see FIG. 91A described later) is executed. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, the advantageous phenomenon of being able to acquire the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol occurs, while the payout of the prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly reduced (the specified number. (In the present control example, the number of prize balls cannot be made as much as 10 balls cannot be entered), and a disadvantageous event occurs that the duration of the fifth round game R is the maximum time (30 seconds). ..

Further, for example, when the operation button 300 (operating means) is operated while the display pointer 719d is above the second band 716b, the highest effect (see FIG. 90(b) described later) is executed. In this case, after the jackpot game is over, there is an advantageous event that the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol can be obtained, and in the round game R of the fifth round, the specified number (10) of balls are first The advantageous event that the ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds) occurs, but the disadvantage does not occur.

In addition, for example, when the operation button 300 (operation means) is operated when the display pointer 719d is above the third band 716c, or when the operation button 200 (operation means) is not operated, the failure effect is produced. (See FIG. 91(b) described later) is executed. In this case, after the end of the jackpot game, the disadvantage of not being able to obtain the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol occurs, while the prescribed number (10) of balls is first in the round game R of the fifth round. An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

It is to be noted that the maximum benefit can be obtained by operating the operation button 300 (operating means) when the display pointer 719 is located on the second band portion 716b which vertically overlaps the bar display portion 717. Also, even if the display is immediately shifted from the timing effect (operation effect) displayed in FIG. 89, the player can execute the operation of the operation button 300 (operation means) without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90(b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scroll-displayed in the sub-display area Ds4, and when the display pointer 719d is vertically aligned with the second band portion 716b, the operation button 300 is operated. , “Max!V acquisition!” (maximum effect) is displayed in the center of the screen as the result display mode 720, and the fact that the operation button 300 has been operated is displayed by changing the display mode of the button display mode 715. It As a result, the player can visually recognize that the maximum profit can be obtained, and the interest of the player can be improved.

It should be noted that since the display pointer 719 is controlled so as to obtain the maximum profit by operating the operation button 300 (operating means) when the display pointer 719 is located in the second band portion 716b which vertically overlaps the bar display portion 717, Even if the display immediately shifts from the timing effect (operation effect) (effect in the fourth round game R) displayed in FIG. 88(b) and FIG. 89 (immediately the effect in the interval between rounds is started. Also, the player can operate the operation buttons 300 (operation means) without feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88(a), since the guidance display displays "Don't be wary after the round ends," the inter-round interval after the end of the fourth round game R (Fig. Also in 90 (a)), the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. As a result, the player may not be aware of the timing effect (operation effect) display shown in FIG. 90(b) and may not be able to operate the operation button 300 (operation means), which may reduce the possibility of a disadvantage. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(a), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation pointer 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719e vertically matches the first band portion 716a. In addition, while the result display mode 720 is displayed as a result display mode 720, the characters “relief! V acquisition with reason!” (safety effect) is displayed, and that the operation mode of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. Is displayed. As a result, the player can visually recognize that it is possible to obtain a safe profit with some disadvantages, and the interest of the player can be improved.

It should be noted that, as described above, the slight disadvantage is that the payout of prize balls in the fifth round R is slightly less (a prescribed number (10 in this control example) cannot be entered. This means that the duration of the round game R of the fifth round becomes the maximum time (30 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91(b), an example of the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scroll-displayed in the sub display area Ds4, and when the operation button 300 is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719f vertically matches the third band portion 716c. , The character "Fail! V not! Next Expectation!" is displayed in the center of the screen as the result display mode 720, and the operation mode of the operation button 300 changes the display mode of the button display mode 715. It is displayed by doing. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that a great deal of disadvantage will occur.

Incidentally, the great disadvantage is, as described above, a disadvantage that the privilege of shifting to the high probability state of the special symbol cannot be acquired after the jackpot game is over. Further, in this case, as described above, a prescribed number (10) of balls can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a in the round game R of the fifth round, and the round game R of the fifth round is continued. Since the time can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), compared to the case shown in FIG. 91(a), the timing of ending the jackpot game can be advanced, and the special symbol lottery can be executed early. Since it is possible, it is possible to easily advance the transition timing to the next jackpot game.

As described above, in this control example, the profit obtained by the player is based on the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) in the timing effect (operation effect) in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R. Since it changes, the player's motivation for operating the operation button 300 (operation means) can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 92(a) and FIG. 92(b), the display in the sixth round game R will be described. 92(a) and 92(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for informing the third round of the round game R by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in FIG. 92(a), it is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display when the jackpot type is "jackpot L" or "jackpot N", and in FIG. 92(b), the jackpot type is "jackpot K", It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display in the case of "big hit M" or "big hit k".

In the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92(a), the jackpot type wins the jackpot of “jackpot L” or “jackpot N”, that is, the jackpot of the sixth round jackpot. The "big hit" character shown is displayed.

In addition, in the example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 92(b), the jackpot type is a jackpot of “jackpot K”, “jackpot M” or “jackpot k”, that is, a jackpot of 6 rounds. The character of “big hit” indicating that the player has been won is displayed, and the interference device 6900 is executed in the operation pattern (twentieth operation pattern) advantageous to the player in the sixth round of the round game R. The character “+ Chance” is displayed as the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721, and accordingly, the character “Dedicated to the right!” is displayed on the guide display portion in the small area Ds3.

If the jackpot type is a jackpot K, jackpot M, or jackpot k, in the sixth round of round game R, by continuing without firing the ball, more balls than the specified number are entered. The interfering device 6900 is driven so as to increase the possibility of occurrence of noise (see FIG. 99(a)). Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of receiving the prize balls in excess of the specified number by continuing to shoot the balls according to the display in FIG. 92(b).

In this way, in addition to the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol was a big hit, by notifying the mode of notifying the operation status of the interference device 6900 during the big hit on the display screen in the round game R, It is possible to display various display patterns suitable for the round game R. In this control example, by continuing or stopping the ball firing in accordance with this display, the player can easily receive the maximum profit planned for each jackpot type as the profit given to the player. Controlled by. Therefore, the player can easily obtain the maximum profit by firing the ball according to the display.

In addition, in this control example, the performance mode of the timing performance (operation performance) is changed based on the operation content to the player executed in the timing performance (operation performance). In an operation effect that is executed other than (operation effect) (for example, a mini game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change), an operation history (operation) in which the player operates the operation button 300 (operation means) It may be configured to change the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the number of times, the operation content, and the operation result. As a result, the game can be motivated to perform various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Further, the timing effect is not limited to the operation result of the operation button 300 (operation means) by the player, but is based on, for example, the time period measured by the time measuring means (RTC) or the game period in which the player plays the game. You may comprise so that the production mode of (operation production) may be switched.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described again. FIG. 93 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. Note that changes to FIG. 4 will be described, and description of the same parts will be omitted.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 100) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 100 is a model diagram illustrating a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of main controller 110. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery, and the selection of the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) Used for setting the initial value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the change type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern, and the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used.

The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. The small hit type counter C5 is used to select the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 117). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for the prize for the first entrance 64 and the prize for the second entrance 640. Special symbol 2 storage sphere storage 203b to be done is provided.

In the present control example, the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 each have a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored in total. Therefore, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display, or when the special symbol can be drawn by lottery of the special symbol such as when the special symbol jackpot game is not being played, each counter value is a special symbol when the ball wins the first entrance 64. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and the special symbol 1 is variably displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processing for execution are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, and various for displaying the special symbol 2 in a variable manner. Settings and control processing are executed.

On the other hand, during the period in which the special symbols can not be selected by lottery such as during the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 or during the jackpot game of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, the game ball is the first entrance 64 or the second entry. If the number of holdings for the winning entrance (starting opening) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present control example) when winning at the entrance 640, each counter value is acquired, and the winning The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entered ball entrance is stored. Further, when the number of holdings for the winning entrance is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 in this control example) are not acquired. Only prize balls are treated as invalid balls paid out to the player.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 319 in this control example), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (319 in this control example). There is. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 319, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first per random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 94(a)) of the main control device 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit defined in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 94A) will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state, in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0", If it is "0", it is determined to be a big hit. If the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is within the range of “1 to 4”. If it is within the range of "1 to 4," it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a jackpot for the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. 202a (see FIG. 94(a)). In this way, while the total number of random number values is 320, the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 1, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/320”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values “1 to 4” are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 320, the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 4, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/80”.

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. When the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94(b)). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured such that the stop type selection counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 99, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach is generated, it is different from the symbol that the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "reach loss" (for example, the range of 90 to 99) where the symbol stops, and "complete loss" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) where the reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and when a ball enters the first entrance 64, the value is stored in the RAM 203. The symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere storage area 203a. Moreover, when the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability time and a special symbol for low probability time, and a range of random number values set for each out-of-stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in the probability change state of the special symbol, a big hit is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89 Table is selected, "completely out" is easily selected, and "reach out" is narrowed to 90 to 99. Therefore, it is difficult to select "reach out". If the special symbol has a low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entrance 64. The table for low probability is selected, it becomes difficult to select “completely missed”, and the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “missed reach” is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low-probability state, since it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do.

In the present control example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, reach a maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 117) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting fluctuation patterns. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables that are commonly used by the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each win/fail judgment result. Has been done.

In the present control example, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239 and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 107), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being stored and is stored in the execution area of the normal pattern of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the design is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 94(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number defined as the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined as a normal symbol (second symbol). In the present control example, in the second random number table 202c, when the probability of a normal symbol is low (during a normal state of a normal symbol), there are five random number values that are a symbol of a regular symbol, and the range is "5 to 9". It has become. The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and the total number of random number values to be won is 5, so the probability of winning a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is "1. /48”.

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol (during a time saving state of a normal symbol), there are 200 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and since the total number of random number values to be won is 200, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". .. In this way, in the present control example, the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is greatly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, and thus the hit probability is greatly different. Further, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits is also different between the low probability and the high probability of the normal symbol. .. Therefore, the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol, the ease of entering the second entrance 640 is greatly different, so in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), It is possible to allow the player to play the game by aiming at the first entrance 64.

In the low probability state of the normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 (see FIG. 2), the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 (FIG. In 2), the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entrance slot) 67 (see FIG. 2), the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed for 1 second on the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 2). If the value of the executed second per random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second As the symbol), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for “1 second×2 times”. In the present control example, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary electric accessory opening time and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the game playability.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (that is, “0 to 239”), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107). It is updated and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 117).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 93, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 117) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 116). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 115) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 95. FIG. 94A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first per type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and at least an opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f are provided.

First, details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 94(b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment of the first hit type counter C2. The value is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 per hit is selected.

As shown in FIG. 94(b), with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in a range of "0 to 24" in association with "big hit K". This "big hit K" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit K" is 25, so when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the "big hit K" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit K", and after the big hit ends, the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 hour reductions (80 times ST). Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

Further, for the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 49", "big hit L" is defined in association with. This “big hit L” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit L" is 25, so if the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the "big hit L" is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big jackpot L", and transition to a high probability state of 80 hour reductions (80 times of ST) after the jackpot is the same as "big jackpot K", but as will be described later, In terms of game efficiency (number of payout prize balls/time required for jackpot game), it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than “jackpot K”.

Further, for the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 74", "major jackpot M" is defined in association with. The "big hit M" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit M” is 25, so when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1, the “big hit M” is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit M", and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Further, for the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "big hit N" is defined in association with. The "big hit N" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit N" is 25, so "big hit N" is determined when the special symbol 1 is a big hit. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit N", and the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times after the end of the big hit is the same as "big hit M", but as will be described later, " This is disadvantageous in that the maximum payout number is small (the probability of over-winning (over-winning) is low) with respect to the “big hit M”.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, in the range (entire range) of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99", "big hit k" is associated and defined. The "big hit k" is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that becomes the “big hit k” is 100, so when the big prize is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the “big hit k” is determined. The ratio is 100%.

This "big hit k" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, whether to shift to a high probability state of 80 times/hours (80 times of ST) or 100 times of the hour/short state of a normal symbol is given. , It changes depending on the game mode of the player during the big hit game. Note that the game mode of the player is not limited at all, and the ball may be passed through a predetermined entrance, or a predetermined operation means may be operated. It will be described later.

In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the privilege (the time saving state or the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) that is given after the jackpot is finished, the special symbol 2 is more advantageous. (It becomes easy to shift to the high probability state).

In this way, in the present control example, in the case where the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery, when the special symbol 2 is selected in the lottery, the high-probability state, which is advantageous to the player, shifts. It is designed to be easy. Therefore, once the continuous game mode (high probability state of special symbol, and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by entering the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. And a jackpot game are likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the extended game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, detailed contents of the opening/closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e. The open/close plate/interference member operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the open/close plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 52) are stored for each scenario type. And using the information stored in the interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game.

Specifically, in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 6 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario in which the open/close plate 1300 is set to “open (opened state)” and the interference member 6930 is set to “retracted state” for a maximum of 30 seconds. In the operation scenario 1, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor 1240 detects the specified number of balls (10 in this control example), so that the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends and the initial stage is completed. Control is performed so as to return to the state (the state in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed and the interference member is in the retracted state).

The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario in which the open/close plate 1300 is set to “open (opened state)” and the interference member 6930 is set to “retracted state” as the scenario contents for a maximum of 10 seconds. In the operation scenario 2, even if 10 seconds have not passed, the operation sensor of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario when the detection sensor 1240 detects a predetermined number of balls (10 in this control example). Controlled to return to the state.

In the operation scenario 3, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 0.2 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds→open (open state)” as the scenario content, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state”. This is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds in which “1.0 second→overhang state 0.1 second→evacuation state” is set. In the operation scenario 3, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario by detecting the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) by the detection sensor 1240. Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-described operation scenarios 1 and 2, the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state), so that the storage channel 1231 is formed. The remaining balls can be discharged, but details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, it takes 0.2 seconds to discharge one sphere).

Among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls discharged while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800. In this control example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, and 18.0 seconds after that (the fifth round of the round). The sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position after 20.0 seconds from the start of the game R).

This “after 2.0 seconds” is after the timing of the third sphere counting from the downstream side among the spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 passing through the sorting operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51). It is a numerical value set as a time point before the timing at which the fourth ball passes the distribution operation member 4851. That is, the fourth ball passes through the outlet 1150 immediately before the end of 0.8 seconds in which the closing (closed state) of the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained (from the start of the fifth round game R. It is a numerical value derived from the setting that it takes 1.0 seconds to pass through the communication passage 4810 from the discharge port 1150 (2.0 seconds have passed since the start of the round game R of the fifth round). ..

In the operation scenario 4, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 0.2 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.8 seconds→open (open state)” as the scenario content, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state”. This is an operation scenario of 30 seconds at the maximum, in which “1.0 seconds→overhang state 24.0 seconds→evacuation state” is set. In the operation scenario 4, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor of the opening and closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario when the detection sensor 1240 detects a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this example). Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 4, similarly to the above-described operation scenario 3, the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (open state) and then closed (closed state), so that the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231. Can be discharged, but details will be described later. Since the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds, up to four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged (as described above, it takes 0.2 seconds to discharge one sphere). Note that, among the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, the balls discharged while the closed state (closed state) is maintained for 0.8 seconds are guided to the probability variation determination unit 4800 as described above. is there.

The “extended state 24.0 seconds” of this operation scenario 4 is set as a numerical value capable of maintaining the extended state at least until the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position. That is, in the operation scenario 4, as will be described later, it becomes impossible for a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of spheres to pass through the detection sensor 1240 until the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In the configuration described above, since the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position before the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 after the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state is removed. It becomes impossible to make it flow down to the specific region 4830.

In the operation scenario 5, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 3.0 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds→open (open state)” as the scenario content, and the interference member 6930 “retracted state”. This is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds in which “0.2 seconds→overhang state 0.2 seconds→evacuation state 2.6 seconds→overhang state 20 seconds→evacuation state” is set. In operation scenario 5, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario when the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number of balls (10 in this control example). Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 5, the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state), so that one sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 is discharged, as described later. This is an operation scenario in which the flow of spheres can be regulated by the interference member 6930 and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is limited to 8 (see FIG. 53B, interference member 6930). Equivalent to the state that there is one sphere downstream).

In this case, it is possible to prevent the spheres from passing through the detection sensor 1240 when the number of spheres that have passed through the detection sensor 1240 is less than the prescribed number (9 in this control example), and thus the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. Since it is possible to allow the sphere to pass to the detection sensor 1240 based on the displacement of the sphere, it is possible to cause the sphere to pass to the detection sensor 1240 with a plurality of spheres arranged upstream of the detection sensor 1240. it can. As a result, it is possible to easily generate an over-winning prize (so-called “over-winning prize”).

In the operation scenario 6, the opening/closing plate 1300 is set to “open (open state) 3.0 seconds→closed (closed state) 0.2 seconds→open (open state)” as the scenario content, as in the operation scenario 5. In the operation scenario of a maximum of 30 seconds, the interference member 6930 is set to “withdrawal state 0.2 seconds → swelling state 2.6 seconds → withdrawal state 0.2 seconds → swelling state 0.2 seconds → withdrawal state” is there. In the operation scenario 6, even before 30 seconds have elapsed, the operation sensor of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends the operation scenario when the detection sensor 1240 detects a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this example). Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 6, although the opening/closing plate 1300 is first opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state), the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed because the ball is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930. This is an operation scenario in which the ball is not ejected from the ejection port 1150 while maintaining the closed state (closed state). Further, after 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the retracted state, so that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is 10 (see FIG. (See a)), the round game R ends based on the detection sensor 1240 detecting the tenth ball. Therefore, in the operation scenario 6, unlike the operation scenario 5, it is not possible to easily cause an excess prize.

In this way, the operation scenarios are divided and stored based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, so that the profit that the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 currently executed gives to the player. It can be easily identified.

For each operation scenario, the opening/closing plate 1300 is forcibly closed (see FIGS. 8 and 9) when a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. However, even if a predetermined number of balls enter the first specific winning port 1000a in the middle of the operation scenario, the interference game 6930 is controlled so that the round game R is performed. The operation based on the operation scenario is continued until the inter-round interval after the end of (1) is finished, and is controlled to change to the retracted state (the operation scenario ends) at the same time as the end of the inter-round interval.

FIG. 95B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f. This opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided with information on which predetermined scenario type corresponds to which jackpot type and what round of round game R.

In the MPU of the main controller 110, when executing the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930, information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is provided. It is read from the operation scenario storage area 202e, and the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are moved.

This opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f is configured to be able to set a corresponding operation scenario based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 are movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

In this control example, the case where the interference member 6930 is movably controlled corresponding to the start timing of the round game R of the jackpot game is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 is movable in an operation scenario in which the setting order is stored in advance in the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f, and the operation scenario changes in sequence every time the operation scenario ends after the power is turned on (or a predetermined operation start timing). It may be controlled. As a result, the correspondence between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 can be broken, which makes it difficult for the player to predict the operation of the interference member 6930.

96(a), FIG. 96(b), FIG. 97(a), FIG. 97(b), FIG. 98, FIG. 99(a), and FIG. 99(b), with reference to the jackpot type The operation modes of 1300 (the first specific winning opening 1000a), the interference member 6930, and the distribution device 4850 (the specific area 4830, see FIG. 51) will be described.

96(a), 96(b), 97(a), 97(b), 98, 99(a) and 99(b), the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a It is also shown as “open”, the closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a is also shown as “closed”, the protruding state of the interference member 6930 is also shown as “tensioned”, and the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is also shown as “retracted”. The state in which the sphere can flow into the region 4830 (that is, the state where the sorting operation member 4851 is arranged in the open position) is also referred to as “open”, and the state where the sphere cannot flow into the specific region 4830 (that is, the sorting action member) The state in which the 4851 is arranged in the closed position) is also referred to as “closed”.

As shown in FIG. 95(b), the operation mode between the opening/closing plate 1300 (first specific winning opening 1000a) and the interference member 6930 from the first round game R to the fourth round game R is: Since it is common regardless of the jackpot type, the period from the end of the fourth round game R to the end of the jackpot game will be described in detail.

Further, as described above, the driving mode of the distribution operation member 4851 is common regardless of the type of jackpot (see FIG. 96(a)). That is, 2.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position (the ball is opened so that the ball can pass to the specific area 4830), and 18.0 seconds later (5 20.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the round), the distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the closed position (the ball is blocked in the specific area 4830 so that it cannot pass).

FIG. 96(a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the fifteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 96(a), in the fifteenth operation pattern, after the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds is sandwiched between the rounds of the fifth round. The game R is started and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, all the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 will be discharged at the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R (0.2 seconds×10 pieces). = 2.0 seconds) The balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R do not remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the start of the fifth round game. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds until the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. No sphere is discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the balls are discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state (the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state). Since the sorting operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position so that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the sphere is opened so that the sphere can pass to the specific area 4830, the event that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 does not occur.

On the other hand, the storage channel 1231 is configured to store a regulated number (10 in this control example) of spheres, so the round game R of the fifth round is 10 balls to the first specific winning opening 1000a. It can be ended by inserting individual balls. Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (20.0 seconds), the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fifth round game R can be discharged. By continuing to shoot the ball toward the winning opening 1000a, an event occurs in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 after the end of the fifth round game R.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give an advantageous privilege to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to being able to do, the round game R of the fifth round can be finished in a short time (it can be finished by winning the specified number (10 in this control example)), so the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. Can be raised.

Further, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the round game R of the fifth round, it is unclear whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 over the round game R of the fifth round. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

FIG. 96(b) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the sixteenth operation pattern. In the present control example, the time change shown in FIG. 96(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot L (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 96(b), in the 16th operation pattern, after the round R of the fourth round is finished, the second interval time Int2 (1.0 seconds) between the rounds is sandwiched and the round of the fifth round is inserted. The game R is started and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, five balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 will be discharged at an interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round of the game R (0.2 seconds×5). The number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R may remain in the storage channel 1231 until after the fifth round game R is started. For example, in the round game R of the fourth round, when five or more spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, the number of spheres obtained by subtracting 5 from the stored number remains in the storage channel.

Here, since the progress of the round game R of the fifth round changes depending on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fourth round, the cases will be described separately below.

First, in the round game R of the fourth round, if 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where 5 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. To be done.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round game R is started in a state where five balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the balls pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the balls can pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the advantageous privilege for the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), the storage channel is also after the discharge. One ball remains at 1231. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 9 (the number is less than the specified number (10 in the present control example)), so the fifth round The eye round game R will not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1, elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game is lowered.

In addition, in FIG. 96(b), as a typical example, the time change when 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R is illustrated.

Secondly, in the round game R of the fourth round, when nine balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the round game R of the fifth round is started with four balls stored in the storage channel 1231. To be done.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the advantageous privilege for the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that had been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the round game R of the fifth round is set to the specified number of balls. The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Therefore, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved.

Thirdly, in the fourth round game R, if the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 0 to 8, 5 is stored in the storage channel 1231 from the number of stored spheres. The round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where the number of balls drawn (0 to 3 balls) is stored.

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds until the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. No sphere is discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started, while the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the whole ball (0 to 3 pieces), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round game R is started does not occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that had been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the round game R of the fifth round is set to the specified number of balls. The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. In addition, if the ball is allowed to pass through the specific region 4830 for 1 second or more after the end of the fifth round game R (19 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R). If a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls are put into the first specific winning opening 1000a before, a phenomenon occurs in which the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific region 4830. Since it is configured so that the ball passes through the specific region 4830, an advantageous privilege (continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol in this control example) is given to the player. be able to.

Summarizing the above-described first to third cases, when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round R is round game R, the event in which the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 is early. While it can be generated, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round game is reduced (in the first case), and 9 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R. In the case of the number of balls, it is possible to cause an event that the ball passes through the specific area 4830 early, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the round game of the fifth round is increased (in the case of the second), the fourth round. In the case of 0 to 8 spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R, the event that the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 is after the end of the fifth round R and the fifth round The time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the round game is improved (in the third case).

Therefore, in the case of controlling with the same operation pattern, it is possible to change the timing at which the player makes a profit and the amount of the profit obtained for each of the gaming modes of the jackpot game.

In the present control example, as described above, in the fourth round game R, by setting the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 to 9, the profit obtained by the player can be maximized. .. Therefore, at least when the jackpot type is the jackpot L, information about the guideline for the number stored in the storage channel 1231 is displayed (see FIG. 88(b)). As a result, attention to the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved and the player's line of sight can be guided.

FIG. 97(a) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the seventeenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 97(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot M (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the seventeenth operation pattern, after the fourth round game R is finished, the fifth round is inserted with the fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) between the rounds interposed. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, the upper limit of 9 balls stored in the storage flow path 1231 will be discharged in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round of the game R (0.2 seconds). ×9 = 1.8 seconds) The balls stored in the storage channel 1231 in the fourth round game R can remain in the storage channel 1231 with an upper limit of 1 until after the start of the fifth round game. There is a nature. In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds for the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is newly added in the fifth round game R. The entered ball is not discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 within 1 second after the start of the round game R of the fifth round.

Therefore, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, during the period (0.8 seconds) in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state (the regulation member 1600 is in the discharge state), the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 are The distribution operation member 4851 is displaced to the open position, and the event of passing the specific area 4830 immediately after the sphere is opened to the specific area 4830 so that the ball can pass therethrough does not occur.

In addition, since 1.0 second has elapsed after the start of the round game R of the fifth round and 25.0 seconds have elapsed, the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state and regulates the flow of the ball (FIG. 86). (See (a)), the storage channel 1231 is in a state in which the regulated number (10 in this control example) of spheres cannot be stored (a state in which a maximum of 9 spheres can be stored, substantially downstream of the interference member 6930). Since spheres are not stored, a maximum of 7 spheres can be stored). Therefore, the second round game cannot be finished until 25.0 seconds after the start of the fifth round game R, and then 10 balls are inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a. Or, a predetermined time (30.0 seconds in this control example) has elapsed, and the fifth round game R is completed.

Therefore, while the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 (until 20.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round game R of the fifth round), it is stored in the storage channel 1231 in the round game R of the fifth round. The ejected ball cannot be ejected. Therefore, even if the ball is continuously fired toward the first specific winning opening 1000a, the event that the ball passes through the specific region 4830 does not occur after the end of the fifth round game R.

That is, in this operation pattern, since the ball is configured to be unable to pass through the specific area 4830, it is possible to give an advantageous privilege to the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol). In addition to that, the round game R of the fifth round becomes long, so it is not possible to increase (can decrease) the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game.

FIG. 97(b) is a diagram showing a time change of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the eighteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 97(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is the jackpot N (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 97(b), in the 18th operation pattern, after the end of the round game R of the fourth round, the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds is sandwiched between the rounds of the fifth round. The game R is started, and the round game R of the fifth round is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95(b)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the eighteenth operation pattern is different from the seventeenth operation, except that the inter-round interval immediately before the round game R of the fifth round is different. Since it is the same as the pattern, the description of the parts common to the above description will be omitted.

The difference between the eighteenth operation pattern and the seventeenth operation pattern is whether or not a residual ball that remains without being discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 occurs in the inter-round interval immediately before the fifth round game R.

That is, in the seventeenth operation pattern, as described above, the inter-round interval is set to the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds), so that the maximum discharge number is 9 and the stored number 1231 is a ball. When 10 are stored, one remaining ball is generated.

On the other hand, in the eighteenth operation pattern, the interval between rounds is set to the first interval time between rounds Int1 (2.0 seconds), so that the maximum number of discharged particles is 10, and the number of stored particles 1231 is 10 (maximum). Even if they are stored, they can be discharged globally, and no residual balls will be produced.

In this case, in the seventeenth operation pattern, there is a ball (remaining ball) discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R, so that it is specified immediately after the fifth round game R starts. On the other hand, it is possible to make the player think that the ball may pass through the area 4830 (expected normal jackpot), while in the eighteenth operation pattern, from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the fifth round game R. Since there is no ball (remaining ball) to be ejected, the player can understand that there is no possibility that the ball will pass through the specific area 4830 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round (no expectation normal jackpot).

Therefore, the player's expectation can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the ball remaining in the storage flow channel 1231 while substantially sharing the same profit for the player.

Further, as described above, the 16th operation pattern in which the player can obtain a larger profit than the jackpot M of the jackpot type M, and the remaining ball is generated in the interval between rounds immediately before the round game R of the fifth round (Fig. 96 (see (b)), it is possible to grasp the difference from the number of remaining balls in the storage flow channel 1231, so that the player's attention to the number of remaining balls in the storage flow channel 1231 can be improved.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the nineteenth operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 98 is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot k (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 98, in the 19th operation pattern, after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the fifth round of the round game R is inserted with the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between the rounds interposed. The round game R that is started and is the fifth round is executed in the above-described operation scenario 4 (see FIG. 95(b)).

First, according to this operation pattern, how many balls are stored in the storage flow path 1231 in the interval between rounds immediately before the fifth round game R is changed by the player's operation.

That is, immediately after it is determined that the player has operated the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) in accordance with the timing effect (operation effect, see FIG. 90 and FIG. 91) described above, the interference member 6930 changes to the projecting state, Since the discharge of the sphere after that is restricted, the sphere arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 remains in the storage channel 1231. It should be noted that the operation of the operation button 300 is controlled such that only the timing of the first push in the inter-round interval is determined to be valid and invalid for the subsequent push, but the details will be described later.

Here, since the progress of the fifth round game R changes depending on the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to improve the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) and the operation of the operation button 300. Hereinafter, the cases will be described separately.

First, a case where there are many spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (when there are five or more spheres) will be described. That is, it is a case where the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where five or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is early (see FIG. 91(a)).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

Therefore, when the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where five or more spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the spheres can pass through the specific area 4830, the spheres move in the specific area 4830. Since it passes, an advantageous privilege for the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the storage channel is also after the discharge. At 1231, one or more spheres remain. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 9 or less (the number is less than the specified number (10 in this control example)) The round game R of the round does not end until 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operation time T1, elapses, and the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game decreases.

In other words, in the first case, after the jackpot game is over, the advantageous phenomenon of being able to acquire the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol occurs, while the payout of the prize balls in the fifth round game R is slightly less. Disadvantage (the number of stipulated balls (10 in this control example) cannot be entered, the number of prize balls is reduced) The disadvantage that the duration of round game R of the fifth round is the maximum time (30 seconds) Such a phenomenon occurs.

Secondly, a case where there are four spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 will be described. That is, it is a case where the fifth round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is good (see FIG. 90(b)).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

Therefore, when the fifth round game R is started in a state where four balls are stored in the storage channel 1231, the ball passes through the specific region 4830 immediately after the ball can pass through the specific region 4830. Therefore, the advantageous privilege for the player (in this control example, continuation of the high probability state of the special symbol) can be given at an early stage.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that had been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the round game R of the fifth round is set to the specified number of balls. The ball can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. The specified number of balls will enter the first specific winning opening 1000a only after 25.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R from the control mode of the interference member 6930. ..

That is, in the second case, an advantageous event occurs in which the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol can be acquired after the jackpot game ends, and the specified number (10) in the round game R of the fifth round. There is an advantageous event that the ball can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the round game R of the fifth round can be made shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds), while the disadvantageous phenomenon is Does not occur.

Thirdly, a case where there are few spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 (when the number is three or less) will be described. That is, this is a case where the round game R of the fifth round is started in a state where three or less balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. This corresponds to the case where the operation timing of the operation button 300 is late (see FIG. 91(b)).

Here, as described above, in the present control example, among the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the fifth round R, the fourth sphere counted from the downstream side is the specific region. The distribution operation member 4851 is controlled to be at the open position at the timing of passing 4830 (the timing at which the third ball does not pass the specific area 4830).

In addition, since it takes at least 2.0 seconds until the ball newly entering the storage channel 1231 reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231, within 1 second after the start of the fifth round game R. No sphere is discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, immediately after the round game R of the fifth round is started, while the balls discharged from the storage flow path 1231 pass through the whole ball (0 to 3 pieces), the sorting operation is performed in a state where the balls cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Since the member 4851 is maintained, the event in which the ball passes the specific area 4830 immediately after the fifth round game R is started does not occur.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds x 4 = 0.8 seconds), they remain in the storage channel 1231. Although all the balls that were being used are ejected, the interference member 6930 maintains the bulging state from the lapse of 1.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the fifth round to the lapse of 25.0 seconds. The number of balls (10 in this control example) cannot be inserted into the first specific winning port 1000a. Furthermore, when 20.0 seconds have passed after the start of the round game R of the fifth round, the sorting operation member 4851 (see FIG. 51) is driven so that the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830.

Therefore, after the end of the fifth round game R, the ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 does not pass through the specific area 4830.

On the other hand, since the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 immediately after the start of the round game R of the fifth round is four (0.2 seconds×4=0.8 seconds), the balls remain in the storage channel 1231. All the balls that had been discharged are discharged. Therefore, in the round game R of the fifth round, the number of balls that can additionally enter the storage channel 1231 is 10 (the same number as the specified number), so that the round game R of the fifth round is set to the specified number of balls. It can be ended by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 1000a (it can be ended without waiting for 30.0 seconds, which is the maximum length of the first operating time T1).

Therefore, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the jackpot game can be improved. The specified number of balls will enter the first specific winning opening 1000a only after 25.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round game R from the control mode of the interference member 6930. ..

That is, in the third case, after the jackpot game is over, the disadvantage that the privilege of shifting to the high-probability state of the special symbol cannot be acquired occurs, while the prescribed number (10) of the round game R of the fifth round occurs. An advantageous event occurs in which the ball can be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a and the duration of the fifth round game R can be shorter than the maximum time (30 seconds).

Summarizing the above-described first to third cases, when five or more spheres remain in the storage channel 1231, an event in which the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 can be caused early, while 5 The time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the round game of the round decreases (first case), and when four balls remain in the storage flow path 1231, an event that the balls pass through the specific area 4830 is caused early. In addition, the time efficiency for the number of payout prize balls in the fifth round of the round game is improved (second case), and when the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 is three or less, the balls pass through the specific area 4830. While no event occurs, the time efficiency with respect to the number of payout award balls in the fifth round game is increased (third case). Then, which case is applied changes depending on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 300.

That is, since the profit obtained by the player can be changed depending on the timing of operating the operation button 300, the attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved and the player can participate in the timing effect (operation effect). Can increase motivation.

FIG. 99(a) is a diagram showing changes in timing of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the twentieth operation pattern. In this control example, the timekeeping change shown in FIG. 99(a) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot K, M or k (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 99(a), in the twentieth operation pattern, the sixth round game R is executed in the above-described operation scenario 5 (see FIG. 95(b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, the upper limit of the excessive number of balls (the number of balls that exceeds the specified number (10 in this control example)) into the first specific winning port 1000a It can be easily generated by one piece. Details will be described below.

The inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round of the round game R is set at the inter-round first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started in a state where there are no spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

Immediately after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the interference member 6930 is in the extended state, but immediately returns to the retracted state (see FIG. 95(a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a from the start of the sixth round game R until the lapse of 1.0 seconds is not restricted by the interference member 6930 to flow down, and is 2 It takes about 0.0 seconds to reach the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 (the front side of the regulating member 1600, a position in contact with the regulating member 1600).

This first ball entered is discharged when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed (the discharging opening 1150 (see FIG. 14) is opened) 3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round game R. .. Here, since the period in which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed is 0.2 seconds, the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is limited to one.

3.0 seconds after the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the outlet 1150 starts to open, and at the same time, the interference member 6930 changes to the projecting state. Therefore, thereafter, the sphere arranged upstream of the interference member 6930 is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

As for the internal shape of the storage channel 1231, when the interference member 6930 is in an extended state, a maximum of two spheres can be stored downstream of the interference member 6930 and a maximum of seven spheres can be stored upstream of the interference member 6930 (FIG. 86(b)).

After 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round of the round game R, the ball entering the storage channel 1231 is regulated from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and therefore stays on the upstream side of the interference member 6930. It will be.

On the other hand, as described above, when one sphere arranged at the lowermost end is discharged from the storage channel 1231, as a result, the sphere arranged downstream of the interference member 6930 inside the storage channel 1231. 1 or less. Therefore, the maximum number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 is eight. The total number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number (10 in this control example). Therefore, the specified number of balls is maintained while the interference member 6930 maintains the projecting state. Cannot be inserted into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the sixth round game R cannot be ended.

During this time, since the open/close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 86(b)), the player can continue right-handing according to the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 92(b)). A plurality of balls can be aligned on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 (so-called “grape” can be generated).

When the interference member 6930 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state, the sphere that has been regulated to flow down inside the storage channel 1231 flows down along the inclination of the opening/closing plate 1300 so as to follow the flow down. (Runs down like an avalanche). The opening/closing plate 1300 starts its operation toward the closed state when a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a due to the flow of the balls, but it corresponds to the number of ejected balls. Since a space for one sphere is formed in the storage channel 1231, the momentum of the sphere flowing into the storage channel 1231 is maintained even after the opening/closing plate 1300 starts operating.

Therefore, before the opening/closing plate 1300 closes the first specific winning opening 1000a, there is a possibility that a ball with a momentum may enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, the upper limit of 1 is exceeded. Can generate winnings.

In addition, when the ball is not arranged at the lowermost end of the storage channel 1231 at the time when 3.0 seconds have passed from the start of the sixth round of the round game R, downstream of the interference member 6930 even after 3.0 seconds have elapsed. The number of spheres placed in does not change. Therefore, in this case, the number of spheres remaining on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 is 0 to 2. In addition, since the spheres are not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the above-mentioned void is not formed inside the storage channel 1231 and it is not possible to exert the effect of causing the excess winning. It

FIG. 99(b) is a diagram showing changes in time of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the 21st operation pattern. In this control example, the time change shown in FIG. 99(b) is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot type is jackpot L or N (see FIG. 94(b)).

As shown in FIG. 99(b), in the 21st operation pattern, the sixth round game R is executed in the above-mentioned operation scenario 6 (see FIG. 95(b)).

According to this operation pattern, in the round game R of the sixth round, an excessive amount of balls (number of balls exceeding the specified number (10 in this control example) into the first specific winning opening 1000a occurs. Can be difficult. Details will be described below.

The inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round of the round game R is set at the inter-round first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, the round game R of the sixth round is started in a state where there are no spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

Immediately after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, the interference member 6930 is maintained in the projecting state for 2.6 seconds (see FIG. 95(a)). Therefore, the ball that first enters the first specific winning opening 1000a within 1.0 second from the start of the sixth round of the round game R is restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930.

When the interference member 6930 changes to the retracted state, the sphere whose flow has been regulated restarts to flow down, but for 0.2 seconds (2.0 seconds which is the time required for the flow down of the storage channel 1231/10 storable numbers). In ), the sphere flows down only for the length of one sphere. Therefore, the sphere that has resumed flowing down has the lowest end of the storage channel 1231 (on the front side of the regulating member 1600, by the time the opening/closing plate 1300 starts to operate in the closed state (the discharge port 1150 (see FIG. 14) starts opening). It is not possible to reach the position (contacting the regulation member 1600). Therefore, in this operation pattern, the discharge of the ball from the storage channel 1231 does not occur at the timing when 3.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the sixth round game R.

3.0 seconds after the start of the round game R of the sixth round, at the same time as the discharge port 1150 starts opening, the interference member 6930 changes to the projecting state again, but immediately returns to the retracted state. Therefore, thereafter, the sphere arranged on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is not restricted from flowing down by the interference member 6930, and the sphere is sequentially stored in the storage flow path 1231.

With the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a (at a timing earlier than the twentieth operation pattern), the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. Changes to. At this time, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 10, and the storage channel 1231 is full, so that more spheres are prevented from entering. Therefore, according to the present operation pattern, as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 23(a)), the number of balls entering the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (10 in the present control example). Limited to the number of individual) and cannot generate an excess prize.

Therefore, even if a ball is arranged on the upstream side of the opening/closing plate 1300 at the end of the sixth round jackpot game R, the ball does not lead to the player's profit. Therefore, in the round game R of the sixth round in the jackpot game of jackpot type L or N, the third symbol display device 81 has a display (see FIG. 92(a)) that does not strongly encourage the continuation of the ball firing. To be executed.

As shown in FIG. 99(a) and FIG. 99(b), the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a changes from the closed state to the open state, and the interference member, based on the start time of the round game R of the sixth round It is difficult to occur when excessive winning is likely to occur in the round game R of the sixth round (see FIG. 99(a)) while performing control such that the timing when 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state is common. The case (see FIG. 99(b)) can occur.

As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the round game R of the sixth round in the jackpot game this time is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or the twenty-first operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which a ball suitable for the operation pattern is fired while predicting the operation pattern. This can prevent the player from aimlessly digesting the big hit game.

As described above, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the twentieth operation pattern, after the first specific winning opening 1000a is shortly opened (opening for 0.2 seconds), Two spheres do not remain downstream of the interference member 6930. On the other hand, when the first specific winning opening 1000a and the interference member 6930 are drive-controlled in the 21st pattern, the interference member 6930 is opened after the first specific winning opening 1000a is shortly opened (opening for 0.2 seconds). Two spheres may remain downstream of.

Therefore, by confirming how many balls remain downstream of the interference member 6930, whether the sixth round game R is controlled by the twentieth operation pattern or by the twenty-first operation pattern. Since the easiness of distinction is improved, the interference member 6930 becomes a retracted state on the downstream side of the interference member 6930 for a predetermined period (for example, 23.0 seconds after the sixth round game R is started). It may be configured such that it is difficult to visually recognize it before 0 second.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 101, the RAM 203 is a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere. Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, exit flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p , A closing flag 203q, a count start flag 203qa, a closing counter 203r, a V flag 203s, a V winning effective counter 203t, a notification counter 203u, a winning number counter 203w, a discharged number counter 203x, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter The respective values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

Then, in the main controller 110, when the special symbol is selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In this control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, only the reserved areas (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored are shifted.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is stored. Since the storage method of the counter value and the like are the same as those of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area 203b, has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 2), and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas of (Area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. When data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas is packed into the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

Special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 203d, variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the third symbol) based on the entry into the first inlet 64 (starting winning) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the first ball inlet 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 The value is incremented by 1 (see S404 in FIG. 111). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 108).

The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S211 of FIG. 108, S405 of FIG. 111). reference). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be obtained. As a result, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, and the variable display holding ball number managed by the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see FIG. 102(b)) are noise. Even if the number of spheres held in the main control unit 110 is actually deviated from the number of spheres held in the actual variable display due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of spheres to be held. ..

The voice lamp controller 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls, and notifies the display controller 114 (see FIG. 93) of the number of reserved balls every time the number of reserved balls changes. To send the display reserved ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved number of balls command.

Special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the third symbol) based on the entry into the second entry slot 640 (starting prize) This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times.

This special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, the initial value is set to zero, each time a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 The value is incremented by 1 (see S410 in FIG. 111).

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the new special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 108). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a maximum of 4 times the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to.

The initial value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 and the number of spheres for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 ( (See S704 in FIG. 114).

On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 113).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 of FIG. 114).

On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 114). ).

The probability variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the probability variation state of the special symbols. That is, when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is a natural number, the special symbol is in the probability variation state, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, it is in the low probability state of the special symbol. In this control example, the probability variation state of the special symbol accompanies the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the numerical value of the probability variation counter 203g corresponds to the remaining time saving period (the number of times the special symbol varies).

The probability variation counter 203g is set to 80 at the end of the jackpot game by the ball passing through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) in the jackpot game (see S1235 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates in the probability variation state after the big hit game is limited to 80 times.

Further, the probability variation counter 203g is a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol, and is set to 0 when the start of the big hit is set (see S219 of FIG. 108). In the initialized state (that is, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability variation counter 203g is reset to 0, and a normal power-off occurs. In such a case, the state immediately before the power shutdown occurs is backed up.

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (the number of changes of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. When the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) during the jackpot game, 100 is set at the end of the jackpot game (see S1237 in FIG. 121). That is, in this control example, when the probability variation state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state of 100 times is given.

In this control example, the case where the time saving state is given regardless of the type of jackpot has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all or one of the jackpot types (“jackpot K”, “jackpot L”, and “jackpot k”) that can cause the ball to flow to the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) by executing a game in an appropriate game mode. In the section, when the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 during the big hit game, control may be performed so as not to give the time saving state.

In this case, the game was not executed in an appropriate game mode (for example, the firing of the ball was stopped or the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) was not operated without following the notification from the display device) ) Is excessively large (because the special symbol that was originally supposed to be moved does not change to the probability changing state and the time saving state is not given), it is possible to improve the motivation to execute the game in an appropriate game mode. it can.

In the operation scenario storage area 203i, when the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 (see FIG. 53) (see S1004 of FIG. 117) is started, the opening/closing plate and interference member operation scenario table 202f (FIG. 95(b This is an area for reading and storing the operation scenario according to ()). The operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter for determining the timing for movably controlling the interference member 6930 in the storage valve operation process (see S1412 in FIG. 128). Various upper limit values are set in the operation counter 203j in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 125).

The projecting flag 203k is a flag for determining that the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state, and if it is ON, it indicates that the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state (see FIG. 53(b)). , OFF, the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state (see FIG. 53A).

This output flag 203k is determined to be the operation start timing when it is determined in the storage control process (see S1008 of FIG. 125) that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected during the effective period (S1403 of FIG. 19: Yes). If it is (S1408 of FIG. 125: Yes), it is set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 of FIG. 128) is executed by being set to ON, and the storage valve operation process (see S1412 of FIG. 128). ) Is finished, it is set to OFF (see S1445 in FIG. 128).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 of FIG. 123) (see S1282 of FIG. 123), and is used to start counting of the remaining ball timer 203n described later.

The remaining ball timer 203n is a timer counted to specify the normal range in the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 118). Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (a value corresponding to 1 second), the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 (specific area detection sensor If the number of spheres detected by 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the total number of spheres detected by the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) do not match, the difference between these numbers is It is added to the remaining ball counter 203p.

The remaining ball counter 203p is a counter for detecting the difference between the number of incoming balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls discharged from the discharge port 1150 over each round. When it is determined that the notification of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0 in the ending process (S1110 of FIG. 121) (S1231: No of FIG. 121), an error command is set.

The closing flag 203q is a flag for determining the timing at which the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, and is a flag that is set to ON in the winning process (see S1112 of FIG. 123) (of FIG. 123). (See S1278), and is used to start counting of the closing counter 203r described later. The closing flag 203q is set to OFF based on the closing counter 203r having reached a predetermined value or more in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

The count start flag 203qa is set to ON based on the closing flag 203q being set to ON in the fifth round game R, and is used to start counting of the closing counter 203r. Then, the count start flag 203qa is based on that the closing counter 203r has reached the upper limit value (a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) in the V winning process (see S1009 of FIG. 129). It is set to OFF (see S1510 in FIG. 129).

The closing counter 203r starts counting when the closing flag 203q is turned on, and mainly determines in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129) that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 at normal timing. It is a counter for doing. The closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 each time the V winning process is executed.

In this control example, the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set as the interval period after the round game R according to various timings. The closing counter 203r is used for determining an abnormality in the V winning timing in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129).

The V flag 203s has a sphere in a specific region 4830 (FIG. 51) at a predetermined timing (within a set value, a predetermined period after the first specific winning opening 1000a (see FIG. 7) is closed in this control example). This flag is set to ON when it is detected that the vehicle has passed (see). The V flag 203s is set to OFF after the value of the probability variation counter is set to 80 in the ending process (see S1110 of FIG. 121) (see S1236 of FIG. 121).

The V winning effective counter 203t is a counter that is decremented by the same number as the closing counter 203r in the V winning process (see S1009 in FIG. 129). The V winning effective counter 203t is for determining that the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 has normally passed through the specific area 4830 in the state where the sorting operation member 4851 is arranged at the open position. Therefore, in the winning process (S1112 of FIG. 123), a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) is set with the closing flag 203q being turned on.

The notification counter 203u is a counter that counts the time until the notification command (see S1257 in FIG. 122) is set with reference to a predetermined timing (see S1253 in FIG. 122) in the notification process (see S1111 in FIG. 122). ..

The winning number counter 203w is a counter that counts the number of balls won in the first specific winning port 1000a (see FIG. 7) in the winning process (see S1112 of FIG. 123).

The discharge number counter 203x is a counter that counts the number of balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. The relationship between the numerical values of the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x is determined every time the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit value in the abnormality processing (see S1113 in FIG. 124).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Returning to FIG. 93, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the first specific winning opening 1000a ( (Solenoid 1510) and a solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and a solenoid 6910 for driving an interference member 6930 are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands to them via the input/output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, in the input/output port 205, various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 described below provided in the power supply device 115, and a game during operation performance An operation button 300 operated by a person is connected, and the MPU 201 is based on various switches 208, signals output from the operation button 300, and RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253. To execute various processes.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 115) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 102A, the ROM 222 has at least a fluctuation pattern selection table 222a.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113, and the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. ) Is used to determine a more detailed variation content. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

The opening/closing plate/interference member operation scenario 222b is provided for the audio lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation status of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the interference member 6930 whose operations are controlled by the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the opening/closing plate/interference member operation scenario storage area 202e and the opening/closing plate/interference member operation scenario table 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 is stored.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223d, a variation start flag 223e, a stop type selection Flag 223f, production counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, storage counter 223n, operation flag 223p, Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, effect execution flag 223x, and pressed period information storage area 223y. And other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 132) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

The first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c is a variable effect (variable display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b corresponds to the holding ball number of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, the second special symbol ( Corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect based on the lottery of the special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110 and stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, or in the main controller 110 special symbols When the variable display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e The command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball is received from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c (see S2210 of FIG. 132). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is updated. , The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

The value of the first special symbol reservation sphere counter 223b, the second special symbol reservation sphere counter 223c is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to receiving the holding ball number command. Together with the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b after storage, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c, the display holding sphere number command to the display control device 114 Send.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of holding balls corresponding to the number of holding balls counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b, the second special symbol holding sphere counter 223c is synchronized with the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d, the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, its value is changed. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. You can change it while you do. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223d increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command when the command set when the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f of the main controller 110 is increased or decreased. A counter to be used, which is used to synchronize the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the main control unit 110 side with the number of holding balls of the normal symbol managed by the voice lamp control unit 113 side. is there. The value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is used, for example, when displaying the holding sphere number of the normal symbol on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, as for the detailed content when the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the number of reserved spheres of the special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, Since it is the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 136). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 132), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S2707 in FIG. 136). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and the value is incremented by 1 and updated each time the main process (see FIG. 131) is executed. .. The effect counter 223g has a plurality of counters (not shown). When the effect pattern is determined by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop processing, different counter values are used. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, and thus it is possible to suppress the deviation of the effect pattern to be set. In addition, you may comprise so that a production pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processes with respect to the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one digit of the acquired value is referred to in one selection, ten digit of the acquired value is referred to in another selection, and one digit of the acquired value is referred to in another selection. You may make it refer to the ones digit of the obtained value by multiplying the value which tripled|upper one place of the value and the value which multiplied fives of the tens place. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds in the big hit game, and when a round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the command ( In S2504 of FIG. 133), the value of the counter is reset to 0 by the reception of the jackpot ending command (S2510 of FIG. 133). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display command regarding the display during the big hit game is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (see S2537, S2546, and S2547 in FIG. 134).

The probability variation state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol. If the probability variation state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223i is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110.

In the present control example, if the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more, the state command is in a mode indicating that the probability variation game is in progress, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is If it is 1 or more, it is determined that the time saving game is in progress, and the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0 (see S234 or S238 in FIG. 109). Is a mode indicating that a normal game is being performed.

Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probability variation state of the special symbol, or whether to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the time saving state counter 223j is ON, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if it is OFF, it is in the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state). At this time, the time saving state counter 223j is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main controller 110. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the present time is the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 86(a)), and the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the spheres discharged from the discharge port 1150. The setting is made based on the detection result of. When the storage state flag 223k is ON, it indicates that a predetermined number or more of balls are stored in the storage flow channel 1231. When the storage state flag 223k is OFF, less than the storage number of balls is stored in the storage flow channel 1231. Indicates that.

The storage state flag 223k is turned on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is a predetermined number (four in this control example) or more. (See S2807 in FIG. 137), and when it is determined that the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the predetermined number, it is set to off (S2810 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, the intermediate number display is executed on the display during the round game, and when the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF, the shortage display (FIG. 88). (See (a)) is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 has reached the upper limit number (10 in this control example), and is the detection result of the detection sensor 1240. The setting is made based on the detection result of the balls discharged from the discharge port 1150. If the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage flow channel 1231. If it is off, it indicates that the upper limit number of balls is not stored in the storage flow channel 1231. Show.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2113 in FIG. 137) that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is the upper limit (see S2814 in FIG. 137). , Is set to OFF when it is determined that the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is less than the upper limit number (S2817 in FIG. 137). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON, the full tank display (see FIG. 92B) is executed, and when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to OFF, the dissatisfaction display (Fig. 92(a)) is executed.

The storage counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. That is, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the sphere, the value of the storage counter 223n is incremented by 1, and the sphere is discharged from the discharge port 1150 by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (or a dedicated area detection sensor 4870). The value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 when the value is detected by the ball discharge sensor (1).

The operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the operation button 300 has been operated. When the operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the operation button 300 has been operated, and when it is off, it indicates that the operation button 300 is not operated. The operation flag 223p is set to ON when an operation command is received in the command determination process (S2218: Yes in FIG. 132), and set to OFF in the button input monitoring/effect process (see S3007 in FIG. 139). ..

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the effect contents that have been set until the effect is executed, and, for example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the big hit. The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored for a period from the timing of setting (third round) to the timing of executing timing effect (operation effect) during the big hit (fourth round). This effect temporary storage area 223r stores the set effect mode, and when the round (four rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is executed in the big hit medium effect process (see S2505 in FIG. 134). Are read out (S2537 of FIG. 134).

The first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are flags for determining whether to execute a timing effect (operation effect) for executing an effect that causes the player to operate the operation means (operation button 300). If it is ON, it means that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if it is OFF, it means that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied.

In this control example, as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), the fact that the fourth round game R has started with respect to the first operation effect flag 223wa indicates that the second operation effect flag 223wb has been started. On the other hand, it is set that the round game R of the four round surface of the jackpot game of the jackpot type k has started. Then, the effect information read from the effect temporary storage area changes depending on the setting states of the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb.

Further, the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are turned off after the effect execution flag 223x is turned on (see S2539 in FIG. 134).

The first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are flags for limiting the number of times the operation button 300 is operated during the corresponding production (in the present control example, it is limited to one), and each operation is performed. When the first operation is executed during the period or when the operation period is exceeded, it is set to ON, and the subsequent input of the operation button 300 is invalidated. Further, the first input flag 223wc and the second input flag 223wd are set to OFF after the round game R of the fifth round is started and the effect executing flag 223x is set to OFF (see S2543 in FIG. 134). ).

The effect execution flag 223x is a flag for determining whether the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operation means (operation button 300) is an operation based on a timing effect (operation effect).

This effect execution flag 223x indicates that the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started in the big hit medium effect process (see S2505 of FIG. 134) (S2532 of FIG. 134: Yes), and the display effect round command is displayed. After the setting, it is set to ON (S2538 in FIG. 134). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) ends, it is set to off (S2542 in FIG. 134).

The pressed period information storage area 223y is an area for storing the operation timing of the operation means (operation button 300) set so as to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). ..

In the pressed period information storage area 223y, a successful pressed period is set in correspondence with the set display pointer (effect pointer). The successful pressing period set here is referred to in the button input monitoring/effect process (see S2107 in FIG. 139) to determine whether the timing at which the operation button 300 is pressed is the successful pressing period.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display controller 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure. The same applies to the following), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a line on a plurality of pages continuously, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that form the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data blocks. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in the one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is the first program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231 a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231 a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a moves the instruction pointer 231a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a and corresponding to the initialization process executed after the boot process by the boot program is completed is set.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured to Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. Note that the storage source final address may be replaced by the data size of the image data to be transferred.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect when the entry into the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. The transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237.

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. 81 is displayed.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control unit 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judging the result, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", a "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuating effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", a "x" symbol is stopped after the fluctuating effect. Display for a certain period.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. If so, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The MPU 231 gives an instruction to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed at 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, the city, the sea, the sky, etc. are displayed. A right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 88A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as rear images.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined for each sub area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing among the sub areas provided from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area in which the image data should be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes the process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. R. After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is composed of a DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a.

As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started and the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot (big hit K etc. ), the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the first specific winning opening 1000a which is normally closed is opened, and the round effect is This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big hit state).

As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variable effect was stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for one variable effect pattern, that is, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...), and light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, a boy image, a character used for various effects such as characters, and the like is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This back surface type displays one of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) selected by the player, or the back surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image to display when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this control example, the case where only the backside type is defined as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table will be described. However, instead of this, the backside type and the range of the backside image corresponding to the backside type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbol. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Also, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, since the third symbol is invisible to the player, during that time, the symbol offset information of the variable effect stop symbol that was previously performed is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 104) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 105). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time specified by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Is defined as Null data (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 105).

As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address Is included.

It should be noted that, as with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 105, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is selected. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 106) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 105, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 131) executed. Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, Set off.

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time when the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected, and when the simple image display flag 233c is ON, The simple command determination process and the simple display setting process are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing and display setting processing are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process, and when the simple image display flag 233c is ON, it is stored in the resident video RAM 235. Since there is no resident target image data, the resident image transfer setting process for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed, and when the simple image display flag 233c is off, it is necessary for the drawing process. A normal image transfer setting process for transferring various image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 106), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 106) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thus, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237, the pointer is set. The update process is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time the pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later is displayed. (Refer to FIG. 106), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Details of the drawing list will be described below with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 106, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to scaling processing according to the magnification rate, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semitransparency according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, combined processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various kinds of processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number displaying a hold ball number pattern). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character The detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one. As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235. Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set and the image controller 237 is set. The image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a.

On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list.

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237, in parallel with the drawing process, reads previously drawn drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and, together with the drive signal, the image to the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. R.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. R. After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 107 to 129. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 319, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through with the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, respectively. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the big symbol of the special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e indicating the value of the holding ball number command (special figure 2 holding ball number command) is set (S206).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is determined to be 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) Is acquired (S208), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). By the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210). , A special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) changed by calculation is set to a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol fluctuation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first per random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. Jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, or jackpot k.

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 when the big hit K occurs, and the red LED is turned on when the big hit L occurs. When the jackpot is M, N, or k, the yellow LED is turned on, and when the jackpot is off, the green LED is turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), the operation scenario of the first specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the jackpot start is set (S218). .. The operation scenario specifically indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the first specific winning opening 1000a. That is, the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won) for 1 to 4 rounds, and in the 5th and 6th rounds, the jackpot type is set. This shows that the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be opened in a corresponding pattern (see FIG. 95(b)). When the process of S218 ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 0 (S219). Next, the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the result of the lottery is off this time (S216: No), the state command setting process for determining whether or not the time saving state has ended is executed (S222), and the process proceeds to S221. Transition.

In the processing of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a state command setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the state command setting process (S222). This state command setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and various types of the probability variation counter 203g and the time saving medium counter 203h. This is a process for determining the game state based on the value of the counter and setting a state command (S234, S238).

In this state command setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 1 or more (S231: Yes), the probability variation is determined. The value of the counter 203g is decremented by 1, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S232). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233), and when it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S233: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is 0 (S233: Yes), the state command indicating the normal gaming state is set (S234), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S231: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S235), and the time saving medium counter. When it is determined that the value of 203h is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S235: No), the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour/hour counter 203h is 1 or more (S235: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S236). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is 0 (S237), and when it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S237: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hour saving counter 203h is 0 (S237: Yes), the state command indicating the normal game state is set (S238), and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and first It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203g of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S302), and if it is 1 or more (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S301, Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, four random numbers “1 to 4” are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as a jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2. Different random number values may be used. By configuring in this way, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are jackpots may be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203g is not 1 or more (that is, the value is 0) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state). Therefore, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired. (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value for the special symbol jackpot, one of "0" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the jackpot of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes) , A display mode at the time of a big hit showing a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the special symbol jackpot of five types (big hit K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k), the jackpot type is determined.

In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N, and jackpot k). .. Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot K, jackpot L, jackpot M, jackpot N and jackpot k) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

As the fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as deviation patterns for deviation, "off (for long time)", "off (for short time)", "off chance", and "off" Various "normal reach", "outside super reach", and "outside chance reach" are specified. In addition, various common patterns for various jackpots, such as "common normal reach", "shared super reach", "shared chance reach", and "shared special reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is out of reach or out of reach.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 117). Sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 111, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize (start prize) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In the case where there is a start winning, it is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process for the values.

When the starting winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set to the holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S405, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. , The special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The processes of S407 to S412 are different only in that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 640 is executed, and the other processes are the same as the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each processing of S407 to S412 is completed, the prefetching processing is executed (S413), and this processing is completed.

Next, the prefetch processing (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413). The prefetching process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 111).

In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is determined. However, if there is no new winning (S501: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is a probability change state of the special symbol, It is determined (S502) and if the special symbol is in the probable variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the special variation state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. Transition to.

In the process of S505, the values of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the jackpot determination results, are stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), and the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640 are attached. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is (S608: Yes), the second obtained in the processing of S607. Based on the value of the winning random number counter C4 and the high-probability-time second winning random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, Ordinarily, it is determined that the design is off (see 202c2 in FIG. 94(c)).

In the process of S608, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607. And, based on the second winning random number table for low probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,10 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see 202c1 in FIG. 94(c)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 determines whether or not it is a hit of the normal symbol (S611), and if it is determined to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes) , The display mode of winning is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

Then, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S613: Yes), the electric role associated with the second ball entrance 640. The opening period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of releases is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the processing of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of position (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the processing proceeds to S617.

In the processing of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S617: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of 1 is set to 1 second (S618), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short as "30 seconds → 1 second", further, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623).

In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows.

By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 117) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624).

If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening/closing of the electric accessory is opened when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 117) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 are completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 107), and it is judged whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times variable display is held in the ordinary symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved sphere number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704).

Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The first area is stored (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed by the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 93), and the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 116, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set to the stack pointer. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (the peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off has not been normally completed, the process proceeds to S910 in this case as well.

If the power failure information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S910.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1017 of FIG. 117. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial values, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S912) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner even when the information about the occurrence of power failure is not set or when the abnormality of the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). When the process of S912 is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S913, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S913). This state command is a command for notifying whether the special symbol is in a probable change state, whether it is a time saving state of a normal symbol, or the time saving number of a normal symbol.

A status command is generated according to the value of the hour/hour counter 203h or the value of the probability variation counter 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, in spite of the low probability state of the normal symbol, the right-hand navigation (for example, see the small area Ds3 of FIG. 88(a)) is displayed, or conversely, the high probability state of the normal symbol. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (not shown) from being displayed when the player makes a right-handed hit. That is, the game state and the effect to be executed can be matched.

When the process of S913 ends, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions (S914). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S915), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 107), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001).

Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 107) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command.

Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 111) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the number-of-holding-balls command set. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Also, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (S1004) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 1000a of the one variable winning device 6000 is executed (S1004).

In the big hit control process, the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 1000a is set according to the operation scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) for each round of the big hit state. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric auditors is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present control example, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, every time the main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In the first symbol display update process, in the first symbol display device 37, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110) ends. The variation display being executed is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37. Display (lighting display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on.

Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 113), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

After executing the processing of S1007, the storage control processing is executed (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126, but a process for setting retraction and extension of the interference member 6930 is executed. Next, when the process of S1008 ends, the V winning process is executed (S1009). The V winning process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. Next, when the process of S1009 ends, other processes are executed (S1010).

When the process of S1010 ends, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1012). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1012: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1012: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S1011, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 115 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1015 is executed.

First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1016). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1017), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1011 is at the timing of the end of the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1010, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001.

That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process when the power is shut off, the stack pointer is not saved in the initialization process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, various effects corresponding to the jackpot are executed, or the first identification is performed. This is processing for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

In the jackpot control process (FIG. 118, S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 108) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1103). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big symbol of the special symbol (including during the special symbol big hit game) and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1103: No), the present process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1103, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the big hit (S1103: Yes), the process of S1104 is executed. In the process of S1104, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). In the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process is executed (S1105).

Here, the jackpot operation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (S1105). FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process (S1105). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 119, S1105), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set operation scenario (S1201).

The operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851, the solenoid 4852) is set based on the data read in S1201 (S1202). The opening operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 of the first variable winning device 6000 is set by the data read in the process of S1201 (S1203). After that, this process ends, and the process returns to the jackpot control process. In the processing of S1202 and S1203, the operation of the distribution device 4850 (the distribution operation member 4851, the solenoid 4852) and the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 are set for each round.

In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 6000 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the process of S1105 ends, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). After the round number command is set, this processing ends.

The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp controller 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1107: Yes), the opening/closing process is executed (S1108).

Here, the opening/closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (S1108). FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the contents of this opening/closing process (S1108). In the opening/closing processing (FIG. 120, S1108), first, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 or the distribution device 4850 that matches the operation timing based on the operation scenario is executed (S1211), and then the jackpot control processing (S1004) is returned to. , This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the processing of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1109). As for the start timing of the ending effect, the opening and closing plate 1300 is closed after 6 rounds are completed, and the waiting time which is the ball throwing time (3.0 seconds or more from the design of the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800 is set. It is required, and in the present control example, when 3 seconds) have elapsed, the ending timing is determined as the start timing. When it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1110). Then, this process is completed.

Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (FIG. 121, S1110). In the ending processing (FIG. 121, S1110), first, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1231). If it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is not 0, a problem such as a ball clogging may occur, or the player may illegally stop the ball stored in the storage channel 1231 with a strong magnet or the like. Therefore, the error command is set (S1232), and then the ending command is set (S1233).

The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the error command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the error notification based on the information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, an error command according to the selected display mode of the error notification is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, error notification is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, the characters "Ejection error. Please call the hall clerk" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is informed that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93) such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1) strongly emits red light, or the voice output device 226. (See FIG. 4), a loud sound (in the present control example, the sound of a black telephone bell) is output, and the hall clerk is controlled so as to notice the occurrence of the abnormality.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0, the ending command is set (S1233). The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S1233 ends, it is then determined whether the V flag 203s is set to ON (that is, whether the sphere has passed through the specific region 4830) (S1234), and it is set to ON (that is, the specific region 4830). (S1234: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203g is set to 80, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is set to 80, and then the V flag 203s is set to off. (S1236), the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1234, when it is determined that the V flag 203s is not set to ON (that is, the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830) (S1234: No), the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is set. It sets to 100 (S1237), returns to the jackpot control process (S1004), and ends this process.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether the V flag 203s is on, and if it is on, a numerical value is set in the probability variation counter 203g. Therefore, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to determine whether the ball is passing through the specific area 4830 and set the probability variation. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over.

Furthermore, if the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game, the probability variation game state is given after the jackpot game, so whether or not the ball passes through the specific area 4830 during the jackpot game. The game can be played with interest.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), the notification process is executed (S1111). Here, the details of the notification process (S1111) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the contents of this notification processing (S1111).

In the notification process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot game currently being executed is the jackpot k (S1251), and when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot k (S1251: No). The present process is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot k (S1251: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203u is greater than 0 (S1252). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1252: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253). The determination of the end timing of the fourth round is made in the fourth round when it is detected that 10 balls have been won, or when it has been determined that 30 seconds have passed. When it is determined that it is the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the notification counter 203u. Then, this process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1253, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the fourth round (S1253: No), this process ends. Here, by setting the counter of 0.5 second in S1254, the notification counter 203u becomes 0 during 2 seconds of the interval time which is the ball throwing time after the completion of the four rounds, and the voice of "press" is given. Is output.

Therefore, the distribution device 4850 operates in the fifth round, but the player has to operate the operation button 300 during the interval time after the end of the fourth round, and attention is paid to the operation button 300 and the liquid crystal. It is possible to make it difficult for the number of spheres remaining in the storage channel 1231 to be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from passing through the specific area 4830 from being discriminated from the number of remaining spheres. Therefore, for example, at the start of the fifth round, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific region 4830 by performing the above-described control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the storage channel 1231. The player can play the game until the end of the big hit game (and also after the end of the big hit game) with the expectation that the probability variation game state is given (given).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the notification counter 203u is provided to perform the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal over the fifth round from 1.5 seconds before the end of the interval time. It may be executed continuously from the eyes.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1252, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is larger than 0 (S1252: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203u is updated by -1 (S1255). It is determined whether the value of the updated notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203u is 0 (S1256: Yes), the notification command is set (S1257). Then, this process is completed. By this notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the output of the voice "press".

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 122, S1111) is executed, the winning process is executed (S1112). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of this winning process (S1112).

In the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1271). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state to when it is in a closed state and the interval period ends. If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1271: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1271: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed. If it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 of the first specific winning opening 1000a has passed (S1272: Yes), the winning number counter 203w is incremented by 1 and updated (S1273). Then, the process of S1274 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor 1240 has not been passed (S1272: No), the process of S1274 is executed.

In the process of S1274, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is 10 or more (S1274: Yes), it is determined whether the closing flag 203q is on (S1277), and when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on. (S1277: Yes), this process ends, and the jackpot control process (S1004) is returned to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1277, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is off (S1277: No), the closing flag 203q is set to on (S1278), and then the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t ( In this control example, a value range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2×number of stored balls) seconds or more is set (S1279), and then the opening/closing plate of the first specific winning opening 1000a. 1300 is set to be closed (state change of closed state) (S1280), and thereafter, a numerical value (a numerical value corresponding to 4.0 seconds in the present control example) is set to the V winning effective counter 203t (S1281), The remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1282). When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it can be determined that the ball is being removed from the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closing time. Then, this process is terminated and the process returns to the jackpot control process (S1004).

As described above, the lower limit of the set value of the V winning effectiveness counter 203t changes based on the number of stored balls. As a result, when only three spheres are stored in the storage flow channel 1231 (control is performed so that the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830), the sphere may flow down due to dirt inside the storage flow channel 1231. Even if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a delay, it is possible to invalidate the passage of the specific area 4830 out of the range of the set value of the V winning counter 203t.

As a result, when a display effect that differs depending on the number of storages in the storage channel 1231 is executed by the third symbol display device 81, the degree of expectation indicated by the display effect (amount of payout of prize balls and the end of the jackpot game) It is possible to prevent a discrepancy between the actual game result and the degree of possibility of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol later).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1274, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203w is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1275). When it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1275: Yes), the processes of S1277 to S1282 are executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1275: No), it is determined whether the opening/closing plate 1300 is halfway closed based on the operation scenario (S1276). Here, if it is determined that it is the timing to close midway (S1276: Yes), the processing of S1277 to S1282 is executed, and if it is determined that it is not the timing to close midway (S1276: No), this processing is executed. It ends and returns to the big hit control process (S1004).

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. When the winning process (FIG. 123, S1112) is executed, the abnormal process is executed (S1113). Then, this process is completed. Here, the abnormality processing (S1113) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing the contents of this abnormality processing (S1113). In the abnormality processing (S1113), processing for monitoring whether the specific area 4830 is illegally passed is executed.

In the abnormality processing (FIG. 124, S1113), first, it is determined whether it is the round valid period (S1301). If it is outside the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the outlet 1150 (S1302). It should be noted that whether or not the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 is determined by whether or not the specific region detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51) detects the passage of the game ball. Done.

When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203x is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303). Then, the process of S1304 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S1302: No), the process of S1304 is executed.

In the process of S1304, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1304: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1304: Yes), the remaining ball timer 203n is incremented by 1 and updated because it is during the ball expelling time (S1305). The remaining ball timer 203n determines whether the upper limit value (various interval times in this control example) has elapsed (S1306). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1306: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1306: Yes), the number of discharged particles (the number of balls detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 (see FIG. 51) and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 (see FIG. 51)). It is determined whether or not the total value of the number of spheres detected in step 4) and the winning number (the value of the winning number counter 203w) match (S1307).

If it is determined that they match (S1307: Yes), the process of S1309 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1307: No), the value obtained by subtracting the value of the discharge number counter 203x from the value of the winning number counter 203w is added to the remaining ball counter 203p (S1308), and the process of S1309 is executed. To do.

In the processing of S1309, it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1309). When it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1309: No), the process of S1312 is executed.

On the other hand, when it is the ending effect start timing (S1309: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310). When the value of the remaining ball counter 203p is 0 (S1310: Yes), the process of S1312 is executed. On the other hand, if the value of the remaining ball counter is not 0 (S1310: No), an error command is set because there is an abnormality in discharging the ball (S1311), and the process of S1312 is executed.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, even if the game ball is left illegally in the storage channel 1231 or the probability variation determination unit 4800, and the jackpot type of the jackpot to be acquired later is the jackpot M or N, the game ball is passed through the specific area 4830. Can be suppressed.

In this way, by controlling so as to notify the ball discharge error at the start timing of the ending effect, even if there is a difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls discharged in the round game R of each round, the error is notified. The game can be executed without it. As a result, it is possible to partially restrict the discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 in the interval between rounds and to start the next round with the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. ..

In addition, even if there is a difference between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls in the round game R of each round, the game can be executed without issuing an error notification, so the interval between rounds is set to 2 seconds (reserve). It can be set to a period shorter than the period required to discharge the spheres stored in the flow path 1231 to the entire sphere.

It should be noted that the method of setting the error command for discharging the ball is not limited to this. For example, from the jackpot type, set a value that can occur normally as the difference between the number of incoming balls and the number of discharged balls, and if the difference in the number is within the range of that value, do not set the error command However, if the value is out of the range, it may be controlled to set an error command. In this case, it is possible to determine that a ball ejection error has occurred without waiting for the ending effect start timing, and thus it is possible to detect the occurrence of abnormality early. Thereby, when the error of discharging the ball is caused by the illegal act, the illegal act can be detected early.

In the process of S1312, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1312), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1313). After that, the winning number counter 203w and the discharging number counter 203x are respectively reset to initial values (S1314), and thereafter, this processing is ended.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing this storage control processing (S1008). The storage control process (S1008) is a process for executing the main process (see FIG. 117) and setting the state of the interference member 6930.

As described above, depending on the situation, the interference member 6930 changes its state in response to the player operating the operation button 300 (S1403 to S1407) and changes its state at a preset timing (S1403 to S1407). S1408 to S1411), but both are included in the storage control process (S1008).

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is on (S1401), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not on (that is, off) (S1401: No), the interference member 6930 It means that it is in the retracted state. Next, it is determined whether or not the operation period of the operation button 300 is valid (S1402).

When it is determined that the period is the valid period (S1402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the operation button 300 (S1403). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

In the processing of S1403, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the operation button 300 is not detected (that is, the depression detection signal is not detected) (S1403: No), the interference member 6930 is kept in the retracted state as it is. In order to keep it, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the depression (operation) of the operation button 300 is detected (that is, the depression detection signal is detected) (S1403: Yes), the upper limit value setting process 1 of the operation counter is executed (S1404). Here, the upper limit value setting processing 1 (S1404) of the operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the content of the upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) of the operation counter. In the upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404) of the motion counter, a process of setting an upper limit value that differs depending on the operation timing of the operation button 300 as the upper limit value of the motion counter is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 1 (S1404), from the inter-round interval period, the depression (operation) of the operation button 300 after the inter-round interval period is started is detected (that is, the depression detection signal is (Detected) is subtracted, a value indicating the remaining period is set as the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, a button operation command is set (S1405). Then, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state, the projecting flag 203k is set to ON (S1406), and the interference member 6930 is projecting (the projecting state based on the operation of the operation button 300, the projecting state). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the output state 1) has been reached, a storage state command corresponding to the extended state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1407), the present process is terminated, and storage control is performed. The process returns to the process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the period is not the valid period (S1402: No), it is determined whether it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 based on the operation scenario (S1408). When it is determined that it is not the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the operation start timing of the interference member 6930 (S1408: Yes), the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 is executed (S1409). Here, the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) of the operation counter will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) for this operation counter. In the upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409) of the motion counter, a process of setting the upper limit value preset by the motion scenario as the upper limit value of the motion counter is executed.

That is, in the operation counter upper limit value setting process 2 (S1409), it is first determined whether or not it is the timing of changing the interference member 6930 to the overhang state based on the operation scenario (S1431). When it is determined that it is not the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the projecting state (S1431: No), this process ends and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the change timing of the interference member 6930 to the projecting state (S1431: Yes), an appropriate value from the operation scenario (the interference member 6930 is maintained in the projecting state based on the operation scenario). The value corresponding to the period) is set to the upper limit value of the operation counter 203j (S1432), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the storage control process (S1008).

Next, in order to indicate that the interference member 6930 is in the projecting state, the projecting flag 203k is set to ON (S1410), and the interference member 6930 is projecting (the projecting state based on the operation scenario, the projecting state). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that it has become 2), a storage state command corresponding to the extended state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1411), and this processing is ended.

The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the bulging state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs to the display control device 114 a display rear image changing command for setting the rear face type corresponding to the bulging state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command.

That is, for example, it is set to a mode in which the character "during passage ball storage" is displayed in the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 87(a)). This allows the player to easily recognize that the interference member 6930 is in the stored state.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is turned on in the process of S1401 (S1401: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930 is executed (S1412). Here, this storage valve operation processing (S1412) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of this storage valve operation processing (S1412). The storage valve operation process (S1412) is a process for setting the operation of the interference member 6930.

In the storage valve operation processing (S1412), first, the solenoid 6910 is set to ON (S1441), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1442). Although not shown, if the solenoid 6910 is already on, the process of S1441 is skipped and the process of S1442 is performed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443).

In the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is the upper limit value (S1443: Yes), the solenoid 6910 is set to OFF (S1444). Then, the output flag 203k is set to OFF (S1445), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1446), and this processing is ended. Also, in the process of S1443, when it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203j is not the upper limit value (S1443: No), this process is ended.

When the process of S1412 ends, it is determined whether the output flag 203k is off (S1413), and when it is determined that the output flag 203k is not off (that is, on) (S1413: No), this process ends. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1413, when it is determined that the output flag 203k is off (S1413: Yes), it means that the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, and thus the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state. In order to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of this, a storage state command corresponding to the retracted state of the interference member 6930 is set (S1414), and this processing ends.

The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 117) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command corresponding to the retracted state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the retracted state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command.

By executing this storage control process, the state of the interference member 6930 can be set according to the operation status of the operation button 300. Accordingly, it is possible to switch between a state in which the flow of the ball is regulated by the interference member 6930 and a state in which the regulation is released and the flow of the ball is allowed at any timing of the player.

Further, by this storage control process, it is possible to drive the interference member 6930 at a timing other than the operation timing of the operation button 300. Therefore, the member that operates according to the operation status of the operation button 300 and the member that operates regardless of the operation of the operation button 300 can be configured by the same member.

Next, the V winning process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing this V winning process (S1009). This V winning process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 117), and is a process for controlling the flow of the ball after the first specific winning port 1000a is closed. ..

In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). When it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203q is on (S1502). When it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the currently executed fifth round is the fifth round (S1503). If it is determined that it is the fifth round (S1503: Yes), then the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S1504), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1502, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), and in the processing of S1503, it is determined that the fifth round is currently being executed. If so (S1503: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), it means that it is near the timing at which the distribution operation member 4851 that opens and closes the specific region 4830 operates. In order to determine whether the passing of the ball into the specific area 4830 is normally occurring, the closing counter 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S1505), and then the V winning effectiveness counter 203t is similarly decremented by 1. Update.

Then, it is determined whether the updated value of the closing counter 203r is a predetermined value (that is, whether the period in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state has elapsed) (S1507), and if it is the predetermined value (S1507). : Yes), the closing flag 203q is turned off and set (S1508), and then the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is not the predetermined value (S1507: No), the process directly proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (4.0 seconds). If the value of the closing counter 203r is the upper limit value (S1509: Yes), it means that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t becomes 0, so the count start flag 203qa is set to OFF (S1510). The closing counter is reset to 0 (S1511), and the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, when the value of the closing counter 203r is not the upper limit value (S1509: No), the process directly proceeds to S1512.

As described above, after the closing counter 203r reaches the upper limit value (that is, after 4.0 seconds have elapsed after the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state), the count start flag 203qa is turned off. The process of S1512 is not executed. That is, the processing of S1512 is executed only until 4.0 seconds elapse after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed.

In the process of S1512, it is determined whether the sphere has passed the specific area 4830 (that is, whether the sphere has been detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860). When it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S1512: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the V winning effectiveness counter 203t is within the set value range (S1513).

In the process of S1513, if it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is within the range of the set value (S1513: Yes), it means that the ball has passed the specific area 4830 normally. , V flag 203s is set to ON (S1514), and this processing ends.

The V winning effective counter 203t is set to a value corresponding to 4.0 seconds immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 is changed to the closed state, and is subtracted from the value. As described above, the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is set as the timing at which the sphere stored in the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific region 4830, and is 3.0 seconds in this control example. Below, it is set to a numerical range corresponding to (3-0.2×number of stored spheres) seconds or more.

Therefore, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is larger than 3.0 seconds), the value is out of the set range. In this case, it is suspected that the ball stagnated near the lower end of the communication passage 4810 (stopped due to clogging or improperly holding the ball), and the ball started to flow immediately after the opening/closing plate 1300 was closed. , Is controlled so as to notify an error.

In addition, for example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after a long time has passed after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (the value of the V winning effective counter 203 is less than (3-0.2×the number of stored balls) seconds), It is out of the set value range. In this case, a problem (such as ball catching or improper retention due to improperly holding the ball) occurs when the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, and the timing of discharging the balls from the storage channel 1231 (the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed). Since it is suspected that the balls have started to be ejected after a delay from the timing (when the state is reached), it is controlled to notify the error just in case.

It should be noted that, as the illegality to hold the ball, it is possible to improperly hold the ball with a strong magnet or illegally operate the ball by hitting the ball with a thread attached to the game area and operating the thread by the player. .. In the pachinko machine 10, a magnetic sensor (not shown) is arranged in the vicinity of the storage channel 1231 or the storage channel 1231 and the probability variation determination unit 4800 are prevented from reaching the magnetic force with respect to fraud caused by a magnet. This is dealt with by arranging the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) behind the glass unit 16 with a space therebetween or by thickening the glass unit 16.

Further, with respect to the illegality caused by the ball to which the thread is adhered, when the thread is made to crawl into the communication path 4810 via the storage channel 1231 and the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the ball entry prevention unit 1331. When the yarn is fixed by being sandwiched between the side wall of the housing portion 1230 and the portion that holds the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 7 ), and the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened, the regulating member 1600 and the discharge member The yarn is fixed by being sandwiched with the outlet 1150. Therefore, even if the player operates the yarn, the load can be prevented from being transmitted to the ball in the communication path 4810. For example, the yarn held by the player is released at an arbitrary timing. Even if the ball is illegally aimed to pass through the specific area 4830, as described above, since the thread is fixed in places, it is easy to prevent the ball from illegally passing through the specific area 4830. You can

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is not within the set value range (S1513: No), it is suspected that there is some injustice or a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10, so an error command is set. Then (S1515), this processing ends. In this case, the V flag 203s is not turned on.

In this control example, the case where the fraud and the defect are determined by setting the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t based on the number of stored channels 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, it is possible to determine the occurrence of fraud or failure by detecting the interval at which the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Alternatively, by detecting the period during which a predetermined number of balls are discharged, the occurrence of fraud or failure can be determined. The determination may be made, or if the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231 is less than the required number (less than 4), the occurrence of fraud or failure is detected based on the detection of passage of the sphere in the specific area 4830 May be determined.

In the V winning process (S1009) in this control example, the case where the V flag 203s is set to ON only when it is determined that the value of the V winning valid counter 203t is within the set value has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, even when it is determined that the value of the V winning effective counter 203t is not within the set value, the V flag 203s is set to ON and the game is disabled until the error due to the error command is resolved. You may control. The elimination of this error command is executed by turning off the power supply, but not limited to this, the RAM 203 may be cleared.

In this case, if the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 due to a malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 is not correct by the player's injustice, after it is discovered, the player has no problem in a high probability state of the special symbol. A game can be executed.

On the other hand, if it is caused by the illegality of the player, after it is discovered, first, the game of the illegal player is stopped, the hall clerk clears the RAM 203, and the special symbol has a low probability state. To force the control. As a result, it is possible to prevent another customer from having an extra waiting time before starting a game on the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraudulent operation is performed.

In the present control example, while the error command is set in S1515, for example, the ball is controlled so that it cannot be fired, or when the ball is fired, an error notification is given to notify the clerk. Control such that the prize ball is not paid out even if the ball is launched into the winning opening (for example, the function of the payout control device 111 is stopped), or the ball is launched or won. It is controlled so as to be inoperable by a control mode such as controlling the power to be turned off based on the ball entering the mouth.

<Regarding Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S2120 (see FIG. 131) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. ) Is determined during the execution of () (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 131, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 131), the power-off process in S2117 is executed. The power-off processing in progress flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing in-process flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S2002: No), the current power-up processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off in S2120 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S2120 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage areas of the entire range of the RAM 223 are checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see S2116 in FIG. 131). That is, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2117 is executed. Therefore, the process of S2008 with the power-off flag being turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S2004 to S2006 is followed to the process of S2008. This is a case where processing has been started or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2009, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability variation state flag 223i is updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2011), interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability variation state flag 223i based on the state command, the gaming state recognized by the main control device 110 and the gaming state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S2009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004 when the process of S2008 is passed through the processes of S2004 to S2008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S2101 this time has been executed (S2101), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the process of S2101, it is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S2102 to S2110 that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S2111, the variable display setting processing of S2112, and the storage state monitoring processing of S2113 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S2112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay. Further, by performing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to set the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2101 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104).

The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not when the power is turned on, the process proceeds to the process of S2105 without the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the retained quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on a reservation lamp (not shown) according to the value of the first special symbol reservation ball counter 223b is performed.

After that, button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). This button input monitoring/production process monitors the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the production corresponding to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform. In this process, when the player's operation of the operation button 300 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the operation button 300 is set in the display control device 114.

When the button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the lamp edit process is executed (S2108), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S2110 is completed, the command determination process of performing the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.

Then, the process proceeds to S2112. In the process of S2112, the variable display setting process is executed (S2112). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136.

Then, the process proceeds to S2113. In the process of S2113, the storage state monitoring process is executed (S2113). In the storage state monitoring process, the display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 137.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off process is executed (S2117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination process (S2111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 131) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

In the command determination processing (FIG. 132, S2113), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area 223a and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main controller 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each of the symbols.

In the processing of S2201, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the fluctuation pattern type is received from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol) that is a variation pattern type of the special symbol. In the case of notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol, which is stored in the format and which will be described later in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136). (When setting a variation pattern command for displaying special symbols) is used.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S2201: No), it is determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2204). When it is determined that the stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) is received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the type of the received command is set to ON. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to ON.

Next, the stop type (any one of complete loss, out-of-reach, small hit, big hit K, L, M, N, and k) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and this processing ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Then, it is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command is not received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S2207). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this processing ends.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the holding ball number command is received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the received holding ball number command Value (that is, the number of reserved balls of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and corresponding to the extracted counter value, which is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this processing ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c.

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start prize), the start prize. Every time there is, by the process of S2210, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol 1 hold of the main controller 110 It can be adjusted to the values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, respectively.

Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223b or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e, if the holding sphere number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

In addition, in the processing of S2209, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command is not received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S2212). In the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command is received (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving process is executed (S2213).

In the prize information command receiving process (S2213), various flags and various counters to be referred to for setting various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 are set. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, before the fluctuation of the pending special symbol is started (that is, the special symbol that is executed before the fluctuation of the target special symbol) (Variable display), it is possible to execute the effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol that sent the prize information command, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of the plurality of special symbols. It is possible to give a suggestion and to enhance the effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command is not received (S2212: No), it is determined whether the notification command is received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2214: Yes), the display notification command is set (S2215), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2214, when it is determined that the notification command is not received (S2214: No), the storage device related command (the storage state command corresponding to the retracted state (S1414, see FIG. 125)) or the bulging state is handled. It is determined whether or not a storage state command (S1407, see FIG. 125) has been received (S2216), and in S2216, when it is determined that a storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the corresponding display rear image change. A command is set (S2217), and this processing ends.

In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the storage device related command has not been received (S2216: No), it is next determined whether the operation command has been received (S2218). In the process of S2218, when it is determined that the operation command has been received (the operation button 300 has been operated (pressed down) (S2218: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and the process ends. To do. This operation command is a command output when the operation button 300 is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the hit related command has been received (S2220).

In the process of S2220, when it is determined that the hit related command has been received (S2220: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S2221), and the present process ends. The details of this hit-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. On the other hand, in the process of S2220, when it is determined that the hit related command is not received (S2220: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S2222), and the present process is ended.

In the process of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Command is set so as to be transmitted to the display control device 114, for example, a ball entry command set based on the fact that a ball has entered each of the entrances provided in the game board 13. When is received, a process of accumulating the number of entered balls is executed for each type of the entrance into which the ball entered.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a hit related process (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the hit related processing (S2221). The hit related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2111 of FIG. 132) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the main control This is a process executed when a hit related command is received from the device 110.

When the hit related process (S2221) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit opening command is received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the opening command is not received (S2501: No), it is determined whether the round number command is received (S2503). In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the round number command is received (S2503: Yes), the round number cumulative counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the big hit medium effect process is executed ( In step S2505, this process ends.

The big hit medium effect process (S2505) is a process for selecting a mode of the round effect (effect of the round game R and effect of the interval between rounds), and details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not the round number command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from main controller 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. In the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command is received (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the corresponding display interval command is set ( (S2507), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether the jackpot ending command has been received (S2508). In the process of S2508, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2508: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2509), the value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is cleared (S2510), and this process is ended. Also, in the processing of S2508, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2508: No), this processing is ended.

Here, the big hit medium effect process (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the big hit mid-sized effect process (S2505). In this big hit medium effect process (S2505), as an effect executed during the big hit, in addition to the big hit game effect for celebrating the big hit, the player operates the operation button 300 to visually check the inside of the storage channel 1231. A possible first operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) and a second operation effect (operation effect (timing effect)) in which the state of the interference member 6930 is changed by causing the player to operate the operation button 300, and regulation. After the number of balls has been entered, the continuous launch effect that encourages the ball to continue to be launched, the effect mode and the presence/absence of the effect are set, and each effect is executed.

When the big hit midtime production process (S2505) is executed, first, it is determined whether the production execution flag 223x is on (S2531). If it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is ON (S2531: YES), the process proceeds to S2540. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is not on (off) (S2531: No), then the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the third round of the jackpot. Is determined (S2532).

When it is determined in the process of S2532 that the command is the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: Yes), the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON (S2533), and the process proceeds to S2534.

In the process of S2534, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is the jackpot k (S2534), and when it is determined that the jackpot k is the jackpot (S2534: Yes), the second operation effect flag 223wb is turned on (S2535), and the process proceeds to S2536. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not the big hit k (S2534: No), the process directly proceeds to S2536.

That is, if the jackpot k, both the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to ON, but if it is a jackpot other than the jackpot k (jackpot K, L, M, N). , Only the first operation effect flag 223wa is set to ON.

Here, the display effect round command setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (S2536). FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display effect round command setting process (S2536). In the display effect round command setting process (S2536), first, it is determined whether or not the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551), and if the second operation effect flag 223wb is on (S2551: Yes), The first display mode is set as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2552), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit medium effect process (S2505).

In the first display mode, as the display effect round command, in the round game R of the third round, it is displayed that there is an operation effect in the next round and that there is an operation effect also in the interval period after the end of the next round (Fig. 88 (a)), and the operation effect is displayed in the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R (see FIGS. 90 and 91).

The display during the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display during the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second operation effect flag 223wb is not on (that is, it is off) (S2551: No), it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot currently being executed is jackpot L or M (S2553). ), when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot L or M (S2553: Yes), the second display mode is set as the information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r (S2554), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the big hit medium effect process (S2505).

In the second display mode, as the display effect round command, there is an operation effect in the next round in the third round game R (see FIG. 88(a)), and regarding the number of stored balls in the fourth round game. It is set so as to display information (see FIG. 88(b)), and is set to display a moving image (or a still image) without an operation effect during the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R. To be done.

Here, the information about the number of stored balls is prepared so that it can be displayed, and is based on the operation button 300 being operated at the success timing of the operation effect (for example, the timing at which the display pointer 719 overlaps the bar display portion 717). The display is controlled to be executed.

The display during the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display during the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S2553, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot L or M (that is, jackpot K, N, k) (S2553: No), it is determined as information that can be read from the effect temporary storage area 223r. , The third display mode is set (S2555), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the big hit medium effect process (S2505).

In the third display mode, as the display effect round command, in the round game R of the third round, there is an operation effect in the next round, and a character for urging the ball to be shot toward the first specific winning opening 1000a is displayed. (See FIG. 88), and the moving image (or still image) without operation effect is set to be displayed in the interval period after the end of the fourth round game R.

The display during the interval period after the end of the third round game R and the display during the fourth round game R are common regardless of the display mode.

As described above, the display of the third round game R and the fourth round game R is collectively set as a display effect round command.

It returns to FIG. 134 and demonstrates. After the process of S2536, the effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and a display effect round command for display effect of the third round game R and the fourth round game R is set (S2537). The effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S2538), the first operation effect flag 223wa and the second operation effect flag 223wb are set to OFF (S2539), and the present process is ended.

Although not shown in detail, regarding the process of S2539, if the first operation effect flag 223wa or the second operation effect flag 223wb is already set to OFF, the process is skipped. doing. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2532 that it is not the round number command indicating the third round (S2532: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the fourth round of the jackpot ( S2540).

In the processing of S2540, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the fourth round (S2540: Yes), the display command indicating that the fourth round has been reached is set. Since the display mode of the fourth round has already been selected as described above, this process is ended to avoid selecting another display mode redundantly, and the process returns to the hit related process (S2221).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2540, when it is determined that the round number command received this time is not the fourth round of jackpot (S2540: No), the round number command received this time is the fifth round of jackpot. It is determined (S2541).

When it is determined in the processing of S2541 that the command is the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: Yes), the effect execution flag 223x is set to OFF (S2542), and the first input flag 223wc and the second The input flag 223wd is set to OFF (S2543), and the process proceeds to S2547. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2541 that the command is not the round number command indicating the fifth round (S2541: No), the process proceeds to S2544.

In the process of S2544, it is determined whether or not the round number command received this time is the sixth round of the big hit (S2544). In the processing of S2544, when it is determined that the command is the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot K, M, or k (S2545).

When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot K, M, or k (S2545: Yes), the continuous firing round command for display is set (S2546), the present process is terminated, and the hit related process (S2221) is returned to. ..

The continuous firing round command for display is set to be a display including a display (see the small area Ds3 in FIG. 92B) urging the ball to continue firing without being stopped, as a display effect round command. .. This display is executed only in the jackpot type (jackpot K, M or k, see FIG. 94(b)) in which the excess winning is expected in the sixth round game R. Therefore, the player can increase the possibility of over-winning by continuing to shoot the ball according to the display.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2544, when it is determined that the command is not the round number command indicating the sixth round (S2544: No), or in the processing of S2545, the jackpot type is not jackpot K, M, or k (that is, jackpot L, If it is determined to be N (S2545: No), the display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2547), and this processing is ended.

Therefore, in the present control example, when the round number command for the first, second, fifth rounds and the sixth round when the jackpot types are big hits L and N, the display round number command is set by the processing of S2547. It On the other hand, when the other round number command is received, the display effect round command or the display continuous firing round command is set. In this way, by changing the display of the round game R according to the jackpot type and the number of rounds, the jackpot game can be advanced without making the player tired.

The various display round number commands and the like (the display round number command, the display effect round command, and the display continuous emission round command) set here are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and are stored in the MPU 221. Is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by. When the display control device 114 receives various display round number commands and the like (display round number command, display effect round command, display continuous firing round command), the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the present round number is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h may be omitted by including the information indicating the current round number in the round number command.

Further, when the round number command of the third round is acquired, the display mode of the fourth round is also selected, but other configurations are also possible, for example, the round number command of the third round is acquired. The same control as that performed when the number of rounds command is performed may be repeated when the round number command of the fourth round is acquired. Further, for example, when the third round number command is acquired, only the display mode is set, and when the fourth round number command is acquired, the display mode is selected. May be.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, at the time of the round (3 rounds) before the round (4 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed, In the round (1), the notice effect for notifying that the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is executed (see FIG. 88(a)). Then, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 88(b)).

In this way, since the notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, it is possible to inform the player in advance that the effect of operating the operation button 300 is executed. it can. Further, since the notice effect is executed only in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed despite the notice effect being executed. Can be prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the storage channel 1231. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls have been stored, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. This allows the player to more positively play a game in which the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2112). The variable display setting process (S2112) is a process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 136) is, in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110, the first special symbol. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (completely out, reach out, big hit), a process for setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S2112 in FIG. 136), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2706. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each processing of S2702-S2705 for performing is performed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), the display fluctuation pattern command is set (S2704), and then the corresponding 1 is subtracted from the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter (the first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b or the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c), and the winning information included in the command storage area based on the subtracted value The data in the storage area is shifted (S2705), and the process proceeds to S2706.

In the process of S2706, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2706). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2706: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S2706, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2707), and then the command determination process (FIG. 132). In the processing of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2708), and the acquired stop type is set (S2709). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S2710), and this processing ends.

Next, the storage state monitoring process (S2113) will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the storage state monitoring process (S2113). This storage state monitoring process (S2113) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51). This is a process for determining that the

Here, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 51, a storage flow path 1231 is provided as a part of a storage device capable of storing spheres on the game board 13, and a maximum of 10 spheres can be stored. Is configured.

A detection sensor 1240 is arranged at the upstream end of the storage channel 1231 and the detection sensor 1240 detects the ball entering the storage channel 1231. The sphere discharged from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 is detected by the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

In the storage state monitoring process (S2113), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (that is, whether the detection sensor 1240 has detected passing of the ball) (S2801), and the first specific winning opening. If the ball has passed 1000a (S2801: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the storage counter 223n (S2802), and the process proceeds to S2803. On the other hand, when the ball has not passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a (S2801: No), the process proceeds to S2803.

In the process of S2803, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the discharge port 1150 (that is, whether the sphere has been detected by the specific region detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific region detection sensor 4870) (S2803), and the discharge port 1150 is determined by the sphere. If it is determined that the data has passed (S2803: Yes), the value of the storage counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S2804), and the process proceeds to S2805. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed through the discharge port 1150 (S2803: No), the process proceeds to S2805.

In the process of S2805, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 4 or more (S2805: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is turned on. It is determined whether or not (S2806). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2806: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to on (S2807), and the display intermediate number command is set (S2808). ), and proceeds to the processing of S2812. On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S2806: Yes), the process proceeds to S2812.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 4 or more (that is, 3 or less) (S2805: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON ( S2809). When it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2809: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF (S2810), the display shortage command is set (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2812. .. On the other hand, in the process of S2809, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S2809: No), the process proceeds to S2812.

In the process of S2812, it is determined whether the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812), and when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is 10 (S2812: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is turned on. It is determined (S2813). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2813: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on (S2814) and the display full tank command is set (S2815). ), and ends this processing. On the other hand, in the process of S2813, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is turned on (S2813: Yes), this process is directly terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2812, when it is determined that the value of the storage counter 223n is not 10 (that is, 9 or less) (S2812: No), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816). ). When it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2816: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2817), the display dissatisfaction command is set (S2818), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S2816, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S2816: No), this processing is directly terminated.

In this way, the settings of the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m are updated as needed based on the detection results of the detection sensor 1240, the specific area detection sensor 4860, and the non-specific area detection sensor 4870.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2113) in the present embodiment, the storage state of the sphere in the storage flow channel 1231 is determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m) are set. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the storage state of the storage channel 1231.

In the above description, the number of balls entered based on the detection result of the detection sensor 1240 and the number of discharged balls based on the detection results of the specific region detection sensor 4860 and the non-specific region detection sensor 4870 are stored in the storage channel 1231. However, the number is not limited to this.

For example, a sensor for detecting the presence or absence of a sphere is arranged at an arbitrary position of the storage channel 1231, and when the sphere is detected by the sensor for a predetermined period of time, the sphere is stored downstream thereof. You may decide that there is. As an example, when the sensor is arranged at the position where the third sphere stays from the downstream side, the sensor causes the three spheres including the two spheres arranged on the downstream side to be stored in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to determine that it is stored in.

Further, even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, if the sensor continues to detect the sphere, it can be suspected that the sphere is illegally parked. Can be discovered early. That is, the sensor for detecting spheres can be used both for detecting the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and for detecting fraud.

Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and sets the lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. This is processing for.

Here, in the present control example, as the lamp display device 227 (see FIG. 93), in addition to the above-described configuration, a decorative lamp 227a (described above) used for an effect provided over the entire pachinko machine 10 is provided. (Including the illumination parts 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) and the covering front plate 1200 (see FIG. 5) provided so as to cover the storage channel 1231, the inside of the covering front plate 1200 is A transmissive lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) for making the transmissive state visible to the player and another lamp 227z are provided.

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, the predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) that is timed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. In the process of S2901, if it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2905.

When the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set, all the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled (lighted) to be lit.

Here, in this control example, the cover front plate 1200 is provided so that the player cannot easily see the internal condition of the storage channel 1231 and the operation condition of the interference member 6930 in the normal game condition. There is. As described above, the front cover plate 1200 is configured to change from the shield state to the transmission state by irradiating the back surface with predetermined light (light of the transmission lamp).

Then, during the predetermined period after the power is turned on to the gaming machine (the predetermined period after the start-up process is executed), the transparent lamp is turned on regardless of the gaming state. Accordingly, immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by the store clerk, the inside of the storage channel 1231 covered by the front cover plate 1200 can be easily visually recognized. it can.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the current time is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 is performed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( (S2901: No), then, it is determined whether the detection sensor 1240 detects passage of a sphere (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 detects the passage of the sphere (S2902: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command (strong) is set so that the player can visually recognize the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 ( S2903) and S2906.

Note that the transmission lamp lighting command in this case is a transmission lamp 227b for a sufficient time (for example, 2.0 seconds) for the sphere to pass through the area covered by the covering front plate 1200 in the storage channel 1231. Is set to be turned on, and while the permeable state is maintained during the period in which the sphere flows down the storage channel 1231, the permeable state is released after the sphere is stopped, It is not limited to this. For example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (shielded from the transmission state) on the condition that the sphere has passed through the discharge port 1150 or the specific area detection sensor 4860 or the non-specific area detection sensor 4870 has detected the passage of the sphere. (Change to a state). Accordingly, the front cover plate 1200 can be maintained in a transparent state during the period in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231.

In the process of S2902, when the detection sensor 1240 does not detect the passage of the sphere (S2902: No), it is then determined whether or not the transmission lamp-related command is set (S2904), and the transmission lamp-related command is set. If so (S2904: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command designated in advance is set (S2905), and the process proceeds to S2906. On the other hand, when the transmission lamp-related command is not set (S2904: No), the process directly proceeds to S2906.

The setting of the transmission lamp-related command is mainly performed by the sphere number confirmation process (S3004) described later with reference to FIG. 140.

Returning to FIG. 138, the description will be continued. In the process of S2906, a decoration lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state) (S2906), and the present process is ended. The decoration lamp lighting command is variously set according to the variation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the contents of the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107). In this button input monitoring/production process (2107), the input of whether or not the operation button 300 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to perform a corresponding effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, an operation button effect command that notifies the display control device 114 that the operation button 300 has been operated is set, and various flags based on the operation content are set. Settings are made.

Specifically, firstly, during the round game R of the fourth round, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed is the pressing success period, and Set the transparent lamp lighting command to execute the lamp lighting based on the determination result, and set the display command to display the corresponding ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect). (See FIG. 140). Secondly, in the interval period after the end of the fourth round of the round game R, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is a large depression success period or a successful depression period. It is determined whether it is a push-down failure period or not, and a display command for displaying an effect (great success effect, success effect, failure effect) based on the result is set.

When the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether the effect executing flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). When it is determined in the process of S3001 that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), it is then determined whether the currently-executed jackpot type is the jackpot k (S3002). .. In the process of S3002, when it is determined that the jackpot is k (S3002: Yes), it is determined whether it is the interval period (S3003). If it is the interval period (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that it is not the big hit k (that is, big hit K, L, M, N) (S3002: No), or in the process of S3003, it is not in the interval (that is, round game). If it is determined that R is in progress (S3003: No), the number-of-spheres confirmation process is executed (S3004), and this process ends.

Here, the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the sphere number confirmation processing (S3004). The number-of-balls confirmation process (S3004) is a process executed in the button input monitoring/effect process (see S2107 of FIG. 139) of the main process (see FIG. 131) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

This ball number confirmation processing (S3004) corresponds to the case where the input of the operation button 300 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether the operation button 300 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation on the operation button 300 is detected, as described above, various flags are set based on the operation contents, a transmission lamp lighting command for executing lamp lighting is set, For example, a display command is set to display a ball number grasping effect (success effect, failure effect, impossible effect).

When the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004) is executed, it is first determined whether the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101), and when it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is on (S3101: Yes). Since the transmission lamp lighting command and the display sphere number grasping related command have already been set, this process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107).

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the first input flag 223wc is not on (that is, it is off) (S3101: No), then it is determined whether the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected. Yes (S3102). When the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is detected (S3102: Yes), it is determined whether it is within the sphere number grasping period (S3103).

Here, the sphere number grasping period means a period in which the display pointer 719 at least partially coincides with the bar display portion 717 in the timing effect (operation effect) described above (see FIG. 88(b)). The length of the sphere number grasping period can be adjusted by the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the lateral width of the bar display unit 717.

In the present control example, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], the operating speed thereof is 20 [cm/s], and the width of the bar display portion 717 is 1 [cm]. In this case, the sphere count grasping period is 0.2 [s] because it is the same as the time when the display pointer 719 moves 4 [cm].

In the process of S3103, when it is determined that it is within the number of spheres (S3103: Yes), a display sphere number grasping success command is set (S3104), and a transmission lamp lighting command (strong/long) is set (S3105). ), and proceeds to the processing of S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping success command is set, a display prompting the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (for example, a character display "Attention to attacker!!") is the third symbol display. This is executed in the device 81, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the button display mode 715 schematically showing the operation button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 88(b)).

The transmission lamp lighting command (strong/long) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on at least from the fourth round game R to the fifth round game R.

On the other hand, in the process of S3103, when it is determined that it is not within the sphere number period (that is, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed at the timing when the display pointer 719 and the bar display unit 717 are displaced (see FIG. 89)). (S3103: No), the display ball number grasping failure command is set (S3106), the transmission lamp lighting command (medium/long) is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3111.

Here, when the display ball number grasping failure command is set, the display prompting the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and “bad” is displayed as the result display mode 720 and the operation is performed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 is changed to the pressed state mode (see FIG. 89).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (medium/long) is set so that only the transmission lamp 227ba is turned on at least from the fourth round game R to the fifth round game R.

On the other hand, in the process of S3102, when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is not detected (S3102: No), the process proceeds to S3108. In the process of S3108, it is determined whether the time limit (3 seconds from the start of the fourth round game R in the present control example) has elapsed (S3108). When it is determined that the time limit has elapsed (S3108: Yes), a display ball number unrecognizable command is set (S3109), a transmission lamp lighting command (weak/short) is set (S3110), and the process proceeds to S3111. Transition. On the other hand, in the processing of S3108, when it is determined that the time limit has not elapsed (less than 3 seconds from the start of the fourth round game R), this processing ends, and button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). ) Return to.

Here, when the display ball number unrecognizable command is set, the display prompting the player to grasp the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is not displayed, and the result display mode 720 (see FIG. 89) is not displayed. The button display mode 715 schematically showing the button 300 does not change (see FIG. 88(a)).

Further, the transmission lamp lighting command (weak/short) is set so that the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned off in the subsequent round game R.

In this way, in this control example, the player who operates the operation button 300 can obtain the player from the display on the third symbol display device 81 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b rather than operating the operation button 300. Controlled to increase profits. Further, when operating the operation button 300, it is better to perform the operation in the sphere number grasping period (0.2 seconds in this control example) than to perform the operation at other timings. It is controlled so that the player can obtain a large profit from the display in FIG. 6 and the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b.

Therefore, the player's motivation to operate the operation button 300 during the fourth round R of the game R can be improved, and the player can concentrate on the operation. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is trying to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S3111, the first input flag 223wc is set to ON (S3111). The first input flag 223wc is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the time limit), and while the first input flag 223wc is set to ON, the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004) is skipped. Therefore, only the first operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is valid in the number-of-spheres confirmation process (S3004).

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully operate the operation button 300 while avoiding an operation mode in which the operation button 300 is repeatedly hit blindly. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (display of a caution) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation button 300 is operated. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of times of durability early, and it is possible to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

When the process of S3111 ends, this process ends, and the process returns to the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107).

It returns to FIG. 139 and demonstrates. In the process of S3005, it is determined whether the second input flag 223wd is on (S3005). If it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is turned on (S3005: Yes), the display operation button-related effect command has already been set, so this process is terminated and the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107). Return to.

On the other hand, in the process of S3005, when it is determined that the second input flag 223wd is not on (that is, it is off) (S3005: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S3006). The fact that the operation flag 223p is set to ON (see S1405 in FIG. 125 and S2218 and S2219 in FIG. 132) means that the interference member 6930 is changed to the projecting state (see FIGS. 90 and 91). In FIG. 125, the operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is executed (see S1403 in FIG. 125). In other words, it means that the state change of the interference member 6930 to the extended state is executed.

When it is determined that the operation flag 223p is on (S3006: Yes), the operation flag 223p is set to off (S3007), from the value of the storage counter 223n at the end of the fourth round game R, the round After subtracting a value obtained by dividing the elapsed time of the inter-interval by 0.2, it is further determined whether the number of remaining balls is 4, which is indicated by a value obtained by subtracting 2 (S3008). The value calculated in S3008 corresponds to the number of spheres left on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 in the storage channel 1231.

Here, the value calculated in S3008 is 4 when the display pointer 719d is located at a position where at least a part of the display band 719d and the second band portion 716b vertically match in the timing effect (operation effect). The control is performed so that the operation is performed (see FIG. 90(b)). Here, during a period in which the display pointer 719d and the second band 716b at least partially coincide with each other in the vertical direction, depending on the relationship between the size and operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the width of the second band 716b. , The length can be adjusted.

In the present control example, as described above, the display pointer 719 is a circle having a diameter of 3 [cm], and the width of the second band portion 716b is newly set to 4.2 [cm]. Since the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 0.2 seconds, the time required for the display pointer 719 to pass through the second band portion 716b is 0.1 second. The operating speed of the display pointer 719 becomes 72 [cm/s]. After being set in this way, the display pointer 719 is controlled so that its left end reaches the right end of the second band portion 716b at a timing of 0.7 seconds from the start of the interval period (0.8 seconds). At the timing, the right end passes through the left end of the second band portion 716b). In this control example, by performing control in this manner, the period in which the display pointer 719 and the second band portion 716b at least partially coincide with each other in the vertical direction can be limited to 0.1 seconds.

In the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 4 (S3008: Yes), the display operation button great success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, when the display operation button great success effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the highest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 90(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3008, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 4 (S3008: No), it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010). Here, the number of remaining balls becomes 5 or more in S3010 because the operation pointer 300 is operated when all of the display pointers 719d are vertically aligned with the first band 716a in the timing effect (operation effect). Is controlled so as to be executed (see FIG. 91(a)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too early) before 0.7 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period.

In the process of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is 5 or more (S3010: Yes), the display operation button success effect command is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, when the display operation button success effect command is set, the player can obtain a medium profit (that is, neither the highest nor the lowest profit) as a result of the timing effect (operation effect). The display shown is executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 91(a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3010, when it is determined that the number of remaining balls is not 5 or more (that is, the number of remaining balls is 3 or less) (S3010: No), or the operation flag 223p is not set to ON. When the time limit (1.5 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (S3012: Yes), the display operation button failure effect command is set (S3013), and the process proceeds to S3014.

Here, in S3010, the number of remaining balls becomes 3 or less because the operation button 300 is operated when all the display pointers 719d are vertically aligned with the third band 716c in the timing effect (operation effect). Is controlled so as to be executed (see FIG. 91(b)). That is, this corresponds to the case where the operation button 300 is operated (when the operation is too late) after 0.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the interval period, or the operation button 300 is not operated.

Here, when the display operation button failure effect command is set, a display indicating that the player can obtain the lowest profit as a result of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 91(b)).

As described above, in this control example, the profit obtained by the player is larger when the operation button 300 is operated than when the operation button 300 is not operated, and accordingly, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is also changed. To be controlled. Further, when operating the operation button 300, the operation can be performed at the timing when the number of remaining balls becomes 4 (from 0.7 seconds after the start of the interval period until 0.8 seconds has elapsed). It is controlled so that the highest profit is obtained, the medium profit is obtained before the timing, and the lowest profit is obtained after the timing.

Therefore, the player can increase the motivation to operate the operation button 300 in the interval period immediately after the fourth round R of the round game R, and can select the operation mode of the operation button 300.

In other words, if the player wants to obtain at least a medium profit, he or she can press the operation button 300 immediately after the start of the interval period to safely obtain a medium profit (stable). In profit). On the other hand, if you want to get the highest profit, if you delay the operation even a little, you will not get a medium profit and you will get the lowest profit, so consider the disadvantage and perform the operation. (Profit is unstable and fluctuations are large).

In this way, by changing the operation mode of the operation button 300, the player selects whether the player can stably obtain a medium profit or the player who is unstable but can obtain the highest profit. be able to.

Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation button 300. Then, the operation of the operation button 300 is executed according to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the line of sight of the player who is trying to operate the operation button 300 can be gathered on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S3014, the second input flag 223wd is set to ON (S3014). The second input flag 223wd is set to ON by the operation of the operation button 300 (or the elapse of the time limit). While the second input flag 223wd is set to ON, the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107) is performed. Since it is skipped (S3005), only the first operation (depression) of the operation button 300 is valid in the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107).

Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to carefully operate the operation button 300 while avoiding an operation mode in which the operation button 300 is repeatedly hit blindly. In addition, by executing a display for prompting this (display of a caution) on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the player from repeatedly hitting the operation button 300, so that the operation button 300 is operated. It is possible to prevent the number of times from exceeding the number of times of durability early, and it is possible to improve the durability of the operation button 300.

According to the present control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The visibility inside the storage channel 1231 is changed according to the lighting mode of the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and the ease of grasping the operation mode of the interference device 6900.

In order to maintain high visibility inside the storage channel 1231, it is necessary to remove the line of sight from the storage channel 1231 and pay attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) to participate in the timing effect (operation effect). I was configured to go up. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot game ends while the player's line of sight is concentrated on the first variable winning device 6000.

Further, when the player operates the operation button 300 in the timing effect (operation effect) and the storage channel 1231 is in the transparent state, the first variable winning device 6000 in which the storage channel 1231 is arranged is noted. It is configured to display a message prompting you to do so. Thereby, the line of sight of the player who pays attention to the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) can be urged to be moved to the storage channel 1231 when necessary.

A circle is displayed on the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) so that the range of the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped. This makes it easier for the player to predict the internal state of the storage channel 1231 by visually recognizing the liquid crystal display device, and to easily determine how many more balls should be shot before the specified number of winnings. be able to. Therefore, the firing mode of the sphere can be easily selected.

As a timing effect (operation effect) performed on the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81), different qualities for the player (in this control example, those relating to the visibility of the storage channel 1231 and payout of prize balls) If the timing effect (operation effect) that gives the profit of (the one directly connected to) is continuously executed, the operation timing that gives the highest profit to the player is understood as the same timing (similar timing) to the player. Configured to be done. Thereby, even when the transition from the previous timing effect (operation effect) to the subsequent timing effect (operation effect) occurs immediately, it is possible for the player to execute the operation without feeling uncomfortable.

Depending on the type of jackpot, in a predetermined round game R (round game R of the sixth round), when the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (20th operation pattern, operation scenario 5) and when not discharged (21st operation pattern) The operation pattern and the operation scenario 6) are generated. As a result, it is possible to define whether or not an excess prize has occurred in a predetermined round game R, depending on the type of jackpot.

By changing the predetermined inter-round interval period (for example, the interval period between the fourth round and the fifth round) according to the jackpot type, the inside of the storage channel 1231 in the round game R immediately after the inter-round interval period. The state (the number of stored spheres) was changed. Thereby, even if the state change state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the interference member 6930, and the specific region 4830 in the round game R is the same, the progress mode of the round game can be changed.

The predetermined round game R (in the present control example, the fourth round game R), the number of balls (9 in the present control example) different from the specified number (10 in the present control example) By terminating the game in a state where the specific winning port 1000a is inserted, the profit obtained by the player in the next round game R (the fifth round game R in this control example) is maximized. did. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from aimlessly digesting the jackpot game.

In a configuration in which the sphere flows down toward the specific area 4830 as the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed, a predetermined number of balls are provided in the first specific winning opening 1000a while the interference member 6930 maintains the extended state. It was constructed so that the ball could not enter. Thereby, the operation mode of the interference member 6930 can define the timing when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R, and the ball reaches the upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing and the timing of ending the round game R can be dissociated. That is, based on the operation mode of the interference member 6930, it is possible to define the timing when the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed with the end of the round game R.

In the open state of the first specific winning opening 1000a, the balls are configured to easily stay in an aligned state on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the stayed spheres are in the closed state of the first specific winning opening 1000a. It is configured to flow down toward the first specific winning opening 1000a at a changing timing. As a result, it is possible to collectively collect a plurality of accumulated balls in the first specific winning opening 1000a, and it is possible to increase the possibility that an excessive winning will occur.

In addition, the number of over-winning prizes can be defined. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of excessive winning prizes from becoming excessive and hindering game play.

Further, the presence or absence of occurrence of excess winning is configured to be stipulated by the operation mode of the interference member 6930 arranged downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the operation mode of the interference member 6930 is predetermined based on the jackpot type. It As a result, even if the balls are similarly retained on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, it is possible to switch between the case where the excessive winning occurs and the case where the excessive winning does not occur, based on the jackpot type.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the profit obtained by the player in the round game R (for example, the visibility of the inside of the storage channel 1231, the number of discharge balls discharged from the storage channel 1231, or based on that) It is configured such that whether or not a ball has entered the specific area 4830 and the maximum number of balls entered in the round game R are changed. As a result, the player's attention to the timing effect (operation effect) can be improved.

Based on the operation timing of the operation button 300, the player is configured so that the two kinds of profits to be obtained are seesaw, and the player can grasp the mode of the profits to be obtained by the display device (the third symbol). The display device 81) is configured to display. With this, the player who visually recognizes the display on the display device can obtain the profit at the operation timing by selecting the operation timing and operating the operation button 300 based on the profit to be preferentially obtained. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the timing effect (operation effect) can be increased.

Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 143. First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 141, with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of “0 to 49” in association with “big hit P”. The “big hit P” is a big hit with six rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit P” is 50, so when the special symbol 1 is selected by lottery, the “big hit P” is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit P", and after the big hit, the special symbols and the normal symbols shift to a high probability state. In the present control example, the special symbol is controlled so that at least one big hit is determined before the transition to the low-probability state after the transition to the high-probability state. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99", "big hit Q" is associated and defined. The "big hit Q" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Q" is 50, so if the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1, the "big hit Q" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100).

This "big hit Q" is set to 6 rounds as the number of rounds, and after the big hit ends, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, in the range (entire range) of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 99", "major jackpot m" is associated and defined. The "big hit m" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "major jackpot m" is 100. Therefore, when the jackpot is the jackpot in the special symbol 2, the "bonanza m" is determined. The ratio is 100%.

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit m", and after the big hit, the special symbols and the normal symbols shift to a high probability state. In the present control example, the special symbol is controlled so that at least one big hit is determined before the transition to the low-probability state after the transition to the high-probability state. Therefore, the jackpot type is advantageous in terms of the number of balls (expected ball) that can be obtained by the player from the start of one big jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state.

That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds of the jackpot game, but the privilege (normal probability high probability state of the special symbol or high probability state of the special symbol) given after the jackpot is the special symbol 2 Is more advantageous (it is easier to shift to the high probability state).

In this way, in the present control example, in the case where the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery, when the special symbol 2 is selected in the lottery, the high-probability state, which is advantageous to the player, shifts. It is designed to be easy. Therefore, once the continuous game mode (high probability state of special symbol, and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by entering the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. And a jackpot game are likely to be repeated. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the extended game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, in the round game R of the sixth round, it will be described with reference to FIG. 142 that the operation pattern is controlled to be different depending on the jackpot type. In this control example, the first variable winning device 9000 (see FIG. 66) described in the ninth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 142(a) is a diagram showing a time change of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the 22nd operation pattern, and FIG. 142(b) is a drawing showing the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing in the 23rd operation pattern. FIG. 142C is a diagram showing a time change of the member 8340, and FIG. 142C is a diagram showing a time change of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the 24th operation pattern.

In this control example, in the round game R of the sixth round of jackpot P, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven in the 22nd operation pattern, and in the round game R of the sixth round of jackpot Q, the 23rd one. The opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven by the operation pattern, and in the round game R of the sixth round of jackpot m, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven by the 24th operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 142(a), in the 22nd operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the storage state), and the round game R is started. After the waiting time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) has elapsed, the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state.

Note that the interference member 6930 returns to the retracted state when the round game R ends (skips if the round game R ends before the waiting time TK). Here, in the round game R, passage of a prescribed number of balls (10 in this control example) is detected at the first specific winning port 1000a, or the maximum time of the round game R (in this control example, After 30 seconds), the process ends.

In the sixth round game R of the jackpot P in which the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are drive-controlled in the 22nd operation pattern, the specified number (10 in this control example) before the waiting time TK elapses. When the ball of No. enters the first specific winning opening 1000a, the round game R is finished without waiting for the waiting time TK.

On the other hand, if the specified number of balls does not enter the first specific winning opening 1000a before the waiting time TK elapses, the interference member 6930 is in an overhanging state, and 10 balls can be stored in the storage channel 1231. Since it disappears, it becomes impossible to insert a specified number of balls into the first specific winning opening 1000a, and the time required for the round game R becomes the maximum value (30 seconds) of the first operating time T1.

The waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) does not stop the ball firing even during the inter-round interval from the end of the round game R of the fifth round, and even after the start of the round game R of the sixth round. By continuing the firing, a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls are set as a period in which the first specific winning port 1000a can be sufficiently reached. In this control example, the ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

On the other hand, for example, if the firing of the ball is stopped during the inter-round interval from the end of the round game R of the fifth round, and the firing of the ball is started at the start of the sixth round, the shot ball is From the balance with the time required to reach the first specific winning opening 1000a (about 4.0 seconds), the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls are provided to the first specific winning opening before the waiting time TK elapses. 1000a cannot be passed.

Therefore, in the case where the ball firing is stopped at the inter-round interval immediately before the sixth round game R, the sixth round game R is compared with the case where the ball firing is continued at the inter-round interval. Can be configured to take longer. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the ball firing is stopped in the interval between rounds.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), in the 23rd operation pattern, while the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulating member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), before the waiting time TK elapses. The drive control is performed so that only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, one side is opened/closed). That is, the control for canceling the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

It should be noted that, after the waiting time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) has elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes from the retracted state to the extended state in the same manner as the 22nd operation pattern. ..

According to this operation pattern, not all balls on the opening/closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow down toward the auxiliary winning opening 9111. It is possible to make it difficult for a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls to pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before the waiting time TK (8 seconds in this control example) has elapsed rather than the operation pattern. ..

Therefore, with a high probability, the sixth round game R can be played for a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 22nd operation pattern, since the prize balls can be paid out when the auxiliary balls 9111 enter, the number of prize balls paid out is larger than that in the 23rd operation pattern. can do.

As shown in FIG. 142(c), in the twenty-fourth operation pattern, while the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state (that is, the regulation member 1600 is maintained in the stored state), before and after the waiting time TK elapses. The drive control is performed so that only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 74, one side is opened/closed). That is, the control for canceling the drive (excitation) for 0.025 seconds is executed a plurality of times.

In addition, after waiting time TK (8 seconds in the present control example) has elapsed from the start of the round game R, the interference member 6930 changes its state from the retracted state to the extended state in the 22nd operation pattern and the 23rd operation pattern. It is similar to the operation pattern.

In this operation pattern, not all the balls on the opening/closing plate 8300 enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, but some balls flow down toward the auxiliary entering opening 9111 (see FIG. 66). Similar to the 23rd operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the probability that the round game R will end when a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Therefore, with a high probability, the sixth round game R can be played for a long time (30 seconds). On the other hand, unlike the 23rd operation pattern, it is possible to enter the ball into the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 (see FIG. 66) even after the waiting time TK elapses. Therefore, in a longer period than the 23rd operation pattern. The payout of prize balls due to the ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be generated. Therefore, as compared with the 23rd operation pattern, more prize balls can be paid out.

In this operation pattern, control is performed so that one-side opening/closing occurs even after the interference member 6930 is in the extended state. That is, even after the storage flow channel 1231 is filled with spheres (filled up) and the spheres stay on the upstream side of the detection sensor 1240 (see FIG. 66), one side opening and closing occurs, so that the spheres are arranged. It is possible to make it easier to guide the ball to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 when opening and closing on one side, as compared with the case where is unspecified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), the display in the sixth round game R will be described. 143(a) and 143(b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents for informing the third round of the round game R by the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 143(a), an example of the display of the round game R of the sixth round when the jackpot type is "big jackpot P" or "big jackpot Q", or the sixth round of the round game when "big jackpot m" A schematic diagram showing an example of a display before the waiting time TK in R is shown, and in FIG. 143(b), the waiting time TK in the round game R of the sixth round in the case where the jackpot type is “big hit m” A schematic diagram showing an example of the display after the passage is shown.

That is, when the jackpot type is "jackpot P" or "jackpot Q", the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143(a) is maintained over the round game R, and the jackpot type is "jackpot". In the case of "m", after the display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143(a) is maintained, the display is switched to the display shown in FIG. 143(b) after the waiting time TK has elapsed, and then, The display command is set so that the display shown in FIG. 143(b) is maintained until the end of the round game R.

As shown in FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the round number display section 714 for displaying the current round number is in the sixth round game R. A sub-round display unit 714b that is displayed in the upper left of the screen in a mode and below the number-of-rounds display unit 714 that displays a period during which additional prize balls can be expected in the round game R is displayed.

In FIG. 143(a), the round number display unit 714 is illuminated (brightly displayed), while the sub-round display unit 714b is unlit (darkly displayed), and in FIG. 143(b), conversely, the round number display is displayed. The sub-round display section 714b is illuminated (displayed brightly) while the section 714 is extinguished (displayed darkly).

That is, in this control example, the round game R is executed by the display in the mode shown in FIG. 143(a) during the period when the payout of the prize balls accompanying the entrance to the first specific winning port 1000a is the main. In addition to notifying the player of this, after the waiting time TK elapses, it is impossible to expect the payout of the prize balls accompanying the entrance to the first specific winning opening 1000a, but it is possible to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111. It is possible to let the player recognize that the period during which the payout of the prize balls can be expected continues.

Here, by changing the display on the sub-round display portion 714b, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the substantial change in the profit that the player can obtain by entering the ball. That is, the payout of one award ball due to one ball entering the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 is three as described above, and is 1/5 of the case where the ball enters the first specific award winning slot 1000a. Is. This change in the number of prize balls with respect to the number of entered balls can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, the sphere flows to the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 only when the sphere is arranged between the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 during the short time when the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened. The ball does not always flow to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 every time the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened.

Accordingly, the frequency of balls entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 during the period in which the sub-round display section 714b is emitting light (brightly displayed) is determined by the number of rounds in which the round number display section 714 is emitting light (brightly displayed). The frequency is low as compared with the frequency with which balls enter the first specific winning opening 1000a.

As described above, according to this control example, the profit obtained by the player (change of prize ball paid out by entering one ball or ball, while notifying that the period of the round game R has not ended) It is possible to notify at the same time that there is a change in the frequency of entering the ball.

In an example of the display in the round game R of the sixth round shown in FIG. 143(b), the character “+ chance” is displayed as the above-described excess winning probability increase notification mode 721. In this control example, the character "+ Chance" may cause the ball to enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 by firing a ball, and the ball may enter the auxiliary entrance 9111. It corresponds to being able to receive the payment of.

Thus, in the present control example, in the round game R, it is controlled to pay out an additional prize ball due to the ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111. Therefore, in the round game R, the specified number of balls (10 in this control example) are paid out to the player when a predetermined number of balls (10 in this control example) enter the first specific winning opening 1000a (150 in this control example). The number of award balls (exceeding award balls) exceeding the number can be paid out.

In particular, in the 24th operation pattern, there is a high possibility that the player will enter the auxiliary entrance 9111 even after the waiting time TK elapses, and compared with other 22nd operation patterns and 23rd operation patterns, the game The number of prize balls paid out to a player may increase. On the other hand, in the operation pattern in this control example, the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

That is, in the 22nd to 24th operation patterns in the present control example, it is possible to provide a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, while the driving mode of the interference member 6930 is the same.

Since the maximum number of times the ball is inserted into the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 corresponds to the number of times the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed in the round game R, the number of times the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed is set to exceed the above-mentioned excess. The number of prize balls can be adjusted.

According to the present control example described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

In the inter-round interval period, the case where the ball firing is stopped is configured so that the period required for the next round game R tends to be longer than the case where the ball firing is continued in the inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the firing of the ball is stopped in the interval period between rounds.

The number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in the round game R can be positively changed by the driving mode of the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (that is, depending on whether or not the above-mentioned “one side opening/closing” occurs). .. In other words, whether the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 passes the first specific winning opening 1000a or the auxiliary ball opening 9111 downstream thereof is determined by the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member. It can be switched depending on the driving mode of 8340.

Thus, the timing when the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 and the timing when the ball is hard to be guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be configured separately. Therefore, for example, during the round game R, the timing at which the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be concentrated in a part of the period. In this case, comparison is made when spheres that have reached a movable object that circulates are sorted in the order of arrival and a predetermined number of spheres that are reached are guided to a winning opening (a winning opening corresponding to the auxiliary winning opening 9111). As a result, the attention power in the vicinity of the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 can be improved.

That is, the number of shot balls can be reduced with respect to the number of payouts by shooting the ball at a timing when the ball is easily guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 and stopping the shooting of the ball at other timings.

On the other hand, the timing for firing a ball aiming at winning in the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is configured to be different based on the jackpot type. Accordingly, it is possible to request the player to change the firing mode of the ball for each jackpot game, and thus it is possible to easily prevent the player from casually playing the jackpot game. In addition, by making it difficult to grasp the jackpot type, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a strategy, and to give an excessive profit to a specific player (experienced player) (for example, the number of payout balls rather than the number of shot balls). Can be prevented from occurring).

The auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is arranged at a position where the ball is not guided (difficult to be guided) when the opening/closing plate 8300 is not driven (non-excited). As a result, the player's concentration on the game can be improved as compared with the case where the ball is guided to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are not driven.

In the round game R, the player can easily understand the change in the expected value of the number of payout prize balls with respect to the number of balls reaching the first variable winning device 9000 from the display of the display device (third symbol display device 81). As configured. Thereby, during the same round game R, it is possible for the player to easily select, from the display on the display device, whether to continue firing the ball or stop firing the ball.

Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 148. First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 includes a first random number table 202a, a second random number table 202c, a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate and an interference member operation scenario storage area 202e, and an opening/closing plate. In addition to the interference member operation scenario table 202f, at least a small hit type selection table 202g is provided.

This small hit type selection table 202g is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on the entry of the game ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is what is done.

The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 145. 145(a) to 145(c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

As shown in FIG. 145(a), the first hit random number table 202a indicates whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C3 obtained by the game ball entering the first entrance 64 is a big hit. Special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not, the value of the first random number counter C3 acquired by the game ball entering the second winning opening 640, it is determined whether or not a big hit It is a table in which the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 145(b), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is a random number value determined to be a hit in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entrance into the first entrance 64. It is a table in which (determination value) is set. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is "1 to 3", and if it is "1 to 3", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “4 to 319”, it is determined that the value is out of range.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145(c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random number value (judgment value) that is determined as a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the entry into the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first per random number counter C3 is “0”, and if “0”, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, if it is determined to be "319", it is determined to be out of position.

As described above, the first random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first random number counter C3, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the entry into the first entrance 64, the random number that is the jackpot for the first special symbol is one, and the total number of random numbers is Among 320, since the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 1, the probability of being a big hit for the first special symbol is "1/320". Also, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 3, the probability of being a small hit for the first special symbol is “3/320”.

On the other hand, at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the random number value that is the big hit of the second special symbol is one, and the total number of random number values is 320, and it is Since the total number of random numbers is 1, the probability of being a jackpot for the second special symbol is "1/320". Also, since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 318, the probability of being a small hit for the second special symbol is “318/320”.

As in the above-described respective embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that the normal symbol is hit, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, “○” is displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). The symbols are lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened for 5 seconds or 0.5 seconds when the time is shortened, but is only opened for 0.2 seconds when the time is not shortened. Therefore, even if the value of the second winning random number counter C5 is won when the time is not shortened, it is difficult to win the game ball to the second winning opening 640. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the player tries to enter the second winning opening 640 even though he/she is not in a time saving period (a big hit with a time saving is not displayed).

FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. Similar to the above, the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 146) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C4 is It is defined in association with the jackpot type and the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C4 is selected.

Specifically, in the case where the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with jackpot R (see 202b21 of FIG. 146).

When the jackpot R is reached, a 16-round jackpot game is executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is a time saving state (100 times) until the variation of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

The jackpot S is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C4 in the range of “50 to 99” (see 202b22 of FIG. 146).

When the big hit S is reached, a 16-round big hit game is executed, and the game state after the big hit game is finished becomes the normal state. In this case, the player can receive the payout of about 2400 prize balls, but cannot obtain the profit in the time saving state after the jackpot game is over.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the entry into the first entrance 64), the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shortened with a probability of 50%. During the time saving period, you will aim to further win big jackpots through the small jackpot game described later.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0-9", a big hit n is associated and defined (see 202b23 in FIG. 146). This jackpot n provides the player with the same profit as the jackpot R described above.

That is, 16 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and the gaming state after the jackpot games are finished is a time saving state (100 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C4 is “10 to 99”, the big hit p is associated and defined (see 202b24 of FIG. 146). The jackpot p is provided with a difference in the number of fluctuations in the time saving game while giving the player the same payout of prize balls as the jackpot n described above.

That is, a 16-round big hit game is executed, and the game state after the big hit game is in a time saving state (4 times) until the fluctuation of the special symbol is exhausted 4 times. In this case, the player can receive about 2400 prize balls.

As described above, the jackpot generated in the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second winning opening 640) shifts to a time saving state with the establishment of 100%. Therefore, as compared to the case where the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery, the possibility of winning the next big hit in a short time after the big hit game is finished is increased.

As described above, during the shortening of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol increases, the variation time of the ordinary symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol It is set to be long (5 seconds or 0.5 seconds). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640, it is easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Then, when the jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol 2 is achieved, the jackpot will be shortened after the jackpot, so that the jackpot due to the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be easily obtained.

Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the special symbol time saving state, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and when the big symbol is a big hit, the special symbol easy to become G is likely to be repeated, so that the player is It is easy to get a lot of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to shift to the special symbol time saving state, and thus the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the present control example, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved special symbols are associated with each other, and the sphere is in the specific area 4830 (in the present control example, the next jackpot due to the passage of the sphere). It is determined whether or not to pass through the area to be determined (see FIG. 51), and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 148.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 147. 147(a) to 147(c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202g.

The small hit type selection table 202g is a small hit based on the first winning opening 64, a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202g1 for selecting a small hit type, and a small hit based on the second winning opening 640. It has a special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202g2 for selecting a hit type (see FIG. 147(a)).

As shown in FIG. 147(b), at the time of a small hit based on the first entrance 64, when the value of the small hit type counter C6 is "0-1", the small hit A is selected, and "2 to 99" is selected. In the case of ", a small hit B is selected.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 147(c), when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is "0 to 9" during the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, the small hit A is selected, and "10" is selected. In the case of "~99", the small hit B is selected.

In this control example, the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 148). Although the details will be described later, the small hit A is a small hit that is given with a high probability that the big hit is caused by the game ball passing through the specific area 4830, and the small hit B is a small hit that is not given the big hit with a high probability. ..

Further, in the present control example, the big hits given after the small hit A and the small hit B are big hits G (16R time shortened big hits).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the type of jackpot to be given thereafter is determined according to the type of small hit, but as a specification other than that, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit. Also, the type of jackpot is determined by the jackpot selection table (only the jackpot right is acquired), and the jackpot which has won the right is executed by the game ball passing through the specific area 4830 in the subsequent jackpot game. May be. By doing so, the player can select a small hit to pass through the specific area 4830, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing timekeeping changes of the opening/closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 in the small hit A, and timing changes of the opening/closing plate 1300, the solenoid 1510 and the distribution device 4850 in the small hit B (see FIG. 51). Is. The operation of the distribution device 4850 is the same for the small hit A and the small hit B.

It should be noted that in FIG. 148, illustration of the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the driving timing of the solenoid 1510 is omitted, and the operation is illustrated to start at the same point.

First, the outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In the small hit A, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.0 second from the start of the small hit, and after 1.0 second, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). Excitation) is released. 0.2 seconds after the release of the excitation, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) again, the open/close plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 0.6 seconds, and then the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released.

Next, the outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. In the small hit B, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited) so that the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the open state for 1.8 seconds from the start of the small hit, and after 1.8 seconds, the solenoid 1510 is driven (excited). ) Is released.

In this way, the small hit A and the small hit B have the same small hit time itself (1.8 seconds), but are different in whether the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed during the small hit game. ..

In this control example, if the small hit game is started immediately after the end of the small hit game, that is, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol remains, and the small hit game occurs continuously, between the small hit games The period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to 0.4 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the above-mentioned mode, when the small hit game occurs continuously, even if two or more balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 (see FIG. 51), the discharge is performed from the discharge port 1150 between the small hit games. The number of spheres formed is limited to two. Therefore, the ball that entered the storage channel 1231 in the previous small hit game can remain in the storage channel 1231 even during the next small hit game.

The operation mode of the distribution device 4850 will be described. The distribution device 4850 maintains the distribution operation member 4851 in the closed position until 2.0 seconds have elapsed since the solenoid 1510 was started (excited) at the start of the small hit game, and after 2.0 seconds had elapsed. The distribution operation member 4851 is moved to the open position and maintained for 0.5 seconds, and after 0.5 seconds, the distribution operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again. In addition, the distribution device 4850 moves the distribution operation member 4851 to the open position and maintains it for 0.5 seconds after 3.2 seconds have elapsed since the solenoid 1510 was started (excited) at the start of the small hit game, When 0.5 seconds has elapsed, the solenoid 4852 is driven (excited) in a manner that the sorting operation member 4851 is returned to the closed position again.

That is, the sorting operation member 4851 moves to the open position twice for each small hit game. The first movement corresponds to 1 second (corresponding to the time elapsed until the ball passing through the discharge port 1150 reaches the sorting operation member 4851) after the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed in the small hit A. ..

From this, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is driven by the small hit A, if the sphere remains in the storage flow channel 1231 in advance, the sphere passes through the specific region 4830 when the first sorting operation member 4851 moves. Can be made. On the other hand, since the probability of the small hit A is 10% in the case of the special symbol 2, it is difficult to frequently cause the sphere to pass to the specific region 4830 at this timing.

The second movement of the sorting operation member 4851 is 1.4 seconds after the end of the small hitting game (corresponding to immediately after the second ball passing through the discharge port 1150 passes through the sorting operation member 4851). Equivalent to. That is, the second movement is a mode in which the balls are not allowed to enter the specific area 4830 as long as the number of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the end of the small hit game is two.

That is, according to the present control example, in the case where only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time-saving game, unless the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes 0, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830. Can be configured as.

As a result, in the case where only the small hit B is repeatedly executed during the time saving game, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 can be limited to the time when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 becomes zero. In this case, the payout prize balls that are collected in the time-saving game can be obtained by the prize balls that are paid out by the game in which the balls are continuously inserted into the second ball entrance 640 so that the number of reserved balls does not become zero.

On the other hand, since it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 while continuing to put the ball in the second entrance 640, in order to obtain the next jackpot (pass the ball to the specific area 4830). , The player needs to make a timing to set the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol to 0 in the time saving game. As a result, in the time saving game, when the remaining time saving time becomes small, it is possible to increase the profit obtained to the player by frequently setting the timing to set the number of reserved balls to 0.

According to the setting of the second movement, if the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is three, the balls pass through the specific region 4830, but the number is not limited to this. That is, the number of discharges may be set when the number of discharges is greater than the number (2) discharged in the shortest interval (0.4 seconds) of the small hit game. The second movement may be set at the passing timing (1.8 seconds from the end of the small hit game). Also, the shortest interval of the small hit game may be set to 0.2 seconds (the number of ejected pieces is 1), and in this case, the second movement is more than the number of ejected pieces (1 piece). It may be set, and for example, the second movement may be set at the timing when the second ball passes the specific area 4830 (1.2 seconds from the end of the small hitting game).

In addition, since the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 in one small hit game is about 1 or 2 on average, the storage channel 1231 is stored before the small hit game in which the number of reserved balls becomes 0. By accumulating the sphere at the position, the possibility that the sphere will pass through the specific area 4830 can be increased. Therefore, the timing to set the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 to 0 can be selected by the number of balls in the storage channel 1231 that increases or decreases each time a small hit game is performed. This can improve the attention to the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231.

In the present control example, the longer the time-saving game period is, the more payout prize balls are obtained due to the balls entering the second ball entrance 640. Here, by setting the number of prize balls in the second ball inlet 640, the player can select whether to shorten or lengthen the time saving game period.

For example, if the number of prize balls in the second ball entrance 640 is 1, there is no profit (the number of prize balls to be paid out) obtained by the player by subtracting from the number of shots (0). Therefore, it is beneficial for the player to shorten the time saving game period.

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls in the second entrance 640 is 2 or more (for example, 5), there is a profit (the number of prize balls to be paid out) obtained by the player by subtracting from the number of shots (1 prize). that's all). Therefore, it may be advantageous for the player to suppress the ball from entering the specific area 4830 and lengthen the time saving game period.

In the present control example, the opening time of the opening and closing plate 1300 for one small hit game is set to 1.8 seconds from the first opening start to the closing, so to the first specific winning opening 1000a in one small hit game. The number of incoming balls is 3, 4 but is not limited to this. For example, by configuring the opening pattern of the small hit game with an opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times, more balls (for example, 10 balls) during one small hit game. ) May be configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, for example, by disposing the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment, even if the opening time of the opening/closing plate 1300 is short, the sphere is at the lower end of the opening/closing plate 1300 when the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed. It is possible to prolong the time until the ball falls downward, and it is possible to guide the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

In this control example, the ball is controlled so that it can be fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so the small hit game (small hit A, small hit B) whose period from opening to closing is 1.8 seconds is the shortest interval (0 When repeated every 4 seconds, the number of small hit games for the number of balls that can be fired is 11 balls/3 times. That is, a maximum of 11 balls can be shot during three small hit games.

Here, in order to generate a small hit game, it is necessary to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so when the number of reserved balls in the second ball entrance 640 is 0, such as at the start of a right hit. Therefore, it is necessary to insert three balls into the second entrance 640 as the number of balls for generating the small hit game three times. Therefore, the remaining eight balls deviate from the second ball entrance 640 toward the first specific winning hole 1000a. In three small hit games, for example, if all the small hits are the above small hit B, six balls are discharged by passing the small hit game three times. Therefore, after three small hit games, two spheres remain in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the expected number of additional balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 when the balls are continuously fired is two for every three small win games.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hit game is not discharged unless it has reached the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It takes 2 seconds to reach the lower end of the storage channel 1231 from the first specific winning opening 1000a, and considering that the opening in the small hitting game is completed in 1.8 seconds, it is the first in the small hitting game. It is possible that the opening of the next small hit game is started before the sphere that has passed through the one specific winning opening 1000a reaches the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

Therefore, when the balls start to accumulate in the storage channel 1231 (when the number is not 0, the first time), the small hitting game in a state where the number is not 0 (for example, in a state where two balls remain in the storage channel 1231). It is possible to make it easier for the balls to remain in the storage flow path 1231 as compared with the case of additionally increasing the balls in the small hit game to be executed, continuous times).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in the second entrance 640 is not 0, even if three balls do not enter the second entrance 640, the number of remaining reserved balls and If the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 exceeds 3, it is possible to execute three small hit games at the shortest interval (0.4 second interval). In this case, the number of balls toward the first specific winning opening 1000a becomes eight or more during the three small hit games, and more balls can be directed to the storage flow path 1231. It is possible to additionally leave more than two spheres in the storage channel 1231.

As described above, in the present control example, the small hitting game generated based on the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 is maintained so as to continue at the shortest interval, and as many balls as possible are It is controlled so that it is more profitable for the player to insert the ball into one specific winning opening 1000a and leave the ball in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 does not contribute to the occurrence of the small hit game (when the number of reserved balls is full (4 in this control example), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. It becomes a disadvantage for the player from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls and the number of balls to be additionally retained in the storage channel 1231 (to the second ball entrance 640 during the right-handed game). There may be a disadvantage for the player entering the ball).

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 when the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 during the right-handed game.

Here, in the present control example, when aiming to pass a ball through the specific area 4830, when the number of reserved balls of the second ball entrance 640 becomes 0, more than two balls are accumulated. It is necessary to be stored in the flow path 1231. That is, if the number of balls held is larger than twice the number of balls held in the second ball entrance 640 (identified), unless the number of balls held is reduced, the balls flow into the specific area 4830. It is configured to be difficult to let. Thereby, in addition to the attention to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, the attention to the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be improved.

In this control example, the adjustment of the game area (gauge configuration, nail adjustment, etc.) is an adjustment in which the ball easily passes through the normal ball entrance 67 during the right hitting game and a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640. However, it is possible to reduce the loss given to the player even in the adjustment in which it is difficult for the balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 and a large number of the balls can easily go to the first specific winning hole 1000a.

That is, for example, when it is an adjustment that a large number of balls enter the second ball inlet 640 during a right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to accumulate in the storage channel 1231 and the small hit game B continues to occur. Although it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830, if the small hitting game A selected by establishment of 10% occurs, the ball can pass to the specific area 4830, so the ball enters the specific area 4830. It is possible to aim to pay out a large number of award balls by inserting a large number of balls into the second ball entrance 640 until.

Further, for example, during the right-handed game, it is difficult for the balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 and it is easy to move many balls to the first specific winning hole 1000a. Because it is difficult to enter, most of the right-handed game balls can be entered into the storage flow path 1231, and in addition, the number of reserved special symbols 2 based on entering the second entrance port 640 is 0. Since it is easy to maintain as it is, it becomes easy to discharge two or more balls in the first small hit game. Therefore, since it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area 4830 early, the time saving game can be ended early, and a loss occurs due to the ball not easily entering the second ball inlet 640 (that is, the time saving game Period) can be shortened.

In addition, in the present control example, since the opening/closing plate 1300 and the first specific winning opening 1000a are configured to be used in the small hitting game, it is desirable to separately prepare the winning opening used in the big hitting game. For example, as described in the second embodiment, the second specific winning opening 2255a different from the first specific winning opening 1000a may be set as the winning opening used in the jackpot game.

In this case, the storage channels 1231 do not necessarily have to be joined, and for example, the first specific winning port 1000a and the second specific winning port 2255a may form independent storage channels. The second specific winning opening 2255a may not constitute the storage flow path (is discharged to the ball discharge path).

In addition, this control example illustrates one means of a technical idea regarding a gaming machine in which “the player can select the timing at which the ball flows into the specific area 4830 (target can be hit)”, and another means for the same purpose. May be used.

For example, a small hit (small hit A in this control example) that drives (excites) the opening/closing plate 1300 in a driving mode in which the ball easily (flows) into the specific region 4830 and a ball hardly flows into the specific region 4830 ( In the control mode in which the small hit (small hit B in this control example) for driving (exciting) the opening/closing plate 1300 in the driving mode (which does not flow) is selected depending on the small hit type, which small hit is to be executed is played. By controlling so as to notify the person and including the case where the ball shot after grasping the content of the notification can pass through the specific area 4830, the timing of inflowing the ball into the specific area 4830 is played. The person may be allowed to select. According to this, it is possible to allow "a game mode in which the ball is prevented from entering the specific area 4830 by not firing the ball at a predetermined timing".

The notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be notified by the display of the third symbol display device 81 or may be notified by voice.

In the third control example, as described above, the ball passes through the special area 4830 so that a big hit can be obtained. That is, it is controlled so that it can operate as a so-called "mixer of one type and two types". In addition, by associating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 with the number of balls flowing down toward the specific region 4830, when the ball passes through the specific region 4830, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is It is configured to occur at most 0. Next, an example of the effect of this control example will be described.

149(a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, on the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the current state of the storage channel 1231 that is not actually arranged therein is schematically illustrated inside the circular broken line. Further, the display of the main display region Dm is omitted for easy understanding. In addition, the display at the time when the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 148) is opened by the small hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2 is illustrated.

149(a) and (b), as shown in the small area Ds1, it is the same that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is two, as shown inside the circular broken line. The number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is different. That is, in the state shown in FIG. 149(a), three balls are stored, while in the state shown in FIG. 149(b), seven balls are stored.

In the small area Ds2, a semi-circular picture, a first display Ds21 in which "sorry" is written on the left side of the semi-circular picture, and a predetermined profit can be obtained on the right side The second display Ds22 described as "V" and the needle Ds23 that rotates around the central axis of the semicircle as a rotation axis while overlapping with the semicircular picture are displayed.

In the small area Ds3, an appropriate display is displayed on the guide display unit that guides the game method. That is, in FIG. 149(a), since the player is in a state in which the player is likely to receive a profit by firing the ball toward the second entrance port 640, the player launches the ball toward the second entrance port 640. "Aim for the right" is displayed to indicate that. On the other hand, in FIG. 149(b), as will be described later, since it is in a state in which the player is likely to receive a profit even by suppressing the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the player can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. "A chance to stop" is displayed, which indicates that it is possible to stop the firing of the aimed ball.

Here, in the state of FIGS. 149(a) and 149(b), the subsequent game progress in the case of stopping the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 will be described. The display content of the small area Ds2 is set according to the progress of the game. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, all lottery corresponding to the reserved display of the special symbol 2 shown in FIGS. 149(a) and 149(b) is a small hit, and all the small hit types are small. The description will be made assuming that the hit is B (see FIG. 147(c) and FIG. 148).

First, when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 149(a), a small hit occurs for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (that is, twice). Here, as described above, when the small hits occur continuously due to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remaining, the upper limit number of balls discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 is set to 2 balls. Therefore, after the state shown in FIG. 149(a), a small hit occurs twice, and the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 2 balls and 1 ball in this order.

As described above, after the small hit B is repeatedly generated, the spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific region 4830 when three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Limited Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 149(a), the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51) thereafter.

Next, when the entrance to the second entrance 640 is stopped in the state shown in FIG. 149(b), a small hit occurs for the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (that is, twice). .. Here, as described above, when the small hits occur continuously due to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remaining, the upper limit number of balls discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 is set to 2 balls. Therefore, after the state shown in FIG. 149(b), a small hit occurs twice, and the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is 2 balls, 2 balls, and 3 balls in this order.

As described above, after the small hit B is repeatedly generated, the spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific region 4830 when three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231. Limited Therefore, when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 149(b), the ball then passes through the specific area 4830 (see FIG. 51).

In this way, the display of the small areas Ds2, Ds3 is based on the number of reserved special symbols 2 and the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 1231, and then whether or not the spheres pass through the specific area 4830. It has a role as a notification.

That is, when the ball cannot be expected to pass through the specific area 4830 even if the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is stopped, the needle Ds23 and the first display Ds21 and the first display Ds21 are displayed as shown in FIG. 149(a). The second display Ds22 is arranged at an intermediate position.

It should be noted that the needle Ds23 does not need to be arranged at an accurate intermediate position, and it is difficult for the player to determine whether the needle Ds23 is tilted toward the first display Ds21 side or the second display Ds22 side. Any arrangement will do. Further, the needle Ds23 may be stopped or may be vibrated left and right.

Further, as another case where the needle Ds23 is arranged at the intermediate position, the needle Ds23 may be inclined toward the first display Ds21 side. For example, when the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are completely discharged before the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 due to a small hit of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is completed (in the state of FIG. 149(a)). Correspondingly, that is, ((the number of reserved balls × 2) ≧ the number of stored balls), the needle Ds23 is displayed so as to incline toward the first display Ds21 side, and opening and closing by the small hit of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 When the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can remain until after the opening/closing operation of the plate 1300 is completed (for example, in FIG. 149(a), five or six balls are stored in the storage channel 1231). In the case of ((reserved sphere number×2)<reserved sphere number<(reserved sphere number×2)+3)), the needle Ds23 is located at an intermediate position between the first display Ds21 and the second display Ds22. May be displayed so as to be arranged.

By doing so, as compared with the case where the needle Ds23 is arranged at the intermediate position, the case where the needle Ds23 is tilted toward the first display Ds21 side is a period until the opportunity to make the ball enter the specific area 4830. It is possible to let the player understand that the number of balls is long (the number of balls to be inserted into the second entrance 640 by the time of entering the specific area 4830 is large).

Therefore, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be used as a notification that the player can predict the time (or the number of shot balls) required until the opportunity to put the ball into the specific area 4830.

Note that, in FIG. 149(b), as a display corresponding to a state in which a ball discharged from the storage channel 1231 can pass through the specific region 4830, the needle Ds23 is tilted toward the second display Ds22 in the small region Ds2. However, the process leading to this state is not one, and various modes are illustrated.

For example, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are in the state shown in FIG. 149(b), the needle Ds23 is inclined to the second display Ds22 side. Alternatively, the needle Ds23 may be secondly displayed after a predetermined time delay (for example, 3 seconds has elapsed or the opening/closing time of the second entrance 640 has elapsed) from the time point of such determination. It may be inclined to the Ds22 side, or when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 becomes larger than that shown in FIG. 149(b) (when an excess of the number of spheres occurs). The needle Ds23 may be tilted toward the second display Ds22 side.

In addition, in the above description, the case where all the small hits of the special symbol 2 are the small hits B has been described, but when the small hit A occurs, the display change may be caused in another mode. That is, in the case of the small hit A, regardless of the number of reserved special symbols 2, as long as the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are in a dischargeable state, they can pass through the specific region 4830. It is desirable to control the display so that the display can be changed regardless of the relationship between the reserved number of the symbols 2 and the stored number of the storage channel 1231.

Here, when the small hit of the special symbol 2 is the small hit A, the timing of switching to the display in which the needle Ds23 is inclined to the second display Ds22 side is not limited at all. For example, when it is determined that the small hit A has occurred, the display may be switched regardless of the storage state of the spheres in the storage channel 1231 (the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 is an operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 1300). If there is a sphere that can pass through the specific area 4830, if a small hit A occurs and it is determined that the sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231 so as to be discharged, the display may be switched. However (corresponding to the case where the ball is likely to pass through the specific area 4830), the display may be switched according to the actual operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 by the small hit A (the ball passes through the specific area 4830). Equivalent to switching the display by calculating the timing backwards).

When the display is switched in accordance with the actual operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 by the small hit A, the time required for the balls discharged from the storage area 1231 to reach the specific area 4830 is about 1 second as described above, Immediately after the needle Ds23 is switched to incline toward the second display Ds22, the player shifts his line of sight to the specific region 4830 (see FIG. 51) at the lower right of the game region, so that the ball passes through the specific region 4830. Can be seen.

In other words, since it is possible to define the time from the switching of the display to the time when the sphere passes through the specific area 4830, the third symbol display device 81 can be focused until the display is switched to the third symbol display device 81. The display is switched one second before the ball passes through the specific area 4830 while ensuring a long period in which the player pays attention to 81, thereby preventing the player from overlooking the state where the ball passes through the specific area 4830. You can try to do it.

This is not a ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game that is being executed, but a ball that has previously entered the first specific winning opening 1000a can pass through the specific area 4830. It is possible only if there are features. That is, in the case of the conventional gaming machine, in the structure where the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game being executed passes through the specific area 4830, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a. The timing at which the sphere passes through the specific area 4830 may be influenced by the timing. Therefore, most of the display on the third symbol display device 81 focuses on the specific area 4830 during the period in which the sphere can pass through the specific area 4830.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, in the case of a small hitting game executed before the small hitting game being executed, if the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a passes through the specific area 4830, it is currently executed. Regardless of the manner in which the ball enters the first specific winning opening 1000a in the small hitting game, the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is determined by the operation mode of the opening/closing plate 1300 (discharging mode of the ball from the storage channel 1231). Can be defined.

Therefore, even if the player performs a display that suggests that the player sees the specific area 4830 by limiting the timing (moment) at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830, the player can detect the ball passing through the specific area 4830. The possibility of overlooking can be reduced. Thereby, while prolonging the time to pay attention to the third symbol display device 81, it is less likely that the player misses the ball passing through the specific region 4830 (region arranged outside the third symbol display device 81). be able to.

In addition, when the deviation of the special symbol 2 is included (the value of the first random number counter C3 is 319), it means that the sphere easily passes through the specific area 4830 by the number of the deviation held. Then, it becomes advantageous to the player side. For example, if the holding of the special symbol 2 shown in FIG. 149(a) is both disengaged, since there is no small hit after this, the three balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are The balls are discharged all at once and the sphere passes through the specific area 4830.

As described above with reference to FIG. 145(c), the probability that the special symbol 2 will be missed due to being reserved is the same as the probability of a big hit. And, the fact that the special symbol 2 is unreserved has an advantageous effect on the player side when the sphere stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is going to pass through to the specific region 4830. That is, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the special symbol 2 to come off as much as (or more) that the special symbol 2 is a big hit.

In addition, when the big hit (the value of the first random number counter C3 is 0) is included in the fluctuation currently being executed or the suspension of the special symbol 2, whether or not the sphere passes through the specific area 4830. Regardless, the jackpot game is transitioned to, so the notification indicating that may be controlled separately.

For example, when the currently executed variation is a big hit, the needle Ds23 displays the small area Ds2 while keeping the display of the small area Ds3 at “aiming at the right” (see FIG. 149(a)). You may change so that it may incline to the 2nd display Ds22 side (refer FIG. 149(b)).

The timing at which the needle Ds23 tilts is not limited at all. For example, it may be inclined from the timing when the fluctuation starts, or may be inclined at the timing when the fluctuation stops.

Further, for example, when there is a big hit in the hold of the special symbol 2, the corresponding hold may be different from the display mode of another hold. For example, the color may be changed to another color, blinking, flashing light may be emitted, or the shape may be changed.

In addition, as described above, the display of the small area Ds2 may be changed so that the needle Ds23 is inclined toward the second display Ds22 (see FIG. 149(b)). In addition, the change in the display mode of the hold and the change in the display of the small area Ds2 may be executed in conjunction (combined).

FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the game state, the special symbol type, the variable time, and the holding type. To facilitate understanding, only the special symbol 2 will be described, and the description of the special symbol 1 will be omitted. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game is set to either the normal state or the time saving state described above, and the game progresses based on the set game state. In addition, in FIG. 150, it is assumed that only the above-mentioned small hit B is executed as the small hit.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the normal state, when the deviation symbol is determined based on the holding of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 10 minutes. Further, in the time saving state, when the deviation symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 0.1 seconds.

As a result, even if the same deviating symbol is used, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on whether the time-variant state changes or the normal state changes. When it fluctuates in the time saving state, as described above, the discharge mode of the balls from the storage channel 1231 expected from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is. The special symbol 2 acts so as to be advantageous to the player by the number of deviating symbols included in the number of reserved balls.

For example, the number of reserved balls is 2, the number of stored balls in the storage channel 1231 is 5, and the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened due to the small hit currently being executed, so that the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231. If it is regulated, there is no disengagement symbol in the hold, and if the remaining hold is a small hit symbol, there will be two, two, and one spheres for each small hit based on the number of reserved balls. The balls will be ejected and will not pass through the specific area 4830.

On the other hand, in the same case, if there is one disengagement symbol in the hold and the remaining hold is a small hit design, one small hit occurs, so two for each occurrence of a small hit, The balls are ejected in the order of three, and the balls pass through the specific area 4830.

As another case, for example, even if the number of holding balls is 2 and the number of storing balls of the storage channel 1231 is 3, if all the holding is out of the design, the small hit currently being executed Since a small hit does not occur after the above, the three balls are collectively discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the balls pass through the specific area 4830.

Therefore, the inequality ((the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 − the number of reserved balls of the deviating symbol)×2≧3) can be used as a standard of whether or not the sphere passes through the specific region 4830, and thus the special symbol 2 It is possible to improve the player's attention to the determination of the missed symbol based on the holding of the.

On the other hand, the variation time of the deviation symbol in the normal state is set to 10 minutes, so once the deviation symbol is determined, the next fluctuation is not started for 10 minutes even if the special symbol 2 is retained. Even if the small hitting pattern is determined by the remaining hold, the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is not limited by the small hitting.

As an example, a case will be described in which three spheres are stored in the storage flow channel 1231 and the number of time saving is 0 when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is four and the time saving state is shifted to the normal state. When the small hitting symbol is determined based on all of the four reserved, the variation time does not change to the time saving state up to 10 times after the transition to the normal state, so the discharge mode of the balls from the storage flow channel 1231 is The ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 because it is divided into two and one.

On the other hand, in the case of the same transition, if the deviation symbol is determined based on the hold that is variably displayed for the first time or the second time, the execution of the subsequent small hit game will be delayed, so the storage channel 1231 Are ejected together, which allows the spheres to pass through the specific area 4830. Unlike the fluctuation of the deviation symbol in the time saving state, a sufficient time for discharging all the spheres from the storage channel 1231 elapses in one fluctuation, so that the presence or absence of the deviation symbol is noted, and the number of deviation symbols is a problem. Don't

On the other hand, in the case of the same transition, when the deviation symbol is determined based on the variable display that is variably displayed for the third time or the fourth time, the ball is already stored in the storage channel 1231 by the execution of the previous small hit game. Since it has been discharged, the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231 does not pass through the specific region 4830. In this way, even if the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 are the same, the profit obtained by the player changes depending on which hold determines the deviation symbol. (In this control example, it is more likely for the player to benefit if the deviation symbol is determined based on the hold that the start of fluctuation is early).

That is, the player advances the game with the expectation that the off symbol will be determined based on the hold that the start of the change is early with respect to the hold of the special symbol 2 after the transition to the normal state. Thereby, based on the holding of the special symbol 2 after the transition to the normal state, it is possible to configure the game nature in which the player is more likely to gain a profit by determining the off symbol.

Further, in the normal state, when the small hit symbol is determined based on the holding of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be a predetermined time (0.1 seconds) from the start of the normal state to 10 variations, After that, a random time of 5 to 10 minutes is set. Further, in the time saving state, when the small hit symbol is determined based on the holding of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be a predetermined time (0.1 seconds).

The variable time is set to a long time of 5 minutes to 10 minutes so that the profit obtained by the player who attempts to execute the game (illegal game) of entering the ball into the second entrance 640 under normal circumstances is obtained. This is to lower it. That is, this is to suppress the generation of illegal profits. On the other hand, the 10 fluctuations after the transition to the normal state has the same variation time as that in the short-time state because the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 just before the end of the short-time state is accompanied by the transition to the normal state. This is to prevent it from being discharged all at once. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the sphere from easily protruding and easily passing through the specific region 4830 when shifting from the time saving state to the normal state.

On the contrary, the variation time may be set to be long regardless of the number of variations after the transition to the normal state. In this case, the interval of small hits after the shift to the normal state can be extended, and the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged at one time. Therefore, the shift from the time saving state to the normal state can be performed. It can be configured so that the sphere easily protrudes and the sphere easily passes through the specific region 4830.

In the present control example, when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 within a predetermined number of times (10 times in the present control example) after the game state is changed to the normal state, it is normally performed. It is controlled so that the jackpot game is started. That is, even when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the time saving game is over, the big hit game may be started.

On the other hand, if the ball passes through the specific area 4830 after the game state has been changed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this control example) after the normal state, an error command is set. Controlled by. Accordingly, if the player executes the game in a game mode in which the notification is ignored and the ball is shot toward the second entrance 640, even if the ball may pass through the specific area 4830, It is possible to prevent the shift to the jackpot game at that occasion.

Moreover, in the normal state, when the jackpot symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 0.1 seconds. Further, in the time saving state, when the big hit symbol is determined based on the holding of the special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 0.1 seconds. Thereby, by stopping the fluctuation early and starting the jackpot game, the timing at which the ball discharged from the storage flow path 1231 passes through the specific region 4830 can be put in the jackpot game, so the jackpot symbol is determined. It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from occurring a plurality of times due to being played. Also, by stopping the fluctuation early, it is possible to immediately shift to the production of the jackpot game, so that the player does not have to feel the disconnection of the hour-short game and the jackpot game, and the jackpot game can be changed from the hour-short game. The transition to can be felt smoothly.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 178. In the first control example, the case where the operation effect of the operation button 300 is executed while continuing the firing of the sphere toward the storage flow channel 1231 is described, but in the fourth control example, the operation effect of the operation button is performed. However, it is executed during execution of the effect of stopping the firing of the sphere toward the storage flow path 1231 (the effect of preventing the excessive entry ball). The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the description will be given by diverting the variable winning device 4000 described in the fourth embodiment. First, an outline of this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 and 152.

FIG. 151(a) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the jackpot game in the fourth control example, and FIG. 151(b) shows the contents of the start round selection table Tb that defines the discharge mode at the end of the start round Rpb. FIG. 151(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing, and FIG. 151(c) is a schematic diagram of the progress of the game in the effect round Rpt, and FIG. 151(d) defines the discharge mode at the end of the after effect game round Rpa. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the after-production game round selection table Ta.

FIG. 152 is a timing chart showing changes in the electrical states of the solenoid 1510, the detection sensor 1240, and the specific area 4830 and changes in the display of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 151 and FIG. 152, in the present control example, as the round game R for executing continuous production toward the V winning round Rv, the starting round Rpb, the production round Rpt, and the post-production game round Rpa are continuous. (See FIG. 151(a)).

Then, in each round, a participation promotion effect that encourages the player to participate is performed, and a player who executes the game in accordance with the participation promotion effect is a V-winner as compared to a case where the game is executed without following the participation promotion effect. In the round Rv, it is controlled so that the difficulty of passing the ball through the specific area 4830 can be lowered. Therefore, the player's motivation to operate in each round can be maintained, and it is possible to prevent the player's attention on the display from decreasing in any round game R of the player.

As shown in the start round selection table Tb (see FIG. 151(b)), the start round Rpb is controlled so that the discharge mode from the storage flow path 1231 after the end of the round game R can be changed, and the discharge mode. Is defined as an interval time in association with the jackpot type, but details will be described later.

When the first ejection mode Tb1 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the inter-round fifth interval time Int5 (1.2 seconds). That is, it is set as the time for discharging exactly 6 spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the sphere is fully stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the fifth inter-round time Int5 has elapsed, four spheres remain in the storage channel 1231 (a discharge shortage occurs).

The expression “full” in the present control example means a state in which the storage channel 1231 stores balls until a state in which an additional ball cannot be entered (also referred to as “full”). ). In other words, the storage channel 1231 indicates a state in which the maximum number of balls that can be defined in advance (10 in this control example) are stored in the storage channel 1231. In the following, the expression “full tank” is used with the same meaning unless otherwise specified.

When the second discharging mode Tb2 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds) described in the above embodiment. That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly nine balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when the sphere is fully stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 elapses, one sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 (a discharge shortage occurs).

When the third ejection mode Tb3 is selected, the interval time immediately after the start round Rpt is set to the inter-round first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) described in the above embodiment. That is, it is set as the time for discharging exactly 10 spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231. Therefore, even if the spheres are fully stored in the storage flow channel 1231, the spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 are discharged globally due to the passage of the first interval time Int1 between rounds (due to insufficient discharge. Does not occur).

The starting round selection table Tb assumes the occurrence of insufficient discharge of the balls from the state where the storage channels 1231 are fully filled with the balls. Therefore, depending on how the player plays the game, the number of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231 may differ from the planned number.

For example, in the start round Rpb, when the player voluntarily plays a game in which the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 is fixed to six, the discharge shortage does not occur regardless of the selection of the start round selection table Tb. ..

On the other hand, in the present control example, the larger the number of winnings in the starting round Rpb (the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231), the greater the profit that the player can obtain in the production round Rpt immediately thereafter. It As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the firing of the ball in the start round Rpb and improve the motivation to execute the firing of the ball.

As shown in FIG. 151(c), in the production round Rpt, the ball entry possible period is started in a state where the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 and the storage channel 1231 is filled with the Xth (X is set to X. An integer from 1 to 10. Enter the period after the sphere (see FIG. 152) is detected by the detection sensor 1240 (after the storage flow path 1231 is full with less than the specified number of balls in the round game R). During the (non-ball-remaining remaining period), it is controlled so as to execute the attention effect described later. In addition, at the same time, the notification indicating the stop of the launch is executed (see FIG. 152, “stop instruction”).

In addition, as the attention effect, a player participation type operation effect executed in the third symbol display device 81, information that is beneficial to the player displayed along with the operation effect, display, and the like are illustrated.

It should be noted that the notification indicating the stop of the launch is not limited to the notification simply recommending the stop of the launch, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a mode in which the player is informed that the profit that can be obtained for the predetermined winning opening is the maximum, and that the player is not profitable to shoot more balls than this, or the launch is stopped. It may be a notification mode that also includes the period to be played, or may be a mode in which the target winning opening is changed.

As described above, in the round game R, by designating the timing to stop the ball firing to the player, the ball is continued to be fired during the remaining period during which the player cannot enter the ball, and the ball is discharged through the outlet 66 without entering any prize hole. It is possible to prevent such a situation.

Further, by executing the attention effect related to the player's profit at the timing of stopping the ball firing, it is possible to maintain the player's concentration during the remaining non-enterable period. In addition, in this control example, the effect of maintaining the player's concentration can be enhanced by including the timing effect (operation effect) in the attention effect.

As shown in the post-production game round selection table Ta (see FIG. 151(d)), the post-production game round Rpa is controlled so that the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the round game R can be changed. The discharge mode is defined as an interval time by associating with the jackpot type, and details will be described later.

When the post-production first discharge mode Ta1 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to an inter-round sixth interval time Int6 (0.4 seconds). That is, it is set as the time for discharging exactly two spheres stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when three or more spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, the spheres remain in the storage channel 1231 immediately after the sixth round-to-round interval Int6 elapses (a discharge shortage occurs).

When the post-production second discharge mode Ta2 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 (1.8 seconds). That is, it is set as a time for discharging exactly nine balls stored in the storage channel 1231. Therefore, when 10 or more spheres (10 spheres in this control example) are stored in the storage channel 1231, immediately after the inter-round fourth interval time Int4 elapses, the spheres remain in the storage channel 1231 (discharge). Shortage occurs).

When the post-production third discharge mode Ta3 is selected, the interval time immediately after the post-production game round Rpa is set to the inter-round first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds). That is, it is set as the time for discharging exactly 10 spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231. Therefore, even when the spheres are fully stored in the storage channel 1231, the spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 are completely discharged (emission) immediately after the first interval time Int1 between rounds elapses. There will be no shortage).

If a remaining ball occurs in the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the end of the post-production game round Rpa, the V winning round Rv (see FIG. 152) cannot be ended by a specified number of balls, so the V winning round Rv is specified. It does not end until the time (30 seconds in this control example) elapses. In this control example, the opening period Tv, which is the period during which the specific region 4830 is opened, is set to be less than the specified time of the V winning round Rv, so the storage flow path 1231 immediately after the end of the post-production game round Rpa. If there is a residual ball in the area, the ball cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, information regarding which of the discharge modes Ta1 to Ta3 is selected from the post-production game round selection table Ta becomes the player's attention.

In the present control example, the mode of notification (see FIG. 152, “discrimination display”) that indicates which of the discharge modes Ta1 to Ta3 is selected from the post-production game round selection table Ta is the target production of the production round Rpt. It is controlled differently depending on whether the player succeeded in the operation in the operation effect. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the operation effect can be improved.

According to the post-rendering game round selection table Ta, since the minimum number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 after the end of the after-rendering game round Rpa is two, regardless of the presence or absence of the notification and the mode of the notification. If the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 in the post-game round Rpa is suppressed to 2 or less, it is possible to prevent the V winning round Rv from being started in the state where there are remaining balls in the storage channel 1231. It is possible to end the V winning round Rv by allowing a predetermined number (10 in this control example) of balls to enter the detection sensor 1240 before the open period Tv has elapsed, and allow the balls to pass through the specific area 4830. it can.

Therefore, even if there is a circumstance that the operation in the production round Rpt cannot be performed (for example, even if the operation button 300 (see FIG. 1) is out of order), the ball is allowed to pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv. It is possible to play a game in a game mode in which the game can be played.

On the other hand, in this game method, there is a possibility that the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained in the post-production game round Rpa while maintaining the situation where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv cannot be obtained. By performing an appropriate operation in the production round Rpt, the appropriate number of entered balls in the post-production game round Rpa is notified.

By playing the game in accordance with the notification, the player can easily obtain the maximum prize ball that can be obtained in the post-production game round Rpa while maintaining the situation where the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv. it can.

As shown in FIG. 152, all the above-described attention effect, stop instruction, and determination display are executed in display example 1, and all are omitted in display example 2. The presence/absence of execution of the attention production, the stop instruction, and the discrimination display are controlled to be determined according to the jackpot type and the winning mode of the ball, which will be described later in detail.

The display contents of display example 1 (see FIG. 152) will be described. The display content of the display example 1 corresponds to the case where the shortage of discharge occurs immediately after the end of the start round Rpb. 153 and 154 are schematic diagrams showing, in a time series, changes in the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the start of the effect round Rpt to the start of the post-production game round Rpa in the display example 1.

In addition, in each display content, four round marks are displayed side by side below the round number display. Similar to the first control example, the filled circles are switched depending on the number of spheres stored in the storage passage 1231. That is, similarly to the first control example, when the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is less than 4, the circle at the left end is filled in and the spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 When the number is 4 or more and less than 7, the second circle from the left is filled, and when the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 is 7 or more and less than 10, the number is right. If the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is 10, the circle at the right end is filled.

In FIGS. 153 and 154, common display examples are illustrated up to the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side). That is, in the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), five enemies and a tank bombarding the enemy are shown in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)). The eyes (display example shown on the left side in the middle) illustrate the state in which the enemy cannot be seen due to smoke associated with the fire, and the third timing (display example shown on the lower left side) shows the timing effect (attention). The sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 for executing the operation effect in the effect, see FIG. 88(a) are illustrated.

The switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is executed at the timing when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is full. From the second frame, it is not possible (or impossible) to expect a ball to enter the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the display of the small area Ds3 on the guide display unit is “aiming at the right” (indicating continuation of launch). Display. Launch command) is switched to "Do not hit" (display that suggests launch stop. Stop command).

From the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), different display examples are shown in FIGS. 153 and 154, which will be described in order. In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side) of FIG. 153, a state where the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88A) is successful is shown, and the fifth frame (shown in the middle right side). In the display example), it is displayed that the remaining number of enemies is two, and after that, the state after the production round Rpt is finished and the post-production game round Rpa is started is the sixth frame (shown on the lower right side). Display example). In the display of the sixth frame, "insert two" is displayed in the guide display portion of the small area Ds3, thereby making a notification that explicitly indicates the number of balls entered.

As shown in FIG. 153, when the timing effect (operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88(a)) is successful, the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow channel 1231) should be allowed to enter the ball in the post-production game round Rpa. Since the display (discrimination display) indicating the number of balls is explicitly notified, the player can play the game without hesitation.

In the present control example, when a larger number of balls than the number explicitly notified is put into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), the player is disadvantageous (the specified number of pieces in the V winning round Rv (the book In the control example, it is controlled to receive (10 balls cannot enter the detection sensor 1240).

On the other hand, in the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side) of FIG. 154, the state in which the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88(a)) has failed is shown, and the fifth frame (the right center side). In the display example shown in (1), it is displayed that the smoke is still not clear and the number of remaining enemies is unknown, and then the production round Rpt ends and the state after the post-production game round Rpa is started is 6 frames. It is illustrated in the eye (display example shown on the lower right side). In the display of the sixth frame, "?? Insert" is displayed on the guide display portion of the small area Ds3, thereby making a notification indicating that the number of entered balls is unknown.

As shown in FIG. 154, if the timing effect (the operation effect in the attention effect, see FIG. 88(a)) fails, the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) should be allowed to enter the ball in the post-production game round Rpa. Since the display indicating the number of balls (discrimination display) is not explicitly notified and the number of balls to enter is unknown, the player wonders how many balls should be shot by the detection sensor 1240. You will play a game.

Here, if a larger number of balls than the number of balls notified when the timing effect (operation effect) is successful in the post-production game round Rpa is entered into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), the player Since it is controlled so as to be disadvantaged, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game in a game mode for causing a large amount of balls to enter the detection sensor 1240.

Further, as will be described later, since the number of pieces to be notified is 2 as a lower limit, if the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) in the post-production game round Rpa is suppressed to two, the player Can avoid suffering disadvantages. Therefore, as the number of entered balls that the player does not receive a disadvantage, the display of "up to two is OK" is the lower part of the third symbol display device 81 (the lower part of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a))). ) Is displayed.

FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the attention production operation difficulty level switching table and the discrimination display switching table. As shown in FIG. 155, in the present control example, the length of the attention effect and the difficulty level of the operation effect are changed depending on the entry timing of the Xth ball (timing at which the storage channel 1231 is full). Controlled by.

That is, when the Xth entry timing is before 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the effect round Rpt, the “long moving image” is selected as the effect of interest. In this long moving image, the display pointer 719 moves from end to end of the sub display area Ds4 over 10 seconds, so that the operation button 300 can be easily operated when the display pointer 719 is aligned with the bar display portion 717. Can be done (difficulty level is "easy").

If the Xth entry timing is 15 seconds after the start of the effect round Rpt and before 25 seconds have elapsed after the start of the effect round Rpt, “short moving image” is selected as the noticeable effect. In this short moving image, since the display pointer 719 moves from end to end of the sub display area Ds4 over 5 seconds, the difficulty level of operating the operation button 300 when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 is set. It can be increased (compared with difficulty "easy", the moving speed of the display pointer 719 is double. Difficulty "difficult").

Here, the moving mode of the display pointer 719 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may disappear at a predetermined position during movement and then suddenly reappear at another position, the display pointer may be hidden in a predetermined section, or the speed may be increased from the predetermined position during movement for a predetermined section. It may be moved or momentarily moved (sliding may be performed), or the direction may be changed once at a predetermined position during movement and then changed again at another position.

In any case, since the time from the start of the noticeable effect to the period in which the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display portion 717 is determined in advance, during the timing effect, the audio lamp control device 113 starts the noticeable effect. Is measured, and when the operation of the operation button 300 is detected at the timing when the time until the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 has elapsed, it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate. (See S4763 in FIG. 176).

If the Xth entry timing is 25 seconds after the start of the effect round Rpt and before 30 seconds have elapsed after the start, the "still image" is selected as the noticeable effect. In this still image, a large message "Press!" is displayed on the entire screen (not shown). Then, in the present control example, if the operation of the operation button 300 is detected at the same time when the still image is displayed, it is determined that the operation is successful.

That is, in order to succeed in the operation effect, it is required to match the ball entry timing to the detection sensor 1240 with the operation timing, while the display timing of the “still image” is set to the detection sensor 1240 due to control. Since it will be slightly later than the ball entry timing of, the timing at which the ball passes the detection sensor 1240 is confirmed, and the operation button 300 is operated with a slight delay instead of completely adjusting the operation timing to that timing, or It is required to operate the operation button 300 at the moment when it is confirmed that is executed (operation difficulty level “extremely difficult”).

As described above, the earlier the ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) for the Xth ball, the easier it is to control the success of the timing effect. It is possible to improve the motivation of the player for shortening the period until winning the prize.

As shown in the discrimination display switching table, when the timing effect is successful, the number explicit display (see the fifth and sixth frames in FIG. 153) is executed, while when the timing effect fails, the number unknown display (the fifth and sixth frames in FIG. 154) is displayed. (See eye) is executed.

Here, the entry timing of the X-th sphere is likely to be earlier as the number of spheres remaining in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the effect round Rpt is larger. In the present control example, the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the effect round Rpt is associated with the jackpot type and changes depending on the selection of the start round selection table Tb, so the jackpot type (see FIG. 160(b)). ) (That is, due to factors other than the sphere launching mode and the falling mode in the rendering round Rpt), the possibility that the Xth ball entry timing can be accelerated can be changed.

The start timing of the attention production changes depending on the player's ball firing mode during the round game R. Therefore, if the form of the noticeable effect is uniform, there is a possibility that the V winning round Rv may be ended in the middle of the noticeable effect depending on the game mode (the manner of shooting the ball or the manner of entering the detection sensor 1240). On the other hand, in the present control example, the attention effect to be executed is updated over time.

Thereby, in the present control example, regardless of the timing at which the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), the noticeable effect can be ended before the effect round Rpt is ended. Therefore, even if important information is displayed at the end of the noticeable effect, the effect round Rpt does not end before the display, so that the degree of freedom in designing the noticeable effect can be improved.

In this control example, the case where the timing effect of different difficulty is executed once depending on the timing at which the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited.

For example, the timing effect is executed a plurality of times from the start of the effect round Rpt until the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231), and the number of successes in the timing effect (success probability). ), the difficulty level of the timing effect executed after the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) may be changed. For example, the greater the number of successes (the higher the probability of success), the lower the difficulty of the timing effect executed after the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). Is also good.

In this case, if the X-th ball does not participate in the timing effect until the X-th ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) or fails, the timing effect with high importance (for example, in FIGS. 153 and 154). As the difficulty level of the 3rd and 4th frames increases and it becomes difficult to succeed, pay attention to the timing effect to the player even before the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to pay attention to the flow down state of the sphere inside and around the storage channel 1231. In this case, the player shoots the balls regardless of the number of balls inside the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the balls that do not completely enter the storage channel 1231 are discharged from the outlet 66, which causes a ball loss for the player. ..

That is, the player should play the timing effect repeatedly while being prepared for a certain amount of ball loss, and play the game so as to reduce the difficulty of the timing effect of high importance, or the storage channel so that the ball loss does not occur. By paying attention to the flow-down situation of the balls inside and around 1231, you can play or make a choice so as to be prepared to adjust the firing of the balls and increase the difficulty of timing production with high importance. Can be prevented from becoming slow.

In addition, by making the timing of the Xth ball entering the detection sensor 1240 earlier, the difficulty of the timing effect is lowered (control is performed so that the difficulty is determined by multiplying the conditions). Therefore, when the timing effect until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240 is being executed, it is possible to suppress the game mode in which the ball is stopped from being emitted.

Further, in this case, depending on the jackpot type, the case where the player is forced to make the above selection and the operation of timing effect and the timing of entering the storage flow channel 1231 are divided as in the present control example. This may be provided in the case where the player is not forced to make a selection (when it is sufficient to execute the game in order as informed). In addition, the jackpot type of the jackpot game being executed may be notified so that the player can know which one corresponds to it, or it may be notified so that it is difficult to understand.

It should be noted that various aspects are exemplified as the profit obtained by the player in the timing effect. For example, a profit in which a rare image (premier image) of a character that cannot be normally seen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be used. In this case, at the start of the effect round Rpt, a plurality of cloud-like figures are displayed so as to hide at least a part of the character, and the timing until the Xth ball enters the detection sensor 1240. The display may be switched so that the cloud-shaped figure disappears little by little and the character can be visually recognized each time the rendering is successful.

In this case, important information about the character (for example, by displaying the face, the character is displayed in the part that can be visually recognized when the X-th ball has succeeded in the timing effect after entering the detection sensor 1240). Information that shows whether it is an ordinary character or a special character that indicates a jackpot), and important information for future games (such as the game status to be executed and information on the number of payouts to the number of balls launched so far) By making the symbols drawn, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

In addition, for example, the display corresponding to the desired number of entered balls described in this control example (for example, the display of the sixth frame in FIG. 153) is correct with about 50% accuracy (accuracy of less than 100%). Alternatively, the display number may be selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent obstruction of the free game of the player, and the display effect of the third symbol display device 81 can be configured as a display (effect display) that has little effect on the number of payouts.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the method of setting the accuracy of the correct answer to less than 100%. For example, a plurality of numbers may be displayed in advance, and it may be unclear whether "+" or "-" is inserted between them (the four arithmetic operations are expected by the player), or a known sequence of numbers. It is also possible to hide the number of the predetermined digit (for example, the number of digits after the decimal point of the pi) and display it as "the number of hidden numbers", or to display the number only for a moment. You may let me.

Next, the display content of Display Example 2 (see FIG. 152) will be described with reference to FIG. 156. The display content of the display example 2 corresponds to the case where the shortage of discharge does not occur immediately after the end of the start round Rpb (global discharge). FIG. 156 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 in time series from the start of the effect round Rpt to the start of the post-production game round Rpa in the display example 2.

In FIG. 156, in the first frame (display example shown on the upper left), as in FIGS. 153 and 154, five enemies and their enemies are displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)). A bombarding tank is shown. In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), several enemies (two in FIG. 156) have fallen down due to the bombardment, and in the third frame (display example shown in the middle right), all The state in which the enemy has fallen is illustrated, and after that, the state after the production round Rpt is finished and the post-production game round Rpa is started is shown in the fourth frame (display example shown on the lower right side).

The display switching is performed based on the number of detection sensors 1240 detected. That is, the display is switched so that one enemy falls each time two balls are detected. That is, the display of the second frame is a state in which four balls have passed the detection sensors 1240 in the production round Rpt, and the display of the third frame is a state in which ten balls have passed the detection sensors 1240 in the production round Rpt. Corresponds to each.

In the display example shown in FIG. 156, the display of the small area Ds3 on the guide display unit is maintained at “aiming to the right” (display indicating continuous launching. launching instruction). Therefore, the player can proceed the jackpot game without hesitation while continuing the launch.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 159, switching of the display of the V winning round Rv will be described. The display of the V winning round Rv is switched to a different display depending on the jackpot type described later, but the display mode to be started is the same basic effect regardless of the jackpot type. That is, various factors that change depending on the type of jackpot (presence or absence of remaining balls in the storage channel 1231, round digestion time that changes accordingly, presence or absence of sphere discharge from the storage channel 1231 during round game R, etc.) are determined. The control for switching the display is executed.

FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 of the basic effect of the V winning round Rv in time series. The basic effect is a display mode that is started at the same time as the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the first frame of the basic effect (display example shown on the upper left), in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)), the treasure box hidden in the dent and five rocks (number 1 Note) and a tank that fires at the rock. The display of the first frame is maintained until 10 seconds elapse from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the second frame (display example shown on the left side of the center), a situation where rocks are crushed and a plurality of rocks (additional reference numeral 2) fall into the created space is illustrated. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 157, three rocks fall after this. The switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is executed at the timing when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), a situation is illustrated in which five dropped rocks (additional reference to number 2) are accumulated again to close the depression. The display of the third frame is maintained for 10 seconds after 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), a situation where rocks are crushed and a plurality of rocks (additional reference numeral 3) fall into the created space is illustrated. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 157, three rocks fall after this. The switching from the display of the third frame to the display of the fourth frame is executed at the timing when 20 seconds have passed from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the fifth frame (display example shown on the right side of the center), the situation is illustrated in which five rocks (additional reference numeral 3) that have fallen are accumulated again to close the depression. The display of the fifth frame is maintained for 10 seconds after the lapse of 20 seconds from the start of the V winning round Rv.

In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), the treasure box is enlarged, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in this control example, a ball passes through the specific area 4830 to shift to a high-probability state after the jackpot game is over). The word "sorry" is displayed to indicate that the profit was not obtained.

The switching from the display of the fifth frame to the display of the sixth frame is executed at a timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv, and the display is maintained during the interval period immediately after that. Then, in the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A) after the end of the interval period, the display for the ending time prepared in advance is switched.

As shown in FIG. 157, in the display example of this control example, the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)) is displayed in the second and third frames and in the fourth and fifth frames. It is common except for the numbers attached to rocks. As a result, the number of images required to display a moving image over the V winning round Rv can be reduced.

FIG. 158 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the V winning round Rv in time series.

In the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), a display similar to the basic effect described in the first frame of FIG. 157 is illustrated. That is, in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)), a treasure box hidden in a depression, five rocks (additional reference numeral 1) blocking the depression, and a tank bombarding the rock are illustrated.

In the second frame (display example shown on the left side in the middle), a state where rocks are crushed is illustrated. It should be noted that the rock does not fall into the created space, and the state in which the depression is opened is maintained. The switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame is performed by determining that a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). To be executed. That is, the display of the second frame is switched to the end timing of the V winning round Rv, and the display is maintained during the interval time immediately after.

Note that the basic effect described in FIG. 157 is continued until the display is switched to the second frame. It is not determined that the specified number (10 in this control example) of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) within the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) of the V winning round Rv. In the case of, the display is not switched to the display of the second frame, but is switched from the basic effect to the display of the ending time ED.

In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), the treasure box is enlarged and opened, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in this control example, the ball is passed through the specific area 4830 to increase the amount after the jackpot game is over). The letter "V" is displayed to indicate that the profit of shifting to the probability state has been obtained. For the purpose of matching the timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830, the display of the third frame is switched 1.0 seconds after the display of the second frame is switched.

Then, the display of the third frame is maintained until the end of the interval time, and when the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A) is entered, the display for the ending time prepared in advance is switched.

As described above, the display example shown in FIG. 158 can be explained as a display example in which the timing of switching to the display of the second frame is unknown, while the display of the third frame is certainly within the interval time.

FIG. 159 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the V winning round Rv in time series.

In the first frame (display example shown on the upper left side), a display similar to the basic effect described in the first frame of FIG. 157 is illustrated. That is, in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)), a treasure box hidden in a depression, five rocks (additional reference numeral 1) blocking the depression, and a tank bombarding the rock are illustrated.

In the second frame (display example shown on the left side of the center), a situation where rocks are crushed and a plurality of rocks (additional reference numeral 2) fall into the created space is illustrated. Although only two rocks are shown in FIG. 159, three rocks fall after this. When switching from the display of the first frame to the display of the second frame, the open/close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is in a closed state for a short time (in this control example, less than 0.2 seconds. Specifically, 0). (1 second) It is executed according to the switching timing.

Note that the basic effect described in FIG. 157 is continued until the display is switched to the second frame. Here, as will be described later, in this control example, the first timing for switching to the closed state for a short time is set to be before 10 seconds after the start of the V winning round Rv, and thus the second frame in FIG. 159. The switching timing to the display is set to be earlier than the switching timing in the basic effect (switching timing to the display of the second frame in FIG. 157). Therefore, display switching can be performed without a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, the timing at which the closed state is switched for a short time is closer to the timing at which the display is switched in the basic effect (for example, 10 seconds after the start of the V winning round Rv, 20 seconds after, etc.). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the displayed display is the display of the basic effect or the display example shown in FIG. 159. As a result, during the V winning round Rv, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (in the present control example, a profit that shifts to a high-probability state after the jackpot game is over by passing the ball through the specific area 4830). The game can be executed with the expectation that it may be.

In the third frame (display example shown on the lower left side), a situation is illustrated in which five dropped rocks (additional reference to number 2) are accumulated again to close the depression. The display of the third frame is maintained until the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is switched to the closed state next time. When the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state for a short time while the display of the third frame is continued, the display is switched to the second frame (the number attached to the rock increases by 1) again. That is, every time the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched to the closed state for a short time, the continuous display of the second frame display and the third frame display is repeatedly switched.

In the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), the character "Moshiya" is displayed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)). In FIG. 159, the display of the fourth frame is switched from the display of the first frame or the third frame, and is controlled not to be switched from the display of the second frame.

The switching to the display of the fourth frame is a timing at which the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is switched to the closed state for a long time (0.2 seconds or more in this control example, specifically 0.2 seconds). It is executed according to.

In the fifth frame (display example shown on the right side in the middle), a state in which rocks are crushed is illustrated, as in the second frame in FIG. 158. It should be noted that the rock does not fall into the created space, and the state in which the depression is opened is maintained. In addition, the letter "V" flying toward the treasure box is displayed. The letter "V" is displayed so as to fly at a speed of reaching the treasure box one second after the timing of switching to the fourth frame (timing of the ball passing through the specific area 4830).

In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), the treasure box is enlarged and opened, and the player makes a predetermined profit (in this control example, the ball is passed through the specific area 4830 to increase the high hit after the jackpot game is over). The letter "V" is displayed to indicate that the profit of shifting to the probability state has been obtained. In the display of the fifth frame, after the character "V" reaches the treasure box, the display continuously shifts to the sixth frame.

Then, the display of the sixth frame is maintained until the end of the interval time, and when the ending time ED (see FIG. 30A) is entered, the display for the ending time prepared in advance is switched.

As described above, in the display example shown in FIG. 159, the timing of switching to the display of the second frame or the display of the fourth frame is defined by the operation pattern, and the timing at which the treasure box is opened is also the winning mode of the V winning round Rv. It is set in advance regardless of.

This display is particularly effective in the jackpot type in which the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 is determined regardless of the winning mode of the V winning round Rv (that is, is determined by the winning mode before that), which will be described later. Becomes That is, since the timing at which the ball passes through the specific area 4830 and the timing at which the treasure box is opened can be matched, it is possible to improve the effect of production.

In the display examples described in FIGS. 157 to 159, in the case of the display example in which the basic effect as shown in FIG. 157 is continuously displayed, the game is compared to the display examples shown in FIGS. 158 and 159. The profit that the person can obtain is low. In other words, in the V winning round game Rv, the player continues the game while expecting the display to be switched from the basic effect.

On the other hand, in common between FIGS. 157 to 159, since the basic effect is displayed until the display is switched, even if the display is switched in any of the display examples of FIGS. 157 to 159, the player , It can be expected that the display can be switched from the basic effect. Therefore, as a result, even if the V winning round Rv ends after a stipulated time (30 seconds in this control example) has elapsed (it takes a relatively long time to digest the round game R), the player plays the game. You can prevent getting tired of.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. 160( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first type selection table 202b3, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3, At least an opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is provided.

First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b3. The first hit type selection table 202b3 is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is stipulated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b3, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected. In FIG. 160(b), the contents of the post-rendering game round selection table Ta, the start round selection table Tb, and the V winning round Rv whose contents are switched according to the selected jackpot type are also shown.

In this control example, by providing a variation in the combination of the post-production game round selection table Ta, the start round selection table Tb, and the V winning round Rv, the player can identify the jackpot type in the middle of the jackpot game and expect to win. We are trying to prevent the profit that can be obtained from being grasped in advance.

That is, in the distribution of the special symbol 1, the first difference that can be grasped by the player is the interval time (difference according to the start round selection table Tb) between the effect round Rpt and the after effect game round Rpa. In this control example, whether the first discharge mode Tb1 or the second discharge mode Tb2 is selected as the interval time, the distribution of the post-production game round selection table Ta and the V winning round Rv is the same for each of them. The first hit type selection table 202b3 is configured to occur (with the same probability).

Similarly, even if the player grasps the difference in the interval time (post-production gaming round selection table Ta) immediately before the V winning round Rv, whether the subsequent V winning round Rv is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. Since there is no change in the distribution probability of, the player can be allowed to execute the game while predicting the jackpot type until the V winning round Rv is being executed. As a result, the player can be attracted to the game and the player's concentration can be improved, as compared with the gaming machine in which the jackpot type can be grasped quickly.

As shown in FIG. 160(b), with respect to the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "0 to 9" in association with "big hit Ua" ( See 202b31 in FIG. 160(b)). The "big hit Ua" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit Ua" is 10, so "big hit Ua" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

This "big hit Ua" has 6 rounds set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 hour reductions (ST 80 times) after the big hit ends. When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, the specified number within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv (this control example Then, it is required to insert 10 balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the after-production first discharge mode Ta1 (0. 4 seconds), after the production second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds), when the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres (when 10 spheres are stored), all spheres are discharged. It is structured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, since the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, in the jackpot game of "big hit Ua", the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 should be adjusted. In many cases, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830 without being able to move.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "10 to 24", "big hit Ub" is associated and defined (see 202b32 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This "big hit Ub" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Ub" is 15, so "big hit Ub" is determined when the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit Ub", and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot ends and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv has an opening pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161(a)) that is closed for a long time during the round game R), the specified number (book) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv. In the control example, 10 balls are inserted into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, in the form of entering the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv. Regardless, the ball is passed through the specific region 4830 by discharging the sphere (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) from the storage channel 1231 when the round game R is long closed. be able to. Therefore, even if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not decided whether or not the sphere can be passed through the specific region 4830.

Further, for the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "25 to 34", "big hit Va" is associated and defined (see 202b33 in FIG. 160(b)). ). The “big hit Va” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Va" is 10, so "big hit Va" is determined when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit Va", and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, after the big hit, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 shortening times (ST80 times), but the specific area When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that only closes briefly during the round game R (operation scenario 34 (see FIG. 161(a))), in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, V In the winning round Rv, it is required to enter a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) within the opening period Tv and to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the after-production first discharge mode Ta1 (0. 4 seconds), after the production second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds), when the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres (when 10 spheres are stored), all spheres are discharged. It is structured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, the ball will remain in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, so in the jackpot game of "big hit Va", the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 should be adjusted. In many cases, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830 without being able to move.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "35 to 49", "big hit Vb" is associated and defined (see 202b34 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This "big hit Vb" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit Vb" is 15, so "big hit Vb" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this “big hit Vb”, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, after the big hit ends, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 shortening of time (ST 80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv has an opening pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161(a)) that is closed for a long time during the round game R), the specified number (book) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv. In the control example, 10 balls are inserted into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, in the form of entering the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv. Regardless, the ball is passed through the specific region 4830 by discharging the sphere (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) from the storage channel 1231 when the round game R is long closed. be able to. Therefore, even if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not decided whether or not the sphere can be passed through the specific region 4830.

Further, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 59" in association with "big hit Wa" (see 202b35 in FIG. 160(b)). ). This "big hit Wa" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit Wa” is 10, so the “big hit Wa” is determined when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

This “big hit Wa” has 6 rounds set as the number of rounds, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, it shifts to a high probability state of 80 shortening of time (ST80 times) after the big hit ends, but the specific area When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, the specified number within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv (this control example Then, it is required to insert 10 balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the after-production first discharge mode Ta1 (0. 4 seconds), after the production second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds), when the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres (when 10 spheres are stored), all spheres are discharged. It is structured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, the ball will remain in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, so in the jackpot game of "big hit Wa", the number of balls entered into the storage channel 1231 should be adjusted. In many cases, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830 without being able to move.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 74", "big hit Wb" is associated and defined (see 202b36 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This “big hit Wb” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Wb" is 15, so "big hit Wb" is determined when the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit Wb", and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot ends and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv has an opening pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161(a)) that is closed for a long time during the round game R), the specified number (book) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv. In the control example, 10 balls are inserted into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, in the form of entering the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv. Regardless, the ball is passed through the specific region 4830 by discharging the sphere (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) from the storage channel 1231 when the round game R is long closed. be able to. Therefore, even if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not decided whether or not the sphere can be passed through the specific region 4830.

In addition, for the special symbol 1, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "75 to 84" in association with "big hit Ya" (see 202b37 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This "big hit Ya" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit Ya" is 10, so "big hit Ya" is determined when the big prize is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol 1. The ratio is 10% (10/100).

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds in this “big hit Ya”, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot is moved to a high-probability state of 80 reductions in time (ST80 times) after the end of the big hit. When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that only closes briefly during the round game R (operation scenario 34 (see FIG. 161(a))), in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, V In the winning round Rv, it is required to enter a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) within the opening period Tv and to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

Here, the first discharge mode Tb1 (1.2 seconds), the second discharge mode Tb2 (1.8 seconds), and the after-production first discharge mode Ta1 (0. 4 seconds), after the production second discharge mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds), when the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres (when 10 spheres are stored), all spheres are discharged. It is structured as an impossible period. Therefore, basically, the ball will remain in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, so in the jackpot game of "big hit Ya", the number of balls entered into the storage channel 1231 should be adjusted. In many cases, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830 without being able to move.

Further, with respect to the special symbol 1, in the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “85 to 99”, “big hit Yb” is associated and defined (see 202b38 of FIG. 160(b)). ). This “big hit Yb” is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit Yb" is 15, so "big hit Yb" is determined when the special symbol 1 lottery results in a big hit. The ratio is 15% (15/100).

6 rounds are set as the number of rounds for this “big hit Yb”, and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot ends and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv has an opening pattern (operation scenario 33 (see FIG. 161(a)) that is closed for a long time during the round game R), the specified number (book) within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv. In the control example, 10 balls are inserted into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) and the round game R is not ended (for example, in the form of entering the detection sensor 1240 in the V winning round Rv. Regardless, the ball is passed through the specific region 4830 by discharging the sphere (for example, the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the previous round game R) from the storage channel 1231 when the round game R is long closed. be able to. Therefore, even if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is not decided whether or not the sphere can be passed through the specific region 4830.

On the other hand, with respect to the second special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in a range (entire range) of "0 to 99" in association with "big hit q". This "big hit q" is a big hit with 6 rounds. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit q” is 100, so when the special prize 2 is a big hit, the “big hit q” is determined. The ratio is 100%.

Six rounds are set as the number of rounds for this "big hit q", and when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 in the V winning round Rv, the jackpot ends and the state shifts to a high probability state of 80 times (ST80 times). When the ball does not pass 4830, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Since the V winning round Rv is an opening pattern that does not close during the round game R, in order to pass the ball to the specific area 4830, the specified number within the opening period Tv in the V winning round Rv (this control example Then, it is required to insert 10 balls into the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) to end the round game R. Therefore, if the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game Rv, it is determined that the sphere cannot be passed through the specific area 4830.

In addition, since the discharge mode in the immediately preceding interval time is the post-production third discharge mode Ta3, the V winning round does not depend on the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 (even if the tank is full). Rv can be started in a state where no sphere is stored in the storage channel 1231.

In other words, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 have the same number of rounds in the jackpot game, but in the jackpot game of the special symbol 2, regardless of the number of entered balls in the post-production game round Rpa immediately before the V winning round Rv. Since the ball can be passed to the specific area 4830, the player can proceed with the jackpot game without stopping the firing of the ball (without adjusting the number of balls entered into the storage flow channel 1231). .. Therefore, compared to the big hit of the special symbol 1, the big hit of the special symbol 2 can proceed the big hit game smoothly.

In this way, in the present control example, in the case where the special symbol 1 is selected in the lottery, the special symbol 2 is selected in the lottery, which is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the game can be smoothly advanced. Therefore, once the continuous game mode (high probability state of special symbol, and time saving state of normal symbol) is set, the special symbol 2 is drawn by entering the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. And the jackpot game is easily repeated, and the digestion speed of the jackpot game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game for the purpose of shifting to the extended game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the detailed contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 will be described with reference to FIG. 161(a). FIG. 161(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3. The opening/closing board operation scenario storage area 202e3 is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening/closing board 1300 (see FIG. 6) are stored for each scenario type, and is stored in the opening/closing board operation scenario storage area 202e3. The opening/closing plate 1300 is operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information that is provided.

Specifically, in the open/close plate operation scenario storage area 202e3, operation scenarios 31 to 34 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 31 is an operation scenario for which the open/close plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) is set to “open (open state)” as the scenario content, and which has a maximum duration of 30 seconds. In the operation scenario 31, even if 30 seconds have not elapsed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number (10 in this example) of spheres, and the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends. It is controlled to return to the state (state in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed).

The operation scenario 32 is an operation scenario of 10 seconds at maximum, in which “open (open state)” is set in the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) as the scenario content. In the operation scenario 32, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number of balls (10 in the present control example) even before 10 seconds have elapsed, and thus the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends, and Controlled to return to the state.

The operation scenario 33 includes “open (open state) 9.0 seconds→closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds→open (open state) 5.0 seconds on the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6) as the scenario content. → Closed (closed state, long closed) 0.2 seconds → Opened (open state) 4.0 seconds → Closed (closed state, long closed) 0.2 seconds → Later open (open state) 4.0 seconds → Closed (Closed state, long closed) 0.2 seconds is set as a loop”, which is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds.

In the operation scenario 33, even if 30 seconds have not elapsed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number (10 in this example) of spheres, and thus the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends and the initial stage is completed. Controlled to return to the state.

In the operation scenario 33, unlike the operation scenarios 31 and 32 described above, the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened (open state) and then closed (closed state, long closed state), so that the storage channel The balls remaining in 1231 can be discharged. Therefore, it is possible to allow the sphere to pass through the specific region 4830, and it is possible to newly enter the sphere into the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow channel 1231) by eliminating the fullness of the storage flow channel 1231.

That is, the round game R is started from the state that the ball remains in the storage flow path 1231, the storage flow path 1231 is full, and in the situation where the round game R continues, the remaining time of the round game R is wasted. In order to suppress the sphere, it is desirable to stop the firing of the sphere. On the other hand, this playability gives the player some time to spare, which may reduce the player's concentration and reduce the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the operation scenario 33, even if the storage channel 1231 is full, one ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 each time the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (closed state, long closed). Therefore, it becomes possible to newly enter the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231). In this case, it is preferable to restart the launch of an appropriate number of balls from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls to be paid out and the rapid digestion of the round game R. That is, according to this control example, even after the storage channel 1231 is full, the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed (closed state, long closed) so that the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) enters. Since the ball can be restarted, it is possible to maintain a high attention level for the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 and a high concentration level for the ball launch.

As described above, the closing of the opening/closing plate 1300 is concerned with the player's profit in two points, that is, the possibility of passing the ball to the specific region 4830 and the new ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (the storage flow channel 1231). Therefore, the player's attention to the closing (movement) of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be improved.

The operation scenario 34 is as follows: “Open (open state) 9.0 seconds→closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds→open (open state) 5.1 seconds on the opening/closing plate 1300 (see FIG. 6). → Closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds → Opened (opened state) 4.1 seconds → Closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds → After that open (open state) 4.1 seconds → closed (Closed state, short closed) 0.1 seconds is set as a loop”, which is an operation scenario for a maximum of 30 seconds.

In the operation scenario 34, even if 30 seconds have not passed, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number (10 in this example) of spheres, and the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 1300 ends. Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 34, unlike the above-described operation scenario 33, the closing after the opening/closing plate 1300 is opened (opened state) is configured only by closing (closed state, short closed state). Therefore, like the operation scenario 33, the opening/closing plate 1300 operates from the open state (open state), but the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are not discharged. Therefore, the sphere cannot be passed through the specific region 4830 at the timing of closing (closed state, short closing) of the opening/closing plate 1300, and the storage channel 1231 cannot be completely filled.

That is, in the operation scenario 34, while maintaining the effect of the operation scenario 33 of paying attention to the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is closed, the profit obtained by the player does not change. It can be maintained (if the storage channel 1231 is full, it remains full even after the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300, and the sphere does not pass through the specific region 4830).

The closing timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 is common to the operation scenario 33 and the operation scenario 34, and the difference in the operation length is 0.1 seconds. Therefore, the opening/closing plate 1300 may be in either the operation scenario 33 or the operation scenario 34 pattern. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the player is operating.

Therefore, when the player restarts the ball firing in accordance with the closing of the opening/closing plate 1300, if the player can obtain the additional profit as expected (in the case of the operation scenario 33), most of the fired balls become the prize balls. The case of not being connected (case of operation scenario 34) can be configured.

In this way, the operation scenarios are divided and stored based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, so that the profit that the operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 currently being executed gives to the player is controlled. 110 can be easily identified.

FIG. 161(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3. The opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is provided with information as to which jackpot type and which round game R of which round each predetermined scenario type corresponds to.

When executing the operation control of the opening/closing plate 1300, the MPU of the main control unit 110 reads information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 from the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 and opens/closes it. The plate 1300 is movable.

The opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f3 is configured such that a corresponding operation scenario can be set based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening/closing plate 1300 is movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

<Main controller flow>
Next, details of the RAM 203 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 162, the RAM 203 has the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, the special control example (see FIG. 101) described above. Symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding sphere number counter 203f, probability variation counter 203g, time saving middle counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, action counter 203j, exit flag 203k, remaining ball Timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, remaining ball counter 203p, closing flag 203q, count start flag 203qa, closing counter 203r, V flag 203s, V winning effective counter 203t, notification counter 203u, winning number counter 203w, discharging number counter 203x. In addition to the other memory area 203z, it has at least an unreached flag 203qb and a post-winning counter 203wa.

The unreachable flag 203qb is a flag for determining whether or not a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage flow channel 1231, and the timing at which the detection sensor 1240 detects that the sphere has entered the sphere and the storage flow channel 1231 has a sphere. It is switched on and off depending on the relationship with the time required to flow down. When the unreached flag 203qb is on, a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231, and when the unreached flag 203qb is off, a sphere is not arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

The post-winning counter 203wa is a counter that measures the time since the last ball hitting the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) in a predetermined round (V winning round Rv in this control example). That is, it is set to be reset every time a ball entering the detection sensor 1240 (storage channel 1231) is detected.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 163(a), the ROM 222 has at least the variation pattern selection table 222a described above in the first control example and the opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b3.

The opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b3 is provided to allow the voice lamp control device 113 side to also grasp the operation status of the opening/closing plate 1300 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the open/close plate operation scenario storage area 202e3 and the open/close plate operation scenario table 202f3 is stored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 163(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 163(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 in this control example. In the RAM 223, the command storage area 223a, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, and the normal symbol holding ball number, similar to those described above in the first control example. Counter 223d, fluctuation start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag. 223m, a storage counter 223n, an operation flag 223p, an effect temporary storage area 223r, a first operation effect flag 223wa, a second operation effect flag 223wb, a first input flag 223wc, a second input flag 223wd, At least an effect execution flag 223x, a pressed period information storage area 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided, and in addition, an attention effect timer 223ga, an effect switching flag 223gb, a V winning round timer 223gc, and a skip. At least a flag 223gd, an unreached effect flag 223qb, a first effect start flag 223ya, a second effect start flag 223yb, a third effect start flag 223yc, and a fourth effect start flag 223yd are provided.

The attention effect timer 223ga is a timer for measuring the elapsed time of a predetermined round (in this control example, the effect round Rpt), and is used for setting the display effect to be executed.

The effect switching flag 223gb is a flag for preventing a defect that is updated to another effect after the display effect accompanied by the operation effect, which is executed in a predetermined round (in this control example, the effect round Rpt), is set. Is. If the effect switching flag 223gb is on, it means that the display effect to be executed has been decided, and if the effect switching flag 223gb is off, it means that the display effect to be executed has not been decided.

The V winning round timer 223gc is a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the V winning round Rv.

The skip flag 223gd is a flag for preventing the display from being updated by mistake after the display is updated.

The unreached effect flag 223qb is a flag which is on/off switched and controlled in conjunction with the on/off switching of the unreached flag 203qb of the RAM 203. Therefore, when the unreached effect flag 223qb is on, the sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. When the unreached flag 223qb is off, the sphere is not arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. ..

The first effect start flag 223ya to the fourth effect start flag 223yd are flags which are on/off switched and controlled in association with the progress of the jackpot game.

The first effect start flag 223ya is a flag that can be switched depending on the progress status of the big hit game, and if it is on, before the end of the start round Rpb (the third round in the present control example) from the start of the big hit game (effect round Rpt). Before the start), and if it is off, it means after the end of the start round Rpb (after the start of the effect round Rpt).

The second effect start flag 223yb is a flag that can be switched depending on the progress status of the jackpot game, and if it is on, from after the end of the start round Rpb (the third round in this control example) (after the start of the effect round Rpt). Shows that it is before the end of the effect round Rpt (the fourth round in the present control example) (before the start of the post-production game round Rv), and if it is off, before the end of the start round Rpb (before the start of the effect round Rpt). ) Or after the end of the production round Rpt (after the start of the post-production game round Rpa).

The third effect start flag 223yc is a flag that can be switched depending on the progress status of the jackpot game, and if it is on, after the end of the effect round Rpt (the fourth round in this control example) (after the start of the after effect game round Rpa). ) Indicates that it is before the end of the post-production game round Rpa (in the present control example, the fifth round) (before the start of the V winning round Rv), and if it is off, before the end of the production round Rpt (post-production game). It indicates that it is before the start of the round Rpa) or after the end of the after-game gaming round Rpa (after the start of the V winning round Rv).

The fourth effect start flag 223yd is a flag that can be switched depending on the progress status of the jackpot game, and if it is turned on, after the end of the after effect game round Rpa (fifth round in this control example) (start of the V winning round Rv). It shows that it is before the end of the V winning round Rv (in the present control example, the sixth round) (before the start of the ending time), and if it is OFF, before the end of the post-production game round Rpa (V winning round). It indicates that it is before the start of Rv) or after the end of the V winning round Rv (after the start of the ending time).

<Flow of main controller>
Next, with reference to FIG. 164, main processing in the fourth control example executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described in the first control example will be described. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing a main process in the fourth control example executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup process. In this control example, the jackpot control process S1004 is changed to S4004, the V winning process S1009 is changed to S4009, and the main control process of the first control example (FIG. 117), and the storage control process. It is common except that S1008 is deleted. Therefore, the same parts as those in the main process (see FIG. 117) in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S4004) in this control example. This jackpot control processing (S4004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 164), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed or the first identification is performed. This is processing for opening or closing the winning opening (large opening) 1000a or opening or closing the specific area 4830.

In the jackpot control process (S4004) of this control example, the notification process (S1111) is omitted from the jackpot control process (S1004) of the first control example (the control of the voice lamp controller 113 whose role will be described later). It is common to the jackpot control process (S1004), except that the winning process (S1112) is changed to the winning process (S4112). Therefore, the same parts as those in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the winning process (S4112) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the winning process (S4112) in the fourth control example. This winning process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 164) similarly to the winning process (FIG. 123) in the first control example, and the first specific winning opening opened during the round game R ( This is a process for closing the (large opening) 1000a and setting a condition value (setting value and initial value) for determining whether or not the specific area 4830 has normally passed after the closing.

The winning process (S4112) in the fourth control example is performed after the setting value selection setting process (S4290) is executed after the process of S1278 is executed with respect to the winning process (S1112) in the first control example. The only difference is that the setting value is set (S4297), and the other points are the same. Therefore, the setting value selection setting process (S4290) will be described with reference to FIG. 167.

FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the contents of the setting value selection setting process (S4290). In the set value selection setting process (S4290), a process of selecting a range of set values to be set in the V winning effectiveness counter 203t according to the situation is executed.

First, the outline of the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example will be described. The setting value selection setting process (S4290) is a process provided to cope with the difference from the first control example.

First, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example in which the discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 is limited at the start of the round game R, from the storage channel 1231 in the middle of the V winning round Rv. Since the discharge of the sphere occurs at a predetermined interval, there is a possibility that the sphere may be arranged in a separated state inside the storage channel 1231 at the end of the round game R. In other words, the discharge of the sphere from the storage flow channel 1231 is started before the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 collides with the sphere staying on the downstream side of the storage flow channel 1231 (to form a complete continuous ball). May be.

Further, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, when the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the V winning round Rv, regardless of the number stored in the storage channel 1231, A predetermined number of balls (one in this control example) are discharged.

That is, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, it is necessary to determine the set value in consideration of the arrangement of the spheres inside the storage flow channel 1231 and the timing at which the closing is performed. The process of selecting a value is the set value selection setting process (S4290).

Next, details of the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example will be described. In the setting value selection setting process (S4290) in the fourth control example, in the process of S4290, it is determined whether the round game R is closed at the end (S4291). When it is not the closing at the end of the round game R (S4291: No), it is judged from the operation scenario currently being executed whether the closing is a long closing (closing for 0.2 seconds) (S4922).

In the processing of S4292, when it is determined that the closed state is not the long closed state (S4292: No), the closed state is a short closed state (closed for 0.1 second), so that the sphere is not discharged from the storage flow channel 1231. Therefore, this process is terminated and the process returns to the winning process S4112.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4292, when it is determined that the closed state is long (S4292: Yes), it is determined whether or not the sphere stays at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It is determined whether 2.0 seconds have passed since the sphere passed through the detection sensor 1240 (S4293).

This determination is made, for example, by providing a plurality of counters (for example, 10 counters) that start counting by detecting a ball entering the detection sensor 1240 like the post-winning counter 203wa. Based on the entry into the ball, either counter is controlled to start timing (that is, since the timing is started sequentially, the value to be counted will be different for all counters), and the timing has been started. After that, it is controlled so that the counter is reset every time 10 balls enter the detection sensor 1240, which is common to each counter. Under this assumption, the value of the counter corresponding to the most downstream sphere among the spheres remaining inside the storage channel 1231 which is grasped from the detection timing of the detection sensor 1240 and the discharge mode from the storage channel 1231 based on the operation scenario. It is executed by checking.

In the process of S4293, when it is determined that 2.0 seconds or more has elapsed (S4293: No), the lower limit of the numerical range described in the first control example is set as the number of stored balls=1 and the set value range is selected. To do. That is, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2×1) seconds or more (S4294), and the process proceeds to S4299. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S4293, when it is determined that 2.0 seconds have not elapsed (S4293: Yes), the unreached flag 203qb is set to ON (S4295), this processing is ended, and the winning processing S4112 is performed. Return.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4291, when it is determined that the game is closed at the end of the round game R (S4291: Yes), the value of the post-winning counter 203wa is a predetermined determination formula (2-(stored number)×0.2. It is determined whether it is smaller than () (S4296).

The process of S4296 is a process for determining whether the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 constitutes a continuous sphere with all the spheres, or whether there is a part separated from the sphere.

In the process of S4296, if it is determined that the value of the post-prize counter 203wa is not smaller than the predetermined determination formula (2-(the number of stored)×0.2) (S4296: No), the inside of the storage channel 1231 Since it indicates that all the spheres form a continuous ball, the range of the set value is selected within the numerical range described in the first control example. That is, the range of the set value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-0.2×the number of stored balls) seconds or more (S4297), and the process proceeds to S4299. Transition.

On the other hand, in the process of S4296, when it is determined that the value of the post-prize winning counter 203wa is smaller than the predetermined determination formula (2-(the number of stored)×0.2) (S4296: Yes), the storage channel It is inappropriate to select the set value range from the stored number because there is a portion (distance) between the balls inside 1231. Therefore, the lower limit of the set value is set as the time at which the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 last reaches the specific area 4830. That is, the range of the setting value of the V winning effective counter 203t is selected within a numerical range corresponding to 3.0 seconds or less and (3-(3-value after the winning counter 203wa)=value after the winning counter 203wa) or more. Then, (S4298), the process proceeds to S4299.

In addition, the part of (3-value after the winning counter 203wa) in the above equation is the period (2.0 seconds in this control example) in which the sphere passes through the storage channel 1231 and the communication path 4810 from the discharge port 1150. The current position of the ball that has passed the detection sensor 1240 last is deducted from the post-prize counter 203wa from "3" which is the sum of the period (1.0 second in this control example) that the ball passes, and the ball passes the communication path 4810. This is a portion in which the period until the specific area 4830 is passed through is calculated.

In the process of S4299, the range of the set value of the V winning effectiveness counter 203t selected in any of S4294, S4297, or S4298 is set. After that, this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the winning processing S4112.

It returns to FIG. 164 and demonstrates. In this control example, the V winning process (S4009) is changed from the first control example. This will be described with reference to FIG. 168.

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example. This V winning process (S4009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 164) like the V winning process (FIG. 129) in the first control example, and the first specific winning opening 1000a is closed. This is a process for performing control to monitor the flow of the ball after it has fallen.

The V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example is a portion after the count start flag 203qa is determined to be OFF in the process of S1501 in contrast to the V winning process (S1009) in the first control example. Only the difference (S1501: No) and the others are the same, and therefore, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Only different parts will be described.

First, the outline of the changes in the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example from the first control example will be described. Firstly, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, the opening/closing plate 1300 is controlled so that it can be closed (short closed) in a mode in which discharge of the spheres from the storage flow channel 1231 does not occur. We are dealing with. Secondly, in the fourth control example, unlike the first control example, there is a case where the ball can be discharged from the storage channel 1231 in the middle of the V winning round Rv, but the ball is discharged at this time. Whether or not it depends on the arrangement of the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 (whether or not the sphere is arranged at the lower end) is dealt with. Thirdly, there are cases where the opening/closing plate 1300 closes in the middle of the V winning round Rv and cases where the opening/closing plate 1300 closes at the end of the V winning round Rv. Therefore, different predetermined values should be set in the closing counter 203r. It corresponds to.

Next, details of the V winning process (S4009) in the fourth control example will be described. In the V winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501). If it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is on (S1501: Yes), the subsequent processing is the same as in the first control example, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the count start flag 203qa is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the closing flag 203q is on (S1502).

In the process of S1502, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), the process proceeds to S4526.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing flag 203q is on (S1502: Yes), it is determined whether the current closing is closing (short closing) that does not discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 (S4521).

When it is determined in the processing of S4521 that the closing is the closing (short closing) in which the sphere is not discharged from the storage flow path 1231 (S4521: Yes), the closing flag 203q is set to OFF (S4522), and the processing of S4526. Move to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4521, the closing is not the closing (short closing) that does not discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 (that is, the closing is the closing that discharges the sphere (long closing or closing at the end of round game R)). ) Is determined (S4521: No), it is determined whether the closing is a closing (long closing) in the middle of the V winning round Rv (S4523).

In the processing of S4523, when it is determined that the closing is the closing (long closing) in the middle of the V winning round Rv (S4523: Yes), it is determined whether the unreached flag 203qb is ON (S4524).

In the process of S4524, when it is determined that the unreached flag 203qb is ON, it indicates that the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231. The unreached flag 203qb is set to OFF (S4525), and the closing flag is set. 203q is set to OFF (S4522), and the process proceeds to S4526.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4523, when it is determined that the closing is the closing at the end of the V winning round Rv (S4523: No), and in the processing of S4524, the unreached flag 203qb is not on (that is, off). When it is determined that there is (S4524: No), the count start flag 203qa is set to ON (S4528), a different numerical value is selected from the closing contents, and the predetermined value of the closing counter 203r is set (S4529). finish.

In the process of S4529, a numerical value according to the closing time is selected. That is, 0.1 seconds is selected when the closing is short, 0.2 seconds is selected when the closing is long, and the interval time immediately after is selected when closing at the end of the round game R. In the present control example, if normal, the process of S4529 is not executed at the time of short closing, but if the process of S4529 is executed due to some trouble (such as occurrence of noise), the above process is performed. A numerical value is selected for the closing counter 203r.

In the process of S4526, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4526). Since S4526 is a process executed when the ball is not discharged from the storage channel 1231, the ball does not pass through the specific area 4830 in the normal game. Therefore, in the processing of S4526, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4526: Yes), it is expected that the sphere has been illegally passed through the specific area 4830, so an error command is set (S4527). , This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 in the processing of S4526 (S4526: No), this processing is ended as it is.

Note that the control after the error command is set is the same as the content described in the first control example (the processing of S1515 in the above), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

<Control of voice lamp controller>
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, in the present control example, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the main process of this control example, the button input monitoring/effect process (S2107) is omitted from the main process of the first control example, and the command determination process (S4111). Is mainly different from the storage state monitoring process S2113 after the production switching process S4701 is added. Therefore, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals as in the first control example. Will be omitted and only different parts will be described.

Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the command determination processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination process (S4111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 169) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

The command determination process (S4111) is different from the command determination process (S2111) in the first control example only in that the hit related process (S2221) is changed to the hit related process 2 (S4221). It is the same.

Also, FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the hit related process 2 (S4221). In the hit related process 2 (S4221), the point that the effect start flag setting process (S4301) is executed after the round number command is received, with respect to the hit related process (S2221) in the first control example, The big hit medium effect process (S2505) that is transferred after the reception is changed to the process of S4505 (the process of setting the display round number command corresponding to the received round number), and after receiving the big hit ending command. The only difference is that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to OFF (S4509), and the others are the same. Therefore, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals as in the first control example, and the description thereof is omitted.

Every time the round number command is received in the process of S2503, the effect start flag setting process (S4301) is executed, the display round number command is set in the process of S4505, and the command output process (S2102, see FIG. 169) Is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this output, the display control device 114 can grasp the number of rounds to be executed next.

The effect start flag setting processing (S4301) will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the effect start flag setting process (S4301) in the fourth control example. This effect start flag setting process (S4301) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 169), and is a process for setting a flag for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents of the currently executed round game R. Is.

In the effect start flag setting process (S4301) in the fourth control example, it is determined whether the started round is round 1 in the process of S4301 (S4302).

If it is determined that the started round is Round 1 (S4302: Yes), the first effect start flag 223ya is set to ON (S4303), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the started round is not round 1 (S4302: No), it is determined whether the started round is the effect round Rpt (round 4 in this control example) (S4304).

In the process of S4304, when it is determined that the started round is the effect round Rpt (S4304: Yes), the first effect start flag 223ya is set to OFF (S4305), and the second effect start flag 223yb is set to ON. (S4306), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the started round is not the effect round Rpt (S4304: No), it is determined whether the started round is the post-production game round Rpa (round 5 in this control example). (S4307).

In the processing of S4307, when it is determined that the started round is the post-production game round Rpa (S4307: Yes), the second production start flag 223yb is set to OFF (S4308), and the third production start flag 223yc is turned on. The setting is made (S4309), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the started round is not the post-production game round Rpa (S4307: No), it is determined whether the started round is the V winning round Rv (round 6 in this control example). Yes (S4310).

In the process of S4310, when it is determined that the started round is the V winning round Rv (S4310: Yes), the third effect start flag 223yc is set to OFF (S4311), and the fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to ON. Then (S4312), the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4310, when it is determined that the started round is not the V winning round Rv (S4310: No), this processing is ended as it is. The fourth effect start flag 223yd is set to OFF in the process of S4509 after receiving the jackpot ending command (S2508). As described above, in this control example, the currently executed round is configured to be discriminable by the states of the first effect start flag 223ya to the fourth effect start flag 223yd.

Next, the effect switching process (S4701) will be described with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the effect switching process (S4701). This effect switching process (S4701) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 169) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing an effect that changes depending on the progress of the jackpot game. is there.

It should be noted that this process includes a process of detecting a winning mode of a ball to the first variable winning device 4000, and is therefore configured to be executed in a short cycle (within 1 msec) in the main process. As a result, the setting for detecting the winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 4000 can be performed without delay.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the effect switching process, in the process of S4701, it is determined whether or not the second effect start flag 223yb is ON (S4702). When the second effect start flag 223yb is turned on (S4702: Yes), effect round display mode setting processing (S4703) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, the effect round display mode setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 174 (S4703). FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect round display mode setting process (S4703). In the production round display mode setting process (S4703), first, it is determined whether or not it is the first process after the jackpot is started (S4720). If it is the first process (S4720: Yes), the basic production prepared in advance is performed. To set the display basic effect command (S4721), if it is not the first process (S4720: No), the process of S4721 is skipped, and at the start of the effect round Rpt currently being executed, the detection sensor is detected. It is determined whether or not the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering 1240 is 1 or more (S4722).

Note that in the process of S4720, various methods are conceivable as the method of determining that it is the first time. For example, as the process of S4720, a process of setting the value of a predetermined counter to 1 or more is provided, and a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4720 and S4721, and the predetermined counter is set at the start of the jackpot game. The value of may be set to 1.

The basic effect in the process of S4721 is the display shown in the first frame (upper left display example) of FIGS. 153, 154, and 156 in this control example.

In the process of S4722, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S4722: No), the effect This means that the storage channel 1231 was empty at the start of the round Rpt (there were no remaining balls), and the display number erase is set to erase the number display in the post-production game round Rpa. A command is set (S4723), and this processing ends.

When the display number erasing command is set, in this control example, the display in which the notification of the number is intentionally omitted (see the display example of the fourth frame (lower right) in FIG. 156) is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4722, when it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the number of balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 from the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 is 1 or more (S4722: Yes), at the start of the production round Rpt. In this case, it means that there is a residual sphere in the storage channel 1231. Then, the process proceeds to S4724.

In S4724, it is determined whether the effect switching flag 223gb is on (S4724), and when it is determined that the effect switching flag 223gb is not on (that is, it is off) (S4724: No), the storage upper limit flag 223m is on. Is determined (S4725).

In the processing of S4725, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is not on (that is, it is off) (S4725: No), the attention effect timer 223ga is set to 1 in order to see the time elapsed from the start of the effect round Rpt. This is added and updated (S4726), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4725, when it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is turned on (S4725: Yes), the attention effect setting processing (S4727) is executed.

Here, the attention effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 175 (S4727). FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the attention effect setting process (S4727). In the attention production setting process (S4727), first, the difference between the prescribed time (30 seconds in this control example) of the production round Rpt and the value of the attention production timer 223ga is set as a determination numerical value (S4740), and then, It is determined whether the numerical value for determination is included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741).

In the process of S4741, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741: Yes), the attention effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155) is used as the attention effect. , “Long video” (easy) is selected, and this processing ends (S4742).

On the other hand, in the process of S4741, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is not included in the range of 15 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds (S4741: No), the determination numerical value is included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds. It is determined whether or not (S4743).

In the processing of S4743, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4743: Yes), the attention effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155) is used as the attention effect. , “Short video” (difficult) is selected, and this processing ends (S4744).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4743, when it is determined that the determination numerical value is not included in the range of 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4743: No), it means that the determination numerical value is less than 5 seconds. Therefore, "still image" (extremely difficult) is selected as the noticeable effect from the noticeable effect operation difficulty level switching table (see FIG. 155), and this processing ends (S4745).

Returning to FIG. 174, description will be made. Following the processing of S4727, a display attention production command for the selected attention production is set (S4728), the production switching flag 223gb is set to ON, and this processing is ended (S4729).

On the other hand, in the process of S4724, when it is determined that the effect switching flag 223gb is off (S4724: No), it is determined whether the operation flag 223p is on (S4730).

If it is determined in the process of S4730 that the operation flag 223p is turned on (S4730: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4730, when it is determined that the operation flag 223p is not on (that is, it is off) (S4730: No), the operation determination process is executed, and this process is ended (S4731).

Here, the operation determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 176 (S4731). FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the content of this operation determination process (S4731). In the operation determination process (S4731), first, it is determined whether or not it is the operation waiting period (S4761).

In the processing of S4761, when it is determined that it is the operation waiting period (in this control example, before entering the inter-round interval) (S4761: Yes), it is determined whether the operation of the operation button 300 is detected (S4762). ).

In the processing of S4762, when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is not detected (S4762: No), this processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4762, when it is determined that the operation of the operation button 300 is detected (S4762: Yes), it is determined whether the operation timing is appropriate (S4763). Here, in the present control example, whether or not the operation timing is appropriate is determined by whether or not the operation is performed at the timing when the display pointer 719 matches the bar display portion 717 (appropriate) or not (inappropriate) ( (See FIGS. 153 and 154).

When it is determined that the operation timing is appropriate (S4763: Yes), a display command for success display (see the display example of the fourth frame in FIG. 153) and explicit display (see the display example of the fifth frame in FIG. 153) Is set (S4764), and the number explicit display (see the display example of the sixth frame in FIG. 153, see FIG. 155 in this control example) is set as the display for the next round (post-production gaming round Rpa) (S4765). The operation flag 223p is set to ON, and this processing ends (S4766).

In addition, since how many are displayed in the explicit display changes depending on the mode of the post-production game round selection table Ta, it indirectly corresponds to the jackpot type (see FIG. 160(b)). In other words, in the jackpot type of the first post-drafting discharge mode Ta1 (0.4 seconds), the number of balls to be discharged is two. Therefore, when the explicit display is displayed, “2” is displayed. .. Further, in the jackpot type of the post-production second ejection mode Ta2 (1.8 seconds), the number of balls to be ejected is 9, so that "9" is displayed when the explicit display is displayed. Further, in the jackpot type of the post-production third discharge mode Ta3 (2.0 seconds), the number of discharged balls is 10, so when displaying the explicit display, “10” is displayed.

In addition, if there is a possibility that the player may obtain an excessive profit by notifying an appropriate number each time by the explicit display, the probability that the above-mentioned number is displayed as the explicit display may be lowered (the reliability of the numbers). You can lower it). As a result, the explicit display can be a display for reference only.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4763, when it is determined that the operation timing is inappropriate (S4763: No), a failure display (see the display example of the fourth frame in FIG. 154) and an unknown display (the fifth frame in FIG. 154) are displayed. The display command of the display example is set (S4767), and the number unknown display is displayed as the display of the next round (post-production gaming round Rpa) (in the present control example, refer to the display example of the sixth frame of FIG. 154, see FIG. 155). ) Is set (S4768), the operation flag 223p is set to ON, and this processing is ended (S4766).

Further, in the processing of S4761, if it is determined that it is not the operation waiting period (S4761: No), it means that the operation button 300 has not been operated until the interval period is entered. Then, the process of S4766 is executed, and this process ends.

In the control flow, for the sake of convenience, the operation flag 223p is set to be turned on even when the operation button 300 has not been operated (when the operation waiting period has elapsed). Since this is after the time when 300 can be operated is overrun, the player will not be disadvantaged by this control.

In addition, the effect switching flag 223gb and the operation flag 223p set in the effect round Rpt are set to OFF at the timing when the jackpot game currently being executed ends, and the attention effect timer 223ga ends the jackpot game currently being executed. It is reset at the timing.

Returning to FIG. 173, the description will be continued. In the process of S4702, if the second effect start flag 223yb is not on (that is, it is off) (S4702: No), then it is determined whether the third effect start flag 223yc is on (S4704).

In the process of S4704, when it is determined that the third effect start flag 223yc is on (S4704: Yes), the display command based on the setting in the immediately previous round game R (effect round Rpt) is set, and this process is executed. It ends (S4705).

On the other hand, in the processing of S4704, when it is determined that the third effect start flag 223yc is not on (that is, it is off) (S4704: No), it is determined whether the fourth effect start flag 223yd is on (S4706). ).

In the process of S4706, when it is determined that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is turned on (S4706: Yes), the V display setting process (S4707) is executed, and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4706, when it is determined that the fourth effect start flag 223yd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4706: No), this process is directly terminated.

The V display setting process (S4707) will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of this V display setting processing (S4707). In the V display setting process (S4707), first, it is determined whether it is the first process after starting the current jackpot (S4781), and if it is the first process (S4782: Yes), the display prepared in advance is displayed. A basic effect command is set (S4782), loading of display material is set (S4783), and the process proceeds to S4784.

It should be noted that in the process of S4781, various methods can be considered as a method of determining that it is the first time. For example, as the processing of S4781, the processing of whether the value of the predetermined counter is 1 or more is provided, and the processing of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4781 and S4782, and the predetermined counter is started when the jackpot game is started. The value of may be set to 1.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4781, when it is determined that the processing is not the first processing (S4781: No), the process directly proceeds to S4784.

By the setting of the display basic effect command in the process of S4782, in this control example, a predetermined moving image is displayed on the third symbol display device (a table of the first frame which is a common display in FIGS. 157 to 159). See example).

Also, the necessary materials in the processing of S4783 are various display materials that can be switched from the basic effect (see FIG. 157) at a predetermined timing (for example, display of broken rock (second frame in FIG. 158), when V is acquired. (The third frame in FIG. 158), the V preparation display (the fourth frame and the fifth frame in FIG. 159), and the like.

In the processing of S4784, the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is incremented by 1 and updated (S4784), and the opening/closing pattern of the V winning round Rv is determined from the jackpot type (S4785). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is halfway closed in the V winning round Rv.

When it is determined that the open/close plate 1300 is not closed midway in the V winning round Rv (S4785: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball remains inside the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv. To be done.

There are various methods for determining whether the sphere remains inside the storage channel 1231. In this control example, whether the value of the remaining sphere counter 203p is 0 (no remaining sphere) (remaining sphere). Yes).

When it is determined that the sphere remains in the storage flow path 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv (S4786: Yes), the V winning round Rv ends when the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) elapses. Therefore, the sphere cannot pass through the specific area 4830. Therefore, the basic effect is continued (S4787), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4786, when it is determined that there are no remaining balls (empty) in the storage channel 1231 (S4786: No), it is determined whether the skip flag 223gd is on (S4788).

When it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4788: No), 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv based on the value of the V winning round timer 223gc. It is determined (S4789).

The numerical value of 5 seconds is set as the number of seconds with a low probability that a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of winning will occur, and can be changed according to the situation.

When it is determined that 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the V winning round Rv (S4789: Yes), a display command for displaying the broken rock (see the display example of the second frame in FIG. 158) is set (S4790). , The process proceeds to S4792.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 5 seconds have not elapsed since the start of the V winning round Rv (S4789: No), it is determined whether a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls has entered the detection sensor 1240. It is determined (S4791).

If it is determined in the process of S4791 that the specified number of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4791: Yes), the process proceeds to S4790 and S4792.

In the process of S4792, the skip flag 223gd is set to ON (S4792), and then the process proceeds to the process of S4793. Also, in the process of S4788, when it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is ON (S4788: Yes), the process proceeds to S4793.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4791 that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4791: No), the process directly proceeds to S4793.

In the process of S4793, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4793). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4793: Yes), a display command for displaying a notification that the V prize has been won (in this control example, refer to the display example of the third frame in FIG. 158). The setting is made, and this processing is ended (S4794). On the other hand, in the processing of S4793, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S4793: No), the present processing ends.

The sphere whose passage through the specific area 4830 is detected in the process of S4793 is a sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 since the V winning round Rv was started. That is, at the end of the V winning round Rv, the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 pass through the specific area 4830.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4785, when it is determined that the jackpot type in which the opening/closing plate 1300 is halfway closed in the V winning round Rv is determined (S4785: No), the halfway closing display switching processing (S4795) is executed, and this processing is executed. To finish.

The display switching process for midway closing (S4795) will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the display switching process for midway closing (S4795). In the display switching process for midway closing (S4795), first, it is determined whether the skip flag 223gd is ON (S4801).

If it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is not on (that is, it is off) (S4801: No), then a prescribed number (10 in this control example) of balls have entered the detection sensor 1240. It is determined (S4802).

When it is determined that the specified number of balls have not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4802: No), the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is referred to, and short closing (0.1 second in this control example). It is determined whether or not it is the timing of closing (closing in which the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231) (S4803).

Note that the timing determination is configured such that the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 in the jackpot game currently being executed using the opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b3 (see FIG. 163) provided in the ROM 222. Therefore, it can be easily performed.

In the process of S4803, when it is determined that it is the timing when the short closing occurs (S4803: Yes), the gaze effect display command is set (S4804), and the process proceeds to S4805. On the other hand, in the processing of S4803, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the short closing occurs (S4803: No), the process directly proceeds to the processing of S4805.

In the present control example, a display example in which the display is returned to the original display after the display is changed from the previous display, as shown in the display example of the second frame and the third frame of FIG. To be done.

In the processing of S4805, it is the timing at which the value of the V winning round timer 223gc is referred to and a long closing (in this control example, closing for 0.2 seconds. Closing for discharging the ball from the storage flow channel 1231) occurs. It is determined whether or not (S4805). When it is determined that it is not the timing of the long closing (S4805: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the timing of long closing (S4805: Yes), it is determined whether or not a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806). In this control example, if the unreached effect flag 223qb is on, it is determined that a sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. If the unreached effect flag 223qb is off, the sphere is located at the lower end of the storage channel 1231. It can be determined that is not placed.

When it is determined that the sphere is not arranged at the lower end of the storage flow channel 1231 (S4806: No), the sphere is not discharged from the storage flow channel 1231. Therefore, a gasse effect display command is set and the present process ends ( S4807). Note that, as the galleries effect, the same effects as the effects described above are executed in the process of S4804.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4806, when it is determined that the sphere is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231 (S4806: Yes), the V preparation effect display command is set (S4808), and the skip flag 223gd is turned on. (S4809), and the process proceeds to S4812.

Further, in the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the skip flag 223gd is on (S4801: Yes), the processing directly proceeds to S4812. Further, in the processing of S4802, when it is determined that the specified number of balls (10 in the present control example) have entered the detection sensor 1240 (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4810.

In the processing of S4810, when it is determined that this is the first processing (S4810: Yes), the processing proceeds to S4811 and then to S4812. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the first time (S4810: No), the process directly proceeds to S4812.

Note that in the process of S4810, various methods are conceivable as the method of determining that it is the first time. For example, as the process of S4810, a process of setting the value of a predetermined counter to 1 or more is provided, and a process of counting down the value of the predetermined counter by 1 is provided between S4810 and S4811, and a predetermined counter is set at the start of the jackpot game. The value of may be set to 1.

In the process of S4811, a display command for displaying the crushed rock (see the display example of the second frame in FIG. 158) is set (S4811), and then the process proceeds to S4812. In the process of S4812, it is determined whether the sphere has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4812). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area 4830 (S4812: Yes), a display for notifying that the V prize has been won (in the present control example, the display example of the third frame of FIG. 158 or the sixth frame of FIG. 159). The display command is set (see the display example), and this processing ends (S4813). On the other hand, in the processing of S4812, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the specific area 4830 (S4812: No), this processing ends as it is.

In this control example, the V preparation effect is a display for notifying that a V prize has been won, as shown in the display examples of the fourth frame and the fifth frame of FIG. 159 (see the display example of the sixth frame of FIG. 159). ) Means a display (a display that makes you feel).

The sphere whose passage through the specific region 4830 is detected in the process of S4812 is not limited to the sphere that has entered the storage channel 1231 after the start of the V winning round Rv, but is not limited to the sphere that enters the storage channel at the start of the V winning round Rv. It may be the sphere remaining at 1231. In other words, by providing the processing of S4812, it is felt that the sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the V winning round Rv is not an existence that makes the player feel unfortunate only, but may be profitable. Can be made to exist.

The skip flag 223gd set in the V display setting process (S4707) is set to OFF at the timing when the jackpot game currently being executed ends, and the updated V winning round timer 223gc is used for the jackpot game currently being executed. Is reset at the timing when is finished.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 1300 rolls to the right and passes through the detection sensor 1240. However, the first variable winning device 12000 according to the twelfth embodiment has a left-right configuration. A sphere that is symmetrical and rolls to the left is configured to face the detection sensor 1240. It should be noted that the same parts as those of the above-described respective embodiments (including a part that is changed symmetrically) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179 is a front view of the game board 13 of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 179, in the first variable winning device 12000, in comparison with the configuration of the third embodiment, the opening/closing plate 12300 is a longer plate (in the present embodiment, the width in the lengthwise direction is 135 [mm]). ), and additionally includes a drop delay plate 12250 having a similar shape to the drop delay plate 3250 described in the third embodiment.

The opening/closing plate 12300 has the same configuration as the opening/closing plate 1300 described in each of the above embodiments, except that the plate portion 12310 is long in the axial direction. Therefore, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The main difference between the drop delay plate 12250 and the third embodiment is that the configuration is different for each section in the left-right direction. Here, the fall delay plate 12250 will be described with reference to FIG. 180.

FIG. 180 is a rear perspective view of the front cover plate 12200. As shown in FIG. 180, the drop delay plate 12250 is arranged on the front side of the movement path of the opening/closing plate 12300 while avoiding interference with the opening/closing plate 12300, and is arranged below the shaft portion 1320 of the opening/closing plate 12300 in the axial direction. An extended plate portion 3251 that is a linear plate portion that is parallel to and that extends vertically from the back surface of the thin plate member 1210, and connects the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 and the thin plate member 1210. A rolling arc portion 12252 whose upper surface is formed of a concave curved shape is mainly provided.

In addition, compared to the third embodiment, in the present embodiment, the extended plate portion 3251 is configured to have a longer length, but since the other shapes are the same and configured for the same purpose, The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

Supplementing the facing surface 3251a, in the present embodiment, the distance between the facing surface 3251a and the front side wall of the thin plate member 12110 of the main body member 12100 is the center of the sphere when the sphere is arranged on the most upstream side (right side in FIG. 179). In a state where the radius is set to be equal to or smaller than the radius of the sphere in a portion arranged vertically below, the radius is changed to be equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere at an intermediate position (the middle position in the horizontal direction in FIG. 179), and the most downstream side (left side in FIG. 179) is arranged In the portion arranged vertically below the center of the sphere, the radius is equal to or larger than the radius of the sphere and smaller than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the inclination of the facing surface 3251a with respect to the thin plate member 12110 is gentler than that of the third embodiment.

The rolling arc portion 12252 is divided into three equal parts along the longitudinal direction of the fall delay plate 12250. That is, the first rolling portion 12252a, the second rolling portion 12252b, and the third rolling portion 12252c are mainly provided from the side far from the detection sensor 1240.

Similar to the rolling arc portion 3252 in the third embodiment, the first rolling portion 12252a has a shape in which a tangent line drawn on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction at the end portion of the facing surface 3251a extends in the front-rear direction. At the same time, it is configured so as to smoothly intersect the thin plate member 1210 of the front cover plate 12200 (the tangent line drawn on the plane perpendicular to the axial direction is along the surface direction (extending direction) of the thin plate member 1210).

The radius of curvature of the first rolling portion 12252a as viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. As a result, the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the first rolling portion 12252a can be reduced.

In the second rolling portion 12252b, the upper end portion of the upstream end surface (end surface farther from the detection sensor 1240) is the upper end portion of the downstream end surface (end surface closer to the detection sensor 1240) of the first rolling portion 12252a. They are arranged at the same position, and the radius of curvature when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of curvature of the first rolling portion 12252a.

Therefore, the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the second rolling portion 12252b increases as compared with the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the first rolling portion 12252a. That is, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction can be increased in rolling in the second rolling portion 12252b as compared with rolling in the first rolling portion 12251a. it can.

In the third rolling portion 12252c, the upper end portion of the upstream end surface (end surface farther from the detection sensor 1240) is the upper end portion of the downstream end surface (end surface closer to the detection sensor 1240) of the second rolling portion 12252b. They are arranged at the same position, and the radius of curvature when viewed in the axial direction is set to be larger than the radius of curvature of the second rolling portion 12252b.

Therefore, the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the third rolling portion 12252c increases as compared with the resistance when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the second rolling portion 12252b. That is, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction can be increased in rolling in the third rolling portion 12252c as compared with rolling in the second rolling portion 12251b. it can.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the degree of deceleration when the ball rolls in the front-rear direction on the rolling arc portion 12252 can be changed depending on the lateral position of the ball. That is, when there are a plurality of spheres that flow down on the rolling arc portion 12252 at the same speed, if these spheres are similarly rolled back and forth, it is compared with the deceleration degree of the sphere arranged on the upstream side. The degree of deceleration of the sphere arranged on the downstream side can be increased. Therefore, the interval between the plurality of balls can be shortened, and by rolling back and forth a plurality of times, the interval between the balls can be eliminated (constituting a continuous ball).

With reference to FIG. 181, an example of a flow-down mode of a sphere flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 will be described. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing changes in the arrangement of spheres flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300.

In FIG. 181, a schematic graph is shown as an example of the arrangement of spheres that flow along the horizontal axis and the vertical axis that flow down on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300. The vertical axis represents the rolling start point of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 at the intersection of the lower end and the horizontal axis, and the rolling end point of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 (detection sensor). 1240). The horizontal axis is graduated at equal intervals, similar to the interval at which balls are fired. That is, in the present control example, since the sphere firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the scale interval on the horizontal axis corresponds to 0.6 seconds.

In FIG. 181, a curve connecting the arrangement of spheres over time is illustrated. For ease of understanding, the flow of the sphere will be described as a flow due to gravitational acceleration. Therefore, when a load other than gravity is not applied to the sphere, the curve shown in FIG. 181 becomes a quadratic curve, and this curve will be described as a basic curve BPF.

Here, in the twelfth embodiment, the open/close plate 12300 rolls on the upper surface of the open/close plate 12300 maintained in the open state after the ball reaches the open/close plate 12300 maintained in the open state, and the detection sensor. It takes about 4 seconds to enter 1240. Therefore, the basic curve BPF is illustrated as a quadratic curve that reaches the upper end position (position of the detection sensor 1240) on the vertical axis after 4 seconds. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the mechanism forming the continuous ball, description will be made assuming that the downflow velocity of the ball reaching the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 is zero.

The sphere flowing down the opening/closing plate 12300 basically flows down along the curve BPF. Therefore, when the open/close plate 12300 maintains the open state, the interval at which the ball reaches the open/close plate 12300 is the same as the interval at which the ball enters the detection sensor 1240. On the other hand, when the opening/closing plate 12300 changes its state between the closed state and the open state, the sphere may be decelerated and the interval may change.

In FIG. 181, an example of when the open/close plate 12300 changes between the closed state and the open state (corresponding to midway closing in operation scenarios 51 and 52 described later) is illustrated at the closing timings TC1 to TC3. The closing timings TC1 to TC3 are shown as straight lines parallel to the vertical axis. The interval between the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing TC3 is shown at 1 second intervals in order to facilitate understanding of operation scenarios 51 and 52 described later.

As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the degree of deceleration changes depending on the arrangement of the balls. That is, whether the ball is arranged above the first rolling part 12252a, the ball is arranged above the second rolling part 12252b, or the ball is arranged above the third rolling part 12252c. The degree of deceleration changes depending on whether or not there is.

In FIG. 181, the change in this degree will be described by the change in the curve immediately after the closing timings TC1 to TC3. That is, when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state where the balls are arranged above the first rolling portion 12252a, it is assumed that the subsequent flow-down mode of the balls is not affected (the degree of deceleration is small. ), when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached in a state in which the ball is arranged above the second rolling portion 12252b, the subsequent flow-down mode of the ball is the intermediate position HC of the curve BPF (1 second after the flow-down starts State)) (the degree of deceleration is medium), and when the closing timings TC1 to TC3 are reached with the ball placed above the third rolling portion 12252c, the subsequent balls It is assumed that the flow-down mode of is restarted from the start position SC of the curve BPF (the degree of deceleration is large).

The downward trajectory of the sphere indicated by the first curve BP1 is the first closing timing TC1 while flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, but is located above the first rolling portion 12252a. This is the trajectory when the flow continues without being received.

On the other hand, the downward trajectory of the sphere shown by the second curve BP2 is the same as the sphere shown by the first curve BP1 at the first closing timing TC1 while flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300. The locus, which is located above the two-rolling portion 12252b, has been decelerated and has resumed the downward flow as a locus from the midway position HC.

Since the first curve BP1 and the second curve BP2 intersect at the intersection position UC before reaching the upper end of the vertical axis, the sphere shown by the first curve BP1 and the sphere shown by the second curve BP2 are continuous balls. Make up.

The downward trajectory of the sphere indicated by the third curve is the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing while flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, and is located above the third rolling portion 12252c. , The locus from which the flow is resumed as the locus from the start position SC.

The downward trajectory of the sphere shown by the fourth curve is the second closing timing TC2 and the third closing timing while flowing down the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, and at the second closing timing TC2, the first rolling portion. Since it was placed above 12252a, it continued to be Chinese without being affected, and at the time of the third closing timing TC3, because it was placed above the second rolling portion 12252b, it was decelerated, and as a locus from the midway position HC. This is the trajectory where the flow started again.

Since the third curve BP3 and the fourth curve BP4 intersect at the intersection position UC before reaching the upper end of the vertical axis, the sphere shown by the third curve BP3 and the sphere shown by the fourth curve BP4 are continuous balls. Make up.

The twelfth embodiment is used in the fifth control example described next. In the fifth control example, a case will be described in which during the round game R, a timing at which an over-winning is likely to occur and a timing at which the over-winning is not performed are configured. Further, the third symbol display device 81 executes the notification regarding the timing.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183. FIG. 182(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this control example. In the ROM 202, in addition to the above first random number table 202a and second random number table 202c, a first per type selection table 202b5, a variation pattern selection table 202d, an opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5, At least an opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is provided.

First, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b5 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b5. The first hit type selection table 202b5 is a data table in which judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored for each kind of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponds to each big hit type. It is stipulated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b5, and the The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39". Is defined in association with jackpot (see 202b51 in FIG. 182(b)).

When the big hit Ta is reached, a 15-round big hit game is executed in the first operation pattern of the first variable winning device 12000 (see FIG. 23(a)). In this case, the player can receive about 2250 prize balls.

The jackpot Tb is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “40 to 79” (see 202b52 of FIG. 182(b)).

When the jackpot Tb is reached, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the 25th operation pattern, which will be described later, of the first variable winning device 12000. In this case, in addition to paying out about 2250 prize balls, the player can receive a prize ball for an extra winning with a high probability.

The jackpot Tc is associated with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 99” (see 202b53 of FIG. 182(b)).

When the jackpot Tc is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern (see FIG. 23(c)) of the first variable winning device 12000. In this case, the player receives, in addition to the payout of the prize balls obtained by subtracting the unobtainable amount from the influence of the remaining balls from about 2250 pieces, the payout of some prize balls accompanying the balls winning the general winning opening 63. be able to.

Here, the similar operation pattern means that the second inter-round interval Int2 is arranged after the tenth round in the third operation pattern, and the second interval time Int2 is arranged between the predetermined rounds. Correspond. In this control example, the second interval time Int2 is arranged between at least the fifth round and the sixth round.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”, The jackpot r is associated and defined (see 202b54 in FIG. 182(b)).

When it becomes the big hit r, the big hit game of 15 rounds is executed in the 25th operation pattern to be described later of the first variable winning a prize device 12000, as in the case of the big hit Tb. In this case, in addition to paying out about 2250 prize balls, the player can receive a prize ball for an extra winning with a high probability.

As described above, when the jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), a jackpot game in which the extra prize balls can be received with a high probability is executed. It Thereby, the player's motivation for winning the jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery can be increased.

Next, in order to describe the configuration of the 25th operation pattern, the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 will be described with reference to FIG. 183.

FIG. 183(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5. The opening/closing board operation scenario storage area 202e5 is an area in which operation scenarios used for operation control of the opening/closing board 12300 (see FIG. 179) are stored for each scenario type, and is stored in the opening/closing board operation scenario storage area 202e5. The opening/closing plate 12300 is operated in a predetermined round game R in the jackpot game using the information provided.

Specifically, the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 defines operation scenarios 51 and 52 as scenario types. The operation scenario 51 includes, as the scenario content, “(open (open state) 5.0 seconds→(closed (closed state, short closed) 0.1 second)→open (open state) 0” on the opening/closing plate 12300 (see FIG. 179) .9 seconds)×5 (repetition))×3 (repetition)” is set, and the operation scenario is 30 seconds at maximum.

In the operation scenario 51, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number of balls (10 in this control example) even before 30 seconds have elapsed, and thus the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 12300 ends, and Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 51, closing after the open/close plate 12300 is opened (open state) is configured only by closing (closed state, short closed state). Therefore, the opening/closing plate 12300 operates from the open state (open state), but the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are not discharged. Therefore, it is not possible to reduce the number of storage balls in the storage channel 1231 during the round game R.

In the case of an operation scenario such as the operation scenario 51 in which the closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 is released before the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231, the position shift of the balls occurs particularly in the vicinity of the restriction member 1600. That is, since the regulating member 1600 is in the ejected state for 0.1 seconds when the opening/closing plate 12300 is in the closed state, the balls are ejected for 0.1 second, and then the regulating member 1600 is in the stored state. This pushes the ball back.

Therefore, when the sphere is pushed back, it is feared that the entire sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is pushed back and detected again by the detection sensor 1240. However, in the present invention, the arrangement of the detection sensor 1240 is defined. This prevents re-detection. That is, as shown in FIG. 10, in the detection sensor 1240, the widthwise center as the detection position is on the upstream side of the sphere arranged ninth from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 and the detection is performed. It is arranged so that the downstream side hemispherical portion of the tenth sphere from the downstream side of the storage channel 1231 enters the center in the width direction as a position.

By arranging the detection sensor 1240 in this way, even if the sphere that has once flowed to the downstream (displaced by less than the diameter of the sphere) is pushed back by the operation of the regulating member 1600, it is located downstream of the storage channel 1231. The tenth sphere from the side is always kept in the center in the width direction as the detection position of the detection sensor 1240. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the sphere is detected again by the detection sensor 1240 during the operation of the regulating member 1600, but the sphere is detected again.

In this control example, the arrangement of the detection sensor 1240 is devised to prevent the occurrence of re-detection due to being pushed back to the regulating member 1600, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, during the operation of the regulating member 1600, a preventive means for preventing the displacement of the storage sphere upstream from the predetermined position may be provided, or even if the regulating member 1600 operates, the sphere starts to flow down for 0.1 second. In order not to do so, a flow-down regulation means for regulating the flow-down of the sphere may be provided.

Further, the operation scenario 52 includes, as the contents of the scenario, "(open (open state) 5.0 seconds → → (closed (closed state, long closed) 0.2 seconds → open (open state) on the opening/closing plate 12300 (see FIG. 179). ) 0.8 seconds)×5 (repetition))×3 (repetition)” is set and the operation scenario is 30 seconds at maximum.

In the operation scenario 52, even before 30 seconds elapse, the detection sensor 1240 detects a prescribed number of balls (10 in this control example), so that the operation scenario of the opening/closing plate 12300 ends and the initial stage is completed. Controlled to return to the state.

In this operation scenario 52, the opening/closing plate 12300 is opened (opened state) and then closed (closed state, long closed state), so that the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be discharged. Therefore, since the number of storage channels 1231 can be reduced, a gap can be easily formed inside the storage channel 1231 when a predetermined number of balls enter the detection sensor 1240 (the storage channel 1231). Since it is easy to form a state in which less than the allowable number of 1231 (10 balls) is stored), it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of excess winning.

In this control example, the 25th operation pattern is set such that the case where the over-winning is difficult to occur (in the operation scenario 51) and the case where the over-winning is likely to occur (in the operation scenario 52) are different for each round. Is composed of. Specifically, the even-numbered round is the operation scenario 51 and the odd-numbered round is the operation scenario 52, and the twenty-fifth operation pattern is configured. As a result, it is possible to suppress the excessive occurrence of excessive winning.

In this way, the operation scenarios are divided and stored based on the difference in the profit obtained by the player, so that the profit given to the player by the operation of the opening/closing plate 12300 currently being executed is controlled by the main controller. 110 can be easily identified.

The closing timing of the opening/closing plate 12300 is common to the operation scenarios 51 and 52, and the difference in closing length is as short as 0.1 seconds. It is possible for the player to make it difficult to determine which pattern the player is operating in.

FIG. 183(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5. The opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is provided with information as to which of the jackpot types and which round game R each predetermined scenario type corresponds to.

When executing the operation control of the opening/closing plate 12300, the MPU of the main control unit 110 reads information corresponding to the contents defined in the opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 from the opening/closing plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 to open/close it. The plate 12300 is movable.

The opening/closing plate operation scenario table 202f5 is configured to be able to set a corresponding operation scenario based on the combination of the jackpot type and the round game R of which round. In the round game R in the jackpot game, the opening/closing plate 12300 is movably controlled simultaneously with the start of the round game R in the selected operation scenario.

Next, an example of display contents during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIG. 184. 184 is a schematic diagram showing a change in display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 12000 operates in the 25th operation pattern, in a time series.

The first frame (display example shown on the upper left side) of FIG. 184 is a display following the part in the middle of the above-described basic effect (for example, the third frame of FIG. 157 (display example on the lower left side)). That is, the display example shown in FIG. 184 is a display that is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display is being executed in the basic effect.

In the first frame of FIG. 184 (display example shown on the upper left side), in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 87(a)), the treasure box hidden in the depression and five rocks (number 2) that block the depression are displayed. (Note) and a tank bombarding the rock are shown, and the display in the guide display section of the small area Ds3 is “target right” (display indicating continuation of launch. launch instruction (see FIG. 157)) Is it?” (display that makes it difficult to continue launching. It is equivalent to a stop suggestion instruction).

Switching from the basic effect to the display of the first frame in FIG. 184 includes the average time (1 second) for the ball to reach the opening/closing plate 12300 from the firing of the ball, and the second frame in FIG. 184 (display example in the middle left). ) To the 6th frame (display example on the lower right side), the opening/closing plate for the total (2.5 seconds) of the time (display is switched at equal intervals, total 1.5 seconds) related to the countdown effect illustrated in the figure. The display is switched at the timing of rewinding from the start of the period in which the closing of 12300 is repeated. That is, in this control example, at the timing of 2.5 seconds, 12.5 seconds, or 22.5 seconds from the start of the above-described operation scenarios 51, 52, the basic effect is displayed in the display example of the first frame in FIG. 184. Can be switched.

In the second frame (display example shown in the middle left), a child (an image that suggests stopping the ball firing) is displayed, trying to pass in front of the rock, and in the third frame (display example shown in the lower left) , A state in which a child is passing in front of a rock is shown, and the display on the guidance display unit of the small area Ds3 is switched to "3".

Thereafter, in the fourth frame (display example shown on the upper right side), a state in which the child has passed in front of the tank is illustrated, and the display on the guidance display unit of the small area Ds3 is switched to "2". After that, in the fifth frame (display example shown in the middle right), a state in which the child has passed in front of the tank (an image that suggests reunion of the ball launch) is shown, and the display in the guidance display section of the small area Ds3 is shown. Is switched to "1". The number on the guidance display portion of the small area Ds3 is displayed as an example of a so-called "countdown effect" in which the number is decreased by one and some notification is given at a timing when it can be "0".

In the sixth frame (display example shown on the lower right side), a state in which a tank starts bombarding (a display indicating the firing of a ball) is illustrated, and the display on the guidance display portion of the small area Ds3 is “aim right”. The display is switched to (display indicating suggestion of launching. Launching instruction (see FIG. 157)).

When changing the firing and stop of the ball according to the display that can be switched as shown in FIG. 184, the ball launch is stopped from the first frame to the fifth frame of FIG. 184, and the ball launch is started at the sixth frame ( Will be restarted). In this case, the ball shot immediately after switching to the sixth frame (in the present control example, immediately after the timing of 4 seconds, 14 seconds, or 24 seconds from the start of the above-described operation scenarios 51 and 52) is 1 second later. The opening/closing plate 12300 is reached at the timing when the closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 is started.

Therefore, the ball that is fired during a predetermined period after that (4 seconds in this control example) rolls toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening/closing plate 12300 during the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 repeats the closing operation. The kinetic energy is reduced with the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 12300.

In addition, as described above, the degree of decrease in kinetic energy due to the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 12300 is larger in the sphere arranged on the downstream side (the side closer to the detection sensor 1240), and therefore, along the opening/closing plate 12300. The distance between rolling balls can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily form a continuous ball.

On the other hand, when the balls are fired in the first to fifth frames, the balls reach the opening/closing plate 12300 while the opening/closing plate 12300 maintains the open state. Therefore, the interval between the balls rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 is easily maintained without changing from the interval at the time when the balls reach the opening/closing plate 12300. Therefore, it is difficult to form a continuous ball.

That is, according to the present control example, when the sphere is fired and stopped according to the display example shown in FIG. 184, the sphere is moved along the opening/closing plate 12300 as compared with the case where the sphere is continuously emitted ignoring the display example. The ball rolling toward the detection sensor 1240 can easily form a continuous ball.

Here, when the balls rolling toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening/closing plate 12300 form a continuous ball, a specified number (in the present control example, when the preceding ball is detected by the detection sensor 1240). In the case where 10) winnings are detected and the opening/closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state, it becomes easier for a ball connected to the upstream side of the preceding ball to enter the detection sensor 1240 before the switching.

Therefore, the player can increase the profit (payout of prize balls) obtained in the jackpot game by firing the balls so as to form a continuous ball. In the present control example, in the third symbol display device 81, since the timing at which the continuous ball is likely to be formed is notified, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

In the present control example, the display change as shown in FIG. 184 is executed both in the operation scenario 51 (the even round in the present control example) and in the operation scenario 52 (the odd round in the present control example). .. On the other hand, when the continuous ball is formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, the excess winning can be expected only in the operation scenario 52.

By doing this, by displaying an indication to the player to stop the launch, while maintaining the action of extending the digestion time of the round game R, an excessive prize occurs in each round and the player's profit becomes excessively large. Can be prevented.

The configuration of the display example is not limited to this. For example, the display change shown in FIG. 184 may be executed only in the case of the operation scenario 52 (odd round in this control example). In this case, since it is not necessary to stop the ball firing to form a continuous ball even when the excess winning cannot be expected, the round game R can be smoothly advanced.

Further, for example, the display change shown in FIG. 184 may be executed only in the case of the operation scenario 51 (even round in this control example). In this case, it is possible to suppress excessive winning and to slow the progress of the round game R.

According to this control example, the open/close plate 12300 repeatedly changes to the closed state for 5 seconds after the ball is fired in accordance with the display switching of the sixth frame in FIG. 184. During this period, as described above, the ball heading toward the detection sensor 1240 along the opening/closing plate 12300 is decelerated by different degrees to facilitate the formation of a continuous ball. However, if the opening/closing plate 12300 changes to the closed state immediately before or during the passage of the plurality of balls forming the continuous ball through the detection sensor 1240, the balls may fall between the detection sensor 1240 and the end surface 3251b. Yes, in this case, there is a possibility that the continuously-constructed continuous ball is eliminated (for example, when the balls between the continuous balls fall).

Therefore, if a continuous ball can be constructed, a period during which the opening/closing plate 12300 maintains the open state (in this control example, from the start of the operation scenarios 51 and 52 to the time point of 5 seconds elapsed, from the time of 10 seconds to the time point of 15 seconds elapsed, Alternatively, it is preferable to pass the detection sensor 1240 from the time point of 20 seconds to the time point of 25 seconds). Here, as described above, in the twelfth embodiment, after the ball reaches the opening/closing plate 12300 maintained in the opened state, the detection sensor 1240 rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 maintained in the opened state. It takes about 4 seconds to enter the ball.

Therefore, for example, the opening/closing plate 12300 is provided about 4 seconds before the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started (and before the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started). When a continuous ball is formed with the ball that has reached the top as a head, a situation in which the ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 can be generated with a high probability while the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state.

On the other hand, even before about 4 seconds before, if the ball stays on the opening/closing plate 12300 for 4 seconds or more, the ball passes through the detection sensor 1240 during the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state. It is possible to generate a situation with a high probability.

Here, according to this control example, the timing shown in the sixth frame in FIG. 184 (display example on the lower right side) is about 6 seconds before the period in which the open/close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started, Immediately after this, the ball launched to reach the opening/closing plate 12300 is about 5 seconds before the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state is started, and thus is before about 4 seconds.

However, after this, the opening/closing plate 12300 repeatedly executes switching to the closed state, so that the ball flowing down along the opening/closing plate 12300 is decelerated. That is, there is a circumstance that the ball stays on the opening/closing plate 12300 for 4 seconds or more. Therefore, the time that the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 12300 about 5 seconds before the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state starts to stay on the opening/closing plate 12300 is extended by 1 second (that is, the falling velocity of the ball). By decelerating the average of 80% to 80%), the timing at which the leading ball passes the detection sensor 1240 can be included in the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in the open state.

In addition, the ball shot at the timing shown in the sixth frame of FIG. 184 (display example on the lower right side) is near the upstream end of the opening/closing plate 12300 at the timing when the opening/closing plate 12300 starts the switching operation to close. To reach. Therefore, the ball that reaches the opening/closing plate 12300 while the opening/closing plate 12300 is performing the switching operation (repeating operation) to the closing, or the closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 while the opening/closing plate 12300 is rolling. It is possible to maximize the number of decelerations due to the operation of the opening/closing plate 12300 as compared with a ball or the like in which the switching operation of 1 is started. Therefore, the most continuous ball can be formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, an example of display contents during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram showing in time series changes in the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 12000 operates in an operation pattern similar to the third operation pattern.

The first frame (display example shown on the upper left side) of FIG. 185 is a display following the part in the middle of the above-described basic effect (for example, the third frame of FIG. 157 (display example on the lower left side)). That is, the display example shown in FIG. 185 is a display that is switched when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the display is being executed in the basic effect.

Here, this predetermined condition is that when the storage channel 1231 is full (see S5032 of FIG. 189), the detection sensor 1240 has detected that a specified number of balls have passed in the currently executed round game R. If not (see S5033 in FIG. 189), the condition is satisfied (hereinafter, also referred to as “full tank unreached condition”). That is, it is premised that the round game is started in a state where there are remaining balls in the storage channel 1231.

Here, the round game R is started from the state that the ball remains in the storage channel 1231, the storage channel 1231 is full, and in the situation where the round game R is continuing, in the remaining time of the round game R In order to prevent the generation of dead balls, the firing of the balls should be stopped. On the other hand, when the firing of the ball is stopped, the player has a leisure time, which may reduce the player's concentration and reduce the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the storage channel 1231 is full and even in a situation in which the ball is prevented from passing through the first specific winning port 1000a (when the full tank non-reaching condition is satisfied). , The display is switched so as to inform the player that the expected profit (payout of prize ball) has been switched while maintaining the display that prompts the launch of the ball (the display that suggests launch) To do.

The present control example uses the above-described structure capable of storing spheres in the storage channel 1231. That is, in the present control example, the open/close plate 12300 is maintained in the open state (upward posture) until the specified time (30 seconds in the present control example) of the round game R has elapsed after the above-described full tank unachieved condition is satisfied. To be done.

Therefore, if the sphere continues to be fired (right-handed) while the unfilled condition is not satisfied, the sphere that reaches the opening/closing plate 12300 moves in the direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the opening/closing plate 12300, and the storage channel 1231 moves. Since the opening/closing plate 12300 is restricted from abutting against the balls stored in the opening/closing plate 12300 and the downward movement is restricted by the opening/closing plate 12300, it is held on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 until the opening/closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state. That is, since the ball that has reached the opening/closing plate 12300 is maintained in an unknown destination until the opening/closing plate 12300 is switched to the closed state, whether the ball is a prize ball or not, is discharged from the outlet 66 as it is and the ball loss. It will be unknown at present whether or not it will be.

When the ball remains on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300, the opening/closing plate 12300 shifts to the closed state, and then becomes the opened state again, in other words, when the previous round game R is not the final round. The ball on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 may be scooped up again.

More specifically, in the twelfth embodiment, a drop delay plate 12250 is disposed below the opening/closing plate 12300, and when the open/close plate 12300 is in a closed state, a ball causes the upper surface of the drop delay plate 12250 to extend in the longitudinal direction of the opening/closing plate 12300. It rolls in the direction along the direction (the direction along the opening direction of the detection sensor 1240) and falls toward the outlet 66 on the left side of the end surface 3251b. Therefore, the ball that has not reached the end surface 3251b before the opening/closing plate 12300 changes to the open state, rests on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 again and passes through the detection sensor 1240 (first specific winning opening 1000a).

Therefore, even if the ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300 while the condition of not reaching the full tank is satisfied, there is a possibility that the payout of the prize ball can be obtained by winning the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning port 1000a). You can Therefore, as compared to the case where the payout of the prize ball due to the winning to the detection sensor 1240 (the first specific winning opening 1000a) cannot be expected (there is almost no possibility, for example, the normal state), the ball is emitted (right). The player's motivation to continue hitting can be improved.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, since the length of the opening/closing plate 12300 in the longitudinal direction is about 135 [mm], when the balls (diameter 11 [mm]) are arranged side by side without overlapping vertically. Up to 12 balls can be placed on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 12300.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, the ball is continuously fired (right-handed) while the full tank underachievement condition is satisfied, and some of the balls that have not reached the opening/closing plate 12300 are stored in the general winning opening 63. Win a prize. The payout number of the general winning opening 63 is set to five. The larger the proportion of balls to the general winning opening 63, the larger the total number of prize balls paid out to the player in the jackpot game.

The display example shown in FIG. 185 uses these structures. That is, the structure of the opening/closing plate 12300 and the fall delay plate 12250 promotes the game in which the possibility of ball loss is low and the player is allowed to enter the general winning opening 63 to pay out the prize ball while appealing to the player. Is.

If a movable object that can change the storage state of the sphere is arranged inside the storage channel 1231, the round game R is started with the storage channel 1231 being empty (there is no remaining ball). In some cases, the condition of not reaching full tank may be satisfied. For example, when the interference device 6900 described above in the sixth embodiment is provided, the interference member 6930 of the interference device 6900 is extended after the round game R is started, so that the above-described predetermined condition can be satisfied. ..

In the first frame (display example on the upper left side) of FIG. 185, the sub-round display portion 714b is displayed in the small area Ds1 (FIG. 87(a)). Before switching to the first frame in FIG. 185, the round number display portion 714 is illuminated (brightly displayed), while the sub-round display portion 714b is unlit (darkly displayed). Then, conversely, the round number display portion 714 is displayed off (dark display), while the sub-round display portion 714b is light-emitting display (bright display). Note that the meaning of displaying that the sub-round display portion 714b indicates a period during which an additional prize ball can be expected in the round game R is the same as that described above (see FIG. 143).

In addition, in the first frame of FIG. 185 (display example on the upper left side), the display that promotes the launch of the ball (the display that suggests launching) is maintained in the small area Ds3 while the background is displayed at 1-second intervals. The character "3" is displayed as the number to be counted down.

In the second frame (display example in the middle left) of FIG. 185, the state in which the display of the small area Ds3 is cantted down and the number “1” is displayed is shown, and one second after that, 3 of FIG. 185 is displayed. It is possible to switch to the top frame (display example on the lower left).

In the third frame (display example on the lower left side) of FIG. 185, a region including the main display region Dm is maintained below the small region Ds3 while the display for promoting the launch of the sphere (the display suggesting the launch) is maintained. In the figure, a plurality of circular figures are displayed in an overlapping manner, and a display (the character "hit") is added near the center of each figure to accelerate the launch of a ball. In this state, a "treasure box" figure to be described later is prepared in advance on the back side of the plurality of figures.

In the fourth frame (display example on the upper right side) of FIG. 185, the above-mentioned circular figure is partially erased and a part of the “treasure box” is exposed, and the fifth frame of FIG. In the display example on the right), a state in which all the above-mentioned circular figures are erased and the entire "treasure box" is exposed is shown.

In this control example, it is possible to switch the number of erased circular figures corresponding to the number of balls entering the general winning opening 63 after the display is switched to the display example of the first frame in FIG. 185. It is said that That is, as the number of balls entering the general winning opening 63 increases, the number of erased circular figures increases.

As an example, in this control example, four circular figures are displayed in the third frame of FIG. 185, and one circular figure is erased every time one ball enters the general winning opening 63. Have control over. That is, the display example of the fourth frame shows a state in which two balls have entered the general winning opening 63 (a state in which 10 payout prize balls are generated by entering the general winning opening 63). The display example of the frame shows a state in which four or more balls have entered the general winning opening 63 (a state in which there are 20 or more payout award balls due to entering the general winning opening 63).

The "treasure box" in the display example of the fifth frame has a meaning as a display showing the amount of profit obtained by the player. That is, when the entire "treasure box" is displayed, there are 20 or more prize balls to be paid out by entering a ball other than the first variable winning device 12000. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the general winning opening 63 by grasping the number of times the "treasure box" is displayed (a predetermined number (in this control example, the treasure box). It can be used as a guide for winning over prizes).

In addition, this display will be displayed separately from the prize balls obtained by entering the first variable winning device 12000. Therefore, from the display of the "treasure box", the player can predict the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering the first variable winning device 12000 in the jackpot game (that is, (the number of rounds) x (the specified number of round games R). It is possible to understand how much the number of payout prize balls can be increased based on ()×(the number calculated from the number of payout prize balls for one prize).

In the display example of the fifth frame, the display corresponding to the number of paid-out prize balls is described, but the display is not limited to this. For example, instead of “treasure chest”, one of the characters “probability change”, “normal” or “time saving” (display indicating the game state) is made to correspond to the game state after the jackpot game in advance. You may prepare. In this case, the player can grasp the game state after the completion of the jackpot game that is currently being executed by increasing the number of balls that enter the general winning opening 63.

In addition, it is often difficult to enter two to four balls into the general winning opening 63 within 30 seconds (during the round game R). Therefore, by the time of switching to the display example of the fifth frame in FIG. 185, a corresponding ball loss (after the top of the opening/closing plate 12300 is full, the ball flows to the right of the opening/closing plate 12300, and reaches the outlet 66). The player who does not find a real profit here may stop the ball firing to suppress the ball loss.

That is, the player continues to shoot the ball so that he can see advantageous information (for example, the display indicating the above-mentioned game state) even if the ball loss occurs as the game mode, or the ball is used to prevent the ball loss. You can choose whether to stop the firing of the.

If the display is switched to the fifth frame in FIG. 185 before the opening/closing plate 12300 is full (when four or more balls can be inserted into the general winning opening 63), the game is The person can obtain advantageous information with a minimum ball loss. Therefore, after the display is switched to the first frame in FIG. 185, it is possible to continue the firing of the ball eagerly.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 186(a), the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b5.

The opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b5 is provided in order for the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp the operation status of the opening/closing plate 12300 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which the information stored in the open/close plate operation scenario storage area 202e5 and the open/close plate operation scenario table 202f5 is stored.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 186(b). FIG. 186(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding sphere number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 223d, a variation start flag 223e, a stop type selection Flag 223f, production counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, storage counter 223n, operation flag 223p, Effect temporary storage area 223r, first operation effect flag 223wa, second operation effect flag 223wb, first input flag 223wc, second input flag 223wd, effect execution flag 223x, and pressed period information storage area 223y. And other memory area 223z, at least a display switching flag 223pa, a light emission timer 223yh, and a display erasing counter 223yj are provided.

The display switching flag 223pa is a flag that is set to ON when the storage channel 1231 is full in the middle of the round game R, and the voice lamp control device 113 performs the sub-round effect process (S5036, see FIG. 190). ) Is a flag for grasping the timing of executing.

The light emission timer 223yh is a timer for managing a period during which the transmission lamp 227b (see FIG. 86) arranged near the first variable winning device 12000 emits light. In this control example, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on every time the ball passes through the general winning opening 63, and is turned off after one second has passed.

The display erasing counter 223yj is a counter that manages the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 63 after the display switching flag 223pa is set to an upper limit of four. Every time the number of the display erasing counter 223yj is decreased, the circular figure displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see the third frame to the fifth frame of FIG. 185) is erased, and the back side display (Fig. The "treasure box" at 185) is controlled so that it can be easily seen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, in the present control example, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing.

The main process in this control example is the same as the main process in the first control example except that the storage state monitoring process (S2113) is followed by the effect switching process 3 (S5001). Therefore, the same portions will be denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and different portions will be described.

Next, the effect switching process 3 (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the effect switching process 3 (S5001). This effect switching process 3 (S5001) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a process for executing an effect that changes depending on the progress of the jackpot game. Is.

It should be noted that this process includes a process of detecting the winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 12000 and a process of detecting the winning mode to the general winning opening 63, so that the main process has a short cycle (1 msec or less). Configured to run on. As a result, the setting that is performed by detecting the winning mode of the ball to the first variable winning device 12000 or the general winning opening 63 can be performed without delay.

As shown in FIG. 188, in the effect switching process 3, in the process of S5001, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit (S5011). If it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S5011: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5011, when it is determined that the big hit is in progress (S5011: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit type is big hit Tb or big hit r (S5012). When it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot Tb or the jackpot r (S5012: Yes), it is determined whether it is the display switching timing by referring to the opening/closing plate operation scenario 222b5 (S5013), and the display switching timing ( When it is determined that it is 2.5 seconds, 12.5 seconds, 22.5 seconds from the start of the round game R described above (S5013: Yes), the first countdown effect display command is set (S5014). ), and ends this processing. In addition, in the processing of S5013, when it is determined that it is not the timing for switching the display (S5013: No), the present processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5012, when it is determined that the jackpot type is neither the jackpot Tb nor the jackpot r (S5012: No), it is then determined whether the jackpot type is the jackpot Tc (S5015).

In the process of S5015, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot Tc (S5015: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5015, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot Tc (S5015: Yes), the process proceeds to the sub-round switching process (S5016), and then this process ends.

Next, the sub-round switching process (S5015) will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing this sub-round switching processing (S5015). This sub-round switching process (S5015) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the storage channel 1231 is in a full state during the round game R. It is a process for executing the production after the end.

As shown in FIG. 189, in the sub-round switching process, in the process of S5015, it is determined whether the display switching flag 223pa is on (S5031). When it is determined that the display switching flag 223pa is not on (that is, it is off) (S5031: No), it is determined whether the storage channel 1231 is full (S5032).

Various methods are illustrated as a method of determining that the storage channel 1231 is full. In the present control example, it is determined that the length by which the detection sensor 1240 detects the sphere exceeds a predetermined period (two seconds in the present control example). In this case, the entry timing of the Xth ball may be set at the time when a predetermined period has elapsed, or at the start of the predetermined period (that is, the timing of entering the detection sensor 1240) or when the predetermined period has elapsed. A flag may be set at an intermediate point in time, and when it is determined that the tank is full when a predetermined period has elapsed, the timing at which the flag is set may be set.

In the processing of S5032, when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is not full (S5032: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5032, when it is determined that the storage channel 1231 is full (S5032: Yes), a specified number (10 in this control example) of balls are detected in the currently executed round game R. It is determined whether the ball has entered the sensor 1240 (S5033).

In the processing of S5033, when it is determined that the specified number of balls has entered the detection sensor 1240 (S5033: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5033, when it is determined that the specified number of balls has not entered the detection sensor 1240 (S5033: No), a display switching command is set (S5034), and the display switching flag 223pa is turned on. The setting is made (S5035), and this processing is ended.

In the present control example, after the display switching command is set (S5034), in the third symbol display device 81, the round number display portion 714 is displayed off (dark display), while the sub-round display portion 714b emits light. The display is controlled so as to be displayed (brightly displayed) (see the first frame in FIG. 185).

On the other hand, in the process of S5031, when it is determined that the display switching flag 223pa is on (S5031: Yes), the process proceeds to the sub-round effect process (S5036). The details of the sub-round effect process (S5036) will be described later.

After the processing of S5036, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the round (S5037), and if it is determined to be the timing to end the round (S5037: Yes), the display switching flag 223pa is set to OFF (S5038), and the book The process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing to end the round (S5037: No), the present process is terminated.

Next, the sub-round effect process (S5036) will be described with reference to FIG. 190. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the sub-round effect process (S5036). The sub-round effect process (S5036) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and includes lighting effect after the storage channel 1231 is full. It is a process for executing a display effect.

As shown in FIG. 190, in the sub-round effect process, in the process of S5036, it is determined whether the timing is 5 seconds before reaching the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) in the round game R currently being executed. (S5051).

In the processing of S5051, when it is determined that the timing is 5 seconds before the specified time is reached (S5051: Yes), the second countdown effect display command is set (S5052), and the value of the display deletion counter 223yj is set. “4” is set, and the process proceeds to S5054. On the other hand, in the process of S5051, when it is determined that it is not the timing 5 seconds before the specified time is reached (S5051: No), the process directly proceeds to S5054.

In the present control example, after the second countdown effect display command is set (S5052), the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to execute a series of display effects starting from the first frame of FIG. 185. To be done. Since the value of the display erasing counter 223yj is 4, four circular figures are displayed as shown in the display example of the third frame in FIG. 185.

In the process of S5054, it is determined whether or not a ball has won in the general winning opening 63 arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 12000 (S5054). In the processing of S5054, if it is determined that the ball has won the general winning opening 63 (S5054: Yes), the specified time (30 seconds in this control example) in the currently executed round game R has passed within 5 seconds. It is determined whether it is the timing (S5055).

In the processing of S5055, when it is determined that it is the timing when the specified time elapses within 5 seconds (S5055: Yes), the value of the display erasing counter 223yj is subtracted (S5056), and the display erasing command is set ( The process proceeds to S5057) and S5058. On the other hand, in the processing of S5055, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the specified time period elapses within 5 seconds (S5055: No), the process directly proceeds to S5058.

After the value of the display erasing counter 223yj is subtracted (S5056) and the display erasing command is set (S5057), the circular figure shown in the display example of the third frame of FIG. 185 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled so that the display can be switched in such a manner that one is deleted. Note that the display of the fourth frame in FIG. 185 shows the state after the processing of S5057 has been executed twice from the display of the third frame in FIG. 185, and the display of the fifth frame in FIG. It shows the state after the processing of S5057 has been executed twice (or more) from the display of the frame. After the processing of S5056 and S5057 is executed for the fifth time (the value of the display erasing counter 223yj<0), the circular figure is maintained in the display of the fifth frame in FIG. 185.

In the process of S5058, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on (S5058), the numerical value corresponding to “1 second” is set in the light emission timer 223yh (S5059), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5054, when it is determined that the general winning opening 63 is not won (S5054: No), the light emission timer 223yh is subtracted (S5060), and it is determined whether the value of the light emission timer 223yh is 0 ( S5061).

In the process of S5061, when it is determined that the value of the light emission timer 223yh is 0 (S5061: Yes), it is determined whether the transmissive lamp 227b is on (S5062), and the transmissive lamp 227b is on. If it is determined to be true (S5062: Yes), the transmission lamp 227b is turned off (S5063), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5061 that the value of the light emission timer 223yh is not 0 (S5061: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5062 that the transmission lamp 227b is not lit (S5062: No). ), and this processing is ended as it is.

As described above, according to the present control example, each time the ball wins the general winning opening 63, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on for one second, and control is performed so that the visibility of the internal state of the storage channel 1231 is improved. To be done.

In the present embodiment, at the end of the round game R, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 are discharged, so by visually observing the internal state of the storage channel 1231, the end timing of the round game R can be easily performed. It becomes possible to grasp. Further, the end timing of the round game R is one of the important timings for the player as a material for the timing of switching the shooting and stopping of the ball.

Therefore, the timing of the end of the round game R is grasped by grasping the change in the state of the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 by not making the timing at which the production such as the display effect is switched correspond to the end timing of the round game R. When the game machine that can be used is configured, it is possible to improve the motivation to insert a ball into the general winning opening 63.

<Another Example of Fifth Control Example>
Next, another example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 194. Another example of the fifth control example will be described using the first variable winning device 13000 described as the thirteenth embodiment.

FIG. 191 is a front view of the game board 13 of the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 191, the first variable winning device 13000 is different from the configuration of the twelfth embodiment in that it has three routes through which the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 can pass, and whether or not each route can pass. Is provided with a path switching device 13800 configured to be switchable in association with driving of the solenoid 1510, and other points are the same as the first variable winning device 12000 of the twelfth embodiment, and therefore different. The points will be described in detail, the same portions will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The route switching device 13800 is visible under the opening/closing plate 12300 in a front view (visible because at least a part of the game board 13 is transparent), and is disposed on the back side of the game board 13. One discharge path sensor 13811 to 13813 is provided, and a sphere discharged from the lower end of the storage channel 1231 through the discharge port 1150 is detected by any of the discharge path sensors 13811 to 13813 and arranged downstream thereof. It is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown). Next, the details of the route switching device 13800 will be described.

192 and 193 are rear views of the first variable winning device 13000, and FIG. 194 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 13000 taken along the line CXCIV-CXCIV of FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 192 shows a state where the drive of the solenoid 1510 is released (non-excitation state), and FIGS. 193 and 194 show a state where the solenoid 1510 is driven (excitation state). Also, in FIGS. 192 and 193, the rear cover 1700 is illustrated in phantom lines for ease of understanding, and the discharge path sensors 1381 to 13813 are arranged behind the discharge path sensors 1381 to 13813 as the discharge path sensors 1381 to 13813 are cross-sectionally viewed. The illustration of the wall member having a U-shaped cross section is omitted, and in FIG. 194, the resistance change member 13854 is omitted for easy understanding, and the cross section of FIG. 194 is similar to the cross section of FIG. It is configured as a surface (or a surface that cuts the center of the stored sphere) along the slope on the lower end side of the storage channel 1231.

As shown in FIGS. 192 to 194, the route switching device 13800 of the first variable winning device 13000 includes a plurality of discharge route sensors 13810 arranged side by side downstream of the discharge port 1710 and a tip member of the solenoid 1510. The movement member 13820 that moves according to the movement of the 1520, and the groove shape for defining the movement locus of the movement member 13820, which is formed in the same shape on the thin plate member 12110 and the rear cover 1700 (formed in the groove shape (thin plate member 12110) or perforated (rear cover 1700)), a first switching device 13840 that switches the state each time the operating member 13820 makes one revolution of the defining portion 13830, and a corner portion 13831 of the defining portion 13830. The second switching device 13850 is mainly configured to be operated each time the operating member 13820 reaches, and to be able to change the state by the load from the operating member 13820.

The part that can switch the path of the ball before guiding the ball to the discharge path sensor 13810 will be described first. As shown in FIG. 192, the defining portion 13830 is formed in an elliptical groove shape in a rear view, and has a known shape for defining the moving direction of the operating member 13820 by switching the depth of the groove. Then, every time the solenoid 1510 is switched between the excited state and the non-excited state, the operating member 13820 is guided in one direction along the defining portion 13830.

That is, when switching from the non-excited state to the excited state, it passes through the upper half groove (state change from FIG. 192 to FIG. 193), and when switching from the excited state to the non-excited state, passes through the lower half groove (FIG. State change from 193 to FIG. 192).

The defining portion 13830 includes a corner portion 13831 formed as a path that deviates from a round path of the elliptical shape. The corner portion 13831 is configured as a portion reached by the operating member 13820 when the operating state is switched to the excited state again before the operating member 13820 is completely moved after the switching from the excited state to the non-excited state is started ( The defining portion 13830 is configured so that the operating member 13820 can reach the corner portion 13831).

Accordingly, in the corner portion 13831, the operating member 13820 does not reach when the de-energized state is maintained for a sufficient time (for example, 2 seconds) like the normal inter-round interval, while the operating scenario 51, When the non-excited state is maintained for a short time (0.1 seconds or 0.2 seconds) and is immediately switched to the excited state, as in the case of closing during the round game R of 52 (see FIG. 183(a)). Is configured as the part reached by the operating member 13820. That is, according to the present configuration, the operation member 13820 comes into contact with the object to be loaded by closing in the interval between rounds (the first switching device 13840 in this control example), and the operation member 13820 hits by closing during the round game R. The target (the second switching device 13850 in the present control example) to which the contact load is applied can be different.

The first switching device 13840 is configured to be able to transfer a load applied from the operating member 13820 to the switching valve 13841 having a slide body that can slide back and forth above the first discharge path sensor 13811. And a transmission member 13842.

The slide body of the switching valve 13841 is switched and maintained in position by a known notch mechanism, and switches its position between a front position 13841a and a rear position 13841b each time a load is applied from the transmission member 13842. When the slide body is in the front position 13841a, the sphere flowing down from the discharge port 1710 is directed to the first discharge path sensor 13811, but when the slide body is in the rear position 13841b, the sphere flowing down from the discharge port 1710 is the first discharge path. Before reaching the sensor 13811, it collides with the slide body and flows down to the second discharge path sensor 13812 side along the inclination of the upper surface of the slide body. That is, the discharge path sensor 13810 through which the ball flowing down from the discharge port 1710 passes changes according to the state of the slide body.

Transmission member 13842 is configured as a load-bearing object against which movement member 13820 abuts upon closure during inter-round intervals. When the transmission member 13842 is loaded as the operating member 13820 moves along the defining portion 13830 (as the lower half of the defining portion 13830 moves), the transmitting member 13842 slightly moves about the predetermined axis. However, it is configured to return to its original position by its own weight when the load applied from the operating member 13820 is released. That is, the transmission member 13842 is configured to repeat the same posture change (swing) every time a load is applied from the operation member 13820.

Then, due to the change in the posture of the transmission member 13842, the load is transmitted to the slide body of the switching valve 13841, and the arrangement of the slide body is switched. That is, the arrangement of the slide bodies of the switching valve 13841 is configured to be switched every time the operating member 13820 operates along the defining portion 13830 by closing in the inter-round interval.

The second switching device 13850 has a special rotation member 13851 that rotates due to stacking of posture changes due to the load applied from the operation member 13820, and the arrangement is switched according to the state of the rotation direction of the special rotation member 13851, and the third discharge path A restriction member 13852 configured to be able to switch the passage mode of the sphere to the sensor 13813, a belt-shaped connection band 13853 for connecting the predetermined angular position of the special rotation member 13851 and the upper end of the restriction member 13852, and a special rotation member. A resistance changing member 13854 capable of changing the resistance of the rotation direction 13851 in the rotation direction is mainly provided.

The special rotation member 13851 is a member having a rotationally symmetric shape (for example, a gear shape or a disk shape) that is rotatably supported on the lower rear side of the rear cover 1700, and is loaded from the operating member 13820 that reaches the corner portion 13831. It is arranged to be able to give. The operating member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831 from the left-right intermediate position of the defining portion 13830, and at this time, applies a load in the rotation direction to the special rotation member 13851, and the special rotation member 13851 rotates by a predetermined amount. According to the present embodiment, the connecting band 13853 rotates in the rotation direction in which it is pulled up.

In the special rotation member 13851, when the operation member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831, the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 is increased by the action of the resistance change member 13854 to be described later, and the rotation of the restriction member 13852 due to its own weight is restricted. Therefore, as the number of times the operating member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831 increases, the rotation angle of the special rotating member 13851 increases. In the present embodiment, when the number of times the operating member 13820 reaches the corner portion 13831 is two or more, the restriction of the discharge path sensor 13810 by the restriction member 13852 is released, and the ball can enter the third discharge path sensor 13813. Is configured to be.

Note that the number of times the operating member 13820 needs to reach the corner portion 13831 before the restriction of the discharge path sensor 13810 by the restriction member 13852 is released is not limited and can be set arbitrarily. In this case, in consideration of the amount of rotation of the special rotation member 13851 each time a load is applied from the operation member 13820 and the movement amount of the regulation member 13852 that accompanies the load, the regulation member 13852 on the side of the second discharge path sensor 13812 is considered. The position of the end may be adjusted.

The restriction member 13852 has a groove shape in which one end is connected to the connecting band 13853 and the other end extends obliquely left and right (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 192 and 193) above the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is supported by the guide portion 13852a.

The restriction member 13852 normally closes the third discharge path sensor 13813 in a tilted state (see FIG. 193), but when one end of the restriction member 13852 is pulled up to the coupling band 13853 as the special rotation member 13851 rotates. , The other end slides along the guide portion 13852a (moves to the side where the distance between the one end and the left and right is reduced), and the regulating member 13852 gradually stands (from the tilted state to the special rotation). The member 13851 goes to a state in which the operating member 13820 is loaded more than once. Then, when the load via the special rotation member 13851 is released, the state returns to the state of falling by its own weight (see FIG. 193).

When the regulating member 13852 is in a tilted state (see FIG. 193), the upper surface is inclined downward toward the second discharge path sensor 13812, and thus the sphere that has deviated from the first discharge path sensor 13811 due to the action of the switching valve 13841. The second discharge route sensor 13812 can be smoothly guided.

The restricting member 13852 is arranged at a position where the other end of the restricting member 13852 does not interfere with the passage of the ball to the third discharge path sensor 13813 in the standing state. As a result, the ball that has deviated from the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the action of the switching valve 13841 is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812 or the third discharge path sensor 13813.

The connecting band 13853 is made of a material having low elasticity such as a string or cloth, or a thin wire (thin metal plate) made of metal. Therefore, the rotation position of the special rotation member 13851 and the arrangement of the restriction member 13852 correspond one-to-one.

The resistance change member 13854 is a member that is vertically long and long and is arranged in a posture of falling down on the special rotation member 13851. One end portion (upper end portion) of the resistance change member 13854 is an end portion (left and right end portions) of the defining portion 13830 and an upper portion. The other end (lower end) is rotatably supported below the rear cover 1700 so as to abut the special rotation member 13851 in the middle portion.

The resistance change member 13854 has an action of increasing the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 by contacting the special rotation member 13851. That is, while the resistance change member 13854 leans against the special rotation member 13851 and abuts against the special rotation member 13851, the rotation of the special rotation member 13851 is restricted (maintains the posture) by the dead weight of the restriction member 13852, and the operation member 13820 is moved. Only rotation due to the load when reaching the corner 13831 occurs.

On the other hand, when the operating member 13820 is arranged at the end of the defining portion 13830 at the time of closing and opening at the intervals between rounds, the upper end of the resistance changing member 13854 is pushed by the operating member 13820, and the resistance changing member 13854. And the contact of the special rotation member 13851 is released. As a result, the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 decreases, the special rotation member 13851 rotates due to the weight of the restriction member 13852, and the restriction member 13852 falls down (the special rotation member 13851 is in a state before being loaded). Become.

Note that the rotation resistance of the special rotation member 13851 may increase at timings other than the interval between rounds (for example, the timing at which the operation member 13820 is arranged at the corner portion 13831 during opening/closing during the round game R). In this case, the states of the special rotation member 13851 and the restriction member 13852 are maintained.

Next, the arrangement and action of each sensor of the discharge path sensor 13810 will be described in order. The first discharge path sensor 13811 is configured as an detection port that is an opening through which a sphere that has passed through the discharge port 1710 rearward and falls vertically downward. That is, the sphere that has passed through the discharge port 1710 passes through the first discharge route sensor 13811 and is detected by the first discharge route sensor 13811 unless an external force other than its own weight is applied.

In the present control example, the first discharge route sensor 13811 is configured as a detection device that sets the V flag 203s to ON when detecting passage of a sphere. In other words, the same operation as the specific area 4830 and the specific area detection sensor 4860 in each of the above-described embodiments is produced.

The first switching device 13840 is arranged between the first discharge path sensor 13811 and the discharge port 1710, but since the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is switched at each inter-round interval, the round Regardless of the game R, by normally playing the jackpot game in a mode in which the ball enters the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be passed through the first discharge route sensor 13811 by the end of the jackpot game.

The second discharge path sensor 13812 is a detection sensor arranged next to the first discharge path sensor 13811. The second discharge path sensor 13812 is configured as a detection sensor that only detects passage of a sphere. That is, the state of the V flag 203s does not change (is maintained) even when the ball passes through the second discharge route sensor 13812.

The third discharge path sensor 13813 is arranged next to the second discharge path sensor 13812, and when a ball that deviates from the first discharge path sensor 13811 by the action of the switching valve 13841 and flows down does not pass through the second discharge path sensor 13812. It is a detection sensor that passes through. Note that when the restriction of the passage of the ball by the restriction member 13852 is released (when the restriction member 13852 is in a standing state), the ball is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812 or the third discharge path sensor 13813. It is configured so that there is no large difference in the guidance (random).

In the present control example, the third discharge route sensor 13813 is configured as a detection device that sets the V flag 203s to off in accordance with the detection of passage of a sphere. That is, in the ending process (S1110, refer to FIG. 121) described in the above control example, whether the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is the probability change state or the time saving state is delayed during the big hit game. It is possible to configure a game feature that changes depending on whether the first discharge route sensor 13811 or the third discharge route sensor 13813 has detected the change.

By approaching this control example, the following gaming characteristics can be configured. In this control example, the jackpot type described in the fifth control example is used (see FIGS. 182 and 183).

As described above, in the interval between rounds, the restriction member 13852 is in a tilted state, and the passage of the ball of the third discharge path sensor 13813 is restricted. Therefore, when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 only by closing in the interval between rounds (for example, in the case of jackpot Ta and Tc), the sphere is detected by the third discharge path sensor 13813 and is once turned on. There is no possibility that the flag 203s will be set to OFF.

On the other hand, in the 25th operation pattern including the operation scenarios 51 and 52 in which the opening/closing plate 12300 closes at intervals other than the inter-round interval, balls may be discharged from the storage flow channel 1231 at intervals other than the inter-round interval. Since the turned-on V flag 203s may be set to off, it is possible to improve the attention of the whereabouts of the sphere discharged from the storage channel 1231.

The description will be given below by focusing on the 25th operation pattern. In this control example, in the 25th operation pattern, the opening/closing plate 12300 is drive-controlled in the operation scenario 52 in the all-round game R.

Since the 25th operation pattern is configured as a jackpot game of 15 rounds (odd times), the state of the first switching device 13840 in the predetermined round is not fixed, and the jackpot game of the 25th operation pattern is continuous. If you do, the jackpot will be replaced each time.

For example, when the slide body of the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is in the front position 13841a in the round game R of the fifteenth round in the first big jackpot game, the round game R of the fifteenth round in the second jackpot game. The slide body of the switching valve 13841 of the first switching device 13840 is set to the rear position 13841b.

Therefore, once every two times, the passage of the ball to the first discharge route sensor 13811 is restricted in the fifteenth round (the V flag 203s may be set to OFF), and once every two times, the fifteenth round. At, the ball is guided to the first discharge route sensor 13811 (it is easy to end the jackpot game by turning on the V flag 203s). In other words, it is possible to configure a gaming machine capable of guaranteeing two sets of probability variation states with a high probability (up to two times the state after the jackpot game is in the probability variation state).

When the ball is discharged from the storage channel 1231 during the round game R in a state where the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is arranged at the rear position 13841b, the restriction member 13852 is still the third discharge path when discharging the first ball. Since the passage of the ball to the sensor 13813 is restricted, the ball is guided to the second discharge path sensor 13812.

As described above, in discharging the first ball, the player can visually recognize the discharged ball in a front view while the state of the V flag 203s is not changed. That is, the discharge of the ball can be used to direct the player's attention to the route switching device 13800.

After the second discharge, the sphere of the third discharge path sensor 13813 is allowed to pass. Therefore, the discharge of the balls during the round game R is one every 1 second in 5 seconds, and a total of 5 balls are discharged, but the 4 balls after the second one are discharged to the third discharge route sensor 13813. Can be guided.

Here, when the interval between rounds is reached, the regulating member 13852 shifts to a fallen state, so that the player can set the number of balls entered within a short time after the discharge of the balls during the round game R is started. It is advisable to start the inter-round interval.

In other words, the specified number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 at a timing at which one sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 (one sphere in the storage channel 1231 that is directly connected to the excess winning number). According to the game mode such as 10) in the present control example, the ball is not detected by the third discharge route sensor 13813 and the game can be executed with peace of mind.

On the other hand, two or more balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 to secure a sufficient space in the storage channel 1231 or to open and close after 15 seconds from the start of the round game R. In a game mode in which a continuous ball is formed or an excessive excess prize is aimed (a game mode in which the ball is stopped during the round game R and the ball is restarted in synchronization with the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 12300) Since the balls are continuously discharged from the discharge port 1710 in a state where the balls can be guided to the third discharge route sensor 13813, the third discharge route sensor 13813 enters the third discharge route sensor 13813 as a reaction to the increase in the number of excessive winning prizes. The chances of a sphere increasing. That is, when the degree of aiming for the excessive winning is excessive, it is possible to configure the gaming property in which the possibility that the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished becomes the probability changing state is reduced.

In this control example, opening and closing during the round starts 5 seconds after the start of the round game R, but if the game mode is to continue the firing without stopping the firing of the ball, the specified number (this control example Then, 10 balls are fired in 6 seconds, so if the total of the balls that have been fired before the start of the round game R, 10 balls are detected by the detection sensor 1240 within 5 seconds. Things happen with a high probability. In addition, the fall delay plate 12250 (see FIG. 191) guides the ball to the end surface 12251b in front of the detection sensor 1240 regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 12300 is opened or closed.

Therefore, in the present control example, as the notification relating to the firing mode in the jackpot game, the notification “Aim right” is continuously maintained in the sub display area Ds3 (see FIG. 158). In the present control example, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball is guided to the third discharge route sensor 13813 by continuously firing the ball in accordance with this notification.

In addition, in a game mode in which the ball is stopped from being emitted without following the notification that the ball is continuously emitted, the ball may be guided to the third discharge route sensor 13813. Therefore, it is controlled to notify that fact. Is also good.

For example, the notification may be divided every 5 seconds, and it may be clearly notified that the possibility that the ball is guided to the third discharge route sensor 13813 increases every 5 seconds. In this case, by notifying at the same time whether the V flag 203s is currently turned on, whether to shoot the ball to the player or not to shoot the ball, the interval between rounds becomes the next round interval after the stipulated time has elapsed. You can select whether to proceed to the round game.

Further, based on the same notification, whether or not to link the position of the first switching device 13840 and the effect changes depending on the desired game property, and either one may be controlled. For example, when the slide body of the switching valve 13841 is arranged at the front position 13841a, all the discharged balls pass through the first discharge path sensor 13811 regardless of the state of the regulating member 13852, so the third discharge path Since the possibility that the ball is guided to the sensor 13813 does not increase, the above notification may be omitted, or the above notification may be executed as an effect regardless of the position of the switching valve 13841.

In the case of the former, the player is given a correct state so that the game can be made to be hurry (shooting the ball while it is still hitting (sudden) and allowing it to stop firing (slow)). be able to. In the latter case, anyway, it can be directed to continue the firing of the ball, it is possible to speed up the jackpot game progress.

In this control example, the switching valve 13841 is configured to slide back and forth, and since it is difficult to understand the change in the state of the switching valve 13841 from the front view, the state of the switching valve 13841 is visually confirmed to play. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be executed ignoring the production intention.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration of one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the storage flow channel 1231 is configured as a flow channel that extends on a plane, but the flow channel is not limited to this. For example, the storage channel 1231 may be configured such that the right side of the plane orthogonal to the left-right direction is bent 90 degrees and extends in the front-back direction. That is, the flow path may extend in the left-right direction from the detection sensor 1240 to the bending position, extend in the front-rear direction from the bending position, and extend again in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the discharge port 1150.

The flow path extending in the front-rear direction is a flow path shape in which the shape of the storage flow path 1231 is diverted and the extending direction is switched from the left to the right and the front (rotated by 90 degrees on the vertical axis). It is formed by joining two substantially symmetrical light-transmissive members having a concave portion forming one side surface of the flow path on the opposite side from the left and right.

The storage channel 1231 including the channels extending in the front-rear direction is different from the above embodiment in the direction of the channel, but the number of spheres that can be stored downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a is a specified number (in the present embodiment, 10). Individual) is designed. That is, also in this embodiment, the same playability as the playability described in each of the above embodiments can be configured.

With respect to the storage channel 1231 including the channel extending in the front-rear direction, the solenoid 6910 enters the channel in a state where the solenoid 6910 is driven (excited), and the solenoid 6910 is in an overhang state that restricts the flow of a sphere in the channel. In the state where the drive (excitation) of is released, an interference member is provided which can be switched from the flow path to the retracted state that allows the sphere to flow down in the flow channel.

Here, the arrangement of the interference member with respect to the flow path is the same as in the sixth embodiment. That is, among the spheres stored on the downstream side of the first specific winning opening 1000a, a flow path extending forward and backward on the upstream side of the second sphere counted from the sphere at the lowermost end regulated by the regulating member 1600. It is arranged so as to regulate the downward flow of the third ball by entering the inside, and when the interference member is in the projecting state, seven at the position upstream of the interference member and downstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a. Can be stored.

The flow path extending in the front-rear direction is formed such that the third and subsequent spheres are stored behind the second sphere counted from the lowermost sphere whose flow is regulated by the regulation member 1600. Therefore, when the second sphere is arranged, the sphere is arranged on the front side of the interference member, so that the interference member is hidden by the sphere. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the state of the interference member with the sphere.

Compared with the case where the stored spheres are arranged side by side, it is not possible to visually recognize the entire spheres, and the flow path itself extends to the back side, so that the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the visually recognizable object is When the storage channel 1231 includes a channel that extends in the front-back direction due to the distance, etc., the interference member is retracted so that 10 balls are stored in the storage channel 1231. It is difficult to grasp the state in which the nine spheres are overhanging and are stored in the storage channel 1231 from the arrangement of the spheres. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of stored balls even if the first variable winning device 1000 is directly visually recognized.

In the case where such a feature is provided, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may display the number of balls entered into the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, it is better to look at the third symbol display device 81 than to visually recognize the storage channel 1231 in which the number of stored balls is poorly discerned, and to grasp the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 1000a. Since it can be configured to be easy, the attention to the third symbol display device 81 can be relatively improved with respect to the attention to the first variable winning device 1000. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be easily removed from the first variable winning device 1000.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is controlled by the operating length of the regulating member 1600 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a second discharge port capable of discharging a ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 and a second discharge port restricting member that opens and closes the second discharge port are provided so that the ball can be discharged from the second discharge port. You can In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls stored between the second discharge port and the first discharge port from being discharged, without strictly controlling the operating length of the second discharge port restriction member. Therefore, the number of balls to be discharged can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port. Further, in this case, for example, if the first discharge port and the second discharge port are controlled to be opened at the same time, the time required to discharge all the balls can be shortened and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the opening/closing plate 1300 rotates is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is composed of an opening/closing plate 1300 that moves up and down, and when it is arranged at an upper position, the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a, and when it is arranged at a lower position, the ball can be guided from the first specific winning opening 1000a. You may try to divert. In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the ball at a position sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 1300 and the covering front plate 3200 when the ball is lifted, the ball rising motion can be made smoother.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is discharged from the single discharge port 1710 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the additional discharge port may be arranged at an intermediate position of the storage channel 1231. In this case, the maximum dischargeable number can be changed depending on whether the discharge is performed from the discharge port 1710 or the additional discharge port. In other words, it is difficult to discharge the sphere jammed on the side of the discharge port 1710 from the additional discharge port. Further, by discharging both discharge ports at the same time, the discharge efficiency of the balls can be improved and the interval can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the distribution device 4850 of the probability variation determination unit 4800 starts operation based on the operation timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state may be changed by the weight of the spheres depending on the number of spheres passing through the probability variation determination flow path 4820 within a predetermined time. In this case, regardless of the discharge speed (interval) of the balls, it is possible to switch whether or not the right to shift to the high probability state can be acquired depending on the number of the discharged balls.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the operation start timing of the opening/closing plate 1300 and the operation start timing of the regulating member 1600 are slightly deviated, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operations may be started simultaneously. In this case, the structure can be simplified.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which the resistance of the ball entering the ball changes depending on whether or not there is a gap in which the ball enters the storage channel 1231 (whether the storage channel 1231 is in a full state). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the predetermined number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 may be decelerated depending on whether the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231 is close to a full state. In this case, even if the specified number (count number) of the round game R is smaller than the number that can be stored in the storage channel 1231, it is possible to suppress winning more than the specified number. Further, in this case, as compared with the case of decelerating the ball regardless of the stored number, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being extended while suppressing the winning of a predetermined number or more. The deceleration is not limited to the deceleration and may be accelerated. In this case, it is possible to intentionally generate more than the specified number of prizes.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the balls are stored in the storage channel 1231 to restrict the ball entering the first specific winning port 1000a by the stored balls has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a non-electrically operated member may be provided that moves a predetermined amount by passing a ball that has reached the specific winning opening 1000a and makes it easier to regulate the ball entering in a certain posture. In this case, the time required for the inter-round interval can be shortened as compared with the case of discharging the stored spheres at once.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the specified number of spheres are stored in the storage channel 1231, but the number is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to store a prescribed number of balls+1. In this case, it is possible to limit the number of balls that exceed the specified number and pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a to one for each round game R. Further, in this case, the round in which the eleventh ball easily passes and the round in which the passage of the eleventh ball is restricted may be switched for each round.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the opening/closing plate 1300 starts switching to the closed state, the ball cannot be held (falls) at the position in front of the first specific winning opening 1000a, and thus two balls are not won at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one ball may be held so that the opening/closing plate 1300 may pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a before being closed. Further, the presence or absence of this possibility may be switched for each round.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the opening through which the ball passes is configured as an opening that benefits the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled so that a falling flag (a flag that shifts the probability variation state to the normal state or the time saving state) is set to ON when the ball enters the predetermined winning opening. In this case, it is possible to execute a game that takes care so that a predetermined winning hole is not entered.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the regulating member 1600 mechanically interlocks with the opening/closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the regulation member 1600 may be driven by a drive device different from the solenoid 1510 that drives the opening/closing plate 1300, or the regulation member 1600 may be configured to be driven by the solenoid 1510 or another drive device.

In the second embodiment described above, the storage channel 1231 having a plurality of inlets and a single outlet has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of outlets may be provided in the storage flow channel, and the flow channel may branch toward the outlet midway. In this case, a predetermined number of spheres can remain in the storage channel 1231 regardless of which outlet the spheres are discharged from.

In the second embodiment described above, the case where the number of storable balls when entering from the first specific winning opening 1000a is configured to be the same as the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R of the jackpot game has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of storable balls when entering from the first specific winning opening 1000a is set to be less than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R, and the number of storable balls when entering from the second specific winning opening 2255a. May be equal to or more than the specified winning number (count number) in the round game R. In this case, it is possible to form a game in which the round time is inevitably extended in the case of entering the ball from the first specific winning opening 1000a while discharging the whole ball at intervals between rounds.

In the above-described third embodiment, the case has been described in which the ball that has flowed down below the opening/closing plate 1300 is lifted above the opening/closing plate 1300 by the opening/closing plate 1300 again, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the sphere may be raised by a movable accessory having a constant motion capable of picking up the sphere. In this case, the movement of the ball can entertain the player.

In the third embodiment, the case where the delay member (fall delay plate 3250) is arranged below the opening/closing plate 1300 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing plate 1300 may be formed so as to slide along a direction perpendicular to the board surface, and a rib protruding from the board surface or the glass plate side to the game area may be disposed above the opening/closing board 1300. The balls may not come into contact with the ribs when the opening/closing plate 1300 that slides is in the open state, and the balls may come into contact with the ribs in the closed state. As a result, the flow velocity of the sphere can be changed above the opening/closing plate 1300 to delay the flow.

As a method of preventing the sphere from coming into contact with the rib, it is possible to bring the sphere closer to either the front or back by tilting in the front-rear direction and dispose the rib on the opposite side.

In the third embodiment described above, the case where the falling delay plate 3250 disposed on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 delays the flow of the sphere is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an inlet and an outlet may be arranged on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, and a flow path connecting the inlet and the outlet may be configured by a curved flow path passing through the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300. In this case, a ball that is once difficult for the player to visually recognize by the opening/closing plate 1300 by passing through the entrance from the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300 and flowing down on the back side of the opening/closing plate 1300 is discharged again from the exit. It is possible to perform the effect by flowing down, and since the area where the ball is delayed is not limited to the area on the front side of the opening/closing plate 1300, the ball is delayed until the next round is started even when the interval is long. It is possible to secure a sufficient section for

The inlet is preferably below the opening/closing plate 1300, and the outlet is preferably above the opening/closing plate 1300. Further, when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in an open state, it is desirable that a part of the opening/closing plate 1300 narrows the opening of the entrance to the extent that the passage of a ball can be prevented. In this case, the opening/closing plate 1300 can prevent balls from entering the entrance when the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the open state.

In the third embodiment, the case where the sphere is decelerated by moving the facing surface 3251a of the extended plate portion 3251 away from the thin plate member 1110 of the main body member 3100 toward the downstream side has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the upper surface of the extended plate portion 3251 may be configured to become gentler toward the downstream side. In this case, the component of gravity acceleration in the downflow direction of the sphere becomes smaller, and the sphere can be decelerated.

The change in acceleration/deceleration may be reversed. When the balls accelerate toward the downstream side, it is possible to prevent continuous balls from being formed on the drop delay plate 3250.

In the third embodiment described above, by arranging the drop delay plate 3250 below the opening/closing plate 1300, only the ball that has passed through the opening/closing plate 1300 is contacted with the opening/closing plate 1300. However, this is not always the case. It is not limited to. For example, in the front-back slide type opening/closing plate, when the ball is in the pocket where the winning opening is arranged in the open state and the ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate in the closed state, the rolling ball opens and closes. A rib may be arranged so that the rib can come into contact with the plate when it reaches the downstream side. Balls that enter the pocket as they are do not come into contact with the ribs. In this case, since the ball can be delayed on the upper surface of the closed plate, it is possible to prevent the ball from moving up and down as the plate moves.

In the third embodiment described above, the case where the formation of the drop delay plate 3250 is omitted at the drop position Pf3 and the sphere falls vertically downward at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the drop delay plate 3250 is extended to a position where it passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, a through hole is formed through which the sphere that has passed the detection sensor 1240 to the right can pass, and the sphere is discharged from the through hole. You may do it. In this case, even when the opening/closing plate 1300 is switched from the closed state to the open state in a state where the ball is placed immediately before the detection sensor 1240, the ball can be placed above the opening/closing plate 1300.

Note that this is different from the second drop delay plate 7260 described above in the seventh embodiment. That is, when the drop delay plate 3250 is extended to a position that passes the detection sensor 1240 in the left-right direction, the ball that has dropped at the position immediately before the detection sensor 1240 and has landed on the drop delay plate 3250 is to the right (detection sensor). A ball that has flowed down to the side close to 1240) but has fallen to the second drop delay plate 7260 due to the same drop once flows down to the left (the side away from the detection sensor 1240) and then to the drop delay plate 3250 again. To reach. That is, the period in which the flow of the sphere is delayed below the opening/closing plate 1300 and the path along which the sphere flows are different.

In the said 5th Embodiment, the flow path where the ball which entered from the 2nd entrance 640 and each specific winning opening 1000a, 2255a flows down merges with the storage flow path 1231, and the case where the number of entered balls is related. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls may be automatically supplied to the storage channel 1231. In this case, it is possible to create a situation in which the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 from the start of the game.

In the fifth embodiment described above, in the high-probability state, the more profits the player can obtain as the number of lottery until the big hit is increased is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the more profits the player can get as the number of lottery until the big hit is increased. In this case, the profits obtained by the jackpots obtained in a short time are small, and the profits obtained by the jackpots acquired in a long time can be increased, so that the time efficiency for the profits obtained by the player can be equalized.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is driven by the solenoid 6910 and the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an operation member that operates in the storage flow channel 1231 and changes the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage flow channel 1231 may be provided in accordance with the number of storages. In this case, since the operating member moves depending on the number of stored sheets regardless of the driving timing of the driving device 1500, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the reason that the operating timing of the operating member is different from usual.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of spheres that can be stored in the storage channel 1231 changes due to the interference member 6930 forming the overhang state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a portion (especially, a U-shaped portion) forming the storage channel 1231 is configured to move in the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the channel to change the channel length of the storage channel 1231. May be. In this case, even if the player moves in advance, the player can hardly notice whether or not the player has moved because of the small movement amount. Therefore, it is possible to form a game in which the movement of the member (change of the flow path length of the storage flow path 1231) becomes noticeable only after the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 1231, and the player's attention to the first variable winning device 6000 is increased. Can be improved.

The members may be moved by the driving force of the solenoid, or only the movement of the members may be switched by the driving device and the actual movement may be performed by the weight of the ball.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 projects in the storage channel 1231 with a predetermined number of balls stored therein has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bulged state may be formed before the balls start entering the storage channel 1231. In this case, the number of balls that can enter the storage channel 1231 can be set to seven. In addition, a pattern in which the sphere is formed in the overhang state after being stored and a pattern in which the sphere is in the overhang state before starting to enter the storage channel 1231 may be mixed for each round. In this case, it is possible to switch between a round in which the number of stored pieces is 7 and a round in which the number of stored pieces is 9 by a single member.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state when the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the interference member 6930 may be allowed to change to the projecting state while discharging the sphere from the storage channel 1231. In this case, by changing the combination of the timing of discharging the ball and the timing of setting the interference member 6930 in the extended state, the discharging mode of the ball can be formed in a plurality of patterns.

In the above eighth and ninth embodiments, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is seen as an auxiliary, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may be opened/closed, and the opening/closing plate 8300 may be a fixed plate. In this case, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may be provided with a flow path for dropping the sphere from vertically above to prevent the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 from passing to the left. In this case, it is possible to allow a limited number of excess winnings based on the continuous ball mode.

Further, for example, for each round game R, the opening/closing mode of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 may be switched depending on whether long-term opening or short-term opening is repeated. In this case, at the end of the round game R is detected by the detection sensor 1240 and closed, or closed as an operation pattern before being detected by the detection sensor 1240, and a predetermined number of balls that have passed the detection sensor 1240 while being closed. It is possible to switch whether or not the round game R ends by the detection of and the next opening does not occur. In this case, the possibility of over-winning is lower in the case of repeated short-opening than in the case of long-term opening.Therefore, the possibility of over-winning should be different depending on the operation pattern. You can

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are driven by the same drive device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a dedicated driving device may be provided for each and controllable so as to be independently driven.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, when the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are changed to the open state, the opening/closing plate 8300 rotates in a rising manner toward the front, and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 moves toward the left. The case where the opening/closing plate 8300 is configured to rotate so as to approach the opening/closing plate 8300 from the upper side has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rotation axes of both the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are parallel (for example, the axis in the front-rear direction), and the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 are in opposite directions (for example, one is downward and the other is upward). You may make it operate. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect such that the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 sandwich the ball as the state changes.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the opening/closing plate 8300 is provided with the ball entrance prevention portion 1331 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the entry prevention unit 1331 may be omitted. In this case, since the opening/closing plate 8300 does not close the detection sensor 1240 regardless of the state, the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be used as a member that restricts the guide of the ball to the detection sensor 1240. Further, for example, the front surface portion of the ball entrance prevention portion 1331 may be recessed so as to be recessed toward the back surface side. In this case, the period from when the opening/closing plate 8300 starts to change its state toward the closed state until when the detection sensor 1240 cannot pass the ball can be lengthened.

In the above eighth and ninth embodiments, the opening/closing plate 8300 and the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 have been described as members for allowing passage of a ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, by omitting the ball entrance prevention portion 1331, the passage of the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a can be switched only by the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, and the opening/closing plate 8300 allows the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entrance. It may be interpreted that the ball is sent to 9111 or the first outlet 66. That is, the opening/closing plate 8300 only serves to guide the ball to the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 in the open state, and whether the ball is guided to the first specific winning opening 1000a is switched depending on the state of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340. You may interpret that it is possible. In this case, the attention of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 can be improved as compared with the attention of the opening/closing plate 8300.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, a case will be described in which a plurality of members that move upstream of the first specific winning opening 1000a are provided, and a driving mode that operates a member on one side is configured to cause a ball to flow down to the auxiliary winning opening 9111. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of movable members is one (for example, the opening/closing plate 1300), and the interference member 6930 is controlled to be in the projecting state at the timing of closing the opening/closing plate 1300, thereby closing the opening/closing plate 1300. The discharge of the spheres from the storage channel 1231 in the state may be suppressed, or the period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state is set to be short (the time required for one sphere to be discharged from the discharge port 1150). It is possible to suppress the discharge of the sphere from the storage channel 1231 by setting the time to be less than 0.2 seconds.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 is configured as a general winning hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a winning opening related to a lottery for special symbols. In this case, the special symbol 2 is configured to be able to obtain the lottery of the special symbol 2 by the ball entering the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 on the basis of the control that changes in preference to the special symbol 1, so that the jackpot game of It is possible to prevent the variation of the special symbol 1 from starting immediately after the end.

Although the rolling plate 9112 is configured as a fixed plate in the ninth embodiment, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling plate 9112 changes its state between a state of retracting from the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state where it does not collide with a game ball) and a state of projecting to the front side of the thin plate member 9110 (a state colliding with a game ball). It may be configured as a movable plate which is driven and controlled as described above. In this case, the operation pattern is exemplified in various modes. For example, it may be a constant operation after the power is turned on, or a predetermined operation starting from the start of a big hit game.

In the ninth embodiment, the case where the operation speed of the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 when the drive (excitation) of the solenoid 1510 is released is substantially constant (depending on the restoring mode of the return spring of the solenoid 1510) has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a damper that applies a load to the power transmission member 5400 after the auxiliary transmission member 8340 is in the closed state during the return operation of the power transmission member 5400 may be provided. In this case, since the period during which the opening/closing plate 8300 is maintained in the open state can be extended after the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed, it is possible to easily control the opening on one side.

In the above-described ninth embodiment, a case has been described in which the entrance to the auxiliary entrance 9111 is switched on the assumption that the opening/closing plate 8300 changes its state toward the open state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the balls may enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 at a predetermined rate during the period in which the opening/closing plate 8300 maintains the closed state. For example, another movable object having a constant motion may be provided, and a ball may collide with the movable object to cause the ball to enter the auxiliary ball entrance 9111.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the sphere is discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181 and the number of spheres equal to or more than the storable number of the storage channel 1231 can pass through the first specific winning opening 1000a. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the volume of the storage channel 1231 may be variable. In this case, the number of balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 can be made to correspond to the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the specific area detection sensor 4860, the non-specific area detection sensor 4870, and the like are illustrated as the detection unit that detects the ball discharged from the discharge port 1150 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, the opening of the outlet 1150 (or the opening arranged in the vicinity of the opening) may be configured as the detection unit (ball passage sensor). In this case, it is possible to suppress the time delay from the discharge of the ball from the discharge port 1150 to the detection of the ball by the detection means as much as possible.

In the tenth embodiment, the operation of the movable member 10181 discharges the spheres from the middle of the storage channel 1231 to create a space inside the storage channel 1231, which is advantageous for the player who can aim for over-winning. Although the case where various changes occur has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ball discharged from the middle of the storage channel 1231 by the operation of the movable member 10181 has a predetermined probability of falling detection sensor (a detection sensor that sets the V flag 203s to OFF, a third discharge path sensor of the thirteenth embodiment). (Same as 13813). In this case, the movement of the movable member 10181 causes the sphere to be discharged from the middle of the storage flow path 1231, so that not only the change advantageous to the player but also the disadvantageous change may occur.

In particular, in the tenth embodiment, since a plurality of types of operation patterns of the movable member 10181 are prepared, the player is notified in advance by which operation pattern the movable member 10181 is driven, so that the player can: Play the ball in a mode that allows the discharge of the ball from the middle of the storage channel 1231 (as an example, always continue firing (without hitting)) or shoot the ball so that it does not enter the storage channel 1231 as much as possible. It is possible to select whether to play the game in a firing mode that adjusts the execution and the stop of. That is, the player selects whether to aim for the excess prize by knowing the risk that the V flag 203s may be set to OFF, or to eliminate the risk that the V flag 203s is set to OFF instead of giving up the excess prize. can do.

In the first control example described above, the case where the periphery of the first variable winning device 6000 is brightly turned on based on the operation of the operation button 300 and the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 can be grasped has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the brightly lit part does not have to be in the vicinity of the first variable winning device 6000, but may be in a wide range (center frame 86 etc.) including the first variable winning device 6000.

Note that various modes are exemplified as means for changing the lighting mode of the transmission lamp 227b. For example, a predetermined clock pulse generation circuit is provided in the audio lamp control device 113, data of the lighting mode is transmitted to the lamp control device 227 at the rising edge of the clock pulse, and the transmitted data is corresponded at the falling edge of the clock pulse. The lamp may be turned on. In this case, when turning off the light, the data corresponding to the turning off may be transmitted to the lamp control device 227. It may also be combined with a latch.

Further, a plurality of types of lighting pattern tables may be prepared in advance, and the lighting mode of the lamp control device 227 may be switched by switching the tables. Further, the lighting mode may be switched by combining this lighting pattern table with the above-mentioned clock. Further, the display mode may be changed by setting a command, or the control may be performed using a serial port driver.

The intensity of light emission of the lamp control device 227 may be based on a so-called dynamic lighting system (a lighting system that makes a difference in light and dark by changing a time interval of lighting and extinguishing), or may be due to a high and low voltage.

In the first control example described above, the case where the transmission lamp 227b is kept lit while the operation effect is successful has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the operation button 300 is pressed, the transmission lamp 227b may be turned on for a short period (for a moment). In this case, attention to the storage channel 1231 can be improved. Further, based on the success of the operation effect, not the lighting of the lamp but, for example, how many remaining balls to enter the storage channel 1231 may be notified.

In the first control example, when five or more spheres are stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 and the interference member 6930 is retracted by operating the operation button 300, the sphere flows into the specific region 4830. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of spheres stored on the upstream side of the interference member 6930 is set to 4 or less, and the interference member 6930 is in the retracted state, so that the general winning opening is arranged at a position where the stored spheres can pass. You may do it. In this case, the interference member 6930 can be configured as a so-called “holding device”.

In the first control example described above, the case where the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 is notified by the display in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the round in which the operation effect is executed may be moved forward by one round, and the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 may be notified in the round game after the round in which the operation effect is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls from accumulating too much in the storage channel 1231 before the notification.

Further, in the round game R in which the operation effect is executed, when notifying the number of balls to be entered into the storage flow path 1231, the time that is insufficient to reach that number (continuously firing balls) In such a case, it is desirable to execute the notification at an insufficient time). As a result, even if the ball is continuously emitted from the start of the round game R, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball enters the storage channel 1231 too much at the notification execution timing.

In the first control example, the case where the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is the same in the operation effect has been described, but the operation speed is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation speed of the display pointer 719 and the number of displayed images may be controlled to be changeable based on a predetermined condition. As the predetermined condition, for example, the number of times the special symbol changes up to the big hit, the number of points accumulated by the number of games, and the like are illustrated. In this case, for example, if the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is large, or if the privilege is high, by controlling the difficulty of the operation effect to be low, the burden required by the player until the jackpot (the number of fluctuations, The greater the number of games played, the greater the profit that the player can obtain by the operation effect.

Here, examples of the degree of difficulty include the degree of difficulty of the operation effect itself and the degree of difficulty of obtaining a profit after the operation effect. When the difficulty of gaining profit after the operation effect is high, for example, the operation effect and the accompanying execution timing of the notification are in the latter half of the round game R (the period when a prescribed number of balls can enter the storage channel 1231). It is illustrated that it is arranged in (later). In this case, a situation may occur in which the number of balls entering the storage channel 1231 exceeds the number notified as the number of balls to enter the storage channel 1231 at the notification timing.

Further, the difficulty level of the operation effect itself may be associated with the difficulty level of profit acquisition after the operation effect. For example, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is slow, it is easy to succeed in the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is long, the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 by that time is set. There is a possibility that more balls than the number notified will enter. On the other hand, when the operation speed of the display pointer 719 is fast, it is difficult to succeed in the operation itself, but since the time elapsed until the operation timing is short, the number of balls to be entered into the storage channel 1231 by that time is short. It is possible to prevent more than the number of balls informed as.

Since the duration of the remaining round game R is different depending on the execution timing of the notification, the display effect to be adopted may be controlled to be switchable in correspondence with the duration of the remaining round game R. For example, if the remaining round game R has a short duration, the display effect is configured with a video that can be completed in a short period, and if the remaining round game R is sufficiently long, it is displayed with a video that continues for a long period. You may configure the performance. In this case, for example, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the loading of the moving image does not end in the remaining time of the round game R and the round game R ends without being displayed.

In the first control example described above, the number of balls to enter the storage channel 1231 is nine, which is less than the specified number. However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of balls to enter is arbitrary. Can be set to. For example, by controlling an extremely small number (for example, two) of balls into the storage channel 1231, it is possible to control so that the profit obtained by the player is increased. In this case, the player can be prompted to stop the ball firing at the start of the round when the notification is started. At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 or the like may give a notification such as "Stop firing".

In the first control example described above, the case where the interference member 6930 operates immediately when the operation button 300 is pressed is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation timing of the operation button 300 in the operation effect and the operation timing of the interference member 6930 may be shifted for a predetermined period. In this case, it is possible to prevent the operation button 300 from being operated with the state in the vicinity of the interference member 6930 (flowing state of the ball) as a guide, and it is possible to improve the attention to the operation effect.

In the first control example described above, the timing at which the error command is set in S1515 is the timing at which the sphere is discharged from the storage channel 1231 and the solenoid 1510 is turned off. When the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 even after the setting, the discharge from the storage channel 1231 is continued, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, another movable object that restricts the passage of the balls of the discharge port 1150 is provided, and when the power is turned on, it is driven (excited) so as to allow the passage of the balls of the discharge port 1150, and while the error command is generated. May be controlled so as to change the state so as to restrict passage of the sphere. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the sphere remaining in the storage channel 1231 from being discharged from the storage channel 1231 at the timing when the error command is generated, it is not illegal, and some trouble (ball clogging, sphere If an error command is set for deceleration due to dirt, etc., the disadvantage to the player can be reduced. After that, by canceling the error command by turning off the power and turning on the power again, the game can be restarted from the state where the ball remains in the storage channel 1231 (the state immediately before the error command is set). ..

The control of the movable object is not limited to the control based on the presence/absence of the error command setting. For example, control may be performed so that the state changes when the power is turned on and off. In this case, for example, when the game cannot be continued due to a sudden power failure, the balls stored in the storage channel 1231 can be prevented from being discharged from the storage channel 1231.

Further, the control mode of the movable object may be changed depending on whether or not the RAM 203 is cleared before and after the power is turned off. For example, it is not necessary to be able to restart the game from the state immediately before the error command is set until it is discovered that the setting of the error command is based on fraudulent activity and the RAM 203 is cleared. The operation of the movable object may be controlled before the game is resumed, and the balls may be discharged from the storage channel 1231.

The form of this movable object is not limited at all. For example, a driving device may be separately provided, and the regulation member 1600 may be used as the means for preventing the discharge of the balls, or the interference member 6930 can be maintained in an extended state as a process when the power is turned off. The interference member 6930 may be adopted as the movable member.

In the first control example described above, the control flow is configured based on how many rounds are started in the big hit medium performance process S2505, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control is performed based on the start of a specific effect such as the start of a round game R in which a ball can pass in the specific area 4830 or the start of a round game R in which an operation effect is started. You may make it comprise a flow. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of specification changes because it is not necessary to make a large change in the control flow even if the number of rounds in which the effect is executed is changed due to specification changes. it can.

In addition, in the big hit medium effect process S2505, the control flow is configured such that the flag turned on in the control flow when it is determined to be the third round is turned off in the control flow when it is determined to be the fifth round. , But not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flag may be controlled to be turned off at the end of the control mode set in the third round, that is, at the end of the fourth round of the round game R. In this case, it is possible to reduce the burden of changing specifications when adopting a four-round jackpot game.

In the first control example described above, as the nineteenth operation pattern, the case where the interference member 6930 retracts at the start timing of the round game R of the fifth round has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game may be withdrawn 0.5 seconds before the start timing of the round game R. In this case, the round game R of the fifth round can be started in a state in which the sphere whose downflow is regulated by the interference member 6930 is arranged at the lower end of the storage channel 1231.

In the first control example described above, the case where the operation flow path 3001 of the first variable winning a prize device 6000 emits light by pressing the operation button 300 according to the effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, regardless of whether or not there is a presentation, when the operation button 300 is operated at a predetermined timing, the surroundings of the storage channel 1231 of the first variable winning device 6000 may be controlled to emit light. In this case, it is possible to improve the player's motivation for pressing the operation button 300 when the operation effect during the round game R is not executed.

In the first control example described above, the case of controlling the first variable winning device 6000 in the sixth embodiment has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first variable winning device 8000 in the eighth embodiment may be controlled. In this case, by the action of the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340, it is possible to easily set the excess winning number and determine whether or not the excess winning occurs.

In the second control example described above, the case where the ball flows down toward the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 by the drive control in which only the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened/closed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting the opening/closing plate 1300 described in the first embodiment, and controlling the solenoid 1510 in a drive (excitation) mode that maintains the opening/closing plate 1300 in the closed state for a predetermined period during the round game R, the auxiliary ball entrance The sphere may flow down to 9111. In this case, it is possible to allow the ball to flow down to the auxiliary ball entrance 9111 without dividing the plate that guides the ball to the first specific winning opening 1000a.

Further, in this case, the period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is set to less than 0.2 seconds, so that the discharge port 1150 is again discharged before the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 (in a state where they are discharged). You can regulate the passage of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to allow the balls to flow down to the auxiliary ball inlet 9111 without reducing the number of balls stored in the storage channel 1231.

In the second control example described above, the case where the display modes of the number-of-rounds display unit 714 and the sub-round display unit 714b are controlled so as to be switched based on the elapse of the waiting time TK has been described, but this is not always the case. It is not limited. For example, it may be controlled to be switched based on the number of balls that have passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a. In this case, control is performed so as to switch the display based on the number of spheres stored in the first specific winning opening 1000a being 9 (the storage flow channel 1231 is full when the interference member 6930 is in the extended state). It is possible for the player to recognize the change timing of the display mode as the timing when the storage channel 1231 is full.

The number of spheres inside the storage channel 1231 may be determined by the value of the remaining sphere counter 203p, or a separate contact sensor may be provided in the storage channel 1231 to directly detect the number of spheres. You can

In the second control example described above, the case where the character "+ chance" is displayed as the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721 at the predetermined timing of the predetermined jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this. There is no. For example, regardless of the type of jackpot, the character "+ chance" may be controlled to be displayed as the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721 during a period in which the ball can enter the auxiliary entrance port 9111. The character "+ Chance" of the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721 may be controlled to be displayable as a swaying display during a period when the player cannot enter the ball opening 9111. For example, the character "+ chance" may be displayed when the round number display portion 714 is displayed brightly.

Further, as the excess winning probability increase notification mode 721, the character “+chance” may be continuously displayed for a certain period, or may be displayed so as to be switched between display and non-display in a short period. May be.

In the second control example described above, it is configured to control whether or not the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is opened on one side, based on the jackpot type and the time elapsed from the start of the jackpot, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the frequency of occurrence of one-sided opening and the timing of occurrence may be changed based on the type of jackpot and the elapsed time from the start of jackpot. In this case, it is possible to suppress the firing mode in which the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 is closed and the firing mode of aiming the ball to reach the auxiliary opening/closing member 8340 (to reduce the effect of the firing mode).

In the third control example described above, the case where the balls remaining in the storage channel 1231 are continuously discharged while the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by adopting the interference member 6930 and controlling the bulging state at a predetermined timing, the case where the sphere remains in the storage channel 1231 while the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state is configured. be able to. As a result, it is possible to complicate the player's selection of the firing mode of the ball, and it is possible to prevent the player from casually playing the game.

In the third control example described above, the case in which the type of the jackpot game that is transferred based on the ball passing through the specific region 4830 is one type has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of types of jackpot games, which differ in the number of rounds, the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained, the number of time saving that can be obtained after the jackpot game, etc., are prepared, and the jackpot determined by when the ball passes through the specific area 4830 You may comprise so that the kind of game may change. In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting the timing for stopping the firing of the ball aiming at the passage of the ball to the specific area 4830, and to improve the interest of the player.

In the third control example described above, the case where the small hit is determined from a plurality of small hit types based on the numerical value of the small hit type counter value C6 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of the small hit type counter value C6, the small hit A or the small hit B (or another small hit) may be determined. In this case, the relationship between the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 and the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 1300 can be made uniform.

In the third control example, the case where the time (0.4 seconds) in which the upper limit of the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 is two is set as the interval at which the small hits are continuously executed. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper limit of the number of balls to be ejected may be one (the interval for the small hit is 0.2 seconds), or may be three or more (the interval for the small hit is 0.6 seconds or more). good. In addition, it is naturally permissible to change the operation pattern of the distribution device 4850 with changing the small hitting interval.

In the third control example described above, the case where the sphere stored in the storage channel 1231 is limited to the sphere that has passed through the first specific winning opening 1000a has been mainly described, but the sphere is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as described in the fifth embodiment, the balls that have entered the second ball inlet 640 may also be configured to join the storage channel 1231. In this case, as compared with the case described in the third control example, the number of storage in the storage flow channel 1231 should be kept larger by the amount that has entered the second ball inlet 640 but flows into the storage flow channel 1231. You can

Therefore, even when the gauge configuration in which the ball is excessively guided to the second ball entrance 640 or the nail state and the ball is difficult to be guided to the first specific winning hole 1000a (or, depending on the situation) However, it is possible to prevent a sufficient number of balls from being difficult to be stored in the storage channel 1231 in the time saving game. As a result, since the timing at which the ball can pass through the specific area 4830 can be maintained for a long time by stopping the firing of the ball, the timing that the player can select as the timing at which the ball stops firing can be increased. it can.

That is, the player can stop the firing of the ball at any timing while grasping the remaining number of times saved, so that the player's concentration can be improved as compared with the case where the player plays a time saving game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, means for suppressing the timing that the player can select as the timing to stop the ball firing may be adopted. For example, by providing distribution to the variation time of the special symbol 2 (including the case where the variation time becomes long), even if the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remains Can be configured (a small hit is not executed until the variable stop). Therefore, it is possible to increase the types of modes in which the balls are discharged from the storage channel 1231 and to provide a part that is difficult to predict in the progress of the game, so that the player's interest can be improved. Furthermore, by providing the distribution for the variation time of the special symbol 2, it is possible to have a plurality of variations in the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the like, and it is possible to make the effect complicated.

Further, the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 may be configured not to join the storage channel 1231 but to act on the ball flowing down inside the storage channel 1231. In this case, the effect exerted on the spheres flowing down the inside of the storage channel 1231 may be changed according to the number (or frequency) of the spheres entering the second entrance 640.

As a first method, for example, a movable piece that can be displaced is arranged in the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second ball inlet 640, and the movable piece is displaced when the game ball collides with the movable piece. If the movable piece enters the storage channel 1231 due to the displacement, while the game ball separates from the movable piece (passes), the movable piece retracts to the outside of the storage channel 1231 by the return spring or the like. By doing so, the movable piece may be allowed to enter the storage channel 1231 to prevent (stop or decelerate) the downward flow of the sphere inside the storage channel 1231.

As a second method, for example, a sphere that has entered the second ball inlet 640 does not flow into the storage channel 1231 but partially enters (for example, arranged like the ball AP54 in FIG. 46A). It may be configured to be able to come into contact with a ball that enters the first specific winning port 1000a and flows down the storage flow path 1231 by being configured to flow down via the state of being). In this case, it is possible to associate the ball entering the second ball inlet 640 with the flow-down mode of the ball inside the storage channel 1231 while eliminating the need for the movable piece.

In the third control example described above, the case where the small hit A or the small hit B that is completed in 1.8 seconds is determined as the small hit type has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to the small hit A and the small hit B, the small hit Z that executes the above-described opening pattern in which the opening of 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times in 0.1 seconds between the openings can be determined. It may be controlled to.

In this case, it is possible to secure 3.3 seconds as the time for the balls to enter the first specific winning opening 1000a, so that a larger number of balls than the case of the small hit A or the small hit B can be used for the first specific prize. The guide to the mouth 1000a can be facilitated. In addition, since the open period (the period during which the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state) is 0.1 seconds, the sphere is not discharged from the storage channel 1231. Therefore, the ball entering the first specific winning opening 1000a in 3.3 seconds can be stored in the storage channel 1231.

For the player, the small hit Z has a position as a small hit that makes it easier to store balls in the storage flow channel 1231 at the time of one small hit, as compared to the small hit A and the small hit B. Therefore, after the small hit Z occurs, the game can be continued in a state where the spheres are sufficiently stored in the storage flow path 1231, and therefore the firing of the sphere is stopped aiming at the passage of the sphere to the specific region 4830. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in selecting the timing to perform.

In the third control example, the small hitting game execution interval corresponds to the ball entering the specific area 4830, and it is the player's interest to play the ball so that the ball easily enters the specific area 4830. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a gaming state after a jackpot game, it is possible to shift to a probability changing state with a predetermined probability, and a ball passes through the specific area 4830 to turn on a fall flag (a flag that shifts the probability changing state to a normal state or a time saving state). It may be controlled to be set. That is, since it is disadvantageous for the player to enter the ball into the specific area 4830, it is possible to execute the game in a game mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area 4830 while the probability variation state continues. it can.

Here, in the third control example, since three or more spheres are discharged from the storage channel 1231 at a time, the spheres will pass through the specific area 4830 with a high probability, and therefore the spheres are moved to the specific area 4830. As a game mode in which it is difficult to enter the ball, for example, a mode in which the number of balls entering the detection sensor 1240 (reservoir flow path 1231) is 2 or less for one small hit game, or a small hit game In order to maintain the interval in a period in which only two balls are discharged, a mode in which the holding of the special symbol 2 is not stopped is exemplified.

In the third control example, as the small hit type, the small hits A and B in which the number of discharges from the storage channel 1231 during the small hit game is small have been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as another operation mode of the small hit C which is completed in the same 1.8 seconds, the opening/closing plate 1300 changes from the closed state to the open state, and after maintaining the open state for 0.2 seconds, changes to the closed state. Then, the operation is performed in such a manner that the closed state is maintained for 1.4 seconds, the state is changed to the open state, and the open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds, and then the state is changed to the closed state. The driving to the open position may be omitted (or the operation may be returned to the closed position in the minimum time). In this case, when a small hit C occurs, it is possible to discharge a large number of balls from the storage channel 1231 while reducing the probability of passing the balls to the specific region 4830, so that the number of stored balls up to that point is significantly reduced (reset). The meaning of the small hit can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved by providing surprise to the player.

In addition, the small hit C is a great loss to the player that the meaning of storing the spheres in the storage flow path 1231 is suddenly lost after passing the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 several times to pass the spheres to the specific region 4830. Since it is a small hit to be felt, it is desirable to set the probability of occurrence to several% (for example, 0.1%). In addition, in order to distinguish from the other small hits A and B, the effect dedicated to the small hit C may be controlled to be executed by the third symbol display device 81, or common to the other small hits A and B. You may make it difficult to notice the discharge of a large number of balls until the player finishes the production and confirms the storage flow path 1231 by looking.

In the third control example described above, the case where the opening and closing plate 1300 is in the closed state after the small hit game and the balls are discharged entirely from the storage channel 1231 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is in the closed state, the number of discharges is adjusted by another drive device that is arranged so that the regulating member 1600 can be maintained in the stored state, or the interference member 6930 is arranged in the storage channel 1231 to open/close the plate. Even when 1300 is closed, the number of ejected balls may be adjusted by the interference member 6930. In this case, for example, a long variation (for example, about 2 to 3 minutes) is selected as the variation of the special symbol, and even if the opening/closing plate 1300 is maintained in the closed state for a predetermined time, the sphere inside the storage channel 1231 is selected. It is possible to prevent the number of the cells from decreasing.

In the fourth control example described above, the starting round Rpb is the third round, and the case where the effect round Rpt, the post-effect round Rpa, and the V winning round Rv are continuously formed is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. There is no. For example, the jackpot game may be configured with 16 rounds, which is more than 6 rounds, and the starting round Rpb may be configured instead as the 10th round, or both the 3rd round and the 10th round may be configured as the starting round Rpb. May be. In this case, if the timing for setting the corresponding effect start flags 223ya to 223yd to be changed, the control flow (control flow of effect switching process (S4701)) can be diverted, so that the specification can be changed easily. You can

In the fourth control example described above, the case where the effect in the round game R and the effect in the interval period are separated is described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if it is determined during the previous round (post-production game round Rpa) of the V-winning round Rv that the game ball passes through the specific area Rv in the V-winning round Rv, the V-winning round Rv and the post-production game. It is also possible to execute the effect from the middle of the interval period between the round Rpa and the V winning round Rv. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect from being delayed even when a long effect is executed.

In the fourth control example, even if the ball is continued to be fired after the word "Do not hit" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the ball flows from the storage channel 1231 during the fourth round game R. Since the discharge sensor is controlled so as not to be discharged, the case has been described in which the specified number of balls does not enter the detection sensor 1240, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the fourth round game R, the opening and closing plate may be closed (long closed) at a predetermined timing, and the ball may be discharged from the storage channel 1231. In this case, if there are a plurality of balls on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300, an additional ball is generated in the detection sensor 1240, so the fourth round game R ends without waiting for a prescribed time (30 seconds). there's a possibility that. Therefore, as a disadvantage given to the player when the ball is continued to be fired after being displayed as "Do not hit" on the third symbol display device 81, the effect executed in the fourth round game R is in the middle. There can be a disadvantage that you can only see up to.

In addition, when such a disadvantage is provided, it is desirable that the timing of “do not hit” is before the storage channel 1231 is full. For example, the number of spheres stored in the storage flow channel 1231 is monitored from the detection mode by the detection sensor 1240 and the detection mode of the spheres passing through the discharge port 1150, and the number of spheres inside the storage flow channel 1231 becomes full. When it is near the tongue (for example, 7), "Do not hit" may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where an extra ball reaches the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 1300 due to the slow execution of the display, although the firing of the ball is stopped according to the display.

In the fourth control example, when the storage channel 1231 is filled with spheres, a predetermined operation effect is executed during the round game R, and when the operation effect is successful, advantageous information in the next round game R is obtained. The case has been described in which the predetermined profit can be obtained by playing the next round game R according to the information (the ball can be passed through the specific area 4830), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined operation effect is executed at an interval between rounds which is started when a specified number of balls enter the detection sensor 1240, and when the operation effect is successful, advantageous information in the next round game R is acquired. It may be possible to obtain a predetermined profit by playing the next round game R according to the information. In this case, since the operation effect can be executed in the invariable period depending on the game mode of the inter-round interval, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the operation effect is interrupted.

In the above fourth control example, a case will be described in which the Xth sphere has entered the storage channel 1231 due to the fact that the detection sensor 1240 has detected the sphere for a long time (2 seconds). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of spheres stored in the storage channel 1231 at the start of the round game R is controlled so as to be determined in advance by a predetermined counter (winning number counter 203w, discharge number counter 203x), and the spheres are stored. On the other hand, the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 1240 after the start of the round game R is added, and when it is determined that the total has reached the specified number (10 in this control example), the Xth ball is It may be determined that the player has entered the ball.

In the fifth control example described above, in the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52, the period in which the opening/closing plate 12300 repeatedly changes between the open state and the closed state is configured to be one second intervals, but it is not necessarily limited to this. It can be changed by design. For example, the interval may be shortened or lengthened, or the interval may be different, depending on the degree of deceleration of the ball when the load is applied from the rolling arc portion 12252, the frequency with which the continuous ball is desired to be generated, and the like. May be combined to form an operation scenario. In this case, basically, the shorter the distance is, the larger the total load that the ball receives when moving forward and backward while being sandwiched between the opening/closing plate 12300 and the rolling arc portion 12252 is. The action becomes remarkable, and continuous balls are likely to occur.

In the fifth control example described above, the operation scenario 51 and the operation scenario 52 are the closing (short closing) of the opening/closing plate 12300 that cannot discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231 and the opening/closing plate that can discharge the sphere from the storage channel 1231. Although it is described as a difference from the closing (long closing) of 12300, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 capable of discharging the spheres from the storage channel 1231, an operation scenario of performing a closing operation (second long closing, 0.4 second closing) in order to have a variation in length is described. It may be provided. In this case, the longer the opening/closing plate 12300 is closed, the larger the number of spheres discharged from the storage channel 1231 is. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 12300 is next opened, the number of spheres that can be entered is large. can do.

In the fifth control example described above, the case in which the tempo of winning (the period required to win the specified number of winnings) is changed by closing the opening/closing plate 12300 for a short time has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the long-time closing of the opening/closing plate 12300 is executed immediately after the start of the round game R, and from the start of the round game R until the ball is actually guided by the detection sensor 1240 (until the opening/closing plate 12300 is in the open state). ) May be secured for a long period. In this case, when the open/close plate 12300 is in the closed state, it reaches the front side of the open/close plate 12300, reaches the end face 3251b before the open/close plate 12300 is in the open state, and falls between the detection sensor 1240 and the end face 3251b. The struck ball heads for the outlet 66 as it is.

In another example of the fifth control example described above, a case has been described in which the V flag 203s may be set to off by a ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 during a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. There is no. For example, if a probability variation state is provided as a game state that shifts after the jackpot game is over, and a special symbol that fluctuates mainly in the probability variation state (for example, special symbol 2) is provided with a small hit distribution, during a small hit game. The falling flag (the flag that shifts the probability variation state to the normal state or the shortened state) may be set to ON by the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 and that has entered the third discharge path sensor 13813.

In this case, for example, as the small hit type, the second switching device 13850 allows the ball to pass the third discharge path sensor 13813, and the second switching device 13850 allows the ball to pass the third discharge path sensor 13813. The two-switching device 13850 may be provided with a small hit to regulate. As a result, the probability variation state can be configured as a game feature in which there is a possibility that the probability variation state will be ended by the ball that has entered the detection sensor 1240 in the small hitting game during the probability variation state.

In another example of the fifth control example described above, a case has been described in which the discharge path sensor 13810 that guides the ball is switched according to the states of the switching devices 13840 and 13850 that are switched in conjunction with the operation of the solenoid 1510, but not necessarily. It is not limited to this. For example, whether or not a ball rides at a predetermined probability (a big hit type, a game mode, etc., a gate passage timing when a big hit game is started by passing a predetermined gate, etc., is provided downstream of the discharge port 1710. A rotating member that rotates at a constant speed is provided with a ball receiving portion on which the ball rides, and the ball moves a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) after the ball rides on the ball receiving portion. The rotating member may be configured to rotate so as to pass through a falling sensor that turns on a falling flag (a flag that shifts the probability variation state to the normal state or the time saving state).

In another example of the fifth control example, while the resistance change member 13854 is in contact with the special rotation member 13851, the special rotation member 13851 does not rotate under the weight of the restriction member 13852 (the resistance is sufficient. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special rotation member 13851 may slowly rotate (the resistance is slightly small) due to the weight of the restriction member 13852 even while the resistance change member 13854 is in contact with the special rotation member 13851. By setting this rotation speed to a rotation speed sufficient to return the regulation member 13852 to the collapsed state in 5 seconds, the regulation member 13852 is collapsed at the timing when the short opening/closing during the round game R is started. It can be in a state.

In the other example of the fifth control example, the case where the resistance change member 13854 interferes with the left and right ends of the defining portion 13830 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the interference may be made only at one end of the defining portion 13830 (end reached by the operating member 13820 when the solenoid 1510 is in the excited state). In this case, the arrangement of the restricting member 13852 is maintained during the inter-round interval, the solenoid 1510 is excited, and the restricting member 13852 goes to the collapsed state only after the round game R of the next round is started. Therefore, during the inter-round interval. It is possible to configure a high playability by increasing the occurrence rate of events in which the balls discharged from the storage channel 1231 are guided to the third discharge path sensor 13813.

In another example of the fifth control example described above, the case where the resistance increase of the special rotation member 13851 is canceled after the inter-round interval has passed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the resistance changing member 13854 may be in contact with the special rotation member 13851 even in the interval between rounds, and the posture of the special rotation member 13851 may be periodically switched while the resistance increase is maintained. In this case, the special rotation member 13851 does not return to the original state at the end or start of the big hit game, and the number of times the special rotation member 13851 changes its posture in one big hit game also differs depending on the game mode of the player. In addition, since the jackpot game is allowed to start regardless of the state of the special rotation member 13851, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and prevent capture.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Points that prevent you from winning more than the target number>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. The game is characterized in that the detection means comprises a ball entrance preventing means for making it difficult for the ball to pass through the ball entrance in a state where a predetermined number of balls have been detected to enter the ball entrance in a predetermined period. Machine A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by having passed through the mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly on the operating member with extraordinary force, extra balls are provided from the start of the operation of the operating member until the balls fall from the operating member. There is a possibility that a certain number or more of spheres may pass through the detection opening because there is a possibility that the light will pass through the detection opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to make it difficult for the predetermined number or more of balls to pass through the detection means by the ball entry prevention means. Therefore, regardless of the magnitude of the momentum of the ball in the state arranged upstream of the entrance, the ease of passage when the ball passes through the entrance is determined by It can be changed with subsequent spheres. As a result, it is possible to prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection port.

Incidentally, as the ball entrance preventing means, a means for changing the ease of passing through the ball entrance depending on the detection result of the detecting means, a means for constantly maintaining the ease of passing through the ball entrance, etc. Is exemplified.

In the gaming machine A1, the ball entrance prevention means includes a housing means for housing a ball that has passed through the ball entrance, an outlet through which the ball passes when the ball exits the housing means, and an outlet for the ball. A discharge switching unit that switches between a first state in which the ball can pass and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port, wherein the accommodating unit is provided between the ball inlet port and the discharge port. A gaming machine A2, which is formed with a volume that accommodates the predetermined number of balls at the maximum.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, the storage means is formed with a capacity for storing a predetermined number of balls at the maximum between the ball inlet and the outlet, so that the discharge switching can be performed. When the means is maintained in the second state and the balls are stored in the housing means, the balls housed in the housing means can prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the entrance.

In the gaming machine A2, while the discharge switching means is in the first state, the incoming ball switching means is formed to be maintainable in the second state, the gaming machine A3.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering from the ball entrance toward the housing means while the ball is being discharged from the housing means. The operation timings of the discharge switching means and the incoming ball switching means may be the same or different.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is provided with a driving means that is also used as the discharge switching means and the incoming ball switching means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the pair of switching means can be operated by the driving means that also serves as the switching means. As a result, space saving and cost saving can be achieved.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the discharge switching means changes from the first state to the first state after the entrance switching means starts changing the state from the second state to the first state. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that the state changes are sequenced in the manner of starting the state changes toward the two states, and these state changes are completed substantially at the same time.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, it is possible that the ball that has entered the accommodating means after the entering ball switching means is in the first state is discharged from the discharge port. While preventing (while preventing irregular winning), since the ball switching means can be started from the second state before the discharge of the ball from the discharge port is completed, the discharge from the discharge port is possible. It is possible to reduce the number of balls that flow down through the game area through the entrance switching means and go to the outlet, as compared to the case where the operation of the entrance switching means is started after completion.

The ordering of the state changes may be performed by sequentially transmitting the driving force to each switching unit, or each switching unit may be provided with a dedicated driving unit to control the timing. May be.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is provided with a changing means for changing the maximum number of accommodated accommodation means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, it is possible to change the maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means by the changing means, so that it can be temporarily (for example, in a specific round) predetermined. It is possible to form a state in which more than the number of balls is accommodated in the accommodation means. Thereby, the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, by using the accommodating means having the same shape, it is possible to reconfigure the gaming machine in which a predetermined number of numerical values are changed (it is possible to cope with a difference in specifications). As a result, the development cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the shape is made for each specification.

In the gaming machine A6, the ball entrance is communicated with a first ball entrance and the housing means downstream of the first ball entrance, and a ball flowing down the game area is allowed to pass therethrough. A second ball entrance through which the possibility of passage is switched by the ball entrance switching means, and a case where a ball enters the housing means from the first ball entrance and a case where the ball enters from the second ball entrance. The maximum accommodation number of the accommodation means is changed depending on the case where the ball enters the means, and the changing means selectively sets from which entrance the ball can pass. Gaming machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the ball entering from the first entrance and the ball entering from the second entrance can both be stored in the accommodation means. Therefore, the required space can be suppressed as compared with the case where separate accommodating means are provided for each.

In the gaming machine A6, the changing means includes an interfering means capable of projecting to the inside of the accommodating means, the interfering means interfering with a sphere overhanging inside the accommodating means and the accommodating means. A gaming machine A8, which is configured such that the maximum number of accommodation units can be changed depending on the case where the game machine A8 is evacuated to the outside.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A6, the number of balls to be accommodated is changed by changing the internal volume of the accommodation means without changing the ball entry path of the balls into the accommodation means. Therefore, it is possible to switch the accommodation number without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In the gaming machine A8, the interference means projects from the back side of the game area to the inside of the accommodation means, and the sphere can be arranged on the front side when retreating. Gaming machine A9.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A8, the interference means at the time of retreat can be hidden by the ball arranged in front. Thereby, the operation of the interference unit can be made inconspicuous while the additional shielding member is unnecessary.

<Point AK to hide the number of stored balls>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. A detecting means for preventing a ball from passing through the entrance when it is detected that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance during a predetermined period. Is provided with a housing means for housing a ball that has passed through the ball entrance, and a visibility obstructing means for making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the ball housed in the housing means. AK1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by having passed through the mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the visibility of the downstream of the detection opening does not change, the effect of the effect of the ball passing through the detection opening becomes insufficient, and the attention may be reduced. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AK1, at least a part of the spheres housed in the housing means is made difficult to be visually recognized by the visually obstructing means, so that the effect is different depending on the number of spheres housed in the housing means. When a mechanism that causes the effect is adopted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's expectation of the effect that occurs coincides with the effect that occurs. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the above-mentioned effect.

In the gaming machine AK1, when a ball comes out of the containing means, a discharge port through which the ball passes, a first state in which the ball can pass through the discharge port, and a second state in which the ball cannot pass through the discharge port. And a discharge switching means that can be switched by, wherein the housing means is formed with a volume in which the predetermined number of balls are stored at a maximum between the ball inlet and the outlet. Machine AK2.

According to the gaming machine AK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK1, the balls can be stored in the housing means, so that it is possible to lengthen the period during which the effect produced by the balls can be maintained.

In the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, the gaming machine AK3 is configured to change the action of the visually recognizable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine AK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AK1 or AK2, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the establishment of the predetermined condition.

It should be noted that the form of the predetermined condition is not limited at all. For example, as the predetermined condition, it may be adopted that the operation means operable by the player is detected to be operated by the player at a predetermined timing. In this case, the magnitude of the degree of deviation between the operation timing instructed by the display means and the actual operation timing is detected, and the degree of change in the action of the visibility obstructing means is changed according to the magnitude. Is also good. For example, the sphere accommodated in the accommodating means may be changed to have better visibility when the degree of deviation is smaller than when the degree of deviation is large. In this case, the player's motivation for the operation of the operation means can be improved. The reverse is also possible.

Further, for example, as the predetermined condition, it may be adopted that the ball has passed through a predetermined entrance. In this case, for example, the degree of change in the action of the visibility obstructing means may be changed according to the number of balls that have passed through the predetermined ball entrance within the predetermined period. For example, the larger the number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance, the better the visibility of the balls stored in the storage means may be changed. In this case, the player can be motivated to shoot more balls. The reverse is also possible. In this case, since it is possible to enthusiastically adjust the firing strength of the ball, it is possible to suppress a daunting game.

<Points for creating a launch stop instruction effect utilizing this structure: Aim A>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. In a state in which it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a notification that prompts the player to stop the launch of the game ball toward the entrance. The game machine AKK1 characterized by being played.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by having passed through the mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of balls roll unexpectedly on the operating member with extraordinary force, extra balls are provided from the start of the operation of the operating member until the balls fall from the operating member. There is a possibility that a certain number or more of spheres may pass through the detection opening because there is a possibility that the light will pass through the detection opening.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine AKK1, since it is possible to execute the notification for prompting the stop of the firing of the game ball, the extra ball passes the detection opening by causing the player to play the game according to the notification. Possibility can be reduced.

The notification is for the purpose of preventing further ball entry, which occurs when the ball entry port is configured as a starting port and the number of holdings becomes full, and Although the lottery is obtained, the entrance is configured as a big winning opening and the purpose is to prevent a ball loss that occurs when the end of the round game is approaching.

Further, the mode of executing the notification is not limited at all. For example, the target notification may be executed by generating a display that prompts the user to stop the firing, or the target notification may be executed by turning off the display that prompts (prompts) the firing (makes it difficult to see, hide, or erase). You may do it.

Further, the influence given to the player when the notification is ignored is not limited at all. For example, the player may be notified of an abnormality (error notification) by ignoring the notification and continuing to shoot the game ball, or a ball loss may occur (probability increases). Alternatively, the profit other than the prize ball (for example, the right to shift to the special game state) may not be able to be obtained.

That is, it may be set so that the profit that would normally be obtained cannot be obtained if the game ball is fired or stopped in the firing manner as informed. In this case, even if the player shoots according to the notification, or ignores the notification and shoots or stops, similarly, it is possible to acquire the right to shift to the special game state, and the type of the special game acquired (the player after the shift). It is also possible to configure the profit given to the) to be changeable.

In addition, as the predetermined period, a period required until a predetermined number of game balls are stored in a housing means (storage channel) in which the game balls that have entered the ball entrance are stored (a period that varies depending on the mode of ball entry). ), or a period until a predetermined control mode started by entering a game ball into the entrance is ended.

The gaming machine AKK1 is provided with a lottery entrance ball slot for executing a lottery related to a change in the entrance slot state, and a special game state is started when the number of game balls stored in the entrance slot is zero. The gaming machine AKK2, which is configured so as to occur at the maximum.

According to the gaming machine AKK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK1, the number of balls stored in the entrance can be changed in size to a possibility of shifting to the special gaming state. That is, the sense of expectation of shifting to the special game state can be greatly changed depending on whether the number of game balls stored in the ball entrance is 0 or not.

As the number of game balls to be stored, the number of game balls in the case of actually accumulating the game balls, such as when the balls are retained downstream of the ball entrance, and the ball entry data to the ball entrance. For example, the number of data (held number) in the case of being held is exemplified.

In the gaming machine AKK2, the gaming machine AKK3 is configured such that a time point at which the game ball shifts to the special gaming state can be perceived in advance based on the fact that the gaming balls are stored in the ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine AKK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK2, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of an event in which the player leaves the seat before shifting to the special gaming state, by knowing the time when the player shifts to the special gaming state. ..

Examples of the means for perceiving include a method of perceiving by visually recognizing the flowing down mode of the game ball, a method of notifying by a display device, and the like.

In the gaming machine AKK2 or AKK3, even after the possibility of transitioning to the special game state occurs, the game ball is added to the above-mentioned ball entrance so that the player can enter the ball. A gaming machine AKK4, which is configured to be able to shift to a special gaming state later than a scheduled transition time.

According to the gaming machine AKK4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK2 or AKK3, the transition time point to the special gaming state changes due to the launch of the game ball after the possibility of shifting to the special gaming state occurs, It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lost before the special game state is entered.

<Points for setting the upper limit of ball entry: Aim B>
In the gaming machine AKK1, an upper limit within a predetermined condition period is set in the calculation of the predetermined number of balls, the gaming machine AKK11.

According to the gaming machine AKK11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AKK1, the higher the frequency of the ball entering the entrance, the more the game enters the entrance before the notification for prompting the stop of the shooting is executed. The number of spheres can be increased.

The gaming machine AKK1 or the gaming machine AKK11, which is configured such that the length of the predetermined period corresponds to a large number of the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine AKK12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AKK1 or the gaming machine AKK11, it is possible to easily understand the relationship between the period required for the game and the gaming ball shot toward the entrance.

In any of the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11, or the gaming machine AKK12, the number of gaming balls that can enter the ball entrance by the end of the predetermined period is determined by the manner in which the game ball enters the ball entrance. The game machine AKK13, which is configured to be changeable depending on the difference.

According to the gaming machine AKK13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machine AKK1, the gaming machine AKK11, and the gaming machine AKK12, the number of gaming balls that can enter the entrance by the end of the predetermined period depends on the entering mode. Since they are different, it is possible to allow the player to devise the manner in which the game balls are fired and prevent the player from feeling leisure.

In any of the gaming machine AKK1 and the gaming machines AKK11 to AKK13, by stopping the firing of the gaming ball based on the notification, it is possible to prevent a delay in the determination of the profit based on the ball entering the ball entrance. A gaming machine AKK14, which is provided with fixed delay prevention means capable of executing control.

According to the gaming machine AKK14, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AKK1 and AKK11 to AKK13, control for preventing delay in the determination of the profit to be given to the player due to the stop of the firing of the gaming ball Since it is feasible that the player can get the planned profit because the period (including the predetermined period) that allows the player to enter the entrance before the fixed profit is confirmed has passed. It can be prevented from being missed.

<When launching continues after the launch stop suggestion is displayed: Aim C>
The gaming machine AKK15, wherein any one of the gaming machine AKK1 and the gaming machines AKK11 to AKK14 maintains the mode of the state change of the entrance switching means before and after the notification is executed.

According to the game machine AKK15, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine AKK1 and the game machine AKK11 to the game machine AKK14, a game ball can be generated under the same condition even after the notification, even if the player can enter the ball into the entrance. The degree of freedom in selecting the firing mode can be improved.

Based on the premise that the size of the profit obtained by stopping the launch of the game ball and the profit obtained by continuing the launch can be changed, the launch mode of the game ball can be determined based on the comparison result. Can be changed.

For example, if the profit obtained by stopping the launch is the early jackpot acquisition (obtaining the right to transition to the special gaming state), and there is not enough time left to execute the jackpot game. If the player has a circumstance or is close to the closing time, etc., many payouts of prize balls based on allowing the game balls to enter the entrance even if the early win of the jackpot is abandoned. The more you win, the greater the profit for the player.

In this case, if the probability of entering the entrance is changed before and after the notification is performed (the probability of entering the ball decreases after the notification), the player stops firing the game ball and shifts to the jackpot. There is a possibility of ending the game without seeing the production. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine of the present case, if the launch of the game ball is continued even after the notification, there is a possibility that the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the entrance may be obtained, so that It is possible to increase the motivation to play until full time. Thereby, the operating rate of the gaming machine (for example, an index of the ratio of the length of the gaming time to the business hours) can be improved.

<Providing operation instructions at the time of launch stop notification>
In any of the gaming machine AKK1 and the gaming machines AKK11 to AKK15, an operation means that the player can operate is provided, and a second notification for urging the operation of the operation means is provided during the notification. A gaming machine AKK16 characterized by comprising instruction means.

According to the game machine AKK16, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machine AKK1 and the game machine AKK11 to the game machine AKK15, by letting the player operate the operation means by a notification prompting the operation of the operation means, It is possible to prevent the player from being idle while the firing is stopped.

In the gaming machine AKK16, the second notification is updated corresponding to the timing at which the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed.

According to the gaming machine AKK17, the second notification is updated in correspondence with the timing at which the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed, so that the player gets tired compared to the case where the content of the second notification is the same every time. Can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine AKK17, the second notification is configured such that the operation difficulty of the operation means becomes easier as the timing at which the notification for prompting the stop of the firing is executed becomes earlier. ..

According to the gaming machine AKK18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AKK17, the earlier the timing at which the notification for prompting the firing to be stopped is executed, the easier the success of the operation. be able to.

<Direction decision by entering the ball>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. In the state in which the detection means detects that a predetermined number of balls have entered the entrance for a predetermined period, the aspect of the effect related to the game ball entering the entrance is being executed. A gaming machine AKK20, which is defined regardless of whether a game ball enters the ball entrance in the first state.

According to the game machine AKK20, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect related to the game ball entering the ball entrance.

In the case where the gaming machine includes an operating means and executes an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation in the effect, a timing at which a predetermined number of game balls are detected to enter the entrance (timing in a predetermined period) According to the above, the mode of the effect may be changed. For example, the control may be performed such that the earlier the timing, the lower the difficulty level of the operation effect. In this case, the greater the profit that the player can obtain by the successful operation effect, the more the launch of the game ball to the entrance can be promoted (the stop of the launch of the game ball can be suppressed).

In the gaming machine AKK20, the effect is configured on the basis of the time of entry of the game ball into the right generation entrance located below the entrance.

According to the game machine AKK21, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine AKK20, an effect corresponding to the time of entering the right generation entrance is formed, so that the effect is associated with the actual downflow of the game ball. It can be visually recognized by the player, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine AKK20 or AKK21, in the case of the first state, the effect according to the entry mode of the game ball into the entry port during the period of being switched to the first state until the previous time. Gaming machine AKK22 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine AKK22, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine AKK20 or AKK21, even if the game ball entering mode is the same in the first state during execution, the first state up to the previous time Since the effects can be made different when the manner of entering the game ball into the entrance is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the effect currently being executed.

In any of the gaming machines AKK20 to AKK22, when the effect is executed in the first state, the start time of the effect is set before the first state is started. Amusement machine AKK23.

According to the gaming machine AKK23, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AKK20 to AKK22, since the effect can be started before the entrance switching means is switched to the first state, the switching timing of the entrance switching means. It is possible to continue the game while making it difficult for the player to be aware of.

Further, when the effect is started in the period in which the entry switching means is maintained in the second state, the player's attention to the effect can be improved. Further, as compared with the case where the effect starts during the first state, it is possible to easily execute the effect that continues for a long time.

<Points to suppress wasted balls at intervals while suppressing over-winning>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. , A delay means for delaying the flow of the ball at the upstream position of the entrance when the entrance switching means is in the second state, compared to the case where the entrance switching means is in the first state. A gaming machine B1 comprising:

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by having passed through the mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the outlet, it is possible to hit the ball so that no ball falling from the operating member occurs. There is a problem in that some of the actual balls are produced depending on whether or not (the player has high or low launching technique).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the delay means operates when the ball entrance switching means is in the second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side position of the ball entrance cannot be guided to the ball entrance. By delaying the flow of the ball, it is possible to easily arrange the ball at the upstream position of the ball entrance until the ball switching means switches to the first state. If the ball input switching means is in the first state while the ball is located upstream of the ball entrance, the ball is guided to the ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the effect of the player's launching technique on the actual amount of the ball, so that it is possible to configure a game machine that is easy for beginners.

The mode of the delay means is not limited. For example, it may be a fall restricting means that is composed of a horizontally long member that supports the sphere from below and restricts the fall to the end, or a convex means that is formed by a protrusion that decelerates the sphere by contact.

In the gaming machine B1, the delay means increases the degree of delay in a state where the balls are arranged on the downstream side, as compared with the case where the balls are arranged on the upstream side.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the degree of delay of the ball increases in a state in which the ball is arranged on the downstream side of the delay means, so that the attention force of the ball flowing down along the delay means is increased. Can be improved.

It should be noted that the mode of the level of the delay is not limited at all. For example, the speed of the ball may be high or low, or the backflow of the ball may be high or low when the incoming ball switching means is switched from the second state to the first state.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delay means has a shape in which a sphere arranged on the downstream side has a larger distance from the sphere arranged on the upstream side in the opening direction of the ball entrance. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the delaying means is arranged such that when it is arranged on the downstream side of the delaying means, the interval between the ball and the opening direction of the ball entrance increases. Therefore, when the ball flows down vigorously through the delay means, it is possible to suppress the ball from directly entering the ball entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the entrance switching means includes ascending means for ascending a game area when the state changes from the second state to the first state, and the delay means has the first state. A gaming machine B4, which is arranged below the rising means in the state.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the delay means is arranged lower than the ascending means in the first state, so that the ball moves from the entrance switching means. The ball can be delayed after making the player visually recognize that it has dropped. This can improve the attention to the ball.

In the gaming machine B4, a gaming machine B5 is provided, which is arranged on the upstream side of the descending path of the ball with respect to the ascending means, and is provided with ascending restricting means for restricting ascending movement of the ball and guiding it in a predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4, the upward movement of the ball is regulated by the ascent control means and the ball is guided in a predetermined direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from flying in an unexpected direction.

The gaming machine B5 is provided with a rescue ball which allows the ball guided in the predetermined direction by the ascent restriction means to enter and provides the player with a predetermined profit.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the profit that occurs when the ball passes through the entrance is caused by the ball that is thrown due to the load when the ascending means is raised. , It is possible to give the player a profit generated when the ball passes through the relief entrance. As a result, even if the ball deviates from the flow-down path to the ball entrance, it is possible to prevent the attention from being lowered, and it is possible to improve the player's interest by the movement of the ball.

The gaming machine B7 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, characterized in that the delay means includes a variable action portion that acts differently on a ball due to a difference in a manner of reaching the delay means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the action of delaying the ball can be changed depending on the manner of reaching the delay means. This makes it possible to select different spheres and give different effects.

In addition, the mode of the difference in the mode of arrival is not limited. For example, the arrival position of the ball with respect to the entrance may be different, or the downflow direction of the ball until reaching the delay unit may be different.

In the gaming machine B7, the variable action portion delays the flow of the ball that has reached the delay means at a position spaced apart from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or less, while separating the ball from the ball entrance by a predetermined distance or more. A gaming machine B8, which does not act on a ball reaching the delay means at a position.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B7, the flow of the ball is delayed by the variable action portion for a ball that is close to the entrance and the state of the entrance switching means cannot be switched in time. On the other hand, the variable action part does not act on a ball far from the ball entrance and sufficiently in time for switching the state of the ball switching means, so that an appropriate game speed can be maintained.

<Point BK to utilize the ball that arrived at the interval>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. , While the incoming ball switching means is in the first state, compared to a ball that has reached the incoming ball switching means, while the incoming ball switching means is in the second state or from the second state A gaming machine BK1 provided with a profit giving means for easily giving a profit to a player by a ball reaching the incoming ball switching means while changing the state to the first state.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection opening of the special winning opening is lateral, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection opening detects a predetermined number of balls. There is a game machine that operates by having passed through the mouth, and by dropping the balls that were on the operating member at the time of the operation, preventing a predetermined number or more of balls from passing through the detection opening of the detection means. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the ball dropped from the operating member is inevitably flowed down to the outlet, it is possible to hit the ball so that no ball falling from the operating member occurs. Depending on whether or not (the level of skill of the player's launch) is high or low, there is a problem in that the player is forced to play carefully, which may reduce the interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BK1, by adopting the profit giving means, it becomes easy to give a profit to the player by the ball reached while the incoming ball switching means changes the state, so that it is given to the player. Since it is possible to incorporate chances into the size of profits, it is possible to get rid of caution from the game and improve interest.

It should be noted that the form of the profit given to the player by the profit giving means is not limited at all. For example, prize balls may be paid out, a predetermined symbol may be drawn, the right to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game may be acquired, or the next jackpot may be confirmed.

For example, if the aspect of the profit given to the player by the profit giving means is a lottery of the special symbol 2, the special symbol 2 of the special symbol 2 is reached by causing the ball to reach the entrance switching means at a predetermined timing during the jackpot game. The number of reserved balls can be increased to a predetermined upper limit. As a result, when the high probability state is transitioned to after the jackpot game is over, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 that has been suspended starts. You can As a result, in the gaming machine in which the special symbol 2 lottery is more advantageous to the player, unintentionally winning a big prize in the special symbol 1 lottery reduces the possibility of causing a disadvantage to the player. can do.

In the gaming machine BK1, the gaming machine BK2 is characterized in that the balls are sent to the profit giving means by a load given from the incoming ball switching means.

According to the gaming machine BK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the ball is thrown to the profit giving means when the incoming ball switching means is stopped.

In the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the profit that can be given to the player by the profit giving means is equal to or more than the loss that can occur while the entrance switching means keeps the second state. ..

According to the gaming machine BK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine BK1 or BK2, the player's attention to the profit giving means can be improved, and the game is played so that the profit given by the profit giving means can be obtained. Can be directed to do so.

The gaming machine BK4 in any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, wherein the profit-giving means is controlled so that a plurality of types can be selected for a period maintained in the second state.

According to the gaming machine BK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, a plurality of types of periods in which the profit giving means is maintained in the second state are selected. It is possible to make it difficult to shoot a ball by checking the timing of change to the second state. Therefore, in order to obtain the profit obtained by passing the ball through the profit giving means, it is possible to configure the game property that the ball has to be continuously fired.

<Points for adjusting the jackpot game>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. When the entrance switching means maintains the first state, the balls that can pass through the entrance are associated with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance before the first state was formed. A gaming machine C1 comprising a number changing means capable of changing the number.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, by the number changing means, the number of balls passing through the ball entrance in the state where the ball entering switching means forms the first state Since it can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the entrance in the case of forming one state, in the series of operation patterns in which the entrance switching means repeatedly forms the first state, the profit given to the player is reduced. Adjustments can be made.

The method of adjusting profits is not limited. For example, due to the fact that a large number of balls have passed through the ball entrance when the ball entrance switching means has previously formed the first state, the ball entered when the ball entrance switching means has formed the first state next time. A mode in which the number of balls that can be entered into the mouth is suppressed may be used, and when the entrance switching means forms the first state next time due to the same phenomenon, the player's profit (not limited to the payout, For example, the right to shift to the high-probability state may be acquired) may be increased.

In the gaming machine C1, the number changing means is a storage means for storing the sphere that has passed through the ball entrance, a discharge opening through which the sphere passes when the ball exits the storage means, and a ball for the discharge opening. Of the discharge switching means, and a discharge switching means for switching the discharge switching means between a second state in which a ball cannot pass through the discharge port and a discharge switching means that can operate in a plurality of types of operation modes. A gaming machine C2, comprising: an operating mode switching means capable of changing the number of balls discharged from the housing means depending on a difference in operating mode.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the number of spheres stored in the storing means can be changed by the operation mode switching means, so that the spheres remain in the storing means. It is possible to change the number of remaining balls. This makes it possible to change the number of spheres required to fill the housing means with spheres, and to physically change the maximum number of spheres that pass through the ball entrance.

In addition, the mode of the difference in the operation mode is not limited at all. For example, different operation periods are used, and when a plurality of discharge ports are arranged, which discharge port the discharge switching unit is operated (operation target) is changed.

In the gaming machine C2, the number changing means is provided with an interval maintaining means for maintaining a discharge interval of balls from the discharge port, the gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the interval for discharging the balls from the discharge port is maintained by the interval maintaining means, so that the discharging is performed regardless of the number of balls stored in the housing means. The number of balls to be discharged from the discharge port can be specified according to the length of the period during which the switching unit is in the first state. Therefore, the number of spheres discharged from the discharge port can be strictly changed according to the length of the interval determined in advance by the jackpot pattern.

The form of the space maintaining means is not particularly limited. For example, the flow path shape formed so that the direction of the load received by the ball immediately preceding the discharge port from the ball following the discharge port may be perpendicular to the direction in which the discharge port is opened may be used as the means, or from the inner wall of the containing means. A rib that is convexly provided and that applies a load to the ball to decelerate the ball may be used as the means.

In the gaming machine C3, the spacing maintaining means is provided with a projecting portion projecting from an inner side surface of the housing means in a flow path of the sphere in the vicinity of the discharge port.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, since the projecting portion is projected in the flow-down path, the flow-down sphere is brought into contact with the projecting portion to decelerate the sphere, which is close to the discharge port. It is possible to prevent the flow-down velocity from changing significantly between the sphere and the sphere whose distance from the discharge port is short, and to make the flow-down velocity of the sphere uniform.

In the gaming machine C4, the accommodating means is provided with a discharge path that causes the balls to continuously flow downward in a predetermined flow direction immediately before the discharge port, and the projecting portions are staggered from opposing surfaces forming the discharge path. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being projected at predetermined intervals.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the projecting portions are alternately projected from the facing surface at predetermined intervals, so that the projecting portions collide with the balls flowing down the discharge path to move the balls. It is possible to cause the projections to collide with each other at predetermined intervals while shifting the position in the vertical direction of the predetermined flow-down direction, and to maintain the action of decelerating the ball for a long period of time.

In the gaming machine C5, the accommodating means includes a rolling discharge plate portion that is connected to the discharge path and rolls a ball immediately before being discharged from the discharge port, and rolls the rolling discharge plate portion. A gaming machine C6, wherein the flow-down speed of the ball is formed so as to be higher than the flow-down speed of the ball flowing down the discharge path.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the balls rolling on the rolling discharge plate portion flow down at a higher speed than the balls flowing down the discharge path, so the balls stored in the storage means. Regardless of the number of balls, the tempo (time interval) at which the balls are discharged from the discharge port can be kept constant.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the ball entrance is provided with a starting opening for determining a big hit of a special symbol by the passage of a ball.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the number of times of special symbol big hit determination can be associated with the number of balls entered into the entrance. As a result, the number of payouts in the big hit game can be changed depending on the number of times the special symbol is determined until the big hit is obtained.

In the gaming machine C7, there is provided a starting ball passage switching means for switching whether or not a ball passing through the starting opening can enter the accommodating means, and the starting ball passage switching means operates in conjunction with the entering ball switching means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C7, the number of drive devices provided can be reduced.

By the way, the discharge port includes a first discharge port and a second discharge port which are arranged at different positions, and the discharge switching unit independently changes the state of the first discharge port and the second discharge port. The first discharge port and the second discharge port are arranged in the storage means depending on whether the ball is discharged from the first discharge port or the second discharge port (under the same conditions). It may be arranged at a position where the number of remaining balls can be changed.

In this case, the number of balls remaining in the containing means can be changed depending on whether the balls are discharged from the first outlet or the second outlet, so that the flow velocity of the balls flowing down the containing means is changed. Even in such a case, it is possible to maintain the number of balls discharged from the containing means.

The arrangement of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited at all. For example, one may be arranged at the lower end of the accommodating means and the other may be arranged at an intermediate position of the accommodating means, or both may be arranged at the lower end and a branching channel for distributing spheres is arranged upstream thereof. You can

Further, the operation mode of the first outlet and the second outlet is not limited. For example, either one may be opened or both may be opened. When both are opened, the period required to eject the same number of balls from the accommodating means can be shortened as compared with the case where the balls are ejected from a single outlet. Thereby, the interval in the big hit game can be shortened, and the number of balls discharged from the outlet during the big hit game can be reduced.

By the way, the first discharge port may be arranged at a lower end portion of the accommodating means, and the second discharge port may be arranged upstream of the first discharge port.

In this case, when the balls are discharged from the second discharge port, the balls arranged between the first discharge port and the second discharge port are used as the accommodating means regardless of the period in which the second discharge port is in the first state. Can be held. Therefore, even if the number of balls stored in the storing means varies, the number of balls remaining after discharging the balls can be easily kept constant. Further, even if the number of balls that are hit is reduced due to a ball clogging or the like, it is possible to easily form a state in which the balls remain inside the housing means.

Further, the first discharge port and the second discharge port may be arranged on the downstream side branched at the lower end of the accommodating means.

In this case, it is possible to switch from which discharge port the last discharged ball is discharged from the state in which the same number of balls are stored in the storage means by the operation mode of the discharge switching means. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the discharge mode of the ball from the behavior at the start. That is, for example, when the benefit given to the player changes depending on which discharge port the ball to be finally discharged is discharged, the attention to the flowing-down mode of the ball can be improved.

<During the round, direct as if the round had changed>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. And an opening-state switching unit configured to be able to switch between a period during which the ball easily passes through the inlet and a period during which the ball hardly passes through when the ball switching unit maintains the first state. A gaming machine CK1 characterized by.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the manner of entering the ball into the special winning opening in each round is the same, there is a problem that it may be difficult to sufficiently improve the attention to the special winning opening. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CK1, the attention to the entering mode of the ball into the entrance can be improved by the switching means during the open state while the entrance switching means maintains the first state. ..

The mode of the open state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the period may be changed by changing the operation mode of the movable object arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means, or the period may be changed based on the number of balls entering the detecting means. May be.

The gaming machine CK1 is provided with an informing means for informing a change in the profit to be given to the player while the entrance switching means maintains the first state.

According to the gaming machine CK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CK1, if the notification of the notification means is confirmed, it is understood that the profit obtained by the player has changed while the entrance switching means maintained the first state. The person can grasp. Therefore, the game mode can be adjusted by the notification of the notification means.

The notification mode of the notification means is not limited in any way. For example, while presenting the number of rounds of the jackpot game, it may be informed to make a break (switch screens or output sound) in the middle of the round game R, or turn off the display of the number of rounds. , It may be informed as if a new round game R has been started, so that it is displayed as a sub-round. In any case, when the start timing of the round game R and the timing of the notification by the notification means are the breaks in the game, the number of times the maximum number of rounds in the control state (for example, 16 rounds) is exceeded, and the break in the jackpot game is detected. By setting (for example, a break for 20 times), the interest of the player can be improved.

In the gaming machine CK2, it is configured such that a predetermined profit can be easily given to the player based on the fact that the number of balls exceeding the number allowed to pass through the entrance is guided to the entrance switching means. A gaming machine CK3, which is provided with a conditional profit giving means.

According to the gaming machine CK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CK2, it is possible to prevent all of the balls from being wasted when the number of balls that can pass through the ball entrance is shot. As a result, it is possible to link the interest to the player by the production and the substantial profit (payout of prize balls).

It should be noted that it is also possible to visually recognize that the ball has stopped passing through the ball entrance and give a notification instructing the player to continue firing so that the player does not stop firing. Various modes are exemplified as the mode of notification in this case. For example, it may be a direct notification such as "Continue to fire", a notification euphemistically indicating the number of fired such as "If you put five, you have a great chance", or "There is something visible through the ball." Notification may be made (In this case, when there is no sphere, it is not visible, and when there is a sphere, a light ray that visually displays some figure or picture should be irradiated to a predetermined position near the entrance switching means where the sphere accumulates. Is desirable).

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. , A switching drive means that is controlled to be switchable to the second state when the specified number of balls has passed through the entrance for a predetermined period of time, and the specified number of balls is used as a reference. A game machine DKK1 comprising: an adjusting unit configured to adjust an excessive number of balls entering the ball entrance.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the game machine DKK1, the adjusting means can adjust the excessive entrance into the entrance, so that the profit given to the player due to the ball passing through the entrance fluctuates in a short time. However, it can be leveled for a long time.

It should be noted that the mode of adjusting the excess ball is not limited at all. For example, the entrance switching means may be adjusted so that an equivalent excess entrance can be expected every time based on a prescribed number of balls that can pass through the entrance during the first state. ) In contrast to the first excess ball that occurs when the first state is set at the timing, the second excess ball that is generated when the first state is set at the other (plural or singular) timing is reduced. , The first excess ball and the second excess ball may be adjusted so as to be in balance, and depending on whether the time period during which the ball input switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit game The number of occurrences of excess balls may be distinguished and adjusted so that they may be balanced, or depending on whether the period when the ball switching means is in the second state is short or long (between rounds). It may be an interval or a state change during the round), and the number of occurrences of excess balls may be distinguished.

In the gaming machine DKK1, the adjusting means is configured to be able to change at least one of a frequency with which the entrance switching means is switched to the second state or a period of being maintained in the second state. Machine DKK2.

According to the gaming machine DKK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DKK1, it is possible to pay attention to the frequency and the period in which the entrance switching means is switched to the second state, and as a result, the player's attention to the entrance switching means. Power can be improved.

Various modes are exemplified as the frequency of switching. For example, the number of times of switching may be small, or whether or not the switching has occurred. That is, when the second state is switched once in the predetermined period, it is switched to the second state in comparison with the case where the second state cannot be switched in the predetermined period (when the switching has occurred 0 times). Frequent.

In addition, when the frequency of switching to the second state is high, it may be configured that an excessive ball is likely to occur, and when the frequency of switching to the second state is low, it may be configured to easily cause an excessive ball of entry. ..

In the gaming machine DKK1 or DKK2, the adjusting means includes a load applying means configured to apply a load to the game ball when the state of the entering ball switching means changes, and the load applying means is the entrance opening. A gaming machine DKK3 configured to change the load applied to the gaming ball in accordance with the distance between the gaming ball and the gaming ball.

According to the game machine DKK3, in addition to the effect of the game machine DKK1 or DKK2, it is possible to focus attention on the arrangement of the game balls when the state change of the ball entrance switching means occurs, and as a result, the player with respect to the ball entrance switching means. You can improve your attention.

In the gaming machine DKK3, the load applying means is configured such that the load applied to the gaming ball increases as the distance between the ball entrance and the gaming ball decreases.

According to the game machine DKK4, in addition to the effect of the game machine DKK3, the attention to the game ball close to the entrance can be improved. In this case, the load given to the game ball may be a load in the direction toward the ball entrance (a load along the opening direction of the ball entrance) or a load in the direction of retreating from the ball entrance ( Load along the opening direction of the ball entrance) or in a direction orthogonal to the opening direction of the ball entrance.

For example, if the load is in the direction toward the entrance, the game ball placed near the entrance will be pushed into the entrance by the load, and the expectation that excess entrance will occur will occur. It can be directed.

For example, if the load is in the direction of withdrawing from the entrance (or if the load is applied in the direction orthogonal to the opening of the entrance and the game ball slows down due to friction, etc.), Compared to the game ball far from the entrance, the closer game ball has a greater degree of deceleration of the speed toward the entrance, and the interval between the game balls can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to guide a plurality of game balls to the entrance port in a lump, so that it is possible to produce an expectation that an excessive entrance will occur.

In any one of the game machines DKK1 to DKK4, the adjusting means includes a ball entrance preventing means capable of preventing a later ball entering the ball entrance with the previous ball entering the ball entrance, A game machine DKK5, characterized in that the maintenance of the entry ball prevention by the entry ball prevention means can be determined based on the drive mode of the switching drive means.

According to the gaming machine DKK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK4, the switching drive means which is not visually recognized by the player as to whether or not the entry prevention means maintains the prevention of entry. Since it is determined based on the driving mode, the player's imagination regarding whether or not the player can enter the entrance can be agitated.

<Technical thought in consideration of V flag off route>
In any of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK5, a game ball is provided with a profit entrance that gives a predetermined profit by entering the game ball, and the mode of the game ball entering the profit entrance is switched as described above. A gaming machine DKK6, which changes in response to driving of a driving unit.

According to the gaming machine DKK6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DKK1 to DKK5, the switching drive means is used not only for switching the mode of entry into the entrance, but also for entering the game ball into the profit entrance. It can also be used to switch the sphere mode.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the predetermined profit. For example, it may be a positive profit for the player or a negative profit (loss, positive for the game store) for the player.

In the gaming machine DKK6, the gaming machine DKK7 is configured so that it is easy to enter the profit entrance as the number of balls adjusted by the adjusting means to allow excess entrance increases.

According to the game machine DKK7, in addition to the effect of the game machine DKK6, a game in which a profit from the entry into the profit entry slot is provided in addition to the payout prize ball as a benefit provided by the excess entry. Can be configured.

For example, when the profit provided by the entrance into the profit entrance is a positive profit for the player, it can be recommended that the player aim at the excess entrance and play the game.

On the other hand, for example, if the profit provided by the entrance into the profit entrance is a negative profit (loss) for the player, whether or not the player is prepared for the negative profit (loss) and aims for an excessive entrance, It is possible to let the player choose whether or not to give up (not aim) the excessive ball in order to avoid a negative profit (loss).

The gaming machine DKK6 or DKK7, wherein the profit entrance is disposed downstream of the entrance.

According to the gaming machine DKK8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DKK6 or DKK7, the attention to the gaming ball after entering the ball entrance can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines DKK6 to DKK8, a gaming machine DKK9 in which a mode of entering the game ball into the profit slot is set in correspondence with the drive mode of the switching drive means.

According to the game machine DKK9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines DKK6 to DKK8, the switching drive means can be effectively utilized.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. Switching driving means for switching the ball entering switching means to the second state when a specified number of balls have passed through the ball entrance while the ball entering switching means is in the first state, A game machine DK1 comprising: adjusting means configured to be able to adjust an excess ball entering the ball entrance based on a specified number.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DK1, the adjusting means can adjust the excessive entrance to the entrance, so that the profit given to the player due to the ball passing through the entrance fluctuates in a short time. However, it can be leveled for a long time.

It should be noted that the mode of adjusting the excess ball is not limited at all. For example, the entrance switching means may be adjusted so that an equivalent excess entrance can be expected every time based on a prescribed number of balls that can pass through the entrance during the first state. ) In contrast to the first excess ball that occurs when the first state is set at the timing, the second excess ball that is generated when the first state is set at the other (plural or singular) timing is reduced. , The first excess ball and the second excess ball may be adjusted so as to be in balance, and depending on whether the time period during which the ball input switching means is in the first state is short or long (big hit game and small hit game It is also possible that the number of occurrences of excess balls is distinguished and adjusted so that they are in balance.

The incoming ball switching means may be arranged in a single arrangement or in a plurality of arrangements.

The gaming machine DK1 includes a load applying means configured to apply a load toward the detecting means to a sphere arranged at a predetermined position on the upstream side of the detecting means in the process of the switching drive by the switching drive means. Game machine DK2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine DK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine DK1, the ball arranged upstream of the detecting means can be easily detected by the detecting means by the action of the load applying means.

The number of balls to which the load is applied by the load applying means is not limited. For example, it may be one or plural.

In the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, as a state at the time of starting the switching drive, it is possible to switch between a permissible state that allows passage of the ball to the entrance and a regulation state that regulates passage of the ball after driving. A gaming machine DK3, which is provided with state switching means.

According to the gaming machine DK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine DK1 or DK2, whether or not the ball can pass through the ball entrance regardless of the flow mode of the ball to the ball entrance or the operation speed of the ball entrance switching means. Since it can be regulated by the after-driving ball entering state switching means, it is possible to easily adjust the degree of excessive entering of the ball into the entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, the load applied from the ball to the incoming ball switching means is given in a direction along the direction in which the incoming ball switching means is driven during the switching drive. Machine DK4.

According to the gaming machine DK4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DK1 to DK3, it is possible to suppress the problem that the load from the ball prevents the incoming ball switching means from changing to the second state. ..

In addition, as a mode of applying a load from the ball, for example, the incoming ball switching means is configured to be driven in a manner of dropping (dripping) downward by switching drive, and the own weight of the ball is applied to the incoming ball switching means. The case is illustrated.

<Points to adjust the jackpot game for each round>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. Switching drive means for switching and driving the incoming ball switching means to the second state when a prescribed number of balls have passed through the incoming ball opening while the incoming ball switching means is in the first state, After the switching drive by the switching drive means is started, a permissible state allowing passage of the ball to the ball entrance, and a driven post-entering ball state switching means capable of forming a regulation state restricting passage of the ball, A gaming machine D1 comprising:

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the after-driving ball entering state switching unit switches whether or not the ball can enter after the entrance port is closed by the switching driving unit, so that an extra ball can enter. The timing can be reduced, and the number of prize balls can be made uniform throughout the big hit game.

In the gaming machine D1, the ball entrance has a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the after-drive ball entrance state switching means forms the regulation state in the first ball entrance. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the allowable state is formed in the second entrance.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the number of balls exceeding the specified number depending on whether the ball passes through the first entrance or the second entrance. Since it can be switched whether or not the ball can be entered, it is possible to improve the attention of which entrance the opening switching means opens.

In the gaming machine D2, the first ball entrance has a drop hole on the front side of the opening, and from the front side of the opening of the first ball entrance when the ball switching means starts switching to the second state. A gaming machine D3, characterized in that the ball arranged on the upstream side is also dropped in the drop hole.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, even when the ball remains on the upstream side of the first ball entrance, the ball drop hole is maintained while the entrance switching means maintains the second state. It can be dropped from the entrance and kept away from the entrance. As a result, it is possible to prevent more than the specified number of balls from passing through the first ball entrance.

<Points where spheres join the storage channel from multiple winning openings>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. A housing means for housing a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance, and a ball housed in the housing means from the housing means based on the entrance ball switching means being switched to the second state. A gaming machine EK1 which is provided with a discharging means for discharging, and is configured to be able to switch the incoming ball switching means to the first state before the discharging operation by the discharging means is completed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine EK1, the ejecting action by the ejecting means can be completed with the ball left in the accommodating means remaining, so that the number of balls that can enter the entrance in each round is related. Can be made. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the difference in prize balls throughout the big hit game.

Further, since the sphere can be accommodated in the accommodating means for a period in which the state of the sphere switching means is switched a plurality of times, the number of spheres that can pass through the sphere entrance while the sphere switching means is maintained in the first state. More balls can be stored in the storage means. As a result, since it is possible to notify the guideline of the frequency of entering the ball, it is possible to show the player the gaming efficiency of the gaming machine currently playing.

The means for indicating the game efficiency is not limited at all. For example, the ratio of the number of prize balls paid out to the number of balls to be launched (prize balls/number of balls to be launched) may be used, or each time the entrance switching means is in the first state, the number of consecutive entrances to the entrance may be increased. It may be an index indicating whether or not the ball is passed.

Note that the number of ball entrances, ball entrance switching means, and accommodating means is not limited to one, but may be plural. In this case, it is possible to provide entrance switching means and accommodating means corresponding to each entrance, and to change the status of each entrance switching means in order. You may comprise so that a state may change partially simultaneously.

In the gaming machine EK1, the gaming machine EK2 is configured such that whether or not the discharging action ends with the ball accommodated in the accommodating means left is adjustable by the manner of launching the ball.

According to the gaming machine EK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine EK1, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the game in which the gaming ball is shot toward the entrance.

In the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the ball entrance includes at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance join together. A game machine EK3 in which the accommodation means is formed by.

According to the gaming machine EK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine EK1 or EK2, the balls that have passed through the first entrance opening or the second entrance entrance merge inside the accommodation means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. Therefore, the number of balls that can pass through the second ball entrance can be changed in association with the number of balls that have passed through the first ball entrance. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts accompanying this) can be made uniform throughout the game.

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. And a storage means for storing a predetermined number of balls that have passed through the ball entrance, the ball entrance including at least a first ball entrance and a second ball entrance, and the first ball entrance. Alternatively, the gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the accommodating means is formed in such a manner that the balls that have passed through the second ball entrance merge.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the balls that have passed through the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance merge within the accommodating means capable of accommodating a predetermined number of balls. The number of spheres that can pass through the second entrance slot can be changed in association with the number of spheres that have passed through the mouth. Therefore, the number of balls passing through the first entrance and the second entrance (the number of payouts accompanying this) can be made uniform throughout the game.

In the gaming machine E1, the number of spheres that can be accommodated in the accommodating means by passing through the first ball entrance and the accommodating by passing through the second ball entrance in the empty state of the housing means A gaming machine E2, characterized in that the number of balls that can be stored in the means is different.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the number of balls that can enter the first entrance is different from the number of balls that can enter the second entrance. It is possible to improve the player's attention to whether or not the entrance port of the player is opened.

In the gaming machine E2, the number that can be accommodated from the first ball inlet is set to be smaller than the number that can be accommodated from the second ball inlet, and a predetermined upper limit number of balls are discharged in a closed state of each ball inlet. The upper limit number is set to be the same as the number that can be accommodated from the first entrance, and the first entrance is opened during opening when the second entrance is opened a plurality of times. A gaming machine E3 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, a ball that has passed through the second entrance before opening the first entrance and a second entrance after opening the first entrance The passing ball can make the actual profit to the player different.

That is, when the ball passes through the second ball entrance before opening the first ball entrance, the number of balls that can be accommodated from the first ball entrance is exceeded even if the ball passes through the second ball entrance. The amount is not discharged, and the number of balls after subtracting the remaining amount is accommodated in the first entrance, so that the number of balls that can be accommodated in the second entrance is the same as the number that can be accommodated in the first entrance. The player can only get the same profits as when the player passed the number of.

On the other hand, if after passing through the second entrance after opening the first entrance, if more balls than can be accommodated from the first entrance have passed through the second entrance, they will be deducted. Since it is not played, the player can obtain an additional profit.

The number of game balls that can be accommodated is set in various modes. For example, it can be performed by setting the length and thickness of the flow path in which the game balls are stored. Further, the change in the substantial profit given to the player is not limited to only the number of prize balls, and for example, the substantial profit given to the player may be changed depending on whether or not the ball can pass through a specific area. You can

<Points where the interference member extends>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. And an interfering means that is disposed in a downflow path of the ball that has passed through the ball entrance, and that can switch between an extended state capable of interfering with the ball and a retracted state not interfering with the ball. A gaming machine F1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the big winning opening in each round is independent, and it depends on the manner in which the balls are launched. There was a problem that a difference might occur.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the interference means is arranged in the downward path of the sphere that has passed through the ball entrance, so by maintaining the interference means in the bulged state, from the ball entrance to the interference means. The ball can be blocked in the path of, and more balls can be prevented from passing through the entrance. Thereby, the prize balls can be adjusted throughout the big hit game by the operation mode of the interference means.

The gaming machine F2 is provided with a stopping means for stopping the ball in front of the interference means in the retracted state of the interference means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, it is possible to change the interference means to the projecting state in a state where the ball is stopped in front of the interference means, so that the state of the interference means is changed in advance. The action can be hidden by the sphere compared to. Therefore, the operation can be made difficult to be noticed by the player.

In the gaming machine F2, the detention means is switched between a detention state in which the balls that have passed the detection means are detained and a passage state in which the balls that have passed the detection means are passed, and the switching mode of the detention means is changed. A gaming machine F3, characterized in that the state of the interference means can be changed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of state changes of the interference means in the passing state of the stopping means, so that while maintaining the stopping means in the passing state, It is possible to change the timing at which the ball passes through the stopping means by a plurality of types.

<It is difficult to predict the type of privilege from the number of stored items>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. , Provided with an operating means arranged in a downflow path of the ball passing through the ball entrance and capable of operating in a plurality of operating patterns, and changing profits obtainable by a player based on the operating pattern of the operating means A gaming machine FK1 characterized by being configured to be possible.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round is determined based on the situation on the upstream side of the special winning opening, so the attention to the downstream of the special winning opening may be reduced. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FK1, the operating means is arranged on the downstream side of the ball entrance, and the profit obtainable to the player can be changed by the operation pattern of the operating means. The attention to the downstream side of can be improved.

A game machine FK1 characterized in that the game machine FK1 is provided with operation means that can be operated by a player, and the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the player operating the operation means.

According to the game machine FK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine FK1, the operation pattern of the operation means can be changed by the operation of the operation means by the player, so that the player's willingness to operate the operation means is improved. Can be made.

In the gaming machine FK2, a first benefit and a second benefit are set as a profit to be given to the player based on the game ball passing through the entrance, and the first benefit is set according to the operation mode of the operation means. An amusement machine FK3, characterized in that the mode of acquiring the privilege and the second privilege is changed.

According to the gaming machine FK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine FK2, the profit obtained by the player directly changes depending on the operation mode of the operating means, so that the player's motivation for operating the operating means can be improved. it can.

The modes of the first privilege and the second privilege are not limited at all. For example, the first benefit may be set as payout of prize balls, the second benefit may be set as confirmation of a probability variation state after a jackpot game (as a V-probability variation gaming machine), or the second benefit may be determination of a jackpot. It may be set (as a small hit game in a 1 type and 2 type mixer).

The relationship between the first benefit and the second benefit is not limited at all. For example, it may have a large or small relationship, may have another property, or may have a contradictory relationship.

Here, for example, the profits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both payouts of prize balls, which are in a relationship of size, compared with the number of payout balls in the first benefit. When there are more payout balls in the 2 benefits, the profits given to the player in the 1st benefit and the 2nd benefit are both transitions to the jackpot game state, and compared to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st benefit. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

Further, as another characteristic, for example, while the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a transition to the jackpot gaming state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is a prize. In the case of a payout of a ball, or while the profit given to the player in the first benefit is an indication of the gaming state, the payout award ball in which the profit given to the player in the second benefit is maximized And the like are exemplified.

In addition, as a conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). Information), the profit given to the player in the second benefit is the state of the game after the jackpot game is over (or information relating to the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). For example, the case of destruction is exemplified.

<Points when trying to pass "passing" without entering the entrance. Difference with "Entering Ball">
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and A game machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance into a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. In, in the above, provided is an operating means arranged in the downflow path of the ball that has passed through the ball entrance and capable of operating in a plurality of operating patterns, and the profit obtainable by the player based on the operating pattern of the operating means is obtained. A gaming machine FKK1 which is configured to be changeable and in which the game ball passes through the entrance in the second state of the entrance switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. There is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round by switching in correspondence with each round by opening the ball for a short time, which is impossible (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). No. 181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the number of balls that can be won in the special winning opening in each round depends on the situation on the upstream side of the special winning opening and the opening pattern of the special winning opening. However, there is a problem that the player's line of sight is concentrated and the entire game board surface cannot be effectively utilized.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine FKK1, the operating means is arranged on the downstream side of the entrance, and the profit obtainable to the player can be changed by the operation pattern of the operating means. The attention to the downstream side of can be improved.

In addition, the game ball that has passed through the ball entrance without entering the ball will affect the profit that can be obtained by the player, so that the player's attention to the ball can be improved. ..

In addition, when a game ball is set to be given to the player by the action of the game ball passing through the ball entrance, It is possible to construct a gaming property that expects a game ball to pass without entering the mouth. As a result, the attention of the area on the downstream side of the entrance can be improved.

In the gaming machine FKK1, the after-passage entrance port in which the game ball that has passed through the above-mentioned entrance port is arranged to be able to enter, and the ball that flows down from the upstream side of the after-passage entrance port A post-passage ball entrance switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the post-passage entrance port and a second state in which the ball flowing down from the upstream side of the post-passage entrance port cannot be guided to the post-passage entrance port, The gaming machine FKK2, wherein the after-entry ball input switching means is configured to be able to shorten the interval for switching to the first state as the game ball enters the ball inlet.

According to the gaming machine FKK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine FKK1, whether or not a game ball enters the entrance will affect whether or not the ball enters the entrance after passing. , The attention to the entrance can be improved.

In the gaming machine FKK1 or FKK2, provided with a lottery entry slot that is arranged upstream of the entry slot and can start a predetermined lottery with the entry of the game ball, depending on the lottery result of the lottery entry slot. A game machine FKK3, wherein a pattern in which the state of the entrance switching means is switched is selected.

According to the gaming machine FKK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine FKK1 or FKK2, the switching of the state of the ball entrance switching means occurs based on the pattern selected by entering the lottery entrance. That is, the entry of the game ball into the lottery entrance is a condition for changing the state of the entry switching means, so that the area where the player's attention is improved can be expanded to the lottery entrance.

In the gaming machine FKK3, the gaming ball that has entered the lottery entry ball entrance is configured to be able to enter the entry ball entrance after the passage.

According to the game machine FKK4, in addition to the effect of the game machine FKK3, the role of conditioning the state change of the game entrance switching means in the game ball entering the entrance, and the entrance into the entrance after passing In this case, the player can share the role of giving a predetermined profit to the player. Thereby, the attention of the game ball can be improved.

The gaming machine FKK5 according to any one of the gaming machines FKK1 to FKK4, wherein the entry switching means has a plurality of rules for switching between the first state and the second state.

According to the gaming machine FKK5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines FKK1 to FKK4, attention to the entry switching means can be improved.

In addition, as a plurality of prepared rules, for example, a rule in which the length of the period maintained in the first state is different, or a rule in which the state change start timing after the game ball starts flowing down toward the entrance switching means is different. Are exemplified.

<Point 1 that makes it difficult to predict whether to win a V prize from the attacker's actions>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth is switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detection means for detecting the entrance into the entrance, and the entrance. A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. In a gaming machine provided with a profit switching means that can be switched with, in a mode of operation in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, a case where a ball can pass through the profit giving means, and the profit A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it can be switched between a case where a ball cannot pass through the giving means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through the special winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution. There is a game machine that does this (for example, see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening during the period when the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route.In the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, in the operation mode in which the condition for maintaining the incoming ball switching means in the first state is the same, the case where the ball can pass the profit giving means and the case where the ball passes the profit giving means. Since it can be switched to the case where it is impossible, there is no interruption of the ball entering the entrance. As a result, it is possible to maintain the attention to the ball moving toward the entrance.

The gaming machine G1 is provided with a stopping means which is arranged upstream of the profit switching means and which is switched between a stopped state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is stopped and a passing state in which a ball passing through the detecting means is passed. , The incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, the stopping means is switched from the stationary state to the passing state, and the ball flowing down to the downstream of the stationary means is the profit switching. A gaming machine G2 characterized by reaching means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the ball passing through the ball entrance is once stopped by the stopping means arranged upstream of the profit switching means, so that the ball is profitable at an arbitrary timing. It is possible to prevent reaching the switching means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from reaching the profit switching means at an unexpected timing, no matter how the ball passes through the ball entrance while the entrance switching means is in the first state. it can.

The gaming machine G2 is provided with period changing means for changing the period during which the ball passing through the stopping means and flowing down after changing the stopping means to the passing state can reach the profit switching means. Gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period changing means changes the period during which the ball can reach the profit switching means after the ball passes through the stopping means. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game playability and improve the interest of the player until the ball reaches the profit switching means.

Incidentally, the period changing means may be a means for changing the flow-down velocity of the ball passing through the stopping means, or a means for delaying the period from when the stopping means is switched to the passing state until the ball starts to flow down, It may be a means for changing the number of balls held in the stopping means.

In the gaming machine G3, the period changing means is formed so that the number of balls retained in the retaining means can be switched according to the profit given to the player.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, it is possible to predict the profit to be given to the player by the number of balls retained in the retaining means, and therefore attention to the balls retained in the retaining means. Power can be improved.

The means for switching the number of balls retained by the retaining means is not limited at all. For example, the number of balls to be retained in the retaining means can be changed by a combination of a period in which the retaining means is in the passing state and a period in which the entry switching means is in the first state immediately after that.

That is, for example, when the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state is extremely shortened and then immediately after that, the period during which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state is extremely shortened, Since the number of balls flowing down to the downstream of the stopping means is extremely small, a large number of balls are stopped at the stopping means even if no new balls enter from the entrance.

On the other hand, if the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state is set to be sufficiently long and then the period during which the incoming ball switching means is set to the first state is extremely shortened immediately thereafter, among the balls that are stopped in the stopping means, In addition to the majority of the balls flowing downstream of the stopping means, no new balls enter from the entrance, which means that almost no balls are stopping at the stopping means.

In this way, by changing the period during which the stopping means is in the passing state and shortening the period during which the incoming ball switching means is in the first state immediately after that, the ball is stopped at the stopping means regardless of the firing mode of the ball. The number of spheres can be changed.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the entrance switching means is provided with setting means for selecting and setting a closing maintenance period in which the second state is maintained in a plurality of types, and a predetermined period from the end point of the closing maintenance period. The gaming machine G5, wherein the profit switching means is switched to the first state after a lapse of time.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the setting means forms a plurality of types of periods during which the incoming ball switching means maintains the second state. Since the period from the passage of the profit switching means to the switching of the profit switching means to the first state is formed by a plurality of types, even if the number of balls held in the stopping means is the same, the balls pass the profit giving means. It is possible to control whether to perform or not to pass. Therefore, it is possible to continuously improve the attention to the flow of the ball.

It should be noted that, for example, a period during which the incoming-ball switching means is maintained in the first state for a long enough period so that a prescribed number of balls can pass through the incoming-ball entrance, and immediately after that, the incoming-ball switching means is maintained in the second state. When the setting means selects the closed maintaining period in a manner of making it extremely short (shorter than the ball passing through the stopping means reaching the profit switching means), immediately after that, the incoming ball switching means is in the first state. By changing the state of the profit switching means from the time, it is possible to arbitrarily set the period from when the retention means is in the passing state to when the profit switching means is in the first state. Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the incoming ball switching means is switched from the first state to the second state, it is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not the ball that has passed through the staying means passes through the profit giving means. This makes it possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not a ball that has passed through the stopping means passes through the profit giving means, regardless of the number of balls that stop at the stopping means and the mode (for example, timing) of stopping.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the switching operation of the entrance switching means is not a first operation caused by a specified number of balls entering the entrance, but a second operation caused by a lapse of a specified time. As described above, the gaming machine G6 is provided with an intentional selection means for intentionally selecting.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the operation of the intentional selection means limits the switching operation of the entrance switching means to the operation at a preset time, Randomness of switching depending on the passage mode of the ball at the entrance can be eliminated. Accordingly, it is possible to secure a large amount of time during which the ball is not allowed to enter while the profit switching means is in the first state.

In addition, as the intentional selection means, it is exemplified that a state in which the balls do not pass through the entrance is achieved by passing less than the specified number of balls. This can be realized by intentionally blocking (not allowing) the ball on the way through the entrance.

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth is switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detection means for detecting the entrance into the entrance, and the entrance. A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. In the gaming machine provided with the profit switching means switched by, the flow-down mode determination means for determining whether the flow-down mode of the sphere to the profit giving means is normal, and the notification based on the determination result by the flow-down mode determination means A gaming machine GK1 comprising: a notifying means for performing.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through the special winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution. There is a game machine that does this (for example, see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that a large number of players try to obtain unfair profits due to fraudulent acts that exert a load (magnetic force or shock) on the ball before reaching the distribution unit. was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine GK1, when an abnormality is determined, the informing means informs of it, so that it is possible to suppress fraud. That is, even if the flow of the ball is illegally obstructed, there is a high possibility that the illegal profit will not be obtained by the notification, so a person who tries to illegally profit (hereinafter referred to as “cheating person” or (It is also called an “illegal person”).

The mode of determining the abnormality is not limited in any way. For example, it is possible to set a timing at which the balls are completely discharged after the profit switching means is switched to the first state, and the notification is made when the discharging of the balls is not detected even at the timing. In this case, since the notification can be given before the ball passes through the profit switching means, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction from the player.

In the gaming machine GK1, the downflow mode determination means makes a determination based on the number of balls arranged between the ball entrance and the profit giving means.

According to the gaming machine GK2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GK1, it is possible to determine whether or not the flow-down mode of the ball is abnormal regardless of how much the gaming ball is accumulated between the entrance and the profit giving means. it can.

In the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, the gaming machine GK3 is provided with an arrangement suppressing means for suppressing a change in the arrangement of the balls on the upstream side of the profit giving means after the informing means has executed the notification.

According to the gaming machine GK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine GK1 or GK2, it is possible to suppress the change in the arrangement of the balls by the arrangement suppressing means, so that the player suffers when the game is restarted when an unexpected error occurs. The loss can be minimized.

<Point 2 that makes it difficult to predict whether or not a V prize will be won based on the attacker's actions, and there is a duck>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth is switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detection means for detecting the entrance into the entrance, and the entrance. A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. A gaming machine comprising: a profit switching means that can be switched with the game machine H1, wherein the manner in which the balls reach the profit switching means can be changed by the operation mode of the incoming ball switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through the special winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution. There is a game machine that does this (for example, see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening during the period when the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route.In the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the mode in which the ball reaches the profit switching unit can be changed by the operation mode of the ball input switching unit while maintaining the state in which the ball can pass through the ball entrance. Therefore, it is possible to intentionally control how the sphere reaches the profit switching means.

In the gaming machine H1, a gaming machine H2 characterized in that the number of balls related to the time when the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state can be guided to the profit switching means.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine H1, the player can see how the balls are guided to the profit switching means from the length that the incoming ball switching means is maintained in the second state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the entrance switching means.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, a start state is formed in which the ball transfer to the profit switching means is started while the entrance switching means is being switched from the first state to the second state. Amusement machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the ball is sent to the profit switching means for the first time in the starting state, the operation of the entrance switching means is stopped immediately before the starting state, Since it is possible to set the state to the first state again, it is possible to form a game in which the start of the operation from the first state does not necessarily mean that the ball transfer to the profit switching means is started. As a result, it becomes necessary to directly confirm whether or not the sphere reaches the profit switching means, so that attention to the profit switching means can be improved.

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth is switched to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the entrance, a detection means for detecting the entrance into the entrance, and the entrance. A profit giving means for giving a predetermined profit to the player by passing the passed ball, a first state in which the ball can be guided to the profit giving means, and a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the profit giving means. In the gaming machine including the profit switching means that can be switched by, the state changing means is configured so that the entrance switching means is in a state in which the state can be changed by detecting passage of a ball, and the state changing means. The game machine HK1 is configured so that the number of balls that can be sent to the profit switching means can be switched based on the passing frequency of the balls to the game.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball that has passed through the special winning opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or a disadvantageous route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution. There is a game machine that does this (for example, see JP-A-2014-155538). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the operation mode of the opening/closing plate of the special winning opening during the period when the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is an operation for flowing the ball to the advantageous route. It is clearly divided into the mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route.In the operation mode for the case where the ball is not allowed to flow down to the advantageous route, the ball does not enter the special winning opening in the first place. Since the opening and closing plate is operated (closed), it is not possible to maintain the attention to the ball toward the special winning opening, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of focusing on the behavior of the ball entering the special winning opening. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine HK1, since the number of balls that can be sent to the profit switching means can be switched based on the frequency of passage of the balls to the state changing means, a mode in which the balls enter the profit switching means Can be changed. This can improve the attention to the behavior of the sphere that has passed through the entrance.

In the gaming machine HK1, when the frequency of entering the state changing means is higher than a predetermined frequency, an upper limit value of the number of balls sent to the profit switching means is set for a predetermined period. Machine HK2.

According to the gaming machine HK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HK1, it is possible to escape from the gaming property that the more the ball is passed through the state changing means, the better.

In the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, the gaming machine HK3 is configured to be able to send to the profit switching means, together with the balls that have passed through the ball entrance when the ball entrance switching means is opened and closed a plurality of times. ..

According to the gaming machine HK3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HK1 or HK2, it is possible to correlate the entrance to the entrance opening when the entrance switching means is opened and closed a plurality of times with the sending mode to the entrance switching means. Therefore, it is possible to increase variations of the pitching mode as compared with the case where the pitching mode for the pitching switching unit is independent by opening and closing the pitching switching unit once.

The number of times the entrance switching means is opened and closed is not limited in any way. For example, it may be counted by the number of operations of the entrance switching means, or may be counted by the number of occurrences of a combination of operations of the entrance switching means (for example, a preset operation pattern such as a small hit game).

Operation means that can be operated by the player, a storage state in which the balls entered in the entrance switching means are temporarily stored, and a passing state in which the storage of the balls is released and the balls can flow down toward the profit giving means. A gaming machine HP1 comprising: a temporary storage means that can be switched by and the state of the temporary storage means can be switched by operating the operating means.

According to the gaming machine HP1, the player can switch the state of the temporary storage means at any timing, so that the player's motivation to participate in the operation of the operating means can be increased.

In the gaming machine HP1, the gaming machine HP2 is characterized in that the profit to be given to the player is selected from the first benefit or the second benefit according to the operation timing of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine HP2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine HP1, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation of the operating means.

The relationship between the first benefit and the second benefit is not limited at all. For example, it may have a large or small relationship, may have another property, or may have a contradictory relationship.

Here, for example, the profits given to the player in the first privilege and the second privilege are both payouts of prize balls, which are in a relationship of size, compared with the number of payout balls in the first benefit. When there are more payout balls in the 2 benefits, the profits given to the player in the 1st benefit and the 2nd benefit are both transitions to the jackpot game state, and compared to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the 1st benefit. Then, the case where the number of rounds in the second privilege is larger is exemplified.

Further, as another characteristic, for example, while the profit given to the player in the first privilege is a transition to the jackpot gaming state, the profit given to the player in the second privilege is a prize. In the case of a payout of a ball, or while the profit given to the player in the first benefit is an indication of the gaming state, the payout award ball in which the profit given to the player in the second benefit is maximized And the like are exemplified.

In addition, as a conflicting relationship, for example, the profit given to the player in the first privilege is related to the game state after the end of the jackpot game (or the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). Information), the profit given to the player in the second benefit is the state of the game after the jackpot game is over (or information relating to the player's profit such as the number of fluctuations until the next jackpot). For example, the case of destruction is exemplified.

In the gaming machine HP2, based on the selection of the first privilege, passage of the ball in the entrance is restricted when the entrance switching means is in the first state. Gaming machine HP3.

According to the gaming machine HP3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HP2, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the entrance regardless of the state of the entrance switching means, based on the selection of the first privilege. Therefore, when the player does not want the ball to pass through the entrance, it is not necessary to temporarily stop the firing of the ball at the timing (so-called “stop hitting”). it can. In this case, the player can continuously shoot the ball regardless of the state of the entrance switching means, so that the desired game can be executed smoothly.

In the gaming machine HP3, the gaming machine HP4 is controlled so that the game can be continued regardless of the detection time of the ball by the detecting means, based on the selection of the first privilege.

According to the gaming machine HP4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine HP3, by blocking the ball in the detecting means, it is possible to realize the gaming property of restricting the incoming ball.

<Technical idea to secure the shortest time of R game longer than expected from the firing interval>
A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters The ball is provided with a ball switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. The flow-down mode changing means for changing the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the upstream side of the ball entrance is provided, and the flow-down mode changing means is configured to be able to change the ball entrance interval to the ball entrance according to a predetermined rule. Characteristic game machine IKK1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a ball shot to a special winning opening is guided to the special winning opening with almost no ball spill (see, for example, JP-A-2015-177858). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to balance with other gaming machines, a large amount of award balls can be paid out in a short time in the jackpot game, but the progress of the normal game is set to be slow. Has been done. For example, by increasing the interval at which the game balls are fired, the number of times the lottery is drawn is reduced, and the time until a jackpot is won is lengthened.

The interval at which the game balls are fired is directly linked to the ball exit speed in the jackpot game. That is, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to balance the big hit game with a game different from the big hit game in the normal state or the probability variation state, the firing interval of the game ball may be determined, and in that case, There was a problem that the degree of freedom in setting the interval at which the game balls were fired was reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine IKK1, since the flow-down mode changing means changes the pitching interval into the ball entrance, the presence or absence of the flow-down mode changing means is set for each ball entrance, or a predetermined rule is set. By adjusting or the like, it is possible to set a ball entry mode (speed, interval) for each ball entrance. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the interval at which the game balls are fired.

In the gaming machine IKK1, the flow-down mode changing means includes contact means arranged so as to be capable of contacting the game ball, and the contact means is provided while the ball input switching means maintains the first state. A game machine IKK2, which is configured at a position different from a flow path of a game ball entering the ball entrance.

According to the game machine IKK2, in addition to the effect of the game machine IKK1, the contact means does not interfere with the game ball reaching the entrance in the first state of the entrance switching means, so that the entrance of the game ball is reached. The change in the ball entry interval can be limited to the case where the ball entry switching means is switched to the second state.

In the gaming machine IKK1 or IKK2, the flow-down mode changing means is provided with a ball entrance prevention means configured to prevent a game ball entering the ball entrance by the game ball entering the ball entrance. A game machine IKK3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine IKK3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IKK1 or IKK2, the entrance preventing means is configured to prevent the entrance to the entrance by using the game ball entering the entrance. Therefore, the timing at which the ball is prevented from entering the entrance can be associated with the manner of entering the entrance.

In any one of the gaming machines IKK1 to IKK3, the flow-down mode changing means is configured to be able to extend a pitching interval into the ball entrance as compared with a ball firing interval. ..

According to the gaming machine IKK4, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines IKK1 to IKK3, while the interval between the ball entrances to the ball entrances arranged downstream of the flow-down mode changing means is extended, other ball entrances It is possible to prevent the interval of entering the ball from being extended. As a result, for example, while maintaining a short ball entrance interval to the starting opening, to a ball entrance (eg, a large winning opening) arranged downstream of the downflow mode changing means as compared with the ball entering interval to the starting opening. Since the prize winning interval can be extended, it becomes easy to configure a gaming machine that increases the number of prize balls in one jackpot game while shortening the interval at which the special symbol lottery is executed.

In the gaming machine IKK4, the flow-down mode changing means is provided with a second ball inlet that is a ball that flows down the game area and does not enter the ball inlet. Playing machine IKK5.

According to the gaming machine IKK5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine IKK4, it is possible to reduce the frequency of entering the second entrance by causing the second entrance. Therefore, the flow-down mode changing means can be configured by using the second ball inlet which is usually arranged in the game area, and the member can be used in common.

In the gaming machine IKK5, the flow-down mode changing means changes a pitching interval into the ball entrance according to a predetermined rule regardless of the number of balls entering the second ball entrance. ..

According to the gaming machine IKK6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IKK5, it is possible to prevent the change mode of the pitch of the ball entering the ball entrance from changing due to a slight difference in the number of balls entering the second ball entrance. You can

In the gaming machine IKK5, the flow path in which the ball entering the ball entrance flows down and the flow path in which the ball entering the second ball entrance flows down are configured to join together. Game machine IKK7 to be.

According to the gaming machine IKK7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine IKK5, the flow passages are configured to join together, so that the second ball entrance mode and the ball entrance mode can be achieved. Can be associated. Thereby, a complicated game play can be configured.

<Technical ideas related to playability of falling through gates>
A game area in which a game ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a game ball flowing down the game area passes, and a first state in which a game ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance. The game ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance is provided with a ball entrance switching means that can be switched to a second state in which the game ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and the game state can be changed by entering the game ball. The variable ball entering means configured as described above, the first state in which the game ball can enter the variable ball entering means, and the second state in which the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entering means can be changed in state. A game machine J1 characterized by comprising a configured second switching means, wherein the second switching means is configured to be capable of changing the state in accordance with the operation of the incoming ball switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the operation mode during the big hit game of the operating member arranged in the special winning opening is defined as a long-time opening in which a specified number of balls can be entered and a specified number of balls entered. By opening and closing the ball for a short time, it can be switched according to each round to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening in each round and improve the attention to the big winning opening. (For example, see JP-A-2005-181572). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the special winning opening has been recognized as a target for only the game ball to enter, so there is a problem that the degree of improving the attention of the player may be insufficient. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the state of the second switching means for switching between allowing and not allowing the game ball to enter the variable ball means related to the change of the game state is Since it is configured to change in response to the operation of the switching means, the operation of the entrance switching means arranged around the entrance is related to the change in the game state. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the means.

In the gaming machine J1, the incoming ball switching means is capable of changing states in a plurality of modes, and the second switching means is capable of changing states in different modes corresponding to the mode of changing states of the incoming ball switching means. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine J1, if the state change occurs regardless of the state change mode of the incoming ball switching means, the second switching means changes the state, The attention to the switching means can be improved.

It should be noted that various modes are exemplified as the mode of changing the state of the incoming ball switching means. For example, if the length maintained in a predetermined state is different (long or short), the state change interval is different, the number of state changes is different, or until the state change starts (until end). A mode in which the time is different and a combination thereof are exemplified.

In the gaming machine J2, the variable ball entrance means comprises a plurality of variable ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and the second switching means are arranged corresponding to the variable ball entrances. A gaming machine J3, characterized in that the switching member changes its state in response to execution of a different state change as the state change of the ball entrance switching means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, it is possible to improve the attention to the incoming ball switching means.

In the gaming machine J3, the plurality of variable ball entrances include at least a disadvantageous side variable ball entrance that is configured so that the game state can be changed to a side that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball enters. Characteristic game machine J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J3, a disadvantageous side variable entrance is provided, so that when the player enters the variable entrance, the game state changes to the advantage side for the player. Compared with, it is possible to improve the attention to the variable entrance.

In the gaming machine J4, the plurality of variable ball entrances are provided with at least an advantageous side variable ball entrance that is configured so that a game state can be changed to an advantageous side for a player by entering a game ball. When the game ball enters both the advantageous side variable entrance and the disadvantage side variable entrance, the change in the game state is the variable entrance on the side where the game ball entered later in the predetermined period. A gaming machine J5 that is compatible with.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J4, it is possible to obscure the direction of change in the gaming state due to the entry of the gaming ball into the variable entry slot until the end of the predetermined period. The attention to the variable entrance can be maintained during the period.

Note that various modes are exemplified as the predetermined period. For example, if it is a jackpot game, it may be a period of a predetermined round game R or a period until the end of the ending effect.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J5, a driving means is provided, and the driving means is also used as the incoming ball switching means and the second switching means.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5, the control mode of the driving means can be simplified.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 In the gaming machine Z1, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 In the gaming machine Z2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, AK1 to AK3, AKK1 to AKK4, AKK11 to AKK18, AKK20 to AKK23, B1 to B8, BK1 to BK4, C1 to C8, CK1 to CK3, DKK1 to DKK9, DK1 to DK4, D1 to D3. EK1 to EK3, E1 to E3, F1 to F3, FK1 to FK3, FKK1 to FKK5, G1 to G6, GK1 to GK3, H1 to H3, HK1 to HK3, HP1 to HP4, IKK1 to IKK7, J1 to J6 In the gaming machine Z3, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is controlled so as to change the number of balls that enter the special winning opening (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-181572).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the number of prize balls.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the number of prize balls.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 is a game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which the ball flowing down the game area passes, and a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance. Ball entrance switching means for switching between a first state in which the ball can be guided to the ball entrance and a second state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball entrance In a gaming machine provided with a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball, the ball input switching means can be switched to the second state when a specified number of balls have passed through the ball inlet in a predetermined period. Switching drive means controlled by the above, and adjusting means configured to be able to adjust the excess number of balls entering the ball entrance based on the specified number.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the adjusting means is at least the frequency with which the incoming ball switching means is switched to the second state or the period during which the ball is maintained in the second state. One of them can be changed.
The game machine according to the technical idea 3 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the adjusting means is configured to be able to apply a load to the game ball when the state of the incoming ball switching means changes. Loading means is provided, and the loading means is configured to change the load applied to the game ball according to the distance between the ball entrance and the game ball.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the number of prize balls can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the number of prize balls can be improved corresponding to the operation mode of the entrance switching means.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the number of prize balls can be improved by applying a load to the game balls.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
13 game board 81 Third symbol display device (part of the notification means, part of the operation instruction means)
110 main controller (part of changing means, part of period changing means, part of setting means, part of intentional selecting means, part of downflow mode determining means, part of fixed delay preventing means, adjusting means Part of)
300 operation buttons (operation means)
640 2nd entrance (part of entrance, start opening, part of state changing means, lottery entrance)
640a Electric accessory (a part of entrance switching means)
1000a First specific winning opening (part of the winning entrance, first winning entrance)
1140 Projection (part of spacing maintaining means, projection)
1150 Discharge port (part of ball entrance prevention means, part of number change means)
1210 Thin plate member (visualization obstruction means)
1231 Storage channel (part of ball entrance preventing means, part of number changing means, part of post-driving ball entering state switching means, housing means, discharge path, adjusting means)
1231a Guide surface (a part of spacing maintaining means)
1231b Rolling surface (part of gap maintaining means, rolling discharge plate portion)
1235 Projection (part of the spacing maintaining means, projection)
1240 Detection sensor (part of detection means)
1300 Open/close plate (part of the entrance switching means)
1310 Plate (ascending means)
1331 Ball entry prevention unit (part of ball entry prevention means)
1510, 2810 Solenoid (driving means, part of number changing means, operation mode switching means, switching driving means)
1600, 2600 regulating member (part of ball entrance preventing means, part of number changing means, discharge switching means, staying means, part of arrangement suppressing means, part of adjusting means, part of post-passing ball entering switching means )
2251 Second storage flow path (part of ball entrance preventing means, part of number changing means, part of post-driving ball entering state switching means, accommodating means, discharge path)
2255 Second detection sensor (part of detection means)
2255a Second specific winning opening (part of the entrance, second entrance)
2840 Slide plate (a part of entrance switching means)
3181 Additional prize hole (relief entrance hole)
3182 Curved extension plate (rising control means)
3250 Drop delay plate (part of delay means)
3251b Terminal surface (part of the drop hole)
4830 Specified area (part of profit giving means, right generation entrance)
4850 Sorting device (profit switching means, part of operating means)
4860 Specific area detection sensor (part of profit-giving means)
5900 Ball exit adjusting device (starting ball passage switching means)
6930 Interference member (interference means, part of period changing means, part of adjusting means, part of post-driving entrance state switching means, part of operating means, part of arrangement suppressing means)
7260 2nd fall delay plate (part of delay means, variable action part)
8300, 11300 Open/close plate (a part of entrance switching means)
8340 Auxiliary opening/closing member (part of entrance switching means, part of opening state switching means, part of adjusting means, part of load applying means, part of post-driving entrance state switching means)
9111 Auxiliary entrance (part of entrance, part of profit giving means, part of conditional profit giving means)
10112a Detection sensor (a part of detection means)
10180 Intermediate discharge device (part of operation means, part of entrance switching means)
11183 Second additional winning opening (part of entrance)
11190 Opening/closing means (a part of entrance state switching means after driving)
12250 Drop delay plate (part of adjusting means, load applying means)
13811 First discharge path sensor (part of profit entrance, part of variable entrance means, part of variable entrance, variable entrance on advantageous side)
13813 Third discharge route sensor (part of profit entrance, part of variable entrance means, part of variable entrance, disadvantageous side variable entrance)
13840 First switching device (part of second switching means, part of switching member)
13850 Second switching device (part of second switching means, part of switching member)

Claims (3)

A game area in which a ball flows down, a ball entrance through which a ball flowing down the game area passes, a first state in which a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the ball entrance can be guided to the ball entrance, and the ball enters In a gaming machine provided with a ball entrance switching means for switching a ball flowing down from the upstream side of the mouth to a second state in which the ball cannot be guided to the ball entrance, and a detecting means for detecting a ball entering the ball entrance. ,
A switching drive unit that is controlled so as to be switchable to the second state when the specified number of balls have passed through the ball entrance in a predetermined period.
An adjusting device configured to be able to adjust the excess number of balls entering the ball entrance based on the specified number. 2. The game according to claim 1, wherein the adjusting unit is configured to be able to change at least one of a frequency with which the ball entrance switching unit is switched to the second state or a period of being maintained in the second state. Machine. The adjusting means includes a load applying means configured to apply a load to the game ball when the state of the incoming ball switching means changes,
The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the load applying means is configured to change a load applied to the game ball according to a distance between the ball entrance and the game ball.

Images